ts atte 
 
 mre aces 
 Eo Tapep τ ratevaners vein 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 | THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY| 
 
Digitized by the Internet Archive 
 in 2014 
 
 https://archive.org/details/ancientfragmentsOOcore 
 

 

 

 
ANCIENT FRAGMENTS 
 OF THE 
 
 PHCENICIAN, CHALDEAN, EGYPTIAN, TYRIAN, 
 CARTHAGINIAN, INDIAN, PERSIAN, AND OTHER 
 WRITERS ; 
 
 WITH AN INTRODUCTORY DISSERTATION : 
 AND AN INQUIRY INTO THE 
 
 PHILOSOPHY AND TRINITY OF THE ANCIENTS. 
 
 BY ISAAC PRESTON CORY, ESQ. 
 
 FELLOW OF CAIUS COLL. CAMBRIDGE, 
 
 SECOND EDITION. 
 
 
 
 in 5 LS. 
 
 aM IBRARY OF PRINCETON 
 | 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ι 
 
 2a 
 ‘NARY 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 WILLIAM PICKERING. 
 1832, 
 
T. G. White and Co. Printers, 
 Crane Court. 
 
 
 
 
 
x 
 
 AAEA@HI ®IATATHI 
 AAEA®OC 
 XPHCTH XAIPE 
 
 XAIPEIC TAP EN ΧΡΙΟΤΩΙ 
 
a ν \ 
 ; : *% . 
 ὶ 4 
 Γ ἡ 
 \ 
 ΄ 7 } ᾿ 
 τ Δ ae 
 ᾿ Ξ wo 4 
 ev 
 TBA Lah > {se 
 i » — 
 EA) SA MLA ἯΙ ἢ τάμα, 
 
 
 
 ΓΗ χ 8." ° { 
 v 7 p 
 aa 
 
ANCIENT FRAGMENTS. 
 
 PHENICIAN. 
 From Sanchoniatho. 
 CHALDEAN. 
 From Berossus, Abydenus, Megasthenes, Nicholaus Da- 
 mascenus, Hestizeus, Alexander Polyhistor, Eupolemus, 
 Thallus, Ctesias, Diodorus Siculus, Herodotus, Castor, 
 Velleius Paterculus, Aimilius Sura, Plinius and Cicero. 
 DynasTIEs oF THE KINGS or CuHaLp#a, Assyria, ΜΕΡΙᾺ, 
 Persia, THreses, anp Ecyrrt. 
 From Abydenus, Africanus, Eusebius, Syncellus, Castor, 
 Ptolemzus, Ctesias, Eratosthenes, Manetho, Josephus, 
 Diodorus Siculus, Herodotus, Theophilus Antiochenus, 
 Malala, Suidas, Diogenes Laertius, Diczearchus, Arta- 
 panus, Plato, Pomponius Mela and Barhebreus. 
 Eecyprian. 
 From the Obelisks, Manetho, Cheremon, Diodorus Sicu- 
 lus, Lysimachus, Polemo, Ptolemazus Mendesius and 
 Artapanus. 
 TyYRIAn. 
 From Dius and Menander. 
 CAaRTHAGINIAN. 
 From Hanno and Hiempsal. 
 INDIAN. 
 From Megasthenes and Clitarchus. 
 ATLANTIC AND PANCHEHEAN. 
 From Marcellus and Euemerus, 
 
ANCIENT FRAGMENTS. 
 
 Oractes oF ZoROASTER. 
 
 Hermetic, Orpuic, PyrHAGOREAN AND TYRRHENIAN. 
 From the ancient and modern Hermetic Books, Hora- 
 pollo, Chzremon, Orpheus, Hesiodus, Aristophanes, 
 Timotheus, Timzeus Locrus, Plato, Amelius, Onomacri- 
 tus, Ion, Philoponus, Plutarchus, Ocellus, Aristoteles, 
 Suidas and Damascius. 
 
 CHRONOLOGICAL. 
 From Berossus, Seneca, Censorinus and Theon Alex- 
 andrinus. 
 
INTRODUCTORY DISSERTATION. - 
 
 In presenting this collection of ANcIENT Frac- 
 MENTS to the world, some explanation of what is 
 comprehended under that title may not be deemed 
 unnecessary. We are accustomed to regard the 
 Hebrew scriptures, and the Greek and Latin 
 writings, as the only certain records of antiquity : 
 yet there have been other languages, in which 
 have been written the annals and the histories of 
 other nations. Where then are those of Assyria 
 and Babylon, of Persiaand Egypt and Pheenicia, 
 of Tyre and Carthage? Of the literature of all 
 these mighty empires, where are even the remains? 
 It will, no doubt, tend to excite some reflections 
 of a melancholy cast, to look on this small volume 
 as an answer. That all such remains are con- 
 tained in it, I should be unwilling to assert: yet, 
 with some diligence and research, | have not been 
 able to imcrease its size with other fragments, 
 which I could consider sufficiently authenticated. 
 
 It was my wish to have included in this col- 
 lection all the fragments of the earlier Gentile 
 world, which have reached us through the me- 
 
 b 
 
il 
 
 dium of the Greek language. Of the early his- 
 torians of Greece the names only of some have 
 come down to us; whilst of others, such as 
 Eupolemus and Histieus, several very interesting 
 fragments have escaped the general wreck. In 
 the classic ages of their literature, the acquaint- 
 ance of the Greek historians with antiquity was 
 generally confined and obscure: nor was it till 
 the publication of the Septuagint, that they 
 turned their attention to their own antiquities, and 
 to those of the surrounding nations: and for this 
 reason we meet with more certain notices of 
 ancient history in the later, than in the earlier 
 times of Greece. To have drawn a line then; to 
 have inserted the earlier writers in exclusion of 
 the later, would have been to have omitted the 
 more valuable. To have reprinted the fragments 
 of many authors, such as Nicolaus Damascenus, 
 a writer of Damascus, of the Augustan age, would 
 have introduced, with some matter worthy of at- 
 tention, much of little interest. ‘To have selected 
 from them all, the passages relating to ancient 
 times and foreign states, would have been a task 
 as useless as laborious, and would have swelled 
 the collection to a series of volumes. I have 
 therefore, for the most part, excluded the native 
 Greek historians—and every writer of the Au- 
 gustan age and downwards—lI have also omitted 
 all fragments which bear about them the stamp 
 of forgery, or are the productions of Hellenistic 
 
iil 
 
 Jews, or of authors who have had access to the 
 sacred Scriptures, and following the words, throw 
 no additional light upon the subjects; under one 
 or other of which divisions may be classed the 
 Antediluvian books of Enoch, the fragments of 
 Artapanus, the Sibylline Oracles, the Correspon- 
 dence of Solomon and Hiram king of Tyre, the 
 tragedy of Ezekiel in which Moses figures as the 
 hero, with several compositions of a similar de- 
 scription. 
 
 The contents, then, of this volume, are Frag- 
 ments which have been translated from foreign 
 languages into Greek; or have been quoted or 
 transcribed by Greeks from foreign authors ; or 
 have been written in the Greek language by 
 foreigners who have had access to the archives of 
 their own countries. Yet to render the collection 
 more useful, and as it were a manual to the Chro- 
 nologist and Mythological Antiquarian, I have 
 added by way of Supplement such fragments and 
 extracts as appear to have descended from more 
 ancient sources, though they are now to be found 
 only in the works of Greek or Latin writers. 
 Some of these are merely illustrations of the 
 fragments, or contain detached chronological no- 
 tices, or such other curious information as may 
 well be deemed worthy of a place. Thus I have 
 endeavoured to comprise, in the volume, all the 
 genuine relics of antiquity which precede the era 
 of Grecian history ; and which lie so scattered 
 
ΙΝ 
 
 among the folios, chiefly of the Fathers and the 
 Philosophers of the lower empire, as to be inac- 
 cessible to the Antiquarian, unless in the neigh- 
 bourhood of some large public library. 
 
 Miscellaneous as such a collection might be 
 at first supposed, it will be found to resolve 
 itself into two subjects; the early History, and 
 the ancient Theological Systems of the world. 
 In the followimg pages I have endeavoured to 
 present a sketch of both; not with a view of 
 entering into the details, but rather as a method 
 of connecting the fragments with one another, 
 to facilitate an examination of their contents, 
 by directing the attention successively to those 
 great landmarks which stand prominently forth 
 amidst what might otherwise be deemed a wild, 
 pathless and interminable ; and to enable the 
 reader, by following the same order of perusal, 
 to elicit something lke a regular continued nar- 
 rative. In the Scriptures we have a brief but 
 authenticated account of the earliest ages: but 
 among the heathen writers, with the exception of 
 some few very valuable historical fragments, we 
 have little more than a collection of allegories and 
 legendary tales. Upon examination, however, 
 most of these legends, notwithstanding their ob- 
 scurity, will be found to contain references to those 
 grand primeval events whose memory was retained 
 among every people upon earth : and for the com- 
 
Vv 
 
 memoration of which were ordained so many of 
 the ceremonies and mysteries of the ancients. 
 
 From such traditions, handed down for ages 
 before they were committed to writing, we might 
 expect but little aid. Indeed in all the re- 
 searches of the antiquarian, conjecture must very 
 generally supply the place of science. Yet, by 
 pursuing a proper method of investigation, we 
 may approximate to truth, and frequently illus- 
 trate circumstances obscurely hinted at in Scrip- 
 ture, and even occasionally fill up the gaps of 
 history, by supplying events which have been 
 omitted by the sacred writers as unconnected 
 with the immediate objects under their consi- 
 -deration. 
 
 Persons, Events, and Dates in History, and 
 Systems in Theology, are the objects to be ex- 
 amined and ascertained. And where the subject 
 under investigation can be so divided, that the 
 truth must lie among some few plausible hypo- 
 thesis, which can be a priori, and at once laid 
 down: by collecting all the evidence that can be 
 had, and examining separately, and excluding 
 successively each of these hypothesis which shall 
 be found inconsistent with that evidence, we 
 may contract the circle of conjecture, in some 
 cases, till but one hypothesis is left; which one 
 must be the truth, and is thus negatively rendered 
 matter of demonstration. In other cases want of 
 
vi 
 
 evidence may leave room for several different 
 opinions, none of which can really be refuted, 
 though one may often be more plausible than an- 
 other. 
 
 Mr. Faber, in his admirable work on the 
 Pagan Idolatry, has collected and separately ex- 
 amined all the different systems of the Heathen 
 Mythology ; and has shown, ‘that there is such 
 a singular, minute, and regular accordance among 
 them, not only in what is obvious and natural, 
 but also in what is arbitrary and circumstantial, 
 both in fanciful speculations and in artificial ob- 
 servances, as to render untenable every other 
 hypothesis than this—* that they must all have 
 originated from some common source.’ 
 
 Having thus shown their common origin, he 
 enumerates three hypothesis as the only three 
 on which, he conceives, the common origination 
 of the various systems of Paganism can be ac- 
 counted for: 
 
 1. Either all nations agreed peaceably to borrow from one, 
 subsequent to their several settlements. 
 
 2. Or all nations, subsequent to their several settlements, 
 were compelled by arms to adopt the superstition of one. 
 
 3. Or all nations were once assembled together in a single 
 place and in a single community ; where they adopted a 
 corrupt form of religion, which they afterwards re- 
 spectively carried with them into the lands that they 
 colonized. 
 
 After examining at length and shewing the utter 
 
Vil 
 
 impossibility of maintaining either the first or 
 second of these hypothesis, he concludes that 
 the third only can be the truth.* 
 
 In the same manner we may ascertain the re- 
 gion from which mankind originally dispersed. 
 Both in ancient and modern times the Greeks have 
 been accused of a kind of plagiarism, which was 
 the prevailing custom of every nation upon earth. 
 Egypt and India, and Pheenicia, no less than 
 Greece, have appropriated to themselves, and 
 assigned within their own territorial limits, the 
 localities of the grand events of primeval history, 
 with the birth and achievements of the Gods and 
 Heroes, the Deluge, the origin of the arts and 
 the civilization of mankind. And their claims 
 have found more able supporters, only because 
 they have not been so obviously liable to refuta- 
 tion. Yet by rejecting each country, whose 
 claims rest upon no better foundation than its own 
 local histories, and retaining those only, whose 
 pretensions are substantiated by the concurrent 
 testimony of the rest; it may be shown, inde- 
 pendently of Scripture, that the primitive settle- 
 ments of mankind were in such places, and at- 
 tended with such circumstances, as the Scripture 
 instructs us was the case. 
 
 * To these, perhaps, may be added a fourth, viz. that the 
 superstition became general, partly by peaceful communication, 
 and partly by force of arms: though the fulness of the evidence 
 is such as to render this equally untenable with the others. 
 
Vill 
 
 Of the transactions previous to the Deluge 
 there are but few and faint memorials among the 
 heathens. One of the most authentic may be 
 found in the remains of the Phcenician History 
 of Sanchoniatho, who is considered to be the 
 most ancient writer of the heathen world. In 
 what age he wrote is uncertain: but his history 
 was composed in the Pheenician language, and 
 its materials collected from the archives of the 
 Pheenician cities. It was translated into Greek 
 by Philo Byblius, and for the preservation of 
 these fragments we are indebted to the care of 
 Eusebius. 
 
 The Cosmogony* I shall have occasion to re- 
 fer to hereafter: as one of the most ancient, it is 
 extremely valuable, and as it speaks more plainly 
 than the rest, it affords a key to their interpre- 
 tation. 
 
 The Generations contain many very curious 
 passages. In the first} is an allusion to the fall: 
 in the second Genus may be Cain: after which 
 we lose the traces of similarity : at the fifth { there 
 is an interruption. But taking up the thread of 
 inquiry, at the end, in Taautus or Thoyth,§ we 
 may recognize Athothis,|| the second king of Egypt, 
 the Hermes Trismegistus, who again{] appears as 
 the adviser of Cronus. His predecessor Misor 
 
 * Delis 0)». Oe § p.:9. 
 || See also Manetho, p. 94; Eratosthenes, p. 8.  p. 10. 
 
1X 
 
 then corresponds with Mizraim, the first king of 
 Egypt, the Menes and Mines of the dynasties.* 
 In the preceding generation is Amynus, Amon, or 
 Ham, the same with the Cronus,} of what by the 
 historian is supposed to bea different but contem- 
 porary line. An ascent higher we find, Agrus, 
 the husbandman, who was worshipped in Phe- 
 nicia as the greatest of the gods: he corresponds 
 with Noah, the Ouranus of the other line, whose 
 original name was Epigeus or Autochthon. 
 
 Sanchoniatho seems to have been a very dili- 
 gent inquirer, and intimates at the conclusion { 
 that the generations contain the real history of 
 those early times, stripped of the fictions and 
 allegories with which it had been obscured by the 
 son of Thabion, the first hierophant of Phoenicia. 
 That such is the case, we are assured by Philo 
 Byblius, in the remarks on Sanchoniatho with 
 which he prefaces his translation of the work. 
 The passage also informs us that the history thus 
 disguised was handed down to Isiris, the brother 
 of Chna the first Pheenician, apparently alluding 
 to Mizraim the brother of Canaan. 
 
 It is very remarkable that he has placed these 
 characters in the true order of succession, though 
 in all the traditions of the heathens they are ge- 
 nerally confounded with one another. It is also 
 remarkable that Sanchoniatho is almost the only 
 
 * See pp. 8, 84, 94, 139. + pp. 8, 9. Tp. 16. 
 
Χ 
 
 heathen writer upon antiquities who makes no 
 direct mention of the deluge, though several ob- 
 scure allusions to it may be found in the course 
 of the fragment. Were we assured of his silence 
 upon the point in the parts of his work that have 
 been lost, the omission might still be accounted 
 for from his avowed determination to suppress 
 what he considered merely allegorical, for he 
 would find the traditions of the deluge so inti- 
 mately blended with those relating to the creation, 
 that in endeavouring to disengage the truth from 
 the fable he might easily be induced to suppose 
 that they related to the same event. 
 
 For explanation of his fragment upon the 
 mystical sacrifice of the Pheenicians,* I must 
 refer to the very curious dissertations by Bryant} 
 and Mr. Faber.{ Sanchoniatho wrote also a 
 history of the serpent, a single fragment§ of 
 which is preserved by Eusebius. 
 
 In the fragments of Berossus again we have 
 perhaps some few traces of the antediluvian world. 
 Like Sanchoniatho, Berossus seems to have com- 
 posed his work with a serious regard for truth. 
 He was a Babylonian by birth, and flourished in 
 the reign of Alexander the Great, and resided for 
 some years at Athens. Asa priest of Belus, he 
 possessed every advantage which the records of 
 
 ἘΠ’ 1G; + Mythology vi. 323. 
 + Pag. Idol. Lib. II. ς. 8. § p. 17. 
 
ΧΙ 
 
 the temple and the learning and traditions of the 
 Chaldeans could afford. He appears to have 
 sketched his history of the earlier times from the 
 representations upon the walls of the temple.* 
 From written and traditionary knowledge he must 
 have learned several points too well authenticated 
 to be called in question; and correcting the one 
 by the other, and at the same time blending them 
 as usual with Mythology, he has produced the 
 strange history before us. 
 
 The first fragment preserved by Alexander 
 Polyhistor ¢ is extremely valuable, and contains 
 a store of very curious information. The first 
 book of the history apparently opens naturally 
 enough with a description of Babylonia. Then 
 referring to the paintings, the author finds the 
 first series a kind of preface to the rest. All men 
 of every nation appear assembled in Chaldza :{ 
 among them is introduced a personage who is 
 represented as their instructor in the arts and 
 sciences, and informing them of the events which 
 had previously taken place. Unconscious that 
 Noah is represented under the character of 
 Oannes, Berossus describes him, from the hiero- 
 glyphical delineation, as a being literally com- 
 pounded of a fish and a man, and as passing the 
 natural, instead of the diluvian night in the ocean, 
 with other circumstances indicative of his cha- 
 racter and life. 
 
 * See pp. 22, 24. Tp. 21. tp. 22. 
 
ΧΙ 
 
 The instructions of the Patriarch are detailed 
 in the next series of paintings. In the first* of 
 which, I conceive, the Chaos is pourtrayed by 
 the confusion of the limbs of every kind of animal: 
 the second{ represents the creation of the uni- 
 verse: the third the formation. of mankind: others 
 again that of animals, and of the heavenly bodies. 
 
 The second book{ appears to have compre- 
 hended the history of the ante-diluvian world: 
 and of this the two succeeding fragments{ seem 
 to have been extracts. The historian, as usual, 
 has appropriated the history of the world to 
 Chaldea. He finds nine persons, probably re- 
 presented as kings, preceding Noah, who is again 
 introduced under the name Xisuthrus, and he 
 supposes that the representation was that of the 
 first dynasty of the Chaldean kings. From the 
 universal consent of history and tradition he was 
 well assured that Alorus or Orion, the Nimrod 
 of the Scriptures, was the founder of Babylon 
 and the first king : consequently he places him at 
 the top, and Xisuthrus follows as the tenth. The 
 destruction of the records by Nabonasar|| left 
 him to fill up the intermediate names as he could: 
 and who are inserted, is not easy so to determine.{] 
 
 *p. 24. “tp, 25. , Tp. 26. §pp. 30,82. ΠΣ 
 
 q In the Syriac Chronicle of Bar-Hebrzeus, the names in the 
 catalogue are given to certain recluses of the line of Seth, called 
 the Sons of God, who lived upon Mount Hermon, and afterwards 
 apostatized and became the fathers of the Giants. 
 
xili 
 
 Berossus has given also a full and accurate 
 description of the deluge,* which is wonderfully 
 consonant with the Mosaic account.” We have 
 also a similar account, or it may be an epitome 
 of the same} from the Assyrian history of Abyde- 
 nus, who was a disciple of Aristotle, and a 
 copyist from Berossus. I have given also a small 
 extract} from the Fragments of Nicholaus Da- 
 mascenus, relative to the deluge and the ark, 
 whose wreck is said by him as well as Berossus, 
 Chrysostom, and other writers, to have remained 
 upon Ararat even at the very: time in which they 
 wrote. 
 
 Mankind appear to have dwelt some time 
 in Armenia, and the Patriarch allotted to his 
 descendants the different regions of the earth, 
 with commands to separate into distinct commu- 
 ‘nities. His injunctions, however, were disobeyed, 
 and great numbers, perhaps all the human race, 
 started from Armenia in a body, and, according 
 to the Scriptures, journied westward, but accord- 
 ing to Berossus, travelled by a circuitous route 
 to the plains of Shinar. _ By combining the two 
 narratives, we may conclude that they followed 
 the winding course of the Euphrates, till they 
 halted upon those celebrated plains, where the 
 enterprising spirit of Nimrod tempted him to as- 
 
 *nu26. + p. 37. tp. 49. 
 
XIV 
 
 pire to the dominion of the world, and to found 
 the Tower and City of Babel as the metropolis of 
 his future universal empire. 
 
 Upon the Tower of Babel and the events con- 
 nected with it, will be found some very interest- 
 ing fragments from Abydenus,* from Hestizeus,f 
 a very ancient Greek writer, from the Babylonian 
 Sibyl,{ and from Eupolemus.§ I have added also 
 a curious extract from the Sibylline oracles.|| In 
 these fragments are detailed the erection of the 
 Tower, the dispersion of its contrivers, and the 
 confusion of the languages; with the additional 
 circumstances of the violent destruction of the 
 building, and the Titanian war, which forms so 
 remarkable an event in all traditions of the 
 heathens. 
 
 Previously to the erection of the Tower, men 
 appear very generally to have apostatized from 
 the patriarchal worship. About this time a fur- 
 ther deviation from the truth took place; and 
 upon the first and more simple corruption was 
 engrafted an elaborate system of idolatry. Some 
 
 Des ΤΡ. Ὁ. ΡΠ» Sp. 57. κα ipod. 
 
 4 Upon the rebuilding of Babylon, the Tower was completed 
 most probably on the original plan. It is described by Hero- 
 dotus as a pyramid of eight steps, about seven hundred feet high. 
 Its ruins, which are still known upon the spot as the Birs Nem- 
 brod, or the tower of Nimrod, are described by Sir R. K. Porter, 
 as a prodigious pile of unburnt bricks cemented with mud and 
 reeds in horizontal layers, still rising to the enormous height of 
 about two hundred and fifty feet. 
 
XV 
 
 account of these deviations will be found in the 
 extracts from Epiphanius, Cedrenus, and the 
 Paschal chronicle.* What is mentioned under 
 the name of Barbarism, was probably the pri- 
 meval patriarchal worship. It was succeeded by 
 a corrupted form of superstition which is known 
 among the ancients under the name of Scuthism, 
 or Scythism, which was most prevalent from the 
 flood to the building of the Tower. The new 
 corruption, at that time introduced by Nimrod, 
 was denominated lonism,t or Hellenism: and 
 both are still flourishing in the East under the well- 
 known appellations of Brahmenism and Budd- 
 hism ; whose priests appear to have continued in 
 an uninterrupted succession from the Brahmanes 
 and Germanes, the philosophical sects of India 
 mentioned by Megasthenes { and Clitarchus.§ 
 
 By the introduction of a more degenerate 
 superstition, Nimrod appears to have aimed at 
 the establishment of an universal monarchy in 
 himself and his descendants, of which Babylon 
 was to have been the metropolis, and the Tower, 
 the central temple of their idolatries. All who 
 
 * pp. 53, 55, 56. 
 
 ‘+ Most probably derived from Ione: for the worship of the 
 great Goddess, or universal Mother, was then introduced, as well 
 as Idolatry. It signifies also a Dove, which was the standard of 
 the Assyrian Empire. 
 
 tp. 224. § p. 229. 
 
xvi 
 
 attended him seem to have entered into the pro- 
 ject, so far as he might have thought proper to 
 divulge it, and to have assisted in the erection of 
 the tower and city. But subsequent events shew 
 that the proposed form of government and system 
 of theology, though asquiesced in by the majority, 
 did not command universal approbation. And 
 the whole project was marred by the miraculous 
 interposition of the Almighty. 
 
 What concurring circumstances might have 
 operated to the dispersion, we have no clue to in 
 the narrative of Moses. He mentions the mira- 
 culous confusion of the languages, and that the 
 Lord scattered the people abroad from thence 
 upon the face of all the earth ; and they left off to 
 build the city. But if we may credit the heathen 
 accounts above referred to, with which the 
 Hindoo, and indeed almost every remnant of 
 traditionary lore concur ; a schism, most probably 
 both of a political and religious nature, was the 
 result ; a bitter war was carried on, or at least a 
 bloody field was fought; from which the Scuths, 
 defeated and excommunicated by their brethren, 
 betook themselves, in haughty independence, to 
 the mountains of Cashgar and the north:* whilst 
 some violent and supernatural catastrophe, by 
 the overthrow of the Tower, completed the dis- 
 persion. 
 
 * See Faber, Lib. VI. ς. 4... 
 
XVil 
 
 The Scythic nations became very generally 
 Nomade, but sometimes settled in various parts. 
 Of what family they were has been a subject of 
 long and intricate dispute. The ancient chrono- 
 logists have, almost without exception, supposed 
 them of the race of Japhet, the eldest son of Noah: 
 that they were the sons of Cush has also been in- 
 sisted on with great learning and ingenuity.* But 
 if all the nations, or even the upper classes of those 
 nations, which bear the name, be the sons of 
 Cush, one-third of the present human race must 
 be the descendants of that patriarch. Indeed, 
 before the introduction of Ionism, Epiphanius 
 and others appear to have included all mankind 
 under the name of Scuths. The first apostacy 
 might have been introduced by Cush, and its 
 
 * The term Scuth, which, with the prefix, is supposed to be 
 the same as Cuth or Cush, the root of the names Chusas 
 Chasas Cassians Cuszeans or Chruszans, Chusdim Chasdim 
 or Chaldzans, Cotti or Goths and many others, appears too 
 general for a patronymic. All the northern nations were Scuthic, 
 the Scuths of Touran. The Scuths of Iran occupied the entire 
 Asiatic Ethiopia, containing the Iranian territories of the As- 
 syrian Empire, extending from the Euphrates to the Indus, and 
 from the Caspian to the Ocean. African Ethiopia or Nubia with 
 the adjoining territories was also Cuthic. There were Indo- 
 Scythe, Celto-Scythe, and even Ionic-Scythe. The Belge in 
 Gaul, the Pelasgi in Greece, the Sacas or Saxons, the Pelestim 
 Philistim and Pheenicians, the Sarmans Sarmatians and Germans 
 were Scuths. In short, the term is to be found in every corner 
 of the earth, and may be traced in America and in Lapland, as 
 well as in China and Japan. 
 
 d 
 
XVill 
 
 followers have borne his name; which the suc- 
 ceeding heresy of Nimrod could not obliterate. 
 
 The Scythian nations of Touran and the 
 North were generally addicted to the Scythic su- 
 perstition ; and whenever they rolled back the 
 tide of war upon their ancient rivals; the idols 
 temples and cities were the objects upon which 
 they satiated their revenge. They were esteemed 
 excommunicated, and of the Giant race, Ne-— 
 phelim, Rephaim and Anakim. The Scuths of 
 Tran were also of the Giant race, with Nimrod 
 as their chief. Of the Titanian war there appears 
 to be a double aspect. When the Scuths of 
 Touran are the Giants, the war between them 
 and the Ionim is the subject of the legend ; and 
 they are the Giants cast out into Cimmerian 
 darkness, and buried under mountains. The 
 _ other view presents both parties conjointly before 
 the schism, as the Nephelim, Apostates or Giants, 
 engaged in carrying on the war against Heaven 
 itself. And in these accounts we find more fre- 
 quent allusions to the Tower and its supernatural 
 overthrow. 
 
 The catastrophe at Babel completed the dis- 
 persion. On the division of the earth and plant- 
 ing of the nations, there are some very curious 
 notices extant.* But whether Nimrod and his 
 immediate adherents survived, and retained pos- 
 
 * pp. 50, 52. 
 
ΧΙΧ 
 
 session of Babylon, or transferred their seat of 
 government to Nineyeh and founded the great 
 Iranian empire, or whether that empire and city 
 were founded by Assur and the sons of Shem, is 
 still a subject of dispute. We find Nimrod, how- 
 ever, under the well-known title of Alorus, at the 
 head of the two Chaldean dynasties,* mentioned 
 above: but these appear rather to refer to the 
 antediluvian patriarchs than to the proper kings 
 of Chaldza. 
 
 The first dynasty of Chaldean Kings} is 
 placed by almost all chronologists as the first 
 Iranian dynasty, that of Nimrod under the name 
 of Evechius, and his immediate descendants. 
 Eyexius is also placed by Polyhistor as the first 
 Chaldean king.§ The dynasty of the Arabian 
 kings of Chaldza|| is placed by Eusebius, Syn- 
 cellus and others, as well as by Berossus, next in 
 the order of succession. They have likewise been 
 supposed to be a Scythic nation, which broke in 
 upon the empire from the Scythian settlements 
 of Cashgar, and obtained possession either of the 
 entire empire, or only of the city of Babylon, 
 during the period of its desolation, with the 
 plains of Shinar and the country round the head 
 of the Persian gulf, from whence they were ex- 
 pelled, and discharged themselves upon Palestine 
 
 _ * pp. 30, 32. See also p. 170. fT pa Gr. 
 tp. 59. § p. 68. 
 
XX 
 
 as the Palli or Philistines, and upon Egypt as 
 the Hycsos or Shepherd Kings.* 
 
 Next in succession, according to Eusebius 
 and Syncellus, or perhaps contemporary with 
 the preceding, came the long line of the great 
 dynasty of the Assyrian Kings, who held the 
 empire of the world for ten or twelve centuries, 
 till their dominion was wrested from them by 
 the Medes in the time of Thonus Concolerus, 
 the Sardanapalus of the Greek historians. The 
 different catalogues of the great Assyrian suc- 
 cession that are extant, will be found among the 
 Dynasties.| The overthrow of the Assyrian em- 
 pire was followed by several years of universal 
 anarchy, bloodshed and revolution. And it is as- 
 certained, that it was during this scene of con- 
 fusion that Jonah was sent upon his mission to 
 stop its progress at Nineveh. 
 
 Arbaces, the leader of the Median insurrec- 
 tion, though he succeeded in throwing off the 
 Assyrian yoke, appears to have failed in his at- 
 tempt to establish his own sovereignty : nor was 
 the Median kingdom fully consolidated till the 
 reign of Deioces. The catalogues of the Median 
 kings will be found among the Dynasties. 
 Under Phraortes and Cyaxares the Medes ex- 
 tended their dominion over great part of Asia, but 
 under Astyages, who was defeated and captured 
 
 *p. 169. + From p. 69. 
 
ΧΧΙ 
 
 by Cyrus, the kingdom merged in the Persian 
 empire. 
 
 The Babylonians acquired a temporary inde- 
 pendence at the fall of the Assyrian empire, but 
 after two or three short reigns they were subdued 
 by Senecherib.* Syria also became an inde- 
 pendent kingdom, and prospered for a time, till 
 again reduced under the Assyrian yoke. Persia 
 at the same time arose, and alone maintained its 
 independence against the growing power of the 
 Medes and the new Assyrian dynasty, till the 
 successes of Cyrus raised it above them all, and 
 vested the empire of the world in the Persian 
 race. 
 
 The Assyrian empire revived under Nabo- 
 nasar, supposed to be the same with the Salma- 
 nasar of the Scriptures. Of this dynasty three 
 several catalogues}+ will be found, the Ecclesi- 
 astical and Astronomical canons preserved by 
 Syncellus, and the celebrated canon of Ptolemezus, 
 besides some other notices of the successors of 
 Nabonasar, among the supplemental Chaldzan 
 fragments. The first princes of the line appear to 
 have fixed their residence at Nineveh, and among 
 them we may recognize the Tiglath Pileser, 
 Senecherib, and Esar Haddon of the Scriptures. 
 Their race appears to have terminated in Saracus, 
 another Sardanapalus. Nabopollasar, a success- 
 
 * pp. 61, 63. + p. 78. 
 
XXll 
 
 ful rebel, began the last line of the Assyrian and 
 Chaldean monarchs.* He transferred the seat of 
 empire to Babylon, and in his reign, his cele- 
 brated son, Nebuchadnezzar, extended his con-~ 
 quests over the bordering kingdoms of the north 
 and west, by the reduction of Syria, Pheenicia, 
 Judea, Egypt, and Arabia; an accurate account 
 of which is transmitted by Berossus.{ On the 
 death of his father, Nebuchadnezzar succeeded 
 to the throne. Concerning him we have several 
 very interesting fragments from Berossus,{ and 
 one from Megasthenes.{ In these are detailed 
 the splendor of his works at Babylon, its cele- 
 brated walls, and brazen gates ; its temples, pa- 
 laces, and hanging gardens. The prophesy of 
 Nebuchadnezzar,{ probably alludes to the public 
 notification of Daniel’s interpretation of his vision. 
 His successors, till the overthrow of the empire 
 by Cyrus, are given by Berossus and Megas- 
 thenes, and will be found also among the dynas- 
 ties. || Among his four immediate successors we 
 must find Belshazzar, and Darius the Mede. The 
 latter has been generally supposed to be Nabon- 
 nedus, though some have endeavoured to identify 
 him with Cyaxares. The conquest of the Me- 
 dian, Chaldean, and Assyrian dominions by 
 Cyrus, grandson of Astyages, and the nephew of 
 Nebuchadnezzar, brings down the history to the 
 * p. 59. +p. 87, 38. tp. 44. 
 § p. 45. || pp. 40, 45, 80, 81. 
 
XxXill 
 
 authentic records of Grecian literature. The 
 Persian line, the successors of Cyrus, will be 
 found in several different places, both among the 
 Chaldean and Egyptian fragments. 
 
 The intense interest which Egyptian history 
 has excited, from the discovery of the interpreta- 
 tion of the Hieroglyphics, has induced me to 
 spare no labour or expence in rendering this part 
 of the work as perfect as circumstances would 
 allow. . 
 
 The Laterculus or Canon of the Kings of 
 Thebes,* was compiled from the archives of that 
 city, by Eratosthenes, the librarian of Ptolemzus 
 Philadelphus. It is followed by the Old Egyptian 
 Chronicle, with a Latin version of the same, 
 from the Excerpta Barbara, and another from the 
 Armenian Chronicle of Eusebius: they contain 
 a summary of the dynasties of Egypt. To these 
 succeed the Egyptian dynasties of Manetho,t 
 whose introductory letter to king Ptolemzus, 
 given in a subsequent page,{ explains the nature 
 of his work, and the materials from whence it 
 was compiled. I have placed the six different 
 versions of the Dynasties of Manetho that are 
 extant confronting each other. ‘The Canon of the 
 kings of Egypt from Josephus,{ I have compiled 
 from the historical fragments of Manetho :|| and 
 
 * p. 84. + p. 94. tp. 171. § p. 136. 
 || pp. 170 and 178. 
 
XXIV 
 
 1 have thrown it into the form of a Canon to faci- 
 litate comparison. I have next given a very im- 
 portant Canon,* the first part of which, from 
 Mestraim to the end of the seventeenth dynasty, 
 is preserved by Syncellus only: from the begin- 
 ning of the eighteenth it is continued also in the 
 fragments of Eusebius: and from hence to the con- 
 clusion, four different versions of it will be found. 
 To these are added the Canons of all the kings 
 of Egypt, mentioned by Diodorus Siculus} and 
 Herodotus.{ They were originally compiled by 
 Scaliger, but I have corrected them and given 
 them with several very important additions in 
 the original words of the authors, instead of in the 
 words of Scaliger himself. They are followed by 
 the Canon of Theophilus Antiochenus.§ And 
 after several very important chronological ex- 
 tracts|| upon the antiquities of Egypt, I have com- 
 pleted the Dynasties, with a Canon of the early 
 Egyptian, Chaldean, and Assyrian Kings, from 
 the Syriac Chronicle of Bar-hebreeus:4] which I 
 have placed beside each other as they are syn- 
 chonized by that author, and given them in the 
 English letters corresponding to the Syriac, in- 
 stead of adopting the Latinized names of the 
 translators. 
 
 I have, therefore, comprised in this part of 
 
 #p. 139, }p.148, $154. pp, 158: 
 ||». 159. 4 p. 170. 
 
XXV 
 
 the work, no less than nineteen catalogues of the 
 Egyptian kings, with all the various readings 
 that occur in the different versions of the same. 
 They have been compiled with the greatest care, 
 and I have purposely abstained from all reference 
 to the Hieroglyphics, that I might not be misled 
 by any preconceived opinion. 
 
 Ata time, when indefatigable research is every 
 day bringing to light new and interesting circum- 
 stances, it would be absurd to attempt to give 
 any thing but the roughest outline of Egyptian 
 history. I shall merely observe, then, that after 
 the dispersion from Babel, the children of Miz- 
 raim went off to Egypt, of which they appear to 
 have continued some time in undisturbed posses- 
 sion. Menes Misor or Mestraim, the Mizraim 
 of the Scriptures, and planter of the nation, is 
 naturally placed as the first sovereign of the united 
 realm, at the head of all the catalogues. -And 
 perhaps the dominion of Athothis was equally 
 extensive; for his name occurs in the Laterculus 
 of Eratosthenes, and as the Thoth or Taautus of 
 Sanchoniatho. After him the country seems to 
 have been divided into several independent mo- 
 narchies, some of whose princes may perhaps be 
 found among the fourteen first dynasties. That the 
 country was so divided, and that the first dynasties 
 were not considered successive by the ancients, we 
 have the authority of Artapanus* and Eusebius. 
 
 *'p. 162. 
 
ΧΧΥῚ 
 
 The first historical fragment of Manetho,* 
 from Josephus, gives an account of the invasion 
 and expulsion of a race of foreigners, who were 
 styled Hycsos or Shepherd kings; whose princes 
 are identified with the seventeenth dynasty of all 
 the Canons except that given by Syncellus as the 
 canon of Africanus, in which they are placed as 
 the fifteenth. Of what family they were, whence 
 they came, and to what country they retired, have 
 been the subjects of almost as many hypotheses 
 as writers; 1 shall not venture a remark upon a 
 problem, of which there is every reason shortly 
 to expect a satisfactory solution. Josephus and 
 the Fathers confound them with the Israelites, 
 who appear rather to be referred to by the second 
 fragment} as the lepers, who were so cruelly ill- 
 treated by the Egyptians, and afterwards laid 
 waste the country, assisted by a second invasion 
 of the Shepherds. To these fragments I have 
 subjoined six{ other very curious notices of the 
 exodus of the Israelites and the final expulsion of 
 the Shepherds ; which events appear to have been 
 connected with one another, as well as with the 
 emigration of the Danaan colonies to Greece, 
 not only in time, but by circumstances of a poli- 
 tical nature,{ and to have occurred during the 
 sovereignty of the eighteenth dynasty. Tacitus 
 has also noticed the exodus, but in terms evi- 
 
 *p.171. tp.176. fp. 182. § See also the note to p. 166. 
 
XXVll 
 
 dently copied from some of those which I have 
 given : we have but few and scanty notices of the 
 kings of Egypt, even in Diodorus and Hero- 
 dotus. Its conquest by Nebucchadnezzar is re- 
 lated by Berossus,* and after two or three tem- 
 porary gleams of independence, it sunk at length 
 into a province of the Persian empire, and from 
 that day to the present, according to the denun- 
 ciation of the prophet,t Egypt has been the 
 basest of kingdoms, and under the yoke of 
 strangers. 
 
 The Tyrian Annals are fragments which were 
 quoted by Josephus from the lost histories of 
 Dius and Menander. They agree perfectly with 
 the scriptural accounts, and furnish some par- 
 ticulars in addition. The correspondence of 
 Solomon and Hiram, the foundation of Carthage, 
 and the invasion, conquests, and repulse of Sal- 
 manasar; the siege of Tyre by Nebuchadnessar, 
 and its subsequent government under judges, are 
 historical additions of great interest and import- 
 ance. 
 
 The Periplus of Hanno is an account of the 
 earliest voyage of discovery extant. It was taken 
 from an original and apparently official document 
 which was suspended in the temple of Saturn, at 
 Carthage. Falconer has edited it as a separate 
 
 * p.-87. + Ezek. 29. 
 
XXVlil 
 
 work, and gives two dissertations on it; the first, 
 explanatory of its contents; and the second, a 
 refutation of Dodwell’s reflections on its authen- 
 ticity. I have followed Falconer both in his text 
 and translation. With respect to its age, Fal- 
 coner agrees with Bougainville in referring it to 
 the sixth century before the Christian era. 
 
 The Periplus is prefaced by a few lines, re- 
 citing a decree of-the Carthaginians, relative 
 to the voyage and its objects: and is then 
 continued by the commander, or one of his 
 companions, as a narrative, which commences 
 from the time the fleet had cleared the Straits of 
 Gibraltar. Bougainville has given a chart of the 
 voyage, which may be found, together with the 
 corresponding maps of Ptolemeus and D’ Anville, 
 in Falconer’s treatise. It may be sufficient, how- 
 ever, to remark that Thymiaterium, the first of 
 the colonies planted by Hanno, occupies a posi- 
 tion very nearly, perhaps precisely the same with 
 that of the present commercial city of Mogadore. 
 The promontory of Soloeis corresponds with Cape 
 Bojador, nearly opposite to the Canaries. Cari- 
 contichos, Gytte, Acra, Melitta and Arambys 
 are placed between Cape Bojador and the Rio 
 d’Ouro which is supposed to be the Lixus. 
 Cerne is laid down as the island of Arguin under 
 the southern Cape Blanco: the river Chretes 
 perhaps is the St. John, and the next large 
 river mentioned is the Senegal. Cape Palmas 
 
ΧΧΙΧ 
 
 and Cape Three Points, are supposed to corres- 
 pond respectively with the Western and Southern 
 Horns, and some island in the bight of Benin, 
 with that of Gorille. Vossius, however, sup- 
 poses the Western Horn to be Cape Verd, and 
 the Southern, Cape Palmas, in which case the 
 Sierra Leone will answer to the Ochema Theon 
 the Chariot of the Gods. 
 
 The description of the Troglodyte, as men 
 of a different form or appearance, may imply a 
 change from the Moresco to the Negro race. 
 Some passages, quoted by Falconer from Bruce’s 
 travels, explain the extraordinary fires and nightly 
 merriment which alarmed the voyagers, as cus- 
 toms common among many of the negro tribes, 
 and which had repeatedly fallen within the scope 
 of his own observations. The Gorille are sup- 
 posed to be large monkeys or wild men as the 
 Name ἄνθρωποι ἄγριοι May in fact import. 
 
 The Periplus is followed bya strange account 
 of the African settlements, from the books of 
 Hiempsal king of Numidia, preserved by Sallust. 
 
 Of the Indian fragments of Megasthenes, the 
 most remarkable has already been referred to. 
 In the two great divisions of the Philosophical 
 sects,t into the Brahmanes and Germanes, we 
 may doubtless recognize the predecessors of the 
 
 * p. 224. 
 
XXX 
 
 present Brachmans and Buddhists of Hindostan. 
 They are likewise mentioned by Clitarchus * as 
 the Brahmanes and Pramne. The castes of India 
 are also described at length, + and have continued 
 with some variations to the present day. The an- 
 tiquity of such a division is very great, and per- 
 haps originated at the dispersion, as it prevailed 
 chiefly among the lonic nations, while the Scythic 
 tribes prided themselves upon their independence, 
 and the nobility of the whole race. Megasthenes 
 is reputed to have been a Persian, and an officer in 
 the army of Alexander in his expedition to India, 
 and was employed upon several negociations of 
 consequence. 
 
 I have next given two short notices of some 
 celebrated islands in the Atlantic and Indian 
 oceans. The first,{ upon the Atlantic island, is 
 quoted by Proclus, from the Ethiopic history of 
 Marcellus, in illustration of the passages of Plato 
 in the Timeus relative to the same. Some have 
 looked upon the relation as worthy of credit, and 
 confirmed by the broken nature of all the islands, 
 which lie scattered between the old and the new 
 world, regarding them as relics of a former tract 
 which has been absorbed. The second fragment 
 from Euemerus may relate to the islands in the 
 Indian Archipelago ; though it is highly probable 
 
 * p. 229, +p. 216. tp. 233. 
 
ΧΧΧῚ 
 
 that both may refer only to the White island of 
 the West, so celebrated in the Mythological le- 
 gends of almost all nations, and in none more 
 than in the antiquities of the British islands. 
 
 As I profess not to enter into the details, but 
 merely to provide as it were the raw materials, I 
 shall dwell but little upon Chronology. By far 
 the most authentic record that has come down to 
 us is the Canon of Ptolemeus.* It commences 
 from the Chaldean era of Nabonasar, and is 
 continued to the conclusion of the reign of Anto- 
 ninus Pius. In calculating its chronology, how- 
 ever, it must be observed, that although it starts 
 from this Chaldean era, its years are the Sothoic 
 years of Egypt, consisting only of three hundred 
 and sixty-five days, without any intercalation. 
 Among the Chronological fragments at the end 
 of the work will be found the passage of Censo- 
 rinus,f so important in determining the celebrated 
 epochs of ancient history; and likewise an ex- 
 tract from Theon Alexandrinus,{ from the ma- 
 nuscripts of the King of France, partly cited 
 by Larcher in his translation of Herodotus.§{ For 
 the complete extract, I beg leave to return my 
 thanks to Mons. Champollion Figeac, and Mons. 
 Hase librarian to the king. Several useful chro- 
 nological passages will be found scattered over 
 
 8s: i p.Se24. tp. 329. (δ᾿ Vol. ii. p. 556. 
 
XxXil 
 
 the work: some also are collected at the end of 
 the Dynasties.* I have added also two short 
 notices of the Sarus and Nerus of the Chal- 
 deans. 
 
 It is remarkable, that the three great eras of 
 ancient history commence within thirty years of 
 one another, and are commonly fixed. 
 
 The first Olympiad, B. C. 777. 
 
 The foundation of Rome, B. C. 753. 
 
 And the era of Nabonasar, B. C. 747. 
 
 The commencement of the reign of Diocle- 
 sian is determined by the observed and calculated 
 eclipses to be in the year A. D. 284. The begin- 
 ning of the great Sothoic period of 1641, Sothoic 
 or vague years, equivalent to 1640 Julian years, 
 is fixed about the year B. C. 1321, or 1325. Dur- 
 ing this great embolismic period, the first day of 
 the Egyptian year, called Thoth, from the omission 
 of the intercalation of the quarter of a day in each 
 year, recedes through every day of the year, till 
 it arrives at the point whence it originally 
 started, and again coincides with the Heliacal 
 rising of the Dogstar. 
 
 Having thus brought down the ancient his- 
 tory of the world as contained in the fragments 
 to the times of Grecian record, I shall endeavour, 
 in like manner, to trace a faint outline of its 
 Theology. 
 
 * pp. 328, 329. ἐν. 328. 
 
XXXill 
 
 From Babel, the centre of their abominations, 
 the heathens carried off the same objects of ado- 
 ration, the same superstitious observances, and 
 the same legendary tales, which, however varied 
 and confused, may without difficulty be identified 
 throughout the world. Among the pastoral 
 tribes, the Scythic doctrines almost universally 
 prevailed ; yet in subsequent times they also fell 
 into idolatry : while the Ionic nations carried their 
 additions and corruptions to such a length, that 
 the original and more simple doctrines became 
 obliterated among the vulgar ; and were retained 
 only by the philosophers and priests, and some- 
 times were even re-imported from abroad. The 
 more elaborate corruptions of lonism appear to 
 have prevailed originally in the Iranian territories 
 only, and to have passed to India and to Egypt, 
 to have spread themselves with civilization over 
 Greece, and subsequently over the whole Roman 
 world. By foreign conquest and other circum- 
 stances, the two systems were often amalgamated 
 into one. The more elaborate and corrupted 
 form of lonism and idolatry would catch the 
 attention of the casual observer as the religion of 
 the land; while the deeper doctrines, which re- 
 tained much of their primitive simplicity, were 
 wrapped in mystery, and communicated only to 
 the initiated. . 
 
 Most nations, in process of time, became more 
 attached to particular parts, and retained but 
 
 f 
 
XXXIV 
 
 fragments of the general system. But it is still 
 in existence, and preserved almost entire, both in 
 its Scythic and Ionic form, as the Buddhism and 
 Brahmenism of Hindostan. By comparing all 
 the varied legends of the west and east in con- 
 junction, we may obtain the following outline of 
 the theology of the ancients. 
 
 It recognizes, as the primary elements of all 
 things, two independent principles, of the nature 
 of male and female. And these, in mystic union 
 as the soul and body, constitute the great Her- 
 maphroditic deity, the One, the Universe itself, 
 consisting still of the two separate elements of its 
 composition, modified, though combined in one 
 individual, of which all things were regarded but 
 as parts. From the two, or more frequently 
 from the male, proceeded three sons or Hypos- 
 tases ; which, when examined severally, are each 
 one and the same with the principle from which 
 they sprung: but when viewed conjointly, they 
 constitute a triad, emanating from a fourth yet 
 older divinity, who, by a mysterious act of self- 
 triplication, becomes three, while he yet remains 
 but one, each member of the triad being ulti- 
 mately resolvable into the monad.* With this is 
 connected the doctrine of a succession of similar 
 worlds. At the conclusion of each revolving 
 period, the world is dissolved, alternately by 
 
 * See Faber at length upon this subject, Pag. Id. Vol. IT. 
 
XXXV 
 
 flood and fire ; and all its varied forms and parts 
 are absorbed into the two primeval principles, 
 which then remain in the loveliness of their exist- 
 ence. After a certain interval their re-union 
 commences, and with it the reconstruction of 
 another world. As before, the first production of 
 this world is the triad, and the same heroes and 
 persons re-appear ; and the same events are again 
 transacted, till the time arrives for another dis- 
 solution. Such was the system in its original 
 form ; it was a foundation of materialism, upon 
 which was raised a superstructure of idolatry. 
 The most remarkable feature in the heathen 
 theology is the multiplicity of its gods. The 
 easy temper of polytheism, as it has been called, 
 hesitated not to adopt the divinities of the sur- 
 rounding nations; while the deification, not only of 
 heroes and kings, but of the virtues and vices, 
 with the genii of the woods and waters, moun- 
 tains and cities, contributed to introduce new 
 and strange inmates into the Pantheon. But if 
 we eject these modern intruders, if we restore to 
 their original seats the imported deities, such as 
 Pan to Arcadia, Hermes to Egypt, Osiris to 
 Memphis, Hercules to Tyre, and Dionysus to 
 India ; and if we investigate the origin of each, 
 we shall find every nation, notwithstanding the 
 variety of names, acknowledging the same deities 
 and the same system of theology: and, however 
 humble any of the deities may appear in the 
 
XXXVI 
 
 Pantheons of Greece and Rome, each, who has 
 any claim to antiquity, will be found ultimately, 
 if not immediately, resolvable into the original 
 God or Goddess, into one or other of the two 
 primeval principles. 
 
 In conducting such an ΕΣ ἘΠ a very 
 singular circumstance presents itself in the mani- 
 fold character of these deities. Their human or 
 terrestrial appearance, as mere mortals deified is 
 the most obvious; as the sun, moon, elements, 
 and powers of nature, they assume a celestial or 
 physical aspect. And if we turn to the writings 
 of the philosophers, we shall find them sustain- 
 ing a character more abstract and metaphysical. 
 Yet under all these different forms, the same 
 general system is preserved. 
 
 In his terrestrial character, the chief Hero 
 God, under whatever name, is claimed by every 
 nation as its progenitor and founder. And 
 not only is he celebrated as the king of that 
 country in particular, but of the whole world. 
 He is exposed to some alarming danger from the 
 sea, or an evil principle or monster by which the 
 sea is represented. He is nevertheless rescued by 
 some friendly female aid, sometimes concealed in 
 a cavern or in the moon, or preserved in a death- 
 like sleep, borne upon a snake, or floating on an 
 island or a lotus, though more frequently in a boat 
 or ark. At length he awakens from his slumber, 
 subdues his enemy, and lands upon a mountain. 
 
Xxxvii 
 
 He then reorganizes the world, and becomes him- 
 self the father primarily of three sons, and through 
 them, of the human race; not unfrequently with 
 some allusions to the dove and rainbow. In fact, 
 in his human character he was the great father of 
 mankind ; but he may not only be identified with 
 Noah but with Adam likewise. The one was 
 looked upon as the re-appearance of the other, 
 and both an incarnation of the Deity. 
 
 In his immediate celestial character the God 
 is universally held to be the Sun; but the cha- 
 racter of the great Goddess is of a more complex 
 description. As the companion of the man, she 
 is the ark; which was regarded not only as his 
 consort, but his daughter, as the work of his own 
 hands; and his mother, from whose womb he 
 again emerged, as an infant, to a second life; and 
 his preserver during the catastrophe of the de- 
 luge. As the companion of the Sun she is either 
 the earth or moon: not that the distinctions be- 
 tween the human and celestial characters are 
 accurately maintained ; for they are so strangely 
 blended together, that the adventures applicable 
 to one are frequently, and sometimes purposely, 
 misapplied to the other. Thus, whilst the Man 
 is said to have entered into, been concealed in, 
 and have again issued from the ark, the moon, 
 and the earth, indifferently, the Sun is fabled to 
 have been plunged into the ocean, to have sailed 
 upon a lotus, to have taken refuge in a floating 
 
XXXVill 
 island, and to have dwelt upon a sacred mountain 
 left dry by the retiring flood.* 
 
 It has been often remarked, that the Theo- 
 gonies and Cosmogonies of the heathens were 
 the same. In addition to those naturally con- 
 stituting a part of the work, I have given the 
 most remarkable of the Hermetic, Orphic, and 
 Pythagorean accounts; which will be found, with 
 the celebrated collection from Damascius, under 
 a separate head.| By comparing these with the 
 Cosmogonies of Sanchoniatho, Berossus, and the 
 rest, we may, without much difficulty, arrive at 
 the following conclusion: that the Ether and 
 Chaos, or, in the language of the Philosophers, 
 Mind and Matter, were the two primeval, eternal, 
 and independent principles of the universe; the 
 one regarded as a vivifying and intellectual prin- 
 ciple, the other as a watery Chaos, boundless, and 
 without form: both which continued for a time 
 without motion, and in darkness. By a mystic 
 union of the two was formed the great Herma- 
 phroditic deity, the One, the universal World; of 
 which the Chaotic matter presently became the 
 body, and the Etherial Intellectual principle the 
 soul. As soon as the union had commenced, 
 from the Ether sprung forth the triad, Phanes or 
 Eros, a triple divinity, the most prominent cha- 
 racter of which was Light. He was the same 
 with the Soul of the World, and the Intelligible 
 
 * See Faber, Pag. Id. + p. 283, and following. 
 
ΧΧΧΙΧ 
 
 triad so largely insisted upon by the Platonists. 
 The gross chaotic elements of Earth and Water 
 were formed into the terraqueous globe, while the 
 disposing Ether, in the character of Phanes, un- 
 der some three of the conditions of Light, Air, 
 Heat, Fire, Ether, Flame, or Spirit, composed a 
 physical trinity concentred in the Sun, the soul 
 and ruler of the world. Or, according to the 
 more refined speculations, it consisted of a trinity 
 of mental powers, in which the Understanding, 
 Reason or Intellect, the Soul, Passions, Feelings 
 or Affections, Power, Counsel or Will, are va- 
 riously combined. Viewed, therefore, either 
 under a physical or metaphysical aspect, it is 
 still a triad subordinate to, and emanating from 
 the more ancient Intellectual Ether, and into 
 which each person of the triad is again re- 
 solvable.* 
 
 With respect to the Physical triad, by com- 
 paring the heathen accounts with similar passages 
 in the Scriptures, though not decisive, yet so 
 preponderating does the evidence appear to me 
 upon this point, that if the school of Hutchinson 
 had not failed to establish their very elegant hy- 
 pothesis, as to the fact that the Fire, Light, and 
 Spirit or Air, were only three different condi- 
 tions of one and the same etherial fluid, appear- 
 ing as Fire at the orb of the Sun, as Light pro- 
 
 * See the Inquiry at the end. 
 
xl 
 
 ceeding from it, and as Spirit returning to it, 
 I should not have hesitated to subscribe to the 
 opinion that such was the original trinity of the 
 Gentiles ; a triad, nevertheless, subordinate to a 
 monad, which existed in the form of Ether pre- 
 viously to its assuming such conditions. 
 
 The Metaphysical speculations of the ancients 
 upon this subject can only be derived by analo- 
 gical reasoning from contemplation of the micro- 
 cosm of man. To point out the close analogy 
 preserved in this particular between the Meta- 
 physical and Physical system before explained | 
 would observe, that Man is a being compounded 
 of an Intellectual, and of a Material substance, 
 both of which were conceived by the ancients to 
 have pre-existed, before they became united in 
 the compound individual animal, the Man. When 
 thus united, they appear to have conceived a 
 triad of intellectual powers, the Intellect, the 
 Affections Feelings or Emotions, and the Will 
 or Power of action. But for further illustration 
 of these matters, and for such proof as can be 
 produced, I must refer to the disquisition at the 
 end. 
 
 Upon this subject, therefore, I cannot agree 
 with Mr. Faber in supposing that the trinita- 
 rian speculations of the Heathens originated in 
 the coincidence of Adam and Noah being each 
 the father of three sons; for of the three dis- 
 tinct analogical systems the Metaphysical, of the 
 
xl 
 
 Mind with its Faculties, and Matter,—the Physi- 
 eal, of the Ether with its conditions, and the 
 Chaos,—and the Human, of the Patriarch with 
 his three sons, and the universal mother the Ark 
 or Earth,—the last analogy is not only the most 
 imperfect, but according to all historical ac- 
 counts, Demonolatry was introduced subsequently 
 to the worship of nature and the elements. 
 From the widely dispersed traditions upon 
 the subject, it is manifest that the circumstances 
 of the creation and the deluge were well known 
 to all mankind previously to the dispersion. And 
 the writings of Moses give to the chosen people, 
 not so much a new revelation as a correct, authen- 
 ticated and imspired account of circumstances, 
 which had then become partially obscured by 
 time and abused by superstition. The formless 
 watery Chaos and the Etherial substance of the 
 heavens, enfolding and passing over its surface 
 as a mighty wind, are the first principles both of 
 the sacred and profane cosmogonies; but they 
 are reclaimed by Moses as the materials, created 
 by the immediate agency of an Almighty power. 
 The subsequent process of formation so com- 
 pletely corresponds in both systems, that if they 
 were not borrowed the one from the other, (a po- 
 sition which cannot be maintained,) they must 
 each have been ultimately derived from the com- 
 mon source of revelation. Similar considerations 
 upon the traditions of a Trinity, so universal 
 
 o 
 5 
 
xii 
 
 among the nations, and an examination of what 
 that Trinity was composed, forces upon me the 
 conviction, that the trinitarian doctrine, as it is 
 now believed, was one of the original and funda- 
 mental tenets of the Patriarchal religion; that the 
 analogy between the Microcosm, as pointed out, 
 and the then current accounts of the creation, 
 became the stumbling block, which set mankind 
 to refine upon the truth; that hence they fell into 
 the errors of attributing eternity to matter, of 
 placing a Monad above the Trinity, with the 
 Pantheistic opinion that the Deity was no other 
 than the universe itself. The doctrine of the 
 succession of worlds, the Metempsychosis, and 
 Demonolatry would follow naturally enough by 
 an extension of their system from the particular 
 circumstances of the creation to those attendant 
 upon the deluge. By the pride of false philo- 
 sophy they forsook the truth of revelation, and 
 sunk into materialism, into the worship of the 
 elements, of man and beasts, and into idolatry 
 with all its attendant abominations. ‘When 
 they knew God, they glorified him not as God; 
 neither were thankful; but became vain in their 
 imaginations, and their foolish heart was dark- 
 ened. Professing themselves to be wise, they 
 became fools; and changed the glory of the in- 
 corruptible God into an image made like te 
 corruptible man, and to birds, and four-footed 
 beasts, and creeping things. Wherefore, God 
 
xii 
 gave them up to uncleanness through the lusts of 
 their own hearts.’* 
 
 To reclaim a world so fallen, the great mani- 
 festations of the Almighty from time to time have 
 taken place, not only at the most civilized as 
 well as celebrated periods of history, but upon 
 the spots then best calculated for the general dis- 
 semination of truth among the heathens. The 
 geographical situation of Palestine, chosen it 
 may be for the seat of universal empire, is the 
 most remarkable upon earth for the facility of 
 communication which it affords with every 
 quarter of the globe. At the time of the Advent, 
 it formed as it were the boundary of the rival 
 empires of Rome and Parthia, subject to Rome, 
 but holding an intimate connexion with its colo- 
 nial offspring within the Parthian dominions. 
 And its situation was at that time not more ex- 
 cellently adapted for the universal diffusion of 
 the Gospel, both in the East and West, than 
 it was for the general instruction of mankind, 
 in times of old, when it formed so considerable 
 a part of the high road of communication between 
 the empires of Egypt and Assyria. About the 
 time of the eighteenth dynasty, the most brilliant 
 epoch of Egyptian history, the Exodus of the 
 Israelites was effected: and the fame of the mi- 
 
 * Romans, i. 21. 
 
xliv 
 
 raculous exploits of Moses and Joshua was 
 wafted with the Danaan colonies to Greece, with 
 the fugitive Canaanites to the West, and carried 
 by the Israelites themselves into the East. 
 During the revolutionary violence consequent 
 upon the downfall of the ancient Assyrian em- 
 pire, the same merciful Providence kept up a 
 communication with the kingdoms which sprung 
 out of its ruins, by the mission of Jonah to Ni- 
 neveh, by the connexion of the princes of Sa- 
 maria with Syria, and by the dispersion of the 
 ten tribes over the territories of the Medes and 
 Assyrians by Salmanasar: and upon the full 
 re-establishment of the empire at Babylon, a 
 knowledge of the truth was diffused far and wide 
 by the captivity of the Jews themselves. 
 
 The conversion of Nebuchadnezzar, and the 
 decrees of himself and his successors, both of the 
 Assyrian and Persian line, in favour of the truth, 
 must have been attended with at least some tem- 
 porary effect upon the religious and philosophical 
 sentiments of the East. And such an effect may 
 be clearly traced in the very general reformation 
 of the systems and superstitions which about this 
 period took place. 
 
 Among the Persians, themselves a Scythic 
 people, this reformation appears to have re-ani- 
 mated their zeal and enmity against the temples 
 and idolatry of their Ionian rivals. It may also 
 have led them to convert the two independent 
 
xlv 
 
 principles of Mind and Matter into spiritual 
 agents in opposition to one another, and to have 
 revived the unmingled worship of the Sun and 
 Fire, at first but as an emblem and image of the 
 Supreme, though it soon again degenerated into 
 the Sabaism of old. The reformation may be 
 traced through Assyria, India, China and Egypt, 
 and in those amendments and refinements which 
 were shortly afterwards imported by Pythagoras 
 into Greece. 
 
 A summary of the Pythagorean doctrines will 
 be found in the commencement of the celebrated 
 treatise of Timzus Locrus.* It may be observed, 
 that the Pythagorean speculations have a tacit 
 reference to the ancient classification of Causes, as 
 the Efficient, the Formal or Ideal, the Material 
 and the Final. In conformity to this division we 
 find introduced between the two ancient inde- 
 pendent principles of Mind and Matter, the 
 world of Forms or abstract Ideas, to which is 
 attributed an eternal subsistence, if not an exis- 
 tence independent of the Mind ; whilst the τἀγαϑὺν 
 Good in the abstract, the summum bonum, the 
 great final cause, became the subject of perpetual 
 discussion and inquiry among all succeeding phi- 
 losophers. . 
 
 The Forms and Matter were now substituted 
 for the ancient Duad; superior to which was 
 
 * T have given it p. 301. 
 
xlvi 
 
 placed the Efficient Cause as the Monad, Deity, 
 or Demiurgus. This Duad was, nevertheless, re- 
 garded as two eternal and independent principles, 
 and by their combination the Deity formed the 
 Sensible world, a living animal, composed of soul 
 and body. Subordinate to the duad is the Py- 
 thagorean Triad, occupying the same _ relative 
 situation with respect to the duad as in the more 
 ancient systems. By this introduction of the 
 Ideal world, and the elevation of the deity above 
 the duad, the system lost something of the gross 
 materialism which had hitherto obtained, but it 
 lost, at the same time, all knowledge of the an- 
 cient triad, which was now replaced by such 
 triads as were more conformable to the Pytha- 
 gorean mode, and of which the persons were often 
 subordinate to, or comprehended within each 
 other, as genera and species.* 
 
 The doctrines of Plato differ only in refine- 
 ment from the preceding. If we admit the Par- 
 menides and the Timeus to embrace his com- 
 plete system, God and Matter, two originally in- 
 dependent principles, are held to be, as it were, 
 the extremities of that chain of being which com- 
 poses the universe. Subordinate to the God, we 
 have the Intelligible world of Ideas or the Forms, 
 commencing, as the latter Platonists insist, with 
 the Intelligible triad : but whether Plato regarded 
 
 * See the Pythagorean fragments, p. 301. 
 
xlvil 
 
 this world of Ideas in the abstract as subsisting 
 only within the mind of the Deity, or whether he 
 attributed to it a distinct existence* without the 
 Mind, comprehending different orders of divine 
 super-essential beings, may well be questioned. 
 When the Deity or Demiurgus thought proper to 
 compose the world, he looked to this ideal world 
 as the exemplar, in whose likeness he constructed 
 his new work. He impressed the disordered 
 material Chaos with the Forms, and rendered the 
 world a living animal, after the pattern of its ideal 
 prototype, consisting of a soul endued with Intel- 
 lect, and of a body of which all beings compre- 
 hended in it, Gods Men Animals or material 
 species, are but the concrete individuals, of which 
 the abstract ideas unalterably subsist in the intel- 
 ligible world. Though still supposed to continue 
 in existence, the Deity, as in the more ancient 
 systems, retires as effectually from the stage as 
 did the ancient Ether when superseded by the 
 Phanes. And all the mundane operations are 
 carried on as before, by the Soul of the world. 
 While the Stoics and other schools retained 
 the ancient doctrines, and looked not further than 
 
 * Existence, according to the ancients, implies essence ; 
 whereas the Ideal world was deemed super-essential: but I am 
 compelled to use the words to make myself understood ; for the 
 English language has not been sufficiently accommodated to 
 these metaphysical subtleties of the Greeks to supply the requi- 
 site terms. 
 
xlviii 
 
 the world itself, it is true that the Pythagoreans 
 and Plato held a God superior to the world ; but 
 it is extremely doubtful whether they entertained 
 a sublimer conception of their great immediate 
 efficient cause, the Soul of the world, or indeed 
 of Soul in general, than the gross materialism of 
 a subtile ether. ‘They discouraged, likewise, the 
 tenet of the succession of worlds; though it was 
 subsequently revived by the later Platonists, by 
 whom the Deity was supposed, at the predestined 
 time, to swallow up the world, first the sensible, 
 then the Ideal, and lastly Phanes the Intelligible 
 triad, and to remain in the solitude of his unity. 
 Much as has been said upon the Platonic 
 trinity, 1 must confess that 1 can find fewer traces 
 of that doctrine in the writings of Plato than of 
 his less refined predecessors, the mythologists. I 
 have given such extracts as appear to me to 
 relate to the subject, together with a fragment of 
 Amelius* which expressly mentions the three 
 kings of Plato as identical with the Orphic trinity. 
 Dr. Morgan, in his essay upon the subject, satis- 
 factorily refutes the notion, that Plato regarded 
 the Logos as the second person of the trinity: 
 
 * p. 305. 
 
 + The celebrated passage in the Epinomis of Plato Ἐυναποτε- 
 λῶν κόσμον ὃν ἔταξε λόγος ὁ πάντων δειότατος ὁρατόν, usually rendered, 
 “ Perfecting the visible world, which the word, the most divine 
 of all things, made,” refers to a very different subject. The 
 
 inquiry in this part of the dialogue relates to the knowledge of 
 number, without which it is asserted a man cannot have λόγος 
 
xlix 
 
 and upon this refutation he denies that Plato 
 held the doctrine at all, more particularly, as from 
 the time of Plato to that of Ammonius Saccas 
 in the third century, no disciple of his school 
 seems to have been aware that such a doctrine 
 was contained in his writings. Perhaps, how- 
 ever, we may trace some obscure allusions to it 
 in the beginning of the second hypothesis of the 
 Parmenides and in the passages which I have 
 
 reason; and if destitute of reason, he cannot attain wisdom. 
 The God, which imparted to man the knowledge of numbers, is 
 the Heaven, for there are eight powers contained in it akin to 
 each other, that of the Sun, of the Moon, &c. to whom, he says, 
 must be assigned equal honour— For let us not assign to one 
 the honour of the year, to another the honour of the month, and 
 to others none of that portion of time, in which each performs its 
 course in conjunction with the others, accomplishing that visible 
 order which reason, the most divine of all things (or of the Uni- 
 verse,) has established. 
 
 The no less celebrated passage from the Philebus, Ὅτε νοῦς 
 ἔστι γενούστης τοῦ πάντων αἰτίου, by which it is supposed that the 
 consubstantiality of the Logos with the first cause is asserted, 
 relates to the human mind, and is the conclusion of an argument 
 which proves, that as ordinary fire is derived from the elemental, 
 and the human body from the elemental body of the world, so is 
 the human mind akin to, or of the same nature with the Divine 
 mind, or Soul of the universe, the cause of all things. These 
 and other less celebrated passages of Plato, when examined in 
 conjunction with this context, afford us, as Dr. Morgan justly 
 observes, no more foundation for supposing that Plato held 
 the doctrine of the Trinity than the following very curious pas- 
 sage, which he produces from Seneca, gives us ground to 
 suppose that it was held by the Stoics: “Id actum est, mihi 
 crede ab illo, quisquis formator universi fuit, sive ille Deus est 
 
 h 
 
Ι 
 
 given ;* though in the latter the doctrines appear 
 rather to refer to the Monad and Duad than to 
 the genuine trinity of the ancients. So far from 
 any such doctrine being maintained by the Py- 
 thagoreans or in the Academy, we find only 
 such vague allusions as might be expected among 
 philosophers, who reverenced an ancient tradition, 
 and were willing, after they had lost the substance, 
 to find something to which they might attach the 
 shadow. 
 
 The error which Dr. Morgan has refuted, took 
 its rise with the fathers of the Church in the se- 
 cond century. They were led into the mistake 
 by the word Logos, used by Plato and St. John, 
 and made the Platonic Trinity to consist of God, 
 the Logos, and the Soul of the world, and this 
 in spite of all the professed followers of Plato, 
 who, however they might vary among them- 
 selves, uniformly insisted upon placing the Mo- 
 
 potens omnium, sive incorporalis ratio ingentium operum artifex, 
 sive divinus spiritus per omnia maxima minima, quali intentione 
 diffusus, sive fatum et immutabilis causarum inter se coheren- 
 tium series.”| ‘To the observations from Dr. Morgan’s work, I 
 may venture to add that the word Logos, as used by St. John 
 and Plato, has two very distinct significations. By the latter, 
 Reason in general is implied, whereas St. John uses it as a trans- 
 lation of the Hebrew per, the Word signifying also a thing or 
 person revealed, and if at all in the sense of reason, which may 
 be implied from the commentaries of the fathers, not for reason 
 in general, but for the particular faculty so called. 
 * p. 804. + Consol. ad Helv. c. 8. 
 
li 
 
 nad and Duad, or at least a Monad, above their 
 Triad. 
 
 In the first century of the Christian era, Philo, 
 an Alexandrian Jew, had attempted to expound 
 the Scripture on Platonic principles ; and after the 
 promulgation of the Gospel many of the fathers 
 warmly adopted the same mode of exposition. 
 The different sects of the Gnostics went far be- 
 yond the Grecian sage, and sought in the East 
 the doctrines, to which they looked upon the 
 writings of Plato merely as essays, introductory to 
 the sublimer flights of the Oriental mysticism : 
 and they treated his followers with that contempt, 
 against which the vanity of a philosopher is 
 seldom proof; and as long as these schools exist- 
 ed, a bitter enmity prevailed between them. The 
 Gnostics gave at once a real existence to the Ideal 
 world, and continuing the chain of being from 
 the Supreme, through numerous orders of Eons, 
 personified abstract ideas, of which the second 
 and third persons of the Trinity were the first 
 and second Eons, and from thence to the lowest 
 material species, founded that daring heresy 
 which so long disturbed the tranquillity of Chris- 
 tendom: and with this spurious Platonism of 
 the fathers the Arian* heresy is likewise intimately 
 
 connected. 
 * It is curious to observe the Arian and Orthodox illustra- 
 
 tions of Eusebius and Epiphanius. The former illustrates the 
 Trinity by the Heaven, the Sun, and the Spirit; or the Heaven, the 
 
Ini» 
 
 But the internal heresies of the Church were 
 not the only ill effects which the misguided zeal 
 of the fathers, in forcing upon Plato the doctrine 
 of the Trinity, brought about. Though it is pos- 
 sible, that by pointing out some crude similarity 
 of doctrine, they might have obtained some con- 
 verts by rendering Christianity less unpalatable 
 to the philosophical world of that day, yet the 
 weapon was skilfully turned against them, and 
 with unerring effect, when the Pagans took upon 
 them to assert that nothing new had been revealed 
 in Christianity ; since, by the confessions of its 
 very advocates, the system was previously con- 
 tained in the writings of Plato. 
 
 In the third century, Ammonius Saccas, uni- 
 versally acknowledged to have been a man of 
 consummate ability, taught that every sect, 
 Christian, Heretic or Pagan, had received the 
 truth, and retained it in their varied legends. He 
 undertook, therefore, to unfold it from them all, 
 and to reconcile every creed. And from his ex- 
 ertions sprung the celebrated Eclectic school of 
 the later Platonists. Plotinus, Amelius, Olym- 
 pius, Porphyrius, Jamblichus, Syrianus, and 
 Proclus, were among the celebrated professors 
 
 Sun, and the Moon, the two latter as the leaders of innumerable 
 host of spirits and stars, evidently derived from the prevailing 
 notions of the Fathers relative to the Platonic trinity ; whilst 
 Epiphanius declares, that this great mystery is properly under- 
 wpod as Fire, Light, and Spirit or Air reveal it to us. 
 
hii 
 
 who succeeded Ammonius in the Platonic chair, 
 and revived and kept alive the spirit of Paganism, 
 with a bitter enmity to the Gospel, for near three 
 hundred years. The Platonic schools were at 
 length closed by the edict of Justinian; and seven 
 wise men, the last lights of Platonism, Diogenes, 
 Hermias, Eulalius, Priscianus, Damascius, Isido- 
 rus and Simplicius retired indignantly from the 
 persecutions of Justinian, to realize the shadowy 
 dreams of the republic of Plato, under the Persian 
 despotism of Chosroes.* 
 
 From the writings of these philosophers is 
 collected the bulk of the Oracles of Zoroaster. 
 A few of them were first published by Ludovicus 
 Tiletanus at Paris, with the commentaries of 
 Pletho, to which were subsequently added those 
 of Psellus. Chief part of them, however, were 
 collected by Franciscus Patricius, and pub- 
 lished with the Hermetic books at the end of 
 his Nova Philosophia. To the labours of Mr. 
 Taylor we are indebted for the addition of about 
 fifty more, and for the references to the works 
 from whence all were extracted. I have arranged 
 them according to the subjects, which are said to 
 be occultly discussed in the Parmenides of Plato, 
 viz. : Cause or God, the Ideal Intelligible or 
 Intellectual world, Particular Souls, and the 
 Material world. And I have placed under a 
 
 * For the particulars of this philosophical transaction see 
 Gibbon, c. xl. ΤΡ: 289. 
 
liv 
 
 separate head the Magical and Philosophical 
 precepts and directions. ‘There can be no ques- 
 tion but that many of these Oracles are spurious ; 
 all those, for instance, which relate to the Intelli- 
 gible and Intellectual orders, which were con- 
 fessedly obtained in answers given by demons, 
 raised for that purpose by the Theurgists ;* who, 
 as well as all the later Platonisis, made preten- 
 sions to magic, not only in its refinements, which 
 they were pleased to designate Theurgy, but also 
 in that debased form which we should call com- 
 mon witchcraft. Nevertheless, several of the 
 Oracles seem to be derived from more au- 
 thentic sources, and, like the spurious Hermetic 
 books which have come down to us, probably 
 contain much of the pure Sabiasm of Persia, 
 and the doctrines of the Oriental philosophy. 
 
 I have thus endeavoured to give | fear a very 
 imperfect outline of ancient history and theology. 
 But, as it is intended rather to assist the reader 
 through such an heterogeneous heap of materials, 
 by bringing forward the most prominent parts 
 and connecting them with one another, I trust 
 its errors will be excused, as they may be cor- 
 rected by the readers better judgment from the 
 materials themselves before him. In closing the 
 
 * The Theurgists were the two Julians, the father called 
 Chaldzus, the son, Theurgus. They flourished in the reign of 
 Marcus Antoninus, and were the first who delivered the oracles 
 upon the Intelligible and Intellectual orders. 
 
lv 
 
 subject, I beg to offer my sincerest thanks to 
 Isaac Cullimore, Esq., to whose deep and exten- 
 sive chronological researches, [ am indebted for 
 references to several very important passages in 
 the following work, which had escaped my notice. 
 
 It is needless to take notice of the numerous 
 forgeries, which have been issued as the produc- 
 tions of the authors of these fragments. There 
 is a complete set, which was composed in Latin 
 by Annius, a monk of Viterbo. But it is a sin- 
 gular circumstance, and one which might be 
 urged with great force against the genuineness of 
 almost the whole collection, that not only the 
 original works have perished, but those also, 
 through whose means these relics have been 
 handed down. With the exception of these frag- 
 ments, not only have Sanchoniatho, Berossus, 
 and the rest passed into oblivion; but the pre- 
 servers of their names have followed in the same 
 track, and to a more unusual fate. The frag- 
 ments of Philo, Abydenus, Polyhistor, Dius, 
 and others, are generally not those of their own 
 works, but extracts from their predecessors. 
 
 It is necessary also to advert to the nume- 
 rous errors which will be found in every sheet. 
 The fragments have been expesed to more than 
 the common risks and accidents, to which all 
 ancient writings have been subject. They have 
 been either copied from the rude annals of anti- 
 
lvi 
 
 quity, or sketched from historical paintings or 
 hieroglyphic records, they have been sometimes 
 translated from the sacred into the common lan- 
 guage of the place, and again translated into 
 Greek ; then passed in citation from hand to 
 hand, and lie widely scattered over the works 
 principally of the fathers, and the writers of the 
 Lower empire. It is matter of surprise then, not 
 that they abound in error and uncertainty, but 
 that so much of them has been preserved. 
 
 Several of these fragments are to be found in 
 two or three different authors, each of whom 
 contains a different version of the same, differing, 
 not so much in the outline, and in the general 
 flow of words, as in those technicalities and va- 
 riations of termination, which were necessary to 
 adapt them to the author’s style; and it has been 
 a source of some little perplexity to determine 
 which of these various readings to prefer. 
 
 To Eusebius, Syncellus and Josephus, we 
 are largely indebted for these relics of antiquity. 
 For Josephus I have followed Hudson’s edition. 
 The Cologne edition of the Praparatio Evange-. 
 lica of Eusebius is often considered the best : but 
 upon close inspection and comparison I have been 
 induced to prefer the text of Stephanus. With’ 
 the exception of a mutilated translation into 
 Latin by Hieronymus, Eusebius’ Chronicle was: 
 lost. Under that title, however, Scaliger com- 
 
lvil 
 
 piled a very portly folio, which, with some other 
 Chronicles, contains a collection of all the frag- 
 ments of the Greek text of Eusebius, that could 
 be found. The recovery of the Armenian trans- 
 lation of this Chronicle is a great acquisition. It 
 is regarded upon the Continent as perfectly au- 
 thentic; but I am not aware that it has been ex- 
 amined or reviewed in England. To compress as 
 much as possible ali unnecessary observations upon 
 the subject of materials, editions and abbrevia- 
 tions, 1 have given at the end a list of the authors 
 cited, which will answer at once the several pur- 
 poses of an index to the abbreviations, and to the 
 editions I have used or referred to, as well as to 
 the manuscripts and other sources from which 
 some of those editions have been formed, or which 
 have been consulted in the compilation of the 
 work. I have likewise given it the form of a 
 Chronological index, by adding the times in 
 which the authors referred to flourished, that the 
 reader may judge what degree of credit may be 
 reposed in each. 
 
 The matter contained in these fragments is 
 the only merit to which they can pretend. I have 
 chosen what appeared to me the most genuine 
 text, independent of all theory and system, and 
 have given all the various readings of any conse- 
 quence I have met with. I have retained Mr. 
 Falconer’s translation of Hanno’s Periplus; and 
 with this exception, and some few of the most 
 
 i 
 
Ivill 
 
 obscure of the oracles of Zoroaster, which are 
 due to Mr. Taylor, I must be answerable for the 
 rest. For the many errors in which they must 
 abound, I beg leave to apologize and claim in- 
 dulgence. The broken and confused state of 
 many of the fragments, preclude the possibility of 
 giving any translation, except upon conjecture. 
 Many, such as the Orphic fragment from Malala,* 
 and that from Amelius,} have exercised the talent 
 and ingenuity of some of the ablest commentators, 
 none of whom perhaps will be found to agree. In 
 such cases, I have patiently compared their opi- 
 nions, and endeavoured to investigate the circum- 
 stances under which the fragments were written 
 and have been preserved, and what connexion 
 they have with the passages among which they 
 are introduced, and to give, what to the best of 
 my judgment is, the truth. 
 
 At the conclusion of this work I have added a 
 disquisition, which was originally designed merely 
 to explain and illustrate what I conceive to have 
 been the ancient Trinity of the Gentiles : but in 
 the progress of inquiry I found it impossible to 
 do justice to the opinion without speaking largely 
 upon ancient and modern science. ‘To compress 
 it, therefore, as much as_ possible, and to give it 
 something of a connected arrangement, 1 have 
 thrown it altogether into the form of an inquiry 
 
 * py. 296, Ἔ 805. 
 
lix 
 
 into the Method, Objects and Result of an- 
 cient and modern Philosophy. And, as in this 
 work I have endeavoured to bring forward several 
 historical and theological documents, which had, 
 in a manner, retired from public view, I trust 
 that such an inquiry will not be deemed alto- 
 gether misplaced, and that I shall be excused in 
 an attempt to draw from the same store-house of 
 antiquity some speculations, which have been too 
 generally slighted or overlooked by the Meta- 
 physician and the Philosopher, but which I be- 
 lieve may tend to the advancement of science, 
 even amid the brilliant discoveries of modern 
 times. 
 
 With respect to the fragments themselves, the 
 classical reader will find, I fear, but poor amuse- 
 ment in perusing a half barbarous dialect, replete 
 with errors and inconsistencies: to the student of 
 divinity, however, they may not be altogether 
 unacceptable or devoid of interest: and to the 
 Inquirer after ancient history and mythology, it 
 must be useful to have collected into one small 
 volume, the scattered relics for which he must 
 otherwise search so widely. 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pa Ν ΝῊ 
 
 AP, “ebgegngai ttt ( ate int ae 
 Mises il τὰ OF POY ae a if 
 ' Wo ie ἃ ἘΠῚ a0 Tix Ci Δ 
 ea he Dildip nine, δώ ν 
 eee. χη υοῖν ah hie bmn a ite ‘il 
 ty tae er WEL A rola ἢ a, 
 
 
 
 ΤΎΡΟΝ 
 
 eile 
 
 ei de SEE pee ye Al ah o Ld ah iy " ΤΥ 
 q ᾿ ἐν iit aia ‘'} ig ie Thy ΙΝ 7) τ: ἫΝ 
 rs ΙΖ i j ni) a ‘ a i ay fade hi ‘ast a . 3 oF 
 Ι 4} ; ive idl i ij val 6 ΤῊΝ 
 ΡΥ ν, 7 ἣν Ἶ Aaj ted ale 4 
 
 ΕΣ © seria δὰ of} ὃς Ἰὼ Kae 
 
 Nig ee) TO aa "δ ia. ble ΜᾺ 
 a, Ot aed wr ὧν ar . 
 
 SLE AT ate De Υ 
 τ Dirt ot ae web ile ah ΝΜ 
 
 ΝΠ LE 7 2 (ON AE it at ἃ μὰ usage 
 Ma hy De age aie ea ag 
 Meili, it fork ΣΝ 
 aus ΜΔ τ Σ τὶ τε. nn 
 ii Poy coh) iad αὐ γι} Lary TTT ee | 
 δ οἰ", nit Hoe viele ee bigs! 
 ae He eed TOP a) eb eae 
 
 el, Το | 
 
 - 
 
THE 
 THEOLOGY OF THE PHCNICIANS; 
 
 FROM 
 
 SANCHONIATHO. 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 : 
 ‘ e 
 bs : 
 | 
 7 - 
 ᾿ 
 = ‘ 
 >, 
 Ὧν 
 ᾿ 
 nh 
 t 
 ‘a So ὃ “Ὶ 
 ile Ν ' 
 Pats ee we k ¢ 
 Ἧ. rh. t 
 ἢ Y, 
 Pel ae BR a 
 A 
 
 
 
 "νὰ 
 
 ΕΝ ATCT 
 
 
 
 
 
— 
 
 SANCHONIATHO. 
 
 THE 
 
 \ 
 ~ ed. ‘\ 
 THN τῶν ὅλων ὠρχὴν ὑπο- 
 ͵ \ 
 τίϑδεται ἀέρα ζοφώδη καὶ 
 δ Ν Ὁ 
 πνευματώδη, ἢ πνοὴν ἀέρος 
 Ν Ν 
 ζοφώδους, καὶ χάος Μολερὸν 
 ~ ~ \ > 
 ἐρεβῶδες" ταῦτα δὲ εἶναι 
 ἄπειρα, καὶ διὰ πολὺν αἰῶνα 
 ΝΜ ¢ ὔ 
 μὴ ἔχειν πέρας. Ὅτε δέ, 
 \ - ~ 
 (φησιν) ἠράσϑη τὸ πνεῦμα τῶν 
 ἰδίων ἀρχῶν, καὶ ἐγένετο σύγ- 
 κρασις, ἡ πλοχὴ ἐκείνη ἐκλήδη 
 Σ \ \ 
 πόσος" αὕτη δὲ ἀρχὴ χτίσεως 
 ΟΝ Διὶ . SNE NN ΓΕΒ» 
 ὡπάντων" αὐτὸ δὲ οὐκ ἐγίνωσκε 
 \ 2 tere ‘9 - 
 τὴν αὐτοῦ κτίσιν" καὶ ἐκ τῆς 
 αὐτοῦ συμπλοκῆς τοῦ πνεύμα- 
 [ aed 4 ~ Ff / 
 τὸς ἐγένετο Moir. τοῦτό τινές 
 - Ν 
 φασιν ἰλύν, οἱ δὲ ὑδωτώδους 
 - \ 
 μίξεως σῆψιν. Kal ἐκ ταύτης 
 ἐγένετο πᾶσᾳ σπορὰ κτίσεως, 
 
 Ἀ , ~ e. 
 καὶ γένεσις TOY ὅλων. 
 
 COSMOGONY. 
 
 He supposes that the beginning of all 
 things was a dark and condensed windy 
 air, or a breeze of thick air and a Chaos 
 turbid and black as Erebus: and that 
 these were unbounded, and for a long 
 series of ages destitute of form. But 
 when this wind became enamoured of 
 its own first principles (the Chaos), 
 and an intimate union took place, that 
 connexion was called Pothos :* and it 
 was the beginning of the creation of 
 all things. And it (the Chaos) + knew 
 not its own production; but from its 
 embrace with the wind was generated 
 Mét; which some call Ilus (Mud), but 
 others the putrefaction of a watery 
 mixture. And from this sprung all 
 the seed of the creation, and the gene- 
 ration of the universe. 
 
 * This union, among the Heathens, and particularly among the Pheenicians, 
 was symbolized by an Egg enfolded by a Serpent, which disjunctively represented, 
 the Chaos and the Ether, but, when united, the hermaphroditic first principle of 
 
 the Universe Cupid or Pothos. 
 + “ Wind knew not, &c.”* 
 
 Vig. Col. Orel. Cumb. &c. 
 
4 SANCHONIATHO. 
 
 "Hy δέ τινα ζῶα οὐκ ἔχοντα 
 αἴσϑησιν, ἐξ ὧν ἐγένετο ζῶα 
 νοερὰ, καὶ ἐκλήση Ζωφασημὶὴν, 
 τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν οὐρανοῦ χατόπται. 
 χαὶ ἀνεπλάσϑη ὁμοίως ὠοῦ 
 σχήματι» καὶ ἐξέλαμψε Μὼτ, 
 ἥλιός τε καὶ σελήνη, ἀστέρες 
 
 ,m” 4 
 TE χαὶ ἄστρα μεγάλα. 
 
 Καὶ τοῦ ἀέρος διαυγά- 
 ᾿ , νὰ 
 σαντος, διὰ πύρωσιν καὶ τῆς 
 δαλάσσης καὶ τῆς γῆς 
 5. ὦ 4 ἈΝ ͵ 
 ἐγένετο πνεύματα καὶ νέφη; 
 NR Ψ ens , 
 καὶ οὐρανίων ὑδάτων μέγισται 
 καταφοραὶ nat χύσεις. Kab 
 ἐπειδὴ διεκρίϑη καὶ τοῦ ἰδίου 
 "Δ 
 τόπου διεχωρίσθη διὰ τὴν 
 ~ eae 
 τοῦ ἡλίου πύρωσιν, καὶ πάντα 
 ᾽ὔ 
 συνήντησε πάλιν ἐν ἀέρι τάδε 
 τοῖσδε, καὶ συνέῤῥαξαν, βρο- 
 Ων 
 νταί τε ἀπετελέσϑησαν nat 
 > νὴ Ἁ, Ν \ 
 ἀστραπαὶ, καὶ πρὸς τὸν 
 , - ~ 
 πάταγον τὼν βροντῶν mpoyey- 
 , + \ ~ > / 
 ραμμένα ἢ νοερὰ ζῶα eypnyo- 
 \ Ν cy 
 ρήσεν, καὶ πρὸς τὸν ἦχον ἐπτύρη, 
 7 1 ~ 
 καὶ ἐκινήδη ev τε γῇ καὶ 
 Ua nx 
 δαλάσσῃ ὃ ἄῤῥεν καὶ δῆλυ. 
 (Τούτοις ἑξῆς 6 αὐτὸς συγγρα- 
 φεὺς ἐπιφέρει λέγων") Tab? 
 >, 
 
 εὑρέδη ἐν τῇ κοσμογονίᾳ 
 
 , 
 γεγραμμένα Taavrov καὶ 
 “Ὁ 5 Λ ε ΄ A 
 τοῖς ἐκείνου ὑπομνήμασιν, ἔκ 
 -“ Ν 
 τε στοχασμῶν καὶ τεκμηρίων, 
 ES ~ 
 ὧν ἑώρακεν. αὐτοῦ ἡ διάνοια, 
 
 τ ε 
 καὶ εὗρε, καὶ ἡμῖν ἐφώτισεν. 
 
 * ὠοῦ, omitted in Ed, Col. 
 Or. 
 
 { προγεγραμένον. 
 
 And there were certain animals 
 without sensation, from which intelli- 
 gent animals were produced, and these 
 were called Zophasemin, that is, the 
 overseers of the heavens; and they 
 were formed in the shape of an egg: 
 and from M6ét shone forth the sun, 
 
 - and the moon, the less and the greater 
 
 stars. 
 
 And when the air began to send 
 forth light, by its fiery influence on 
 the sea and earth, winds were pro- 
 duced, and clouds, and very great de- 
 fluxions and torrents of the heavenly 
 waters. And when they were thus sepa- 
 rated, and carried out of their proper 
 
 _ places by the heat of the sun, and all 
 
 met again in the air, and were dashed 
 against each other, thunder and light- 
 nings were the result: and at the 
 sound of the thunder, the before- 
 mentioned intelligent animals were 
 aroused, and startled by the noise, 
 and moved upon the earth and in the 
 sea, male and female. (After this our 
 author proceeds to say:) These things 
 were found written in the Cosmogony 
 of Taautus, and in his commentaries, 
 and were drawn from his observations 
 and the natural signs which by his 
 penetration he perceived and disco- 
 vered, and with which he has enlight- 
 ened us. 
 
 1 ϑαχάττης. Or. 
 § ϑαλάττη. Or. 
 

 
 SANCHONIATHO. a 
 
 hod , ~ 
 {Ἑξῆς τούτοις ὀνύματα τῶν 
 , \ 
 ἀνέμων εἰπὼν, Νότου καὶ Bo- 
 ~ ~ / 
 péov καὶ τῶνλοι πῶν ἐπιλέγει.) 
 ~ ,ὔ 
 ᾿Αλλ᾽ οὕτοίγε πρῶτοι ἀφιέ- 
 ‘\ ~ nx 4 
 pwcav, καὶ τῆς γῆς βλαστή- 
 Ν \ >. ἢ 
 para, καὶ Seods ἐνόμισαν, 
 καὶ mporenvvoy ταῦτα, ἀφ᾽ 
 of 
 ὧν αὐτοί τε διεγίνοντο, καὶ 
 “κα A Nee Ν ἣν ΜΙΌ 
 οἱ ἑπόμενοι, καὶ οἱ πρὸ αὐτῶν 
 4 ἣν A V3 Sv. 
 πάντες, καὶ χοὰς καὶ ἐπιδύ- 
 .ο / 
 σεις ἐποίουν" (καὶ ἐπιλέγει" 
 - μευ ~ 
 Αὗται δ᾽ ἦσαν αἱ ἐπίνοιαι τῆς 
 τ ~ 
 προσκυνήσεως, ὅμοιαι τῶν 
 αὐτῶν ἀσδενείᾳ καὶ ψυχῆς 
 
 ἀτολμίᾳ.) 
 
 (Afterwards, declaring the names 
 of the winds Notus, Boreas, and the 
 rest, he makes this epilogue :)—But 
 these first men consecrated the pro- 
 ductions of the earth, and judged them 
 gods, and worshipped those things, 
 upon which they themselves lived, 
 and all their posterity, and all before 
 them; to these they made libations 
 and sacrifices. (Then he proceeds :— 
 Such were the devices of their wor- 
 ship in accordance with the imbecility 
 and narrowness of their souls.)— 
 
 Euseb, Prep. Evan. 110. 1. ο. 10. 
 
 THE GENERATIONS. 
 
 Εἶτα (φησὶ) γεγενῆσψαι ἐκ 
 ~ - / δι Ν 
 τοῦ Koatia ἀνέμου, καὶ γυ- 
 
 Ἔ χοῦτο δὲ 
 
 A - ΄ 
 vamos αὐτοῦ Βάαυ, 
 νύκτα ἑρμηνεύειν, Αἰῶνα καὶ 
 
 Ui 
 Πρωτόγονον ὥνητοὺς ἄνδρας, 
 οὕτω καλουμένους, εὑρεῖν δὲ 
 \ -“ 
 τὸν Αἰῶνα ἡ τὴν ἀπὸ τῶν 
 δένδρων τροφήν" 
 4 Ν / 
 
 Ex τούτων τοὺς γενομένους 
 
 ~ / 
 χλησδῆναι Γένος καὶ Γενεὰν» 
 χαὶ οἰκῆσαι τὴν Φοινίκην. 
 
 > ~ \ , Ἢ 
 αὐχμῶν δὲ γενομένων, τὰς 
 ~ / 
 χεῖρας ὀρέγειν εἰς οὐρανοὺς 
 
 Ν Ν A Ὁ 4 
 πρὸς Tov ἥλιον. τοῦτον γάρ, 
 
 * Bochart proposes Βάαυτ. 
 
 Of the wind Colpias, and his wife 
 Baau, which is interpreted Night, 
 were begotten two mortal men, Aon 
 and Protogonus so called: and Aon 
 discovered food from trees. 
 
 The immediate descendants of these 
 were called Genus and Genea, and 
 they dwelt in Phoenicia: and when 
 there were great droughts they stretch- 
 ed forth their hands to heaven towards 
 the Sun; for him they supposed to be 
 
 + τὴν Αἰῶνα. Cumb.—Philo and Orellius prefer τὸν. Faber proposes also 
 
 to read Αἰαννα πρωτόγονον above. 
 
6 SANCHONIATHO. 
 
 / / 
 (φησι,) δ εὸν ἐνόμιζον μόνον 
 οὐρανοῦ κύριον, Βεελσάμην 
 καλοῦντες, ὃ ἐστι παρὰ Φοί- 
 -Ὡ- Ν 
 νιξι κύριος οὐρανοῦ, Ζεὺς δὲ 
 map Ἕλλησι. 
 ~~ / 3 
 Ἑξῆς (φησιν) ἀπὸ Γένους * 
 - bs , 
 
 Aidyog καὶ ἸΠρωτογόνου γενη- 
 ΓΞ Ξ: τ κ᾿ 
 ϑῆναι atric παῖδας Ὡὥνητοὺς, 
 οἷς εἶναι ὀνόματα Φῶς καὶ 
 
 tad ᾿ 
 Πῦρ καὶ Φλόξ, οὗτοί, (φησιν,) 
 ἐκ παρατριβὴς ξύλων εὗρον 
 πῦρ, καὶ τὴν χρῆσιν ἐδίδαξαν. 
 Ὑἱοὺς δὲ ἐγέννησαν οὗτοι 
 ,ὔ "oa Ὁ 4 
 μεγέδει τε καὶ ὑπεροχῇ κρείσ- 
 se Ni tae, ~ 
 σονας" rf ὧν TH ὀνόματα τοῖς 
 7 2 / ΕΣ. ΄ὔ 
 ὄρεσιν ἐπετέϑη, ὧν ἐκράτησαν; 
 ~ ~ \ 
 ὡς ἐξ αὐτῶν χληνῆναι τὸ 
 \ \ 4 
 Κάσσιον, χαὶ τὸν Λίβανον 
 . Ἂν \ 
 καὶ τὸν ᾿Δντιλίβανον, καὶ τὸ 
 Bound. 
 > 7, \ > 
 Ex τούτων, (φησὶν,) ἐγεν- 
 γήσησαν Μημροῦμος καὶ δδ 
 “Ὑψυυρώνιος. ἀπὸ μητέρων dé, 
 (φησιν,) ἐχρημάτιζον 
 
 / 
 τότε γυναικὼν avaldyy μισγο- 
 
 τῶν 
 
 7, vee Mary ΄, vi eed 
 μένων οἷς av ἐντύχοιεν. Eita, 
 \ ~ 
 (pyos,) τὸν “Ὑψουράνιον οἰκῆ- 
 σαι Τύρον, καλύβας τε ἐπινοῆ- 
 3 \ / ΟΥ̓ ὔ A 
 σαι ἀπὸ καλάμων καὶ Φρύων καὶ 
 ’ / \ Ν 
 παπύρων. στασιάσαι δὲ πρὸς 
 \ \ , \ , 
 τὸν ἀδελφὸν Οὔσωον, ὃς σκέπην 
 ~ 4 ~_ > ὃ 4 
 τῷ σώματι πρῶτος ἐκ δερμά- 
 
 τῶν ὧν ἴσχυσε συλλαβεὶν || 
 
 * γένους “« of the race of Eon, &c.” Or. 
 } Κάσιον. Plin. Jabl. Or. &c. 
 
 God, the only lord of heaven, calling 
 him Beelsamin, which in the Pheeni- 
 cian dialect signifies Lord of Heaven, 
 but among the Greeks is equivalent 
 to Zeus. 
 
 Afterwards by Genus the son of 
 ion and Protogonus were begotten 
 mortal children, whose names were 
 Phés, Pir, and Phlox. These found 
 out the method of producing fire by 
 rubbing pieces of wood against each 
 other, and taught men the use thereof. 
 
 These begat sons of vast bulk and 
 height, whose names were conferred 
 upon the mountains which they occu- 
 pied: thus from them Cassius, and 
 Libanus, and Antilibanus, and Brathu 
 received their names. 
 
 Memrumus and Hypsuranius were 
 the issue of these men by connexion 
 with their mothers; the women of 
 those times, without shame, having in- 
 tercourse with any men whom they 
 might chance to meet. Hypsuranius 
 inhabited Tyre : and he invented huts 
 constructed of reeds and rushes, and 
 the papyrus. And he fell into enmity 
 with his brother Usous, who was the 
 inventor of clothing for the body which 
 he made of the skins of the wild beasts 
 which he could catch. And when 
 
 Or. 
 Or. 
 
 } κρείττονας. 
 
 § ὁ καὶ, St. || συλλαξὼ.. 
 
Ν 
 δηρίων εὗρε. Ῥαγδαίων δὲ 
 ’ v Ν 
 γενομένων Ὄμιβρων καὶ πνευ- 
 4 / A > 
 μάτων, παρατριβέντα τὰ ἐν 
 τῇ Τύρῳ δένδρα πὺρ ἀνάψαι, 
 χαὶ τὴν αὐτόν, ὕλην καταφ- 
 
 ͵ 
 λέξαι. δένδρου δὲ λαβόμενον 
 τὸν Οὔσωον καὶ ἀποκλαδεύσαν- 
 τα, πρῶτον τολμῆσαι εἰς 
 Νάλασσαν 7 ἐμβηναι. ἀνιε- 
 ρῶται δὲ δύο στήλας πυρί τε 
 καὶ πνεύματι, καὶ προσκυνὴ- 
 oe ~ 
 σαι, ἅμα δὲ σπένδειν αὐταῖς 
 > A 
 ἐξ ὧν ἤγρευε δηρίων. τούτων 
 Ἀ , Ν > 
 δὲ τελευτησάντων, τοὺς ἀπο- 
 λειφϑέντας (φησὶ) ῥάβδους 
 Si are Sepa 
 αὐτοῖς ἀφιερῶσαι, καὶ τὰς 
 ΄ ~ Ἂ , 
 στήλας προσκυνεῖν, καὶ TOU~ 
 < By Μ ν» 
 τοις ἑορτὰς ἄγειν κατ᾽ ἔτος. 
 Χρόνοις δὲ ὕστερον πολλοῖς 
 ἀπὸ τῆς Ὑψυουρανίου γενεᾶς 
 γενέσδαι ᾿Αγρέα καὶ “Area, 
 Ν © ,ὔ Ν᾿ "ἢ ε 
 τοὺς ὡλιείας καὶ ἄγρας εὗρε- 
 - τ 
 τὰς, ἐξ ὧν κληθῆναι ἀγρευτὰς 
 καὶ οἱλιεῖς. 
 z 
 Ἔξ ὧν yevéoSan δύο ἀδελ- 
 \ , ε " \ 
 φοὺς, σιδήρου εὑρετὰς, καὶ 
 τῆς τούτου ἐργασίας" ὧν δά- 
 ἂν ‘\ , - 
 τερὸν τὸν Χρυσωρ λόγους ἀσκῆ- 
 σαι, καὶ ἐπῳδὰς καὶ μαντείας" 
 εἶναι δὲ τοῦτον τὸν Ἥφαι- 
 ε ~ Ν ἈΝ + 
 στον. εὑρεῖν δὲ val ἄγκισ-- 
 Ν 4 Ν 42 \ 
 Tpov, καὶ δέλεαρ, καὶ ὁρμιὰν, 
 \ 70 x -»Ὕ. ΄ 
 καὶ σχεδίαν" πρῶτόν τε πάών- 
 
 τῶν ἀνδιρώπων: πλεῦσαι" διὸ 
 
 * αποκλαδεύοντα. Or. 
 
 SANCHONIATHO. 7 
 there were violent storms of rain and 
 wind, the trees about Tyre being rub- 
 bed against each other, took fire, and 
 all the forest in the neighbourhood 
 was consumed. And Usous having 
 taken a tree, and broken off its boughs, 
 was the first who dared to venture on 
 the sea. And he consecrated two pil- 
 lars to Fire and Wind, and worship- 
 ped them, and poured out upon them 
 the blood of the wild beasts he took 
 in hunting: and when these men were 
 dead, those that remained consecrated 
 to them rods, and worshipped the pil- 
 lars, and held anniversary feasts in 
 honour of them. 
 
 And in times long subsequent to 
 these ; were born of the race of Hypsu- 
 ranius, Agreus and Halieus, the inven- 
 tors of the arts of hunting and fishing, 
 from whom huntsmen and fishermen 
 derive their names. 
 
 Of these were begotten two brothers 
 who discovered iron, and the forging 
 thereof. One of these called Chrysor, 
 who is the same with Hephestus, 
 exercised himself in words, and charms 
 and divinations; and he invented the 
 hook, and the bait, and the fishing- 
 line, and boats of a light construction ; 
 and he was the first of all men that 
 sailed. Wherefore he was worshipped 
 
 1 ϑάλατταν. Or. 
 
8 
 
 καὶ ὡς Deo αὐτὸν μετὰ Sa- 
 vatoy ἐσεβάσδησᾳν" καλεῖσ- 
 
 ξ 
 Yas δὲ 
 
 χιον. ἢ 
 > ~ 4 ’ ΕἸ .“ 
 αὐτοῦ τοίχους φασίν ἐπινοῆσαι 
 
 αὐτὸν καὶ Διαμί- 
 
 Οἱ δὲ τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 
 
 ἐκ πλίνθων. 
 Μετὰ ταῦτα ἐκ τοῦ γένους 
 , vf 
 τούτου γενέσψαι νεανίδας δύο, 
 ᾿ ~ x - Ν 
 καλεῖσνιαι δὲ αὐτῶν τὸν μὲν 
 Ν “- / 
 Τεχνίτην, τὸν δὲ Γήϊνον Αὐτόχ- 
 Sova. Οὗτοι ἐπενόησαν τῷ 
 - nw ΤῊ ὁ 4 
 πηλῷ τῆς πλίνϑου συμ κιγνύειν 
 φορυτὸν καὶ τῷ ἡλίῳ αὐτὰς ἦ 
 τερσαίνειν" ἀλλὰ καὶ στέγας 
 ἐξεῦρον. 
 > \ "ἢ ΟΝ, a 
 Απὸ τούτων ἐγένοντο ἕτεροι; 
 a Ν - 
 ὧν ὃ μὲν ᾿Αγρὸς ἐκαλεῖτο, ὃ 
 I / κὸ 
 δὲ ᾿Αγρούηρος ἢ ᾿Αγρότης, οὗ 
 , Ψ 
 καὶ ξόανον εἶναι μάλα σεξάσ- 
 Ν Ν 4 
 μιον, καὶ ναὸν ζυγοφορούμενον 
 Ν 
 ἐν Φοινίκῃ" παρὰ δὲ Βυβλί- 
 / “ ͵7 
 og t ἐξαιρέτως Seay ὁ μέγισ-- 
 > , ἘΝ ῃ \ 
 τος ὀνομάζεται" ἐπενόησαν δὲ 
 ᾿ , ~ 
 οὗτοι αὐλὰς προστιδϑένᾳι τοῖς 
 of \ 
 οἴκοις, χαὶ περιβόλαια καὶ 
 4 ‘oe , > , 
 σπήλαια" ἐκ τούτων ἀγρόται 
 Ν / A 
 καὶ κυνηγοί. Οὗτοι δὲ ᾿Αλή- 
 ἣν 4 “τ᾿. 
 ται καὶ Τιτάνες καλοῦνται. 
 3 Ν 
 Ana τούτων yeversas” Αμυ- 
 ἈΝ 
 νον καὶ Μάγον, οἱ κατέδειξαν 
 κώμας καὶ ποίμνας. 
 ᾿Απὸ τούτων γενέσῶϑαι Μι- 
 
 A \ 
 σὼρ καὶ ΣΣυδὺκ, τουτέστιν 
 
 ἘΞ Ala μειλίκιον, 
 
 Mont. 
 1 BibAvors. 
 
 SANCHONIATHO. 
 
 after his death as a God, under the 
 name of Diamichius. And it is said 
 that his brothers invented the art of 
 building walls with bricks. 
 
 Afterwards, of this race were born 
 two youths, one of whom was called 
 Technites, and the other was called 
 Geinus Autochthén. These discovered 
 the method of mingling stubble with 
 the loam of bricks, and οἱ baking them 
 in the sun ; they were also the inven- 
 
 tors of tiling. 
 
 By these were begotten others, of 
 whom one was named Agrus, the other 
 Agrouerus or Agrotes, of whom in 
 Pheenicia there was a statue held in 
 the highest veneration, and a temple 
 drawn by yokes of oxen: and at By- 
 blus he is called, by way of eminence, 
 the greatest of the Gods. These ad- 
 ded to the houses, courts and porticos 
 and crypts: husbandmen, and such 
 as hunt with dogs, derive their origin 
 from these: they are called also Aletz, 
 and Titans. 
 
 From these were descended Amy- 
 nus and Magus, who taught men to 
 construct villages and tend flocks, 
 
 By these men were begotten Misor 
 and Sydye, that is, Well-freed and 
 
 Or. 
 
 + αὐτοὺς. 
 
 Vig. Col. St. 
 

 
 εὔλντον καὶ δίκαιον" οὗτοι THY 
 τοῦ ἁλὸς χρῆσιν εὗρον. 
 
 "Ano Μισὼρ Τάαυτος, ὃς 
 εὗρε τὴν τῶν πρώτων στοιχείων 
 γραφήν ὃν Αἰγύπτιοι μὲν 
 Θωὼρ, Ἐ᾿Αλεξανδρεῖς δὲ Θωὺδ, 
 
 Ἕλληνες δὲ Ἑ,μῆν ἐκάλεσαν" 
 
 ἐκ δὲ τοῦ Συδὺκ, Διόσκουροι 
 ἢ Κάξειροι ἢ Κορύξαντες ἢ 
 Σαμοϊδρᾷκες. Οὗτοί, (φησι;) 
 πρῶτοι πλοῖον εὗρον. 
 
 Ἔχ τούτων γεγόνασιν ἕτε- 
 por, οἵ καὶ βοτάνας εὗρον, καὶ 
 τὴν τῶν δακετῶν ἴασιν καὶ 
 ἐπῳδάς. 
 
 Κατὰ τούτους γίνεταί τις 
 
 Ἐλιοῦν καλούμενος Ὕψιστος, 
 
 καὶ ϑήλεια λεγομένη Βηρούδ᾽ 
 οἵ καὶ vated nov περὶ Βύβλον. 
 Ἐξ ὧν γεννῶται ᾿Ἐπίγειος ἢ 
 Αὐτόχϑων, ὃν ὕστερον ἐκάλεσαν 
 Οὐρανόν" ὡς ἀπ᾿ αὐτοῦ καὶ τὸ 
 ὑπὲρ ἡμᾶς στοιχεῖον, δὶ ὑπερ- 
 βολὴν τοῦ κάλλους ὀνομάζειν 
 οὐρανόν. Τεννᾶται δὲ τούτῳ 
 ἀδελφὴ ἐκ τῶν προειρημένων, 
 n καὶ ἐκλήϑη Γῆ, καὶ διὰ τὸ 
 κάλλος ἀπ᾽ αὐτῆς, (φησὶν,) 
 ἐκάλεσαν τὴν ὁμώνυμιν γῆν. 
 Ὃ δὲ τούτων πατὴρ 6 
 Ὕψιστος ἐκ συμβολῆς δηρίων 
 τελευτήσας ἀφιερώδη, ᾧ καὶ 
 χρὰς καὶ δυσίας οἱ παῖδες 
 ἐτέλεσαν. ᾿ 
 
 ~ ΄ 
 
 ͵ 
 
 SANCHONIATHO, 9 
 
 Just: and they found out the use of 
 salt. 
 
 From Misor descended Taautus, who 
 invented the writing of the first let- 
 ters: him the Egyptians called Thoor, 
 the Alexandrians Thoyth, and the 
 Greeks Hermes. But from Sydyc 
 descended the Dioscuri, or Cabiri, or 
 Corybantes, or Samothraces: these 
 
 (he says) first built a ship complete. 
 
 From these descended others, who 
 
 -were the discoverers of medicinal 
 
 herbs, and of the cure of poisons and 
 of charms. 
 
 Contemporary with these was one 
 Elioun, called Hypsistus, (the most 
 high); and his wife named Beruth, 
 and they dwelt about Byblus. 
 
 By these was begotten Epigeus or 
 Autochthon, whom they afterwards 
 called Ouranus (Heaven); so. that 
 from him that element, which is over 
 us, by reason of its excellent beauty 
 is named heaven: and he had a sister 
 of the same parents, and she was 
 called Ge (Earth), and by reason of 
 her beauty the earth was called by the 
 same name. 
 
 Hypsistus, the father of these, 
 having been killed in a conflict with 
 wild beasts, was consecrated, and his 
 children offered libations and sacri- 
 fices unto him. 
 
 * ρωὼδε Mont. Or. 
 
10 
 
 Παραλαβὼν δὲ ὁ Οὐρανος 
 τὴν τοῦ πατρὸς ἀρχὴν, ἄγεται 
 πρὸς γάμον τὴν ἀδελφὴν Γῆν», 
 καὶ ποιεῖται ἐξ αὐτῆς παῖδας 
 δ΄ Ἴλον τὸν καὶ Κρόνον, καὶ 
 Βέτυλον, καὶ Δαγὼν, ὅς ἐστι 
 Σίτων, καὶ λτλαντα. ἡ 
 
 Καὶ ἐξ ἄλλων δὲ γαμετῶν 
 ὁ Οὐρανὸς πολλὴν ἔσχε γε- 
 νεών" διὸ ual χαλεπαίνουσα 
 ἡ Γῆ, τὸν Οὐρανὸν ζηλοτυ- 
 ποῦσα éxduilev, ὡς καὶ δια- 
 στῆναι ἀλλήλων. ὋὉ δὲ 
 Οὐρανὸς ὠποχωρήσας αὐτῆς; 
 μέτα βίας, ὅτε καὶ ἐβούλετο 
 ἐπιὼν, καὶ πλησιάζων αὐτὴ 
 πάλιν ἀπηλλάττετο, ἐπεχεί- 
 ρει δὲ καὶ τοὺς ἐξ αὐτῆς 
 παῖδας διαφδϑείρειν. τὴν δὲ 
 Τὴν 
 συμμαχίαν αὐτῇ συλλεξα- 
 μένην" 
 
 Εἰς ἄνδρας δὲ προελδὼν ὁ 
 
 ὠμύνεσδαι πολλάκις, 
 
 Κρόνος Ἑρμῇ τῷ τρισμεγίστῳ 
 συμβούλῳ καὶ Bond® χρώμε- 
 vos (οὗτος γὰρ ἦν αὐτοῦ 
 γραμματεὺς,) τὸν 
 Οὐρανὸν ἀμύνεται, τιμωρῶν 
 τῇ μητρί. 
 
 Κρόνου δὲ γίνονται παῖδες; 
 
 TAT é pa 
 
 Περσεφόνη καὶ "AS ma. Ἢ 
 μὲν οὖν πρώτη πάρϑενος ἐτε- 
 λεύτα" τῆς δὲ ᾿Αϑηνᾶς γνώμῃ 
 
 Ν 
 Kas κατεσκεύασε 
 
 Ἑρμοῦ 
 Κρόνος ἐκ σιδήρου ἅρπην καὶ 
 
 δόρυ" εἶτα ὃ Ἑρμῆς τοῖς τοῦ 
 
 SANCHONIATHO, 
 
 But Ouranus, succeeding to the 
 kingdom of his father, contracted a 
 marriage with his sister Ge, and had 
 by her four sons, Ilus who is called 
 Cronus, and Betylus, and Dagon, which 
 signifies Siton (Bread-corn,) and 
 Atlas. 
 
 But by other wives Ouranus had 
 much issue ; at which Ge, being vexed 
 and jealous of Ouranus, reproached 
 him so that they parted from each 
 other: nevertheless Ouranus returned 
 to her, again by force whenever he 
 thought proper, and having laid with 
 her, again departed: he attempted 
 also to kill the children whom he had 
 by her; but Ge often defended her- 
 self with the assistance of auxiliary 
 powers. 
 
 But when Cronus arrived at man’s 
 estate, acting by the advice and with 
 the assistance of Hermes Trismegis- 
 tus, who was his secretary, he opposed 
 himself to his father Ouranus, that he 
 might avenge the indignities which 
 had been offered to his mother. 
 
 And to Cronus were born children, 
 Persephone and Athena; the former 
 of whom died a virgin; but, by the 
 advice of Athena and Hermes, Cronus 
 made a scimitar and a spear of iron. 
 Then Hermes addressed the allies of 
 Cronus with magic words, and wrought 
 

 
 συμμάχοις λόγους 
 μαγείας διαλεχϑεὶς πόνον 
 
 Κρόνου 
 
 ἐνεποίησε τοῖς Ἐ κατ᾽ Οὐρα- 
 νὸν ἡ μάχης ὑπὲρ τῆς Τῆς. 
 
 4, J , Ν > ἣν 
 καὶ οὕτω Κρόνος τὸν Οὐρανὸν 
 πολέμῳ συμβαλὼν τῆς ἀρχῆς 
 ἤλασε, καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν 
 διεδέξατο. ἑ 
 μάχῃ καὶ ἢ 
 
 4 
 
 Οὐρανοῦ σύγκοιτος ἐγκύμων 
 
 \ 
 ἅλω δὲ ἐν τῇ 
 
 / ~ 
 ἐπέραστος τοῦ 
 
 εἶσα, ἣν ἐκδίδωσιν ὁ ἹΚρόνος 
 εἰς γάμον τῷ Δαγῶνι" τίκτει 
 δὲ παρὰ τούτῳ, ὃ κατὰ γασ- 
 τρὸς ἐξ Οὐρανοῦ ἔφερεν, ὃ 
 καὶ ἐκάλεσε Δημαροῦν. 
 
 ἘἘπὶ τούτοις 6 Κρόνος τεῖχος 
 περιβάλλει τῇ ἑαυτοῦ οἰκήσει, 
 καὶ πρώτην πόλιν χτίζει τὴν 
 Μετὰ 
 
 ταῦτα τὸν ἀδελφὸν τὸν ἴδιον 
 
 ἐπὶ Φοικίκης Βύβλον. 
 
 ἤλτλαντα ὑπονοήσας ὃ Κρόνος, 
 μετὰ γνωμῆς τοῦ ‘Epuot εἰς 
 βάδος γῆς ἐμβαλὼν κατέ- 
 χωσε. 
 
 Κατὰ τοῦτον τὸν t χρο- 
 νὸν of ἀπὸ τῶν Διοσκούρων 
 σχεδίας καὶ πλοῖα συνδέντες, 
 ἔπλευσαν. καὶ ἐκριφέντες ὃ 
 κατὰ τὸ Κάσσιον ὄρος ναὸν 
 αὐτόν, ἀφιέρωσαν. 
 
 OF δὲ σύμμαχοι Ἴλου τοῦ 
 Κρόνου Ἔλωεὶμ || ἐπεκλὴϑη- 
 σαν, ὡς ἄν ΚΚρόνίοι, οὗτοι 
 ἦσαν οἱ λεγόμενοι ἀπὸ Κρόνου. 
 
 * τῆς. Or. 
 Ξ 
 
 } τοῦτον χρόνου. Or. 
 
 ΒΑΝΟΗΟΝΊΑΤΗΟ. 
 
 Ἢ Οὐρανοῦ. 
 § exxpipevres. Or. 
 
 11 
 
 in them a keen desire to make war 
 against Ouranus in behalf of Ge. And 
 Cronus having thus overcome Ouranus 
 in battle, drove him from his kingdom, 
 and succeeded him in the imperial 
 power. In the battle was taken a well- 
 beloved concubine of Ouranus who was 
 pregnant; and Cronus bestowed her 
 in marriage upon Dagon, and, whilst 
 she was with him, she was delivered 
 of the child which she had conceived 
 by Ouranus, and called his name De- 
 
 marous. 
 
 After these events Cronus sur- 
 rounded his habitation with a wall, 
 and founded Byblus, the first city of 
 Phoenicia. Afterwards Cronus having 
 conceived a suspicion of his own bro- 
 ther Atlas, by the advice of Hermes, 
 threw him into a deep cavern in the 
 earth, and buried him. 
 
 At this time the descendants of the 
 Dioscuri, having built some light and 
 other more complete ships, put to sea; 
 and being cast away over against 
 Mount Cassius, there consecrated a 
 temple. 
 
 But the auxiliaries of Ilus, who is 
 Cronus, were called Eloeim, as it were, 
 the allies of Cronus; being so called 
 after Cronus. And Cronus, having a 
 
 ϑυρανοῦ. Col. Marg. 
 4 ἐπὶ. St. 
 
 Vig. Marg. 
 || Ἔλοειμ. Or. 
 
13 
 
 ἹΚρόνος δὲ υἱὸν ἔχων Σάδιδον, 
 ἰδίῳ αὑτὸν σιδήρῳ διεχρήσατο, 
 δ’ ὑπονοίας αὐτὸν ἐσχηκὼς, 
 καὶ τῆς ψυχῆς, αὐτόχειρ τοῦ 
 παιδὸς γενόμενος, ἐστέρησεν. 
 “Ὡσαύτως καὶ δυγατρὸς ἰδίας 
 τήν κεφαλὴν ἀπέτεμεν. ὡς 
 πάντας πεπλῆχαιἷ Yeads τὴν 
 ἹΚρόνου γνώμην. 
 
 Χρόνου δὲ προϊόντος Οὐρανὸς 
 ἐν φυγῇ τυγχάνων, ϑυγατερα 
 αὐτοῦ πάρϑενον ᾿Αστάρτην 
 per ἑτέρων αὐτῆς ἀδελφῶν 
 δύο, Ῥέας καὶ Διώνης, δόλῳ 
 τὸν Κρόνον ἀνελεῖν ὑποπέμπει" 
 ἃς καὶ ἑλὼν 6 ἹΚρόνος κουρι- 
 δίας γαμετὰς ἀδελφὰς οὖσας 
 ἐποιήσατο. Τνοὺς δὲ ὁ Οὐρα- 
 νὸς ἐπιστρατεύει χατὰ τοῦ 
 Κρόνου Εἱμαρμένην καὶ “Opay 
 ped ἑτέρων συμμάχων. καὶ 
 ταύτας ἐξοικειωσάμενος ὃ 
 Κρόνος παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ κατέσχεν. 
 Ἔτι δέ, φησιν, ἐπενόησε Teds 
 Οὐρανὸς λίϑους 
 ἐμψύχους μηχανησάμενος. 
 
 , 
 Kpovm δὲ ἐγένοντο ἀπὸ 
 
 Βαιτύλια, 
 
 ᾿Αστάρτης ϑυγατέρες ἑπτὰ 
 Τιτανίδες ἢ ᾿Αρτέμιδες" καὶ 
 πάλιν τῷ αὐτῷ γίνονται ἀπὸ 
 Ρέας παῖδες ἑπτὰ, ὧν 6 
 νεώτατος ἅμα τῇ γενέσει 
 ἀφιερώϑη" καὶ ἀπὸ Διώνης 
 ϑήλειαι" καὶ ἀπὸ ᾿Αστάρτης 
 πάλιν ἄῤῥενες δύο, Πόϑος καὶ 
 
 Ἔρως. 
 
 SANCHONIATHO. 
 
 son called Sadidus, dispatched him 
 with his own sword, because he held 
 him in suspicion, and with his own 
 hand deprived his child of life. And 
 in like manner he cut off the head of 
 his own daughter, so that all the gods 
 were astonished at the disposition of 
 Cronus. 
 
 But in process of time, whilst 
 Ouranus was still in banishment, he 
 sent his daughter Astarte, being a 
 virgin, with two other of her sisters, 
 Rhea and Dione, to cut off Cronus by 
 treachery ; but Cronus took the dam- 
 sels, and married them notwithstand- 
 ing they were his own sisters. When 
 Ouranus understood this, he sent 
 Eimarmene and Hora with other 
 auxiliaries to make war against Cro- 
 nus: but Cronus gained the affections 
 of these also, and detained them with 
 himself. Moreover, the god Ouranus 
 devised Beetulia, contriving stones that 
 moved as having life. 
 
 And by Astarte Cronus had seven 
 daughters called Titanides, or Arte- 
 mides ; by Rhea also he had seven 
 sons, the youngest of whom was con- 
 secrated from his birth ; also by Dione 
 he had daughters; and by Astarte 
 again he had two other sons, Pothos 
 and Eros. 
 
 * ἐκπεπλῆχϑαι, St. 
 

 
 Ὃ δὲ Δαγὼν ἐπειδὴ εὗρε 
 σῖτον καὶ ἄροτρον, ἐκλήνη 
 Ζεὺς ᾿Δρότριος- 
 
 Συδύκῳ δὲ τῷ λεγομένῳ 
 δικαίῳ, μία τῶν Τιτανίδων 
 συνελδοῦσα γεννᾷ τὸν ᾿Ασκλη- 
 πιόν. «Ἐγεννήϑησαν δὲ καὶ 
 ἐν Περαίᾳ Β΄ Κρονῳ τρεῖς 
 παῖδες», ἹΚρόνος ὁμώνυμος τῷ 
 πατρὶ, καὶ Ζεὺς Βῆλος, καὶ 
 ᾿Απόλλων. 
 
 Κατὰ τούτους γίνονται 
 Πόντος καὶ Τύφων καὶ Νη- 
 ρεὺς, πατὴρ Πόντου" ἀπὸ δὲ 
 τοῦ Πόντου γίνεται Σιδών. ἡ 
 wat ὑπερβολὴν εὐφωνίας 
 πρώτη ὕμνον δῆς εὗρε, καὶ 
 Ποσειδῶν. 
 
 Τῷ δὲ Δημαροῦντι γίνεται 
 Μελίκαρνος 6 καὶ Ἡρακλῆς. 
 
 Εἶτα πάλιν Οὐρανὸς πολε- 
 μεῖ Πόντῳ, καὶ ἀποστὰς Δη- 
 μαροῦντι προστίψεται" ἔπεισί 
 τε Πόντῳ ὃ Δημαροῦς, τρό- 
 πουταί τε ἦ αὐτὸν ὁ Πόντος" 
 ὁ δὲ Δημαροῦς φυγῆς ϑυσίαν 
 ηὔξατο. 
 
 "Eres δὲ τριακοστῷ δευτέρῳ 
 τῆς ἑαυτοῦ κρατήσεως καὶ 
 βασιλείας, ὁ Ἴλος τοῦτ᾽ ἐστὶν 
 ὁ Κρόνος Οὐρανὸν τὸν πατέρα 
 λοχήσας ἐν τόπῳ τινὶ μεσο- 
 γείῳ, καὶ λαβὼν ὑποχείριον 
 
 5" ͵ὕ > nn ‘A >) ~ 
 ἐκτέμνει αὐτοῦ τὰ αἰδοῖα 
 
 SANCHONIATHO. 13 
 
 And Dagon, after he had found out 
 bread-corn, and the plough, was called 
 Zeus Arotrius. 
 
 To Sydyc, who was called the just, 
 one of the Titanides bare Asclepius : 
 and to Cronus there were born also in 
 Perza three sons, Cronus bearing the 
 same name with his father, and Zeus 
 Belus, and Apollo. 
 
 Contemporary with these were Pon- 
 tus, and Typhon, and Nereus the 
 father of Pontus: from Pontus de- 
 scended Sidon, who by the excellence 
 of her singing first invented the hymns 
 of odes or praises: and Poseidon. 
 
 But to Demarous was born Meli- 
 carthus, who is also called Heracles. 
 
 Ouranus then made war against 
 Pontus, but afterwards relinquishing 
 the attack he attached himself to De- 
 marous, when Demarous invaded 
 Pontus : but Pontus put him to flight, 
 and Demarous vowed a sacrifice for 
 his escape. 
 
 In the thirty-second year of his 
 power and reign, Ilus, who is Cronus, 
 having laid an ambuscade for his 
 father Ouranus in a certain place si- 
 tuated in the middle of the earth, when 
 he had got him into his hands dis- 
 membered him over against the foun- 
 
 * Παραίᾳ. Vig. Col. Tot εν Or: 
 
14 
 
 σύνεγγυς πηγῶν τε καὶ ποτα- 
 μῶν. Ia ἀφιερώδη ὁ Οὐρα- 
 νὸς, καὶ amnpticsy αὐτοῦ τὸ 
 πνεῦμα, καὶ ἀπέσταξεν αὐτοῦ 
 τὸ αἷμα τῶν αἰδοίων εἰς τὰς 
 πηγὰς καὶ τῶν ποταμῶν τὰ 
 ὕδατα, καὶ μέχρ: τούτου δεί- 
 χνυται τὸ χωρίον. 
 
 (Πάλιν δὲ 6 συγγραφεὺς 
 τούτοις ἐπιφέρει med ἕτερᾳ 
 λέγων.) ᾿Αστάρτη δὲ ἡ με- 
 γίστη, καὶ Ζεὺς Δημαροῦς, 
 καὶ ᾿Αδωδὸς βασιλεὺς Sedy 
 ἐβασίλευον τῆς χώρας Kpovov 
 γνώμῃ" ἡ δὲ ᾿Αστάρτη ἐπέ- 
 Syne τῇ ἰδίᾳ κεφαλῇ βασι- 
 λείας παράσημον κεφαλὴν 
 ταύρου" περινοστοῦσα δὲ τὴν 
 οἰκουμένην, εὗρεν ἀεροπετῆ 
 ἀστέρα," ὃν καὶ ἀνελομένη ἐν 
 Τύρῳ τῇ ἁγίᾳ νήσῳ ἀφιέρωσε. 
 Τὴν δὲ ᾿Αστάρτην Φοίνικες 
 τὴν ᾿Αφροδίτην εἶναι λέγουσι. 
 
 Καὶ 6 Κρόνος δὲ περιϊὼν 
 τὴν οἰκουμένην τῇ ᾿Ασηνᾷ τῇ 
 ἑαυτοῦ δυγατρὶ δίδωσι, τῆς 
 ᾿Αττιχῆς τὴν βασιλείαν. 
 Δοΐμου δὲ γενομένου καὶ eprto- 
 pag, τὸν ἑαυτοῦ μονογενὴ υἱὸν 
 Κρόνος Οὐρανῷ πατρὶ ὁλο- 
 καρποῖ, καὶ τὰ αἰδοῖα περι- 
 ποιῆσαι καὶ 
 συμμάχους 
 καὶ μετ᾽ οὐ 
 
 Ν 
 
 τέμνεται, ταυτὸ 
 Ν 4.9 "Ὁ 
 τοὺς ἅμ᾽ αὐτῷ 
 
 κατανᾳγκάσας" 
 
 SANCHONIATHO. 
 
 tains and rivers. There Ouranus was 
 consecrated, and his spirit was sepa- 
 rated, and the blood of his parts 
 flowed into the fountains and the 
 waters of the rivers; and the place, 
 which was the scene of this transac- 
 
 tion, is shewed even to this day. 
 
 (Then our historian, after some + 
 
 other things, goes on thus:) But 
 Astarte called the greatest, and De- 
 marous named Zeus, and Adodus who 
 is entitled the king of gods, reigned 
 over the country by the consent of 
 Cronus: and Astarte put upon her 
 head, as the mark of her sovereignty, 
 a bull’s head : and travelling about the 
 habitable world, she found a star fall- 
 ing through the air, which she took 
 up, and consecrated in the holy island 
 of Tyre: and the Pheenicians say that 
 Astarte is the same as Aphrodite. 
 
 Moreover, Cronus visiting the dif- 
 ferent regions of habitable world, gave 
 to his daughter Athena the kingdom 
 of Attica: and when there happened 
 a plague with a great mortality, Cro- 
 nus offered up his only begotten son 
 as a sacrifice to his father Ouranus, 
 and circumcised himself, and compel- 
 led his allies to do the same : and not 
 long afterwards he consecrated after 
 his death another of his sons, called 
 Boch. 
 
 * ἀστερίαν. 
 

 
 πολὺ ἕτερον αὐτοῦ παῖδα ἀπὸ 
 Mats 
 
 Θάνα- 
 
 “Ῥέας, ὀνομαζόμενον 
 amovavorra ἀφιεροῖ" 
 τὸν δὲ τοῦτον καὶ Πλούτωνα 
 Φοίνικες ὀνομάζουσι. 
 
 Καὶ ἐπὶ τούτοις ὃ Κρόνος 
 Βύβλον μὲν τὴν πόλιν Seg * 
 Βααλτίδι, τῇ καὶ Διώνῃ 
 δίδωσι», Βηρυτὸν δὲ Ποσειδῶνι 
 καὶ Καβήροις ᾿Αγρόταις τὲ 
 καὶ ἁλιεῦσιν, of καὶ Πόντου 
 
 λείψανα 
 
 ἀφιέρωσαν. 
 
 εἰς τὴν Βηρυτὸν 
 Πρὸ δὲ τούτων Seog Τάαυ- 
 »": Ν > N 
 τὸς μιμησάμενος τὸν Οὐρανὸν, 
 ~ ~ 
 
 τῶν SeBy erg Kpovov τε καὶ 
 
 Δαγῶνος, καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν διε- 
 
 τύπωσεν τοὺς ἱεροὺς τῶν στοι- 
 
 χείων χαρακτῆρας. ἐπενόησε 
 
 Ν Ν " / 4 
 δὲ καὶ τῷ Κρόνῳ παράσημα 
 7 4 / 
 
 βασιλείας, ὄμματα τέσσαρα 
 
 > ~ > Si, \ ~ 
 
 ἐκ τῶν ἐμπροσδϑίων καὶ τῶν 
 
 ~ ἣν ~ 
 
 ὀπισδ)ίων μερῶν" δύο δὲ ἡσυχῇ 
 
 rd \ 2 Ἂ ~ ΝΜ 
 μύοντα, καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν μων 
 ΄ Ν 
 πτερὰ τέσσαρα᾽ δύο μὲν ὡς 
 Ν / 
 
 ἱπτάμενα, δύο δὲ ὡς ὑφειμένα, 
 Ν ,ὔ 7 
 
 To δὲ σύμβολον ἦν, ἐπειδὴ 
 / 4 
 
 Κρόνος κοιμώμενος ἔβλεπε, καὶ 
 
 > \ > - e ἂν ΤΣ 4 
 
 ἐγρηγορὼς ἐκοιμᾶτο" καὶ ἐπὶ 
 
 τῶν πτερῶν ὁμοίως, ὅτι ἀνα- 
 
 / 2 S¢ 4 
 
 παυόμενος ἵπτατο καὶ ἱπτά- 
 
 ~ Ν 
 
 μένος Τοῖς δὲ 
 
 λοιποῖς Sects δύο ἑκάστῳ 
 
 ἀνεπαύετο. 
 
 uA \ - ΝΜ 
 πτερώματα ἐπὶ τῶν ὦμων, ὡς 
 
 SANCHONIATHO. 
 
 * my Sex. 
 
 15 
 
 Muth, whom he had by Rhea; this 
 (Muth) the Phoenicians esteem the 
 same as Death and Pluto. 
 
 After these things, Cronus gave the 
 city of Byblus to the goddess Baaltis, 
 which is Dione, and Berytus to Posei- 
 don, and to the Caberi who were hus- 
 bandmen and fishermen: and they 
 consecrated the remains of Pontus at 
 Berytus. 
 
 But before these things the god 
 Taautus, having pourtrayed Ouranus, 
 represented also the countenances of 
 the gods Cronus, and Dagon, and the 
 sacred characters of the elements. He 
 contrived also for Cronus the ensign 
 of his royal power, having four eyes 
 in the parts before and in the parts 
 behind, two of them closing as in 
 sleep; and upon the shoulders four 
 wings, two in the act of flying, and 
 And the 
 symbol was, that Cronus whilst he slept 
 was watching, and reposed whilst he 
 was awake. And in like manner with 
 respect to the wings, that he was fly- 
 ing whilst he rested, yet rested whilst 
 he flew. But for the other gods there 
 were two wings only to each upon his 
 shoulders, to intimate that they flew 
 under the controul of Cronus; and 
 
 two reposing as at rest. 
 
 Or. 
 
16 
 
 , . 
 ὅτι δὴ συνίπταντο τῷ Κρόνῳ 
 \ nx \ ᾿ ἣν Ὁ 
 καὶ αὐτῷ δὲ πάλιν ἐπὶ τῆς 
 - a \ 
 κεφαλῆς πτερὰ δύο, ev ἐπὶ 
 n~ ¢ ~ \ 
 TOU ἡγεμονικωτάτου νοῦ; καὶ 
 a Ὁ ΄ 
 ἐν ἐπὶ τῆς αἰσδ)ήσεως. 
 + \ / 
 "EANoy δὲ ὃ Κρόνος εἰς 
 , 2 « \ 
 Νότου χώρων, ἅπασαν τὴν 
 Y δ - 
 Αἴγυπτον ἔδωκε δεῷ Τααύτῳ, 
 « tA 5. Ὁ ld 
 ὅπως βασίλειον αὐτῷ γένηται. 
 Ἂν \ \ ~ 
 Ταῦτα δὲ (φησὶ) πρῶτοι 
 πάντων ὑπεμνηματίσαντο οἱ 
 παῖδες Κάβηροι, 
 ἀδελφὸς 
 
 ε 5» ~ > / 
 ὡς αὑτοῖς ἐνετεί- 
 
 ἑπτὰ Συδὲκ 
 Ν 2 " Ὁ 
 καὶ ὄγδοος αὐτῶν 
 > \ 
 ᾿Ασκληπιὸς, 
 Aato Vets Τάαυτος. 
 Ταῦτα πάντα ὃ Θαβίωνος 
 παῖς πρῶτος τῶν ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος 
 γ, 
 γεγονότων Φοινίκων ἱεροφάντης 
 ΄ ~ ~ 
 ἀλληγορήσας τοῖς τε φυσικοῖς 
 4 xn / 5 
 καὶ κοσμικοῖς πάσψεσιν ἀνω- 
 / LN ~ " ~ 
 μίξας παρέδωκε τοῖς ὀργιῶσι 
 . - 
 καὶ τελετῶν κατάρχρουσι προ- 
 4 
 φήταις" of δὲ τὸν τύφον αὔξειν 
 ἈΝ - ~ 
 ἐκ παντὸς ἐπινοοῦντες, τοῖς 
 7 ~ / uA 
 αὐτῶν διαδόχοις παρέδωσαν 
 Ν -" > 4 6, te “9 
 καὶ τοῖς ἐπεισάκτοις" ὧν εἷς 
 ἢ Χ - ~ 
 ἦν καὶ Ισιρις, τῶν τριῶν γραμ.- 
 / ‘\ ~ 
 μάτων εὑρετὴς, ἀδελφὸς Χνᾶ 
 -Ὁ ΄ / 
 TOU πρώτου μετονομασωέντος 
 
 Φοίνικος. 
 
 OF THE MYSTICAL 
 
 "Eds ἦν τοῖς παλαιοῖς ἐν 
 
 ταῖς μεγάλαις συμφοραῖς τῶν 
 
 SANCHONIATHO. 
 
 there were also two wings upon the 
 head, the one as a symbol of the 
 intellectual part, the mind, and the 
 other for the senses. 
 
 And Cronus visiting the country of 
 the south, gave all Egypt to the god 
 Taautus, that it might be his king- 
 dom. 
 
 These things, says he, the Caberi, 
 the seven sons of Sydyc, and their 
 eighth brother Asclepius, first of all 
 set down in the records in obedience 
 to the commands of the god Taautus. 
 
 All these things the son of Thabion, 
 the first Hierophant of all among the 
 Pheenicians, allegorized and mixed up 
 with the occurrences and accidents of 
 nature and the world, and delivered 
 to the priests and prophets, the super- 
 intendants of the mysteries : and they, 
 perceiving the rage for these allego- 
 ries increase, delivered them to their 
 successors, and to foreigners: of whom 
 one was Isiris, the inventor of the 
 three letters, the brother of Chna who 
 is called the first Phoenician.—Euseb. 
 Prep. Evan. lib. I. ο. 10. 
 
 SACRIFICE OF THE PHGNICIANS. 
 
 It was the custom among the an- 
 cients, in times of great calamity, in 
 
SANCHONIATHO, 17 
 
 κινδύνων, ἀντὶ τῆς πάντων 
 φϑορᾶς,τὸ ἠγαπημένον τῶν τέκ- 
 νων» τοὺς κρατοῦντας ἢ πόλεως 
 ἢ ἔϑνους, εἰς σφαγὴν ἐπιδιδόναι 
 λύτρον τοῖς τιμωροῖς δαίμοσι. 
 κατεσφάττοντο δὲ οἱ διδόμε- 
 νοι μυστικῶς. Κρόνος τοίνυν, 
 ὃν οἱ Φοίνικες Ἰσραὴλ * προσ- 
 ἀγορεύουσι, βασιλεύων τῆς 
 χώρας, καὶ ὕστερον μετὰ τὴν 
 τοῦ βίου τελευτὴν εἰς τὸν τοῦ 
 Κρόνου ἀστέρα καδιερωδεὶς, 
 ἐξ ἐπιχωρίας Νύμφης ᾿Ανω- 
 Boer} λεγομένης, υἱὸν ἔχων 
 povoyern, ὃν διὰ τοῦτο ᾿Ιεοὺδ 
 ἐκάλουν, τοῦ μονογενοῦς οὕτως 
 ἔτι καὶ νῦν καλουμένου παρὰ 
 τοὶς Φοίνιξι, κινδύνων ἐκ πο- 
 λέμου μεγίστων κατειληφότων 
 τὴν χώραν, βασιλικῷ κοσμή- 
 σας σχήματι τὸν υἱὸν, βωμὸν 
 τὲ κατασκευασάμενος κατέ- 
 
 ϑυσεν. 
 
 ΟΕ 
 
 \ 5 - 
 
 Τὴν μὲν οὖν τοῦ Δράκοντος 
 φύσιν καὶ τῶν ὀφέων αὐτὸς 
 ἐξεδείασεν ὃ Τάαντος, καὶ 
 per αὐτὸν αὖδις Φοίνικές τε 
 
 Ἀ 
 καὶ Αἰγύπτιοι. πνευματικώ- 
 
 A % ~ Δ 
 τατον γὰρ τὸ ζῶον πάντων 
 
 ~ ε ~ Ν ~ Le 
 τῶν ἑρπετῶν καὶ πυρῶδες on 
 
 * IA or ἴλυς, Marsham. Bry 
 
 order to prevent the ruin of all, for the 
 rulers of the city or nation to sacrifice 
 to the avenging deities the most be- 
 loved of their children as the price of 
 redemption : they who were devoted 
 for this purpose were offered mysti- 
 cally. For Cronus, whom the Phe- 
 nicians call I], and who after his death 
 was deified and instated in the planet 
 which bears his name, when king, 
 had by a nymph of the country called 
 Anobret an only son, who on that ac- 
 count is styled Ieoud, for so the Phoe- 
 nicians still call an only son: and 
 when great dangers from war beset 
 the land he adorned the altar, and in- 
 vested this son with the emblems of 
 royalty, and sacrificed him.—Euseb. 
 Prep. Evan. lib. I. c. 10.—lib. IV. 
 ce 17. 
 
 THE SERPENT. 
 
 Taautus first attributed something 
 of the divine nature to the serpent and 
 the serpent tribe; in which he was 
 followed by the Pheenicians and Egyp- 
 tians. For this animal was esteemed 
 by him to be the most inspirited of 
 all the reptiles, and of a fiery nature ; 
 
 } ’AvoBpir Or. 
 D 
 
 . Fab.—lIsrael Boch. Scal. 
 
18 
 
 αὐτοῦ mapedody tap’ o* καὶ 
 τἄχος ἀνυπέρβλητον διὰ τοῦ 
 πνεύματος παρίστησι, χωρὶς 
 πὸδῶν τε καὶ χειρῶν, ἢ ἄλλου 
 τινὸς τῶν ἔξωσδεν, ἐξ ὧν τὰ 
 λοιπὰ Coa τὰς κινήσεις ποιεῖ- 
 ται" καὶ ποικίλων σχημάτων 
 τύπους ἀποτελεῖ, καὶ κατὰ 
 τὴν πορείαν ἑλιχοείδεῖς ἔχει 
 ἐφ᾽ ὁ βούλεται 
 
 πολυχρονιώτατον 
 
 X ΞΕ x 
 τὰς ὁρμὰς, 
 τάχος" καὶ 
 , ~ 
 δέ ἐστιν οὗ μόνον τῷ ἐκδυό- 
 ἱδενον τὸ γῆρας νεάζειν, ἀλλὰ 
 καὶ αὔξησιν ἐπιδέχεσϑαι μεί- 
 Cova πέφυκε. καὶ ἐπειδὰν τὸ 
 ε« 4 , 
 ὡρισμένον μέτρον πληρώσῃ; 
 a ε A > ’ ε 
 εἰς ἑαυτὸν ἀναλίσκεται, ὡς 
 ἐν ταῖς ἱεραῖς ὁμοίως αὐτὸς ὃ 
 Τάαντυς κατέταξε γραφαῖς" 
 διὸ καὶ ἐν ἱεροῖς τοῦτο τὸ 
 ζῶον καὶ ἐν μυστηρίοις συμ» 
 
 παρείληπται. 
 
 SANCHONIATHO. 
 
 inasmuch as it exhibits an incredible 
 celerity, moving by its spirit without 
 either hands, or feet, or any of those 
 external members, by which other 
 animals effect their motion. And in 
 its progress it assumes a variety of 
 forms, moving in a spiral course, and 
 darting forward with whatever degree 
 of swiftness it pleases. It is moreover 
 long-lived, and has the quality not 
 only of putting off its old age, and as- 
 suming a second youth, but of receiv- 
 ing at the same time an augmentation 
 of its size and strength. And when it 
 has fulfilled the appointed measure of 
 its existence, it consumes itself; as 
 Taautus has laid down in the sacred 
 books ; upon which account this animal 
 is introduced in the sacred rites and 
 mysteries.—LEuseb. Prep, Evan. lib. 1. 
 c. 10. 
 
 * JSt. 
 
FRAGMENTS 
 
 OF 
 
 CHALDAAN HISTORY, 
 
 FROM 
 
 BEROSSUS, ABYDENUS, 
 AND 
 
 MEGASTHENES. 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 i ἢ ἡ te vite whe ᾿ 
 
 aay ee Ny, 
 
 ‘Aes ‘Ayal ie by ie | 
 ' υ 
 ΝῊ" Fi Bi 
 (Ne 
 Ohi ΤᾺΝ 
 | 
 j i 7 
 ᾿ ΠῚ 
 ΤΙΝ . 
 
 γ᾽ be ns ΔΎ ἐν hr 
 ins ὰ haat i εν si ie een ἡ 
 
 j ma 4 
 | nee esa RR 
 
 μέ treet παι μὰς Lease 
 hell ‘ways sib δὰ, 
 
 ΠΥ" newt yah 
 | fea . 
 
 
 
 ν Py ren 
 
 
 

 
 BEROSSUS: 
 
 FROM ALEXANDER POLYHISTOR. 
 
 
 
 OF THE COSMOGONY AND DELUGE. 
 
 ΒΗΡΩΣΣΟΣ δὲ ἐν τῇ πρώτῃ 
 τῶν Βαβυλωνιακῶν φησι γε- 
 νέσϑαι μὲν αὐτὸν κατὰ 
 ᾿Αλέξανδρον τὸν Φιλίππου τὴν 
 ἡλικίαν. ἀναγραφὰς δὲ πολ- 
 λῶν ἐν Βαβυλῶνι φυλάσσεσ- 
 Sas μετὰ πολλῆς ἐπιμελείας 
 ἀπὸ ἐτῶν που ὑπὲρ μυριάδων 
 1€* περιεχούσας χρόνον" πε- 
 ριέχειν δὲ τὰς ἀναγραφὰς t 
 ἱστορίας περὶ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ 
 δϑαλάσσης καὶ πρωτογονίας 
 καὶ βασιλέων καὶ τῶν κατ᾽ 
 αὐτοὺς πράξεων. 
 
 Καὶ πρῶτον μὲν τὴν Βαβυ- 
 λωνίων £ 
 
 ἐπὶ τοῦ Τίγριδος καὶ Εὐφράτου 
 
 γῆν φησι xeiodas 
 
 ποταμοῦ μέσην. φύειν δὲ αὐτὴν 
 
 πυροὺς ἀγρίους καὶ κριδὰς 
 ἈΠ ὦ \ ΄ 
 
 καὶ ὦχρον ὃ καὶ σήσαμον || 
 
 καὶ τὰς ἐν τοῖς ἕλεσι φυομέ- 
 
 * δεκαπέντε 
 + Go. m. inserts καὶ, 
 
 § ὄχρον, Vulg—Eu. Ar. inserts, lentem, pulse. 
 
 Berossvus, in the first book of his 
 history of Babylonia, informs us that 
 he lived in the age of Alexander the 
 son of Philip. And he mentions that 
 there were written accounts, preserved 
 at Babylon with the greatest care, 
 comprehending a period of above fif- 
 teen myriads of years: and that these 
 writings contained histories of the 
 heaven and of the sea; of the birth 
 of mankind; and of the kings, and of 
 the memorable actions which they had 
 achieved. 
 
 And in the first place he describes 
 Babylonia as a country situated be- 
 tween the Tigris and the Euphrates : 
 that it abounded with wheat, and bar- 
 ley, and ocrus, and sesame ; and that 
 in the lakes were produced the roots 
 called gonge, which are fit for food, 
 
 Go.—Ducentis et quindecim. Eu. Ar. 
 
 1 Βαβυλωνίαν Go. 
 || σίσαμον Go. 
 
22 
 
 vas ῥίζας ἐσσϑίεσϑαι» Ἐ ὄνο- 
 γόγγας" 
 
 ῥίζας 
 ταύτας κριδαῖς. γίνεσϑαι δὲ 
 
 μάζεσϑδαι αὐτὰς 
 
 \ 
 ἰσοδυναμεῖν δὲ τὰς 
 
 , Ν Lend ἣν A 
 φοίνικας καὶ μῆλα καὶ τὰ 
 λοιπὰ ἀκρόδρυα καὶ ἰχϑύας 
 
 ἈΠ ΣΝ -Ὁ ΩΝ 
 καὶ ὄρνεα χερσαῖά τε καὶ 
 
 ~ εὐ ~ 
 λιμναῖα. εἶναι δὲ αὐτῆς τὰ 
 
 ᾽ / 
 
 μὲν κατὰ τὴν ᾿Αραβίαν μέρη 
 5) / \ »” ‘ 
 ἄνυδρά τε καὶ ἄκαρπα, τὰ 
 οὗ > 4 ~ > 4 
 δὲ ἀντικείμενα τῇ ᾿Δραβίᾳ 
 ὀρεινά τε καὶ εὔφορα. 
 
 Ἔν δὲ τῇ Βαβυλῶνι πολὺ 
 
 / 
 πλῆδος ἀνωρώπων γενέσψαι 
 ““" ‘\ 
 aAMedvay κατοικησάντων τὴν 
 Χαλδαίαν" ζῆν 
 
 ἀτάκτως ὥσπερ τὰ δηρία. 
 
 δὲ αὐτοὺς 
 
 Ἔν δὲ τῷ πρώτῳ ἐνιαυτῷ 
 φανῆναι ἐκ τῆς ἐρυδρᾶς ϑα- 
 λάσσης κατὰ τὸν ὁμοροῦντα 
 τόπον τῇ Βαβυλωνίᾳ ζῶον 
 ἄφρενον ἢ 
 nanos καὶ ᾿Απολλόδωρος to- 
 
 ὀνόματι ᾿Ωάννην, 
 τόρησε, τὸ μὲν ὅλων σῶμᾳ 
 ἔχον || tySvoc, ὑπὸ δὲ τὴν 
 κεφαλὴν παρωπεφυχυῖαν ἄλ- 
 λην κεφαλὴν ὑποκάτω 
 τοῦ ἰχϑδύος χεφαλῆς, 
 πόδας ὁμοίως ἀνδιρώπου, 
 ρᾳπεφυκότας δὲ ἐκ τῆς οὐρᾶς 
 τοῦ ἰχϑύος" εἶναι δὲ αὑτῷ 
 φωνὴν ἀνδιρώπου, τὴν δὲ εἰκόνα 
 αὐτοῦ ἔτι καὶ νῦν διαφυλάσ- 
 
 TECTIA. 
 
 * Sc.—écdilecsov. Vulg. 
 
 § Endowed with Bry.—Terribilem feram Eu. Ar. 
 
 BEROSSUS. 
 
 and in respect to nutriment similar to 
 barley. That there were also palm 
 trees and apples, and a variety of 
 fruits ; fish also and birds, both those 
 which are merely of flight, and those 
 which frequent the lakes. He adds, 
 that those parts of the country which 
 bordered upon Arabia, were without 
 water, and barren; but that the parts 
 which lay on the other side were both 
 hilly and fertile.' 
 
 At Babylon there was (in these 
 times) a great resort of people of 
 various nations, who inhabited Chal- 
 dzea, and lived in a Jawless manner 
 like the beasts of the field. 
 
 In the first year there appeared, 
 from that part of the Erythraan sea 
 which borders upon Babylonia, an 
 animal destitute§ of reason, by name 
 Oannes, whose whole body (according 
 to the account of Apollodorus) was 
 that of a fish; that under the fish’s 
 head he had another head, with feet 
 also below, similar to those of a man, 
 subjoined to the fish’s tail. His voice 
 too, and language, was articulate and 
 human; and a representation of him 
 is preserved even to this day, 
 
 + Go.—xpoga Vulg. t ἄρρεν oy 15. Voss. 
 
 || ἔχων A—Eu. 
 

 
 Τοῦτο δὲ, φησὶ, τὸ ζῶον, 
 τὴν μὲν ἡμέραν διατρίβειν 
 μετὰ τῶν ἀνδρώπων, οὐδε! 
 μίαν ᾿ τροφὴν προσφερόμενον" 
 παραδιδόναι τε τοῖς ἀνα ρώποις 
 γραμμάτων καὶ μαϑημάτων 
 καὶ τεχνῶν παντοδαπῶν ἐμ- 
 πειρίαν, καὶ πόλεων συνοῖκισ'5 
 μοὺς F καὶ ἱερῶν ἱδρύσεις, καὶ 
 νόμων εἰσηγήσεις καὶ γεω- 
 μετρίαν διδάσκειν, καὶ σπέρ- 
 μᾶτα καὶ καρπῶν συναγωγὰς 
 ὑποδεικνύναι, χαὶ συνόλως 
 πάντα τὰ πρὸς ἡμέῤωσιν 
 ἀνήκοντα βίου παραδιδόναι 
 τοῖς ἀνδρώποις. ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ 
 χρόνου ἐκείνου οὐδὲν ἄλλο πε- 
 ρισσὸν εὑρεδῆναι. τοῦ δὲ 
 ἡλίου δύναντος τὸ ζῶον του- 
 τονὶ ᾿Ὧάννην δῦναι πάλιν εἰς 
 τὴν δάλασσαν; καὶ τὰς νύχ- 
 τὰς ἐν τῷ πελάγει § διαιτᾶσ- 
 Ber εἶναι γὰρ αὐτὸ || ἀμφί- 
 βιον. ὕστερον δὲ φανῆναι 
 καὶ ἕτερα ζῶα ὅμοια τούτῳ, 
 περὶ ὧν ἐν τῇ τῶν βασιλέων 
 ἀναγραφὴ φησι δηλώσειν. 
 τὸν δὲ ᾿Ωάννην περὶ γενεᾶς 
 καὶ πολιτείας γράψαι καὶ 
 παραδοῦναι τόνδε τὸν λόγον 
 τοῖς ἀνδρώποις. 
 
 Γενέσϑαι φησὶ χρόνον, ἐν 
 ᾧ τὸ πᾶν σχότος καὶ ὕδωρ 
 εἶναι, καὶ ἐν τούτοις ζῶᾳ 
 
 * μηδεμίαν Go. 
 1 βών Go.—rod βίου Sc. 
 || αὐτὸν Go. 
 
 BEROSSUS. 23 
 
 This Being was accustomed to pass 
 the day among men; but took no food 
 at that season ; and he gave them an 
 insight into letters and sciences, and 
 arts of every kind. He taught them 
 to construct cities, to found temples, 
 to compile laws, and explained to them 
 the principles of geometrical know- 
 ledge. He made them distinguish the 
 seeds of the earth, and shewed them 
 how to collect the fruits; in short, he 
 instructed them in every thing which 
 could tend to soften manners and 
 humanize their lives. From that time, 
 nothing material has been added by 
 way of improvement to his instruc- 
 tions. And when the sun had set, this 
 Being Oannes, retired again into the 
 sea, and passed the night in the deep; 
 for he was amphibious. After this 
 there appeared other animals like 
 Oannes, of which Berossus proposes 
 to give an account when he comes to 
 the history of the kings. Moreover 
 Oannes wrote concerning the genera- 
 tion of mankind; and of their civil 
 polity ; and the following is the pur- 
 port of what he said : 
 
 “ There was a time in which there 
 existed nothing but darkness and an 
 abyss of waters, wherein resided most 
 
 Tt Go. m—cuwwxicuods Go—ewwxicpous A. 
 
 ὃ Goar substitutes ἐκεῖ 
 τούτων Go. 
 
94 
 
 τερατώδη, καὶ εἰδιφυεῖς ἢ τὰς 
 ἰδέας ἔχοντα  ζωογονεῖσδαι. 
 γὰρ 
 
 ~ A Ν 
 γεννησϑῆναι, ἐνίους δὲ καὶ τε- 
 
 Ψ 
 ἀνδ)ρώπους διπτέρους 
 / \ ΄ . 
 πτραπτέρους καὶ διπροσώπους 
 \ ~ \ yo a 
 καὶ σῶμα μὲν EXOVTAS EV, 
 κεφαλὰς δὲ δύο, ἀνδρείαν τε 
 \ / \ IQs 
 καὶ γυναικείαν, καὶ aldoid 
 Y Ν ΕΣ 
 τε δισσὰ, ἄρρεν καὶ δῆλυ 
 καὶ ἑτέρους ἀνωιρώπους τοὺς 
 
 \ SN 4 Ν , 
 μὲν αἰγῶν σκελὴ καὶ nEepaTa 
 » ἊΝ A me / 
 ἔχοντας, τοὺς δὲ ἱππόποδας;» 
 \ 
 
 τοὺς δὲ τὰ ὀπίσω μὲν ὃ μέρη 
 
 oe ‘ δὲ ᾿ > 
 ἵππων, τὰ δὲ Eumpordtey ay- 
 Ὡρώπων, ove ἱπποχενταύρους 
 τὴν ἰδέαν εἶναι. ζωογονησῆναι 
 δὲ καὶ ταύρους ἀνωρώπων χε- 
 
 ς 
 
 A " \ / 
 paras exovTas καὶ κύνας 
 
 5» 
 ἰχ- 
 
 WWos|| ex τῶν ὕπισϑεν μερῶν 
 
 τετρασωμάτους, οὐρὰς 
 
 ἔχοντας, καὶ ἵππους κυνοκεφά- 
 λους, καὶ ἀνδρώπους, καὶ 
 ἕτερω ζῶα χεφαλὰς μὲν καὶ 
 ἔχοντα, 4] 
 οὐρὼς δὲ ἰχϑύων. καὶ ἄλλα 
 
 lA ἢ 
 σώματα ἵππων 
 
 δὲ ζῶα παντοδαπῶν Iyploy 
 3, 
 μορφὰς ἔχοντα. πρὸς δὲ τού- 
 τοις ἰχϑύας καὶ ἑρπετὰ καὶ 
 lj \ # “ 
 ὄφεις καὶ ἄλλα ζῶα πλείονα 
 S, A Ν / 
 αὐυμαστὰ καὶ παρηλλαγμένα 
 2 Yj 
 τὰς ὄψεις ἀλλήλων ἔχοντα" ὧν 
 ἢ λ ΤῊ ὦ 3 ~ ~ 
 ual τὰς εἰκόνας ἐν TH τοῦ 
 
 Βήλου ναῷ ἀνακεῖσδϑαι, ἘῈ 
 
 Net #€ 
 
 καὶ τὰ μὲν ὀπίσω Go, m. 
 
 || Eu.—iyStas Vulg. 
 
 ἰδιοφυεῖς Rich.—d:gueis ὅ5'ς.-τ-αὐτοφυεῖς Mac. 
 διπτὰ, Go.—duas quoque naturas. 
 
 BEROSSUS. 
 
 hideous beings, which were produced 
 of a two-fold principle. 
 peared men, some of whom were fur- 
 
 There ap- 
 
 nished with two wings, others with 
 four, and with two faces. They had 
 one body but two heads: the one that 
 of a man, the other of a woman: and 
 likewise in their several organs both 
 male and female. Other human figures 
 were to be seen with the legs and 
 horns of goats : some had horses’ feet : 
 while others united the hind quarters 
 of a horse with the body of a man, 
 resembling in shape the hippocen- 
 taurs. Bulls likewise were bred there 
 with the heads of men; and dogs with 
 fourfold bodies, terminated in their 
 extremities with the tails of fishes: 
 horses also with the heads of dogs: 
 men too and other animals, with the 
 heads and bodies of horses and the 
 tails of fishes. 
 creatures in which were combined the 
 
 In short, there were 
 
 limbs of every species of animals. [ἢ 
 addition to these, fishes, reptiles, ser- 
 pents, with other monstrous animals, 
 which assumed each other’s shape and 
 countenance. Of all which were pre- 
 served delineations in the temple of 
 
 Belus at Babylon. 
 
 t ἔχοντας Go. 
 Eu, Ar. 
 
 4] ἔχοντας A. ἊΝ ἀνάκειται Go. 
 

 
 Αρχειν δὲ τούτων πάντων 
 ~ rad ἢ 
 γυναῖκα ἢ ὄνομα ὋὉμόρωκα "Ὁ 
 εἶναι δὲ τοῦτο ft Χαλδαϊστὶ 
 Ἷ ᾿ : 
 μὲν Θαλὰτϑ, Ἑλληνιστὶ 
 δὲ μεδερμηνεύεσσαι || Sa- 
 λασσᾳ, κατὰ δὲ ἰσόψηφον J 
 A « 
 σελήνη. οὕτως δὲ τῶν ὅλων 
 , 
 συνεστηκότων ἐπανελϑόντα 
 Ld δ ἣν ~ 
 Βῆλον σχίσαι τὴν yuvaina 
 ὔ ἊΝ Ν A [4 > 
 μέσην; καὶ τὸ μὲν ἥμισυ αὐ- 
 - ~ ~ U 
 τῆς ποιῆσαι γὴν, τὸ δὲ ἄλλο 
 “ > \ δ x > 
 ἥμισυ οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὰ ἐν 
 αὐτῇ ζῶα ἀφανίσαι. ἀλλη- 
 ~ ͵ Ὁ 
 γορικῶς δὲ φησι τοῦτο πεφυ- 
 σιολογῆσσα.. TT ὑγροῦ γὰρ 
 »” - Ν \ 4 > 
 Ὄντος τοῦ παντὸς ual ζώων ἐν 
 "ν᾿ ΡΣ ἈΕῚ ἘΣ 
 αὐτῷ γεγεννημένων, τοῦτον Ὁ. 
 τὸν Seay ἀφελεῖν τὴν ἑαυ- 
 τοῦ δδ κεφαλὴν, καὶ τὸ ῥυὲν 
 1) 
 aia |||| rods ἄλλους Yeods 
 φυρᾶσαι τῇ yn, καὶ διαπλά- 
 σαι τοὺς ἀνωιρώπους" δι’ ὃ ἢ 
 γοερούς τε εἶναι καὶ φρονήσεως 
 / 4 ~ 
 Nelas μετέχειν. τὸν δὲ Βῆλον, 
 a ,ὔ 
 oy Δία μεδερμηνεύουσι, μέσον 
 / 
 τεμόντα τὸ σκότος χωρίσαι 
 2s 
 γὴν καὶ οὐρανὸν ὠπ᾿ ἀλλήλων, 
 Ν 
 καὶ διατάξαι τὸν κόσμον" τὰ 
 
 δὲ ~ δ 358 , \ ~ 
 ε ζῶα οὐκ ενεγχοντῶ τὴν Tov 
 
 * ἄρχει Go. 
 t τούτῳ Go. 
 lI Se.—pereounveberas Vule. 
 ** “Tn the abyss.” 
 —que in ipsa erant Eu. Ar. 
 
 tt A.—Sce.—ptv φυσιολογεῖσϑαι Go. 
 || || σῶμα Go. 
 
 δὲ αὐτῆς Go. m. 
 
 Bry.—“ Which had composed her empire.” 
 
 BEROSSUS. 25 
 
 The person, who presided over 
 them, was a woman named Omoroca; 
 which in the Chaldean language is 
 Thalatth;§ in Greek Thalassa, the 
 sea; but which might equally be in- 
 terpreted the Moon. All things being 
 in this situation, Belus came, and cut 
 the woman asunder: and of one half 
 of her he formed the earth, and of the 
 other half the heavens; and at the 
 same time destroyed the animals 
 within her.** All this (he says) was 
 an allegorical description of nature. 
 For, the whole universe consisting of 
 moisture, and animals being conti- 
 nually generated therein,, the deity 
 above-mentioned took off his own 
 head: upon which the other gods 
 mixed the blood, as it gushed out, 
 with the earth ; and from thence were 
 formed men. On this account it is 
 that they are rational, and partake of 
 divine knowledge. This Belus, by 
 whom they signify Jupiter,*** divided 
 the darkness, 
 Heavens from the Earth, and reduced 
 the universe to order. But the ani- 
 mals, not being able to bear the pre- 
 Belus upon 
 
 and separated the 
 
 valence of light, died. 
 
 F Ομορῶκα Go.—Opdgxa Sce,—Marcaja Eu. Ar. 
 
 § Thalaatha Eu. Ar. 
 4“ Eus. Ar. omits. 
 Fab. 
 
 tt rod S 
 ΤΊ τούτων Sc. 
 
 44 διὰ 6ο.---διὸ Sc. 
 
 *** Dis Bry.—Dis or Pluto Fab.—Dios Eu, Ar. 
 
26 
 
 φωτὸς δύναμιν φθαρῆναι- 
 ἰδόντα δὲ τὸν Βῆλον χώραν 
 / ~~ 
 ἔρημον καὶ καρποφόρον κελεῦ- 
 σαι ἑνὶ τῶν Seay τὴν κεφαλὴν 
 ἀφελόντι ἑαυτοῦ τῷ ἀπορ- 
 ρυέντι αἵματι φυρᾶσαι τὴν 
 γῆν καὶ διαπλάσαι ἀνθρώ- 
 πους καὶ Sypia τὰ δυνάμενα 
 / 
 τὸν ἀέρα φέρειν" ἀποτελέσοι 
 ~ Yi 
 δὲ τὸν Βῆλον καὶ ἄστρω καὶ 
 if 
 ἥλιον καὶ σελήνην καὶ τοὺς 
 / . 4 ~ 4 
 πέντε πλανήτας. (ταῦτά φη- 
 ow T 6 Πολυΐστωρ ᾿Αλέξαν- 
 Ν ΄ > ~ 
 ὃρος τὸν Βήρωσσον ἐν τῇ 
 πρώτῃ φάσκειν. 1) 
 
 Ἔν δὲ τῇ δευτέρᾳ τοὺς 
 δέκα βασιλεῖς τῶν Χαλδαίων 
 καὶ τὸν χρόνον τῆς βασιλείας 
 
 aw 4 ε Ν » 
 αὐτῶν, σάρους ἑκατὸν εἰχοσιν, 
 A JE ΄ 4 
 ἤτοι ἐτῶν μυριάδας τεσσαρά- 
 κοντα τρεῖς καὶ δύο χιλιάδας, 
 ἕως τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ,δ λέ- 
 γει γὰρ 6 αὐτὸς ᾿Αλέξανδρος 
 ὡς ἀπὸ τῆς γραφῆς τῶν Χαλ- 
 ΄ 5 ΝΠ 9, τῶ 
 δαίων αὐτδις παρακατιὼν ἀπὸ 
 τοῦ || ἐνάτου βασιλέως Apda- 
 
 νι ς ΄ , 
 του ἐπὶ τὸν δέκατον λεγόμενον 
 
 ~ / 
 map αὐτοῖς Ἐιίσουῶρον οὕτως" 
 
 ᾿Αρδάτου δὲ τελευτήσαντος 
 τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ Eicoustpoy** 
 βασιλεῦσαι σάρους ὀκτωκαί- 
 
 Bexa® ἐπὶ 7 τούτου μέγαν 
 
 * Light Bry. 
 ὃ ἀναφέρει Go. τη. 
 ἘΚ Σείσουϑρον. 
 
 + Go. om. φησιν. 
 || Go. om. rod 
 Eslaouspov. EloiSpov. Se. 
 
 BEROSSUS. 
 
 this, seeing a vast space unoccupied, 
 though by nature fruitful, commanded 
 one of the gods to take off his head, 
 and to mix the blood with the earth ; 
 and from thence to form other men 
 and animals, which should be capable 
 of bearing the air.* Belus formed 
 also the stars, and the sun, and the 
 moon, and the five planets. (Such, 
 according to Polyhistor Alexander, is 
 the account which Berossus gives in 
 his first book.) 
 
 (In the second book was contained 
 the history of the ten kings of the 
 Chaldeans, and the periods of the 
 continuance of each reign, which con- 
 sisted collectively of an hundred and 
 twenty sari, or four hundred and 
 thirty-two thousand years; reaching 
 to the time of the Deluge. For Alex- 
 ander, enumerating the kings from 
 the writings of the Chaldzeans, after 
 the ninth Ardates, proceeds to the 
 tenth, whois called by them Xisuthrus, 
 in this manner :) 
 
 After the death of Ardates, his son 
 In 
 his time happened. a great Deluge ; 
 the history of which is thus described. 
 
 Xisuthrus reigned eighteen sari. 
 
 t φάσκει. Go.—Sc, 
 4] Otiarte defuncto, Eu. Ar. 
 tt καὶ ἐπὶ Go. m. 
 

 
 κατακλυσμὸν γενέσδαι. ἀνα- 
 γεγράφδαι * δὲ τὸν λόγον 
 οὕτως" τὸν [Κρόνον αὐτῷ κατὰ 
 τὸν ὕπνον ἐπιστάντα ᾧάναι 
 μηνὸς Δαισίου 7 πέμπτῃ καὶ 
 δεκώτῃ τοὺς ἀνδιρώπους ὑπὸ 
 κατακλυσμοῦ διᾳφπαρήσεσ- 
 δα. Ὁ διὰ 
 γραμμάτων, πάντων ἀρχὰς 
 καὶ μέσα καὶ τελευτὰς ὀρύ- 
 ἕαντα ὃ ϑεῖναι ἐν 
 ἡλίου Σιππάροις, ||] καὶ vav- 
 πηγησάμενον σκάφος ἐμβῆναι 
 μετὰ τῶν συγγενῶν καὶ ἀνα- 
 
 κελεῦσαὶ οὖν 
 
 / 
 πόλει 
 
 γκαίων φίλων" ἐνδέσϑαι δὲ 
 βρώματα καὶ πόματα, eu- 
 ~ Ν ~ 
 βαλεῖν δὲ καὶ ζῶα πτηνὰ 
 Ἂ 4 ‘ 4 
 καὶ τετράποδα, καὶ πάντα 
 εὐτρεπισάμενον πλεῖν. ἘΞ ἐρω- 
 A ~ ~ 
 τώμενον δὲ ποῦ πλεῖ ; φάναι, 
 πρὸς τοὺς Φεούς" εὐξάμενον 
 ἀνθρώποις ἀγαθὰ γενέσθαι. 
 ν Δ 5 , 
 τὸν ὃ οὐ παρακούσαντα νᾷυ- 
 πηγήσαντα σκάφος τὸ μὲν 
 ~~ δή ᾽᾿ 1 ΝΜ 
 μῆκος σταδίων πέντε, τὸ δὲ 
 πλάτος σταδιων δύο" τὰ δὲ 
 θέ 4 4 
 συνταχθέντα πάντα συνθέσ- 
 Ν ~ 
 “αι, καὶ γυναῖκα καὶ τέκνα 
 καὶ τοὺς ἀναγκαίους φίλους 
 Ζ 
 ἐμβιβάσαι. 
 , A 
 Γενομένου δὲ τοῦ χατα- 
 
 * ἀναγράφεσϑαι Go. 
 J φϑαρήσεσθαι Go. 
 
 BEROSSUS. 27 
 
 The Deity, Cronus, appeared to him 
 in a vision, and warned him that upon 
 the fifteenth day of the month Deesius 
 there would be a flood, by which man- 
 He there- 
 fore enjoined him to write a history 
 
 kind would be destroyed. 
 
 of the beginning, procedure, and con- 
 clusion of all things; and to bury it 
 in the city of the Sun at Sippara; and 
 to build: a vessel, and take with him 
 into it his friends and relations; and 
 to convey on board every thing neces- 
 sary to sustain life, together with all 
 the different animals, both birds and 
 quadrupeds, and trust himself fear- 
 lessly to the deep. Having asked 
 the Deity, whither he was to sail? he 
 was answered, “ To the Gods :” 
 upon which he offered up a prayer 
 for the good of mankind. He then 
 obeyed the divine admonition: and 
 built a vessel five stadia in length, and 
 two in breadth. Into this he put 
 every thing which he had prepared ; 
 and last of all conveyed into it his 
 wife, his children, and his friends. 
 
 After the flood had been upon the 
 
 t Δαισία Go.—Asoiov τη. 
 ὃ τελετὰς ὀρέξαντα Go. 
 
 || 5ς.--ςισπάροις Dind.—Siparis Eu. Ar. 
 
 41 Roganti autem quo navigandum ? 
 causa, ut bona hominibus eveniant. 
 
 ἘΣ Sc.—rAyy Vulg. 
 
 Responsum; ad Deos, orandi 
 
 Eu. Ar. 
 
28 
 
 *, ~ ‘ 4 
 κλυσμοῦ καὶ εὐδέως λήξαντος 
 ~ A , 
 τῶν ὀρνέων τινὰ τὸν Ἐίΐσου- 
 ,ὔ Ν 
 ὥρον ἀφιέναι. τὰ δὲ οὐ τρο- 
 Ἂς εν oy / e 
 φὴν εὑροντα οὔτε τόπον ὅπου 
 ~~ 2 \ 
 navloas πάλιν ἐλϑεῖν εἰς τὸ 
 Ν 
 de 
 
 4 , Ὁ ε ͵ὔ 
 πάλιν ETH τινας ἡμέρας 
 
 ~ / 
 πλοῖον. τὸν Elcoustpay 
 > ΄ Ἀ ” 2 - 
 ἀφιέναι τὰ opven* ταῦτα 
 \ 
 δὲ πάλιν εἰς τὴν ναῦν ἐλϑεὶν 
 , 
 τοὺς πόδας πεπηλωμένους 
 BA \ \ , » 
 ἔχοντα. τὸ δὲ τρίτον ἀφε- 
 evra οὐκ ἔτι CANE εἰς τὸ 
 ἈΝ 
 πλοῖον. τὸν δὲ ᾿ίσουσρον 
 ~ ~ / 
 ἐννοηδῆναι γὴν ἀναπεφηνέναι, 
 , ~ -Ὁ 4 
 διελόντα τε τῶν τοῦ πλοίου 
 « “ / Ν ἰδ ό; 
 ῥαφῶν μέρος τι καὶ ἰδοντῶ 
 ~ Ν ~~ 2) 
 προσοκεῖλαν τὸ πλοῖον oper 
 \ 3: γυ A ~ 
 τινὶ ἐκβῆναι μετὰ τῆς γυναι- 
 \ Ν - x Ν 
 κὸς καὶ τῆς “υγατρὸς χαὶ 
 ~ ΄ 4 
 τοῦ κυβερνήτου προσκυνήσων- 
 Ν ~ 
 Ta τὴν γῆν καὶ βωμὸν ἵδρυ- 
 4 Ν / 
 σάμενον nak δυσιάσαντα 
 τοῖς σεοῖς yeverdar μετὰ τῶν 
 ἐχβάντων τοῦ πλοίου ἀφανῆ. 
 Ν 
 Τοὺς δὲ ὑπομείναντας ἐν 
 ~ / Ν 2 "2 
 τῷ πλοίῳ μὴ εἰσπορευομένων 
 - Ν Ν 
 τῶν περὶ τὸν Ἐίσουῶρον ἐκ- 
 uA ~ oy Up Ν 
 βάντας ἡ ζητεῖν αὐτὸν ἐπὶ 
 
 ὀνόματος βοῶντας. 
 
 τὸν δὲ 
 Ἐΐσουῶρον αὐτὸν μὲν αὐτοῖς 
 οὐκ ἔτι ὀφπῆναι; φωνὴν δὲ ἐκ 
 τοῦ ἀέρος γενέσϑαι κελεύου- 
 εἶναι 
 
 ε / 5" ‘ 
 σαν ὡς δέον αὐτοὺς 
 
 * τὸν ὀρνέων τινὰ Sc. 
 
 Ἴ βοῶντος Go. 
 
 BEROSSUS. 
 
 earth, and was in time abated, Xisu- 
 thrus sent out birds from the ves- 
 sel; which, not finding any food, nor 
 any place whereupon they might rest 
 their feet, returned to him again. 
 After an interval of some days, he 
 sent them forth a second time; and 
 they now returned with their feet 
 tinged with mud. He made a trial a 
 third time with these birds; but they 
 returned to himno more: from whence 
 he judged that the surface of the 
 earth had appeared above the waters. 
 He therefore made an opening in the 
 vessel, and upon looking out found 
 that it was stranded upon the side of 
 some mountain; upon which he im- 
 mediately quitted it with his wife, his 
 Xisuthrus 
 then paid his adoration to the earth : 
 
 daughter, and the pilot. 
 
 and having constructed an altar, of- 
 fered sacrifices to the gods, and, with 
 those who had come out of the vessel 
 with him, disappeared. 
 
 They, who remained within, find- 
 ing that their companions did not re- 
 turn, quitted the vessel with many 
 lamentations, and called continually 
 on the name of Xisuthrus. Him they 
 saw no more; but they could distin- 
 guish his voice in the air, and could 
 hear him admonish them to pay due 
 regard to religion ; and likewise in- 
 
 + ἐκβάντας. .. Ξίσουϑρον Sc. omin Ch. Eu. 
 

 
 ~ \. = 
 ϑεοσεβεῖς vai wap αὐτὸν 
 
 διὰ Thy εὐσέβειαν mopederTas 
 aes en Py 
 μετὰ τῶν SeBy οἰκήσοντοις 
 ~ sh — ~ ἮΝ ον 
 τῆς ὃὲ αὐτῆς τιμῆς Kab τὴν 
 as = Meets Se 
 γυναῖχα αὐτοῦ καὶ τὴν Nu 
 ,͵ . Ν ta 
 γατέρα καὶ τὸν κυβερνήτην 
 - ὦ 
 μετεσχηκέναι. εἶπέ τε αὐτοῖς 
 ὅτι ἐλεύσονται πάλιν εἰς Βα- 
 βυλῶνα, καὶ ὡς εἵμαρται αὐ- 
 ~~ / 
 τοῖς ἐκ Σιππάρων ἀνελομένοις 
 \ 4 ὃ ~ ~ 
 τὰ γράμματα διαδοῦναι τοῖς 
 > , \qa . 28 
 ἀνδρώποις, καὶ ὅτι ὅπου εἰσὶν 
 ε uA 2 s 2 7 \ 
 ἡ χώρα ᾿Αρμενίας ἐστί. τοὺς 
 ἂν ~ 
 δὲ ἀκούσαντας taitat Sical 
 τε τοῖς Deois χαὶ περιξῖ πο- 
 ρευδῆναι εἰς Βαβυλῶνα. 
 ~ Ν 
 Τοῦ δὲ πλοίου τούτου κατα- 
 / > ~ > 7 
 κλιδέντος ὃ ἐν τῇ ᾿Δρμενίᾳ 
 ΝΜ fa > ~ 
 ETE μέρος τι }} ἐν τοῖς Κυρχυ- 
 / Ν ~ ᾽ 
 paiwy ὑρεσι τῆς Αρμενίας 
 , ~ 
 διαμένειν» καί τινας ἀπὸ τοῦ 
 4 / 
 πλοίου χομίζειν ἀποξύοντας 
 » ~ 
 ἄσφαλτον, χρᾶσδαι δὲ αὐτὴν 
 \ Ν 
 πρὸς τοὺς ἀποτροπιασμούς. 
 : τ 
 ἐλϑόντας οὖν τούτους εἰς Βα- 
 βυλῶνα τά τε ἐκ Σιππάρων ** 
 Ἐ 
 γράμματα 7 ἀνορύξαι καὶ 
 , et 
 πόλεις πολλὰς χτιζόντας ΠΕ 
 ee a ὃ , z 
 καὶ ἱερὰ ἀνιδρυσαμένους πάλιν 
 
 > 4 ~ 
 ἐπικτίσαι τὴν Βαβυλῶνα. 
 
 * ἀυτῶν Go. 
 
 Eu. Ar. 
 
 1 περιξὶ Go.—pedibus Eu. Ar.—Qy. πεζῇ, πεζοὺς, or πεζηχῶς. 
 
 BEROSSUS. 29 
 
 formed them that it was upon account 
 of his piety that he was translated to 
 live with the gods; that his wife and 
 daughter, and the pilot, had obtained 
 To this he added, 
 that they should return to Babylonia ; 
 and, as it was ordained, search for the 
 
 the same honour. 
 
 writings at Sippara, which they were 
 to make known to all mankind : more- 
 over that the place, wherein they then 
 The 
 rest having heard these words, offered 
 
 were, was the land of Armenia. 
 
 sacrifices to the gods; and taking 
 a circuit, journeyed towards Baby- 
 lonia. 
 
 The vessel being thus stranded in 
 Armenia, some part of it yet remains 
 in the Coreyrzean {| mountains of Ar- 
 menia; and the people scrape off the 
 bitumen, with which it had been out- 
 wardly coated, and make use of it by 
 way of an alexipharmic and amulet. 
 And when they returned to Babylon, 
 and had found the writings at Sippara, 
 they built cities, and erected temples: 
 and Babylon was thus inhabited again. 
 —Syncel. ‘Chron. 28.—Euseb. Chron. 
 5. 8. 
 
 + αὐτὰ Go. 
 Ed™ of 
 
 § Se.—xaraxAnSévrog Go.—xataxracSevroe Go. τη. 
 
 || τί aidtéu ἐν Go.—r 
 
 . ἐν 56.---τὶ ἐν A, 
 
 §] or Cordyéan Fab.—Corduarum montibus Eu. Ar. 
 
 3% Σεσπάρων Din. 
 
 ++ Volumen Eu. Ar. 
 
 Tt Sc. σκοτιζοντας Go. 
 
BEROSSUS: 
 
 FROM APOLLODORUS. 
 
 
 
 OF THE CHALDAAN KINGS. 
 
 ΤΑΥ͂ΤΑ μὲν ὃ Βήρωσσος 
 ἱστόρησε, πρῶτον γενέσῶϑαι 
 βασιλέα *”Adwpoy ἐκ Βαβυ- 
 λῶνος Χαλδαῖον 7 βασιλεῦ- 
 car δὲ σάρους δέκᾳ; καὶ κα- 
 ϑεξῆς ᾿Αλάπαρον καὶ ᾿Αμή- 
 λωναδ τὸν ἐκ Παντιβίβλων᾽"}} 
 εἶτα ᾿Αμμένωνα τὸν Χαλ- 
 δαῖον, ἐφ᾽ οὗ φησι φανῆναι 
 τὸν μυσαρὸν ᾿Ὡάννην, τὸν 
 ᾿Δνυνήδωτον, ἐκ τῆς ἐρυωρᾶς" 
 (ὅπερ ᾿Αλέξανδρος προλαβὼν 
 εἴρηκε φανῆναι τῷ πρώτῳ 
 ἔτει" οὗτος δὲ μετὰ σάρους 
 τεσσαράκοντα" ὃ δὲ ᾿Αβυδη- 
 νὸς τὸν Ἶ δεύτερον ᾿Αννή- 
 δωτον μετὰ σάρους εἴκοσιν ἕξ") 
 εἶτα Μεγάλαρον [7 ἐκ Παν- 
 τιβίβλων πόλεως, βωσιλεῦσαι 
 
 ye 
 δ᾽ αὐτὸν σάρους ὀκτωκαίδεκα" 
 
 * βασιλέων Go. 
 § Almelon. Eu. Ar. 
 ** τὸ Go. 
 
 } Χαλδαίων Go. 
 
 Tuis is the history which Berossus 
 has transmitted to us. He tells us 
 that the first king was Alorus of Ba- 
 bylon, a Chaldzan: he reigned ten 
 sari: and afterwards Alaparus, and 
 Amelon who came from Pantibiblon : 
 then Ammenon the Chaldean, in 
 whose time appeared the Musarus 
 Oannes the Annedotus from the Ery- 
 (But Alexander Poly- 
 
 histor anticipating the event, has said 
 
 threean sea. 
 
 that he appeared in the first year ; 
 but Apollodorus says that it was 
 after forty sari; Abydenus, however, 
 makes the second Annedotus appear 
 after twenty-six sari.) Then suc-~ 
 ceeded Megalarus from the city of 
 Pantibiblon; and he reigned eighteen 
 sari: and after him Daonus the shep- 
 herd from Pantibiblon reigned ten 
 
 } ᾿Αλάσπαρον Go. 
 || Παυτιβίβλων A. 4 ᾿Αβυδινὸς Vulg. 
 
 +t Amegalarus. 
 

 
 καὶ μετὰ τοῦτον Adwyoy ποι- 
 μένα ἐκ. Παντιβίβλων βασι- 
 λεῦσαι σάρους δέκα. κατὰ 
 τοῦτον πάλιν φησὶ φανῆναι ἐκ 
 τῆς ἐρυδρᾶς᾽ Ἀννήδωτον τέταρ- 
 τον τὴν αὐτὴν τοῖς ἄνω ἔχοντα 
 διάϑεσιν καὶ τὴν ἰχϑύος πρὸς 
 ἀνδρώπους μίξιν. εἶτα dpkas* 
 Eveddpayot ἐκ Παντιβίβ- 
 λων, καὶ βασιλεῦσαι σάρους 
 ὀκτωχαιδεκα. ἐπὶ τούτου φη- 
 σὶν ἄλλον φανῆναι ἐκ τῆς 
 ἐρυδρᾶς ϑαλάσσης ὅμοιον 
 κατὰ τὴν ixsvog πρὸς ἄνϑρω- 
 πον μίξιν, ᾧ ὄνομα ᾿Ωδάκων. ἢ 
 τούτους δό φησι πάντας τὰ 
 ὑπὸ ᾿Ωάννου κεφαλαιωδῶς ῥη- 
 ϑέντα κατὰ μέρος ἔξηγήσα- 
 σαι. περὶ ταύτου ᾿Αβυδηνὸς 
 οὐδὲν εἶπεν. εἶτα ἄρξαι ᾿Αμεμ- 
 ψινὸν Χαλδαῖον ἐκ Λαράγε- 
 χων᾽ βασιλεῦσα: δὲ αὐτὸν 
 ὄγδοον σάρους δέκα. εἶτα 
 ἄρξαι ᾿Ὡτιάρτην Χαλδαῖον 
 ἐκ Λαράγχων, βασιλεῦσαι 
 δὲ σάρους ή. ᾽Ωτιάρτου δὲ τε- 
 λευτήσαντος τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ 
 Ἐίσουῶρον βασιλεῦσαι σάρους 
 ὀκτωκαίδεκα. ἐπὶ τούτου τὸν 
 μέγαν κατάκλυσμόν φησι γε- 
 γενῆσϑαι. ὡς γίνεσϑαι ὁμοῦ 
 πάντας βασιλεῖς δέκα, σάρους 
 
 δὲ ε \ v 
 ε EXATOV ELLOT be 
 
 * ἥρξαι Go. 
 + 
 + 
 
 BEROSSUS. 31 
 
 sari; in his time (he says) appeared 
 again from the Erythrzean sea a fourth 
 Annedotus, having the same form 
 with those above, the shape of a fish 
 blended with that of a man. Then 
 reigned Euedorachus from Pantibi- 
 blon, for the term of eighteen sari ; 
 in his days there appeared another 
 personage from the Erythreean sea 
 like the former, having the same com- 
 plicated form between a fish and a 
 (All 
 these, says Apollodorus, related par- 
 
 man, whose name was Odacon. 
 
 ticularly and circumstantially what- 
 ever Oannes had informed them of : 
 concerning these Abydenus has made 
 no mention.) Then reigned Amemp- 
 sinus, a Chaldean from Laranche ; 
 and he being the eighth in order 
 reigned ten sari. Then reigned 
 Otiartes, a Chaldean, from Laranche ; 
 and he reigned eight sari. And upon 
 the death of Otiartes, his son Xisu- 
 thrus reigned eighteen sari: in his 
 time happened the great deluge. So 
 that the sum of all the kings is ten; 
 and the term which they collectively 
 reigned an hundred and twenty sari. 
 —Syncel. Chron. 39.—Euseb, Chron. 
 5. 
 
 ¢ Edoranchus Eu. ΑΥ.---Εὐεδώρεσχον Go. 
 
 ὀδάκων Go.—3 Δαγων Fab. Go. m. 
 
BEROSSUS: 
 
 FROM ABYDENUS. 
 
 OF THE CHALDZAN KINGS AND THE DELUGE. 
 
 XAAAAION μὲν τὴς σοφίης 
 πέρι τοσαῦτα. 
 
 Βασιλεῦσαι δὲ τῆς χώρας 
 πρῶτον λέγεται ἡ ἤΑλωρον, τὸν 
 δὲ ὑπὲρ ἑωυτοῦ λόγον διωδοῦναι 
 ὅτι μιν τοῦ Aco ποιμένᾳ ὃ 
 evs ἀποδείξαι. βασιλεῦσαι 
 δὲ σάρους δέκα. σάρος δὲ 
 3 ε , Ν / 
 ἐστιν ἑξακόσια καὶ τρισχίλια 
 3 - \ Ἔ. , 
 ἔτεα, νῆρος δὲ ἑξακόσια, 
 
 4 OS aa A 
 σώσσος δὲ ἑξήκοντα. 
 
 Μετὰ δὲ τοῦτον ᾿Αλάπαρον 
 ἄρξαι σάρους τρεῖς, med ot 
 ᾿Αμίλλαρος ἐκ πόλεως Παντι- 
 βίθλιος ὃ ἐβασίλευσε σάρους 
 ιγ΄. ἐφ᾽ οὗ δεύτερον ᾿Δννήδω- 
 
 τον 
 
 
 
 [τὴν δάλασσαν ἀναδῦναι 
 παραπλήσιον ᾿ΩὩάννῃ Ἵ τὴν 
 
 ἰδέαν ἡμιδαίμονα. pes? ὃν 
 
 So much concerning the wisdom of 
 the Chaldzeans. 
 
 It is said that the first king of the 
 country was Alorus, and that he gave 
 out a report that God had appointed 
 him to be the Shepherd of the people: 
 he reigned ten sari: now a sarus is 
 esteemed to be three thousand six 
 hundred years; a neros six hundred; 
 and a sossus sixty. 
 
 After him Alaparus reigned three 
 sari: to him succeeded Amillarus 
 from the city of Pantibiblon, who 
 reigned thirteen sari; in his time 
 came up from the sea a second An- 
 
 nedotus, a semi-deemon very similar 
 
 _In his form to Oannes: after Amilla- 
 
 rus reigned Ammenon twelve sari, 
 
 * Sc. λέγων Α.---λέχει Go.—Aéyer Go. m. 
 
 1 Sc. μὴν τοῦ λεῶς Go. 
 
 § Παντιβίβλου 8ς.---πΠαυτιβίβλιος A. 
 
 4] ᾿Ωάννην Go. 
 
 1 ὧν Go. 
 || ᾿Αννηδοτον Se. 
 

 
 ᾿Αμμένων ἐκ Παντιβίβλων 
 ἤρξε σάρους ιβ΄. ped ὃν 
 Μεγάλαρος 7 ἐκ Παντιβί- 
 βλων ἦρξε σάρους ὀκτωκαί- 
 dexa* εἶτα Δαὼς ποιμὴν ἐκ 
 Παντιβίβλων ἐβασίλευσε σά- 
 ρους δέκω, ἐφ᾽ οὗ δ΄ διφνεῖς ἢ 
 γῆν ἐκ δϑαλάσσης ἀνέδυσαν, 
 ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα ταῦτα, Ἐῤέ- 
 δωκος, ᾿Ἔνεύγαμος, ᾿Ενεύβου-- 
 λος, ὃ ᾿Ανήμεντος. ἐπὶ δὲ τοῦ 
 μετὰ ταῦτα Ἐνεδωρέσχρυ || 
 ᾿Ανώδαφος. Yo μεθ᾽ ὃν ** ἀλ- 
 λοι τεὐτ ἦρξαν καὶ Σίσου- 
 ὥρος ἐπὶ τούτοις, ὡς τοὺς πάν- 
 τὰς εἶναι βασιλεῖς δέκα, ὧν 
 ὁ χρόνος τῆς βασιλείας συνῆξε 
 σάρους ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι. καὶ 
 περὶ τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ παρό- 
 μοια μὲν, οὖκ ἀπαράλλακτα 
 λέγει οὕτως" μετὰ Ἐὐεδώρε- 
 σχον ἄλλοι τινὲς ἦρξαν καὶ 
 Σίσιδρος, ᾧ δὴ Κρόνος προση- 
 μαίνει μὲν ἔσεσδαι πλῆδος 
 ὄμβρων Δεσίου 11 12. δδ κε- 
 λεύει δὲ πᾶν ὅ τι γραμμάτων 
 ἦν ἐχόμενον ἐν “Ἡλιουπόλει {||| 
 τῇ ἐν Σιππάροισιν YY ἀπο- 
 κρύψαι. 
 
 / 
 ἐπιτελέα 
 
 Σίσιδρος δὲ ταῦτα 
 
 ἘΠῚ ποιήσας εὐδέως 
 
 * μεϑ’ ὧν, with acc... 
 
 t Μεγάλανος A. 
 ἢ ᾿Δεδωρέσχου Sc. 
 
 Ἵ ᾿Ανῶ Δάφος Go. 
 
 BEROSSUS. 98 
 
 who was of the city of Pantibiblon: 
 then Megalarus of the same place 
 reigned eighteen sari: then Daos, the 
 shepherd, governed for the space of 
 ten sari; he was of Pantibiblon ; in 
 his time four double-shaped person- 
 ages came up out of the sea to land, 
 whose names were Euedocus, Eneu- 
 gamus, Eneuboulus, and Anementus : 
 afterwards in the time of Euedores- 
 chus appeared another Anodaphus. 
 After these reigned other kings, and 
 last of all Sisithrus: so that in the 
 whole, the number amounted to ten 
 kings, and the term of their reigns to 
 an hundred and twenty sari. (And 
 among other things not irrelative to 
 the subject, he continues thus con- 
 cerning the deluge :) After Euedores- 
 chus some others reigned, and then 
 Sisithrus. To him the deity Cronus 
 foretold that on the fifteenth day of 
 the month Desius there would be a 
 deluge of rain: and he commanded 
 him to deposit all the writings what- 
 ever which were in his possession, in 
 the city of the Sun in Sippara. Sisi- 
 thrus, when he had complied with 
 these commands, sailed immediately 
 to Armenia, and was presently in- 
 
 ἦρξαι Go. throughout. 
 + διφυὲς Go. ὃ ᾿Ενάβουλος Sc. 
 
 ** ὧν Go.—oids Go. m. 
 
 ΤΊ ἄλλοι τοὶ τὲ Α.---ἀἄλλοι δύο re Anon. Dind. 
 
 ΤΙ Δαισίου Dind. 
 {ΠῚ Ἥλιου πόλει Go. 
 
 44 Σισπόροισιν Dind. 
 
 δὲ πέμπτη ἐπὶ δέκα Go. 
 ***® ἔτῃ τελεὰ GO. 
 
 F 
 
34 
 
 en’ ᾿Αρμενίης ἀνέπλωε, καὶ 
 παραυτίκα μὲν" κατελάμβανε 
 Ν 
 τὰ ἐκ τοῦ Φεοῦ. τρίτῃ δὲ 
 ε / > Se. ΕΝ κα 
 ἡμερέῃ ἐπεὶ ὕων ἐκόπασε, 
 / 
 μετίει τῶν ὀρνίδγων, πείρην t 
 , " redo 
 ποιεύμενος εἰ που γὴν ἴδοιεν 
 ~ N Ν 
 τοῦ ὕδατος ἐχδῦσαν" αἱ δὲ 
 ἐχδεκομένον σφέας πελάγεος 
 " 
 ἀμφιχανέος ἀπορέουσαι § xy 
 / A \ 
 καδορμίσονται || παρὰ τὸν 
 Σίσιδρον, ὀπίσω κομίζονται, 
 καὶ ἐπ᾽ αὐτὴν ἕτεραι. ἘἘ 
 ε Ν ~ ΄ὔ > 4 
 ὡς δὲ τῇσι 77 τρίτησιν ἐτύ- 
 χεεν, tt ἀπίκατο δ δ γὰρ δὴ 
 πηλοῦ κατάπλεοι τοὺς ταρ- 
 \ 
 σοὺς, Μεοί μιν ||} ἐξ ἀνδιρώπων 
 Ν ~~ 
 ἀφανίζουσι, τὸ δὲ πλοῖον ἐν 
 / ΄ 
 ᾿Αρμενίῃ περίαπτα ξύλων ἀλε- 
 4 Ν ~ > 
 ξιφάρμακα καὶ τοῖσιν ἐπίχω- 
 
 ρίοις παρείχετο. 
 
 OF THE 
 
 ἜἘντὶ δ᾽ 4 οἱ λέγουσι 
 τοὺς πρώτους *** ἀνασχόντας 
 ῥώμῃ τε καὶ μεγέδϑει χαυνω- 
 δ έντας καὶ δὴ δεῶν +++ 
 καταφρονήσαντας ἀμείνονας 
 εἶναι τύρσιν ἠλίβατον ἀεί- 
 
 pew, ttt ἢ νῦν Βαβυλών ἐσ- 
 
 * μὴν A. 
 
 1 πειριῆν A, 
 
 || ὀκεῖκα ϑορμίσονται Α.---ὄκηκα “ορμίσονται Go. 
 tt τισὶ A. ΤΙ ἔτυχε A. 
 qq Sc— Ev τῇ δὴ Go. 
 
 ** ἑταῖραι A. 
 Ill wy A. 
 ttt Sea Go. 
 
 BEROSSUS. 
 
 spired by God. Upon the third day 
 after the cessation of the rain Sisi- 
 thrus sent out birds, by way of 
 experiment, that he might judge 
 whether the flood had subsided. But 
 the birds passing over an unbounded 
 sea, without finding any place of rest, 
 returned again to Sisithrus. This he 
 repeated with other birds. And when 
 upon the third trial he succeeded, for 
 the birds then returned with their 
 feet stained with mud, the gods 
 translated him from among men. 
 With respect to the vessel, which yet 
 remains in Armenia, it is a custom of 
 the inhabitants to form bracelets and 
 amulets of its wood.—Syncel. Chron. 
 38.—Euseb. Prep. Evan. lib. 9.— 
 Euseb. Chron. 5. 8. 
 
 TOWER OF BABEL. 
 
 They say that the first inhabitants 
 of the earth, glorying in their own 
 strength and size, and despising the 
 gods, undertook to raise a tower whose 
 top should reach the sky, in the place 
 in which Babylon now stands: but 
 when it approached the heaven, the 
 
 1 ἐπιτεύων Α.---ἔπειτα, ὔων Go. 
 § ἀπορρεούσαι A. 
 4 αὐτῇσι Go. 
 §§ ἀπείκατο A. 
 *** Sc. inserts ἐκ γῆς. 
 111 ἀείργειν Go. 
 
Μ > cs -" 
 τιν» ἤδη τε ὦσσον εἶναι τοῦ 
 ΕἸ ~ \ \ πὰ 
 οὐρανοῦ. καὶ τοὺς ἀνέμους 
 δεοῖσι βωδέοντας ἀνατρέψαι 
 περὶ αὐτοῖσι τὸ μηχάνημα, 
 τοῦ δὴ τὰ ἐρείπια ἦ λέγεσϑαι 
 
 Βαβυλῶνα. τέως δὲ ὄντας 
 
 Seay πολύ- 
 
 ὁμογλώσσους ἐκ 
 Spout φωνὴν ἐνέγκασϑαι" ὃ 
 μετὰ δὲ Κρόνῳ καὶ Τιτῆνι || 
 ~ LZ < \ t 
 συστῆναι πόλεμον. ὃ δὲ τόπος 
 ae Me ol ~ 
 ἐν ᾧ πύργον wxodounoay, νῦν 
 Βαβυλὼν καλέξιται, dia τὴν 
 ΞΖ -“ XN Ν ,ὕὔ 
 σύγχυσιν Tov περὶ τὴν διά- 
 hextoy πρῶτον ἐναγροῦς. ‘EB- 
 ραῖοι γὰρ τὴν σύγχυσιν Βάβελ 
 
 καλοῦσι. 
 
 * ϑεοὶ εἰβοϑέοντας MSS. 
 
 BEROSSUS. 35 
 
 winds assisted the gods, and over- 
 threw the work upon its contrivers: 
 and its ruins are said to be still at 
 Babylon: and the gods introduced a 
 diversity of tongues among men, who 
 till that time had all spoken the same 
 language : and a war arose between 
 Cronus and Titan. The place in 
 which they built the tower is now 
 called Babylon, on account of the 
 confusion of the tongues; for con- 
 fusion is by the Hebrews called Babel. 
 —Euseb. Prep. Evan. lib. 9.—Syncel. 
 
 Chron. 44.—Euseb. Chron. 13. 
 
 1 Se.—tofma Go. 
 
 1 Go. πι.--πολύϑρωον Go.—moAdspouv Sc. 
 
 § A.—ivéyxacas (ο.---ἐνείκασϑαι Se. 
 
 || Se—ri τινι A.—Tiran Go. 
 
BEROSSUS: 
 
 FROM JOSEPHUS, &c.* 
 
 META τὸν κατακλυσμὸν de- 
 κάτῃ γενεᾷ», παρὰ Χαλδαίοις 
 Ἂς ,ὔ 3. ιν \ ͵ 
 τὶς ἣν δίκαιος ἀνὴρ, καὶ μέ- 
 γας; καὶ τὰ οὐράνια ἔμπει- 
 
 pos. 
 
 ο 
 
 ᾿Απὸ δὲ Ναβονασάρου τοὺς 
 χρόνους τῆς τῶν ἀστέρων κινή- 
 σεως Χαλδαῖοι ἠκρίβωσαν, 
 καὶ ἀπὸ Χαλδαίων οἱ παρ᾽ 
 Ἕλλησι μαδϑηματικὸι λαβόν- 
 res ἐπειδὴ Ναβόνασαρος 
 συναγαγὼν τὰς πράξεις τῶν 
 
 πρὸ αὐτοῦ βασιλέων, ἠφάνι- 
 
 OF ABRAHAM. 
 
 Arter the deluge, in the tenth ge- 
 neration, was a certain man among the 
 Chaldeans renowned. for his justice 
 and great exploits, and for his skill in 
 the celestial sciences.—Euseb. Prep. 
 Evan. lib. 9. 
 
 F NABONASAR. 
 
 From the reign of Nabonasar only 
 are the Chaldeans (from whom the 
 Greek mathematicians copy) accu- 
 rately acquainted with the heavenly 
 motions : for Nabonasar collected all 
 the mementos of the kings prior to 
 himself, and destroyed them, that the 
 enumeration of the Chaldean kings 
 
 * The various readings to some of the following extracts would, if they 
 were all given, exceed the text in size. I have selected those which appear 
 
 to be most material. 
 

 
 
 
 Sips 
 σεν, ὅπως ἀπ᾿ αὐτοῦ ἡ κατα- 
 ρίϑμησις γίνεται τῶν Χαλ- 
 
 δαίων βασιλέων. 
 
 BEROSSUS. 37 
 
 might commence with him.—Syncel. 
 Chron. 207. 
 
 OF THE DESTRUCTION OF THE JEWISH TEMPLE. 
 
 Τινὰ τρόπον πέμψας ἐπὶ 
 τὴν Αἴγυπτον καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν 
 ἡμετέραν γῆν τὸν υἱὸν τὸν 
 ἑαυτοῦ ΝΝΗαβουχοδονόσορον με- 
 τὰ πολλῆς δυνάμεως, ἐπείδη- 
 περ ἀφεστῶτας αὐτοὺς ἐπύ- 
 Zero πάντων ἐκράτησε, καὶ 
 τὸν ναὸν ἐνέπρησε τὸν ἐν Ἵερο- 
 σολύμοις, ὅλως τε πάντα τὸν 
 Tap ἡμῶν λαὸν ἀναστήσας; 
 εἰς Βαβυλῶνα μετῴκισεν. 
 συνέβη δὲ καὶ τὴν πόλιν ἐρη- 
 μωδῆναι χρόνον ἔτων ἑβδομή- 
 κοντα, μέχρι Κύρου tov Περ- 
 σῶν βασιλέως. κρατῆσαι δὲ 
 (φησὶ) τὸν Βαβυλώνιον Αἰγύπ- 
 τὸν, Συρίας, Φοινίκης, ᾿Αρα- 
 βίας, πάντας δὲ ὑπερβαλλό- 
 μενον ἢ ταῖς πράξεσι τοὺς πρὸ 
 αὐτοῦ Χαλδαίων καὶ Βαβυ- 
 
 λωνίων βεβασιλευχότας. 
 
 He (Nabopollasar) sent his son 
 Nabuchodonosor with a great army 
 against Egypt, and against Judea, 
 upon his being informed that they had 
 revolted from him; and by that means 
 he subdued them all, and set fire to 
 the temple that was at Jerusalem ; and 
 removed our people entirely out of 
 their own country, and transferred 
 them to Babylon, and our city re- 
 mained in a state of desolation during 
 the interval of seventy years, until the 
 days of Cyrus king of Persia. (He 
 then says, that) this Babylonian king 
 conquered Egypt, and Syria, and 
 Phoenicia, and: Arabia, and exceeded 
 in his exploits all that had reigned 
 before him in Babylon and Chaldza. 
 —Joseph. contr. Appton. lib. 1. c. 19. 
 
 OF NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 
 
 *Anotoas δὲ ὃ πατὴρ at- 
 τοῦ Ναβοπολλάσαρος, ἦ ὅτι ὃ 
 ͵ 4 mv + 
 τεταγμένος σατράπης evret 
 
 * ὑπερβαλόμενον MSS. 
 
 + Hud. m.—Nafordocapog Hud. from MSS. 
 
 When Nabopollasar his (Nabucho- 
 donosor’s) father, heard that the go- 
 vernor, whom he had set over Egypt, 
 
 Ζ ev τῇ. Go. 
 
38 
 
 nw \ Ν 
 Αἰγύπτῳ καὶ τοῖς περὶ τὴν 
 Συρίαν τὴν Κοίλην καὶ τὴν 
 / 
 Φοινίκην τόποις ἀποστάτης 
 ἈΝ 
 γέγονεν, οὗ δυνάμενος αὐτὸς 
 » ~ ΄ 
 ἔτι χαχοπαδεῖν, συστήσας 
 ~ “ , ” 
 τῷ υἱῷ ΝΝαβουχοδονοσόρῳ ὄντι 
 . » A ~ 
 ἔτι ἐν grit μέρη τινὰ τῆς 
 / 
 δυνάμεως», ἐξέπεμψεν ἐπ᾽ ἀυ- 
 / Ν 
 τόν.}} συμμίξας δὲ Ναβουχο- 
 ~ Ν 
 δονόσορος τῷ ἀποστάτῃ, καὶ 
 παραταξάμενος, αὐτοῦ τε 
 Ἂν Ν 
 ἐκυρίευσεν, καὶ τὴν χώραν ἐξ 
 ἀρχῆς 4] ὑπὸ τὴν αὑτοῦ βασι- 
 ~ Ἂ, 
 λείαν ἐποίησεν. τῷ δὲ πατρὶ 
 ἀυτοῦ συνέβη Ναβοπολλα- 
 - \ 
 σάρῳ, κατὰ τοῦτον τὸν καιρὸν 
 ἀῤῥωςσαντι, ἐν τῇ Βαβυ- 
 XN 
 λωνίων mores μεταλλάξαι τὸν 
 wy , ~ 
 βίον, ἔτη θεβασιλευχότι ξικο- 
 / 
 σιν éwea.** 
 A 
 AicSopevos δὲ μετ᾽ οὐ πολὺ 
 - Ν 
 τὴν τοῦ πατρὸς τελευτὴν Να- 
 / ων 
 βουχοδονόσορος, καταστήσας 
 X Γ ΞΟ " , 
 τὰ κατὰ τὴν Αἴγυπτον πράγ- 
 ‘ . 
 ματα καὶ τὴν λοιπὴν χώραν; 
 ἣΝ Ν 5 4 2 
 καὶ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους ᾽Ἰου- 
 4 \ 4 SX 
 δαίων τε καὶ Φοινίκων καὶ 
 ~ / 
 Σύρων καὶ τῶν κατὰ τὴν Al- 
 > Ὁ 4 ‘ 
 γυπτον edvav συντάξας τισὶ 
 ~ ΄΄ 
 τῶν φίλων, μετὰ βαρυτά- 
 
 τῆς 7 δυνάμεως καὶ τῆς λοι- 
 
 BEROSSUS,. 
 
 and the provinces of Coelesyria and 
 Pheenicia, had revolted, he was de- 
 termined to punish his delinquencies, 
 and for that purpose entrusted part 
 of his army to his son Nabuchodono- 
 sor, who was then of mature age, + 
 and sent him forth against the rebel: 
 and Nabuchodonosor engaged and 
 overcame him, and reduced the coun- 
 try again under his dominion. And 
 it came to pass that his father, Nabo- 
 pollasar, was seised with a disorder 
 which proved fatal, and he died in the 
 city of Babylon, after he had reigned 
 nine and twenty years. 
 
 Nabuchodonosor, as soon as he had 
 received intelligence of his father’s 
 death, set in order the affairs of 
 Egypt and the other countries, and 
 committed to some of his faithful 
 officers the captives he had taken 
 from the Jews, and Pheenicians, and 
 Syrians, and the nations belonging to 
 Egypt, that they might conduct them 
 with that part of the forces which 
 had heavy armour, together with the 
 
 * Ναβουκοδροσόρῳ Dind.—NaPouvyodovocspw Go.—Nabucodrossorus Eu. Ar. 
 
 --Ναβοκοδροσόρῳ A.—B. 
 
 + Lat.—Fab.—but a youth—Qy. 
 
 + Sync. omits this passage. 
 
 4 ἐξαῦϑις Eu. 
 
 ** zy Jos. in Orig. 
 
 || αὐτῶν Go. 
 ++ τῆς Jos. in Orig. 
 

 
 πῆς ὠφελείας ἀνακομίζειν εἰς 
 = NT ΄ 
 τὴν Βαβυλωνίαν, αὐτὸς ὁρμή- 
 ,ὔ 
 σας ὅλιγοστὸς παρεγένετο 
 διὰ τῆς ἐρήμου εἰς Βαβυλῶνα. 
 καταλαβὼν δὲ τὰ πράγματα 
 ΄ 
 διοικούμενα ὑπὸ Χαλδαίων, 
 καὶ διατηρουμένην τὴν βασι- 
 λείαν ὑπὸ τῦν βελτίστου av- 
 τῶν, κυριεύσας ἐξ ὁλοκλήρου 
 δὲ aT eee coe Ne 
 τῆς πατρικῆς ἀρχῆς. Τοῖς μὲν 
 αἰχμαλώτοις παραγενόμενος 
 , > ~ > ‘4 > 
 συνέταξεν ἀντῦις ἀποικίας ἐν 
 ~ 9 / ne 
 τοῖς ἐπιτηδειοτάτοις τῆς Ba- 
 βυλωνίᾳς τόποις ἀποδεῖξαι, 
 > A Ἄν, tT aN ~ 2 ~ 
 ἀυτὸς δὲ ἀπὸ τῶν ἐκ τοῦ πο- 
 Ἀέμου λαφύρων, τό τε Βήλου 
 ’ 
 
 ε Ν Ἁ ‘ - 4 
 ἱερὸν χαὶ τὰ hata χυσμήσας 
 ΄ ΄ 4 
 φιλοτίκως. Τήν τε ὑπάρχου- 
 σαν ἐξ ἀρχῆς πόλιν, καὶ éré- 
 4 ᾽΄ 
 pay ἔξωδεν προσχαρισάμενος 
 
 Ν > ΄ + \ \ 
 καὶ ἀνακαινήσας 1 πρὸς τὸ 
 , 
 μηχέτι δυνάσδϑα: τοὺς πολιορ- 
 κοῦντας τὸν ποταμὸν dya- 
 , 
 στρέφοντας ἐπὶ τὴν πόλιν 
 κατασχευάζειν, ὑπερεβάλετο 
 ~ Ν ~ wa 
 τρεῖς μὲν τῆς Evov πόλεως 
 ,- -Ὁ - 
 περιβόλους, τρεῖς δὲ τῆς ἔξω 
 4 ~ 
 τούτων, τοὺς μὲν ἐξ ὁπτῆς 
 πλίνδου καὶ ἀσφάλτου, τοὺς 
 ΡΨ ~ ~ 
 δὲ ἐξ αὐτῆς τῆς πλώϑου. Kad 
 τειχίσας ἀξιολόγως τὴν πόλιν, 
 ἣν Ν ~ 
 καὶ τοὺς πυλῶνας κοσμήσας 
 ἱεροπρεπῶς, 
 
 προσκατεσκεύα- 
 
 * couloas A. 
 
 BEROSSUS. 39 
 
 rest cf his baggage, to Babylonia: in 
 the mean time with a few attendants 
 he hastily crossed the desert to Baby- 
 lon. When he arrived there he found 
 that his affairs had been faithfully 
 conducted by the Chaldeans, and that 
 the principal person among them had 
 preserved the kingdom for him: and 
 he accordingly obtained possession of 
 And he 
 distributed the captives in colonies in 
 
 all his father’s dominions. 
 
 the most proper places of Babylonia: 
 and adorned the temple of Belus, 
 and the other temples, in a sumptuous 
 and pious manner, out of the spoils 
 which he had taken in this war. He 
 also rebuilt the old city, and added 
 another to it on the outside, and so 
 far completed Babylon, that none, who 
 might besiege it afterwards, should 
 have it in their power to divert the 
 river, so as to facilitate an entrance 
 into it: and he effected this by build- 
 ing three walls about the inner city, 
 and three about the outer. Some of 
 these walls he built of burnt brick 
 and bitumen, and some of brick only. 
 When he had thus admirably fortified 
 the city, and had magnificently adorn- 
 ed the gates, he added also a new 
 palace to those in which his forefathers 
 had dwelt, adjoining them, but ex- 
 ceeding them in height and splendor. 
 
 } ὁλοκλήρως Go. 
 
 1 ἀναγκάσας Ψ]ρ.---- ἀνακαινίσας Dind. 
 
40 
 
 “Ἢ ~ 4 
 κεν τοῖς πατρικοὶς βασιλείοις 
 
 , 
 ἕτερα βασίλεια ἐχόμενα 
 2 Ζ ε ΄ A 
 ἐκείνων, ὑπεραίροντα ἀνάστη- 
 
 - / 
 μα καὶ τὴν πολλὴν πολυτέ- 
 λειῶν. Maxpiy* δ᾽ ἴσως 
 uv ~ 4 
 ἔσται ἐάν τις ἐξηγῆται, πλὴν 
 ὄντα γε est ὑπερθολὴν ὡς 
 
 4 
 μεγάλα καὶ ὑπερήφανα, 
 
 ͵ὔ 
 συνετελέσϑη ἡμέραις δεκα- 
 
 ’ὔ n 
 πέντε. ἐν δὲ τοῖς βασιλείοις 
 τούτοις ἀναλήμματαϊ λίσινα 
 Ν 
 ὑψηλὰ ἀνῳκοδομήσας, καὶ τὴν 
 7 > \ ε ΄ ~ 
 ὄψιν ἀποδοὺς ὁμοιοτάτην τοῖς 
 ὄρεσι; καταφυτεύσας δένδρεσι 
 ~ > 4 ‘ 
 mayrodamors ἐξειργάσατο, καὶ 
 72 x , 
 κατασχευάσας τὸν καλού- 
 ἱενον κρεμαστὸν παράδεισον, 
 διὰ τὸ τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ 
 ἐπιδυμεῖν τῆς ὀρείας διαδέ- 
 ΄ > ~ 
 σεως, Tedpanuneyny ἐν τοῖς 
 
 κατὰ τὴν Μηδίανδ τόποις. 
 
 OF THE CHALDZAN 
 
 Ναβουχρδονόσορος μὲν οὖν 
 
 " Xa , S, ~ 
 μετὰ τὸ ἀρξάσϑαι τοῦ προει- 
 ρημένου τείχους, ἐμπεσὼν εἰς 
 ἀῤῥωστίαν, μετηλλάξατο τὸν 
 βίον, βεβασιλευκὼς ἔτη τεσ- 
 
 / - \ 
 σαρακοντατρία. τῆς δὲ βα- 
 
 τ ͵ὔ 
 σιλείᾳς κύριος ἐγένετο 6 υἷος 
 
 BEROSSUS. 
 
 Any attempt to describe it would be 
 tedious : yet notwithstanding its pro- 
 digious size and magnificence it was 
 finished within fifteen days. In this 
 palace he erected very high walks, 
 supported by stone pillars; and by 
 planting what was called a pensile 
 paradise, and replenishing it with all 
 sorts of trees, he rendered the pros- 
 pect an exact resemblance of a moun- 
 This he did to 
 gratify his queen, because she had 
 been brought up in Media, and was 
 fond of a mountainous situation.— 
 
 tainous country. 
 
 Joseph. contr. Appion. lib. 1. c. 19.— 
 Syncel. Chron, 220.—Euseb. Prep. 
 Evan. lib. 9. 
 
 KINGS AFTER NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 
 
 Nabuchodonosor, whilst he was en- 
 gaged in building the above-mentioned 
 wall, fell sick, and died after he had 
 reigned forty-three years; whereupon 
 his son Evilmerodachus. succeeded 
 him in his kingdom. His govern- 
 ment however was conducted in an 
 
 * B. Dind.—paxex Hud.—yixgdv Go. 
 
 + Dind. and others omit ye εἰς, 
 
 § Μήδειαν Dind. 
 
 1 ἀναλήματα Vulg. 
 

 
 αὐτοῦ Ἐὐειλμαράδουχος. ἢ οὗ- 
 τος προστὰς τῶν πρωγμά- 
 τῶν ἀνόμως καὶ ἀσελγῶς ἐπι- 
 βουλευϑεὶς ὑπὸ τοῦ τὴν ἀδελ- 
 φὴν ἔχοντος αὐτοῦ Νηριγλισ- 
 σούρου ἦ ἀνῃρέϑη; βασιλεύσας 
 ἔτη δύο. 
 
 Μετὰ δὲ τὸ ἀναιρεδῆναι 
 τοῦτον, διαδεξάμενος τὴν ἀρ- 
 χὴν ὁ ἐπιβουλεύσας αὐτῷ 
 Νηριγλισσόορος, ἐβασίλευσεν 
 ἔτη τέσσαρα. 
 
 Τούτου υἱὸς Λαβοροσοάρ- 
 χοδος Ὁ ἐκυρίευσε μὲν τῆς 
 βασιλείας παῖς ὧν μῆνας 
 ἐννέα" ἐπιβουλευδεὶς δὲ, διὰ 
 τὸ πολλὰ ἐμφαίνειν κακοήδη» 
 ὑπὸ τῶν φίλων ἀπετυμπα- 
 νίσϑη. 
 
 ᾿Απολομένου δὲ τοῦτου, συν- 
 ἔλϑϑδοντες οἱ ἐπιβουλεύσαντες 
 αὐτῷ, κοινῇ τὴν βασιλέιαν 
 περιέϑδηκαν Νιαβοννήδῳ δ᾽ τινὲ 
 τῶν ἐκ Βαβυλῶνος, ὄντι ἐκ 
 τῆς αὐτῆς ἐπισυστάσεως. || 
 ἐπὶ τούτου τὰ περὶ τὸν ποτα- 
 μὸν τείχη τῆς Βαβυλωνίων 
 πόλεως, ἐξ ὀπτῆς πλίνϑου καὶ 
 ἀσφάλτου χατεκοσμήϑη. 
 
 Οὔσης δὲ τῆς βασιλείας 
 ἀντοῦ ἐν τῷ ἑπτακαιδεκάτῳ 
 
 ἔτει; προεξεληλυδὼς Κῦρος 
 
 * Εὐιλμαλούρουκος Eu. 
 
 BEROSSUS. 41 
 
 illegal and improper manner, and he 
 fell a victim to a conspiracy which 
 was formed against his life by Nerig- 
 lissoorus, his sister’s husband, after he 
 had reigned about two years. 
 
 Upon his death Neriglissoorus, the 
 chief of the conspirators, obtained 
 possession of the kingdom, and reigned 
 four years. 
 
 He was succeeded by his son La- 
 borosoarchodus who was but a child, 
 and reigned nine months; for his 
 misconduct he was seized by conspi- 
 rators, and put to death by torture. 
 
 After his death, the conspirators 
 assembled, and by common consent 
 placed the crown upon the head of 
 Nabonnedus, a man of Babylon, and 
 one of the leaders of the insurrection. 
 It was in his reign that the walls of 
 the city of Babylon which defend the 
 banks of the river were curiously built 
 with burnt brick and bitumen. 
 
 In the seventeenth year of the reign 
 of Nabonnedus, Cyrus came out of 
 Persia with a great army, and having 
 
 T Νηριγλισάρου Eu. 
 
 t Λαβοροσάρσαχος ΑΙ]. --Χαβαεσσοαρᾶχος Eu. 
 
 § Ναυονίδῳ MS. ΕἸ.---Ναβονίδῳ Ἐπ. 
 
 || Eu. Ημά.---ἐπιστάσεως Vulg. 
 
 “ προσεληλυϑὼς Eu.—séeAnavdws Syn. 
 
 G 
 
42 
 
 ἐκ τῆς Περσίδος μετὰ δυνά- 
 μεως πολλῆς, καὶ καταστρε- 
 ψάμενος τὴν λοιπὴν ᾿Ασίαν ἢ 
 πᾶσαν, ὥρμησεν ἐπὶ τῆς Ba- 
 βυλωνίας. αἰσδιόμενος δὲ Να- 
 βόννηδος τὴν ἔφοδον αὐτοῦ, 
 ἀπαντήσας μετὰ τῆς δυνά- 
 μεως καὶ παραταξάμενος, 
 ἡττηδεὶς τῇ μαχῇ καὶ φυγὼν 
 ὀλιγοστὸς, συνεκλείσϑη εἰς 
 τὴν Βορσιππηνῶν πόλιν. Κῦρος 
 δὲ Βαβυλῶνα καταλαβόμενος, 
 καὶ συντάξας ta ἔξω τῆς 
 πόλεως τείχη κατασκάψαι; 
 διὰ τὸ λίαν αὐτῷ πραγματι- 
 κὴν καὶ δυσάλωτον φανῆναι 
 ᾿Ανέζευξεν ἐπὶ 
 Βόρσιππον, ἐκπολιορκήσων τὸν 
 Ναβόννηδον. τοῦ δὲ Νιαβοννή- 
 
 δου οὐχ ὑπομείναντος τὴν πο- 
 
 I 
 τὴν πόλιν. 
 
 λιορκίαν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐγχειρήσαντος 
 αὑτὸν, πρότερον χρησάμενος 
 Κῦρος φιλαν;ρώπως, καὶ δοὺς 
 οἰκητήριον αὐτῷ Καρμανίαν, 
 ἐξέπεμψεν ἐκ τῆς Βαβυλωνίας. 
 Ναβόννηδος μὲν οὖν, τὸ λοιπὸν 
 τοῦ χρόνου διαγενόμενος ἐν 
 ἐκείνῃ τῇ χώρᾳ, κατέστρεψε 
 
 τὸν βίον. 
 
 almost impracticable. 
 
 BEROSSUS. 
 
 conquered all the rest of Asia, ad- 
 vanced hastily into the country of 
 Babylonia. As soon as Nabonnedus 
 perceived he was advancing to attack 
 him, he assembled his forces and op- 
 posed him, but was defeated, and fled 
 with a few of his adherents, and was 
 shut up in the city of Borsippus. Upon 
 this Cyrus took Babylon, and gave 
 orders that the outer walls should be 
 demolished, because the city appeared 
 of such strength as to render a siege 
 From thence 
 he marched to Borsippus, to besiege 
 Nabonnedus: but Nabonnedus de- 
 livered himself into his hands without 
 holding out the place: he was there- 
 fore kindly treated by Cyrus, who 
 provided him with an establishment 
 in Carmania, but sent him out of Ba~ 
 bylonia. Nabonnedus accordingly 
 spent the remainder of his life in that 
 country, where he died.—Joseph. 
 contr. App. lib. 1. ο. 20.—Euseb. 
 Prep. Evan. lib. 9. 
 
 OF THE FEAST OF SACEA. 
 
 Βήρωσσος δὲ ἐν πρώτῳ Ba- 
 
 βυλωνιακῶν, τῷ Λωῷ, φῃσὶ, 
 
 Berossus, in the first book of his 
 Babylonian history, says ; That in the 
 
 * Βασιλείαν ἅπασαν Eu. 
 
 
 
 
 
BEROSSUS. 43 
 
 pus ἐκκαιδεκάτῃ ayer%as eleventh month, called Loos, is cele- 
 ἑορτὴν Σακέας προσαγορευο- brated in Babylon the feast of Sacea 
 μένην ἐν Βαβυλῶνι ἐπὶ ἡμέρας for five days, in which it is the custom 
 πέντε, ἐν αἷς ἔϑος εἶναι ap- that the masters should obey their 
 χεσδαι τοὺς δεσπότας ὑπὸ domestics, one of whom is led round 
 τῶν οἰκέτων, ἀφηγεῖσδαι τε the house, clothed in a royal garment, 
 τῆς οἰκίας ἔνα αὐτῶν ἐνδεδυ- andhimthey call Zoganes.—Atheneus, 
 κότα ςολὴν ὁμοίαν τῇ θασι- lib. 14. 
 
 λικῇ, ὃν καλεῖσϑαι Ζωγανήν. 
 
MEGASTHENES: 
 
 FROM ABYDENUS. 
 
 OF NEBUCHADNEZZAR. 
 
 ABYAHNOS ἐν τῇ ᾿Ασσυρίων 
 γραφῇ, Μεγασθένης δέ φησι. 
 Νιαβουκοδρόσορον Ηρακλέος * 
 > 4 U JE 4 
 ἀλκιμώτερον γεγονότα ἐπὶ TE 
 Λιβύην καὶ ἸἸβηρίγν στρα- 
 τεῦσαι" ταύτας δέ χειρωσά- 
 ὝΕΣ, ΕΣ, > 
 μενον ἀπόδασμον αὐτέων εἰς 
 τὰ δεξιὰ τοῦ πόντου κατοικί- 
 Ν 
 σαι. Μετὰ δὲ λέγεται πρὸς 
 Χαλδαίων, ὡς ἀναβὰς ἐπὶ τὰ 
 βασιλήϊα χατασχεδείη Ted 
 ὅτεῳ δη. ἡ φϑεγξάμενος δὲ 
 Ἐ \ 
 εἶπεν οὕτως. ““ Ἔγω Na- 
 βουκοδρόσορος, ὦ Ἰβαβυλώνιοι, 
 Ν 7. 5 ε ~ / 
 THY μέλλουσων ὑμῖν προαγγελ- 
 ho συμφορὴν, τὴν οὔτε Βῆλος 
 ἐμὸς πρόγονος, οὔτε βασίλειῳ 
 7 
 Βήλτις μοίρας 
 
 πεῖσαι σϑενοῦσι.1 ἥξει Πέρ- 
 
 ἀποτρέψαι 
 
 Cd ὔ ~ / 
 ons ἡμίονος τοῖσιν ὑμετέροισι 
 
 y 4 4 
 δαίμοσι χρεώμενος συμικάχοι- 
 
 * 'Ἡρακλέως Eu. 
 t διε.---ὠασθενοῦσιν Eu. 
 
 Axypenus, in his history of the 
 Assyrians, has preserved the follow- 
 ing fragment of Megasthenes, who 
 says: That Nabucodrosorus, having 
 become more powerful than Hercules, 
 invaded Libya and Iberia, and when 
 he had rendered them tributary, he 
 extended his conquests over the in- 
 habitants of the shores upon the right 
 of the sea. It is moreover related 
 by the Chaldzans, that as he went up 
 into his palace he was possessed by 
 some god; and he cried out and said: 
 “ Oh! Babylonians, I, Nabucodroso- 
 rus, foretel unto you a calamity which 
 must shortly come to pass, which 
 neither Belus my ancestor, nor his 
 queen Beltis, have power to persuade 
 the Fates to turn away. A Persian 
 mule shall come, and by the assist- 
 ance of your gods shall impose upon 
 
 t+ Sc—Sea. dre ὠδὴ, Eu. 
 

 
 aw ἐπάξει δὲ δουλοσύνην. οὗ 
 δὴ συναίτιος ἔσται Μήδης τὸ 
 ᾿Ασσύριον αὔχημα. ὡς εἴδϑε 
 μιν πρόσϑεν, ἢ δοῦναι τοὺς 
 πολιήτας, χάρυβδίν τινα ἢ 
 Sdraccay εἰσδεξαμένην ἀϊσ- 
 τῶσαι πρόῤῥιζον, ἢ μιν ἄλλας 
 ὁδοὺς στραφέντα φέρεσϑαι 
 διὰ τῆς ἐρήμου, ἵνᾳ οὔτε ἄσ- 
 Tétty οὔτε πάτος ἀνδρώπων, 
 δῆρες δὲ νόμον ἔχουσι, καὶ 
 Ὀρνιδες πλάζονται; ev τε πέ- 
 τρῇσι καὶ χαράδρῃσι μοῦνον 
 ἀλώμενον' ἐμέ τε πρὶν ἐς ἢ νόον 
 βαλέσϑαι 
 
 Sia af ~ ” 
 ἀμείνονος κυρησαι. 
 
 ταῦτα, τέλεος 
 Ὃ μὲν ϑεσπίσας παρα- 
 χρῆμα ἠφάνιστο. ὃ δὲ οἱ παῖς 
 Εὐιλμαλούρουχος ἐβασίλευε. 
 τὸν δὲ 6 κηδεστὴς ἀποκτείνας 
 Νηριγλισάρης, λεῖπε παῖδα 
 Λαβασσοάρασκον. τούτου δὲ 
 ἀποδανόντος βιαίῳ μόρῳ, Na~ 
 βαννίδοχον ἀποδείκνυσι βασι- 
 λέα, προσήκοντά οἱ οὐδέν. τῷ 
 δὲ Κῦρος ἑλὼν Βαβυλῶνα Καρ- 
 μανίης ἡγεμονίην δωρέεται. 
 (Καὶ περὶ τοῦ κτίσαι δέ 
 τὸν Ναβουχοδονόσορ τὴν Βα- 
 βυλῶνα, ὁ αὐτὸς ταῦτα γρά- 
 er’) λέγεται δὲ πάντα μὲν 
 ἐξ ἀρχῆς ὕδωρ εἶναι, ϑάλασ-- 
 Βῆλον δὲ 
 
 open παῦσαι, χώρην ἑκάστῳ 
 
 . , 
 σαν καλεομένην, 
 
 ἀπονείμαντα, καὶ Βαβυλῶνα. 
 
 MEGASTHENES. 
 
 45 
 
 you the yoke of slavery: the author 
 of which shall be a Mede, the vain 
 Before he should 
 thus betray my subjects, Oh! that 
 some sea or whirlpool might receive 
 him, and his memory be blotted out 
 for ever ; or that he might be cast out 
 to wander through some desert, where 
 there are neither cities nor the trace 
 
 glory of Assyria. 
 
 of men, a solitary exile among rocks 
 and caverns where beasts and birds 
 alone abide. But for me, before he 
 shall have conceived these mischiefs 
 in his mind, a happier end will be 
 provided.” 
 
 When he had thus prophesied, he 
 expired : and was succeeded by his 
 son Evilmaluruchus, who was slain 
 by his kinsman Neriglisares: and 
 Neriglisares left Labassoarascus his 
 son: and when he also had suffered 
 death by violence, they crowned Na- 
 bannidochus, who had no connexion 
 with the royal family; and in his reign 
 Cyrus took Babylon, and granted him 
 a principality in Carmania. 
 
 And concerning the rebuilding of 
 Babylon by Nabuchodonosor, he writes 
 thus: It is said that from the begin- 
 ning all things were water, called the 
 sea: that Belus caused this state of 
 things to cease, and appointed to each 
 its proper place: and he surrounded 
 Babylon with a wall: but in process 
 
 * sip Eu. 
 
46 
 
 τείχει περιβαλεῖν" τῷ χρόνῳ de 
 τῷ ἰχνευμένῳ ἀφανισδῆναι. 
 τειχίσαι δὲ αὖδις Ναβουχο- 
 δονόσορον τὸ μέχρι τὴς Μακε- 
 δονίων ἀρχῆς διαμεῖναν ἐὸν 
 χαλκόπυλον. Καὶ wed” ἔτερα 
 ᾿πιλέγειν, Ναβουχοδονόσορος δὲ 
 διαδεξάμενος τὴν ἀρχὴν, Βα- 
 βυλῶνα μὲν ἐτείχισε τριπλῷ 
 περιβόλῳ, ἐν πεντεκαίδεκᾳ 
 ἡμέρῃσι, τὸν τε ᾿Αρμακάλην 
 ποταμὸν ἐξήγαγεν, ἐόντα κέ- 
 pas Ἑὐφρητέω, τὸν τε ᾿Αχρά- 
 
 κανον. ἢ 
 
 ὑπὲρ δὲ τῆς Σιππα- 
 ρηνῶν πόλιος» λάκκον ὀρυξά- 
 μενος, περίμετρον μὲν τεσσα- 
 ράχοντα παρασᾳγγέων, βά- 
 δος δ᾽ ὀργυιῶν ἔικοσι, πύλας 
 ἐπέστησεν, τὰς ἀνοίγοντες 
 ἄρδεσκον τὸ πεδίον" καλέουσι 
 δ᾽ ἀυτὰς ᾿Εχετογνωμόνας. + 
 ἐπετείχισε δὲ καὶ τῆς Ἔρυ- 
 pins δαλάσσης τὴν ἐπίκλυ- 
 σιν» καὶ Τερηδόνα πόλιν ἔκτι- 
 σεν, κατὰ τὰς ᾿Δράβων εἰσ- 
 βολάς" τά τε βασιλήϊα δέν- 
 ὃροις ἤσκησε; κρημαστοὺς πα- 
 
 ραδείσους ὀνομάσας. 
 
 MEGASTHENES. 
 
 of time this wall disappeared: and 
 Nabuchodonosor walled it. in again, 
 and it remained so with its brazen 
 gates until the time of the Macedo- 
 nian conquest. And after other things 
 he says: Nabuchodonosor having 
 succeeded to the kingdom, built the 
 walls of Babylon in a triple circuit in 
 fifteen days; and he turned the river 
 Armacale, a branch of the Euphrates, 
 and the Acracanus: and above the 
 city of Sippara he dug a receptacle 
 for the waters, whose perimeter was 
 forty parasangs, and whose depth was 
 twenty cubits; and he placed gates 
 at the entrance thereof, by opening 
 which they irrigated the plains, and 
 these call 
 (sluices): and he constructed dykes 
 
 they Echetognomones 
 against the irruptions of the Erythraean 
 sea, and built the city of Teredon 
 to check the incursions of the Arabs ; 
 and he adorned the palaces with trees, 
 calling them hanging gardens.— 
 Euseb. Prep. Evan. lib. 10.—Euseb. 
 Chron. 49. 
 
 * Bu. Ar. translates ᾿Ακράκανον, puteum, joining it with the succeeding 
 
 paragraph. 
 
 + Eu. Ar. adds—quasi quandam voluntatem et affectum ex semetipsis 
 
 habuissent.—Self-acting sluices. 
 
 
 
SUPPLEMENTAL 
 
 FRAGMENTS AND EXTRACTS 
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE OF THE 
 
 CHALDAIAN HISTORY. 
 

 
CHALD/AZAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 OF THE ARK: 
 
 FROM NICOLAUS DAMASCENUS.* 
 
 ἘΣΤΙΝ ὑπὲρ τὴν Μινυάδα 
 ᾽Ἄρμε- 
 νέαν, Βάρις + λεγόμενον" εἰς ὃ 
 
 μέγα ὕρος κατὰ τὴν 
 
 πολλοὺς συμφυγόντας ἐπὶ τοῦ 
 κατακλυσμοῦ λόγος ἔχει πε- 
 ρισωδῆναι, καί τινα ἐπὶ λάρ- 
 νᾶχος ὀχούμενον ἐπὶ τὴν ἀκρώ- 
 ρειαν ὀκεῖλαι, καὶ τὰ λεί- 
 ψανα τῶν ξύλων ἐπὶ πολὺ 
 TWIT vee γένοιτο δ᾽ ay οὗτος, 
 ὃν τινα καὶ Μωυσῆς ὃ ἀνέ- 
 γραψεν ὃ ᾿Ιουδᾳιων νομοδέ- 
 τῆς. 
 
 TuERE is above Minyas in the land 
 of Armenia a very great mountain 
 which is called Baris; to which, it is 
 said, that many persons retreated at 
 the time of the deluge, and were 
 saved ; and that one in particular was 
 carried thither- in an ark, and was 
 landed on its summit, and that the 
 remains of the vessel were long pre- 
 served upon the mountain. Perhaps 
 this was the same individual of whom 
 Moses the legislator of the Jews has 
 made mention.—Jos. Ant. Jud. I. 3. 
 
 —Euseb. Prep. Evan. 9. 
 
 * Nicolaus Damascenus, a writer of Damascus about the age of Augustus. 
 
 His fragments have been republished by Orellius. 
 
 Leipzig. 
 
 } Baris signifies a ship. Walknaer’s dissertation upon the word Baris may 
 be found in the Preface to Valpy’s edition of Stephans Thesaurus, p. 322. 
 
 Epiphanius styles the mountain Lubar one of the mountains of Ararat; 
 
 Zendavesta calls it Albordi. 
 } οἰκεῖλαι Eu, 
 
 the 
 
 § Μωσῆς Eu. 
 
 H 
 
SUPPLEMENTAL 
 
 OF THE DISPERSION : 
 
 FROM HESTIAUS. 
 
 TON δὲ ἱερέων τοὺς διασω- 
 ϑέντας τὰ τοῦ ᾿Ἐννυαλίου 
 Διὸς ἱερώματα λαβόντας εἰς 
 Σεναὰρ τὴς Βαβυλωνίας ἐλ- 
 Neely. 
 
 λοιπὸν evreddey ὑπὸ τῆς ἀλ- 
 
 Ν 
 Σκίδνανται δὴ τὸ 
 
 λογλωσσίας ἢ τὰς ἀποικίας 
 
 ποιησάμενοι πανταχοῦ" καὶ 
 ~ oe ἂν ἐλ 
 
 γὴν Exact κατελάμβανον 
 ‘\ > 4 ἂν ὅν a 
 
 τὴν ἐντυγχάνουσαν, καὶ εἰς ἣν 
 
 αὐτοὺς ἦγεν ὁ Θεός. 
 
 Tue priests who escaped took with 
 them the implements of the worship 
 of the Enyalian Jove, and came to 
 Senaar in Babylonia. But they were 
 again driven from thence by the in- 
 troduction of a diversity of tongues : 
 upon which they founded colonies in 
 various parts, each settling in such 
 situations as chance or the direction 
 of God led them to occupy.—Jos. 
 Ant. Jud. 1. ¢. 4.—Euseb. Prep. 
 Evan. 9. 
 
 OF THE TOWER OF BABEL: 
 
 FROM ALEXANDER POLYHISTOR. 
 
 ΣΙΒΥ͂ΛΛΑ δέ φησιν, ὁμοφώνων 
 Ε 4 > / \ 
 ὄντων πάντων AYS PWT OY, τινὰς 
 , , ε / 
 τούτων πύργον ὑπερμεγέϑη 
 
 >, δὶ - ¢ > x > 
 οἰκοδομήσαι» ὅπως εἰς TOY οὐ- 
 
 Tue Sibyl says: That when all men 
 formerly spoke the same language ; 
 some among them undertook to erect 
 a large and lofty tower, that they 
 
 * ὁμογλωσσίας τὰς συνοικίας Eu. which is preferred by Bryant, who tran- 
 slates it, ‘ And mankind being as yet all of one language made their settlements 
 in various parts, &c.’”’—Bochart proposes πολυγλωσσίας. I see no necessity for 
 
 rejecting the original. 
 
 
 
CHALDAHAN FRAGMENTS. 51 
 
 ρανὸν ἀναβῶσι. τοῦ δὲ Sed might climb up into heaven. ButGod* 
 ἀνέμους ἐμφυσήσαντος ava- sending forth a whirlwind, confounded 
 τρέψαι αὐτοὺς, καὶ ἰδίαν their design, and gave to each tribe a 
 ἑκάστῳ φωνὴν δοῦναι, διὸ 8% particular language of its own: which 
 Βαβυλῶνα τὴν πόλιν κληϑῆ- is the reason that the name of that 
 yas. μετὰ δὲ τὸν κατακλυσ- city is Babylon. After the deluge 
 μὸν Τιτᾶνᾳ καὶ Προμηδέα lived Titan and Prometheus; when 
 γενέσϑαι. Titan undertook a war against Cro- 
 nus.-—Syne. 44.—Jos. Ant. Jud. I, 
 c. 4,—Eus. Prep. Evan. 9. 
 
 OF THE TOWER AND TITANIAN WAR: 
 
 FROM THE SIBYLLINE ORACLES.{ 
 
 , ~ . 
 AANA’ ὁπόταν μεγάλοιο Sect τελέωνται ἀπειλαὶ, 
 ὰ > , - wv 
 Ag ποτ᾽ ἐπηπέιλησε βροτοῖς of πύργον ἔτευξαν, 
 
 Χώρῃ ἐν᾿Ασσυρίῃ ὁμόφωνοι δ᾽ ἦσαν ἅπαντες, 
 
 Bur when the judgments of the Almighty God 
 Were ripe for execution; when the Tower 
 Rose to the skies upon Assyria’s plain, 
 
 * Τὴ the Armenian “ Deus autem omnipotens,” which agrees with the text 
 of the Sibylline verses in the following page. Josephus and Eusebius have 
 the plural 9 εοὶ, Gods. 
 
 + The last paragraph is not in the Greek copies, but the Armenian is as 
 follows :—‘‘ Post diluvium autem Titan et Prometheus exstiterunt; ubi quidem 
 Titan adversus Cronum (scil. Saturnum) bellum movebat.” 
 
 + The translation is from the fourth volume of Bryant’s Mythology, who has 
 the following remarks upon the fragment.—* It has been borrowed by some Hel- 
 lenistic Jew, or Gnostic, and inserted amid a deal of trash of his own composing. 
 The superior antiquity of that part which I have laid before the reader, is plain 
 from its being mentioned by Josephus. Some lines are likewise quoted by 
 Athenagoras, and Theophilus Antiochenus. But there are passages afterwards 
 which relate to circumstances of late date; such as were in time much inferior to 
 the age of Athenagoras; and still farther removed from the era of Josephus.” 
 
ae SUPPLEMENTAL 
 
 Καὶ βούλοντ᾽ ἀναβὴν εἰς οὐρανὸν ἀστερόεντα, 
 Αὐτίκα ἀδϑάνατος (μεγάλην ἐπέδϑηκεν ἀνάγκην Ὁ 
 Πνεύμασιν. αὐτὰρ ἔπειτ᾽ ἄνεμοι μέγαν ὑψόσι πύργον 
 Ῥίψαν, καὶ ϑνητοῖσιν ἐπ᾿ ἀλλήλοις ἔριν ὥρσαν, 
 Τοὔνεκά τοι Βαβυλῶνα βροτοὶ πόλει οὔνομ᾽ ἔϑεντο. 
 Αὐτὰρ ἐπεὶ πύργος τ᾽ ἔπεσε, γλῶσσαί τ᾿ ἀνδιρώπων 
 Παντοδαπαῖς φωναῖσι διέστρεφον, αὐτὰρ ἅπασα 
 
 Taia βροτῶν πληροῦτο μεριζομένων βασιλήων. 
 
 And all mankind one language only knew: 
 
 A dread commission from on high was given 
 
 To the fell whirlwinds, which with dire alarms 
 Beat on the Tower, and to its lowest base 
 Shook it convulsed. And now all intercourse, 
 By some occult and overruling power, 
 
 Ceased among men: by utterance they strove 
 Perplexed and anxious to disclose their mind ; 
 But their lip failed them; and in lieu of words 
 Produced a painful babbling sound: the place 
 Was thence called Babel; by th’ apostate crew 
 Named from the event. Then severed far away 
 They sped uncertain into realms unknown : 
 Thus kingdoms rose; and the glad world was filled. 
 
 She then mentions Cronus, Titan, and Japetus, as the three sons 
 of the patriarch governing the world in the tenth generation 
 after the deluge, thus, 
 
 Καὶ τότε δὴ δεκάτη γενεὴ μερόπων avSponwy, 
 > Ls ΝΞ ΣΝ / Us > ow. 
 EE οὗπερ κατακλυσμὸς ἐπὶ προτέρους γένετ᾽ ἄνδρας, 
 
 ~ ? 
 Kai βασίλευσε Κρόνος, καὶ Τιτᾶν, Ἰαπετός τε, 
 
 The triple division of the earth is afterwards mentioned, over 
 which each of the patriarchs ruled in peace. 
 
 Τρίσσαι δὴ μέριδες γαίης κατὰ κλῆρον ἑκάστοῦ, 
 
 * Omitted in Gallus; Bryant inserts it. 
 
 
 
CHALDEAN FRAGMENTS. 5S 
 
 \ , ἊΝ ΄ . 
 Καὶ βασίλευσεν ἕκαστος ἐχὼν μέρος, οὐδὲ μάχοντο 
 
 Then the death of Noah, and lastly the war between Cronus and 
 
 Titan. 
 
 Καὶ μαχέσαντο Κρόνος Τιτῶν τε πρὸς αὑτούς. 
 
 - , . 
 
 OF SCYTHISM AND HELLENISM. 
 
 FROM EPIPHANIUS.* 
 
 ΔΕ ? 
 
 TIPQTON μὲν ai τῶν aipe- 
 
 - ’ Ἀ 
 
 σέων πασῶν μητέρες τε καὶ 
 
 πρωτότυποι καὶ ὀνομασία!» 
 z ͵ ” 
 
 ἐξ ὧν μητέρες πέντε αἱ ἄλλαι 
 
 ε} 2 ~ 
 
 ἐφύησαν, καὶ εἶσιν αὗται πρῶ- 
 
 ται τέσσαρες. 
 
 \ oe 
 
 Πρώτη, Βαρβαρισμὸς, ἥ τις 
 καὶ ἑαυτήν ἐ διαρχέι 
 
 ἑαυτήν ἐστιγ διαρχέσα- 
 
 σα ἀφ᾽ ἡμερῶν τοῦ Αδὰμ ἐπὶ 
 
 , ~ ~ 
 
 dena γενεὰς, ἕως τοῦ Νῶε. 
 
 Ν X La οἱ 
 
 Βαρβαρισμὸς δὲ κέκληται; aro 
 
 Ν 
 τοῦ μὴ τοὺς ἀνπρώπους ἀρχη- 
 / wv ΗΝ 
 
 yu Twa ἔχειν; ἢ μίαν συμφω- 
 
 .“ - ~ 
 
 Vid, GAN ὅτι πᾶς τις ἑαυτῷ 
 
 > Z XN / ε ~ 
 
 ἐστοίχειγ καὶ νόμος ἑαυτῷ 
 
 ‘A Ν ᾽ὔ ~ oD/ 
 κατὰ τὴν προτίμησιν τοῦ ἰδίου 
 
 βουλήματος ἐγίνετο. 
 
 Tue parents of all the heresies, and 
 the prototypes from which they de- 
 rive their names, and from which all 
 other heresies originate, are these 
 four primary ones. 
 
 The first is Barbarism,} which pre- 
 vailed without a rival from the days of 
 Adam through ten generations to the 
 time of Noah. It is called Barbarism, 
 because men had no rulers, nor sub- 
 mitted to any particular discipline 
 of life; but as each thought proper 
 to prescribe to himself, so he was 
 at liberty to follow the dictates of 
 his own inclination. 
 
 * The following extract from Epiphanius is given also in the Paschal 
 Chronicle in disjointed fragments. I have endeavoured to give the spirit of it 
 as it may be gathered from a comparison of Epiphanius, Cedrenus and the Paschal 
 
 Chronicle. 
 + Qy. Patriarchism ? 
 
54 SUPPLEMENTAL 
 
 Ν 
 Δευτέρα Σκυδισμὸς aro 
 Ὁ ε Ὁ ~ -Ὁ 
 τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ Νῶε, (με- 
 \ N 
 τὰ τὸν καταχλυσμὸν, καὶ με- 
 / Ls hed Ὁ ’ 
 τέπειτα) ἄχρι τὴς τοῦ πύργου 
 - - ΑΥ 
 οἰκοδομῆς καὶ Βαβυλῶνος. καὶ 
 ~ , 
 μετὰ τὸν TOU πύργου χρόνον 
 Yj , 
 ἐπὶ ὀλίγοις ἔτεσιν, τουτέστι 
 Φαλὲκ καὶ “Payat. OF τινες 
 ἐπὶ τὸ τῆς Εὐρώπης κλίμα νε- 
 ~ Ὁ ,ὔ / 
 γευχότες τῷ τῆς Σκυσίας μέρει; 
 -᾿ ~ JA 
 καὶ τοῖς αὐτῶν ἔϑεσι προσε- 
 \ ~ -Ὁ ΄ 
 κρίϑησαν, ὠπὸ τῆς τοῦ Θήρα 
 ε ͵ . ic 
 ἡλίκιας; καὶ ἐπέκεινα᾽ ἐξ οὗπερ 
 ε -Ὁ ,ὔ 
 οἱ Θρᾶκες γεγόνασι. 
 Τρίτη; Ἑλλενισμὸς ὠπὸ τῶν 
 ᾽ [495 
 / x \ > tA 
 χρόνων τοῦ Σεροὺχ, ἐναρξάμε- 
 νος, διά τοι τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας; 
 καὶ ὡς ἐστοίχουντοϊ τηνικαῦ- 
 oe “2 
 τὰ ἕκαστος κατά τινα δεισι- 
 \ 
 δαιμονίαν, ἐπὶ τὸ μάλλον πο- 
 - "ὕ 
 λιτικώτερον καὶ ἐπὶ Edy, καὶ 
 Μεσμοὺς εἰδώλων rar recat 
 τῶν ἀν᾿πιρώπων γένη. Οἷς τότε 
 ᾿ : 
 στοιχήσαντες ἐποίουν ἡ διὰ 
 χρωμάτων γράφοντες τὴν ἀρ- 
 ἣ Ν 
 χὴν, καὶ ἀπεικάζοντες τοὺς 
 Ζ' .} > n~ ,ὔ 
 πάλαι παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς τετιμημέ- 
 x 4 vc , nN 
 VOUS, ἢ τυράννους ἢ ἡγημόνας; ἢ 
 τινὰς τὶ δράσαντας ἐν τῷ βίῳ, 
 ΄ - Ua 
 μνήμης τι δοκοῦν ἄξιον δι’ ὠλ- 
 
 - \ 7 
 UNS τε; ἢ σωμάτων εὐρωστίας. 
 
 The second is Scythism which 
 prevailed from the days of Noah and 
 thence downwards to the building of 
 the tower and Babylon, and for a few 
 years subsequently to that time, that 
 is to the days of Phalec and Ragau. 
 But the nations which incline upon the 
 
 borders of Europe continued addicted . 
 
 to the Scythic heresy, and the cus- 
 toms of the Scythians to the age of 
 Thera, and afterwards; of this sect 
 also were the Thracians. 
 
 The third is Hellenism, 
 originated in the days of Seruch 
 
 which 
 
 with the introduction of idolatry: and 
 as men had hitherto followed each 
 some demonolatrous superstition of 
 his own, they were now reduced 
 to a more established form of polity, 
 and to the rites and ceremonies of 
 idols. And the followers of this be- 
 gan with the use of painting, making 
 likenesses of those whom they had 
 formerly honoured, either kings or 
 chiefs, or men who in their lives had 
 performed actions which they deemed 
 worthy of record, by strength or ex- 
 cellence of body. 
 
 * Epiphanius divides the word thus, ἐστοιχοῦν τὸ, and in the following 
 passage places the full stop after Secjuods, and a comma after γένη, introducing 
 after εἰδώλων the words μὲν τοί ye ἐναρξάμενα. I have in the whole passage 
 
 followed the Paschal Chronicle. 
 + ἐϑεοποίουν Ep. 
 
 + ἀπεικονίζοντες Ep. 
 
CHALDEAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 Αἰγύπτιοι δὲ ὁμοῦ καὶ Ba- 
 βυλώνιοι, καὶ Φρύγες καὶ Φοί- 
 vines ταυτησὶ τῆς Spnonelas 
 πρῶτοι εἰσηγηταὶ γεγόνασιν 
 ἀγαλματοποιΐας τε χαὶ μυσ- 
 τηρίων, ἀφ’ ὧν τὰ πλεῖστα 
 εἰς Ἑλλήνας μετηνέχϑη πὸ 
 τῆς Κέκροπος ἡλικίας. καὶ κα- 
 δεξῆς. 
 
 ᾽ὔ 
 ὑστέρῳ πολὺ, τοὺς περὶ Κρόνον 
 
 / Ν 
 Μετέπειτα δὲ καὶ 
 / 4 
 καὶ Ῥέαν, Δία τε καὶ ᾿Απόλ- 
 ne >, 
 ova, καὶ καϑεξῆς Θεοὺς ava- 
 
 γορεύσαντες. 
 
 The following extract 
 above. 
 
 EMEITA δὲ ἀπὸ τῶν χρόνων 
 τοῦ Θάῤῥα τοῦ πατρὸς ᾿Αβρα- 
 ἂμ, καὶ δὶ ἀγαλμάτων τῶν 
 πλάνην τῆς εἰδωλολατρίας εἰ- 
 σηγησάμενοι, τοὺς ἑαυτῶν προ- 
 πᾶτορας δὲ ἀπεικονισμῶν τετι- 
 μηχότες, καὶ τοὺς προ αὐτῶν 
 τετελευτηκότας τεχνησάμενοι. 
 ἐκ χεραμεικῇς ἐπισήμης τὸ 
 πρῶτον, ἕπειτω ἑκάστης τέχνης 
 μιμησαμένης; οἱκοδόμιοι μεν λί- 
 Sov ξέσαντες, ἀργυροκόποι δὲ, 
 χαὶ χρυσοχόοι, διὰ τῆς ἰδίας 
 ὕλης τεκτηνάμεναι, οὕτω καὶ 
 
 τέκτονες, καὶ οἱ καδεξῆς. 
 
 Kk 
 
 55 
 
 The Egyptians, and Babylonians, 
 and Phrygians, and Phoenicians were 
 the first propagators of this supersti- 
 tion of making images, and of the 
 mysteries : from whom it was trans- 
 ferred to the Greeks from the time 
 of Cecrops downwards. But it was 
 not till afterwards and at a consi- 
 derable interval that Cronus and 
 Rhea, Zeus and Apollo, and the rest 
 were esteemed and honoured as 
 gods. 
 
 is given in Epiphanius preceding the 
 g Pp Ρ s 
 
 Anp from the times of Tharra the 
 father of Abraham, they introduced 
 images and all the errors of idola- 
 try ; honouring their forefathers, and 
 their departed predecessors with 
 effigies which they fashioned after 
 their likeness. They first made 
 these effigies of earthern ware, but 
 afterwards according to their dif- 
 ferent arts they sculptured them in 
 stone, and cast them in silver and 
 gold, and wrought them in wood, 
 and all kinds of different materials. 
 
σι 
 oO 
 
 SUPPLEMENTAL 
 
 OF HELLENISM: 
 
 FROM CEDRENUS. 
 
 EK τῆς “purrs του “leaped 
 / ~ 
 ἐγεννήσϑη Σεροὺχ, ὕστις πρῶτος 
 ΄ - ~ Ν 
 ἤρξατο τοῦ Ἕλληνισμοῦ, καὶ 
 τοῦ δόγματος τῆς εἰδωλολα- 
 τρείας. Αὐτὸς γὰρ, καὶ οἱ 
 ‘\ | νὰ ον 75 , 
 σὺν αὐτῷ τοὺς πάλαι γενομέ- 
 Ἃ . X ve , 
 γους ἢ πολεμιστὰς, ἢ ἡγεμό- 
 , 4 > 4 
 yas, καΐ τι πράξαντας ἀνδρίας 
 \ -“ ΓΝ ~ ~ 
 ἢ ἀρετῆς ἄξιον ἐν τῷ βίῳ τοῦ 
 » ΝΥ ΤΠ ΕΟῚ 2 
 μνημονεύεσψαι, καὶ ὡς ovTas 
 > ~ 4 > ὃ 4 
 ἄνυτων προπατοραᾶς ay ριᾶσι 
 - Ν Ν 
 στηλῶν ἐτίμησαν; καὶ ὡς Teds 
 προσεκύνουν αὐτοὺς καὶ ἐδυ- 
 σίαζον. Οἱ δὲ μετὰ ταῦτα 
 2 > ~ Ν ~ 
 ἄνδρωποι ἀγνοοῦντες τὴν τῶν 
 προγόνων γνώμην, ὅτι ὡς προ- 
 ΄ \ > w ε 
 πάτορας χαὶ ἀγαδιὼν εὗρε- 
 / 
 τὰς ETIANTAY μνήμαις μόναις; 
 ὡς Μεοὺς ἐπουρανίους ἐτίμον, 
 Ἢν 
 
 δὲ τὸ τῆς ἀποϑσεώσεως σχῆμα 
 
 Ν > / > ~ 
 καὶ entvoialoy ἀντοῖς. 
 
 ϑ ᾿ alle Ὁ 
 τοιοῦτον. Ἔν ταῖς ἱερατικαῖς 
 αὐτῶν βίβλοις ετάστοντο τὰ 
 7.7 "» ~ ay X 
 ὀνόματα αὐτῶν μετὰ τελευτὴν, 
 Ν > > ~ \ \ 
 καὶ κατ᾽ ἐκεῖνον τὸν καιρὸν 
 ε \ > ~ 3 7. . 2 
 ἑορτὴν ἀυτῷ ἐπετέλουν, λέγον-- 
 τες τὰς αὐτῶν ψυχὰς εἰς τὰς 
 ~ ΄ὔ Ψ " Ν 
 τῶν μακάρων νήσους ἰεναι; καὶ 
 ,ὔ ὔ A “ 
 μηκέτι χρίνεσϑιαι ἢ καίεσϑαι 
 
 ΄, 
 πυρί. 
 
 Or the tribe of Japhet was born 
 Seruch, who first introduced Hel- 
 lenism and the worship of idols. For 
 he and those who concurred with 
 him in opinion honoured their pre- 
 decessors whether warriors or leaders, 
 or characters renowned during their 
 lives for valour or virtue with co- 
 lumnar statues, as if they had been 
 their progenitors, and tendered to 
 them a species of religious veneration 
 as a kind of gods and sacrificed. But 
 after this their successors, overstep- 
 ping the intention of their ancestors 
 that they should honour them as their 
 progenitors and the inventors of 
 good things with monuments alone, 
 honoured them as_ heavenly gods 
 and sacrificed to them as such. And 
 the following was the form of their 
 canonization: they inscribed their 
 names after their decease in their 
 sacred books and established a festi- 
 val to each at certain seasons, saying 
 that their souls had departed to the 
 islands of the blessed and were never 
 condemned or burnt with fire. 
 
 
 
CHALD-EAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 ὧν 
 ~] 
 
 OF THE TOWER OF BABEL AND ABRAHAM: 
 
 FROM EUPOLEMUS. 
 
 TIOAIN Βαβυλῶνα πρῶτον 
 \ ~ . ~ 
 μὲν κτισϑῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν δια- 
 / > ~ 
 σωδέντων ἐκ τοῦ καταχλυσ- 
 - > Ν ΓΘ , 
 μοῦ, εἰναι δὲ αὐτοὺς γίγαντας; 
 οἰκοδομεῖν δὲ τὸν ἱστορούμιενον 
 , , Ν f, 
 πύργον. πεσόντος δὲ τούτου 
 e. 4 Lod ~ ~ > / 
 ὑπὸ τῆς τοῦ “εοῦ ἐνεργείας, 
 τοὺς γίγαντας διασπαρῆναι 
 » σ΄. \ ~ 
 “aS ὅλην τὴν γῆν. 
 7 ‘\ - 
 Δεκάτῃ δὲ γενεᾷ, (φησιν) 
 ἐν πόλει τῆς Βαβυλωνίας Κα- 
 μαρίνῃν ἥν τινας λέγειν πόλιν 
 ct Ν 
 Οὐρίην, εἶναι δὲ μεδερμηνευο- 
 , 
 μένην, Χαλδαίων πόλιν, ἐν 
 τρισκαιδεκάτῃ γενέσϑαι ᾿Α- 
 βραὰμ γενεᾷ, εὐγενείᾳ καὶ 
 , 
 σοφίᾳ πάντας ὑπερβεβηνότα, 
 ὰ Ν \ Ν > . ,ὔ \ 
 av δὴ καὶ τὴν ἀστρολογίαν καὶ 
 “Χαλδαϊκὴν εὑρεῖν, ἐπί τε τὴν 
 ΠΥ I ε ΄ "» 
 εὐσέβειαν ὁρμήσαντα εὐαρεσ- 
 Led ~ ~ ~ Ν 
 τῆναι τῷ Μεῷ. Τοῦτον δὲ διὰ 
 τὰ προστάγματα τοῦ Sev 
 εἰς Φοινίκην ἐλϑόντα κατοικῇ- 
 \ A tas Ν 
 Tat, καὶ τροπᾶς Alou χαὶ 
 ἊΣ cla 
 σηλήνης καὶ τὰ ἄλλα πάντα 
 διδάξαντα τοὺς Φοίνικας, εὐα- 
 
 = ~ mth 1- 
 ρεστῆναι τῷ βασιλεῖ αυτῶν. 
 
 Tue city of Babylon owes its founda- 
 tion to those who were saved from 
 the catastrophe of the deluge: they 
 were the Giants, and they built the 
 tower which is noticed in history. 
 But the tower being overthrown by 
 the interposition of God, the Giants 
 were scattered over all the earth. 
 
 He says moreover that in the tenth 
 generation in the city Camarina of 
 Babylonia, which some call the city 
 Urie, and which signifies a city of the 
 Chaldzans, the thirteenth in descent 
 lived Abraham, of a noble race, and 
 superior to all others in wisdom; of 
 whom they relate that he was the in- 
 ventor of astrology and the Chaldean 
 magic, and that on account of his 
 eminent piety he was esteemed by 
 God. It is further said, that under 
 the directions of God he removed and 
 lived in Phoenicia, and there taught 
 the Phcenicians the motions of the 
 sun and moon and all other things ; 
 for which reason he was held in great 
 reverence by their King.—Euseb. 
 Prep. Evan. 9. 
 
SUPPLEMENTAL 
 
 OF ABRAHAM : 
 
 FROM NICOLAUS DAMASCENUS. 
 
 ABPAMHS* éBactdeuce Aa- 
 ~ "Μ Ν 
 μασχοῦ, ἐπηλυς σὺν στρα- 
 ~ / ~ ~ - 
 τῷ ἀφιγμένος ἐκ τῆς γῆς TNS 
 ~ / 
 ὑπὲρ Βαβυλῶνος ἡ Χαλδαίων 
 “- A > > ‘ / 
 λεγομένης. μετ᾽ οὐ πολὺν χρὸ- 
 1 \ Vos 3 BAN , 
 νον ἐξαναστὰς καὶ ἀπὸ ταύ- 
 ~~ 4 Ν ~ 
 τῆς τῆς χώρας σὺν τῷ σφε- 
 ͵ A - 2 Ν , \ 
 τέρῳ λαῷ εἰς τὴν τότε μὲν 
 - ~ Ν 
 Χαναναίαν λεγομένην, νῦν δὲ 
 Ιουδαίαν peta 1 οἱ 
 μετῴχησε, καὶ οἱ 
 > 2) ,ὔ ,’ Ν 
 ἀπ᾽ ἐκείνου πληδύναντες, περὶ 
 > ͵ age: 
 ὧν ἐν ἑτέρῳ λόγῳ διέξειμι τὰ 
 ἱστορούμενα. Tod τε ᾿Αβρά- 
 Μ AN ~ > - 
 μου ετι χαὶ νῦν ἐν τῇ Δαμα- 
 ~ Δ΄ if 
 σκηνῇ τὸ ὄνομω δοξάζεται, 
 Ν ΄ > > ἣν ~ / 
 καὶ κώμη aT αὐτοῦ δείκνυ- 
 tat, ᾿Αβράμου οἴχησις λεγο- 
 Lin, Ἔ 
 μένη. 1 
 
 * “ABoaduns Eu.—'ABpamos Vat. 
 
 Axsram was king of Damascus, and 
 he came thither as a stranger with an 
 army from that part of the country 
 which is situated above Babylon of 
 the Chaldzeans : but after a short time 
 he again emigrated from this region 
 with his people and transferred his 
 habitation to the land, which was then 
 called Cananeea, but now Judea, 
 together with all the multitude which 
 had increased with him; of whose 
 history I shall give an account in 
 another book. ‘The name of Abram 
 is well-known even to this day in 
 Damascus: and a village is pointed 
 out which is still called the House of 
 Abram.—Euseb. Prep. Evan. 9.— 
 Jos. Ant. Jud. 1. 7. 
 
 
 
 + Βαβυλῶνα Eu. 
 
 { It is doubtful whether the concluding sentence is that of Nicolaus Damas, 
 or of Josephus: It is given in Eusebius. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
CHALDEAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 OF BELUS: 
 
 FROM EUPOLEMUS. 
 
 τ , 
 ΒΑΒΥΛΩΝΙΟΥ͂Σ γὰρ λέγειν 
 ~ ~ Ὗ τ 
 πρῶτον γενέσϑαι Βῆλον, ὃν εἰναι 
 
 \ ͵ 
 Κρόνον. Ἔκ τούτου δὲ γενέσθαι 
 ~ ~ A 
 Βῆλον, καὶ Χαναὰν τοῦτον δὲ 
 X x Lod \ 
 
 τὸν Χανχὰν γεννῆσαι τὸν πα- 
 ,ὔ ~ 7 . \ 
 τέρα τῶν Φοινίχων. Tovroy δὲ 
 Ν e\ , a - \ ~ 
 Χοὺμ viov γενέσθαι, ὃν ὑπὸ τῶν 
 
 ΄ et ” “- 
 “Ἑλλήνων λέγεσθαι ᾿Ασβολον 
 
 cA A - 
 
 πατέρα δὲ Αἰθιόπων ἀδελφὸν 
 
 δὲ - Ν , 
 ie τοῦ Μεστραεὶμ, πατέρα 
 
 / σ “- 
 
 Αἰγυπτίων. Ἕλληνας δὲ λέγειν 
 
 ‘ ΕΣ ε /, > 
 τὸν AtAayvta εὑρηκένᾳι ἂσ- 
 
 τρολογίαν. 
 
 For the Babylonians say that the 
 first was Belus, who is the same as 
 Cronus. And from him descended 
 Belus and Chanaan; and this Cha- 
 naan was the father of the Phceni- 
 cians. Another of his sons was Chum, 
 who is called by the Greeks Asbolus, 
 the father of the Ethiopians, and the 
 brother of Mestraim, the father of the 
 Egyptians. The Greeks say, more- 
 over, that Atlas was the discoverer of 
 
 astrology.—Eus. Pr, Ev. lib, IX. 
 
 FROM THALLUS. 
 
 KAI γὰρ Βήλου τῶν ᾿Ασσυ- 
 ρίων βασιλεύσαντος, καὶ Κρό- 
 νου τοῦ Τιτᾶνος Θάλλος μέμ- 
 γηται, φάσκων τὸν Βῆλον πεπο-- 
 λεμηκέναι σὺν τοῖς Τιτάσι 
 πρὸς τὸν Δία, καὶ τοὺς σὺν 
 αὐτῷ θεοὺς λεγομένους, ἔνθα 
 φησιν, καὶ ὃ Τύγος ἐπτηθεὶς 
 ἔφυγεν εἰς Ταρτησσόν. 
 
 Κατὰ γὰρ τὴν Θάλλου ic- 
 τορίαν, ὃ Βῆλος προγενέστερος 
 εὑρίσκεται τοῦ Ἰλιακοῦ πολέ- 
 
 » 
 βου ἐτεσι 7x9’ .* 
 
 Tuatius makes mention of Belus, 
 the king of the Assyrians, and Cro- 
 nus the Titan; and says that Belus, 
 with the Titans, made war against 
 Zeus and his compeers, who are called 
 Gods. 
 
 gus was smitten, and fled to Tar- 
 
 He says, moreover, that Gy- 
 
 tessus. 
 
 According to the history of Thal- 
 lus, Belus preceded the Trojan war 
 322 years.—Theoph. ad Aut. 281, 
 
 282. 
 
 * η χαὶ λ΄ ΑΙ. 
 
SUPPLEMENTAL 
 
 OF THE ASSYRIAN EMPIRE: 
 
 FROM CTESIAS. 
 
 ΠΑΡΑΠΛΗΣΙΩΣ δὲ τούτῳ 
 καὶ of λοιποὶ βασιλεῖς, παῖς 
 παρὰ πάτρος διαδεχόμενος τὴν 
 ἀρχὴν, ἐπὶ γενεὰς τριάχοντω 
 ἐβασίλευσαν, μέχρι Σαρδα- 
 νωπάλου. ᾿Ἐπὶ τούτου γὰρ ἢ 
 τῶν ᾿Ασσυρίων ἡγεμονίᾳ μετέ- 
 mecey εἰς Μήδους, ἔτη δια- 
 μείνασα πλείω τῶν χιλίων καὶ 
 τριακοσίων, ἔτι δ᾽ ἑξηκοντα,Ἐ 
 κασάπερ φησὶ Κτησίας ὃ Κνί- 
 διος ἐν τῇ δευτέρᾳ βίβλῳ. 
 
 In like manner all the other kings 
 succeeded, the son receiving the 
 empire from his father, being alto- 
 gether thirty in their generations to 
 Sardanapalus. In his time the em- 
 pire passed to the Medes from the 
 Assyrians, having remained with them 
 upwards of 1360* years, according to 
 the account of Ctesias the Cnidian, in 
 his second book.—Diod. Sic. lib. II. 
 Ῥ. 77. 
 
 FROM DIODORUS SICULUS. 
 
 ε Ν ~ ε , ~ 
 H μὲν οὖν ἡγεμονία τῶν 
 ᾿Ασσυρίων ἀπὸ Νίνου διαμεί- 
 Yara μὲν τριάκοντα γενεὰς, 
 
 ,, ~ / \ 
 ἔτη δὲ πλείω τῶν χιλίων καὶ 
 
 ‘a can ΄' 
 
 τετρακοσίων, ὑπὸ Μήδων κατε- 
 
 λύδη τὸν προειρημένον τρόπον. 
 
 In the manner above related, the 
 empire of the Assyrians, after having 
 continued from Ninus thirty descents, 
 and more than 1400 years, was finally 
 dissolved by the Medes. —Diod. Sic. 
 lib. II. p. 81. 
 
 FROM HERODOTUS. 
 
 , 
 AZZYTPION ἀρχόντων τῆς 
 Y v4 oy la 
 ἄνω Acing ἐπ᾽ ἔτεα εἴκοσι καὶ 
 / nx rye | ε »" 
 πεντανό A, πρῶτοι an αὑτῶν 
 
 Μῆδοι ἤρζαντο ἀπίστασϑαι. 
 
 ΤῊΣ Medes were the first who began 
 the revolt from the Assyrians after 
 they had maintained the dominion 
 over Upper Asia for a period of 520 
 years.—Lib. I. ο. 95. 
 
 * The Armenian omits the sixty years. 
 
 
 
CHALDEAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 " 
 
 OF NABOPOLASAR : 
 
 FROM ALEXANDER POLYHISTOR.* 
 
 ΤΟΥ͂ΤΟΝ (Ναβοπολάσαρον) 
 ὃ ἸΠολυΐστωρ ᾿Αλέξανδρος Σαρ- 
 δανάπαλον καλεῖ πέμψαντα 
 πρὸς ᾿Αστυάγην. Σατράπην 
 δ, 
 Μηδείας, καὶ τὴν ϑυγατέρα 
 αὐτοῦ ᾿Αμυΐτην λαβόντα νύμ.- 
 a» «εχ 5 ~ 
 φὴν εἰς τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ Na- 
 , z \ 
 βουχοδονόσορ. οὗτος στρατηγὸς 
 3, ~ 
 ὑπὸ Σάρακος τοῦ Χαλδαίων 
 / \ ἣν; ~ 
 βασιλέως otarels, κατὰ τοῦ 
 αὐτοῦ Σάρακος εἰς Nivoy ἐπι- 
 στρατεύει. οὗ τὴν ἔφοδον 
 πτοηδεὶς ὃ Σάρακος ἑαυτὸν 
 σὺν τοῖς βασιλείοις ἐνέπρησεν. 
 καὶ τὴν ἀρχὴν Χαλδαίων ran 
 / 
 
 ρέλαβεν ὃ αὐτὸς Ναβοπολά- 
 caps 6 τοῦ ΝΝαβουχοδονοσόρου 
 
 ΄ 
 πατήρ. 
 
 Nasoronasar, whom Alexander Po- 
 lyhistor calls Sardanapallus, sent to 
 Astyages the Satrap of Media, and 
 demanded his daughter Amuites in 
 marriage for his son Nabuchodono- 
 sor. He was the commander of the 
 army of Saracus King of the Chal- 
 deeans, and, having been sent upon 
 some expedition, turned his arms 
 against Saracus and marched against 
 
 But 
 
 Saracus confounded by his advance 
 
 the city of Ninus (Nineveh). 
 
 set fire to his palace and burnt him- 
 self in it. And Nabopolasar obtained 
 the empire of the Chaldeans: he 
 was the father of Nabuchodonosor.— 
 Euseb. Chron. 46. 
 
 OF THE CHALDEAN AND ASSYRIAN KINGS: 
 
 FROM ALEXANDER POLYHISTOR. 
 
 Verum hee quoque Polyhistor In addition to the above Poly- 
 
 iis adjiciens, — scribit : 
 
 nempe post diluvium Chaldzo- 
 rum regionem Evexius tenebat 
 
 quod 
 
 After 
 the deluge Evexius held pos- 
 
 histor continues thus: 
 
 session of the country of the 
 
 * This and the following fragments of Alexander Polyhistor are most pro- 
 bably extracts from the history of Berossus. 
 
60 
 
 neris quatuor. Ac post eum 
 
 filius ejus Comosbelus impe- 
 
 rium suscepit per neros qua- 
 ᾿. 
 
 tuor, et sossos quinque. A 
 Xisuthro vero, et a diluvii tem- 
 pore usque ad illud, quo Medi 
 Babylonem ceperunt, reges om- 
 nino Lxxxvi._ Polyhistor re- 
 censet, atque unumquemque ex 
 Berossi volumine nominatim 
 memorat: tempus vero om- 
 nium eorum numero annorum 
 trium myriadum et tribus mil- 
 libus uno et nonaginta com- 
 prehendit. Deinde vero post 
 eos, cum ita firmiter stabiliti 
 erant, repente Medi copias ad- 
 versus Babylonem compara- 
 bant, ut caperent eam, atque 
 ex se ipsis Tyrannos ibi con- 
 
 stituerent. 
 
 Deinde nomina quoque Me- 
 dorum tyrannorum ponit, vit. 
 numero: quorum anni ccxxiv 
 et rursum reges undecim, an- 
 nosque...Postea Chaldzeorum 
 reges XLIX, et annos ccccLVII. 
 Deinde Arabum 1x reges, et 
 annos ccxLv. Post quos annos 
 etiam ipsam Semiramidem in 
 Assyrios dominatam esse tra- 
 dit. Atque iterum minute 
 enumerat nomina regum XLyv, 
 adsignans illis annos ὌΧΧΥΙ. 
 
 SUPPLEMENTAL 
 
 Chaldzans during a period of 
 four neri. And he was suc- 
 ceeded by his son Comosbelus, 
 who held the empire four neri 
 But from the 
 time of Xisuthrus and the de- 
 
 luge, to that at which the 
 
 and five sossi. 
 
 Medes took possession of Ba- 
 bylon, there were altogether 
 eighty-six kings. Polyhistor 
 enumerates and mentions each 
 of them by name from the vo- 
 lume of Berossus : the duration 
 of the reigns of all which kings 
 comprehends a period of thirty- 
 three thousand and ninety-one 
 years. But when their power 
 was thus firmly established, 
 the Medes suddenly levied 
 forces against Babylon to sur- 
 prise it, and to place upon the 
 throne kings chosen from 
 among themselves. 
 
 He then gives the names of 
 the Median Kings, 8 in num- 
 ber, who reigned during the 
 period of 224 years : and again 
 11 Kings during . . . . years. 
 Then 49 Kings of the Chal- 
 dzeans 458 years. Then 9 Kings 
 of the Arabians 
 After all 
 
 periods of years he states that 
 
 245 years. 
 these successive 
 Semiramis reigned over the 
 Assyrians. And again minutely 
 enumerates the names of 45 
 
CHALDEAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 Post quos, inquit, rex Chal- 
 dzorum fuit, cui nomen Phu- 
 lus; de quo item Hebreorum 
 quoque historia meminit, Phu- 
 lum denominans, quem in ter- 
 ram Judzorum venisse aiunt. 
 
 61 
 
 Kings, assigning to them a term 
 After whom, he 
 says there was a King of the 
 
 of 526 years. 
 
 Chaldeans, whose name was 
 Phulus: Of whom also the 
 historical writings of the He- 
 brews make mention under the 
 name of Phulus (Pul) who they 
 say invaded the country of the 
 Jews.—Eu. Ar. Chron. 39. 
 
 OF SENECHERIB: 
 
 FROM ALEXANDER POLYHISTOR, 
 
 Postauam regnasset  frater 
 Senacharibi, et deinde post- 
 quam Acises in Babylonios 
 dominatus esset, et nec dum 
 triginta quidem diebus reg- 
 num'tenuisset, a Marodach Ba- 
 ladano occisus est; et Maro- 
 dach Baladanus per vim (reg- 
 num) tenuit sex mensibus: 
 eum vero interficiens regna- 
 bat quidam cui nomen Elibus. 
 Verum tertio regni ejus anno 
 Sennecheribus rex Assyrio- 
 rum exercitum conflabat ad- 
 versus Babylonios, proelioque 
 cum iis commisso vicit, et 
 captum una cum amicis, in 
 terram Assyriorum perduci 
 jussit. In Babylonios ergo 
 
 Arter the reign of the brother 
 of Senecherib, Acises reigned 
 over the Babylonians, and when 
 he had governed for the space of 
 thirty days,he was slain by Maro- 
 dach Baladanus, who held the 
 empire by force during six 
 months: and he was slain and 
 succeeded by a person named 
 Elibus. But in the third year 
 of his reign Senecherib king of 
 the Assyrians levied an army 
 against the Babylonians ; and in 
 a battle, in which they were en- 
 gaged, routed, and took him pri- 
 soner with his adherents, and 
 commanded them to be carried 
 into the land of the Assyrians. 
 Having taken upon himself the 
 
62 
 
 dominatus, regem eis filium 
 suum Asordanium constituit; 
 ipse vero recedens terram As- 
 syriorum petiit. 
 
 Quum autem ille fama acce- 
 pisset Graecos in Ciliciam belli 
 movendi causa pervenisse, ad 
 eos contendit; aciem contra 
 aciem instruit, ac plurimis qui- 
 dem de suo exercitu ccesis 
 hostes (tamen) debellat atque 
 in victorize monumentum ima- 
 ginem suam eo in loco erectam 
 reliquit, Chaldaicisque litteris 
 fortitudinem suam ad futuri 
 incidi 
 
 temporis memoriam 
 
 jussit. Et Tarsum urbem, 
 inquit, ipse ad similitudinem 
 Babylonis condidit, quam ap- 
 Et 
 
 omnia facta Sinnecherimi il- 
 
 pellavit Tharsin. post 
 lud quoque addens, ait eum 
 XVIII annis vixisse (in im- 
 perio); et per insidias quas 
 ili paravit’ filius Ardumusa- 
 nus, 6 vita excessisse. 
 
 SUPPLEMENTAL 
 
 government of the Babylonians, 
 he appointed his son Asordanius 
 their king, and he himself retired 
 again into Assyria. 
 
 When he received ἃ report 
 that the Greeks had made a hos- 
 tile descent upon Cilicia, he 
 marched against them and fought 
 with them a pitched battle, in 
 which, though he suffered great 
 loss in his own army, he over- 
 threw them, and upon the spot 
 he erected the statue of himself 
 as a monument of his victory ; 
 and ordered his prowess to be 
 inscribed upon it in the Chaldzean 
 characters, to hand down the re- 
 membrance of it to posterity. He 
 built also the city of Tarsus after 
 the likeness of Babylon, which 
 And after 
 enumerating the various exploits 
 of Sinnecherim, he adds that he 
 reigned 18 years, and was cut off 
 
 he called Tharsis. 
 
 by a conspiracy which had been 
 formed against his life by his son 
 Ardumusanus.—LZu, Ar. Chron. 
 4. 
 
 
 
CHALDEAN FRAGMENTS. 62. 
 
 OF SENECHERIB AND HIS SUCESSORS: 
 
 FROM ALEXANDER POLYHISTOR. 
 
 Ac post eum Senecheribum 
 Polyhistor fuisse regem ait. 
 p- 41. 
 
 (Tamen Sinecherib ipsum, 
 et filium ejus Asordanum, ac 
 Marodach Baladanum, Chal- 
 dzeus quoque historicus com- 
 memorat, cum illis etiam Na- 
 buchodonosorum.) p. 42. 
 
 Regnavit Sinecherim, ut 
 Polyhistor exponit, annis XVI. 
 et post eum ejusdem filius annis 
 vi. Postea vero Sammuges 
 annis ΧΧΙ. et frater ejus annis 
 xxt, Ac deinde Nabupalsar 
 annis Xx. et post eum Nabu- 
 (A 
 
 Sinecherimo usque ad Nabu- 
 
 codrossorus annis XLII. 
 
 codrossorum comprehendun- 
 tur anni omnino Lxxxvul.) 
 Ρ. 44. 
 
 Post Samugen vero Sar- 
 danapallus Chaldzus regnavit 
 annis xx1. Hic exercitum As- 
 tyagi Medo, familiz Principi 
 ac Satrapz, auxilio misit, ut 
 Amuhean Astyagis filiam Na- 
 bucodrossoro filio suo uxorem 
 daret. Ac deinde regnavit Νὰ- 
 bucodrossorus annis XLII, et 
 
 Anp after him (Pul) according 
 to Polyhistor, Senecherib was 
 king. 
 
 (The Chaldzan historian also 
 makes mention of Senecherib 
 himself, and Asordanus his son, 
 and Marodach Baladanus, as well 
 as Nabuchodonosorus.) 
 
 And Sinecherim reigned eigh- 
 teen years; and after him his son 
 eight years. Then reigned Sam- 
 and 
 likewise his brother twenty-one 
 Then reigned Nabu- 
 palsar twenty years. and after 
 
 muges twenty-one years, 
 years. 
 
 him Nabucodrossorus forty-three 
 years. (Therefore, from Sineche- 
 rim to Nabucodrossorus is com- 
 prehended a period altogether of 
 eighty-eight years.) 
 
 After Samuges, Sardanapallus 
 the Chaldzean, reigned twenty- 
 one years. He sent an army to 
 the assistance of Astyages the 
 Mede, Prince and Satrap of the 
 family, that he might give the 
 Amuhean daughter of Astyages 
 to his son Nabucodrossorus. 
 
 Then reigned Nabucodrossorus 
 
63° SUPPLEMENTAL 
 
 contractis coplis veniens cap- 
 tivos duxit Judeos et Phoe- 
 nices ac Syros. 
 
 Et post Nabucodrossorum 
 regnavit filius ejus Amilmaru- 
 dochus, annis x1....Postque 
 illum in Chaldeos regnavit 
 Neglisarus annis Iv. et postea 
 Nabodenus annis xvi. Sub 
 quo Cyrus Cambysis (filius) 
 exercitum duxit in terram Ba- 
 byloniorum. Cui obviam ivit 
 Nabodenus, atque victus {προ 
 se dedit: et regnavit Babylone 
 Cyrus annis 1x. Deinde in 
 campo Daas altero certamine 
 inito mortuus est. Post quem 
 Cambyses regnat annis viii. 
 ac deinde Darius annis xxxv1. 
 post quem Xerxes caeteri quo- 
 
 que Persarum reges. p. 44. 
 
 forty-three years; and he came 
 with a mighty army, and led the 
 Jews, and Phoenicians, and Sy- 
 rians into captivity. 
 
 And after Nabucodrorossus 
 reigned his son Amilmarudo- 
 chus, twelve years.... And after 
 him Neglisarus reigned over the 
 Chaldeans four years ; and then 
 Nabodenus seventeen years. In 
 his reign Cyrus, the son of Cam- 
 byses, invaded the country of the 
 
 Babylonians. Nabodenus went 
 
 out to give him battle, but was’ 
 
 defeated, and betook himself to 
 flight: and Cyrus reigned at Ba- 
 bylon nine years. He was killed, 
 however, in another battle, which 
 took place in the plain of Daas. 
 After him reigned Cambyses 
 eight years; then Darius thirty- 
 six years; after him Xerxes and 
 the other kings of the Persian 
 line.—Eu. Ar. Chron. pp. 41, 
 42, 4h, 45. 
 
 
 
 a 
 
CHALDEAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 OF SENECHERIB AND HIS SUCCESSORS : 
 
 FROM ABYDENUS. 
 
 Eopem tempore vicessimus 
 
 quintus utique Sinecherib 
 ipse ex regibus vix demum 
 inventus est, qui Babylonem 
 sub ditionem redigens sube- 
 git, et ad litus maris Cilicia 
 Greecorum classem profliga- 
 tam depressit; condiditque 
 templum Athenarum, statuas 
 zreas erexit, litterisque sane, 
 inquit, suam fortitudem exa- 
 ravit; et Tarsum ad figuram 
 et similitudinem Babylonis 
 zedificavit ; ut Tarsum Cyd- 
 nus flumen interflueret, Eu- 
 phratis nimirum more Baby- 
 lonem interfluentis. 
 
 Ex ordine autem post eum 
 Nergillus regnavit, qui a filio 
 Adramelo est interemptus : 
 et ipsum quoque frater ejus 
 
 Axerdis 
 
 non autem ex eadem matre, 
 
 ex eodem patre, 
 occidit ; et exercitum perse- 
 quutus in Byzantinorum ur- 
 bem includit. Qui primus 
 mercenarios milites 5101 col- 
 legit; quorum unus Pytha- 
 goras fuit, Chaldeorum sa- 
 Axerdis 
 
 autem gyptum partesque 
 
 pientiz discipulus. 
 
 At the same time the twenty- 
 fifth who was Senecherib can 
 hardly be recognized among the 
 kings. It was he who subjected 
 the city of Babylon to his power, 
 and defeated and sunk a Grecian 
 fleet upon the coast of Cilicia. 
 He built also a temple at Athens 
 and erected brazen statues, upon 
 which he engraved his own ex- 
 And he built the city of 
 Tarsus after the plan and like- 
 
 ploits. 
 
 ness of Babylon, that the river 
 Cydnus should fiow through Tar- 
 sus, in the same manner as the 
 Euphrates intersected Babylon. 
 
 Next in order after him 
 reigned Nergillus who was as- 
 sassinated by his son Adrame- 
 lus: and he also was slain by 
 Axerdis (his brother by the 
 same father, but of a different 
 mother,) and his army pursued 
 and blockaded in the city of 
 Axerdis the 
 first that levied mercenary sol- 
 diers, one of whom was Pytha- 
 goras a follower of the wisdom” 
 
 of the Chaldzeans: he also re- 
 
 Byzantium. was 
 
 duced under his dominion Egypt 
 
64 CHALDEAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 Syriz inferioris in suam po- 
 testatem redegit; ex qua 
 Sardanapallus quoque extitit. 
 
 Post quem Saracus in As- 
 syrios regnavit: et quum 
 compertum habuisset, multi- 
 tudinem barbarorum maxi- 
 mam e mari exisse, ut im- 
 petum faceret, Busalossorum 
 ducem confestim Babylonem 
 misit. Ile autem consilio re- 
 bellionis inito, Amuhean As- 
 tyagis Medi familie Princi- 
 pis filiam Nabuchodrossoro 
 suo filio uxorem despondit. 
 Ac deinde protinus discedens 
 accelerat aggredi Ninum, id 
 est, urbem Ninive. Cum 
 autem de his omnibus cer- 
 tior est factus Saracus Rex, 
 concremavit regiam aulam 
 Evoriti.t Nabuchodrossorus 
 verd accipiens regni imperi- 
 um, valido muro Babylonem 
 
 cinxit. 
 
 and the country of Czelo-Syria, 
 from whence came Sardanapal- 
 lus.* 
 
 After him Saracus_ reigned 
 over the Assyrians, and when he 
 was informed that a very great 
 multitude of barbarians had 
 come up from the sea to attack 
 him, he sent Busalossorus as his 
 general in haste to Babylon. 
 But he, having with a treason- 
 able design obtained Amuhean, 
 the daughter of Astyages the 
 prince of the Medes, to be 
 affianced to his son Nabucho- 
 drossorus, marched straightways 
 to surprise the city of Ninus, 
 But when 
 Saracus the king was apprized 
 of all these proceedings he burnt 
 the royal palace. And Nabucho- 
 drossorus succeeded to the em- 
 
 that is Nineveh. 
 
 pire and surrounded Babylon 
 with a strong wall.—Hu. Ar. 
 Chron. 58. 
 
 * The name Sardanapallus is indiscriminately applied to various persons. 
 
 Here perhaps Saracus may be intended; but from the fragment p. 59, most 
 probably Busalossorus, i.e. Nabopolassar. The passage then in the text may 
 refer to the dominion (potestatem) of Axerdis, “ from which Sardanapallus 
 revolted.” 
 
 + The Armenian Editor in a note complains of the obscurity of this passage 
 in the original, and thinks it may be translated “ Condonavit regiam aulam 
 Evoriti,”’ entrusted the palace to some officer named Evorites. In some authors 
 the daughter of Astyages is named Aroites: and it might possibly refer to her; 
 if the word were read in conjunction with the subsequent sentence. See Frag. 
 p- 59. 
 
 a 
 
CHALDZAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 OF BELUS AND THE ASSYRIAN EMPIRE: 
 
 FROM CASTOR. 
 
 Betus, inquit, rex erat As- 
 syriorum: et sub eo Cyclopes 
 Jovi decertanti adversus Ti- 
 tanos, per fulgura fulminaque 
 ignea opem in prelio tulerunt. 
 Eo autem tempore Titanorum 
 reges agnoscebantur; quorum 
 unus erat Ogygus rex. Paucis 
 vero interjectis, prosequitur, 
 dicens : Gigantes in Deos irru- 
 entes, perempti sunt, auxilium 
 Diis ferentibus Hercule et 
 Dionyso, qui ex Titanis erant. 
 
 Belus de quo antea diximus, 
 vitam finivit, quin et Deus ha- 
 bitus est. Post quem Ninus 
 imperavit Assyriis annis Lu. 
 Hic uxorem duxit Semirami- 
 dem. Post eumque Semiramis 
 ipsa in Assyrios regnavit annis 
 xtu. Deinde vero Zames, qui 
 etiam Ninyas. (Et continuo 
 singulos Assyriorum reges, qui 
 post eos fuerunt, in ordinem 
 redigens, ad Sardanapallum 
 usque recenset, cunctos nomi- 
 natim commemorando: quo- 
 rum etiam nos utique nomina, 
 
 Beuus (says Castor) was king of 
 the Assyrians; and under him 
 the Cyclops assisted Jupiter with 
 thunder-bolts and lightnings in 
 his contest with the Titans. At 
 that time there were kings of the 
 Titans, one of whom was Ogygus. 
 (After a short digression he pro- 
 ceeds to say, that) the Giants, in 
 their attempted inroad upon the 
 Gods, were slain by the assistance 
 of Hercules and Dionysus, who 
 were themselves of the Titan 
 race. 
 
 Belus, whom we have men- 
 tioned above, after his death was 
 esteemed a God. After him, Ni- 
 nus reigned over the Assyrians 
 fifty-two years. He married Se- 
 miramis, who, after his decease, 
 reigned over the Assyrians forty- 
 two years. Then reigned Zames, 
 (Then he enu- 
 
 merates each of the successive 
 
 who is Ninyas. 
 
 Assyrian kings in order, and 
 mentions them all, down to Sar- 
 danapallus, by their respective 
 names: whose names, and the 
 
 length of their reigns, we shall 
 
65° SUPPLEMENTAL 
 
 regnique tempora paulo post 
 adponemus. Siquidem et ille 
 in Canone suo his verbis de 
 ipsis scribit). 
 
 Primo Assyriorum reges di- 
 gessimus, initium a Bels fa- 
 clientes: quum vero ipsius reg- 
 ni annos vix certo traditos ha- 
 beamus, nomen solummodo 
 commemoravimus : sed tamen 
 chronologiz principium a Nino 
 duximus et in alterum Ninum, 
 qui regnum a Sardanapallo 
 accepit, desinimus: utpote hoc 
 pacto perspicuum esset tam 
 universi temporis, quam sin- 
 gulorum regum (temporis) spa- 
 tium; hoc itaque modo reperi- 
 tur tempus annorum Μ, du- 
 centorum et octoginta. 
 
 also give presently. Castor men- 
 tions them in his canon in the 
 following words.*) 
 
 We have first digested into a 
 canon the kings of the Assyrians, 
 commencing with Belus: but 
 since we have no certain tra- 
 dition respecting the length of 
 his reign, we have merely set 
 down his name, and commenced 
 the chronological series from Ni- 
 nus; and have concluded it with 
 another Ninus, who obtained the 
 empire after Sardanapallus; that 
 in this manner the whole length of 
 the time, as well as of the reigns 
 of each king, might be plainly set 
 forth. Thus it will be found, 
 that the complete sum of the 
 years amounts to 1280.—£us. 
 Ar. p. 81: 
 
 * The passage above is thus cited by Syncellus, p. 206. 
 
 «+e ὡς mov καὶ Κάστωρ ἐν τῷ κανόνι ἀυτοῦ φησιν ὧδε. 
 
 Πρώτους μὲν οὖν τοὺς "A σσυρίους βασιλεῖς κατετάχαμεν, τὴν μὲν ἀρχὴν ἀπὸ Βήλου 
 
 πεποιημένους. τῷ δὲ, τὰ τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ ἔτη, μὴ παραδεδόσθαι σαφῶς τοῦ μὲν 
 
 ὀνόματος μνημονεύομεν, τὴν δὲ ἀρχὴν τὴς χρονογραφίας ἀπὸ Νίνου πεποιήμεϑα, καὶ 
 
 καταλήγομεν ἐπὶ Νῖνον τὸν διαδεξάμενον τὴν βασιλείαν παρὰ Σαρδαναπάλου. «+e 
 
 The conclusion also is thus given by Syncellus, p. 168. 
 
 Τῷ Κάστορι μᾶλλον ἀκολουϑήσας (Εὐσήβιος) οὗ καὶ μαρτυρίαν παρήγαγε ᾳσπ΄ "τὴ 
 
 φάσκουσαν τοὺς ᾿Ασσυρίων βασιλεῖς ἄρξαι... 
 
CHALDZAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 66 
 
 OF THE ASSYRIAN EMPIRE: 
 FROM VELLEIUS PATERCULUS AND AEMILIUS SURA. 
 
 InsEQUENTI tempore imperium 
 Asiaticum ab Assyriis, qui id 
 obtinuerant annis MLXxx, trans- 
 latum est ad Medos ab hinc 
 annis ferme pcccLxx. Quippe 
 Sardanapalum eorum regem 
 mollitiis fluentem, et nimium 
 felicem malo suo, tertio et tri- 
 cessimo loco ab Nino et Se- 
 miramide, qui Babylona con- 
 diderant, natum, ita ut semper 
 successor regni paterni foret 
 filius, Arbaces Medus imperio 
 vitaque privavit.....Amilius 
 Sura de annis populi Romani: 
 ‘“* Assyrii principes omnium 
 gentium rerum potiti sunt, 
 deinde Medi, postea Perse, 
 Exinde 
 duobus regibus, Philippo et 
 
 deinde Macedones. 
 
 Antiocho, qui a Macedonibus 
 oriundi erant, haud multo post 
 Carthaginem subactam devic- 
 tis summa imperii ad populum 
 Romanum pervenit. Inter hoc 
 tempus, et initium Nini regis 
 Assyriorum, qui princeps re- 
 rum potitus, intersunt anni 
 MDCCCCXxCcv.” 
 
 Tue Asiatic empire was subse- 
 quently transferred from the As- 
 syrians, who had held it 1070 
 years, to the Medes, from this 
 time, for a period of 870 years. 
 For Sardanapalus, the king of 
 the Assyrians, a man wallowing 
 in luxury, being the thirty-third 
 from Ninus and Semiramis, the 
 founders of Babylon, from whom 
 the kingdom had passed in a 
 regular descent from father to 
 son, was deprived of his empire, 
 and put to death by Arbaces the 
 Mede..... Aimilius Sura also, in 
 his annals of the Roman people, 
 says, “ That the Assyrian princes 
 extended their empire over all 
 nations. They were succeeded 
 by the Medes, then by the Per- 
 sians, then by the Macedonians 
 and shortly afterwards by two 
 kings Philip and Antiochus, of 
 Macedonian origin, who, not long 
 after the destruction of Carthage, 
 were conquered by the Romans, 
 who then obtained the empire of 
 the world. To this time, from the 
 beginning of the reign of Ninus, 
 king of the Assyrians, who first 
 obtained the empire, there has 
 
 elapsed a period of 1995 years.” 
 —Hist. I. c. 6. 
 
66° 
 
 CHALDHAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 OF THE CHALDEAN OBSERVATIONS: 
 FROM PLINIUS. 
 
 AnTiciipEs in eypto inve- 
 nisse quendam nomine Menona 
 tradit xv annis ante Phoro- 
 neum antiquissimum Greeciz 
 regem: idque monumentis ap- 
 probare conatur. E diverso 
 Epigenes apud  Babylonios 
 pccxxX annorum observationes 
 siderum coctilibus laterculis 
 inscriptas docet, gravis auctor 
 in primis: qui minimum Be- 
 rosus et Critodemus ccccLxxx* 
 annorum. Ex quo apparet} 
 
 eeternus literarum usus. 
 
 AnticuinEs relates that they (let- 
 ters) were invented in Egypt by 
 a person whose name was Menon, 
 fifteen years before Phoroneus 
 the most ancient king of Greece: 
 and he endeavours to prove it by 
 the monuments. On the con- 
 trary, Epigenes, a writer of first- 
 rate authority, informs us, that 
 among the Babylonians were pre- 
 served observations of the stars, 
 inscribed upon baked tiles, ex- 
 tending to a period of 720 years. 
 Berosus and Critodemus, who are 
 the most moderate in their cal- 
 culations, nevertheless extend 
 the period of the observations to 
 480* years. Whence may be in- 
 ferred the eternal use of letters 
 
 among them.—Lib. VIL. c. 56. 
 
 FROM CICERO. 
 
 Contemnamus etiam Baby- 
 lonios, et eos, qui e Caucaso 
 ceeli signa servantes, numeris 
 et motibus stellarum cursus 
 persequuntur : condemnemus, 
 inquam, hos aut stultitize, aut 
 vanitatis, aut impudentia, qui 
 ccccLxx millia annorum, ut 
 ipsi dicunt, monumentis com- 
 prehensa continent. 
 
 * Nonaginta M. and Ch. 
 
 We must also contemn the Ba- 
 bylonians, and those who, in the 
 reigion of Caucasus, pretend to 
 have observed the heavens and 
 courses of the stars: we must 
 condemn them, I say, of folly, or 
 of vanity, or of impudence, who 
 assert that they have preserved 
 upon monuments observations ex- 
 tending back during an interval 
 of 470,060 years.—De Divin. 
 
 + Appareret, eternum literarum usum, Ch. 
 
THE 
 DYNASTIES OF THE KINGS 
 
 CHALDAA, ASSYRIA, MEDIA, PERSIA, 
 THEBES, AND EGYPT. 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 We Z| 
 ᾿ ᾿ a es ἰδ 
 ͵ 
 - F d ¥ 
 co Yad a τ ἅν ee 
 ν Ἢ ΠΝ ee ‘i 
 
 i 1a 
 
 oh! ees 8. ale 
 
 a7 
 
 ΝΟ γῆς Ay γς 
 
 νὰ 
 
 
 
DYNASTY OF CHALDEAN KINGS. 
 
 OI Χαλξαῖοι πρῶτοι ἀνηγόρευ- Tux Chaldeeans were the first that 
 
 σαν ἑαυτοὺς βασιλεῖς, ὧν πρῶ- assumed the title of Kings. 
 
 τος Ἐὐήχιος, ἢ 6 παρ᾽ ἡμῖν Ne- Of these the first was Evechius 
 pad, + ἐβασίλευσε Βαβυλῶνος who is known to us by the name of 
 ἔτη 50". Nebréd (Nimrod) he reigned at Ba- 
 bylon 6 years and one-third. 
 Χαλδαίων β΄. ἐβασίλευσε 2. Chomasbelus_ .. 74 years. 
 Χωμάσβηλοςδ᾽ ἔτηζ΄ .. From the foundation 13 years. 
 Χαλδαίων γ΄. ἐβασίλευσε 8, Porus Ὁ το ϑὺ ΝΘΆΓΕ: 
 Πῶρος ἔτη λε΄. 48 years. 
 Χαλδαίων δ΄, ἐβασίλευσε 4. Nechubes.. .. 43 years. 
 Νεχούβης || ἔτη μγ΄. 91 years. 
 Χαλδαίων ε΄. ἐβασίλευσε 5. Nabius .. .. 48 years. 
 Νάβιος Ἵ ἔτη μη. 139 years. 
 Χαλδαίων ς΄. ἐβασίλευσεν 6. Oniballus.. .. 40 years. 
 ᾿Ονίβαλλος ἔτη ya! _ .179 years. 
 Χαλδαίων ζ΄. ἐβασίλευσε 7. Zinzerus .- .. 46 years. 
 Livenpos** ἔτη us’. tt 225 years. 
 
 Syncell. 169. 
 It is to be observed that some of these names occur again as 
 
 the immediate successors of Nabonasar. 
 
 * εὐήχοιος, A. Β.--Εὐήχοος, Go. Sc. Eu. t+ Νεμβρὼδ. Go. 
 
 t yo’. (5) A. B.—Sc. and Go. omit it. 
 
 ὃ Χοσμάσβολος Vulg.—XocpacBnros Β.---Χομάσβολος Sc. Eu. 
 || Νεχώβης Sc. Bu. @ Αβιος Go. 
 ** Ζίνζιρος Go. Sc. Eu. tt με΄. Go. 
 
 Sc. Eu. 
 Sc. Eu. 
 
DYNASTY OF THE ARABIAN KINGS 
 OF CHALD/AZA. 
 
 APABON βασιλέων τῶν με- 
 τὰ τοὺς ς΄ Χαλδαίων βασι- 
 λεῖς. 
 ὯΩν α΄. Μαρδοκέντης ἐβα- 
 / a” U 
 σίλευσεν ETH JAE - 
 ᾿Αράβων β'. 
 Μαρδακὸς ἔτη μ΄. 
 
 ἐβασίλευσε 
 
 ᾿Δράβων γ΄. ἐβασίλευσε Σι- 
 
 σιμόρδακος ἢ ἔτη κη΄. 
 
 ᾿Αράβων δ΄. ἐβασίλευσε 
 Νάβιος 7 ἔτη λζ΄. 
 
 ᾿Αρώάβων ε΄. ἐβασίλευσε 
 Πάραννος ἔτη μ΄. 
 
 ᾿Αράβων ς΄. ἐβασίλευσε 
 
 Ναβόνναβος 1 ἔτη κε΄. 
 
 * Σισιμάρδακος Se. Eu.—Siaipéodanos Go. 
 
 Ἴ Ναβούνναβος Dind. 
 
 Arrer the six first Chaldean kings 
 
 reigned, reigned the following Ara- 
 bian kings of Chaldza. 
 
 1. 
 
 Mardocentes 
 From the foundation 45 years. 
 
 .. 45 years. 
 
 2. Mardacus .. .. 40 years. 
 85 years. 
 
 3. Sisimordacus .. 28 years. 
 113 years. 
 
 4, Nabius .. .. 87 years. 
 150 years. 
 
 5. Paramus -» 40 years. 
 
 . Nabonnabus 
 
 190 years. 
 -- 20 years. 
 215 years. 
 
 ἡ Γάβιος Sc. Eu. 
 
OF THE ASSYRIAN KINGS: 
 
 FROM ABYDENUS.* 
 
 “Furr, inquit, Ninus, 
 Arbeli (filius); qui Cha- 
 ali; qui Arbeli; qui Ane- 
 bi; qui Babii; qui Beli 
 regis Assyriorum.” 
 
 Ninus (says Abydenus) was the son 
 of Arbelus; who was the son of 
 Chaalus, the son of Anebus, the son 
 of Babius, the son of Belus king of 
 the Assyrians. 
 
 * The passage above cited from Abydenus in the Armenian edition of 
 Eusebius’s Chronicle places Ninus the sixth in descent from Belus, introducing 
 the same names in an inverted order, that occur in the following Assyrian 
 dynasties of Syncellus and Africanus (see p. 70) between Teutzus the twenty- 
 eighth and Dercyllus the thirty-fourth. The Editor in a note produces some 
 passages from Moses Choronensis and others to shew that such was the general 
 
 opinion among the Armenians. 
 
DYNASTY OF ASSYRIAN KINGS: 
 
 FROM AFRICANUS. 
 
 SYNCELLUS. 
 ASSYPION α΄. ἐβασίλευσε Or t 
 
 he Assyrian kings the Ist was 
 
 Βῆλος ἔτη νε΄, Belus who reigned 55 years. 
 
 β΄. Νίνος ἔτη νβ΄. 2p 
 
 γ΄. Σεμίραμις ἔτη μβ'. 8. 
 
 ὃ, Νινύας," ὃ καὶ Ζάμις, 4. 
 υἱὸς Νίνου καὶ Σεμιρά- 
 
 pews, ἔτη λη- 
 
 εἰ. ἤΑρειος ἔτη λ΄. 5 
 ς΄. ᾿Αράλιος ἔτη μ΄. 0 
 ζ΄. Ἐέρξης ἔτη λ΄. ile 
 η. ᾿Αρμαμιδρης ἢ ἔτη λη. 8 
 δ΄, Βήλωχος ἔτη λε΄. 9. 
 . Βαλαιὸς ἔτη νβ΄. 10. 
 ια΄. Σέδως ἔτη ν΄. ὃ 11. 
 ιβ΄. Μαμυδὸς ἔτη 2. 1 
 ιγ΄. ᾿Ασχάλιος || ἔτη χη. 19. 
 ιδ΄, Σφαῖρος ἔτη κβ΄ “ἢ 14. 
 ιε΄. Μάμυλος ἔτη λ΄. 15. 
 
 is. Σπαρϑέως tt ἔτη wp’. 16. 
 
 * Niwas ἔτη An’ Go. 
 
 1 "Aguaunins B. § λβ΄, Go. 
 
 q κβ΄ Go.m. 
 11 Σπαρϑαίως Go.—on αρϑέος Β. 
 
 Nints S25 0) eo gestae 
 Semiramis... .. 42. 
 
 Ninuas who is called Zamis 
 the son of Ninus and Semira- 
 mis: hereigned 38 years. 
 
 6 Arins: τὰ ον 14) «<1; 80 years: 
 2 tAmalnis ος τὴ πον aes 
 
 PNCTXCS eu lst ἀν ΣΝ 
 
 . Armamithres .. 38. 
 
 Belochus .. .. 385. 
 Baleusn hice en tee 
 Sethos weit ops 
 Mamuthos.. .. 980. 
 Aschalius .. .. 28. 
 Spherus .. .. 22. 
 Mamulus .. .. 30. 
 Spartheos .. .. 42. 
 
 + Ζάμης Go. 
 |] Βασχάλεος. 
 ** xy’. Go. m. 
 

 
 DYNASTY OF ASSYRIAN KINGS: 
 
 FROM EUSEBIUS. 
 
 SCALIGER. 
 ASZYPION é Βασίλευσεν α΄. I. 
 Βῆλος ἔτη ve. 
 p’. Νίνος ἔτη νβ΄. 
 γ΄. Σεμίραμις ἔτη μβ΄. Il. 
 δ΄, Νινύας ὃ και Ζάμης vidg 1π. 
 
 Nivey καὶ Σεμιράμεως 
 
 ἔτη λη. 
 ε΄. “Apeing ἔτη λ΄. IV. 
 ς΄. ᾿Αράλιος ἔτη μ΄. v. 
 ζ΄, Ἐέρξης ἔτη λ΄. vi. 
 
 ἡ. ᾿Αρμαμίδρης ἔτη An. ΥὙΠΙ. 
 
 δ΄. Βήλωχος ἔτη λε΄. VIII. 
 ἰἐ. Βαλαῖος ἔτη νβ΄. ἔχ: 
 ια΄. ᾿Αλτάδας Ἐ ἔτη λβ'. δες: 
 
 ιβ΄. Μαμνυϑὸς ἔτη 2's ΧΙ. 
 wy’. Μαγχάλιος 7 ἔτη κη. χιι. 
 
 ιδ΄, Σφαῖρος ἔτη κβ΄. XII. 
 se. Μάμνυλος ἔτη λ΄. XIV. 
 ist Σπαρϑέως t ἔτη λ΄. XV. 
 
 * SeSw; Afr. 
 1 Σπαρϑέος ἔτη μβ΄. Afr. 
 
 ARMENIAN. 
 
 Ninus, quem primum universz 
 Asiz, exceptis Indis, imperasse 
 dicunt annis Li. 
 
 Semiramis .. .. am. ΧΙΜΠῚ 
 Zames, qui Ninyas .. Xxxviit 
 
 PATIUS Tye τ tech fey04 yore RK 
 AraliusquiAmyrus .. xi 
 Xerxes qui et Ba- 
 
 WSUS Apap den atest Ee KI 
 Amramithes .. .. .. XXXVIII 
 Belochus ὩΣ «. 2. .. -XXXvV 
 BalecasMasr. os ods ΚΗ 
 Alladasatete .ts.> πονῶν eX X KIT 
 Miamithus 5... τ ie (XX 
 Machchalaleus .. .. xxx 
 SPP E AG ea. wie, 2 DERI 
 WESTIN CS Gh en νος τὴ e 6.6.4 
 Sparcihus =... ..:4. XI 
 
 f ᾿Ασχάλιος Afr. 
 
“I 
 chs) 
 
 Rees > 
 
 ᾿Αμύντης ἔτη με΄. 
 
 "η΄. 
 i. 
 κ΄. 
 
 ͵ 
 κα. 
 
 λη΄. 
 AN. 
 μ΄. 
 pa 
 
 DYNASTY OF ASSYRIAN KINGS. 
 
 SYNCELLUS. 
 
 Ασκατάδης ἔτη Ay - 
 
 Βήλοχος ἔτη κε΄. 
 Βαλατόρης ἢ ἔτη λ΄. 
 Λαμπρίδης ἔτη λ΄. 
 
 . Σωσάρης ἔτη x’ 
 ,., Λαμπραὴς ἔτη λ΄. 
 . Παννὰς ἔτη με΄. 
 . Σώσαρμος ἔτη κβ΄. 
 *, Midpatos ἔτη κζ΄. 
 
 Νὰ 
 . Τεύταμος, ὃ καὶ Tav- 
 
 τάνης παρά τισι λε- 
 
 ψόμενος, ἔτη λβ΄. 
 
 . Τευταῖος ἔτη μδ΄. 
 
 ", ᾿Αραβῆλος ἵ ἔτη μβ'. 
 λ΄, Χάλαος ἔτη με΄. 
 
 ’, "AveBos ἔτη An» 
 
 Βάβιος ἔτη λζ΄. 
 siete fern ae 
 
 Δερκύλος ἔτη μ΄. 
 
 . Ἑὐπάκμης ὃ ἔτη λη΄. 
 
 , oe ͵ 
 . Λαοσδένης ern με. 
 
 Περτιάδης ἔτη 7A 
 ᾿Οφραταῖος ἔτη χα΄. 
 ᾿Εφεχερῆς ἔτη ς΄. || 
 ᾿Αχραγάνης ἔτη μβ΄. 
 Θῶνος 6 λεγόμενος Ἰζον- 
 
 . Ascatades 
 . Amantes 
 . Belochus 
 . Balatores 
 
 Pannas .. 
 Sosarmus 
 . Mithreus . 
 
 . Lamprides .. 
 . NOSATES τιν « 
 . Lampraes .. 
 
 . 
 
 38 years. 
 45. 
 25. 
 30. 
 30. 
 20. 
 30. 
 45. 
 22. 
 27. 
 
 . Teutamus—who is called by 
 
 some Tautanes : he reigned 32 
 
 years. 
 . Teuteus .. 
 . Arabelus .. 
 Chalaus .. 
 Anebus .. 
 ΒΆΡΗ Ὁ 
 
 eye! ‘ele ὁ. Ὁ) (e's 
 
 34. 
 . Eupacmes. . 
 
 Dercylus .. 
 
 Laosthenes 
 . Pertiades .. 
 . Ophratzeus 
 Ephecheres 
 Acraganes 
 41. 
 
 . 
 
 44), 
 42. 
 45. 
 
 6.4 
 42. 
 
 Thonus surnamed Concolerus, 
 
 κόλερος, Ἑλληνιστὶ Σαρδανά- by the Greeks Sardanapalus: he 
 
 παλλος ** ἔτη κ΄. 17 
 
 Σαρδανάπαλλος Ταρσὸν ἔχ- 
 
 * Βαλετόρης Go. 
 ὃ Ἐνπάκμης Go. 
 
 4 59. 
 ΤΊ se’. Go. 
 
 reigned 20 years. 
 
 Sardanapalus built the cities of 
 
 + ᾿Αραθίλος B. 
 
 1 Θιναῖος Sc. 
 
 || νβ΄ Go. m.—Se. 
 ** Σαρδανάπαλος, Vulg. 
 
Thinzus— 
 
 DYNASTY OF ASSYRIAN KINGS. 
 
 SCALIGER. 
 
 ιζ΄. ᾿Ασκατάδης ἔτη λη΄. 
 in. ᾿Αμύντης Et με΄. 
 ιδ΄, Βήλοχος ἔτη κε΄. 
 
 κ΄. Βαλάτορος Ἐ ἔτη λ΄. 
 κα΄. Aaumpidys ἔτη λ΄. 
 κβ΄. Σωσάρης ἔτη x. 
 κγ΄. Λαμπραὴς ἔτη λ΄. 
 κδ΄. Πανύας ἡ ἔτη wt 
 κε΄. Σώσαρμος ἔτη κβ΄ «ὃ 
 us’. Μιϑραῖος ἔτη xf, 
 κζ΄. Τεύταμος ὃ καὶ Τευ- 
 
 τανῆς ἔτη λβ'. 
 
 un. Τευταῖος ἔτη μδ΄. 
 κα΄. Θιναῖος || ἔτη λ΄. 
 
 λ΄, Δέρκυλος ἔτη μ΄. 
 λα΄. νπάχμης ἔτη λη. 
 ap’. Λαοσϑένης ἔτη με΄. 
 λγ΄. Πυρτιάδης ἔτη λ΄. 
 λδ΄. ᾿Οφραταϊος ἢ ἔτη κα΄. 
 λε΄. ᾿Ἐφαχερῆς 7 ἔτη νβ΄. 
 Ac’. ᾿Ακραγάνης ἔτη μβ΄. 
 λζ΄. Θῶνος 6 λεγόμενος Κον- 
 
 κόλερος Ἑλληνιστὶ Σαρδανά- 
 
 - ᾽ , 
 πᾶλος ETH KX 
 
 Οὗτος, ἔσχατος γεγονὼς 
 
 ᾿Ασσυρίων βασιλεὺς, ὑπερῆρεν" 
 
 oe Ν Ν id ~ 
 ἄπᾳντῶας TOS πρὸ αὕτου 
 
 XVI. 
 XVII. 
 XVIII. 
 XIX. 
 XX. 
 ΧΧΙ. 
 XXII. 
 XXIII. 
 XXIV. 
 XXV. 
 XXVI. 
 
 XXVII. 
 XXVIII. 
 XXIX. 
 XXX. 
 XXXI. 
 XXXII. 
 ΧΧΧΠΙ. 
 XXXIV. 
 
 XXXY. 
 
 xxxvi. Sardanapalles .... 
 
 ARMENIAN. 
 Ascatades .. ann. 
 
 Amintas .. .. 
 Belochus us 
 Balatores ih 
 Lamprides .. 
 Sosmares .. 
 Lampares.. 
 Panmaseee οἰ- 
 Sosarmus.. .. 
 Mithreus ae 
 Teutamus.. 
 
 Teutaeus.. .. 
 Thinaeus.. .. 
 Derusus .. .. 
 Eupalmes.. .. 
 Laosthenes .. 
 Peritiades .. 
 Ophrataeus .. 
 Ophatanes.. .. 
 Acrazanes.. .. 
 
 - 
 co 
 
 XXXVIII 
 XLV 
 
 Simul universa Assyriorum Dynas- 
 tia juxta certos Scriptores (perdu- 
 
 ravit) annos MccxL. juxta alios autem 
 
 * Βαλατόρης Αἴϊ.---Βελλεσπάρης Sc. m. 
 
 Σ με΄. Afr. 
 
 + Παννύας Afr. 
 
 ὃ μβ΄. Afr. 
 || In Scaliger’s list of Africanus, he also introduces between Teutzus and 
 
 x2’. ᾿Αραβηλος μβ΄. 
 
 λ΄. Χάλαος με. 
 λα΄. ἔλναβος An’. 
 
 λβ΄. Βάβιος 
 
 4 Πυριτιάδης Afr. 
 
 tt ᾿Ακρακάρνης Afr—’Oxpatémns Sc. m. 
 
 AL’.—See p. 69. 
 
 δε ΟΦρατένης Sc. m. 
 
74 DYNASTY OF ASSYRIAN KINGS. 
 
 SYNCELLUS. 
 τισεξ yal ᾿Αγχιάλην τὰς Tarsus and Anchiale in one day. 
 πόλεις ἐν μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ. : 
 
 Ἡ τῶν Ασσυρίων βασιλείᾳ The Assyrian empire founded a.m. 
 εἰς τὸ καδολικὸν κοσμικὸν Pyoe 3216. flourished 1460 years and was 
 ἔτος ἔληξε, διαρκέσασα ἔτη overthrown a.m. 4675. 
 vk! ἀπὸ τοῦ κοσμικοῦ yas’ 
 
 2 
 ἔτους. 
 
 * ῴκησεν Vulg.—anicey Sc. 
 
 
 
DYNASTY OF ASSYRIAN KINGS. 
 
 SCALIGER. 
 τρυφῇ, καὶ ῥασυμίᾳ. “Ay- 
 χίαλον καὶ Ταρσὸν ἐν ἡμέρᾳ 
 μιᾷ ἐδείματο. Τέλος ὑπὸ 
 ᾿Αρβάκου τοῦ Μήδου νικηδεὶς 
 7 ‘ ta , 
 μεγάλην πυρὰν ποιήσας τόν τε 
 \ Ν Ν ΕΝ “ 
 χρυσὸν, καὶ τὸν ἄργυρον ἅπαν- 
 τα, πρὸς δὲ τούτοις τὴν βασι- 
 Ν > “ of πος 
 λικὴν ἐσθῆτα ἅπασαν ἐπὶ 
 /, Ee Ψ \ x 
 ταύτην ἐσώρευσε. “al τὰς 
 παλλακίδας, καὶ τοὺς εὐνούχους 
 "4 > Ας > 4 ~ 
 συγκλείσας εἰς τὸν ἐν μέσῃ τῇ 
 πυρᾷ κατεσκευασμένον οἶκον, 
 σ Zz Ls ε , 
 ἅμα τούτοις ἅπασιν ἑαυτὸν τε 
 ‘ x ΄,. ͵ὔ 
 καὶ τὰ βασίλεια κατέκαυσεν. 
 Εἶτα ἡ τῶν ᾿Ασσυρίων βασι- 
 λεία εἰς τοὺς Μήδους μετηνέ- 
 43n.-—Eus. Chron. Sc. 
 
 - 
 Cr 
 
 ARMENIAN, 
 annos mcce. Thonnus Concolerus, qui 
 Grece Sardanapallus vocatur ab 
 Arbace et Belesio devictus, seipsum 
 igni tradidit: a quo ad primam 
 Olympiadem (sunt) anni xt.—L£us. 
 Chron, Ar. p. 98. 
 
DYNASTY OF ASSYRIAN KINGS.* 
 
 
 
 AssyRIoRUM primum 
 scribunt Bilum, quem et ab As- 
 
 regem 
 
 syriis et Phcenices et Persi 
 Deum vocaverunt. Hune Dium 
 Greco nomine__ interpretave- 
 runt. 
 
 1. Bilus vero primus in As- 
 syrios regnavit annos LXII, et 
 partem Asie. 
 
 τ. Post hae regnavit Ninus 
 Iste condidit Nine- 
 
 vem civitatem Assyriorum, et 
 
 annos LI. 
 veniens in Asia vocatus est 
 Picus. 
 
 ut. Post quem Semiramis, 
 Hance 
 
 Ream vocaverunt propter ejus 
 
 uxor ejus annos XLII. 
 
 multam atrocitatem. 
 
 tv. Post hune Zinas, reg- 
 navit annos ΧΧΧΥΠΙ. 
 
 y. Arius xxx. 
 
 Tuey write that the first king 
 of the Assyrians was Bilus, 
 whom the Assyrians, Phceni- 
 cians, and Persians, call God. 
 In the Greek language they 
 call him Dius. 
 
 1. Bilus, who was the first 
 king, reigned over the Assyrians 
 and part of Asia 62 years. 
 
 2. Afterwards reigned Ninus 
 He founded Nine- 
 veh, a city of the Assyrians, 
 
 52 years. 
 
 and coming into Asia was called 
 Picus. 
 
 8. After him Semiramis, his 
 wife, 42 years. She was called 
 Rea on account of her manifold 
 atrocities. 
 
 4. After her Zinas reigned 
 38 years. 
 
 5. Arius reigned 30 years. 
 
 * This Catalogue is given by Scaliger from a Chronological compilation “ ab 
 
 homine barbaro, inepto, Hellenismi et Latinitatis imperitissimo.” 
 mutilated copy of Castor’s Canon, as it ends with the second Ninus. 
 
 It is possibly a 
 See p. 65°. 
 
 a 
 

 
 
 
 DYNASTY OF THE ASSYRIAN KINGS. 
 
 vi. Aranusannos .. XL. 
 vu. Xerxes, qui et Balleus 
 
 XXX. 
 γι. Mamithrus .. xxxvu. 
 
 1x. Bilochus .. xxxv. 
 
 x. Balleus® τὰ ὁ... Ui 
 sae Ue τ ΣΥ͂Σ: 
 =i. Mamithus .. , XxX. 
 
 Rink dtatterus 0»... Ἐς: 
 xiv. Mamythus .. xxxv. 
 xy. Spareus .. .. —Xi. 
 xvi. Ascatagus  .. XL. 
 
 εύτιν Amintus ss <2 Be 
 xvur. Actosai et Semiramis 
 a χώσος 
 
 XXIII. 
 xix. Bilochus..-.. xxv. 
 xx. Belleroparus xxxiv. 
 xxi. Lampridus..  xxxu. 
 SUT. se Osarus ᾿ς... xx. 
 xxur. Lamparus .. Xxx. 
 xxry. Paunius et Zeus xiv. 
 xxv. Sosarmus .. .. xx. 
 xxvi. Mithreus .. xxxv. 
 xxvu. Tautelus .. xxxm. 
 
 Anno isto tricessimo se- 
 cundo confixus est Sol 
 (Ilion?) ab Acheis. 
 
 “ι 
 ~ 
 
 xxvu. Euteus annos .. XI. 
 xx1x. Thineus ὍΝ ἘΠῚ τ ἃ 
 xxx. Cercillus Sere | Xs 
 xxxI. Eupalus .. XxXxvI. 
 
 xxx. Lausthenus .. XLy. 
 
 xxx. Peritiadus .. Xxx. 
 
 xxxiv. Ophrateus .. xx. 
 
 xxxy. Ophratanus.. L. 
 
 xxxvi. Acrapazus .. XL. 
 
 xxxvut. Tonos Conceleros qui 
 
 vocatur Greece Sardanapalus 
 i TGS το a νος ΤΡ, ρος 
 xxxvi. Ninus -.“:.  xIx. 
 
 Simul reges xxxrx antiqui 
 Assyriorum perseverantes an- 
 nos mille quadringentos tri- 
 
 Ab 
 
 prima Olympiada, annos Lxvit 
 
 ginta. istis autem in 
 Assyriorum regnum. 
 Altogether these thirty-nine 
 ancient kings of the Assyrians 
 And from 
 them to the first Olympiad the 
 
 reigned 1430 years. 
 
 kingdom of the Assyrians con- 
 tinued sixty-seven years. 
 
CHALDAAN DYNASTY OF 
 NABONASAR. 
 
 THE ECCLESIASTICAL CANON. 
 
 TA ἀπὸ Σαλμανασὰρ; ἤτοι Na- 
 , wv X Ἂν > 
 βονᾳσάρου, ern κατὰ τὴν ἐκκλη- 
 AS ὔ eo , 
 σιαστικὴν στοιχείωσιν ἕως Kupou, 
 καὶ ἔπειτα ᾿Αλεξάνδρου τοῦ Μα- 
 κεδόνος. 
 α΄. Ναβονάσαρος ὃ καὶ Σαλ- 
 μανασὰρ᾽ ἐν τῇ γραφῇ 
 ᾿ λεγόμενος ἔτη κε΄. 
 
 β΄. Νάβιος ἔτη η. 
 
 γ΄. Χίνζηρος καὶ Πῶρος ἔτη ε΄. 
 
 9 8. Ἰλουλαῖος ἡ ἔτη ε΄. 
 εἰ, Μαρδοκέμιπαδος t ἔτη ιβ΄. 
 ς΄. ᾿Αρκεανὸς ἔτη ε΄. 
 ζ΄. ᾿Αβασίλευτος ἔτη β'. 
 He Βήλιλος ὃ ἔτη γ΄. 
 δ΄. ᾿Απαρανάδισος ἔτη '. 
 yf. Ἠριγέβαλος] ἔτος α΄. 
 ια΄. Μεσησιμόρδακος] ἔτη δ΄. 
 
 * Σαλμονασὰρ Go. 
 ft Μαρδοκεμπάδοκος Vulg. 
 
 Tue ecclesiastical computation of 
 the years from Salmanasar who is 
 the same as Nabonasar to Alexan- 
 der of Macedon. 
 
 1. Nabonasar who is called in 
 Scripture Salmanasar, reigned 
 25 years. 25. 
 
 «@Nabius/80 ἀπ τῶν 
 
 3. Chinzerus and Po- 
 
 TUSYO * (elo Liste tte Masten ts 
 
 Ase Thuleeus' νον ας eevee ἢ 
 
 5. Mardocempadus 12 66. 
 
 ~ 
 
 6. Arceanus 5 ole (ese Ὴν 
 7. Interregnum 2 .. .. 62. 
 8. Belilus*S0\))). smear 
 9. Aparanadisus6.. .. 71. 
 10. Erigebalus1 .. .. 72. 
 11. Mesesimordacus 4... 76. 
 
 1 Ἰλλουλαῖος Vulg.—idroruos B. 
 ὃ Βήληλος Go. 
 
 || Ἰρηγιβαλλος Go, 4 Μεσισικόρδακος Α.--ττΝ ἐσσισιμόρδακος Go, 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 CHALDEAN DYNASTY OF 
 NABONASAR. 
 
 THE ASTRONOMICAL CANON. 
 
 TA ἀπὸ NaPwacdpov ἔτη, τοῦ 
 καὶ Σαλμανασὰρ," βασιλέως 
 Χαλδαίων, ἕως ᾿Αλεξάνδρου τοῦ 
 κτίστου τελευτῆς κατὰ τὸν ἀσ- 
 
 τρονομιχὸν κανόνα. 
 
 α΄. Ναβονασάρου ἔτη ιδ΄. 
 β΄. Ναβίου ἔτη β΄. is. 
 γ΄. Χινζήρου καὶ Πώρου 
 ἔτη ε΄. κα΄. 
 δ᾽, Ἰλουλαύυ ἔτη ε΄. κς΄. 
 
 ε΄, Μαρδοκεμπάδου ἔτη 
 ιβ΄. λη. 
 
 . ᾿Αρκεανοῦ Erne’. μγ. 
 
 . Βηλίβου ἢ ἔτηγ. μη" 
 
 τ 
 ζ΄. ᾿Αβασίλευτος ἕτη β΄. μέ. 
 7 
 δ 
 
 . ᾿Απαραναδίσου ὃ ἔτη 
 
 ς- νδ΄. 
 
 ια΄. Μεσησιμορδάκου ern 
 
 x. yy. 
 
 * Σαλμονασὰρ Go. 
 
 § ᾿Απαρανναδίσον Β.---᾿ Λποραναδίσου Go. 
 
 ve Ἠριγεβάλου] ἔτος α΄. νε΄. 
 
 Tue Astronomical Canon of the 
 
 years from Nabonasar who is the 
 
 same as Salmanasar King of the 
 Chaldeans to the death of Alex- 
 ander the founder of the Greek 
 
 dynasty. 
 1. Nabonasarus 
 2. Nabios 2 
 
 3. Chinzerus and Porus 
 
 ey PIGLET IO τς δον τ 
 5. Mardocempadus 12 
 
 6. Arceanns( 52% oj τς 
 7. Interregnum 2.. 
 
 8: Belihus Ὁ. τ᾿ ‘sous. 
 9. Aparanadisus 6 .. 
 
 10. Erigebalus1 .. .. 
 11. Mesesimordacus 4.. 
 
 14. 
 
 16. 
 Ns 
 
 54. Ae 
 
 } Πώρου Β. πη.---Πύρου Α.--πύῤῥου Go. 
 1 Βηλέβου Β.---Βηλίϑου (ο.----Βέλιμος Supra in Dind. 
 
 ἢ ᾿Ιριγεβάλου Go. 
 
80 
 
 CHALDEAN DYNASTY 
 
 THE ECCLESIASTICAL CANON. 
 
 Pl. ᾿Αβασίλευτος ἄλλος ἔτη 12. Interregnum 8 aja, 94: 
 le 
 ιγ΄. ᾿Ισαρινδῖνος * ἔτη ιγ'. 13. Isarindinus 19 ois) 9: 
 ιδ΄, Σαοσδουχῖνος ἡ ἔτη δ᾽]. 14. Saosduchinus 9 .. 106. 
 te, Κινηλάδανος t ἔτη id. 15. Cineladanus 14 .. 120. 
 tc, Ναβοπαλάσαρος ὃ ἔτη 10. Nabopalasarus 2]... 141} 
 καί. 
 ιζ΄, Νιαβουχοδονόσωρ] υἱὸς τη 17. Nabuchodonosor his 
 py’ SON 43... ic sisi we 91. 
 wn. Ἐὐειλὰδ  Μαροδὰχ ἔτη 18, Euilad Marodach 5 189. 
 εἰ: 
 ιδ΄, Νιριγλήσαρος ὃ καὶ 19. Niriglesarus who is 
 Βαλτάσαρ ἔτη γ'. Baltasar 35.... .. 192% 
 wl. Ναβονάδιος 6 καὶ ᾿Αστυά- 20. Nabonadius who is 
 γῆς Δαρεῖος ft ᾿Ασσουή- Astyges Darius As- 
 ρου ΤῈ καὶ ᾿Δρταξέρξης suerus and Artax- 
 ἔτη sl. erkes 17) asa vow 19. 
 PERSIAN DYNASTY. 
 ual, Κῦρος Περσῶν πρῶτος 21, Cyrus the first king 
 βασιλεὺς ἔτη ra, of Persia 31. 
 “Bl. Καμβύσης υἱὸς Κύρυ 22. Cambyses the son of 
 ἔτη η". Cyrus 8. 0.1 τ ΣΕ aes 
 uy. Μάγοι ἀδελφοὶ Bl Σμέ.-. 23. The Magi two bro- 
 dios §§ καὶ Παυζούτης thers Smerdius and 
 μῆνας ZI. Pausoutes 7 months. 
 κδ', Δαρεῖος υἱὸς Ὑστώσπου!}}]Ἡ 94. Darius the son of : 
 ἔτη Ast. Hystaspes 36 .. 75. 
 
 * "Ισααριδηνὸς Vulg. 
 1 Κινηλαδανᾶς Go. 
 || Ναβοχοδονόσωρ B. 
 
 f Σαὺς Δούχιος Go. 
 § Ναβοπαλασσαρος B. 
 
 4 εὐἰδᾶν βαροχάδ A.—'EBiSdy Μεροδὰχ Go. 
 
 ἘΦ Νιρηγλήσαρος Go.—NnoryAjcagos A. Β. 
 
 Tt Δάρσιος A. Β.---Δάρσειος Go. 
 δὲ ᾿Βμέρδιος B. 
 
 ΤΙ ᾿Ασουήρου A. B. 
 ΠΠ| Ὑστάπου ΔΛ. Β. 
 
OF NABONASAR. 
 
 THE ASTRONOMICAL CANON. 
 
 ιβ΄. ᾿Αβασίλευτος ἄλλος 12 
 ἔτη η΄. ἔξ. 
 
 ty ᾿Ἰσαρινδίνου " ἔτη ιγ΄. π΄. 19 
 
 ιδ΄. Σαοσδουχίνου ἡ ἔτη 14, 
 
 Se ὧν, πῶς 
 
 ιε΄. Κινηλαδάλουϊ ἔτη ιδ΄. ργ. 16. 
 
 . Interregnum 8.. .. 67. 
 
 . Isarindinus 13:.... ..' 80, 
 
 is’. Ναβύπαλασάρου ὃ 16. Nabopalasarus _ the 
 πατρὸς Ναβουχοδο- father οἵ Nabuchodo- 
 νόσωρ ἔτη xa. pnd’ ΠΡΌΣ 91 he bose y sue 134. 
 ιζ΄. Ναβοπαλασάρου]τοῦ 17. Nabopalasarus who is 
 
 καὶ Ναβουχοδονόσωρ 
 
 ἔτη μγ. .. ρξζ΄. 
 
 Nabuchodonosor 48 167. 
 
 ιη΄. Ἰλλοαρουδάμουδ ἔτη 18. Iloarudamus 3.. .. 170. 
 y: A po’. 
 
 iS. Νιριγασολασάρου ** 19. Nirigasolasarus 5 .. 175. 
 ἔτη ες ., poe’. 
 
 κ΄, Ναβοναδιου τοῦ καὶ 20. Nabonadius who is 
 
 ᾿Αστυάγους ἔτη λδ΄. σ΄, 
 
 Astyages 84 .. .. 209. 
 
 PERSIAN DYNASTY. 
 
 ~ 
 
 κα΄. Κύρου ἔτη δ΄. ame meade (Oya Fs. 218. 
 xf’. Καμβύσου ἔτη η΄. σχς΄. 22. Cambyses8 .. .. 226. 
 
 κγ΄. Δαρείου ἔτη As. σξβ'. 928. 
 
 κδ΄, Ἐέρξου ἔτη κα΄. omy. 24, 
 
 * ᾿Ισαριηδίνου Α.----Ἰσαριηδήνου Β. 
 Ἢ Σαοσδουχίου Vulg.—Saodovyivou B. 
 
 Darius 86... .. .. 262. 
 ΝΟΥΣ ΘΗ ἔπος τὸ ear 283. 
 
 1 Κιυιλαδάλου Go.—Dind. proposes Κινηλαδάνου. 
 
 ὃ Ναβουκολασσάρου Β.---Ναβουπαλασσάρου Go. 
 
 || Ναβουχοδονόσορ Go. 
 
 { ᾿Ιλλουαρουδάμου Go. 
 
 ** Νιρηγασολασάρου Β.---Νηρηγασολασάρου Go. 
 
 M 
 
 Saosduchinus 9 .. 89. 
 
 Cineladalus 14.. .. 108. 
 
 81 
 
CHALDEAN DYNASTY 
 
 THE ECCLESIASTICAL CANON. 
 
 κεί, Ξέρξης υἱὸς Δαρείου μῆ- 
 νας xl. Ἐ 
 
 ust, ᾿Αρταξέρξης 
 μακρόχειρ ἔτη purl. + 
 
 Ἐέρξου ὁ 
 
 xv). Ξέρξης υἱὸς ᾿Αρταξέρξου 
 μῆνας Bl. 
 
 unl. Σογδιανὸς μῆνας ΧΙ. 
 
 “9, Δαρεῖος ὁ Nowost ἔτη 
 
 ist, 
 
 A ᾿Αρταξέρξης 6 Μνήμων ἔτη 
 yl. 
 
 λα!. Ὦχος *Apraképkou υἱὸς 
 ἔτη €. 
 
 λβ΄. ΓΑρσου ἀδελφοῦ "Ὠχου 
 ἕτη δ΄. 
 
 λγ΄. Δαρείου γ' ᾿Αρσάμου ἔτη 
 ς. 
 
 λδ΄, ᾿Αλεξάνδρου Μακεδόνος 
 ἔτη ς΄. 
 
 * ἔτῃ 6ο. τὴ. 
 
 25. Xerxes the son of 
 
 Darius 20 months .. 77. 
 . Artaxerxes the son 
 
 of Xerxes, Longima- 
 
 nus'43 .o+ 5. oe eo AQO, 
 
 Xerxes the son of Ar- 
 taxerxes 2 months. 
 
 . Sogdianus 7 months 121. 
 . Darius Nothus 19... 140, 
 
 30. Artaxerxes Mnemon 
 AOD. sa-2e Sethe mous 
 31. Ochus the son of Ar- 
 taxerxes ὃ ες .. «© 180; 
 32. Arses the brother of 
 Ochus'4 1.6: 20%. L898 
 33. Darius III. the son of 
 Arsamusi6? Ue. ον 
 34. Alexander of Mace- 
 don 6.5.5 ἢν 2.5.0]. 
 
 iP peo, Go. m. 
 
 { Νοϑοσίνομος Vulg.—NoSocyvoucs B.—véS0s ἢ νόμος librarius. 
 

 
 OF NABONASAR. 
 
 THE ASTRONOMICAL CANON. 
 
 fe ᾿Αρταξέρξου α΄ ἔτη 
 
 μα΄. ταδ΄. 
 
 Δαρείου β΄. τοῦ καὶ 
 
 Νόϑου Ἐ ἔτη 13’. τμγ. 
 . ᾿Αρταξέρξου δευτέρου 
 
 ἔτη us. την. 
 
 “Oyov ἔτη κα΄. ut. 
 . Σάρου ἔτη β΄. υιβ΄. 
 . Δαρείου τρίτου τοῦ 
 
 καὶ ᾿Αρσάμου ἔτη ς΄. πυἱιη.. 
 
 ᾿Αλεξάνδρον τοῦ μεγάλου ἔτη 
 wee und Ὁ 
 
 * νόνου B. 
 
 25. Artaxerxes I. 41... 
 
 26. Darius II. who is No- 
 thus 19 net Dae 
 27. Artaxerxes II. 46 .. 
 
 SSeeOchusisiit ni 1. τς 
 
 BOPISAEUS 25 csr 
 
 30. Darius III. who is 
 Arsamus 6.... 
 
 31. Alexander theGreat 6. 
 
 t 0%’ ὧν. 
 
 324. 
 
 343. 
 389. 
 
 410. 
 
 - 412. 
 
 . 418. 
 
 424, 
 
83° 
 
 PTOLEMAUS’ CANON: 
 
 FROM THEON. 
 
 ASSYPIQN ΚΑΙ MHAQN. 
 
 α΄. Ναβινασσάρου ἔτη ιδ΄. 
 β΄. Ναδίου β΄. Ise 
 ee, Χινζίρου καὶ Πώρου ε'. κα΄. 
 δ΄, ᾿Ιουγαίου ε΄. “S's 
 ε΄. Μαρδοκεμπάδου ιβ΄. λη΄. 
 ᾿ ς΄, ᾿Αρκίανοῦ ε΄, Keys 
 ? ζ΄. ᾿Αβασίλευτου πρώτου 
 β'. με΄. 
 ἡ. Βηλίβου γ΄. μη. 
 δ΄. ᾿Απρωναδίου ς΄. νδ΄, 
 i. Ῥιγηβήλου α΄. ve. 
 ια΄. Μεσεσσιμορδάκου 
 δ΄, va. 
 ιβ΄. ᾿Αβασίλευτου ἡ. EC. 
 ιγ΄. ᾿Ασσαραδίνου «γ΄. π΄. 
 ιδ΄, Σαοσδουχήου κ΄. pe 
 ιε΄. Χυνιλαδάνου κβ΄. pu". 
 ix’. Ναβοκολασσάρου 
 
 ΄ 
 
 κα΄. pay’ « 
 
 KINGS OF THE ASSYRIANS 
 
 AND MEDES, 
 
 1. Nabonassarus .. 
 2, Nadius 2 .. 
 
 3. Chinzirus and Porus 
 
 5 Ἂς 
 4. lugeus 5 .. .. 
 
 5. Mardocempadus 12 
 
 6. Arcianus 5 
 7. Interregnum 2 
 
 8. Belibus 3 
 
 9. Apronadius 6 .. 
 10. Rigebelus 1 
 11. Mesessimordacus 4 
 
 12. Interregnum8.. .. 
 13. Assaradinus 13 . 
 
 14. Saosducheus 20 
 
 15. Chuniladanus 22 .. 
 
 14. 
 10. 
 
 59. 
 
 67. 
 80. 
 
 106. 
 122. 
 
 16. Nabocolassarus21.. 143. 
 
FROM NABONASAR TO ANTONINUS. 
 
 ιζ΄. Ναβοκολασσάρου 
 py. pus’. 
 
 . Ἰλουαροδάμου β'. pra’. 
 
 . Νιρικασσολασσά- 
 ρου δ΄. 
 
 x. Ναβοναδίου ιζ΄. 
 
 ρξβ΄.1 
 a, 
 
 TIEPSQN BASIAEQN. 
 
 ΄ Κύρου δ΄ ἔτη. 
 
 κβ΄. Καμβύσου κ΄. ὃ oc’. 
 κγ΄. Δαρείου α΄. As’. σξβ'. 
 κδ΄, Ξέρξου κα΄. σμγ.}} 
 κε΄. ᾿Αρταξέρξου α΄. 
 
 μα. TH. 
 us. Δαρείου Bl. iY. TAY 
 ul. ᾿Αρταξέρξου δευτέρον 
 
 pss THe . 
 χη. "᾿Ὥχου xa. ui. 
 ny. ᾿Αρώστου β'. υιβ'. 
 
 / ͵ 
 . Δαρείου τρίτου γ᾽. vis". 
 
 EAAHNQN ΒΑΣΙΛΕΩ͂Ν, 
 ᾿Αλεξάνδρου pax. κ΄. J υχδ΄. 
 Φιλίππου ᾿Αριδαίου ζ΄. ¢. 
 ᾿Αλεξάνδρου Αἴγου ιβ΄. i. 
 
 EAAHNOQN BASIA, EN 
 ΑΙΓΥΠΤΩ. 
 
 Πτωλεμαίου Λάγου κ΄. Ad’. 
 Πτ. Φιλαδέλφου Ay’. οζ΄. 
 
 * oms’ Qy. 
 ὃ η΄ Qy. 
 
 Τῆς 
 
 18. 
 19. 
 
 20. 
 
 Nabocolassarus 43 
 
 Iluarodamus 2 
 
 Niricassolassarus 4: 
 
 Nabonadius 17 
 
 84 
 
 186. 
 
 188. 
 192. 
 
 209. 
 
 KINGS OF THE PERSIANS. 
 
 21. Cyrus 9 - 218. 
 
 22, Cambyses 8 226. Ss 
 
 23. Darius I. 36 262.5" ® 
 
 24, Xerxes21 .. 28s! gir δ 
 
 25. Artaxerxes I. 41 $24, "" 
 Cx, 
 
 26. Darius 11. 19 848. ee" 
 
 27. Artaxerxes II. 46 .. 389. 
 
 28 Ochusi 21) oe 4). ban, 410% 
 
 29. Arostes 2 BT Bie er 
 
 30. Darius III. 4 .. 416. 
 
 KINGS OF THE GREEKS. 
 
 Alexander the Great 8. 
 Philippus Arideus 7. 7. 431. 
 Alexander Aigus 12. 19. 443. 
 
 424. 
 
 GREEK KINGS OF EGYPT, 
 
 Ptolemzus Lagus 20. 39. 463. 
 
 Pt. Philadelphus 38. 77. 501. 
 t pr’ Qy. } p98’ Qy. 
 || ory’ Qy. q γ᾽ Qy. 
 
 “2 1 f 
 ν΄ μ΄“ ν] tthe - 
 
841: 
 
 Πτ. Εὐεργέτου κε΄. pe. 
 Tit. Φιλοπάτορος wf’. pid’. 
 Πτ. ᾿Επιφάνους nd. ΡΣ 
 Πτ. Φιλομήτορος re. ροη΄. 
 Πτ. Εὐεργέτου β΄. κ΄. σζ'. 
 Ilr, Σωτῆρος As’. σμγ΄. 
 Πτ. Διονύσου «d'. σοβ'. 
 Κλεόπατρας κβ΄. στὸ .Ἐ 
 PQMAIQN ΒΑΣΙΛΣΙΣ. 
 Αὐγούστου py... .. TAC. 
 Τιβερίου κβ'. . TN. 
 Γαίου δ΄. .. thy’. 
 Κλαυδίου ιδ΄. 74: 
 Νέρωνος ιδ΄. 5 baat 
 Οὐεσπασιανοῦ ι΄. ua’. 
 Τίτου γ'... aq fog «ed. 
 Δομετιανοῦ ιε΄. vin. 
 INEpada Gla ie'o eh) oct UR 
 Τραιανοῦ (δ΄. vad. 
 ᾿Αδριανοῦ κα΄. .. υξ΄. 
 ᾿Αντωνίνου κγ΄. oe unr’. 
 
 PTOLEMUS’ CANON. 
 
 * 53 Qy. 
 
 Pt. Euergetes 25. 
 
 Pt. Philopator 17. 
 Pt. Epiphanes 24. 
 Pt. Philometor 35. 
 
 Pt. EvergetesII. 29. 2 
 
 Pt. Soter 36. 
 Pt. Dionysus 29. 
 Cleopatra 22. 
 
 KINGS OF THE ROMANS. 
 
 Augustus 43. , 87: 
 Tiberius 22... τι Sao: 
 Gaius 4. .. Bie ol ovo): 
 Claudius 14. .. .. 377. 
 Nero 14... 7 Oo. 
 Vespasianus 10. .. 401. 
 AIS) Gas 6 . 404. 
 Dometianus 15. .. 419. 
 Nerva 1. .. . 420. 
 Trajanus ΟΣ ΤΡ 489: 
 Adrianus 21. . 460. 
 Antoninus 23. . 483. 
 
 761. 
 783. 
 787. 
 80]. 
 815. 
 825. 
 828. 
 848. 
 
 907. 
 
 Calvisius, p. 79. 
 
 + 50’ Qy. 
 

 
 io 
 ΓΕῚ 
 
 DYNASTIES OF THE MEDIAN 
 KINGS. 
 
 FROM 
 
 ΜΗΔΩΝ a’ ἐβασίλευσεν *Ap- 
 βάκης, 6 καταλύσας τὴν τῶν 
 ᾿Ασσυρίων ἀρχὴν, ἔτη x7 - 
 
 β΄. Μανδαύκης ἔτη x’. 
 
 γ΄. Σώσαρμος ἔτη λ΄. 
 
 δ΄, ᾿Αρτύκας ἔτη rt 
 
 ε΄. Δηϊόκης Ἐ ἔτη νδ΄. 
 
 Δηϊόκης ὁ Μήδων βασιλεὺς 
 ἔκτισεν Ἐχβάτανα 7 τὴν πόλιν 
 μεγάλην καὶ διαβόητον. 
 
 ς΄. ᾿Αφραάρτης 1 ἔτη να΄. 
 
 ζ΄. Κυαξάρης ἔτη λβ΄. 
 
 ἡ. ᾿Αστυάγης Δάρειος ἔτη λη.. 
 
 SYNCELLUS. 
 
 Or the Median kings the first was 
 Arbaces who overthrew the empire 
 of the Assyrians .. .. 28 years. 
 
 2. Mandauces .. .. 20. 
 
 8. Sosarmus .. .. 30. 
 
 4) DECY OAS Fass) -- 90: 
 
 5. Deioces .. .. .. 54. 
 
 Deioces the king of the Medes 
 founded the great and celebrated 
 city of Ecbatana. 
 
 6. Aphraartes .. .. 51 years. 
 
 7. Cyaxares .. .. 32. 
 
 8. Astyages Darius 98. 
 
 FROM EUSEBIUS. 
 
 FROM THE CANON. 
 a. ᾿Αρβάκης ἔτη κη΄. 
 β΄. Σώσαρμος ἔτη λ΄. 
 γ΄. Μεδίδος ἔτη μ΄. 
 δ΄. Καρδικέας ἔτη ιγ΄. 
 ε΄. Δηϊόκης ἔτη vd. 
 
 ARMENIAN. 
 1. Arbaces Ses ee VENT c 
 ir. Mandauces .. .. .. xx. 
 
 Tie SOSALTNUS) τὸ create @) ΧΧΣ. 
 
 ἘΣ ΑΘ ΡΣ here KK: 
 
 WaWlaoces sare talc +. LEV. 
 
 * διοίκης Vulg. + ᾿Εκβακτάα A.B. t ᾿Αφραδάρτης Sc. 
 
86° DYNASTIES OF THE MEDIAN KINGS. 
 
 ς΄. Φραόρτης ἔτη xd. vi. Phraortes τ νὴ Ἐπ 
 ζ΄. Κυαξάρης ἔτη λβ΄. vil. Ciaxares’) τ τ. see 
 ἡ. ᾿Αστυάγης ἔτη Ay. ΥΠῸΙ. Astyages .- .- «+ XXXVIII. 
 
 FROM HERODOTUS. 
 
 α΄. Δηϊόκης ἔτη νγ΄. 1. Deioces .. .. 3. .. 58 yeamss 
 β΄. Φραόρτης ἔτη κβ'. οι (Phraortes” 7.) τἢὸ Ὁ. 
 γ΄. Κυαξάρης ἔτη μ'. 8. Cyaxares* .. .. .. 40. 
 δ΄, ᾿Αστυάγης ἔτη de. 4. AStyages .. .. «ἡ: 98. 
 
 FROM CTESIAS.* 
 
 α΄. ᾿Αρβάκης ἔτη χη. 1. Arbaces «+ τεῷ 0 28 Years. 
 ΄, Madatunst ἔτη ν΄. @., Madures) τὸ ges cme 
 
 γ΄. Σώσαρμος ἔτη r. 8. ΒΟΞΑΥΙΤΩΠΒ, ον τὸ τν δῦ 
 
 δ΄, *Aptiact ἔτη ν΄. Ai VATHASS sy ot. sick OO 
 
 ε΄. ᾿Δρβιάνης ἔτη κβ΄. 5. AMibianes νος, ΟΣ 
 
 ς΄. ᾿Αρσαῖος ὃ ἔτη μ΄. 6... ΑΥ̓ΒΕΘΌΒΙ., τ ν senor 
 
 ζ΄. ᾿Αρτύνης ἔτη κβ΄. 7. JAxtymies” τα ccunaeeeas 
 
 qe ᾿Αρτιβάρνας ἔτη μ΄, 8. Artibarnas\ τ ποτ 
 ᾿Αστιβάραδὲ τοῦ βασι- After the death of Astibaras king 
 λέως τῶν Μήδων γήρᾳ of the Medes of old age, reign- 
 τελευτήσαντος, ed 
 
 δ΄. ᾿Ασπάδας] ὁ υἱὸς, ὁ ὑπὸ 9. Aspadas his son, whom the 
 τῶν Ἕλλήνων ᾿Αστυάγης Greeks call Astyages. 
 καλούμενος. Diod. Sic. Lib. II, p. 84. 
 
 * Jackson gives a catalogue of the Median kings composed of the four first 
 from the list of Syncellus, and the five last from this of Ctesias. 
 
 f+ Μανδαύκης τη. 1 ’Apréxas m. 
 
 § Diodorus, in subsequently relating the revolt of Parsodes and the war of 
 the Caducei or Carducei with the Medes, changes the name to ’Aptaios. 
 
 || ᾿Απάνδας τι. 
 
DYNASTIES OF THE MEDIAN KINGS. 
 
 87° 
 
 FROM CASTOR.* 
 
 Quop vero ccLXIx annorum 
 Midorum obtinuerunt tempora, 
 sic: a principio Abbaci, qui 
 primus regnavit in Midia, usque 
 Alyatum quem Cyrus exter- 
 minans in Persida regnum mi- 
 gravit. 
 
 1. Abracus 
 
 ann. XXVIII. 
 
 ul. Sosarmus .. Iv. 
 
 mi. Mamythus .. Xt. 
 Iv. Cardiceus .. XXIII. 
 v. Diycus ster LY: 
 Wise TaOrfus: as) XXIV. 
 vu. Cyaxarus .. XXXII. 
 
 =e 
 
 Hee Midorum regna per- 
 
 vur. Astyacus .. 
 
 manserunt per annos CCLXIx a 
 quintodecimo anno Oziz regis 
 Jude, hoc est, 1111 annorum 
 prime Olympiad. Finiit au- 
 tem quinquagesima quarta 
 Olympiada anno trecentessimo 
 octavo regnante Astyago, quem 
 exterminavit Cyrus Persus in 
 quinquagesima quarta Olym- 
 piada. 
 
 Tue times of the kingdom of 
 the Medes continued 269 years, 
 thus: From the beginning of 
 the reign of Abbacus, the first 
 king of Media to Alyatus, whom 
 Cyrus dethroned when he trans- 
 ferred the empire to Persia. 
 
 Pe BraCUin as 
 
 2. Sosarmus.. .. 4. 
 
 28 years. 
 
 Mamythus .. 
 Cardiceus oa 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 aa CUS τ 
 6. Fraortus .. .. 24. 
 7. Cyaxarus.. 
 8. Astyacus .. .. 
 The kingdom of the Medes, 
 therefore, continued 269 years, 
 from the 15th year of Ozias, 
 king of Judah, that is 53 years 
 before the first Olympiad, and 
 it ended in the 54th Olympiad, 
 in the 308th year, in the reign 
 of Astyagus, whom Cyrus the 
 Persian dethroned in the 54th 
 Olympiad.—Sc. Eu. Chron. 78. 
 
 * This is from the barbarous Latin chronology mentioned, p. 76. 
 
84 
 
 CANON OF THE KINGS OF THEBES : 
 
 ΄- 
 
 FROM ERATOSTHENES. 
 
 ἢ ΤΥ 
 
 DT. Vopr, 
 
 
 
 ΠΡΩΤΟΣ ἐβασιλευσε Μήνης ἢ 
 Θηβινίτης Θηβαῖος,7 ὃς ἑρμη- 
 γεύεται Διόνιος Ἵ ἐβασίλευσεν 
 ἔτη EB’. 
 
 Θηβαίων δεύτερος ἐβασί- 
 λευσε ᾿Αϑώδϑης υἱὸς Μήνεως ὃ 
 ἔτη ν΄. οὗτος ἑρμηνεύεται 
 ᾿Ερμογένης. 
 
 Θηβαίων Αἰγυπτίων τρίτος 
 ἐβασίλευσε Α)ώνης ὁμώνυμος 
 ἔτη λβ'. 
 
 Θηβαίων 
 Διαβίης υἱὸς ᾿Αϑώσεως] ἔτη 
 ιδ΄. 
 ταιρος. 4] 
 
 Θηβαίων ἐβασίλευσε εἴ. 
 Πεμφῶς ἘΞ υἱὸς "ASdSews ὅ 
 
 ἐβασίλευσε 0. 
 
 2 € , ,ὕ 
 οὗτος ἑρμηνεύεται Φιλε- 
 
 * Μόης 6ο.---μήνις Β. 
 
 Tue first who reigned was Menes the 
 Thebinite, the Thebzean ; which is by 
 interpretation Dionius. He reigned 
 sixty-two years. 
 
 The 2nd of the Theban ‘kings 
 reigned Athothes the son of Menes, 
 59 years. He is called by interpre- 
 tation Hermogenes. 
 
 The 3rd of the Theban Egyptian 
 kings was Athothes, of the same 
 name, 32 years. 
 
 The 4th of the Theban kings was 
 Diabies the son of Athothes, 19 years. 
 By interpretation he is called Phile- 
 teerus. 
 
 The 5th of the Theban kings was 
 
 Pemphos, the son of Athothes, who 
 
 + Θεινίτης Vulg.—Onvirys B.—Thyuites Eu. 
 
 { αἰώνιος Din. from Jabl. 
 
 4 Sc. Din.—GiAérepos A. Β.---φιλέστερος Go. 
 
 § Mews Go. || ᾿Αϑώσεως Go. 
 
 ** Σεμφῶς Jabl. 
 
CANON OF THE KINGS OF THEBES, 
 
 Θηβαίων᾽ Αἰγυπτίων ἐβασί- 
 ς΄. Τοιγαράμαχος * 
 Μομχειρὶ Μεμφίτης ἔτη οὗ. 
 
 λευσε 
 
 οὗτος ἑρμηνεύεται τὴς ἀνδρὸς 
 περισσομελής. 
 
 Θηβαίων Αἰγυπτίων ἐβασί- 
 λευσε ζ΄. Στοῖχος υἱὸς αὐτοῦ, 
 ὅ ἐστιν ἴΑρης 1 ἀναίσδητος, 
 ἔτη ς΄. 
 
 Θηβαίων Αἰγυπτίων ἐβασί- 
 λευσε ὄγδοος Γοσορμίης, ὅ ἐσ- 
 τιν ᾿Ετησιπαντὸς ἔτη Ἅ΄. 
 
 Θηβαίων Αἰγυπτίων ἐβασί- 
 λευσε δ΄. Μάρης υἱὸς αὔτου, 
 ὃ ἐστιν "Ηλιόδωρος dry κς΄. 
 
 «Θηβαίων Αἰγυπτίων i. ἐβα- 
 σίλευσεν ᾿Ανωϊφὶς, ὃ ὃ ἐστιν 
 υἱὸς ἐπίκοινος || ἔτη κ΄. 
 
 Θηβαίων 
 
 Αἰγυπτίων ια΄. 
 
 ἐ 
 ἐβασίλευσεν Σίριος,  ὅ ἐστιν 
 
 υἱὸς κόρρης, ἘἘ ὡς δὲ ἕτεροι 
 ᾿Αβάσκαντος ἔτη ιη΄. 
 
 Θηβαίων Αἱγυπτιων ιβ΄. 
 ἐβασίλευσε Χνοῦβος Γνευρὸς, +} 
 ὅ ἐστιν Χρύσης Χρύσου υἱὸς 
 ἔτη κβ΄. 
 
 Θηβαΐων Αἰγυπτίων ιλ΄. 
 ἐβασίλευσε Ῥαύωσις, ὃ ἐστιν 
 ἀρχικράτωρ Tt ἔτη ay’. 
 
 Θηβαίων 
 ἐβασίλευσε Βιύρηςδ δ ἔτη i’. 
 
 Αἰγυπτίων ιδ΄. 
 
 * Τοῖγαρ Αμαχος 6ο.--τοιγάραμος Se. 
 
 1 ἄρις Jabl. 
 
 || ἐπίκωμος Β. Din.—aixomos A. 
 
 Ἐκ κόρης B. Din. 
 δὲ Βιύρις Go.—Aitpng Sc. 
 
 “an 
 The 6th of the Theban Egypt’ 
 
 kings was Toegaramachus Momchiri, 
 the Memphite, who is called a man 
 redundant in his members, 79 years. 
 
 The 7th of the Theban Egyptian 
 kings, Stoechus his son, who is Ares 
 the senseless, reigned 6 years, 
 
 The 8th of the Theban Egyptian 
 kings Gosormies, who is called Etesi- 
 pantus, reigned 30 years. 
 
 The 9th of the Theban Egyptian 
 kings Mares, his son, who is called 
 Heliodorus, 26 years. 
 
 The 10th of the Theban Egyptian 
 kings Anoyphis, which signifies a 
 common son, reigned 20 years. 
 
 The 11th of the Theban Egyptian 
 kings Sirius, which signifies the son 
 of the cheek, but according to others 
 Abascantus reigned 18 years. 
 
 The 12th of the Theban Egyptian 
 kings reigned Chnubus Gneurus, 
 which is Chryses the son of Chryses, 
 22 years. 
 
 The 13th of the Theban Egyptian 
 kings reigned Rauosis, which is Ar- 
 chicrator, 13 years. 
 
 The 14th of the Theban Egyptian 
 kings reigned Biyris, 10 years. 
 
 + Τίσανδρος Sc. 
 § ᾿Ανωύφης Go. 
 4 Σίροὶς Sc. 
 
 tt Χνεῦρος Sc. ΤΙ aeynxparwp B. 
 
86 
 
 Θηβαίων" ιε΄. ἐβασίλευσε 
 Σαῶφις Κωμαστὴς, 7 κατὰ δὲ 
 ἐνίους Χρηματιστὴς ἔτη χὰ. 
 
 Θηβαίων ic’. ἐβασιλευσε 
 Σαῶφις ἢ β'. ἔτη κζ΄. 
 
 Θηβαίων ιζ΄. ἐβασίλευσε 
 Μόσχερῆς ὃ Ἡλιόδοτος ἔτη 
 λα΄. 
 
 Θηβαίων ιη΄. ἐβασίλευσε 
 Μοῦσδις \| ἔτη λγ΄. 
 
 Θηβαίων ιδ΄. ἐβασίλευσε 
 
 Παμμῆς Ἵ ᾿Αρχονδὴς ἔτη 
 re ἘῈ 
 Θηβαίων κ΄. ἐβασίλευσεν 
 
 ᾿Απάππους +t μέγιστος, οὗτος 
 ὡς φασι παρὰ ὥραν μίαν ἐβα- 
 σίλευσεν ETN pe 
 
 Θηβαίων κα΄. ἐβασίλευσεν 
 ᾿Εχεσκοσοκάρας ἮΝ ἔτος α΄. 
 
 Θηβαίων κβ΄. ἐβασίλευσε 
 Νίτωκρις δ γυνὴ ἀντὶ τοῦ 
 ἀνδρὸς, ὅ ἐστιν ᾿Αϑηνᾷ Νικη- 
 
 / ” ’ 
 φόρος, ETN S + 
 
 Θηβαίων «γ΄. ἐβασίλευσε 
 Μυρταῖος ᾿Αμμωνόδοτος ἔτη 
 
 U 
 “Pp. 
 
 Θηβαίων κδ΄. ἐβασίλευσε 
 Θυοσιμάρης [|| κραταιὸς, ὃ 
 
 7 
 ἐστιν ἥλιος, ἔτη ιβ.’ 
 
 CANON OF THE KINGS OF THEBES. 
 
 The 15th of the Theban kings 
 
 _Saophis Comastes, or, according to 
 
 some, Chrematistes, reigned 29 years. 
 
 The 16th of the Theban kings 
 Saophis the second, reigned 27 years. 
 
 The 17th of the Theban kings, 
 Moscheres Heliodotus, reigned 31 
 years. 
 
 The 18th of the Theban kings, 
 Musthis, reigned 33 years. 
 
 The 19th of the Theban kings, 
 Pammes Archondes, reigned 35 
 years. 
 
 The 20th of the Theban kings, 
 Apappus Maximus, is said to have 
 reigned 100 years with the exception 
 of one hour. 
 
 The 2lst of the Theban kings, 
 Echescosocaras, reigned one year. 
 
 The 22nd of the Theban sovereigns 
 was a queen, who reigned instead of 
 her husband; she was named Nitocris 
 that is Athena the victorious, and 
 reigned 6 years. 
 
 The 23rd of the Theban kings, 
 Myrtzus Ammonodotus, reigned 22 
 years. 
 
 The 24th of the Theban kings, 
 Thyosimares the robust, who is called 
 the Sun, reigned 12 years. 
 
 * Din. inserts Alyurrfw»—Se. inserts it throughout.—Go. inserts βασίλεων, 
 
 + Κομαστὴς. Go. 
 § Μοσχέρις Go. 
 41 Méppos 6ο.---Πάμνος Se. 
 
 1 Σεναῶφις Sc.—Tevoaw Pie Go. 
 || Μοσϑῆς Din. Β, 
 
 ἈΚ wy’, Sc. t+ "Amammos Se. 
 
 ἯΙ "Eyeoxds ὁ κάρας Α.---ἰ Αχεσχὸς ᾽Οκαρας 6ο.--Ἔχεσκος ὁ Κάρας Sc. 
 
 §§ Νιτροκὶς Β. 
 
 1]! Οὐοσιμάρης Din. Jabl. 
 
CANON OF THE KINGS OF THEBES. 87 
 
 Θηβαίων ue. ἐβασίλευσε 
 Θύνιλλος, Ἐ ὃ ἐστιν αὐξήσας τὸ 
 πάτριον κράτος ἔτη η΄. 
 
 Θηβαΐων us. ἐβασίλευσε 
 Σεμφρουκράτης, ὅ ἐστιν ρα- 
 κλῆς ᾿Αρποκράτης ἔτη ιη΄. 
 
 Θηβαίων κζ΄. ἐβασίλευσε 
 Χουδὴρ Ταῦρος ἡ τύραννος ἔτη 
 Ὁ: 
 
 Θηβαίων un. ἐβασίλευσε 
 Μευρὴς Φιλόσκορος ἢ ἔτη ιβ΄. 
 
 Θηβαίων ud’. ἐβασίλευσε 
 Χωμαεφϑὰ ὃ 
 φαιστος || ἔτη ια΄. 
 
 Θηβαίων λ΄. 
 Σοικουνιόσοχος τύραννος ἔτη 
 ξ΄. 
 
 Θηβαίων ra’, ἐβασίλευσε 
 Πετεανυρῆς ** ἔτη ix’. 7 
 
 Θηβαίων λβ΄. ἐβασίλευσε 
 Σταμμενεμῆς tt β΄. ἔτη κγ΄. 
 
 κόσμος Φιλή- 
 
 ἐβασίλευσε 
 
 δὲ Θηβαίων λγ΄. ἐβασί- 
 λευσε Σιστοσιχερμης [{{| Ἥρα- 
 κλῆς κραταιὸς  Ἶ ἔτη νε΄. 
 
 Θηβαίων λδ'. ἐβασίλευσε 
 Μάρις *** ἔτη [y's 
 
 The 25th of the Theban kings, 
 Thinillus, which is the augmenter of 
 country’s strength, reigned 8 years. 
 
 The 26th of the Theban kings, 
 Semphrucrates, who is Hercules Har- 
 pocrates, reigned 18 years. 
 
 The 27th of the Theban kings, 
 Chuther Taurus the tyrant, 7 years. 
 
 The 28th of the Theban kings, 
 Meures Philoscorus, reigned 12 years. 
 
 The 29th of the Theban kings, 
 Chomaephtha Cosmus Philephestus, 
 reigned 11 years. 
 
 The 30th of the Theban kings, 
 Scecuniosochus the tyrant, reigned 60 
 years. 
 
 The 31st of the Theban kings, Pen- 
 teathyres, reigned 16 years. 
 
 The 32nd of the Theban kings, 
 Stamenemes the second, reigned 23 
 years. 
 
 The 33rd of the Theban kings, 
 Sistosichermes, Hercules the strong, 
 reigned 55 years. 
 
 The 34th of the Theban kings, 
 Maris, reigned 43 years. 
 
 * Θύριλλος Sc.—OleiAdos A.—SeShudos B. 
 
 + Χουσθερταῦρος Jabl. 
 ὃ Χομαεφϑὰ Go. 
 
 1 Μερῆς φιλοσοῷος Sc. 
 
 Πα! τη.-- --Φιλέφαιστος αο.---φιλέφεστος A. 
 
 4“ Ὀϊπᾶ. ---Συκούνιος ὀχυτύραννος Α.----Σοικούνιος ὁχυτύραννος Β.----Σκουνιόσοχος 
 τύραννος Sc.—Ayxobvies ᾿Οχυτύραννος Go. 
 
 ἘΞ Πεντεαϑυρὶς Go. 
 
 tt #8’. Go. τη. ΤΙ Σταμενέμης Go. 
 
 §§ Din. leaves the 33d vacant, and continues the rest as the 34th, &c. 
 
 ||| ᾿Ερτοσιχερμὴς Jabl. 
 
 qq A.B. Din.—Hpdxreos κράτος Go. 
 
 ἘΝ Μάρης B. 
 
88 CANON OF THE KINGS OF THEBES. 
 
 Θηβαίων λε΄. ἐβασίλευσε 
 Σιφόας, * ὁ καὶ Ἑρμῆς υἱὸς 
 Ἡφαίστου, ἔτη εἰ. 
 
 Θηβαίων ro’. ἐβασίλευσε 
 πῆ oe eles) CUM ἰδί. 
 
 Θηβαίων κζ΄. ἐβασίλευσε 
 
 Φρούρων, ἤτοι Νεῖλος; ἔτη ε΄. 
 
 Θηβαίων λη΄. ἐβασίευσε 
 ᾿Αμουδ άνταιος + ἔτη by’. 
 
 The 35th of the Theban kings, 
 Siphoas, which is Hermes. the son of 
 Hephestus, reigned 5 years, 
 
 The 36th of the Theban_ kings, 
 
 . » . reigned 14 years. ." 
 
 The 37th of the Theban kings, 
 Phruron, which is Nilus, reigned) 5 
 years. 
 
 The 38th of the Theban kings, 
 Amuthantzeus, reigned 63 years.— 
 Syne. Chron. 91. 96. 101. 104. 109. 
 123. 147. 
 
 * Σιφώασος Sc.—SiGwas Go. } ’ApoupSaios Se. 
 
89 
 
 THE OLD EGYPTIAN CHRONICLE. 
 
 
 
 ΦΕΡΕΤΑΙ γὰρ παρ Αἰγυπ- 
 τίοις παλαιὸν τι χρονογραφεῖον, 
 περιέχον λ' δυναστειῶν ἐν ye- 
 νεαὶς πάλιν pry’ χρόνον ἄπει- 
 paws 
 
 U ~ \ ~ 
 TPKE 5 πρῶτον μὲν τῶν Αὐρι- 
 
 ἐν μυριάσι τρισὶ καὶ 
 τῶν, δεύτερον δὲ τῶν Mec- 
 τραΐων, τρίτον δὲ Αἰγυπτίων, 
 οὕτω πως ἐπὶ λέξεως ᾿ ἔχον. 
 ΘΕΩΝ ΒΑΣΙΛΕΙ͂Α 
 
 Κατὰ τὸ παλαιὸν χρονικόν. 
 
 Ἡφαίστου χρόνος οὐκ ἔστι 
 διὰ τὸ νυχτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας ad- 
 τὸν ὃ φαίνειν. 
 
 Ἥλιος Ἡφαίστου ἐβασί- 
 λευσεν ἐτῶν μυριάδας τρεῖς. 
 
 Ἔπειτα Κρόνος, φησὶ, καὶ 
 οἱ, λοιποὶ πάντες Deor δώδεκα 
 
 ἐβασιλευσαν ἔτη, ,γ TR) πδ΄. 
 
 * χρόνων ἀπείρων Go. 
 
 Amonc the Egyptians there is a cer- 
 tain tablet called the Old Chronicle, 
 containing thirty dynasties in 113 
 descents, during the long period of 
 36525} years.. The first. series of 
 princes. was that. of the Aurite ;. the 
 second was that of the Mestreans ; 
 the third of Egyptians. It runs .as 
 follows : 
 
 THE REIGN OF THE GODS, 
 According to the Old Chronicle. 
 
 To Hephestus is assigned no time 
 as he is apparent both by night and 
 day. 
 
 Helius 
 reigned three myriads of years. 
 
 the son of Hephaestus 
 
 Then Cronus and the other twelve 
 divinities reigned 3984. 
 
 + This number is also mentioned by Jamblichus, in connexion with Egyptian 
 history, as the number of the Hermaic books, perhaps allowing a book to each year. 
 
 Τὰς μὲν ody ὅλας Ἑρμῆς ἐν ταῖς 
 δισμυρίαι; βίβλοις, ὡς Σέλευκος 
 ἀπεγράψατο" ἢ ταῖς τρισμυρίαις 
 τε καὶ ἑξακισχιλίαις καὶ πεντα- 
 κοσίαις καὶ εἴκοσι πέντε, ὡς Νῖ α- 
 νεϑῶς ἱστορεῖ τελέως ἀνέδειξε. 
 
 Ζ λεξέων A. 
 
 All which Hermes wrote in 20,000 books, 
 according to the account of Seleucus; but 
 Manetho, in his history, relates that they were 
 completed in 36,525.—De Myst. § 8. c. 1. 
 
 ὃ οὐτῶν B. 
 
90 
 
 Ἔπειτα juideo: βασιλεῖς 
 
 3 Av Ul 
 ὀκτὼ eT σιζ. 
 
 ? ΄, 
 Καὶ μετ᾽ αὐτοὺς γενεαὶ τε 
 - / 
 Κυνικοῦ κύκλου ἀνεγράφησαν 
 > ΤΑΝ, ͵ 
 ἐν ἔτεσι UY. 
 7 ~ U 
 Eita Τανιτῶν ic δυνασ- 
 / ~ , » ~ 4’ 
 Tela, γενεῶν η΄, ἐτῶν pF, 
 Ν 
 Πρὸς 
 
 ~ ~ Vv ~ , 
 Μεμφιτῶν, γενεῶν ὃ, ἐτῶν py. 
 
 οἷς ιζ΄ δυναστεία 
 
 > ‘ 
 Med οὺς ιη δυναστεία Μεμ- 
 ~ ~ / » ὦ ‘ 
 φιτῶν, γενεῶν id, ἐτῶν τμή « 
 Ui / / 
 "Επειτα ιδ΄ δυναστεία Ator- 
 -“ , , 
 πολιτῶν, γενεῶν ε΄, ἐτῶν ρήδ΄, 
 ͵ / 
 Εἶτα x δυναστεία Διοσ- 
 - - - , "" ~ ‘ 
 πολιτῶν, γενεῶν ἡ) ἐτῶν KY « 
 " ͵ 
 "Ἔπειτα κα δυναστεία Τα- 
 -“ ~ ‘ “ς“ Ὁ , 
 νιτῶν, γενεῶν ς΄, ἐτῶν ρχα΄. 
 ‘+ 
 Εἶτα κβ΄ δυναστεία Τανι- 
 ~ ~ ' .™ , 
 τῶν, γενεῶν γ, ἐτῶν μη. 
 
 * 
 
 ᾽ ΄ 7 
 Ἐπειτα ἢ uy δυναστείᾳ 
 
 Διοσπολιτῶν, γενεῶν β΄, ἐτῶν 
 , 
 iv, 
 ἘΣ / “ 
 Εἶτα κὃ δυναστεία Σαϊ- 
 -" - , » "Ὁ" / 
 τῶν, γενεῶν γ, ἐτῶν μδ΄. 
 Ce all , 
 Πρὸς οἷς κε΄ δυναστεία Αἰ- 
 Q/ ~ of sw δ 
 “ιόπων; γενεῶν γ΄, ἐτῶν pd. 
 a ‘ 
 Mes ats uc δυναστεία 
 ~ ~ » ~ 
 Μεμφιτῶν, γενεῶν ζ, ἐτῶν 
 / 
 pot . 
 Ἂς 
 Καὶ μετὰ τὰς ul δυνασ- 
 ~ , πὸ Η 
 τείας Περσῶν ε΄, ἐτῶν ρκδ΄. ἡ 
 
 ἘΠ 
 
 * Go. omits this. 
 
 THE OLD EGYPTIAN CHRONICLE. 
 
 Next in order are the demigods, 
 in number eight, who reigned 217 
 years. 
 
 After these. are enumerated 15 ge- 
 nerations of the Cynic cycle, which 
 extend to 443 years. 
 
 The 16th Dynasty is of the Tanites, 
 eight descents, which lasted 190 years. 
 
 17th Memphites, 4 in descent, 
 
 103 years. 
 
 18th Memphites, 14 in descent, 
 348 years. 
 
 19th Diospolites, 5 in descent, 
 194 years. 
 
 20th Diospolites. 8 in descent, 
 228 years. 
 
 2ist Tanites, .. 6 in descent, 
 121 years. 
 
 22nd Tanites, .. 9 in descent, 
 48 years. 
 
 28rd Diospolites, 2 in descent, 
 19 years. 
 
 24th Saites, .. 8 in descent, 
 44. years. 
 
 25th Ethiopians, 3 in descent, 
 44 years. 
 
 26th Memphites, 7 in descent, 
 177 years. 
 
 27th Persians, .. 
 124 years. 
 28th 
 
 5 in descent, 
 
 f αὐτοὺς κζ΄ δυναστεία Περσῶν γενεῶν Sc.—robrovs κζ΄ δυναστεία Go.—ras 
 
 xf’ Β--κζ. A, 
 
 1 Dind. leaves no space. 
 

 
 THE OLD EGYPTIAN CHRONICLE. 
 
 Ν , / 
 Ἔπειτα x9 δυναστεία Ta- 
 ~ ~ 2 ὦ «Ql 
 νιτῶν, yevedv....eTOY AN. 
 Ν \ ~/ 
 Καὶ ἐπὶ πάσαις ἃ δυνασ- 
 , , ΓΟ ᾿» Ul 
 τεία Τανίτου ἑνὸς, ἐτὴ (ἡ - 
 ~ 7 
 Τὰ πάντα ὁμοῦ τῶν λ΄ δυ- 
 " ΄ \ ’ 
 ναστειῶν ern My καὶ ςῴκε. 
 Ht ly ~ > , wv 
 αὐτα ayahvoueva, εἰ- 
 * / 
 Tow” μεριζόμενα παρὰ τὰ 
 oo ” ΄ 
 javka ἔτη εἴκοσι, πεντάκις, 
 "ἢ ’ \o¢ 
 τὴν map Αἰγυπτίοις χαὶ Ἕλ- 
 λησιν ἀποκατάστασιν τοῦ Ζω- 
 / ~ 
 διωκοῦ μυδολογουμένην δηλοῖ, 
 nw > “ἢ ‘XN sa, ~ > ~ 
 τοῦτ ἐστι τὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτοῦ 
 / >» A > fee x 
 σημείου ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ σημεῖον, 
 aos ~ \ Led , 
 ὃ ἐστι πρῶτον λεπτὸν τῆς πρώ- 
 γ 4 ’ὔ 
 τῆς μοίρας ἰσημερινοῦ ζωδίου, 
 Hs , : νὼ 
 Κριοῦ λεγομένου παρ αὐτοῖς, 
 ef ee ~ » - 
 ὥσπερ καὶ ἐν τοῖς Γενικοῖς τοῦ 
 ε ~ ‘\ r 
 Ἑρμοῦ καὶ ἐν ταῖς Κυραννίσι 
 
 βίβλοις εἴρηται. 
 
 91 
 
 29th Tanites, Ac in descent, 
 39 years. 
 
 30th a Tanite, .. 1 in descent, 
 18 years. 
 
 In all, 30 Dynasties, and 36525 
 years. 
 
 Which number of years, resolved 
 and divided into its constituent parts, 
 that is to say, 25 times 1461 years, 
 shows that it relates to the fabled 
 periodical revolution of the Zodiac 
 among the Egyptians and Greeks ; 
 that is, its revolution from ἃ par- 
 ticular point to the same again, which 
 point is the first minute of the first 
 degree of that equinoctial sign which 
 they call the Ram, as it is explained in 
 the Genesis of Hermes and in the 
 Cyrannian books.—Syncel. Chron. 51. 
 —Euseb. Chron, 6. 
 
 FROM CASTOR. 
 
 AAGyPrioRUM regnum inveni- 
 mus vetustissimum omnium reg- 
 norum: cujus initium sub Ma- 
 nethono dicitur memoramus 
 scribere. 
 
 Primum Deorum, qui ab ipsis 
 
 scribuntur faciam regna sic: 
 
 * ἤγουν Vulg.—iro Sc. 
 
 Or all kingdoms we find that 
 of the Egyptians to be the most 
 ancient. Of whose beginning 
 we purpose to write according 
 to the relation of Manetho. 
 The first dynasty was that of 
 the Gods, who are classed by 
 themselves ; and I reckon their 
 
 reigns thus : 
 
 + κυραννῆσι B. 
 
oT: THE OLD EGYPTIAN CHRONICLE. 
 
 Tfestum dicunt quidam Deum 
 regnare in Aigypto annos sex- 
 centos LXXx, 
 
 Post hune Solem Ifesti an- 
 nos LXXVII. 
 
 Post istum Osinosirim annos 
 GCCCXX. 
 
 Post hune Oron Stoliarechum 
 aniios XXVIII. 
 
 Post hunc Typhona annos 
 XLV. 
 
 Colliguntur Deorum regna 
 anni miile px. 
 
 Deinceps Mitheorum regna 
 816 : 
 
 Prota Anubes Amusim, qui 
 etiam /Egyptiorum scripturas 
 composuit annos LXxXxIil. 
 
 Post hune Apion Grammati- 
 cus, qui secundum Inachum in- 
 terpretabatur....annos LXXvIt 
 quem sub Argios initio re- 
 gnaverunt.* 
 
 Post heee Ecyniorum} reges 
 interpretavit Imitheus vocans 
 et ipsos, annos duo miilia Ὁ, 
 fortissimos vocans. 
 
 Heec finis de primo Tomo 
 
 Some say the God Ifestus 
 reigned in Egypt 680 years. | 
 
 After him the Sun, the son 
 of Ifestus, 77 years. 
 
 After him Osinosiris, 420 
 years. 
 
 After him Oros Stoliarchus, 
 28 years. 
 
 After him Typhon, 45 years. 
 
 The sum of the reigns of the 
 Gods amounts to 1550 years. 
 
 Then succeeds the kingdom 
 ofthe Demi-gods, thus: 
 
 First reigned Anubes Amu- 
 sim, who composed the writings 
 of the Egyptians, 83 years. 
 
 After him Apion Gramma- 
 ticus, who reigned 77 years. 
 In his reign commenced the 
 kingdom of Argos, under Ina- 
 chus.* 
 
 Afterwards the kings of the 
 Ecynii,+ by whom must be un- 
 derstood the Demi-gods. They 
 reigned 2100 years. 
 
 This is the end of the first 
 
 * This and the next passage are so barbarous and obscure that the transla- 
 
 tion I have given is merely conjectural. 
 nexion with the following from Tatianus. 
 
 I suspect this passage has some con- 
 ᾿Απίων ὁ γραμματικός φησι δ᾽ ὅτι κα- 
 
 τάσκαψε τὴν Αὔαριν "Αμωσις κατὰ τὸν ᾿Αργεῖον γενόμενος “Ivayov.—Eus. Pr. X. 
 
 + These Ecynii are manifestly the same with νέκυας of the Dynasties of 
 Manetho and the Manes of the preceding, all which appear to be no other thana 
 corruption of the fifteen generations of the Cynic Cycle se’ κυνεκοῦ in the original 
 
 of the old Chronicle, p. 90. 
 
THE OLD EGYPTIAN CHRONICLE. 92 
 
 Manethoni habens tempora an- 
 norum duo millia c. 
 
 Mineus et pronepotes ipsius 
 septem regnaverunt annos 
 ccLul. 
 
 Regnaverunt et aliorum octo 
 annos cccit. 
 
 Necherocheus, et aliorum 
 octo annos ccxIy. 
 
 Similiter aliorum septende- 
 cim annos ccxIv. 
 
 Similiter aliorum _ viginti 
 unus annos ccLvit. 
 
 Othoi et’ aliorum septem 
 annos ccill. 
 
 Similiter et aliorum quatuor- 
 decim annos cx. 
 
 Similiter et aliorum viginti 
 annos ccccrx. 
 
 Similiter et aliorum septem 
 annos CCIv. 
 
 Potestas Diopolitanorum ann. 
 IX. 
 
 Potestas Bubastanorum ann. 
 CLI. 
 
 Potestas Tanitorum ann. 
 CLXXXIV. 
 
 Potestas Sebennitorum ann. 
 CCXXIV. 
 
 Potestas Memphitorum ann. 
 cccXVII. 
 
 Potestas [liopolitorum ann. 
 CCXXI. 
 
 Potestas Ermupolitorum ann. 
 CCLE. 
 
 Usque ad septimam deci- 
 
 which 
 contains a period of 2100 years. 
 
 volume of Manetho, 
 
 Mineus and seven of his de- 
 scendants reigned 253 years. 
 
 Then reigned eight others 
 302 years. 
 
 Necherocheus, and _ eight 
 others, reigned 214 years. 
 
 Likewise seventeen others, 
 214 years. 
 
 Likewise twenty-one others, 
 258 years. 
 
 Othoi and seven others, 203 
 years. 
 
 Likewise fourteen others, 
 140 years. 
 
 Likewise twenty others, 409 
 years. 
 
 Likewise seven others, 204 
 years. 
 
 Dynasty of Diospolites 9 
 years. 
 
 Dynasty of Bubastites 153 
 years. 
 
 Dynasty of Tanites 184 
 years. 
 
 Dynasty of Sebennites 224 
 years. 
 
 Dynasty of Memphites 
 years. 
 
 Dynasty of Iliopolites 221 
 years. 
 
 Dynasty of Ermupolites 260 
 years. 
 
 The second volume enume- 
 
92: THE OLD EGYPTIAN CHRONICLE. 
 
 mam potestatem secundum scri- 
 bitur totum, ut docet, numerum 
 habentem annos mille quin- 
 gentos xx.* 
 
 Hae sunt potestates Hgypti- 
 orum. 
 
 rates to the 17th dynasty and 
 contains a period of 1520 years. 
 
 These are the Dynasties of 
 Egypt. 
 
 FROM EUSEBIUS. 
 
 Primus homo apud A‘gyptios 
 Hephestus qui ignis inventor 
 ipsis fuit. 
 
 A quo Sol. 
 
 (Post quem Agathodemon. 
 
 Post)* quem Cronus. 
 
 Post hunce Osiris. 
 
 Ac deinde Typhon frater 
 Osiridis. 
 
 Post quem Orus Osiridis et 
 Isidis filius. 
 
 Egyptii primi hi dominati 
 sunt. 
 
 ‘Post quos per successionem 
 protractum est regnum usque 
 ad Bitem, in spatio annorum 
 myriadis triumque millium et 
 nonagentorum, juxta annos lu- 
 nares, triginta inquam dierum 
 numerum enim mensem unum, 
 illi annum vocabant. 
 
 Tue first man according to the 
 Egyptians was Hephestus, who 
 was the inventor of fire. 
 
 From him descended the Sun. 
 
 (After whom Agathodemon. 
 
 After) whom Cronus. 
 
 Then Osiris. 
 
 And then Typhon, the bro- 
 ther of Osiris. 
 
 After whom was Orus, the 
 son of Osiris and Isis. 
 
 These were the first Egyp- 
 tian kings. 
 
 After them the empire de- 
 scended by a long succession 
 to Bites, through a lapse of 
 13,900 years, reckoned, I say, 
 in lunar years of thirty days 
 to each : for even now they call 
 the month a year. 
 
 * This passage in the Armenian is between parentheses, and in what we 
 
 might call italics. Has it been interpolated or omitted? I have replaced the true 
 
 names from the Armenian: Aucher has given them Vulcanus, Saturnus, &e. 
 
 
 
THE OLD EGYPTIAN CHRONICLE, 
 
 Post Deos regnavit gens 
 Semi-deorum annis mccty. 
 
 Atque item alii reges domi- 
 nati sunt annis Mpcccxvu. 
 
 Post quos alii xxx reges 
 Memphites annis mpccxc. 
 
 Post eos alii Thynites x reges 
 annis cccL. 
 
 Ac deinde Manium et Semi- 
 deorum regnum annis MMMMM 
 DCCCXIII. 
 
 Simul omnes anni recensen- 
 tur, myrias (et) mille: qui 
 etiam lunares sunt, scilicet 
 menstrul. 
 
 Computantur simul omnes 
 anni lunares quos Agyptii re- 
 ferunt fuisse Deorum et Semi- 
 deorum atque Manium, due 
 myriades, quatuor millia et 
 Dccce. 
 
 93 
 
 After the Gods, a race of 
 Demi-gods reigned 1255 years. 
 
 Then reigned other kings 
 1817 years. 
 
 After them thirty Memphite 
 kings, 1790. 
 
 Then ten Thynite kings, 350 
 years. 
 
 Then came the kingdom of 
 the Manes 
 5813. 
 
 The number of years alto- 
 to 11,000; 
 which also are lunar years, that 
 
 and Demi-gods, 
 
 gether amounts 
 is to say, months. 
 All the lunar years, which 
 the Egyptians allow to the 
 reigns of the Gods, the Demi- 
 gods, and the Manes, 
 24,900.—Eu. An. 200. 
 
 are 
 
EGYPTIAN DYNASTIES OF 
 MANETHO. 
 
 DYNASTY OF THE DEMIGODS. 
 
 Πρώτη δυναστεία. ἢ 
 
 ͵ 
 Αἰγυπτίων α΄. ἐβασίλευσεν 
 , f of 
 Ἥφαιστος ἔτη Wd. ἥμισυ 
 ν ͵ hg -ἶΨ i 
 καὶ τέσσαρας ἡμέρας. 
 Αἰγυπτίων β΄. ἐβασίλευσεν 
 δ 
 Ἥλιος Ἡφαίστου ery ast 
 ΄ 
 Αἰγυπτίων γ΄. ἐβασίλευσεν 
 Yj 
 ᾿Αγαϑοδαίμων ἔτη vo. καὶ 
 ἥμισυ καὶ δέκα ἡμέρας. ὃ 
 Αἰγυπτίων ὃ. ἐβασίλευσεν 
 Y 
 f ‘ 
 Kpovos ἔτη μ΄. καὶ ἥμισυ. || 
 , 
 Αἰγυπτίων ε΄. ἐβασίλευσεν 
 > Ui 
 "Ooipis καὶ Ἶσις ἔτη λε΄. 
 ρις ς 
 ft Ui 
 Αἰγυπτίων ς΄. ἐβασίλευσεν 
 a 
 PEE HED ancy ἃ 
 Αἰγυπτίων ζ΄. ἐβασίλευσεν 
 " 
 Τύφων ἔτη uN. 
 Αἰγυπτίων η. ἐβασίλευσεν 
 
 ρος Ἵ ἡμιδέεος ἔτη κε΄. 
 
 First dynasty. 
 
 The ist of the Egyptian kings was 
 Hephestus, who reigned 724 years 
 and a half and 4 days. 
 
 , The 2nd was Helius, the son of 
 Hephestus, 86 years. 
 
 3rd, Agathdzmon, .,who reigned 
 
 56 years and a half and 10 days, 
 
 4th, Cronus, 40 years and a half. 
 5th, Osiris and Isis, 35 years. 
 θυ, o/c: Vale εν years. 
 7th, Typhon, 29 years. 
 
 8th, Orus, the demigod, 25 years. 
 
 * A. places these words after Hephestus. 
 1 ἀο.---ψκδ _ 8’. i. e. 724, 3-4. Din. 1 Go.—z' ς΄ Din. i. 6. 80, 1-6. 
 § Go.—vs/__ sf’. i. e. 56 7-12. Din. 
 
 § μ΄. Din. A. 
 
 4“ Ogos Go. 
 
a 
 
 EGYPTIAN KINGS. 95 
 
 Αἰγυπτίων ἃ'. ἐβασίλευσεν 9th, Ares, the demigod, 23 years. 
 γΆρης ἡμίδεος ἔτη wy. 
 
 Αἰγυπτίων 6. ἐβασίλευσεν 10th, Anubis, the demigod, 17 
 ἤΆνουβις ἡμίϑεος ἔτη ιζ'. years. 
 
 Αἰγυπτίων ια΄. ἐβασίλευσεν 11th, Heracles, the demigod, 15 
 Ἡράκλῆς ἡμίϑεος ἔτη τε. years. 
 
 Αἰγυπτίων ιβ΄. ἐβασίλευσεν 12th, Apollo, the demigod, 25 
 ᾿Απολλῶν Ἐ ἡμίδεος ἔτη xe. ΥΘΔ18. 
 
 Αἰγυπτίων ιγ΄. ἐβασίλευσεν 13th, Ammon, the demigod, 30 
 
 ᾿Αμμὼν ἡμίδεος ἔτη λ΄. years. 
 Αἰγυπτίων ιδ΄, tBacidrevcey 14th, Tithoes, the demigod, 27 
 Τιδοὴς ἡμίϑεος ἔτη χζ΄. years. 
 
 Αἰγυπτίων ιε΄. ἐβασίλευσεν 15th, Sosus, the demigod, 32 years. 
 Σῶσος ἡμίϑεος ἔτη AP’. 
 Αἰγυπτίων is’ ἐβασίλευσεν 16th, Zeus, the demigod, 20 years. 
 Ζεὺς ἡμίδεος ἔτη x’. —Syncel. Chron. 19.—Euseb. Chron. 
 fits 
 
 * ἀπολῶ Α.---᾿᾿Απολλῶ Go. 
 
 
 
THE EGYPTIAN DYNASTIES OF 
 MANETHO. 
 
 THE FIRST DYNASTY. 
 
 AFRIC. SCAL. 
 META νέκυας τοὺς ἡμι- Arrer the dead demigods the first 
 δέους πρώτη βασιλείᾳ κατω- dynasty consisted of eight kings. 
 
 ρισμεῖται βασιλέων ὀκτὼ. 
 
 al. Ὧν πρῶτος Μήνης Θει- 1. The first was Menes the Thi- 
 virng® éBactrevcey étn EB’. nite; he reigned 62 years, and 
 ὃς ὑπὸ ἱπποποτάμου ἡ διαρπα- perished by a wound received from 
 yels Sreprcpy. an hippopotamus. 
 
 Bl. "Αϑωδις υἱὸς ἔτη νζ΄. ὃ 2. Athothis, his son, reigned 57 
 
 * Sc.—Oecesvirns Go. } Irmordpov Go. 
 
 N.B.—The first column contains the dynasties of Manetho according to 
 Africanus, from the text of Dindorf: the names and paragraphs included between 
 the parentheses are the variations which occur in the list of Scaliger. The 
 third column contains the dynasties according to Eusebius, from the text of the 
 Editor of the Armenian, who for the most part has followed Goar: the varia- 
 tions are those of Scaliger. The fourth column is the Latin translation of the 
 Armenian, with the variations from the fragments of the old Latin version of 
 Hieronymus. 
 

 
 THE EGYPTIAN DYNASTIES OF 
 MANETHO. 
 
 THE FIRST DYNASTY. 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. 
 META νέκυας καὶ τοὺς ἡμι- 
 δέους, Πρώτην δυναστείαν κα- 
 ταριωμοῦσι βασιλέων ὀκτώ. 
 ὧν πρῶτος γέγονε Μήνης, ὃς 
 διασήμως ἀυτῶν ἡγήσατο. ἀφ᾽ 
 οὗ τοὺς ἐξ ἑκάστου γένους βα- 
 ἀναγράψαμεν; 
 
 z ~ wt 
 ὧν 7 διαδοχὴ τοῦτον ἔχει τὸν 
 
 σιλεύσαντας 
 
 τρόπον. 
 ,͵ 
 α΄. Μήνης Θεινίτης; + καὶ 
 ͵ Yi 
 οἱ τούτου ἀπόγονοι (ιζ΄, ἐν ἄλ- 
 a ~ 
 ho δὲ) ζ΄, ὃν Ἡρόδοτος Μῆνα 
 ae 2 , " 
 ὠνόμασεν; ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτεσιν 
 oe ε , ΄, 
 ξ΄. οὗτος ὑπερόριον στρατείαν 
 ἐποιήσατο, καὶ ἔνδοξος ἐκρίϑη, 
 
 ΠΡ 
 ὕπο 
 
 Ἵ δὲ Ἱπποποτάμου ὃ ἦρ- 
 πάσϑη. 
 
 β΄. "ASwodis || 6 τούτον 
 
 * ἀναγραψαμένων Go.—Sc. 
 
 { Go. inserts ἴσπου.---Α, 
 πον... -2 08. 
 
 § ἱποτάμου Β. 
 
 ARMEN. HIERON. 
 Post Manes et Semideos, Primam 
 Dynastiam vill. regum_percensent. 
 Quorum primus fuit Memes, qui nem- 
 pe prefulgens inter eos, dominatio- 
 nem obtinuit: a quo quaslibet regum 
 generationes singillatim describemus : 
 
 quorum successio ita prorsus est. 
 
 1. Memes Thynites, et hujus vi. 
 filii, quem Herodotus Mina nuncu- 
 Hic vel 
 
 ultra regionis limites cum exercitu 
 
 pavit, regnavit annis Xxx. 
 
 progreditur, et illustris famosusque 
 habetur ; atque ab hippopotamo rap- 
 tus est. 
 
 π. Athotis hujus filius obtinuit 
 
 + Θενίτης Go. 
 ἵσπου.----Β, immov,—and Din. [/rov] between 
 
 || “ASwSis Din. 
 
96 MANETHO’S DYNASTIES 
 
 AFRIC. SCAL. 
 τὰ ἐν Μέμφει βασίλεια οἶκο- 
 δομήσας" οὗ φέρονται βίβλοι 
 
 > \ #2 Ν An 
 ἀνατομικαιν aT poc yap ἣν: 
 
 γ. Κενκένης (Κενικένης) 
 υἱὸς ἔτη Aa. 
 
 δ΄, Οὐενέφης (᾿Ἐνέφης) υἱὸς 
 ἔτη κγ'. ἐφ᾽ οὗ λιμὸς κατέσχε 
 τὴν Αἴγυπτον μέγας. οὗτος τὰς 
 περὶ ἡ ΚΚωχώμην ἤγειρε πυρα- 
 μίδας. 
 
 ε΄. Οὐσαφαῖδος (Σαφαῖς- 
 δος) υἱὸς ἔτη κ΄. 
 
 ς΄. Μιεβιδὸς υἱὸς ἔτη uct 
 
 ζ΄. Σεμέμψης (Σέμεμψις) 
 υἱὸς ἔτη by « ἐφ᾽ οὗ propa με- 
 γίστη κατέσχε τὴν Αἴγυπτον. 
 
 η΄. Βιηνεχὴς ὃ υἱὸς ἔτη κς΄. 
 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη avy. 
 
 years ; he built the palaces at Mem- 
 phis, and left the anatomical books, 
 for he was a physician. 
 
 3. Cencenus, his son, reigned 31 
 years. 
 
 4. Venephes, his son, reigned 23 
 In his time a great plague 
 raged through Egypt. He raised the 
 pyramids near Cochome. 
 
 years. 
 
 5. Usapheedus, his son, reigned 20 
 years. 
 6. Miebidus, his son, 26 years. 
 
 7. Semempses, his son, reigned 18 
 years. In his reign a terrible pesti- 
 
 lence afflicted Egypt. 
 
 8. Bienaches, his son, reigned 26 
 years. 
 
 The whole number of years amount- 
 ed to 253. 
 
 THE SECOND DYNASTY. 
 
 Δευτέρα δυναστείᾳ Θεινι- 
 
 » / Ao 
 τῶν βασιλέων ἐννέα 
 
 Of nine Thinite kings. 
 
 * B. in m. has ἰαγόρου βασιλέως. 
 
 + παρὰ Go. omitting τὰς. Η 
 
 § Βιηναχὴς Go. 
 
 Σεμέμψις Go. 
 
OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 97 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. ARMEN. HIERON. 
 
 υἱὸς ἦρξεν ἔτεσι κζ΄. καὶ τὰ [regnum]* annis xxvii. et in Memphi 
 
 ἐν Μέμφι + βασίλεια gxodi- urbe regiam eedificavit; qui et me- 
 
 μήσεν, ἰατρικήν τε ἐξήσκησεν, dicinam exercuit, atque de modo cor- 
 
 καὶ βίβλους ἀνατομικὰς συν- pora dissecandi libros conscripsit. 
 
 , 
 ἔγραψεν. 
 γ΄. Κενκένης 6. τούτου vids ur. Cencenis istius filius, ΔΠΠΪ5 
 ἔτη AD. XeNIK: 
 ‘ ἐν ὅν, pails V hi i : } 
 δ΄, Οὐενέφης (Οὐενέφρης) Iv. Vavenephis, annis XLII. Cujus 
 
 ἔτη μβ΄. ἐφ᾽ οὗ λιμὸς κατέσχε tempore fames regionem occupavit, 
 qui et pyramidas ad Chovonem [vel, 
 
 
 
 τὴν χώραν, ὃς καὶ 'τὰς πυρα- 
 μίδας τὰς περὶ Κωχώνην! juxta Choe villam] erexit. 
 
 
 
 ἤγειρεν. 
 ε΄. Οὐσαφαὴς ἔτη κ΄. (ε.) y. Usaphais, annis xx, 
 
 ς΄. Νιεβὲς ὃ (Νιεβὴς) ἔτη vi. Niebais, annis ΧΧΥΙ. 
 “Se 
 ζ΄. Levéndys (Zeueulys)|| vit. Mempses, annis xvur. Sub 
 
 ἔτη unl. ἐφ᾽ ob πολλὰ παρά- quo plurima facinora facta sunt, 
 
 σημα ἐγένετο, καὶ μεγίστη Maximeeque corruptiones. 
 
 propa. ὌΣ 
 η΄. Οὐβιένδης Ἵ (Οὐβίεν- vi. Vibethis, annis xxv1. 
 wv , 
 τῆς, ern κς «ἘΞ 
 Οἱ δὲ πάντες ἐβασίλευσαν Omnes simul regnaverunt annos 
 
 ἔτη σνβ'. (σιβ'.) ccLil. 
 
 THE SECOND DYNASTY. 
 
 Advtepa δυναστεία βασι- Secunda dynastia regum ΙΧ. 
 
 Ἀέων a. 
 
 * The words contained between crotchets [ ] are so placed in the original 
 translation: the variations of Hieron. are between parentheses ( ). 
 
 + Μέμφει Go. m.—Sc. 
 
 1 Κωχώμην Din. Β.---Κοχώνης Sc.—Cho oppidum Lat. Qy. Xd χώμην 
 or χώρην Ed. Arm. 
 
 § Νιεβάης Din. —weBais B.—Niebaés Lat. || A. B. Din. 
 
 4 Bless B. ** Jackson allows only 16. 
 
 ο 
 
98 MANETHO’S DYNASTIES 
 
 AFRIC. SCAL. 
 
 a’. Ὧν πρῶτος Βοηδὸς * 
 ἔτη λη΄. ἐφ᾽ οὗ χάσμα ἦ κατὰ 
 Βούβαστον ἐγένετο, καὶ ἀπώ- 
 λοντὸ πολλοί. 
 
 β΄. Kaseyoot ἔτη λδ΄. 
 ἐφ᾽ οὗ οἱ βόες Amis ἐν Μέμ- 
 φει ὃ καὶ Myetic|| ἐν Ἡλιου- 
 πόλει] καὶ ὁ Μενδήσιος τρά- 
 γος ἐνομίσϑησαν εἶναι Seal. 
 
 γ΄. Βίνωδρις ἔτη μζ΄. ἐφ᾽ 
 οὗ ἐκρίϑη τὰς γυναῖκας βασι- 
 λείας γέρας ἔχειν. 
 
 δ΄, Ὑλὰς ἔτη ιζ΄. 
 
 ε΄. Levevys ἔτη μα΄. 
 
 ς΄. Χαίρης ἔτη itl. 
 
 ζ΄. Νεφερχέρης ἔτη xe. 
 ἐφ᾽ οὗ μυδϑεύεται τὸν Νεῖλον 
 μέλιτι κεκραμένον ἡμέρας ἕν- 
 dena ῥυῆναι. 
 
 ἘΞ (γ. Σέσωχρις ἔτη μη» 
 ὃς ὕψος εἶχε πηχῶν εἰ, πλάτος 
 γ- 
 
 δ΄, Χενερὴς (Κενέρης) ἔτη 
 ν΄, 
 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη τβ'.) 
 
 * Βῶχος Go. m. 
 
 1 καὶ ἔχως Α.--καιαχῶς Go. 
 
 || Sc.—Mnyveos Go. 
 
 1. Boethus the ‘first reigned 38 
 years. During his reign a chasm of 
 the earth opened near Bubastus, and 
 many persons perished. 
 
 2. Ceechos reigned 39 years. Un- 
 der him the bulls Apis in Memphis, 
 and Mnevis in Heliopolis, and the 
 Mendesian goat, were appointed to 
 be gods. 
 
 3. Binothris reigned 47 years. In 
 his time it was determined that women 
 might hold the imperial government. 
 
 4. Tlas reigned 17 years. 
 
 5. Sethenes reigned 41 years. 
 
 6. Cheres 17 years. 
 
 7. Nephercheres 25 years. In his 
 time it is said the Nile flowed with 
 honey during eleven days. 
 
 8. Sesochris 48 years. His height 
 was 5 cubits and breadth 8.7 
 
 9. Cheneres 30 years. 
 
 Altogether 302 years. 
 
 1 ἀφ' οὗ φάσμα Go. 
 ὃ Μέμφι 6ο.---μέμφι Β. 
  Ιλιουπόλει Go. 
 
 ** Syncellus gives the two following as from Eusebius, but there is much 
 reason to suppose that they properly belong to the list of Africanus. 
 tt Three palms. Eu. Ar.—5 cubits and 3 hand breadths high. Jack. 
 
 ea 
 

 
 OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. 
 α΄. Βῶχος," ἐφ᾽ ob χάσ- 
 μα κατὰ Βούβαστον + ἐγέ- 
 
 ΜΝ Ν 
 YETO καὶ πολλοὶ ἀπώλλοντο. 
 
 β΄. Mes ὃν καὶ (δέυτερος) 
 Χοὺς, f ὅτε καὶ “Amc, καὶ ὁ 
 Μνεύις ὃ ἀλλὰ καὶ ὁ Μενδή- 
 
 σιος τράγος Jeol ἐνομίσϑησαν. 
 
 γ΄. Βιύφης; (Βιύφις) ἐφ᾽ οὗ 
 ἐκρίϑη καὶ τὰς γυναῖχας βα- 
 σιλείας γέρας ἔχειν. 
 
 δ΄. εἰ, ς!, Καὶ μετὰ τούτους 
 ἄλλοι τρεῖς, ἐφ᾽ ὧν οὐδὲν πα- 
 ράσημον ἐγένετο. 
 
 ζ΄. Ἐπὶ τοῦ ἐβδόμου μυ- 
 δεύεται Νεῖλον μέλιτι κεκραμι- 
 
 μένον ἡμέρας ἕνδεκα ῥνῆναι. 
 
 η΄. MeY ὃν Σέσωχρις ἔτη 
 Be ὃς λέγεται γεγογέναι 
 ὕψος πηχῶν ε΄. παλαιστῶν γ΄. 
 
 \ , 
 
 τὸ μέγεδος. 
 
 δ΄. Ἐπὶ δὲ τοὺς ἐννέα οὐδὲν 
 ἀξιομνημόνευτον ὑπῆρχεν. 
 
 Οἱ καὶ ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτεσι 
 
 σάζ.}} 
 
 * Πρῶτου Βωχοῦ Go.—Sc. 
 
 99 
 
 ARMEN. HIERON. 
 
 1. Bochus. Sub quo ingens ter- 
 re hiatus in Bubastone factus est, 
 
 multique perierunt. 
 
 u. Post quem Cechous; qui et 
 Apis, et Mnevis, nec non Mendesius 
 caper, tamquam Dii habiti sunt. 
 
 m1. Postea Biophis, sub quo lex 
 sancita, qua foeminis quoque regni 
 honor delatus fuit. 
 Post adhuc 
 
 tres; quorum etate nullum insigne 
 
 Ivy. V. VI. istos alii 
 opus factum est. 
 
 vu. Sub septimo, commentores 
 fabularum Nilum fluvium diebus x1. 
 
 melle aqua permixto fluxisse ajunt. 
 
 vu. Post quem Sesochris, annis 
 XLYIII. cujus proceritas cubitis v. et 
 latitudo palmis 1. fuisse dicitur. 
 
 1x. Sub nono autem nihil memoria 
 dignum fuit gestum. 
 annis 
 
 Regnaruntque _ [simul] 
 
 CCXCVII. 
 
 T καταβουβάστων Go.—BotBacti Sc. 
 
 1 Χῶος Din. B. 
 
 ὃ μνεύεις Β. 
 
 || Sc. at the end of this dynasty places Σέσωχρις and Χενέρης from the list of 
 
 Africanus as in the opposite page. 
 
100 MANETHO'S DYNASTIES 
 
 THE THIRD DYNASTY. 
 
 AFRIC. SCAL. 
 
 Τρίτη δυναστεία Μεμφιτῶν Of nine Memphite kings. 
 βασιλέων ἐννέα. 
 
 α΄. Ὧν Nexepapys* (Ἐχε- 1. Necherophes reigned 28 years. 
 ρόφης) ἔτη κη΄, ἐφ᾽ οὗ Λίβυες In his time the Libyans revolted from 
 ἀπέστησαν Αἰγυπτίων καὶ τῆς the Egyptians, but on account of an 
 σελήνης παρὰ λόγον αὐξηϑεί- unexpected increase of the moon 
 ons διὰ δέος ἑαυτοὺς mapédo- they submitted through fear. 
 σαν. 
 
 β΄. Τόσορϑρος ἔτη ud". 2. Tosorthrus reigned 29 years. 
 οὗτος "Acxdnmds Αἰγυπτίοις He is called Asclepius by the Egyp- 
 κατὰ τὴν ἰατρικὴν νενόμισται, tians, for his medical knowledge. He 
 καὶ τὴν διὰ ξεστῶν λίϑων oi- built a house of hewn stones, and 
 κοδομίαν εὕρατο, ἀλλὰ καὶ greatly patronized literature. 
 γραφῆς ἐπεμελήδη. 
 
 γ΄. Τύρις ἡ ἔτη ζ΄. 3. Tyris reigned 7 years. 
 
 δ΄. Μέσωχρις  (Mécoypis) 4, Mesochris 17 years. 
 ἔτη ιζ΄. 
 
 ε. Σώνφις f (Ζώνφις) ἔτη 5. Soyphis 16 years. 
 
 , 
 
 hiGcie 
 -- ς΄. Τυοσέρτασις ern ιδ΄. 6. Tosertasis 19 years. 
 —~ ζ΄. “Ayns§ ἔτη μβ΄. 7. Aches 42 years. 
 q~ Σήφουρις || (Σίφουρις) 8. Sephuris 30 years. 
 Χο 
 -- &. Κερφέρης ἔτη uc’. 9. Cerpheres 26 years. 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη, oid’ Altogether 214 years. 
 
 * νεχερωφὴς B. + τύρεις B. 
 Ἢ Σώϊφις Go. § "Axis Go. 
 || Σίψουρις Go. 
 

 
 OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 
 
 101 
 
 THE THIRD DYNASTY. 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. 
 Τρίτη δυναστεία Μεμφιτῶν 
 βασιλέων ἡ. 
 
 a. Νεχέρωχις, * ἐφ᾽ οὗ 
 Λίβυες ἀπέστησαν Αἰγυπτίων, 
 \ > , x , 
 χαὶ τῆς σελήνης παρὰ λόγον 
 ἀνξηδείσης διὰ δέος ἐαντοὺς 
 
 Tv ἀρέδοσ: ay. 
 
 β΄. Med “ὅν. Σέσορδος, ὃς 
 ᾿Ασχκληπιὸς παρ Αἰγυπτίοις 
 ἐκλήδη διὰ τὴν ἰατρικήν. οὗτος 
 καὶ τὴν διὰ ξεστῶν λίϑων οἰκο- 
 δομὴν εὕρατο, ἀλλὰ καὶ γρα- 
 ping ἐπεμελήδη. 
 
 Οἱ δὲ λοιποὶ ἐξ οὐδὲν ἀξιο- 
 
 μνημόνευτον ἔπραξαν. 
 
 a fh wv 
 Οἱ καὶ ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτεσι 
 
 phy. 
 
 ARMEN. HIERON. 
 
 Tertia dynastia Memphitarum re- 
 gum Vil. 
 
 1. Necherochis, sub quo Libyes 
 adversum Aegyptios  rebellarunt: 
 quumque Luna importune aucta fue- 
 rit, metu ducti, seipsos rursum in 
 
 servitutem dedidere. 
 
 π: Post quem Sesorthus, ‘qui ob 
 medicam artem Aesculapius ab Ae- 
 gyptiis vocatus est. Hic etiam sectis 
 lapidibus edificandi modum invenit, 
 atque literis exarandis curam impen- 
 dit. 
 
 Sex ceteri autem mil memo- 
 
 ratu dignum gesserunt. 
 
 Quique regnarunt annis cxcvit. 
 
 * Ναχήρωχις Go. 
 
102 MANETHO’S DYNASTIES 
 
 THE FOURTH DYNASTY. 
 
 AFRIC. SCAL. 
 Τετάρτη δυναστεία Μεμ- Of eight Memphite kings of a | 
 φιτῶν συγγενείας ἑτέρας βα- different race. 
 σιλεῖς ἡ. 
 α΄. Σῶρις ἔτη un. 1. Soris reigned 29 years. 
 
 B. Σοῦφις ἔτη Ey’. ὃς τὴν 2. Suphis reigned 63 years. He 
 μεγίστην ἤγειρε πυραμίδα, qv built the largest pyramid which He- | 
 φησιν Ἡρόδοτος ὑπὸ Χέοπος" rodotus says was constructed by 
 γεγονέναι. οὗτος δὲ καὶ ὑπε- Cheops. He was arrogant towards 
 ρόπτης εἰς Yeods ἐγένετο καὶ the gods, and wrote the sacred book; 
 τὴν ἱερὰν συνέγραψε βίβλον, which is regarded by the Egyptians 
 ἣν ὃς μέγα χρῆμα ev Αἰγύπτῳ as a work of great importance. 
 γενόμενος ἐκτησάμην. ἢ 
 
 γ΄. Σοῦφις ἔτη Eo’. 3. Suphis reigned 66 years. 
 δ΄, Μενχέρης ἔτη Ey’. 4. Mencheres 63 years, 
 ε΄. Ῥατοίσης ἔτη ue’. 5. Rhatoeses 25 years. : 
 ς΄. Βίχερις δ ἔτη xf’. 6. Bicheris 22 years. 
 ζ΄. Σεβερχέρης (Ζεβερχέ- 7. Sebercheres 7 years. 
 ρης) ἔτη ζ΄. 
 ἡ. Θαμφδὶς ἔτη δ΄. 8. Thampthis 9 years. 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη ood. (σπδ'!.) Altogether 284 years. 
 
 THE FIFTH DYNASTY. 
 
 Πέμπτη δυναστεία βασι- Of nine Elephantine kings. 
 λέων η΄} ἐξ ᾿Ελεφαντίνης. 
 
 a’. Οὐσερχέρης WY ἔτη χη. 1. Usercheres reigned 28 years. 
 * ὑπὸ χέοττος A. Β.---ὔποχέοπτον Go. t+ B.—é Περόπτης Go. 
 1 ἐκτισάμην Β. § βίχερις Β. Din. Go. 
 
 || Qy. 3. {| οὐσέρχερις Go. 
 

 
 EUSEB. 
 
 Τετάρτη δυναστεία βασι- 
 
 OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 103 
 
 THE FOURTH DYNASTY. 
 
 SCAL. ARMEN. HIERON. 
 Quarta dynastia Memphitarum 
 
 λέων ιζ΄. Μεμφιτῶν συγγε- 
 νείας ἑτέρας βασιλείας. 
 
 Ὧν τρίτος Σοῦφις, ὃς τὴν 
 μεγίστην πυραμίδα ἐγείρας, 
 ἣν φησὶν Ἡρώδοτος ὑπὸ Χέοπος 
 γεγογέναι. ὃς καὶ ὑπερόπτης 
 εἰς Seads γέγονεν, ὡς μετανοή- 
 σαντᾳ αὐτὸν τὴν ἱερὰν συγ- 
 γράψαι βίβλον, ἣν ὡς μέγα 
 χρῆμα 
 τῶν δὲ λοιπῶν οὐδὲν ἀξιομνη- 
 μόνευτον ἀνεγράφη, οἱ καὶ 
 
 > . " ͵ 
 ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη υμη΄. 
 
 ,ὔ 
 Αἰγύπτιοι περιέπουσι. 
 
 regum Xvil. ex alia stirpe regni. 
 
 Quorum tertius Suphis, qui mag- 
 nam illam pyramidem erexit, quam 
 a Cheope factam Herodotus dicit : 
 qui et superbus in Deos inventus est, 
 usquedum eum [hujusce rei] poeni- 
 tuit, et libros Sacrarii conscripsit ; 
 quos velut magnas opes habebant 
 Aegyptii. De czteris vero nihil me- 
 moria dignum scriptum est. Quique 
 
 regnarunt annos CCCCXLVIII. 
 
 THE FIFTH DYNASTY. 
 
 Πέμπτη δυναστεία βασι- 
 λέων τριάκοντα ἕνος ἐξ Ἔλε- 
 
 φαντίνης. 
 
 Quinta dynastia regum Χχχι. Ele- 
 phantiniorum. 
 
St wee 
 
 104 MANETHO’S DYNASTIES 
 AFRIC. SCAL. 
 β΄. Σεφρὴς ἔτη wy. 2. Sephres 13 years. 
 γ΄. Νεφερχέρης (Νερχεφέ- 3. Nephercheres 20 years. 
 pys) ἔτη x. 
 δ΄. Lioipns* (Σίσιχις) ἔτη 4. Sisires 7 years. 
 Gs 
 e's Χέρης (Εχέρης) ἔτη κ΄. 5. Cheres 20 years. 
 
 Fo “Ῥαϑούρης ἡ (Ράϑου- 6. Rhathures 44 years. 
 
 pis) ἔτη μὲ!. (μα΄.) 
 ζ΄. μενχέρης £ (Μερχέρης) 7. Mencheres 9 years. 
 
 ἔτη “΄. 
 ἡ. Τανχέρης ὃ (Ταχέρης) 8. Tancheres 44 years. 
 ἔτη pad! 
 a, Ὄβνος] (Οὖνος) ἔτη 9. Obnus 33 years. 
 λγ. y 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη cpr. Altogether 248 years. ᾿ 
 ᾿. 
 
 THE SIXTH DYNASTY. 
 
 “Extn δυναστεία βασιλέων Of six Memphite kings. 
 
 ἐξ Μεμφιτῶν. 
 α΄. "OSes 4 (Οϑώης) ἔτη 1. Othoes, who was killed by his 
 
 λ΄, ὃς ὑπὸ τῶν δορυφόρων avy- guards; reigned 30 years. 
 
 ρέϑη. 
 Bl. Φιὸς ἔτη νγ΄. (γ'.) 2. Phius reigned 53 years. 
 γ΄. Μεδουσοῦφις ἔτη Cl. 3. Methusuphis 7 years. 
 δ΄, Φίωψ ἑξαέτης ἀρξάμε- 4. Phiops who began to reign at 
 
 vos βασιλεύειν διεγένετο μέχρις six years of age, and reigned till he 
 had completed his hundredth year. 
 
 ἐτῶν pl. 
 ε΄. Mevtecstus** ἔτος 5. Menthesuphis reigned one year. 
 ἕν. 
 * Σίσιρις Go. + PaSoug)s Go. 1 Μερχερὴς Go. 
 § Ταρχερὴς Go. || ὄννος Β. 
 
 4 ᾿οϑώης A.—O3wys Go. ** Μεντεσοῦφις Go. 
 
OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 105 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. ARMEN. HIERON. 
 
 ὯΩν πρῶτος ORs. (Odrys) Quorum primus Othius. Hic a 
 οὗτος ὑπὸ τῶν δορυφόρων ἀνῃ- suis satellitibus occisus est. 
 
 ρέδϑη. 
 
 ὋὉ δὲ δ΄. Dia (Αφίωψ) Quartus Phiops, sexennis regnare 
 ἑξαετὴς ἀρξάμενος ἐβασίλευσε coepit; tenuitque usque ad annum. 
 
 / 2~ ͵ 
 μέχρις ἐτῶν p. 
 
 THE SIXTH DYNASTY. 
 
 “Extn δυναστεία. Sexta dynastia. 
 
106 ; MANETHO’S DYNASTIES 
 
 AFRIC. SCAL. 
 
 sl, Νίτωκρις γεννικωτά- 6. Nitocris, who was the most 
 τη * καὶ εὐμορφυτάτη τῶν κατ handsome woman of her time, of a 
 αὐτὴν γενομένη, ξανδὴ τὴν florid complexion; she built the third 
 χροιὰν, ἣ τὴν τρίτην ἤγειρε pyramid, and reigned 12 years. 
 πυραμίδα" ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη 
 ιβ. 
 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη σγ΄. Altogether 203 years. 
 
 THE SEVENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 “βδόμη δυναστείᾳ Μεμφι- Of seventy Memphite kings, who 
 τῶν βασιλέων 0, ot ἐβασίλευ- reigned 70 days. 
 
 σαν ἡμέρας ο΄. 
 
 THE EIGHTH DYNASTY. 
 
 ᾿Ογδόη δυναστεία Μεμφι- Of twenty-seven Memphite kings, 
 τῶν βασιλέων χζ', οἱ ἐβασί- who reigned 146 years. 
 λευσαν ἔτη pis’. 
 
 THE NINTH DYNASTY. 
 
 Ἔνατη δυναστεία “Hpax- Of nineteen Heracleopolite kings, 
 λεοπολιτῶν | βασιλέων is’, οἱ who reigned 409 years. 
 ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη ve. 
 
 Ὧν ὁ πρῶτος ᾿Αχϑόης δεινό- 1. The first was Achthoes, who 
 τατος τῶν πρὸ αὐτοῦ γενόμενος was worse than all his predecessors. 
 τοῖς ἐν πάσῃ Αἰγύπτῳ χαχὰ He did much injury to all the inhabi- 
 εἰργάσατο, ὕστερον δὲ μανίᾳ tants of Egypt, and being seized with 
 περιέπεσε, καὶ ὑπὸ χροκοδείλου madness, was killed by a crocodile. 
 duepriapn. . 
 
 * γεννητικωτάτη τε καὶ Β. | Ἡρακλεωτικῶν Go. 
 
 
 
OF THE KINGS EGYPT. 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. 
 Γυνὴ Νίτωχρις ἐβασίλευσε 
 τῶν κατ᾽ ἀντὴν γεννικωτάτη 
 καὶ εὐμορφοτάτη, ξανϑήτε τὴν 
 ,ὕ os 4 ε ΩΣ κα. 
 χρόαν ὑπάρξασα, ἡ καὶ λέγε- 
 ται τὴν τρίτην πυραμίδα ᾧχο- 
 
 δομηκέναι. 
 
 m” ’ 
 Οἱ καὶ ἐβασίλευσαν ern σγ - 
 
 107 
 
 ARMEN. HIERON. 
 
 Mulier quedam Nitocris nomine 
 regnavit : qua omnium sui temporis 
 virorum fortissima erat, atque om- 
 nium foeminarum pulcherrima, flavo 
 colore, et rubris genis: ipsamque 
 ajunt, tertiam pyramidem edificasse ; 
 que est moles erecta collis instar. 
 
 Qui regnaverunt annis cciit. 
 
 THE SEVENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 “Ἑβδόμη δυναστεία Μεμφι- 
 τῶν βασιλέων πέντε, οἱ ἐβα- 
 
 fo ἘΠ 
 σίλευσαν ἡμέρας OE « 
 
 Septima dynastia Memphitarum 
 
 Vv. qui regnaverunt annis 
 
 regum 
 LXXV. 
 
 THE EIGHTH DYNASTY. 
 
 ᾿Ογδόη δυναστεία Μεμφιτῶν 
 βασιλέων πέντε, οἱ ἐβασίλχευ-- 
 
 » ͵ 
 σαν ETN ρ. 
 
 THE 
 
 "Ewan δυναστεία Ἣρα- 
 κλεωπολιτῶν βασιλέων τεσσά- 
 pay, οἱ ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη γ΄. 
 
 ὯΩν πρῶτος" AySos* δεινό- 
 τατος τῶν πρὸ αὐτοῦ γενόμενος, 
 τοῖς ἐν πάσῃ Αἰγύπτῳ καχὰ 
 εἰργάσατο, ὕστερον μανίᾳ πε- 
 ριέπεσε, καὶ ὑπὸ κροκοδείλου 
 
 διεφϑάρη. 
 
 Octava dynastia Memphitarum v. 
 
 regum, qui regnarunt annis c. 
 
 NINTH DYNASTY. 
 
 Nona dynastia quatuor regum He- 
 racleopolitarum, qui regnaverunt an- 
 nis c. 
 
 Quorum primus Ochthovis, om- 
 nium, qui ante eum reges fuerunt, 
 crudelissimus fuit; itaque tot, tanta- 
 que in universa Aegypto scelera ac 
 flagitia patravit, ut demum dementia 
 laborans, a crocodilo bestia devoratus 
 fuerit. 
 
 * ἀχϑώης B—Ochitois Lat. 
 
108 MANETHO’S DYNASTIES 
 
 THE TENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 AFRIC. SCAL. ᾿ 
 Δεκάτη δυναστεία “Hpa- Of 19 Heracleopolite kings, who 
 χλεοπολιτῶν βασιλέων ιδ', reigned 185 years. 
 
 ao f. wr U 
 ot ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη pre. 
 
 THE ELEVENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 “Ἑνδεχάτη δυναστεία Διοσ- Of sixteen Diospolite kings, who 
 πολιτῶν βασιλέων ic’, οἱ ἐβα- reigned 43 years. Among whom 
 σίλευσαν ἔτη μγ΄. ew οὺς Ammenemes reigned 16 years. 
 Αμμενέμης ἔτη ις". 
 
 Μέχρι τοῦδε τὸν πρῶτον The whole number of the above- 
 τόμον xatarynoye* Mayesé. mentioned kings is 192, who reigned 
 Ὁμοῦ βασιλεῖς p98’. ἔτη during a space of 2300 years and 70 
 Br!, Ἵ ἡμέραι 0’. days.—Syncel. Chron. 54 to 59.— 
 
 Euseb. Chron. 14, 15. 
 
 * χαταγήωχε Β.---κατάγει ὁ Xeupoverd GO.—xaraynoyey ὁ Mavesa@ Go. m. 
 + Br" ἡμέραι Ba— Brn’ μέραι Ai— Brn’ ἡμέρας Go. 
 
 
 
OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 109 
 
 THE TENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. ARMEN. HIERON. 
 Δεκάτη δυναστεία “Hpa- Decima dynastia Heracleopolita- 
 χλεωπολιτῶν βασιλέων (δ΄. of rum regum XIX. qui regnarunt annos 
 
 ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη pre. CLXXXV. 
 
 THE ELEVENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 ‘Exdexditn δυναστεία Διοσ- Undecima dynastia Diopolitarum 
 πολιτῶν βασιλέων ις΄. of ἐβα- Yegum XVI. annis XLII. regnantium. 
 σίλευσαν ἔτη μγ. My cis Post quos Ammenemes annis ΧΥΙ. 
 ᾿Αμμενέμης ἔτη ις΄. 
 
 Μέχρι τοῦδε τὸν πρῶτον τό πο usque primum tomum producit 
 μὸν κατάγει (οχεν) ὁ Mave- Manethus. Simul reges cxer. anni 
 σῶς. “Owed βασιλεῖς ρηβ΄.. MMccc. 
 ἔτη βτ. (ἡμέραι od.) 
 
THE SECOND BOOK OF MANETHO. 
 
 THE TWELFTH DYNASTY. 
 
 AFRIC. SCAL. 
 AQAEKATH δυναστεία Διοσ-- 
 πολιτῶν βασιλέων ἑπτά. 
 
 α΄. Σεσογχωσις ἢ (Τέσων 
 Γώσης 1) ᾿Αμμανέμον υἱὸς ἔτη 
 μς΄. 
 
 β΄. ᾿Αμμανέμης ἔτη λη΄, ὃς 
 ὑπὸ τῶν ἰδίων εὐνούχων ἀνῃ- 
 pew. 
 
 y- Léoworpic f ἔτη μη, 
 ὃς ἅπασαν ἐχειρώσατο τὴν 
 ᾿Ασίαν ἐν ἐνιαυτοῖς ἐννέα καὶ 
 τῆς Εὐρώπης τὰ μέχρι Θρᾷκης 
 πανταχόσε μνημόσυνα ἐγείρας 
 τῆς τῶν edvay σχέσεως, ἐπὶ 
 μὲν τοῖς γενναίοις ἀνδρῶν, ἐπὶ 
 δὲ τοῖς ἀγεννέσι γυναικῶν μό- 
 pia ταῖς στήλαις ἐγχαράσσων, 
 ὃς ὑπὸ Αἰγυπτίων μετὰ "Οσιριν 
 
 πρῶτον νομισϑϑῆναι. 
 
 * Σεσόγχωσις Din.— Xecdyywpis Go. m. 
 
 YW 
 + 
 
 Or seven Diospolite kings. 
 
 1. Geson Goses the son of Amma- 
 nemes. He reigned 46 years. 
 
 2. Ammanemes reigned 38 years. 
 He was slain by his eunuchs. 
 
 3. Sesostris 48 years. He con- 
 quered all Asia. in nine years, and 
 Europe as far as Thrace, every where 
 erecting monuments of his conquest 
 of those nations: among the people 
 which had acted bravely he set up 
 cippi of a phallic nature, but among 
 the degenerate female emblems of a 
 similar description engraved upon 
 pillars. By the Egyptians he is sup- 
 posed to be the first after Osiris. 
 
 + γεσονγόσις Β. 
 σεσοστρις Β. 
 
 
 
THE SECOND BOOK OF MANETHO. 
 
 THE TWELFTH DYNASTY. 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. 
 AQAEKATH δυναστεία Διοσ- 
 πολιτῶν βασιλέων, ζ΄. 
 
 α΄. Ὧν πρῶτος Σεσόγχω- 
 
 pis Ἐ᾿Αμμενέμου υἱὸς ἔτη μς!. 
 
 > ΄ ὃ. 0 ' 
 β΄. ᾿Αμμενέμης Ἵ eT] λη.. 
 ὃς ὑπὸ τῶν ἰδίων εὐνούχων ἀνῃ- 
 ρέϑη. 
 ’ i ͵ 
 γ΄. Σέτωστρις { ἔτη μη. 
 a ͵ ΄ ~ δ΄ 
 ὃς λέγεται γεγονέναι πηχῶν ὃ. 
 παλαιστῶν γ΄. δακτύλων β'. 
 a ~ > 4 Ss 4 
 ὃς πᾶσαν ἐχειρώσατο τὴν Aciay 
 2 > ~ > , φ ~ 
 ἐν ἐνιαυτοῖς ἐννέα, καὶ τῆς 
 3 Υ̓͂ x , ’ 
 Εὐρώπης τὰ μέχρι Opaxns, ὃ 
 i ͵ 
 πανταχόσε μνημόσυνα ἐγείρᾳς 
 ~ ~ > ~ ͵ 
 τῆς τῶν ἐδνῶν κατασχέσεως; 
 ΒΝ X ~ f > ~ 
 ἐπὶ μὲν τοῖς γενναίοις, ἀνδρῶν, 
 " , 
 καὶ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀγεννέσι ἦυναι- 
 ~ ͵ ν / > 
 χῶν μόρια ταῖς στήλαις ἐγχα- 
 , ε αν, = ey 7 
 ράσσων, ὡς καὶ ὕπο τῶν Alyv- 
 4 . ȴ, 
 πτίων μετὰ Ὄσιριν || vousc- 
 
 Svat. 
 
 ARMEN. HIERON. 
 Duodecima dynastia Diopolitarum 
 regum VII. 
 1. Quorum primus Sesonchosis 
 Ammenemis filius, annis XLvI. 
 
 u. Ammenemes, annis 
 
 XXXVIII. 
 qui a suis eunuchis occisus est. 
 
 ut. Sesostris, annis XLII. quem 
 quatuor cubitorum, et palmorum 
 trium, duorumque digitorum [proce- 
 rum | fuisse dicunt. Hic totam Asiam 
 annis novem subegit, Europzeasque 
 partes usque ad Thraciam: atque 
 ubique monumenta, quarumcumque 
 gentium potitus est, erexit; fortium 
 quidem virorum formas virili specie, 
 ignavorum vero muliebribus membris 
 in cippis insculpsit: adeo ut ab 
 Aegyptiis post Osirim habitus sit. 
 
 * σεσόγχοσις Β.---Σεσύγχωρις αο.---Σεσόγχωσις Din. 
 
 ἡ ᾿Αμμανέμης Din.—B. 
 ὃ μέχρι ϑαλάσσης Se. 
 
 , 
 t σέσοστρις Β. 
 
 || Go. 
 
 adds πρῶτον in m. 
 
112 MANETHO’S DYNASTIES 
 
 AFRIC. SCAL. 
 δ΄, Λαχάρης ἔτη η΄. ὃς τὸν 4. Lachares 8 years; he built the 
 ἐν ᾿Αρσινοΐτῃ Aa BUpiwdoyv ἑαυτῷ Labyrinth in the Arsenoite nome as 
 
 τάφον κατεσκεύασε. a tomb for himself. 
 ε΄. ᾿Αμμερὴς * ἔτη η]. 5. Ammeres 8 years. 
 ς΄. ᾿Αμμενέμης ἔτη η΄. 6. Ammenemes 8 years. 
 
 ζ΄, Σκεμίοφρις ἀδελφὴ ἔτη 7. Scemiophris, his sister, 4 years, 
 δ΄. 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη pb’. Altogether 160 years. 
 
 THE THIRTEENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 Τρισκαιδεκάτη δυναστεία Of 60 Diospolite kings, who reigned 
 Διοσπολιτῶν βασιλέων ξ΄, οἱ 453 years. 
 
 'e a 
 ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη w/t 
 
 THE FOURTEENTH DYNASTY. ὃ 
 
 Τεσσαρεσχαιδεκάτη δυνασ- Of 76 Xoite kings, who reigned 
 tela Ἐοϊτῶν βασιλέων os’, οἱ 184 years. : 
 
 Ε} 
 ' ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη ρπδ΄. 
 
 THE FIFTEENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 Πεντεκαιδεκάτη δυναστεία Of the Shepherds. 
 
 ποιμένων. 
 Ἦσαν δὲ Φοίνικες ἕένοι These were six foreign Phoenician 
 βασιλεῖς ς!, οἱ καὶ Μέμφιν kings ; who took Memphis. 
 εἷλον. 
 * ἀμερὴης Β. t ᾿Αμμενέμνης Δ.---ὠἀμενέμης Β. 
 
 1 Β.-ρπδ' A. Go. Jack. 
 § Inserted by Dind. from B.—Omitted altogether by Goar. 
 
 
 
 
 
OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 113 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. ARMEN. HIERON. 
 Med ὃν AdBapic* ery Post quem Lambares, annis ὙΠ. 
 ἡ. ὃς τὴν ἐν ᾿Αρσενοΐτῃ λα- quiin Arsenoite labyrinthum 5101 se- 
 
 βύρινδον ἑαυτῷ τάφον κατεσ- pulchrum construxit. 
 
 χεύασεν. 
 Οἱ δὲ τούτου διάδοχοι ἔτη Hujus successores regnaverunt 
 μβ΄. annis ΧΙ]. 
 Οἱ παντες ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη Simul vero omnes regnarunt annis 
 ope’. CCXLY. 
 THE THIRTEENTH DYNASTY. 
 Τρισκαιδεκάτη δυναστεία Decimatertia dynastia Diopolita- 
 
 Διοσπολιτῶν βασιλέων ξ΄. of rum regum LX. quiregnaverunt annis 
 
 ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη υνγ΄. CCCCLIII. 
 
 THE FOURTEENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 Τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη δυνασ- Decimaquarta dynastia Xoitarum 
 τεία Ἐοϊτῶν βασιλέων ος΄. Yegum LXXVI. qui regnarunt annis 
 
 * ὡ ” a 
 
 οἱ ἐβασίλευσαν ‘ern md’. CCCCLXXXIV. 
 ͵ 
 
 (prd'.) 
 
 THE FIFTEENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 Πεντεκαιδεκάτη δυναστεία Decimaquinta dynastia Diopolita- 
 Διοσπολιτῶν βασιλέων, οἱ ἐβα- Yum regum; qui regnaverunt annis 
 
 σίλευσαν ἔτη ov, ccL. 
 
 * Adguagis B. Din.—Lampares Lat. 
 
114 MANETHO’S DYNASTIES 
 
 AFRIC. SCAL. 
 
 α΄. Ὧν πρῶτος Σαΐτης ἐ- 1. The first was Saites who reigned 
 βασίλευσεν ἔτη ιδ', ἀφ᾽ οὖ 19 years. The Saite nome is so 
 καὶ ὁ Σαΐτης γομός. ἢ οἱ xat called after him. The shepherds 
 ἐν τῷ Σεϑροΐτῃ f νομῷ πόλιν founded a city in the Sethroite nome, 
 ἔκτισαν, ap’ ἧς ὁρμώμενοι from whence they invaded and con- 
 
 Αἰγυπτίους ἐχειρώσαντο. quered all Egypt. 
 βι. Βνῶν t (Ανῶν) ἔτη μδ΄. 2. Beon reigned 44 years. 
 γ΄. Παχνὰν § ἔτη ξα΄. 3. Pachnan 61 years. 
 δ΄, Σταὰν ἔτη ν΄. 4. Staan 50 years. 
 ε΄. ἔλρχλης ἔτη μδ΄. 5. Archles 49 years. ἱ 
 ς΄. Λφοβις || (Αφωβις) 6. Aphobis 61 years. 
 
 ἔτη ξα΄. 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη σπὸ΄. Altogether 284 years. 
 
 THE SIXTEENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 “Ἑξκαιδεκάτη δυναστεία Of 32 Hellenic Shepherd kings, 
 ποιμένες Ἕλληνες { βασιλεῖς who reigned 518 years. 
 AB’. ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη diy’. 
 
 THE SEVENTEENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 Ἑπτακαιδεκάτη δυναστεία Consisted of 43 Shepherd kings 
 ποιμένες ἄλλοι βασιλεῖς wy and 43 Theban Diospolites. 
 (Ar) καὶ Θηβαῖοι Διοσπολῖ- 
 ται μγ - 
 
 Ὅμοῦ οἱ ποιμένες καὶ of The Shepherds and Thebans 
 
 Θηβαῖοι ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη reigned altogether 151 years. 
 pra’. 
 
 * This paragraph ὧν πρῶτος . . . . νομός is inserted by Goar and others 
 after ἔχειρώσαντο. 
 + σαιϑροΐτη Β. 1 Βυῶν αο.---Βηὼν Go. m. 
 
 § Απαχνας Go, m, _ || Agwgis m. 4 ἄλλο, Din. Sc. 
 
 
 
OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. 
 
 115 
 
 ARMEN. HIERON, 
 
 THE SIXTEENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 “ξκαιδεκάτη δυναστεία 
 Θηβαῖοι βασιλεῖς ε΄. οἱ καὶ 
 
 ἐβασίλευσαν ἔτη py’. 
 
 Decimasexta dynastia Thebarum 
 regum v. qui regnarunt annis cxc. 
 
 THE SEVENTEENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 ἝἙπτακαιδεκάτη δυναστεία 
 ποιμένες ἦσαν ἄδελφοι Ἐ Φοί- 
 vines ξένοι βασιλεῖς, οἱ καὶ 
 Μέμφιν εἶλον. 
 
 a. “Oy πρῶτος 
 ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη ιδ΄. ἀφ᾽ οὗ 
 
 wal 6 Σαΐτης νομὸς ἐκλήϑη. 
 
 Σαΐτης 
 
 οἱ καὶ ἐκ τῷ Σεδϑροΐτῃ νομῷ 
 πόλιν ἔχτισαν, ad? ἧς ὁρμώ- 
 μενοι Αἰγυπτίους ἐχειρώσαντο. 
 
 β΄. Βνῶν (Ανῶν) ἔτη μγ΄. 
 
 γ΄. Ἴλφωφις ἔτη ιδ΄. 
 
 δ΄, Mes? ὃν “Apyans (Ay- 
 χλης) ἔτη λ΄. 
 
 ὍὉμοῦ ἔτη py. Κατὰ τού- 
 τοὺς Αἰγυπτίων βασιλεὺς (βα- 
 σιλεῖς) Ἰωσὴφ δείκνυται. 
 
 Decimaseptima dynastia Pastorum ; 
 qui erant fratres Phoenices, peregrini 
 reges; qui Memphim etiam ceperunt. 
 
 1. Quorum primus Saites regnavit 
 annis XIx. a quo et Saitarum Nomus 
 nomen habuit. Qui in Sethroite quo- 
 que Nomo condiderunt urbem; ex 
 qua irruptione facta Aegyptios ipsos 
 subegere. 
 
 τ. Secundus Bnon, annis xu. 
 
 11. Post quem Archles, annis xxx. 
 
 1v. Apophis, annis xtv. 
 
 Summa, anni cur. Horum tem- 
 pore, ut imperaret Aegyptiis, Joseph 
 apparuit. 
 
 * Sc. omits. 
 
116 
 
 AFRIC. SCAL. 
 
 THE EIGHTEENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 ᾿Οκτωκαιδεκάτη δυναστεία 
 
 ~ ἐὰ ͵ 
 Διοσπολετῶν βασιλέων «ς΄. 
 
 a’. “Oy πρῶτος ᾿Αμὼς, ἐφ᾽ 
 οὖ Maions ἐξῆλδεν ἐξ Αἰγύπ- 
 του, ὡς ἡμεῖς ἀποδεικνύομιεν. 
 
 β΄. Χεβρὼς ἔτη ιγ΄. 
 γ. ᾿Αμενωφνὶς ἔτη κδ΄. * 
 
 δ΄, ᾿Αμερσὶς tf ἔτη κβ΄. 
 
 ε΄. Μίσαφρις (Μίσφρις) 
 ἔτη ιγ΄. 
 
 ς!. Μισφραγμούδϑωσις ἔτη 
 us’, ἐφ᾽ οὗ ὁ ἐπὶ Δευκαλίωνος 
 κατακλυσμός. 
 
 ζ΄. Τούδμωσις ἔτη S!. 
 
 ns ᾿Αμενῶφις ἔτη dal. ob- 
 
 2» <3 
 τός ἐστιν ὃ Μέμνων εἶναι νο- 
 
 μιζόμενος χαὶ φϑεγγόμενος 
 λιδῦῦζο 
 δ΄. Ὦρος ἔτη λζ΄. 
 
 “. ᾿Αχερρῆς ἔτη AB’. 
 
 ια΄. Ῥαδῶς ἔτη ἕξ. 
 
 * κά Go. m. 
 
 MANETHO'S DYNASTIES 
 
 of ε 
 Ja, 1% 
 
 Of sixteen Diospolite kings. 
 
 1. Amos, in whose time Moses 
 went out of Egypt as we shall de- 
 monstrate. 
 
 2. Chebros 13 years. 
 
 3. Amenophthis 24 years. 
 
 4, Amersis 22 years. 
 5. Misaphris 13 years. 
 
 6. Misphragmathosis 26 years, in 
 
 whose time happened the deluge of 
 Deucalion. 
 
 7. Tuthmosis 9 years. 
 
 8. Amenophis 31 years. He is 
 supposed to be Memnon, to whom 
 the musical statue is erected. 
 
 9. Horus 37 years. 
 
 10. Acherrhes 32 years. 
 
 11. Rathos 6 years. 
 
 + ἀμενσὶς B. 
 
 
 
OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. 
 
 11 
 
 ARMEN. HIERON. 
 
 THE EIGHTEENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 ᾿Οκτωκαιδεκάτη δυναστεία 
 
 ιδ΄. 
 
 Διοσπολιτῶν 
 (ς.) 
 al. Ὧν πρῶτος Αμωσις ἔτη 
 
 , 
 
 χε. 
 
 βασιλέων 
 
 β΄. Χεβρὼν (δεύτερος) ἔτη 
 “γ᾽. 
 γ΄. Αμμενῶφις (Αμένουφος) 
 
 ” , 
 τή κα΄. 
 
 δ΄. Μιφρὶς Ἐ ery ιβ΄. 
 
 ἘΠ Μισφραγμούδϑωσις Ἷ ἔτη 
 
 , 
 us". 
 
 ς΄. Τούδϑμωσις ἔτη θ΄. 
 
 ζ΄, ᾿Αμένωφις Ἢ ἔτη dal. 
 οὗτος ὁ Μέμνων εἶναι νομιζόμε- 
 νος χαὶ φϑεγγόμενος λίος. 
 
 ἡ. ρος ὃ ἔτη aol. [ἐν 
 ἄλλῳ λή.] 
 
 δ΄. ᾿Αχενχέρσης ἔτη ιβ΄. 
 
 γ. "Adwpis ἔτη λδ΄. 
 
 * Μμιφρὴς Β. Din. 
 
 Tt μισᾷφραγμούϑως Β. 
 
 Decimaoctava dynastia regum ΧΙΥ͂. 
 Diopolitarum. 
 
 1. Quorum primus Amoses, (Amo- 
 sis) annis ΧΧΥ. 
 
 u. Chebron, annis x1I. 
 
 ut. Amophis, annis (Amenophis) 
 XXL, 
 
 iv. Memphres, (Mephres) annis 
 XI. 
 v. Myspharmuthosis, (Misphrag- 
 
 muthosis) annis xXvI. 
 
 vi. Tuthmosis, annis 1x. 
 vu. Amenophis, annis xxx1. Hic 
 
 est, qui Memnon existimatus fuit, 
 lapis loquax. 
 
 vi. Orus, annis xxvii. (XxXXVIII. ) 
 ix. Achencheres, (Anchencherres) 
 
 annis XvI. (x1.) 
 (x. Achoris vu.) 
 
 1 Amnophis Lat. 
 
 § See Syncellus’ list infra where this and the three following are given as 
 a dynasty of Ethiopian kings from the river Indus. 
 
118 MANETHO’S DYNASTIES 
 
 AFRIC. 
 
 1B. Kips bn i 
 wy» ᾿Αχερρῆς ἔτη ιβ'. 
 wd. ᾿Αρμεσῆς ἢ ( Αμέρσης) 
 
 ” f 
 -eT εἰ 
 
 se. Ῥαμεσσῆς Ἵ ἔτος αἰ. 
 
 ις΄. ᾿Αμενωφὰν sie (Ἀμ- 
 μενὼφ) ἔτη (δ΄. 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη chy’. 
 
 SCAL. 
 
 12. Chebres 12 years. 
 13. Acherrhes 12 years. 
 14, Armeses 5 years. 
 
 15. Ramesses 1 year. 
 16. Amenophath 19 years. 
 
 Altogether 263 years. 
 
 THE NINETEENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 ᾿Εννεακαιδεκάτη δυναστεία 
 βασιλέων ζ΄ Διοσπολιτῶν. 
 
 a. Σέϑως ἔτη να΄. 
 
 β΄. Ραψάκης ἔτη ξα΄. 
 γ΄. ᾿Αμμενέφϑης δ ἔτη κ΄. 
 δ΄, “Ῥαμεσσῆς || (Ραμε- 
 σῆς) ἔτη ξ΄. 
 
 * ἁμεσὴς Δ.---ἀρμεσὶς Β, 
 + ῥαμμεσῆς A. Β.---Ραμμεσσῆς Go, 
 
 § ἀμενεφϑῆς B. 
 
 Of seven Diospolite kings. 
 1. Sethos reigned 51 years. 
 2. Rapsaces 61 years. 
 
 3. Ammenephthes 20 years. 
 
 4. Rameses 60 years. 
 
 } Αμενῶφ Go. 
 || Papeons Go. 
 
OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. 
 
 ια΄. Χενχέρης ἔτη ις΄. Κατὰ 
 τοῦτον Μωϊσῆς τῆς ἐξ Αἰγύπ- 
 τοῦ πορείας τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων ἡγή- 
 σατο. 
 
 ιβ΄. ᾿Αχεῤῥῆς T ἔτη η΄. 
 
 wy» Χεῤῥῆς ἔτη ιε΄. 
 
 εδ'. ᾿Αρμαὶς t ὃ καὶ Δα- 
 γαὸς ἔτη ε΄. wed ἃ ἔτη ἐκ 
 τῆς Αἰγύπτον ἐκπεσὼν καὶ 
 φεύγων τὸν ἀδελφὸν Αἴγυπτον 
 εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα ἀφικνεῖται, 
 κρατήσας τε τοῦ ᾿Αργους βα- 
 σιλεύει ᾿Αῤγείων. 
 
 ιε΄, ᾿Αμμεσῆς; § ὁ καὶ Al- 
 γυπτος, ἔτη En. 
 
 ις΄. Μένωφις || ἔτη μ΄. 
 
 ὋὉμοῦ ἔτη τμή.. 
 
 119 
 
 ARMEN. HIERON. 
 
 (x1. Chencherres ann. xv.) Hu- 
 jus etate Moyses Judeorum ex 
 Aegypto egressus Dux fuit.* 
 
 x. (xu.) Acherres, annis vit. 
 
 x1. (xu). Cherres, annis xv. 
 
 xu. (xiv). Armais, qui et Davonus 
 {lege Danaus], annis v: quibus annis 
 exactis, Aegypto pulsus, fugitivus ten- 
 dit ad fratrem suum Aegyptum; [lege, 
 fugitivus tendit a fratre suo Aegypto] 
 adiens Helladam, Argo capta, regnat 
 in Argivos. 
 
 xu. Ramesses, (xv. Remesses 
 LXvill.) qui et Aegyptus, annis Lxviul. 
 
 xiv. Amenophis, (xvi. Meno- 
 phes) annis xt, 
 
 Summa, anni cccxLviu. 
 
 THE NINETEENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 Ἐννεακαιδεκάτη δυναστεία 
 βασιλέων ε΄. Διοσπολιτῶν. 
 
 al. Σέϑως ἔτη νε΄. 
 
 β΄. Ῥάψης Y ἔτη ς΄. 
 
 γ΄. ᾿Αμμενεφϑὴς ἢ (Αμέ- 
 yopdic) ἔτη μ΄. 
 
 Decimanona dynastia. Diopolita- 
 rum regum v. 
 1. Sethos, annis Ly. 
 1. Rampses, annis LXVI. 
 ΠῚ. Amenephthis, annis vu. 
 
 * In the Armenian this paragraph immediately follows Achencheres the 
 9th ; Achoris and Chencherres being altogether omitted. 
 
 t+ Ancheres Lat. 
 
 ὃ ἀμεσσὴς Β.--Ῥαμεσσῆς Dind. 
 
 Ἵ ῬΡαμψὴς Din. B. 
 
 1 Αρμὲς Go. 
 || Μέμωφις 6ο.---᾿ Αμένωφις Din. 
 ** "AuuevedS¢ Din. 
 
120 MANETHO’S DYNASTIES 
 
 AFRIC. SCAL. 
 
 ε΄. ᾿Αμμενεμνῆς (Aupe- 
 νεμης) ἔτη εἰ. 
 
 ς΄. Θούωρις, ὃ παρ Ομήρῳ 
 καλούμενος Πόλυβος, ᾿Αλκάν- 
 Spas * ἀνὴρ, ἐφ᾽ οὔ τὸ Ἴλιον 
 ἑάλω ἔτη ζ΄. 
 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη oD’, 
 
 ᾿Επὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ δευτέρου τό- 
 μου Maveda βασιλεῖς 45° 
 
 ᾿ ἔτη βρκα!. 
 
 5. Ammenemnes 5 years. 
 
 6. Thuoris, who is called by 
 Homer Polybus, the husband of Al- 
 candra, under whose reign Ilion was 
 taken, 7 years. 
 
 Altogether 209 years. 
 
 In this second book of Manetho 
 are contained 96 kings and 2121 
 years.—Syncel. Chron. 59 to 75.— 
 Euseb. Chron. 15 to 17. 
 
 * 0. "Αλκανδρος ἀνὴρ ἐφ᾽ &c. is thus given by several editors. 
 
 
 
OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 121 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. 
 
 δ΄, ᾿Αμμενεμμῆς Ἐ ἔτη uc’. 
 
 e!. Θούωρις, 6 παρ Ὁμήρῳ 
 καλούμενος Πολύβους ἢ (τ τ 
 Αλκανδρος ἀνὴρ, ἐφ᾽ od τὸ 
 Ἴλιον ἑάλω, ἔτη ζ΄. 
 
 ὍὉμοῦ ἔτη p90’. 
 
 Ἐπὶ τὸ (τέλος) ἀυτὲ β'. 
 τόμου Μανεδῶ βασιλέων 99’. 
 ἔτη αρκά. [lege ἰβρκά.] 
 
 * ᾿Αμμενέμης Din. B. 
 
 ARMEN. HIERON. 
 1v. Ammenemes, annis ΧΧΥῚ. 
 
 y. Thuoris, qui ab Homero Poly- 
 bus vocatur, vir immanis roboris([lege, 
 vir, sive maritus Alcandre,] cujus 
 tempore Ilium captum fuit, annis vi. 
 
 Summa, anni cxcty. 
 Insimul ex secundo Manethi tomo, 
 XCII. regum, anni MMCXXI. 
 
 + Πόλυβος Din. 
 
THE THIRD BOOK OF MANETHO. 
 
 THE TWENTIETH DYNASTY. 
 
 AFRIC. SCAL. 
 EIKOSTH δυναστεία βασι- 
 λέων Διοσπολιτῶν ιβ', οἱ ἐβα- 
 
 Μ 
 σίλευσαν ETN pre’. 
 
 Of 12 Diospolite kings, who reigned 
 135 years. 
 
 THE TWENTY-FIRST DYNASTY. 
 
 Πρώτη χαὶ εἰκοστὴ δυνασ- 
 tela βασιλέων Taviroy ζ΄ .ἢ 
 
 α΄. Σμενδῆς ἡ (Σμέρδης) 
 }, 
 ἔτη xo. 
 
 β΄. Ψουσέννης Ἱ ἔτη pct. 
 (μβ.) 
 
 γ΄. Νεφελχερὴς ἔτη ὃ΄. 
 
 δ΄, ᾿Αμενωφδὶς ὃ ἔτη Y. 
 
 ε΄, ᾿Οσοχὼρ || (Ὀσόχων) 
 try ς΄. 
 
 sl. Ψιναχῆς J ἔτη ἘΝ 
 
 * yf’, Go. 
 
 Of seven Tanite kings. 
 
 1. Smendes reigned 26 years. 
 2. Psusenes 46 years. 
 
 3. Nephelcheres 4 years. 
 
 4. Amenophthis 9 years. 
 5. Osochor 6 years. 
 
 6. Psinaches 9 years. 
 
 { Σμεδῆς Go. 
 
 1 ψΨουσένης Λ.---Ψουσένης ἢ Ψουνέσης Go. § Αμενενωφϑις Go. 
 
 || ᾿Οσοχὸρ A. Go. 
 
 q Πιναχὴς Go. 
 
 
 

 
 THE THIRD BOOK OF MANETHO. 
 
 THE TWENTIETH DYNASTY.* 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. ARMEN. 
 
 EIKOSTH δυναστεία Baci- Vicesima dynastia Diopolitarum 
 λέων Διοσπολιτῶν ιβ΄. οἱ ἐβα- XII. regum, qui regnaverunt aunis 
 σίλευσαν ἔτη por. cLXXI. 
 
 THE TWENTY-FIRST DYNASTY.+ 
 
 Πρώτη καὶ εἰκοστὴ δυνασ- Vicesima prima dynastia Tanita- 
 tela βασιλέων Τανιτῶν ἑπτά. rum regum VII. 
 
 α΄. Σμένδις, (Σμένδης) ἔτη 1. Smendis, annis ΧΧΥ͂Ι. 
 κς΄. 
 
 β΄. Ψευσέννης, ἔτη μα΄. 11. Psusennus, annis ΧΙ]. 
 
 y+ Νεφερχερὴς, (Nepep- π|. Nephercheres, annis rv. 
 χένης) ἔτη δ΄. 
 
 δ΄, ᾿Αμενωφδις, t ἔτη θ΄. iv. Amenophthis, annis rx. 
 εἰ, "Ocoxep, || ἔτη ς΄. y. Osochor, annis v1. 
 ς΄. Ψινάχης, ἔτη 6. vi. Psinnaches, annis 1x. 
 
 * The rest of the variations of Hieronymous are given page 141. 
 + Scaliger omits this dynasty and places its kings under the 20th dynasty. 
 T ἀμμενωφϑὶς B. || ὁσοχὼρ A. 
 
124 
 
 AFRIC, SCAL. 
 ζ΄. Ψουσέννης ἢ (Σουσέννης) 
 ἔτη wT 
 
 ὋὉμοῦ ἔτη pr’. 
 
 MANETHO’S DYNASTIES 
 
 7. Psusennes 14 years. 
 
 Altogether 130 years. 
 
 THE TWENTY-SECOND DYNASTY. 
 
 Εἰκοστὴ δεύτερα δυναστεια 
 Βουβαστιτῶν βασιλέων δ΄. 
 
 α΄. Σέσογχις t ἔτη κα΄. 
 
 θ΄, ᾿Οσορϑὼν ὃ (Οὐσόρϑων) 
 ἔτη uel. 
 
 γ΄. δ΄. εἰ. ΓΑλλοι τρεῖς "τὴ 
 nel. 
 
 ς!. Τακέλωδις] (Τακέλλω- 
 Sc) ἔτη un. 
 
 Ceo’. δ᾽. λλλοι τρεῖς ἔτη 
 μβ'. 
 
 ὋὉμοῦ ern px. (pus’.) 
 
 Of nine Bubastite kings. 
 
 1, Sesonchis 21 years. 
 2. Osorthon 15 years. 
 
 3, 4, 5. Three others reigned 25 
 years. 
 6. Tacelothis 13 years. 
 
 7, 8,9. Three others 42 years. 
 
 Altogether reigned 120 years. 
 
 THE TWENTY-THIRD DYNASTY. 
 
 Τρίτη καὶ εἰκοστὴ δυνασ- 
 tela Τανιτῶν βασιλέων δ΄. 
 α΄. Πετουβάτης (Πετου- 
 βάστης) ἔτη μί, ἐφ᾽ οὗ ὀλυμ- 
 ΔΨ τ ΄ 
 πιὰς 1X) πρώτη. 
 (Ὀσόρχων) 
 ἔτη η΄, ὃν Ἡρακλέα Αἰγύπτιοι 
 
 β΄. ᾿Οσορχὼ 
 
 καλοῦσι. 
 
 * Σουσέννης Go. 
 + 
 
 1 σέσωγχις Β.--Σεσόγχωσις Din. 
 § ᾿οσωρϑῶν Α.--- οσωρὼϑ Go. 
 
 Of four Tanite kings. 
 
 1. Petoubates reigned 40 years ; in 
 his time the Olympiads began. 
 
 2. Osorcho 8 years, whom the 
 Egyptians call Hercules. 
 
 + λέ. Din—a’. Go. m. 
 
 || TaxéAAwSis Go, 
 
 
 
OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. 
 
 ζ΄, Ψουσέννης, ἔτη re 
 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη pr’. 
 
 ARMEN. 
 vu. Psosennes, annis xxxv. 
 
 Summa, anni cxxx. 
 
 THE TWENTY-SECOND DYNASTY. 
 
 Εἰκοστὴ δεύτερα δυναστεία 
 Βουβαστιτῶν βασιλέων τριῶν. 
 , Z * " , 
 
 a, Leceyxwoig™ ety ua. 
 
 β΄. ᾿οσωρϑὼν (Ὀσόρϑων) 
 
 " , 
 €T7 ME. 
 
 γ΄. Τακέλλωϑις τ er ry’ 
 
 ὍὉμοῦ ἔτη μθ!. 
 
 Vicesima secunda dynastia trium 
 regum Bubastitarum. 
 τ. Sesonchusis, annis xx1. 
 ut. Osorthos, annis xv. 
 
 ui. Tacellothis, annis x1u. 
 
 Summa, anni xiv. 
 
 THE TWENTY-THIRD DYNASTY. 
 
 Εἰκοστὴ τρίτη δυναστεία 
 Τανιτῶν βασιλέων τριῶν. 
 a’. Πετουβάστης ὃ ἔτη κε΄. 
 
 (xl) 
 
 β΄. Me? ὃν Ὀσωρδὼν 
 (Ὀσόρϑων) ἔτη θ΄. ὃν “Hpa- 
 
 , 
 κλέα Αἰγύπτιοι ἐκάλεσαν. 
 
 * σεσόγχωσις Din.—cecwyywors Β. 
 
 1 Τακέλωϑις Din. Β. 
 
 Vicesima tertia dynastia Tanitarum 
 trium regum. 
 1. Petubastis, annis xxv. 
 
 ur. Post quem Osorthon, 
 1x. quem Herculem 
 Aegyptii. 
 
 annis 
 appellarunt 
 
 + Din. B. 
 § Πετουβάστις Din. 
 
126 
 
 AFRIC. SCAL. 
 γ. Ψαμμοῦς ἔτη (΄. 
 δ΄, Ζὴτ ἔτη λα!. ἢ 
 
 ‘Oped ἔτη πδ΄. 
 
 MANETHO’S DYNASTIES 
 
 3. Psammus 10 years. 
 4. Zeet 31 years. 
 Altogether 28 years. 
 
 THE TWENTY-FOURTH DYNASTY. 
 
 Τετάρτη καὶ εἰκοστὴ δυ- 
 ναστεία. 
 
 Βόχχωρις t (Βόκχωρις) Σαΐ- 
 τῆς ἔτη sty ἐφ᾽ οὗ ἀρνίον ἐφ- 
 δέγξατο. 
 
 Bochchoris the Saite reigned 6 
 years, in whose reign a sheep spoke. 
 
 THE TWENTY-FIFTH DYNASTY. 
 
 Πέμπτη nat εἰκοστὴ δυνασ- 
 rela Αἰδιόπων βασιλέων τριῶν. 
 
 α΄. Σαβάκων, Τὶ ὃς αἰχμά- 
 λωτὸν Βόχχωριν § ἑλὼν ἔκαυσε 
 
 - Ane /. 7 
 
 ζῶντα, καὶ ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη 
 η΄. 
 
 β΄. Σεβιχὼς || 
 υἱὸς ἔτη ιδ'. 
 
 γ΄. Τάρκος ἔτη sy! (η΄.) 
 
 ε --" ᾿ 
 
 Ομοῦ εἐτὴ μ. 
 
 (Σεύηχος) 
 
 Of three Ethiop kings. 
 
 1. Sabacon,who having taken Boch- 
 choris captive, burnt him alive, and 
 reigned 8 years. 
 
 2. Sebichus, his son, reigned 14 
 years. 
 
 3. Tarcus 18 years. 
 
 Altogether 40 years, 
 
 THE TWENTY-SIXTH DYNASTY. 
 
 “Extn καὶ εἰκοστὴ δυνασ- 
 tela Σᾳιτῶν βασιλέων ἐν-- 
 
 , 
 γεᾶ. 
 
 * AO’. B. 
 § βόγχοριν Β. 
 
 + βοχχορισαΐτης Β. 
 || Β.--ὠξΊεύηχος Go. 
 
 Of nine Saite kings. 
 
 1 Σαββάκων Go. 
 4 Ασαϊτῶν Go. 
 
 
 
OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. EAT 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. ARMEN. 
 γ΄. Vapusds ἔτη s'. ut. Psammus, annis x. 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη μδ΄. Summa, anni ΧΙΗΥ͂. 
 
 THE TWENTY-FOURTH DYNASTY. 
 
 Εἰχοστὴ τετάρτη δυνασ- Vicesima quarta dynastia. 
 τείᾳ. 
 Βόχωρις * (Βόκχωρις) Σαΐ- Bocchoris Saites, annis xt1v. Sub 
 
 τῆς ἔτη wd. ἐφ᾽ οὗ ἀρνίον quo agnus locutus est. 
 ἐφϑέγξατο. [ὁμοὺ ἔτη yd’. | 
 
 THE TWENTY-FIFTH DYNASTY. 
 
 Εἰκοστὴ πέμπτη δυναστεία Vicesima quinta dynastia regum 
 Αἰδιόπων βασιλέων τριῶν. Aethiopum trium. 
 α΄. Σαββάκων, ἦ ὅς Βόχω- 1. Sabbacon, qui captivum duxit 
 
 pw αἰχμάλωτον ἑλὼν ἔκαυσε Bocchorem, et vivum combussit; reg- 
 ζῶντα, καὶ ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη navitque annis x11. 
 
 if. 
 β΄. Σεύηχος f υἱὸς ἔτη fl. 1. Sebichos ejus filius, annis x1. 
 γ΄. Ταρακὸς ἔτη ν΄. πι. Taracus, annis xx. 
 Ὅμοῦ ἔτη μδ΄. Summa, anni xrrv. 
 THE TWENTY-SIXTH DYNASTY. 
 “Extn καὶ εἰκοστὴ δυνασ- Vicesima sexta dynastia regum 
 rela Σαΐτων βασιλέων θ΄. Saitarum rx. 
 
 * Βόχχωρις Din. { Σαβάκων Din. 
 Tt Σεβιχὼς Din. Β. 
 
128 
 
 AFRIC. SCAL. 
 
 α΄. Στεφινάτης ἐτὴ ζ΄. 
 
 Bl. Νεχεψώς * ἔτη ς΄. 
 
 γ΄. Νεχαὼ Ὁ ἔτη η΄. 
 
 δ΄. Ψαμμήτιχος  (Ψαμ- 
 μίτικος) ἔτη νδ΄. 
 
 €. Νεχαὼ δεύτερος ἔτη ς΄. 
 οὗτος εἷλε τὴν Ἱερουσαλὴμ. καὶ 
 ᾿Ιωάχαζ § τὸν βασιλέα αἰχμά- 
 
 Awroy || εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπήγαγε. 
 
 ς΄. Ψάμμουδις ἕτερος ἔτη 
 ἕξ. 
 
 ζ΄. Οὔαφρις ἔτη ιδ', @ προ- 
 σέφυγον ἁλούσης ind] ᾿Ασσυ- 
 ρίων Ἱερουσαλὴμ οἱ τῶν *Tov- 
 
 δαίων ὑπόλοιποι. 
 
 ἡ΄. Λμωσις ἔτη μδ΄. 
 δ᾽. Ψαμμεχερίτης ΕἾ μῆνας 
 ͵ 
 ἘΣ 
 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη pr’. καὶ μῆνας ς΄. 
 
 MANETHO’S DYNASTIES 
 
 1. Stephinates reigned 7 years. 
 2. Nechepsos 6 years. 
 
 3. Nechao 8 years. 
 
 4, Psammeticus 54 years. 
 
 5. Nechao the second 6 years. He 
 took Jerusalem, and carried Joachaz, 
 the king, captive to Egypt. 
 
 6. Psammuthis 6 years. 
 
 7. Vaphris 19 years, to whom the 
 remainder of the Jews fled when 
 Jerusalem was taken by the Assy- 
 rians. 
 
 8. Amosis 44 years. 
 
 9. Psammecherites 6 months. 
 Altogether 150 years and six 
 months. 
 
 THE TWENTY-SEVENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 “EPdoun καὶ εἰκοστὴ δυνασ- 
 τεία Ὑ Περσῶν βασιλέων η΄. 
 
 * A. Β.--Νερεψῶς Go. 
 
 1 Vapuplrixos Go. A—aupyjruyos B. 
 
 || Go. m. 
 ἘΞ’ Ψαμμαχερίτης Go. 
 
 Of eight Persian kings. 
 
 T ναχαῶ B. 
 ὃ Ἰωαχᾶς Go. 
 
 4 ἀπὸ Β. 
 tt Βασιλεία Go. 
 
 
 
OF THE 
 EUSEB. SCAL. 
 α΄. “Aumepis (Ἀμμερὴς) 
 
 AiSlap ἔτη ιβ΄. 
 Bl. Στεφανάδις * ἔτη ΧΙ. 
 γ΄. Νεχέψως ἔτη ς!. 
 δ΄. Νεχαὼ ἔτη η]. 
 ε΄. Ψαμμιτιχὸς ἦ ἔτη pel. 
 
 ol. Νεχαὼ δεύτερος ἔτη ς΄. 
 οὗτος εἷλε τὴν Ἱερουσαλὴμ, καὶ 
 Ἰωάχας Τ τὸν βασιλέα αἰχ- 
 μάλωτον εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπήγα- 
 γεν. 
 
 ζ΄. Ψαμμοῦδις ἕτερος, ὁ 
 καὶ Ψαμμιτιχὸς ἔτη ιζ΄. 
 
 η΄. Οὔαφρις (Οὐάφρης) ἔτη 
 κε. ᾧ προσέφυγον ἀλούσης 
 ὑπὸ ᾿Ασσυρίων τῆς Ἰερουσα- 
 λὴμ οἱ τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων ὑπόλοι- 
 ποι. 
 
 δ, ἽΑμωσις ἔτη μβ΄. 
 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη ply’. 
 
 KINGS OF EGYPT, 129 
 
 ARMEN. 
 1. Ammeres Aethiops, annis xvitt. 
 
 ut. Stephinathis, annis vi. 
 ui. Nechepsus, annis vi. 
 
 tv. Nechao, annis vi. 
 
 v. Psammetichus, annis XLrv. 
 
 vi. Nechao secundus, annis_ v1. 
 Hic cepit Hierusalem, et Joachaz 
 
 regem in Aegyptum duxit captivum. 
 
 vu. Psammuthes alter qui et Psam- 
 metichus, annis xv. 
 
 vut. Vaphres, annis xxv. ad quem 
 confugerunt ab Assyriis Judeorum 
 reliqui ex Jerusalem. 
 
 1x. Amosis, annis ΧΙ. 
 
 Summa, anni cixvu. 
 
 THE TWENTY-SEVENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 Εἰκοστὴ ἑβδόμη δυναστεία 
 
 Περσῶν βασιλέων η΄. 
 
 * Στεφανάϑης 6ο.---Στεφινάϑις Din. Β. 
 1 ᾿Ιωάχαξζ Din. 
 
 Vicesima septima dynastia Persa- 
 rum regum vii. 
 
 t+ Ψαμμήτιχος Din. B. 
 
130 MANETHO’S DYNASTIES 
 
 AFRIC. SCAL. 
 
 a. Καμβύσης ἔτη εἰ τῆς 1. Cambyses reigned over Persia, 
 ἑαυτοῦ βασιλείας Περσῶν é- his own kingdom, 5 years, and over 
 βασίλευσεν Αἰγύπτου ἔτη ς΄. Egypt 6 years. 
 
 β΄. Δαρεῖος Ὑστάσπου ἔτη 2. Darius, the son of Hystaspes, 
 λς΄. 36 years. 
 γ΄. Ἐέρξης 6 μέγας ἔτη κα΄. 3. Xerxes the Great 21 years. 
 
 δ΄, ᾿Αρτάβανος (Αρταβά- 4, Artabanus 7 months. 
 νης) μῆνας ζ΄. 
 
 εἰ. ᾿Αρταξέρξης ἔτη μα΄. 5. Artaxerxes 41 years. 
 
 ς΄. Ἐῴξης μῆνας δύο. 6. Xerxes 2 months. 
 
 ζ΄. Σογδιανὸς μῆνας ζ΄. 7. Sogdianus 7 months. 
 
 η΄. Δαρεῖος Ἐέρξου ἔτη (δ΄. 8. Darius the son of Xerxes, 19 
 years. , 
 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη ρκδ΄, μῆνας δ΄. Altogether 124 years and four 
 months. 
 
 THE TWENTY-EIGHTH DYNASTY. 
 
 / 
 Einoory ὀγδόη δυναστεία. 
 
 ᾿Αμύρτεος Ἑ (Αμυρταϊος) Amyrteus, the Saite, 6 years. 
 Σαΐτης ἔτη ς΄. 
 
 THE TWENTY-NINTH DYNASTY. 
 
 "Evary καὶ εἰκοστὴ δυνασ- Of four Mendesian kings. 
 τεία. Μενδησίων βασιλέων > 
 De 
 
 * Αμύρτεως Go. + Μενδήσιοι βασιλεῖς Din. 
 
 
 
OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 131 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. ARMEN. 
 
 α΄. Καμβύσης ἔτει πέμπ- 1. Cambyses anno regni sui xv. 
 τῳ τῆς ἀντοῦ βασιλείας ἐβα- [lege v.] regnavit in Aegyptios annis 
 σίλευσεν Αἰγύπτου ἔτη γ. Ill. 
 
 β΄. Μάγοι, μῆνας ζ΄. u. Magi, mensibus vi. 
 
 γ΄. Δαρεῖος, ἔτη As’. ui. Darius, annis ΧΧΧΥ͂Ι. 
 
 Y. Ἐέρξης ὁ Δαρείου, ἔτη 1v. Xerxes Darii([filius] annis ΧΧΙ. 
 
 ‘ 
 
 κα. 
 ε΄. ᾿Αρταξέρξης [ὁ Μακρό- y. Artaxerxes, annis ΧῚ,. 
 χειρ] ἔτη μ΄. 
 ς΄. Ἐέρξης ὁ δεύτερος, μῆνας vi. Xerxes secundus, mensibus 11. 
 β. 
 ζ΄. Σογδιανὸς, μῆνας ζ΄. vu. Sogdianus, mensibus vi. 
 ἡ. Δαρεῖος ὁ Ξέρξου, ἔτρ vit. Darius Xerxis [filius] annis 
 ιθ΄, XIx. 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη px’. μῆνες δ΄. Summa, anni cxx, et menses Iv. 
 THE TWENTY-EIGHTH DYNASTY. 
 Εἰκοστὴ ὀγδόη δυναστεία. Vicesima octava dynastia. 
 ᾿Αμυρταῖος Ἐ Σαΐτης ἔτη, Amyrtzus Saites, annis ΥἹ. 
 oe 
 THE TWENTY-NINTH DYNASTY. 
 Εἰκοστὴ ἐννάτη δυναστεία Vicesima nona dynastia regum tv, 
 Μενδήσιοι βασιλεῖς δ΄. Mendesiorum. 
 
 * Αμυρτάνος Go. 
 
1382 MANETHO’S DYNASTIES 
 
 AFRIC. SCAL. 
 a. Νεφερίτης ἢ (Nexepi~ 1. Nepherites reigned 6 years. 
 της) ἔτη ς΄. 
 β΄. Αχωρις ἔτη ιγ΄. 2. Achoris 13 years. 
 γ΄. Ψάμμουδις ἡ ἔτος α΄. 8. Psammuthis 1 year. 
 δ΄, Νεφορίτης 1 (Neepi- 4. Nephorites 4 months. 
 της) μῆνας δ΄. 
 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη x, μῆνας δ΄. Altogether 20 years and four 
 
 months. 
 
 THE THIRTIETH DYNASTY. 
 
 Tptaxorry δυναστεία Σε- Of three Sebennyte kings. 
 βεννυτῶν βασιλέων τριῶν. 
 
 α΄. Νειτανέβης ἔτη ιη΄. 1. Nectanebes 18 years, 
 
 β'. Τέως ἔτη fl. 2. Teos 2 years. 
 
 γ΄. Νεκτανεβὸς § ἔτη ιη΄. 3. Nectanebes 18 years. 
 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη λη΄. Altogether 38 years. 
 
 THE THIRTY-FIRST DYNASTY. 
 
 Πρωτὴ καὶ τριακοστὴ δυ- Of three Persian kings. 
 ναστεία Περσῶν βασιλέων 
 τριῶν. 
 α΄. Ὦχος] εἰκοστῷ ἔτει 1. Ochus ruled Persia twenty 
 
 τῆς ἑαυτοῦ βασιλείας Περσῶν years, and Egypt 2 years. 
 
 ἐβασίλευσεν Αἰγύπτον ἔτη Bl. 
 
 (ς΄) 
 
 * Νεφερείτης Go. 1 ψάμουϑ:; B. 
 1 Νεφορότις Α.---Νεφορότης Go. 
 § Νεχτανέβης Go. || ὠΐχος B. 
 
OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 183 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. ARMEN. 
 al. Νεφερίτης, ἔτη ς΄. 1. Nepherites, annis vr. 
 β΄. ᾿Αχωρὶς, ἔτη ty’. u. Achoris, annis x1. 
 γ΄. Ψάμμουδις, ἔτος a’. i. Psammuthes, anno 1. 
 δ΄, Νεφερίτης, * μῆνας δ΄. ιν. Muthes, anno 1. 
 ε΄. Μοῦδις, ἔτος al. v. Nepherites, mensibus rv. 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη na’. καὶ μῆνες δ΄. Summa, anni xx1, et menses Iv. 
 
 THE THIRTIETH DYNASTY. 
 
 Τριακοστὴ δυναστεία Σε- Tricesima dynastia regum trium 
 βεννυτῶν βασιλέων τριῶν. Sebennitarum. 
 
 al. Νεκτανέβης, (Nexta- 1. Nectanebes, annis x. 
 νέβις F) ἔτη (΄. 
 
 β΄. Τέως, ἔτη β΄. u. Teos, annis 11. 
 
 γ΄. Νεκτανέβης, (Νεκτά- 1. Nectanebus, annis ὙΠ. 
 νεβος 1) ἔτη η΄. 
 
 ὍὉμοῦ ἔτη κ΄. Summa, anni xx. 
 
 THE THIRTY-FIRST DYNASTY. 
 
 Τριακοστὴ πρώτη δυναστεία Trigesima prima dynastia Persa- 
 Περσῶν [βασιλέων τριῶν. rum. 
 α΄. Ὄχος (Ὦχος δ) εἰκοσ- 1. Ochus, qui vicesimo regni sui 
 
 τῷ ἔτει τῆς ἀυτοῦ Περσῶν βα- Persarum anno, obtinuit Aegyptum 
 σιλείας κρατεῖ τῆς Αἰγύπτον annis VI. : 
 ἔτη ς΄. 
 
 * Ανεφερίτης Go. + A. 1 Din. 
 § Din. || ἄρσις ὥχου Α,-ὠἀρσησόχον Β. 
 
134 MANETHO’S DYNASTIES 
 
 AFRIC. SCAL. mm, 
 β'. ᾿Αρσῆς (" Aporns [Ὥχου) 2. Arses reigned 3 years. 
 ἔτη γ΄. 
 γ΄. Δαρεῖος ἔτη δ΄. 8. Darius 4 years. 
 Ὁμοῦ ἔτη γ' τόμου αν'. And the whole number of the years 
 in the third book 1050 eae 
 Chron, 73 to 78. 
 
 
 

 
 OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 135 
 
 EUSEB. SCAL. 
 " β΄. Me® ὃν᾿Αρσὴς || ᾿Ωχοῦ 
 Μ 
 ἔτη δ΄. 
 γ΄. Μεδ᾽ ὃν Δαρεῖος ἔτη ἕξ. 
 Ὃν ᾿Αλέξανδρος Μακεδὼν 
 . καδεῖλεν. 
 Ταῦτα τοῦ τρίτον τόμον 
 
 Maver. 
 
 ARMEN. 
 
 τι. Post quem Arses Ochi [filius ] 
 annis Iv. 
 
 τι. Post quem Darius, annis vi. 
 
 Quem Alexander Macedo occidit. 
 
 Omnia hee ex tertio Manethi 
 tomo. 
 
CANON OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT: 
 
 FROM JOSEPHUS. 
 
 SEVENTEENTH DYNASTY.* 
 
 α΄. Σάλατις ἔτη ιδ΄. 1. Salatis 19 years. 
 
 β΄. Βηὼν ἔτη μδ΄. 2. Beon 44 years. 
 
 γ΄. ᾿Απαχνὰς ἔτη As, καὶ 3. Apachnas 36 years and 7 
 μῆνας ζ΄. months. 
 
 δ΄, “Amadis ἔτη Ea’. 4. Apophis 61 years. 
 
 εἰ. "laviag ἔτη ν΄, καὶ 5. Jamas 50 years and 1 month. 
 
 μῆνα α΄. 
 ol. ἴΑσσις ern py, καὶ 6. Assis 49 years and 2 months. 
 
 μῆνας β΄. 
 EIGHTEENTH DYNASTY. 
 
 α΄. Τέϑμωσις ἔτη κε, καὶ 1. Tethmosis 25 years and 4 
 μῆνας &. months. 
 
 β΄. Χέβρων ἔτη ty’. 2. Chebron 13 years. 
 
 γ΄. ᾿Αμένωφις ἔτη xl, καὶ 3. Amenophis 20 years and 7 
 μῆνας ζ΄. months. 
 
 δ΄, ᾿Αμεσσῆς ἔτη ual, καὶ 4. Amesses 21 years and 9 months. 
 μῆνας “΄. 
 
 ε΄. Μήφρης ἔτη ιβ', καὶ 5. Mephres 12 years and 9 
 μῆνας o. months. 
 
 * The various readings to this catalogue are given infra. See Manetho on 
 the Shepherd Kings. 
 

 
 JOSEPHUS ON THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 
 
 sl Μηφραμούϑωσις ἔτη 
 κε΄, καὶ μῆνας (΄. 
 
 ζ΄. Θμῶσις ἔτη δ΄, καὶ 
 μῆνας ἡ. 
 
 ἡ. ᾿Αμένωφις ἔτη λ΄, καὶ 
 μῆνας ts 
 
 δ΄, Ὦρος ἔτη As, καὶ μῆ- 
 νας ε΄. 
 
 (΄. ᾿Ακεγχρὴς ἔτη ιβ', καὶ 
 μῆνα α΄. 
 
 ια΄. Ῥάϑωτις ἔτη δ΄. 
 
 ιβ΄. ᾿Αχεγχήρης ἔτη ιβ', 
 καὶ μῆνας εἰ. 
 
 ιγ΄. ᾿Ακεγχήρης β'. ἔτη iB’, 
 καὶ μῆνας γ΄. 
 
 ιδ΄. "Αρμαῖς ἔτη δ΄, καὶ 
 
 μῆνα αἱ. 
 
 te» Ῥαμέσσης ἔτος a καὶ 
 μῆνας δ΄. 
 
 ς΄. ᾿Αρμέσσης 
 ἔτη ἕς!, καὶ μῆνας β'. 
 
 ιζ΄. ᾿Αμένωφις ἔτη ιδ΄, καὶ 
 
 Μιαμμοῦ 
 
 μῆνας ot 
 in» Σέδωσις καὶ Ῥαμέσ- 
 
 σης ἢ. 
 
 Τέϑμωσις γὰρ ἦν βασι- 
 λεὺς ὅτε ἐξήεταν (οἱ ποίμενες). 
 ᾿Απὸ δὲ τούτων μεταξὺ τῶν 
 
 / / 
 βασιλέων var αὐτόν ἐστι 
 
 137 
 
 6. Mephramuthosis 25 years and 
 
 10 months. 
 7. Thmosis 9 years and 8 months. 
 
 8. Amenophis 30 years and 10 
 
 months. 
 
 9. Orus 36 years and 5 months. 
 
 10. Acenchres 12 years and 1 
 month. 
 
 11. Rathotis 9 years. 
 
 12. Acencheres 12 years and 5 
 months. 
 
 13. Acencheres II. 12 years and 
 3 months. 
 
 14. Armais 4 years and 1 month. 
 
 15. Ramesses 1 year and 4 months. 
 
 16. Armesses the son of Miam- 
 mus 66 years and 2 months. 
 
 17. Amenophis 19 years and 6 
 months. 
 
 18. Sethosis and Ramesses. 
 
 Jos. contr. Ap. I. 15. 
 
 Tethmosis was king when the shep- 
 herds went out of Egypt. From these 
 (the shepherd) kings there intervenes 
 a period of 393+ years to the two bro- 
 
 * Qy. Σέϑως ὃ καὶ Ραμέσσης, who is Ramesses. 
 + The sum of the 17 kings of the 18th dynasty amounts only to 333 
 
 years. 
 page. 
 
 The reading 393 is however confirmed by the extracts in the following 
 Iam indebted to Mr. Cullimore for the observation that the deficiency 
 
 of 60 years occurs in the 7th and 11th reigns which ought to have been each 39 
 
 years. 
 
 This correction, which may be found in some of the other lists, makes 
 
 the Canon completely harmonize with the Hieroglyphic dates. 
 
138 
 
 ΕΣ 
 τριᾳχόσιω ἐνενηχοντατρία ETN, 
 μέχρι τῶν δύο ἀδελφῶν Σέϑω 
 καὶ Ἑρμαίου, ὧν τὸν μεν Σένψων 
 
 ΝΜ 
 Αἴγυπτον τὸν δὲ Ἕρμαιον Δά- 
 Ὁ ’ 
 ναὸν pwetovopacdnval φησιν. 
 a 
 Ov ἐκβαλὼν ὁ Σέϑως ἐβασί- 
 ΕΣ 
 λευσεν ἔτη va. Καὶ μετ᾽ ἀυ- 
 \ ε , ~ enw 
 τὸν ὃ πρεσβύτερος τῶν υἱῶν 
 
 αὖ τοῦ Ῥάμψης ἕς΄. 
 
 JOSEPHUS ON THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 
 
 thers Sethos and Hermzeus of whom 
 he says Sethos was called Aegyptus, 
 and Hermzeus Danaus. Sethos after 
 he had expelled Hermzeus reigned 59 
 years. After him his eldest son Ramp- 
 ses reigned 66 years.—Jos. contr. 
 Ap. I. 26. 
 
 In the 16th chapter Josephus has the following— 
 
 ~ ͵ὔ -Ὁ 
 Δῆλον δέ ἐστιν ἐκ τῶν εἰρη- 
 μένων ἐτῶν τοῦ χρόνου συλλο- 
 / e ε , 
 γισθέντος ὅτι οἱ καλούμενοι 
 , ε ͵ὕ δὶ / 
 ποιμένες, ἡμέτεροι OE πρόγονοι; 
 τρισὶ καὶ ἐνενήκοντα καὶ τρια- 
 6 ᾿ 7 ri ὦ 
 κοσίοις πρόσθεν ἔτεσιν, ἐκ τῆς 
 Αἰγύπτου ἀπαλλαγέντες, τὴν 
 4 4, > , a 
 χώραν ταύητν ἀπῴχκησαν, ἢ 
 3. ΝΜ 
 Δαναὸν εἰς ΓΑργος ἀφίκεσθαι. 
 And in the 2d chapter 
 Μανεθὼς μὲν γὰρ κατὰ τὴν 
 Τεθμώσιος βασιλείαν ἀπαλλα- 
 Led / 
 γῆναί φησιν ἐξ Αἰγύπτου τοὺς 
 ᾽ ,, ΨΥ lad. 
 Ἰουδαίους, πρὸ ἐτῶν τριανο- 
 , “Ὁ - 
 clay ἐνενηκοντατριῶν τῆς εἰς 
 Λυσί- 
 
 paxos δὲ κατὰ Βόκχωριν τὸν 
 
 "Apyos Δαναοῦ φυγῆς. 
 
 / , LS aus 
 βασιλέα, τουτέστι πρὸ ἐτῶν 
 / 
 MoAwy 
 
 Ν A YU \ 
 δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι τινὲς ὡς αὐτοῖς 
 
 ,ὔ 
 χιλίων ἑπτακοσίων. 
 
 ἔδοξεν. ὋὉ δέ γε πάντων πιστό 
 τατος ᾿Απίων ὡρίσατο τὴν ἔξο- 
 δὸν ἀκριβῶς κατὰ τὴν ἐβδόμην 
 ᾿Ολυμπιάδα, καὶ ταύτης ἔτος 
 εἶναι πρῶτον, ἐν ᾧ φησι Kap- 
 
 , / 
 χηδόνα Φοίνικες ἔκτισαν. 
 
 It is manifest from a computation 
 of the above-mentioned years, that 
 the Shepherds (our ancestors) were 
 driven out from Egypt, and left that 
 country three hundred and ninety- 
 three years previous to the departure 
 of Danaus to Argos. 
 
 of the second book :— 
 
 Manetho says that the Jews (i. e. 
 the Shepherds) left Egypt in the 
 reign of Tethmosis three hundred 
 and ninety-three years before the 
 flight of Danaus to Argos. Lysi- 
 
 machus that it was in the reign of 
 Bocchoris, i.e. one thousand seven 
 Molo and 
 some others place it as seems good 
 to them. 
 
 hundred years before. 
 
 But Apion the most cor- 
 rect (ironically) of all, fixes it de- 
 cidedly at the first year of the seventh 
 Olympiad in which he says the Phoe- 
 nicians founded Carthage. 
 
 
 
 
 
CANON OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT: 
 
 ‘ 
 
 FROM SYNCELLUS. 
 
 ΑἸΓΎΠΤΟΥ τῆς πάλαι Me- Canon of the kings of Esypt for- 
 
 ραΐας βασιλέων ἔτη. merly called Mestrza. 
 
 a. Meorpatu * 6 καὶ Μή- 1. Mestraim who is Menes: he 
 νης ἡ ἔτη λε΄. reigned 35 years. 
 
 Bl. Koupddys t ἔτη by. 2. Curodes 68 years. 
 
 γ΄. ᾿Αρίσταρχρς ἔτη λδ΄. 3. Aristarchus 34 years. 
 
 δ΄, Σπώνιος ἔτη As. 4, Spanius 36 years? 
 
 ε΄. ς΄, ᾿Ανεπιγράφων ἔτη 5. 6. Anonymous 72 years. 
 οβ΄. 
 
 ζ΄. Ὁ Σέραπις ὃ κγ΄. 7. Serapis 23 years. 
 
 ἡ. Σεσόγχωσις ἔτη ub’. 8. Sesonchosis 49 years. 
 
 δ΄, ᾿Αμενέμης ἔτη κ΄. 9. Amenemes 29 years. 
 
 “. “Auacis|| ἔτη β΄. 10. Amasis 2 years. 
 
 ια΄. ᾿Ακεσέφϑρης ἔτη ιγ΄. 11. Acesephthres 13 years. 
 
 ἢ 4β΄. ᾿Αγχορεὺς J ἔτη δ΄. 12. Anchoreus 9 years. 
 
 wy. ᾿Αρμιῦσῆης ἘῈ ἔτη δ΄. 13. Armiyses 4 years. 
 
 ιδ΄, Χαμοὶς ἦν 16... Ὑ 14. Chamois 12 years. 
 
 se. Μιαμοὺς tt ἔτη ιδ' 15. Miamous 14 years. 
 
 is’. ᾿Αμεσῆσις ἔτη Eel. 16. Amesesis 65 years. 
 * Μηστραῖμ Sc. + Méns Go. Sc. 
 1 Κουρούδης Go.—Kotdgous Sc. § ὠσιροπὶς B. 
 || Azwoss Go.m. Se. 4“ Αχορεὺς Go.—Ayweeds Se. 
 *® Αμιῦσῆς Sc. tt xs’. Sc 
 
 ΤΊ Δμεσίσης ἔτη En’ is substituted by Go. Sc. and A, for the 15th, while the 
 16th is left vacant, 14 years being assigned for the period of the reign. 
 
140 
 
 ιζ΄, O8ons* ἔτη ν΄. 
 
 ιη΄. Ῥαμεσὴς ἔτη 20. 
 
 ιδ΄, “Ῥαμεσσομενὴς ἡ ἔτη 
 ιε΄. 
 
 κ΄, Οὐσιμάρης t ἔτη λα΄. 
 
 κα΄. Ῥαμεσσήσεως ὃ ἔτη 
 ny’. 
 
 κβ΄. Ῥαμεσσαμένω || ἔτη 
 1, 
 
 ny’. Ῥαμεσσὴ  ᾿ἸἸΙουβασ- 
 σὴ ἔτη AY. 
 
 ud. Ῥαμεσσὴ Οὐάφρου “ἢ 
 ἔτη κ΄. ' 
 
 κε΄. Κόγχαρις sme ἔτη ἘΠῚ 
 
 Τούτω τῷ ett ἔτει τοῦ 
 κε΄ βασιλεύσαντος Κογχάρεως 
 τῆς Αἰγύπτου ἐπὶ τῆς ις΄ δυ- 
 ναστείας τοῦ Κυνικοῦ λεγομένου 
 κύκλου παρὰ τῷ Mavedt@, ἀπὸ 
 τοῦ πρώτου βασιλέως καὶ οἷ- 
 κιστοῦ Μεστραὶμ δὲ τῆς Ai- 
 γύπτου, πληροῦνται ἔτη w, 
 βασιλέων κε΄. 
 
 us. Σιλίτης ἔτη ιδ΄. πρῶ- 
 τος τῶν ς΄ τῆς ιζ'. δυναστείας 
 παρὰ Μανεδῷ. 
 
 χζ. Βαίων ἔτη μδ΄. 
 
 un. ᾿Απαχνᾶς ἔτη Ac’. 
 
 ΣΙ ἔΑφωφις ἔτη Ea’. 
 
 N. Σέϑως ἔτη ν΄. 
 
 * Οὔση Go. Sc. 
 = 
 
  οὐσιμάρη Β.--- Θυσιμάρης Go. 
 
 SYNCELLUS’ CANON 
 
 17. Uses 50 years. 
 18. Rhameses 29 years. 
 19. Rhamessomenes 15 years. 
 
 20. Usimares 31 years. 
 21. Rhamesseseos 23 years. 
 
 22. Rhamessameno 19 years. 
 23. Rhamesse Jubasse 39 years. 
 
 24. Rhamesse the son of Vaphris 
 29 years. 
 
 25. Concharis 5 years. 
 
 In the 5th year of Concharis, the 
 25th king of Egypt of the 16th dy- 
 nasty, which is called by Manetho 
 the Cynic Cycle, was completed in 
 25 reigns a period of 700 years from 
 Mestraim the first native king of 
 
 Egypt. 
 
 26. Silites 19 years, the first of the 
 6 kings of the 17th dynasty accord- 
 ing to Manetho. 
 
 27. Beon 44 years. 
 
 28. Apachnas 36 years. 
 
 29. Aphophis 61 years. 
 
 30. Sethos 50 years. 
 
 T ῥαμεσομενὴς B. 
 ὃ ΡῬαμεσήσεως Sc. 
 
 || Ῥαμμεσσαμενῶς Sc.—Pousoceuévw Go. 
 4] ῥαμμεσσηΐ Racy Β.---Ραμεσσῆ τοῦ Βαητῆ Go. 
 
 ** Ραμεσσηούαφρος Sc, 
 
 its Gosm) 
 
 ΤΊ κόγχαρης Β.---κόγχαρος Sc. 
 δὲ Μεστρὲμ Go. 
 
 
 
OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 141 
 
 λα΄. Κήρτως ἢ ἔτη xa. 31. Certos 29 years according to 
 yard Ἰώσηππον, κατὰ δὲ τὸ Josephus, but according to Manetho 
 Μανεδῶ ἔτη μδ΄. 44, ' 
 
 λβ΄. ᾿Ασὴδ ἔτη x. 32. Aseth 20 years. 
 
 Οὗτος, προσέϑηκε τῶν ἐνι- He added the 5 intercalary days to 
 
 a 
 
 αυτῶν τὰς εἰ ἐπαγομενας, xat the year: and under him the Egyp- 
 ἐπὶ αὐτοῦ, ὥς φασιν, ἐχρημά- tian year which had previously been 
 τισεν the’ ἡμερῶν, ὁ Alyurtia- reckoned 360 days only was increased 
 χὺς ἐνιαυτὸς TE’ μόνον ἡμερῶὼν to 365. Under him also the calf was 
 πρὸ τούτου μετρούμενος. Ἐπὶ deified and called Apis. 
 
 αὐτοῦ ὃ μόσχος Yeororqvels 
 
 "Amis ἐκλήϑη. 
 
 FROM SYNCELLUS AND EUSEBIUS. 
 
 SYNCEL, EUSEB. ARMEN. f HIERON. 
 λγ΄. ΓΑμωσις ὃ καὶ Τέϑμω- 1. Amosis ann. ΧΧΥ. 
 μ᾿ , 
 
 σις ETH KS δ 
 
 "Auooig xs. Amosis xxv. 
 λδ΄, Χεβρὼν ἔτη ιγ΄. ut. Chebron ann. ΧΠΙ. 
 Χεβρὼν «ιγ΄. Chebron xm. 
 Ad. ᾿Αμεμφῆς] ἔτη sel. iu. Amenophes xxi. 
 ᾿Αμεμφῆς ιε΄. Amenophis ΧΧΙ. 
 As’. ᾿Αμενσῆς ἔτη ια΄. iv. Memphres xu. 
 ᾿Αμενσῆς 1a’. Mephres xu. 
 * Κῆρτος Go. ἡ ἀσσῆϑ B. 
 
 + In the Armenian Canon of Eusebius, a Theban dynasty, which he calls 
 the 16th, is placed as the first, to which is assigned a period of 190 years. This 
 is followed by the 17th dynasty of the Shepherds which lasts 103 years. No 
 names are given in either. The first part of Hieronymus’ old Latin version of 
 Eusebius is lost. The lists therefore both of the Armenian Canon and of Hiero- 
 nymus’ version commence with this the 18th dynasty of Diospolites. The names 
 of the 32 kings given above, are merely those of Syncellus in the Greek 
 opposite. 
 
 ὃ xB’ Go. || Δμέφης Go, 8ς.---ὠἀμεμφὶς B. 
 
142 
 
 SYNCEL. 
 
 λζ΄. Micppaypatdwars ἔτη ist. 
 
 Μισφραγμούθωσις i’. 
 λη΄. Μισφρὴς ἔτη ny’. 
 Μισφρὴς ἔτη χγ. 
 λδ΄. Τούϑιμωσις ἔτη A. 
 Τούθμωσις κθ΄. 
 ul. ᾿Αμενῶφδϑις ἔτη λδ΄. 
 ᾿Αμενῶφθις rd. 
 
 Οὗτος ὃ ᾿Αμενῶφσις ἢ ἐστιν 
 ὃ Μέμνων εἶναι νομιζόμενος καὶ 
 φϑεγγόμενος Aidoc. 
 
 AiSiones ἀπὸ Ἰνδοῦ ποτα- 
 μοῦ ἀναστάντες πρὸς τῇ Ai- 
 γύπτῳ ᾧκησαν. 
 
 μα!. ρος μη. 
 
 EoAwpog μζ΄. 
 μβ΄. ᾿Αχενχερὴς κε΄. 
 Αχερχερῆς κε΄. 
 pay’ Adapts “a 
 Αδυρὶς “0 
 ya. Χενχερὴς us’. 
 Χενχερὴς us. 
 
 με΄. "Αχερρῆς Ὑ ἔτη yf. ἢ 
 
 nat λ΄, 
 
 Αχερὴς η΄. 
 
 us’. ᾿Αρμαῖος ὁ καὶ Δα- 
 ναὸς, ἔτη δ΄. 
 
 Δρμαὶς δ΄. 
 
 μζ΄. Ῥαμεσσῆς 6 καὶ Ai- 
 γυπτος t ξη.. 
 
 Ῥαμεσσῆς ἕξη. 
 
 * ἀμμενοφϑὴς Β. 
 
 EU. SC. 
 
 SYNCELLLUS’ AND EUSEBIUS’ 
 
 ARMEN. HIERON. 
 ν. Mispharmuthosis xtv1. 
 
 Misphragmuthosis xxv. 
 
 vi. ‘Tuthmosis rx. 
 Tuthmosis 1x. 
 vu. Amenophthis xxx1. 
 Amenophis xxx1. 
 Hic ille Amenophthis est, qui 
 
 Memnon ipse creditus fuit, lapis lo- 
 
 quax. 
 
 vin. Orus XXXVII. 
 Orus ΧΧΧΥΠΙ. 
 1x. Achencheres x1. 
 Achencherres xi. 
 x. Athoris 1x. 
 Achoris vit. 
 x1. Chencheres xvi. 
 Chencherres xvii. 
 xu. Acheres yur. 
 
 Acherres vu. 
 xu. Cheres xy. Cherres xv. 
 
 xiv. Armais qui et Danaus v. 
 
 Armais vy. 
 xv. Aegyptus LXVIII. 
 
 Remesses LXvull. 
 
 xvi. Menophis Menophes xt. 
 
 + Αχερὴς Go.—The four above are given in both the Greek catalogues as 
 
 Ethiopians. 
 
 1 Αἰγύπτιος Go. 
 
 
 

 
 CANONS OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 143 
 
 SYNCEL. EU. SC. ARMEN. HIERON. 
 XIX DYNASTIA. 
 1. Sethosis Sethos ty. 
 ur. Rampses Ramses Lxv1. 
 μη΄. ᾿Αμένωφις * ἔτη η]. ΠῚ. Amenophis xt. 
 Αμένωφις η΄. Amenophtes xt. 
 
 iv. Amenemes xxv. 
 Ammenemes xxv1. 
 pS! Θούωρις ιζ΄. v. Thuoris yi. 
 
 Θουαρις ιζ΄. Thuoris vu. 
 Thuoris Aegyptiorum rex ab Ho- 
 mero Polybus vocatur maritus Al- 
 
 candre. De eo meminit in Odyssea. 
 
 XX DYNASTIAT ANNIS CLXXVIII. 
 
 Yi. Νεχεψὼς ιδ΄. 50. Nechepsos 19 years. 
 Νεχεψῶς ist. 
 να΄. Ψάμμουδις ιγ΄. 51. Psammuthis 13. 
 Ψάμμουδις vy. 
 ree Stet ri: Gaal acd. 
 Dew ie τὰ, 10) © sel. 
 νγ΄. Kijprost ις΄. 53. Certus 16, 
 Κῆρτος ιβ΄. 
 νδ΄, “Ῥάμψις με!. 54. Rhampsis 45. 
 Ράμψις με΄. 
 vel. ᾿Αμενσὴς ὃ καὶ ᾽᾿Ἄμμε- 55. Amenses who is Ammenemes 
 νέμης § κς!. 26. 
 Αμμένσης xs". 
 ys". ᾿Οχυρὰς ιδ΄. 56. Ochyras 14. 
 
 Οχυρεὺς ιδ', 
 ΧΧῚ DYNASTIA TANITARUM. 
 νζ΄. ᾿Αμενδῆς || κζ΄. 1. Amendis xxv1. 
 Ἀμεδῆς κζ΄. Semendis xxv1. 
 
 * ἀμενώφης Ἀ.---α μενοφὶς Go. 
 
 + Neither of the Latin versions give the names of the 20th dynasty. The 
 names substituted above are merely translations of the Greek of Syncellus 
 opposite. 
 
 1 Κήρτως Din. § Αμενέμης Οο.---ἀνμενέμης A. || Αμεδὴς Go, A. 
 
144 SYNCELLUS’ AND EUSEBIUS’ 
 
 SYNCEL. EU. Sc. 
 yn» Θούωρις ἢ ἔτη ν΄. 
 Θούωρις γ΄. 
 Οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ παρ Ὃμήρῳ 
 Πόλυβος fT ᾿Αλκάνδρας t ἀνηρ 
 ἐν ᾿Οδυσσείᾳ φερόμονος. 
 yl. ἔΛλϑωϑις 6 καὶ Φουσα- 
 vos ἔτη χη. Ed! οὗ σεισμοὶ 
 κατὰ τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἐγένοντο, 
 μηδέπω γεγονότες ἐν αὐτῇ πρὸ 
 τούτου. 
 Adadig ὁ καὶ Φούσωρος χη. 
 ξ΄. Κενκένης A. 
 Κενκόνης Ad’. 
 ξα΄. Οὐεννέφης § ἔτη μβ'. 
 Οὐεννέφης rv. 
 EB’. Σουσακεὶμ ] ἔτη λδ΄. 
 
 / 
 Σουσακεὶμ Λίβυας καὶ Αἰ- 
 
 σίοπας καὶ Τρωγλοδύτας παρ- 
 
 έλαβε πρὸ τὴς Ἱερουσαλήμ. 
 Σουσακεὶμ λδ΄. 
 by’. Ψούενος κε΄. 
 Levinpovepos uel. 
 εξ΄. Νεφέχερης ς". 
 Nepenepns ς΄. 
 ξδ΄. ᾿Αμμενῶφις δ΄. 
 Αμμενῶφις J. 
 Eo", Σαΐτης ιε΄. 
 
 Σαίτης ιε΄. 
 
 ξζ΄. Ψινάχης δ΄. 
 Ψινάχης δ΄. 
 
 * § ϑούωρης A. Β. 
 1 ἀἄλκανδρος A. B. 
 || Σουσσακεὶμ Go. 
 
 ARMEN. 
 
 HIERON. 
 
 1. Pseusenes xii. 
 Pseusennes Xt. 
 111. Ammenophis 1x. 
 Amenophthis 1x. 
 tv. Nephercheres iv. 
 Nepherchenes ΤΥ. 
 
 vy. Osochor vi. 
 Osochor γι. 
 
 vi. Psinaches rx. 
 Spinaches 1x. 
 
 1 Πολύβους Vulg. 
 § οὐέννεφις Β. 
 4 Αμμενώφης Go. 
 
 ee 
 

 
 CANONS OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 145 
 
 SYNCEL. EU. SC. 
 
 ξη΄. Πετουβάστης ἔτη μδ΄. 
 Πετουβάστης ud. 
 Eas ᾿σώρδων Ὧι 
 Οσόρνων δ΄. 
 ο΄. Ψάμμος (. 
 Ψάμμος (΄. 
 
 οα΄. Κόγχαρις κα΄. 
 Κόγχαρις zal. 
 οβ΄. ᾿Οσόρδϑων se. 
 Οσόρϑων se’. 
 ογ΄. Τακαλῶφις * ιγ΄. 
 Τακελῶφις sy 
 
 οδ΄. Βόκχωρις T py. t 
 Βόχωρις μδ΄. 
 Βόκχωρις ὃ Αἰγυπτίοις ἐνο- 
 μοδέτει, ἐφ᾽ οὗ λόγος ἀρνίον 
 
 φθέγξασθαι. 
 
 οε'. Σαβάκων Αἰθίοψ || ἔτη 
 1p. 
 Σαβάκων ιβ΄. 
 
 Οὗτος τὸν Βόκχωριν αἰχμάλω-- 
 
 Toy λαβὼν ζῶντα ἔκαυσεν. 
 os. Σεβήχων ιβ΄. 
 Σεβήκων ιβ΄. 
 οζ΄. Ταράχης x’. 
 Ταράχης κ'. 
 
 * Τακελόφης αο.---τοακελώφης A. 
 § βόκχωρης Β. 
 
 1 μ' B. 
 
 ARMEN. HIERON. 
 vu. Psusennes xxxv. 
 Psusennes xxxv. 
 XXII DYNASTIA BUBASTARUM. 
 1. Sesonchusis ΧΧΙ- 
 Sesonchosis ΧΧΙ. 
 mu. Osorthon xy. 
 Osorthon xy. 
 ut. Tachelotis xut. 
 Tacellothis xt. 
 XXIII DYNASTIA TANITARUM. 
 1. Petubastis xxy. 
 Petubastes xxy. 
 τι. Osorthon rx. 
 Osorthon 1x. 
 11. Psammus x. 
 Psammus x. 
 XXIV DYNASTIA. 
 1. Bocchoris xiv. 
 Bocchoris Saites ΧΕΙ. 
 
 XXV DYNASTIA AETHIOPUM. 
 τ. Sabacon Aethiops x11. 
 
 Sabacon x11. 
 
 τι. Sebichus x11. 
 Sevichus xu. 
 
 mi. Tarachus xx. 
 
 Taracos xx. 
 
 + βόκχαρις Ἀ.---βόκχορης B. 
 || αἰϑίωψ Β. 
 
 U 
 
146 SYNCELLUS’ AND EUSEBIUS’ 
 
 SYNCEL. EU. SC. ARMEN. HIERON. 
 XXVI DYNASTIA SAITARUM. 
 on. ᾿Αμαὴς ἔτη λη. 1. Ammeres Aethiops x1. 
 Δρμαὶς Ay. Ammerres Aethiops xu. 
 οδ΄. Στεφινάδης κζ΄. ut. Stephinatis vi. 
 Στεφινάδις κζ'. Stephinatis vit. 
 π'. Nexepac™* s9/. ut. Nechepsus v1. 
 Νεχεψὸς ιγ΄. Nechepsos vi. 
 πα΄. Νεχαὼ η΄. iv. Nechao vit. 
 Νεχαὰβ η΄. Nechao vin. 
 πβ΄. Ψαμμήτιχος ιδ΄. v. Psammedichus xttv. 
 Ψαμμίτιχος ιδ'. Psammitichus xtiv. 
 πγ΄. Νεχαὼ β' Φαραὼ δ΄. γι. Nechao vi. 
 Νεχαὰβ β΄... δ᾽. Nechao secundus ΥἹ. 
 md’. Ψάμμουδις 1 ἕτερος ὁ vu. Psammuthes alter qui et 
 καὶ Ψαμμήτιχος § (ζ΄. Psammetichus ΧΥΤΙ. 
 Ψαμμούδης (ζ΄. Psammitichus alter qui et 
 Psammus x1. 
 me. Οὔαφρις λδ΄. vu. Vaphres xxv. 
 Οὐάφρης λδ΄. Vaphres xxx. 
 ms. ἔΑμωσις . 1x. Amosis xii. 
 Apacis v!, Amasis XLit. 
 
 xxvil. Aegyptiorum dynastia Per- 
 see. Obtinet quippe Aegyptum sexto 
 regni sui anno (quinto) Cambyses ; 
 efficiuntur autem usque ad Darium 
 Xerxis filium ann. cxxtv. (cx1.) 
 
 Ἕως τούτου ἡ τῶν Αἰγυπ- The kingdom of Egypt after hav- 
 thay βασιλεία διαρκέσασα ἐν ing continued 2211 years through a 
 δυναστείας 1, βασιλεῦσι δὲ series of 10 dynasties and 86 kings, 
 as’, €teat, Bora’ ὑπο Καμβύ- was subdued by Cambyses in the 
 σου xadypedy ἐπὶ τοῦ mo’ reign of Amosis the 86th king from 
 βασιλεύσαντος τῆς Μεστραίας Mestraim, who is the same as Menes, 
 
 * Naxelois Go. 
 1 Ψαμμίτιχος Go.—poouplriyos Α.--- ἀπ αμίτειχος B. 
 1 ψάμμονθης Δ.--οψαμουϑὴς Β. § Ψαμμιτιχὸς υ]ρ.---Ψαμιτικὸς Β. 
 
 
 
CANONS OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 147 
 
 SYNCEL. EU. SC. 
 
 nro Αἰγύπτου χώρας ᾿Αμώ- 
 σεως, ἀπὸ τοῦ πρώτου αὐτῶν 
 Μεστραῖμ τοῦ καὶ Μηνέως.... 
 ΠΡ -- Enewe δὲ ἡ Al- 
 γυπτος ὑπὸ Πέρσας ἔτι ἕως 
 Δαρείου τοῦ Ἐέρξου. Ἔστιν 
 οἷν xf δυναστεία, καϑ᾿ ἣν 
 Πέρσαι ἐκράτησαν ἀπὸ εἶ 
 ἕτους Καμβύσου. 
 
 atl. Καμβύσης ἔτη γ΄. 
 
 πη. Μάγοι ἄδελφοὶ δύο 
 μῆνας ζ΄. 
 
 πὸ. Δαρεῖος Ὑστάσπου 
 ἔτη Ast. 
 
 Y. Ἐέρξης ἔτη x’. 
 
 Sal. "Αρτάβανος μῆνας ζ΄. 
 
 4B’. ᾿Δρταξέρξης ἔτη μα’. 
 
 γ΄. Ἐέρξης μῆνας β΄. 
 
 4B’. Σογδιανὸς μῆνας ζ΄. 
 
 bel. Δαρεῖος ὁ Νόδος ἔτη 
 
 Αἴγυπτος ἀπέστη Περσῶν 
 
 δευτέρῳ ἔτει Νόνου Δάρειου. 
 
 45". ᾿Αμυρταῖος Σαΐτης 
 ἔτη ς΄. 
 
 ᾿Αμυρταῖος Σαΐτης ς΄. 
 
 4ζ΄. Νεφερίτης ς΄. 
 Νεφερίτης ς΄. 
 
 son of Xerxes. 
 therefore is that during which the 
 Persians held Egypt in subjection 
 from the 5th year of Cambyses. 
 
 HIERON,. 
 
 of that part of Egypt which is called 
 the Mestrzan region. . . . . Egypt 
 remained under the dominion of the 
 Persians till the time of Darius the 
 
 The 27th dynasty 
 
 87. Cambyses 3 years. * 
 88. The Magi two brothers 7 
 
 89. Darius the son of Hystaspes 
 
 90. Xerxes 20} years. 
 
 91, Artebanus 7 months. 
 92. Artaxerxes 40 years. 
 93. Xerxes II. 2 months. 
 94. Sogdianus 7 months. 
 95. Darius Nothus 21 years. 
 
 Egypt revolted from Persia in the 
 second year of Darius Nothus. 
 XXVIII DyNasTIA. t 
 1. Amurtzeus Saites vr. 
 
 Amurtzeus Saites vi. 
 
 XXIX DYNASTIA MENDESIORUM. 
 τ. Ephirites vr. 
 
 1. Nepherites v1. 
 
 * Eu. Ar. allows only 2 years to Cambyses, reckoning the 7 months of the 
 Magi as one year. Hieron. gives him four, omitting the Magi in the Canon. 
 
 + 21 Eu. Ar.%mits. 
 
 { The Armenian reckons this and the two following as the 28th dynasty. 
 
 Hieronymus divides them. 
 
148 SYNCELLUS’ AND EUSEBIUS’ CANONS, &c. 
 
 SYNCEL. EU. 86. ARMEN. HIERON. 
 4’. ΓΑχωρις ἔτη ιγ΄. us. Achoris x1. 
 Αχώρις ty’. ut. Achoris x1. 
 45], Ψάμμουνις β'. 1v. Psammuthes 1. 
 Ψάμμουδις β'. ut. Psammuthis 1. 
 pe ov oe μῆνας Ἐ δ. v. Nepherites menses ty. 
 Μνᾶς ἔτη δ΄. tv. Nepherites menses rv. 
 XXX DYNASTIA SEBENNITARUM. 
 pa’. Νεκτανέβης η΄. vi. Nectanebus xvu. 
 Νεκτανέβης 4.7 1. Nectanebis xvi. - 
 ρβ΄. Νεκτάνεβος β', ἔτη vir. Teos 1. 
 inl. 
 Τέως β'. u. Teos 1. 
 py. Teds β'. vit. Nectanebus xvitl. 
 NextaveBas ιη΄. ur. Nectanebos xvii. 
 XXXI DYNASTIA PERSARUM. 
 pd’. Ὦχος β' 1. Ochus 1x. 
 Oxo “. Ochus x. 
 pe’. ᾿Αρσῆς "Ὥχου ἀδελφὸς π. Arses Ochi 111. 
 ὃ: Ξ 
 Apo 8. Arses Ochi tv. 
 ρς΄. Δαρεῖος ς΄. iu. Darius vi. 
 
 Darius Arsami γι. 
 
 * Din.—Vulg. Myvais.—Sc. in the Canon at the end gives it Μοῦϑις ἔτος a,” 
 + ογ. Se. can. 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 CANON OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT: 
 
 FROM DIODORUS SICULUS. 
 
 ΜΥΘΟΛΟΓΟΥ͂ΣΙ δ᾽ αὐτῶν τινὲς 
 τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ἄρξαι τῆς Αἰ- 
 γύπτου Seods τε καὶ ἥρωας ἔτη 
 βραχὺ λείποντα τῶν μυρίων 
 καὶ ὀκτακισχιλίων, καὶ δεῶν 
 ἔσχατον βασιλεῦσαι τὸν 1σι- 
 δος Ὧρον. 
 τὴν χώραν βεβασιλεῦσδϑαι φα- 
 
 “Lx? ἀνδιρώπων δὲ 
 
 σὶν ἀπὸ μυριάδος ἔτη βραχὺ 
 λείποντα τῶν πεντακισχιλίων, 
 μέχρι τῆς ἑκατοστῆς καὶ ὀγδοη- 
 κοστῆς Ὀλυμπιάδος. xan” ἣν 
 ἡμεῖς μὲν παρεβάλομεν εὶς Ai- 
 γυπτον, ἐβασίλευε δὲ Πτολε- 
 μαῖος, 6 νέος Διόνυσος χρημα- 
 τίζων. 
 
 Τούτων δὲ τὰ μὲν πλεῖστά 
 κατασκεῖν τὴν ἀρχὴν ἐγχωρίους 
 βασιλεῖς, ὀλίγα δὲ Aidionas 
 
 ΜΝ , , 
 ual Πέρσας καὶ Μακεδόνας. 
 
 Αἰϑίοπας μὲν οὖν ἄρξαι 
 
 Some of them fable that the Gods 
 and Heroes first reigned in Egypt 
 during a period little less than eighteen 
 thousand years ; and that the last of 
 the gods who reigned was Horus 
 the son of Isis. They also relate 
 that the kingdom was governed by 
 men during a series of nearly fifteen 
 thousand years to the hundred and 
 eightieth Olympiad in which we have 
 visited Egypt which was during the 
 reign of Ptolemy who bears the title 
 of the younger Dionysus. 
 
 The kings of Egypt were for the 
 most part natives of the country, but 
 the Ethiopians, Persians and Mace- 
 donians acquired the empire for some 
 short periods. 
 
 There four 
 
 reigned altogether 
 
150 
 
 , > \ ‘\ err 
 τέσσαρας ὃν κατὰ τὸ ἑξῆς; 
 ΕΣ 
 ἀλλὰ ἐκ διαστήματος, ETH 
 τὰ πάντα βραχὺ λείποντα τῶν 
 A 
 ἐξ καὶ τριάκοντα. 
 Πέρσας δὲ ἡγήσασθαι 
 , - ‘$ xv 
 Καμβύσου τοῦ βασιλέως τοῖς 
 4 Ἂν 
 ὅπλοις καταστρεψαμένου τὸ 
 μη / \ Ae Ν 
 ἔθνος, πέντε πρὸς τοῖς ἑκατὸν 
 , ~ 
 καὶ τριάκοντα ἔτεσι; σὺν ταῖς 
 nx > / > / 
 τῶν Αἰγυπτίων ἀποστάσεσιν, 
 ἃς ἐποιήσαντο, φέρειν ὀυ δυνά- 
 μενοι τὴν τρωχύτητα τῆς ἐπισ- 
 4 \ Ν > \ > 
 τασίας, καὶ τὴν εἰς τοὺς ἐγ- 
 , 
 χωρίους θέους ἀσέβειαν. 
 Ν 
 Ἐσχάτους δὲ Μακεδόνας 
 bu 
 ἄρξαι, καὶ τοὺς ἀπὸ Μακεδό- 
 ag \ ν Υ, 
 voy ἐξ ἔτη πρὸς τοὶς διακοσίοις, 
 ἊΝ 
 καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα. 
 Ν \ - ͵ 
 Τοὺς δὲ Aamo «χρόνους 
 og - 
 ἅπαντας διατελέσαι βασιλεύ- 
 ~ ΄ 
 ovTas τῆς χώρας ἐγχωρίους" 
 I pr Ν ε ΄ \ 
 ἄνδρας μὲν ἑβδομήκοντα πρὸς 
 τοῖς τετρακοσίοις, yuvainas δὲ 
 , 
 πέντε. 
 Μετὰ τοὺς eos τοίνυν 
 ~ ΝΥ . -Ὁ- 
 πρῶτον, φασὶ βασιλεῦσαι τῆς 
 Αἰγύπτον Μηνᾶν. 
 fod ect - 
 EEA δὲ ἄρξαι λέγεται τοῦ 
 ͵ 
 προειρημένου βασιλέως τοὺς 
 > / ὃ 7 Ἃ » ΄ 
 ἀπογόνους δύο πρὸς τοῖς πεντή- 
 \ uj 
 κοντὰ τοὺς ἅπαντας; ἔτη πλείω 
 
 -" ᾿ ‘ 
 Toy χιλίων και τετρακοσίων. ἢ 
 
 Βούσιρις. 
 
 DIODORUS SICULUS’ CANON 
 
 Ethiopians, not successively but at 
 intervals, the length of whose reigns 
 collectively occupied a period of nearly 
 thirty-six years. 
 
 The Persians, under the command 
 of Cambyses their king, subdued 
 They 
 occupied the throne during a hun- 
 
 the nation by force of arms. 
 
 dred and thirty-five years, inclusive 
 of the insurrections, which the Egyp- 
 tians, unable to put up with the seve- 
 rity of their domination, and their 
 impiety towards the gods of the 
 country, made from time to time. 
 
 Lastly reigned the Macedonians, 
 and their successors, two hundred 
 and seventy-six years. 
 
 All the rest of the time was filled 
 up with native princes, that is to’say, 
 four hundred and seventy kings and 
 five queens. 
 
 After the gods, Menas was the 
 first king of the Egyptians. 
 
 After him it is said that two of the 
 descendants of the before-mentioned 
 king reigned, and they were suc- 
 ceeded by fifty who altogether reigned 
 during a period of more than one 
 thousand four hundred years. 
 
 Busiris. 
 
 * ΤΨειτταράκοντα τη. 
 
 
 
FROM DIODORUS SICULUS. 15} 
 
 Καὶ τῶν τούτου πάλιν ἐκ- 
 γόνων ὀκτὼ, τὸν τελευταῖον Ἐ 
 ὁμώνομον ὄντα τῶ πρώτῳ, 
 φασὶ κτίσαι τὴν ὑπὸ μὲν Al- 
 γυπτίων καλουμένην Διός πολιν 
 ὑπὸ δὲ τῶν Ἑλλήνων Θήβας. 
 
 Τὸν τούτου τοῦ βασιλέως 
 ἀπογόνων ὄγδοος ὁ ἀπὸ τοῦ 
 πατρὸς προσᾳγυρευθεὶς Οὐχο- 
 ρεὺς ἔκτισε, πόλιν Μέμφιν 
 ἐπιφανεστάτην τῶν κατ᾽ Αἴ- 
 γυπτον. 
 
 Δώδεκα γενεαὶ βασιλέων. 
 
 Μύριη" ᾽᾿Επάνω δὲ τῆς πό- 
 λεὼς λίμνην ὠρυξε. 
 
 Ἑπτὰ γενεαὶ βασιλέων. 
 
 Σεσόωσιν, φασὶν, ἐπιφα- 
 νεστάτας καὶ μεγίστας τῶν 
 πρὸς αὐτοῦ τάξεις ἐπιτελέ- 
 cecdas καὶ πράξεις. Els μὲν 
 τὴν ᾽᾿Ερυϑδὰν δάλασσαν ἀπέσ- 
 τεῖλε στόλον νεῶν τετρα- 
 κοσΐων, καὶ Tas τε νήσους τὰς 
 ἐν τοῖς τόποις κατεκτήσατο, 
 καὶ τῆς ἠπείρου τὰ παρὰ δά- 
 λατταν μέρη κατεστρέψατο, 
 μέχρι τῆς ᾿Ινδικὴς. Αὐτὸς δὲ 
 μετὰ τῆς δυνάμεως πεζῇ τὴν 
 πορείαν ποιησάμενος, χατεσ- 
 τρέψατο πῶσαν τὴν ᾿Ατίαν. 
 καὶ τὸν Γάγγην ποταμὸν διέβη, 
 
 καὶ τὴν ᾿Ινδικὴν ἐπῆλνε πᾶσαν 
 
 Then eight of his descendants, of 
 whom the last,* who bore the same 
 name with the first, founded the city 
 which by the Egyptians is called the 
 city of the Sun or Diospolis, but by 
 the Greeks Thebes. 
 
 The eighth of the descendants of 
 this king, who bore the sirname of 
 his father Uchoreus built the city of 
 Memphis, the most celebrated of all 
 the cities of Egypt. 
 
 Twelve generations of kings. 
 
 Myris, who dug the lake above 
 the city of Memphis. 
 
 Seven generations of kings. 
 
 Sesodsis, whose exploits were the 
 most renowned of all the kings be- 
 He fitted out a fleet of 
 four hundred ships upon the Red 
 Sea; and subdued all the islands, 
 and all the parts of the continent 
 bordering upon the sea as far as the 
 And he marched with a 
 mighty army by land, and reduced 
 all Asia. 
 Ganges and conquered all the Indies 
 
 fore him. 
 
 Indies. 
 And he passed over the 
 
 even to the ocean, and all the na- 
 tions of the Scythians, and most of 
 the islands of the Cyclades. He 
 then invaded Europe and overran 
 all Thrace: and Thrace he made 
 
 * Diodorus does not here mention the name of this king, but describes the 
 
 magnificence of Thebes, and the sepulchre of Osymandyas. 
 
 him with Uchoreus. 
 ee ] 
 κ᾿ 
 
 Scaliger confounds 
 
 Others suppose him to have been a second Busiris. 
 
152 
 
 ov > - \ A ~ 
 
 ἕως ὠκεανοῦ, καὶ τὰ τῶν Σκυ- 
 ~ we ~ 
 
 δῶν ἔσνη, καὶ τῶν Κυκλάδων 
 
 νήσων τὰς πλείστας. Διαβὰς 
 
 δ᾽ εἰς τὴν Εὐρώπην, καὶ διε- 
 ἡ oe X / \ 
 
 ξιὼν ἅπασαν τὴν Θράκην, καὶ 
 
 ὅρια τῆς στρατιᾶς ποιησάμενος 
 
 > ~ u 2. 
 
 ἐν τῇ Θρᾷχῃ, στήλας κατεσ- 
 , > 5 2 / n 
 
 κεύασεν ἐν πολλοῖς τόποις τῶν 
 
 Τὴν 
 
 \ 
 δὲ χώραν ἅπασαν εἰς ἐξ καὶ 
 
 ἈΠ δὲ ΄ 
 αὐτου καταντηδέντων. 
 
 τριάκοντα μέρη διελὼν, ἃ κα- 
 λοῦσιν Αἰγύπτιοι Νομοὺς, ἐπέ- 
 στησεν ἅπασι Νομάρχας. ἔτι 
 δὲ τρία πρὸς τοῖς τριάκοντα 
 βασιλεύσας ἐκ προαιρέσεως 
 ἐξέλιπε τὸν βίον. ὑπολιπέντων 
 
 ; as, ~ 
 αὕτον τῶν ὀμμιάτων. 
 
 ,ὔ Sw 
 Σεσόωσις δεύτερος ὃ τοῦ. 
 
 προειρημιένου υἱός. 
 
 Πολλοὶ βασιλεῖς μετὰ τοῦ- 
 τον. 
 
 ἤΑΛμασις, ὃ -αταχκρατηθεὶς 
 ἀπὸ ᾿Ακτισάνου Αἰθίοπος. 
 
 ᾿Ακτισάνης Αἰθίοψ. 
 
 Μένδης Αἰγύπτιος, ὁ καὶ 
 Μάῤῥος. Τάφον δὲ αὐτῷ κατα- 
 σχεύασε τὸν 
 Λαβύρινθον. 
 
 >A ΄ὔ , ven 
 γαρχία πέντε γένεων- 
 * 
 
 2 / 
 ὀνομαζόμενον 
 
 Κέτνα, 
 Ῥέμφις. 
 
 Ἑπτὰ διεδέξαντο τὴν ἀρ- 
 
 6 καὶ Πρωτεύς. 
 
 χὴν βασιλεῖς ἀργοί. οὐδὲν ad- 
 
 ῳ ap “ ε ΄, 
 τῶν ἔργον οὐδὲ πρᾶξις ἱστορίας 
 
 OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 
 
 boundary of his military excursion. 
 And he set up pillars in Thrace and 
 in many other places, commemorating 
 his conquests. He also divided Egypt 
 into thirty parts, which the Egyptians 
 call nomes, and appointed nomarchs 
 over each. And after a reign of 33 
 years he destroyed himself on account 
 of the failure of his eyesight. 
 
 Sesodsis the second ; the son of the 
 preceding. 
 Many kings succeeded him. 
 
 Amasis, who was conquered by 
 Actisanes the Ethiopian. 
 
 Actisanes the Ethiopian. 
 
 Mendes an Egyptian, who is the 
 same as Marrhus. He constructed 
 the building which is called the La- 
 byrinth as a tomb for himself. 
 
 An interregnum for 5 generations. 
 
 Cetna,* who is Proteus. 
 
 Rhemphis. 
 
 Seven insignificant kings reigned 
 of whom no work or deed worthy of 
 history is handed down except of one 
 
 * Kérng Cetes. Marg. 
 
 
 

 
 FROM DIODORUS SICULUS,. 
 
 ἀξία παραδέδοται, πλὴν ἑνὸς 
 Νειλέως" ἀφ᾽ οὗ συμβαίνει τὸν 
 ποταμὸν ὠνομάσϑαι Νεῖλον τὸ 
 προτοῦ καλούμενον Αἴγυπτον. 
 Ὄγδοος δὲ βασιλεὺς γενό- 
 μενος Χέμβης ἢ ὁ Μεμφίτης; 
 ἦρξε μὲν ἔτη πεντήκοντα, κα- 
 τασχκεύασε δὲ τὴν μεγίστην 
 τῶν τριῶν Πυραμίδων. 
 Τελευτήσαντος δὲ τοῦ βασι- 
 λέως τούτου διεδέξατο τὴν ἀρ- 
 χὴν ὁ ἀδελφὸς Κεφρὴν, καὶ 
 ἦρξεν ἔτη ἕξ πρὸς τοῖς πεν- 
 Ἔνιοι δὲ φασὶν 
 
 ᾽ 
 οὐκ ἀδελφὸν ἀλλ᾽ υἱὸν παρα- 
 
 τήκοντα. 
 
 λαβεῖν τὴν ἀρχὴν ὀνομαζό- 
 
 μενον Xabpviv. 
 Muxepivos (a τινὲς μὲν Χε- 
 
 ~ > s «“ a ~ 
 pivoy ὀνομάζουσιν) υἱὸς ὧν τοῦ 
 
 ΄ δὰ , 
 ποιήσαντος τὴν προτέραν. Πυ- 
 ράμιδα, οὗτος δὲ ἐπιβαλόμενος 
 τρίτην κατασκευάζειν, πρότε- 
 
 ΙΑ ΒΗΘ, 4 ..»Ψ 
 ρὸν ἐτελεύτησεν ἤπερ τὸ ἔργον 
 we ΓΟ 
 ἔλαβε συντέλειαν. 
 
 Τνέφαχθος. 
 
 Βόκχορις ὁ σοφὸς, Τνεφαχ- 
 Sov υἱός. 
 
 Πολλοῖς δ᾽ ὕστερον χρόνοις 
 ἐβασίλευσε τῆς Αἰγύπτου. Σα- 
 βάκων, τὸ μὲν γένος ὧν Ai- 
 Rio. 
 
 ᾿Αναρχία ἐπ᾽ ἔτη δύο. 
 
 Οἱ δώδεκα ἡγεμόνες ἔτη ιέ. 
 
 Ψαμμίτιχος 6 Σαΐτης, εἷς 
 
 J ~ foe , 
 Ων τῶν 1B ἡγεμόνων. 
 
 * Χέμμις, Marg. 
 
 153 
 
 Nileus, from whom the river is called 
 Nilus, having formerly borne the 
 name of Agyptus. 
 
 The eighth king was Chembres 
 the Memphite. He reigned 50 years 
 and built the largest of the three 
 Pyramids. 
 
 After his death his brother Ceph- 
 ren received the kingdom and reigned 
 56 years. 
 not the brother, but the son of the 
 Chembres that succeeded him, and 
 
 Some, however, say it was 
 
 that his name was Chabryis. 
 
 Mycerinus, whom others call Che- 
 rinus, the son of the founder of the 
 former pyramid, He undertook to 
 raise a third, but he died before the 
 completion of the work. 
 
 Tnephachthus. 
 
 Bocchoris the Wise, the son of 
 Tnephachthus. 
 
 After a long time Sabacon reigned 
 over Egypt, being by race an 
 Ethiopian. 
 
 An interregnum of two years. 
 
 Twelve chiefs 15 years. 
 
 Psammitichus, the Saite: who was 
 one of the twelve chiefs. 
 
 + TreGaySw. Marg. 
 
154 OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT. 
 
 εἴ, ΄ ~ 
 Tortepoy τέτταρσι γενεαῖς 
 a \ 
 ᾿Απρίης ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη δυσὶ 
 ͵ὔ ~ 7 e Ν 
 πλείω τῶν εἰκοσι" καὶ στραγ- 
 γαληδεὶς ἐτελεύτησεν. 
 
 ἤλμασις. Βασιλεύσας δ᾽ 
 
 mv ,ὔ \ ~ / 
 ἔτη πέντε πρὸς τοῖς πεντήκοντα, 
 ν a 
 κατέστρεψε τὸν βίον, xan’ ὃν 
 χρόνον Καμβύσης 6 τῶν Περ- 
 σῶν βασιλεὺς ἐστράτευσεν 
 ἐπὶ τὴν Αἴγυπτον, κατὰ τὸ 
 ͵ + ~ ε ~ 
 τρίτον ἔτος τῆς ἑξηκοστῆς 
 ἃ 
 καὶ τρίτης ᾿Ολυμπιάδος, ἣν 
 ἐνίκα στάδιον Παρμενίδης Ka~ 
 
 μαριναῖος. 
 
 After four 
 Apries 22 years. 
 
 generations reigned 
 He was strangled. 
 
 Amasis. He died after a reign of 
 55 years, at the very time that Cam- 
 byses, king of the Persians, invaded 
 Egypt, in the third year of the 63d 
 Olympiad, in which Parmenides the 
 
 Camarinzean was the victor.—Zzb. 1]. 
 
 CANON OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT: 
 
 FROM HERODOTUS. 
 
 TON Miva, τὸν πρῶτον Ba- 
 σιλεύσαντα Αἰγύπτου. 
 
 Μετὰ δὲ τοῦτον, κατέλεγον 
 οἱ ἱρέες ἐκ βύβλου ἄλλων βα- 
 σιλήων τριηκοσίων τε καὶ τριή- 
 κοντὰ οὐνόματα. ἐν τοσαύτησι 
 δὲ γενεῆσι ἀν)ιρώπων, ὀκτωχαί- 
 δεκᾳ μὲν Αἰδϑίοπες ἦσαν; μίη 
 δὲ γυνὴ ἐπιχωρίη" οἱ δὲ ἄλλοι, 
 ἄνδρες Αἰγύπτιοι" τῇ δὲ γυ- 
 ναικὶ οὔνομα ἦν ἥτις ἐβασί- 
 λευσε, τόπερ τῇ Βαβυλωνίῃ, 
 Νίτωκρις. 
 
 Τῶν δὲ ἄλλ.» βασιλέων, οὐ 
 
 \ . ie 
 γὰρ EAeryoy οὐδεμίην ἔργων ἀπό- 
 
 ΜΈΝΕΒ was the first king of Egypt. 
 
 After him, the priests read out of 
 a book the names of 330 kings. And 
 among these were 18 Ethiopians and 
 one woman a native Egyptian: all the 
 rest were men and Egyptians: and 
 the name of the woman, who reigned 
 also over the country of Babylonia, 
 was Nitocris. 
 
 Of the other kings nothing re- 
 markable is in any way recorded ex- 
 
 
 
FROM HERODOTUS. 155 
 
 δεξιν, κατ᾽ οὐδὲν εἶναι λαμπρό- 
 τήτος, πλὴν ἑνὸς τοῦ ἐσχάτου 
 αὐτῶν Μοίριος. λίμνην ὀρύξαι. 
 , Ν Ψ ε 
 Σέσωστρις. τὸν ἐλεγὸν of 
 es ~ \ ͵ 
 ἰρέες πρῶτον μὲν πλοίοισι μα- 
 κροῖσι ὁρμησέντα ἐκ τοῦ ᾿Αρα- 
 ΄ /. Ν x Ν 
 βίου κόλπου, τοὺς παρὰ τὴν 
 ᾿Ἐρυδρὴν ϑδάλασσαν κατοιχη- 
 Φ' 
 μένους καταστρέφεσδαι. Ἔν- 
 NAS as aa 
 τευδεν δὲ ὡς ὀπίσω ἀπίκετο 
 > Mv ‘ «“Χ 
 ἐς Αἰγυπτον, στρωτιὴν πολλὴν 
 we ~ 
 λαβὼν ἤλαυνε διὰ τῆς ἠπείρου, 
 - ve aE] \ 
 πᾶν ἴδνος τὸ ἐμποδὼν κατα- 
 ~ , 
 σρεφόμενος. Ἔκ τῆς ᾿Ασίης ἐς 
 Ν 
 τὴν Εὐρώπην διαβὰς, τούς τε 
 , 
 Σχύϑας κατεστρέψατο καὶ 
 τοὺς Θρήικας. 
 Φερῶν ὁ τοῦ Σεσώστριος. 
 Ν ~ 
 Ανδρα Μεμφίτην, τῷ κατὰ 
 τὴν τῶν Ἑλλήνων γλῶσσαν 
 Μ bs ἢ 
 οὔνομα Πρωτέα εἶναι. 
 “Ῥαμψίνιτον. 
 x ~ 
 Μετὰ δὲ τοῦτον, βασι- 
 λεύσαντά σῴφεων Χέοπα, ἐς 
 ~ /, > 4 . 
 πᾶσαν κακότητα ἐλάσαι 
 fh 
 κατακληϊσαντα γάρ μιν πάν- 
 τνδὺς ~ s 
 τὰ TH spa, πρῶτα μὲν σφεας 
 , yi εἰ 
 δυσιέων ἀπέρξαι" Πυραμίδα 
 ΄ 5 \ 
 κατασκευάσαι" καὶ βασι- 
 Ὁ 4 ” 
 λεῦσαι πεντήκοντα ETEK. 
 \ - 
 Τὸν ἀδελφεὸν αὐτοῦ Χεφ- 
 2 ; Ξ 
 βῆνα' Πυραμίδα ποιῆσαι" καὶ 
 - a \ ΄ 
 βασιλεῦσαι ἐξ καὶ πεντή- 
 
 a 
 nota ἔτεα. Τούτους ὑπὸ 
 
 cept the last Meris. He dug the 
 lake. 
 
 Sesostris. The priests said that 
 he first sailed with a fieet of large 
 vessels from the Arabian gulph, and 
 conquered all the nations bordering 
 upon the Red Sea. And that from 
 thence he returned to Egypt, and 
 with a mighty army he traversed 
 the continent (of Asia) subjugating 
 every nation that opposed him. From 
 Asia he passed over into Europe and 
 reduced the Scythians and Thracians. 
 
 Pheron, the son of Sesostris. 
 
 A Memphite, whose name, accord- 
 ing to the Greek interpretation, was 
 Proteus. 
 
 Rampsinitus. 
 
 After him reigned Cheops, who 
 inflicted upon them every kind of 
 evil: he overthrew the temples, and 
 was the first who put a stop to the 
 sacrifices. He founded the pyramid, 
 and reigned 50 years. 
 
 Chephren, the brother of Cheops. 
 He built a pyramid, and reigned 56 
 years. The Egyptians, out of hatred, 
 decline to name these two kings, but 
 
 x 
 
156 OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT, 
 
 io 
 μίσεος οὐ κάρτα ϑέλουσι Ai- 
 A Ν 
 γύπτιοι ὀνομάζειν, ἀλλὰ καὶ 
 , 
 τὰς πυραμίδας καλέουσι ποι- 
 ἃ Ν 
 μένος Φιλίτιος, ὃς τοῦτον τὸν 
 i ra \ -“ 
 χρόνον ἔνεμε χτήνεα κατὰ ταῦ - 
 / 
 TH τὰ χωρία. 
 ~ , Bix 
 Muxepivoy Χέοπος παῖδα 
 Ν 
 Πυραμίδα δὲ καὶ οὗτος ἀπε- 
 , - 
 λίπετο, πόλλον ἐλάσσω τοῦ 
 / 
 πατρός. 
 la 
 Λσυχιν. 
 \ 
 "Ayvow τὸν τυφλόν. “Ent 
 θ᾽, 
 τούτου βασιλεύοντος, ἐλάσαι 
 \ ~ 
 ἐπ᾽ Αἴγυπτον χειρὶ πολλῇ Ai- 
 Slords τε καὶ Σαβακῶν τῶν 
 / ͵ὔ 
 Αἰδιόπων βασιλέα. 
 ᾿Αιδώπᾳ Σαβακῶν βασι- 
 ; Ἂν 
 λεύειν Αἰγύπτου ἐπ᾽ ἔτεα πεν- 
 τήκοντα. 
 ͵7 7 Ν / 
 Πάλιν Ανυσιν τὸν τυφλον. 
 ~ \ / -Ὁ 
 Σεδῶν, τὸν ἱρέα τοῦ “H- 
 3 YJ . 
 φαίστου. ᾿Ἐπ᾽ Αἴγυπτον ἐλαύ- 
 \ / 4 
 νειν στρωτὸν μέγαν Σαναχά- 
 / f 
 ριβον βασιλέᾳ *ApaBlov τε 
 καὶ ᾿Ασσυρίων ....᾿Ἐνδαῦτα 
 , " 
 ἀπικομένους, τοῖσι ἐναντίοισι 
 > ~ > / \ 
 αὐτοῖσι ἐπιχυσέντας νυχτὸς 
 - Ἢ ,ὔ \ Ν 
 μῦς ἀρουρωίους, κατὰ μὲν cham 
 / Ν ~ , 
 γέειν τοὺς φαρετρεῶνας av- 
 ,ὔ X \ \ / Ἂν 
 τέων, κατὰ δὲ τὰ τόξα, πρὸς 
 \ -» > " . κ᾿" 
 be τῶν ἀσπίδων τὰ dyava, 
 « ie ὔ , 
 ὡὠστε τῇ ὑστεραίῃ φευγόντων 
 4 ~ Coa ,ὔ 
 σῴφέων γυμνῶν ὅπλων πεσέειν 
 
 2 - 
 πολλούς. “Ame τοῦ πρώτου βα- 
 
 call the pyramids the work of the 
 shepherd Philitis, who grazed his 
 flocks, at this time, in that coun- 
 
 try. 
 
 Mycerinus, the son of Cheops. 
 He also left a pyramid much less 
 than that of his father. 
 
 Asychis. 
 
 Anysis, who was blind. In his 
 reign the Ethiopians invaded Egypt 
 with a mighty army under Sabacos 
 
 their King. 
 
 Sabacos, the Ethiopian, reigned 
 50 years. 
 
 Anysis the blind, again. 
 
 Sethos, the priest of Hephestus. 
 In his reign Sanacharibus, the king of 
 the Arabians and Assyrians, marched 
 against Egypt with a vast army...... 
 And when Sethos and his attendants 
 arrived at Pelusium, during the night 
 a multitude of rats attacked their ene- 
 mies, and gnawed the bowstrings from 
 off their bows, and the thongs of their 
 spears; so that on the morrow, as 
 they fled unarmed, great numbers of 
 them were slain. From the first 
 king to Sethos the priest of He- 
 pheestus, are 341 generations of men. 
 
 
 
FROM HERODOTUS. 
 
 \ 
 σιλέος, ἐς τοῦ Ἡφαίστου τὸν 
 δ - τς, ~ 
 ipea τοῦτον τὸν τελευταῖον 
 
 4 7 Ν 
 βασιλεύσαντα, μίην τε καὶ 
 
 / 
 τεσσαράκοντα καὶ τριηκοσίας 
 3 4, A hes , 
 
 GUS POT WY γενεὰς γενόμενας.. « . 
 
 Οὕτω ἐν μυρίοισί τε καὶ χι- 
 
 Rie Ν \ / , 
 foros, καὶ πρὸς, τριηχοσίοισί 
 
 ἣν , = mM. 
 
 TE χαὶ TETTEPAKOVTA™ ἐλεγον 
 Ἀ ὔ 
 
 Rely ἀνδιρωποειδέα οὐδένα γε- 
 
 ~ 
 
 ,ὔ ᾽ ~ 
 νέσϑψαι. Ἔν τοίνυν τοὔτῳ τῷ 
 / 7 we 2F > , 
 χρόνῳ τετράκις ἔλεγον ἐξ ἡδέων 
 
 « ~ τὰν 
 τὸν ἥλιον ἀνατεῖλαι" eva τε 
 γῦν καταδύεται, ἐν) εῦτεν δὶς 
 2 Ne Ὁ \> “-,“,ν 
 ἐπαντεῖλαι" καὶ évdey νῦν ἀνα- 
 τέλλει 
 
 δῦναι. 
 
 ἐνσαῦτα Ole χατα- 
 
 Δυώδεκα βασιλεῖς εἰς δυώ- 
 Dexa μέρη διῃρημένης τῆς Αἰ- 
 γύπτου. 
 
 Ψαμμήτιχος εἷς τῶν δώδεκα 
 ἐβασίλευσε Αἰγύπτου τέσσερα 
 καὶ πεντήκοντα ἔτεα᾽ τῶν τὰ 
 ἑνὸς δέοντα τριήκοντα," Αζωτον, 
 τῆς Συρίης μεγάλην πόλιν προσ-- 
 κατήμενος ἐπολιόρκεε, ἐς τὸ ἐξ- 
 εἴλε. 
 
 Ψαμμητίκου δὲ Νεχὼς παὶς 
 ἐγένετο, καὶ ἐβασίλευσε Αἰ- 
 γύπτου ἐκκαιδέκα ἔτεα" ὃς τῇ 
 διώρυχι ἐπεχείρησε πρῶτος τῇ 
 ἐς τήν Ἐρυδρὴν ϑάλασσαν 
 φερούσῃ. Καὶ Σύροισι πεζῇ ὁ 
 
 157 
 
 And in all these 11,340* years, they 
 say no God has made his appearance 
 in the human form. And during this 
 time they affirm that the Sun has 
 twice risen in parts different from 
 what is his customary place, that is 
 to say, has twice risen where he now 
 sets, and has also twice set where he 
 
 now rises. 
 
 Twelve kings reigned over Egypt, 
 divided into twelve parts. 
 
 Psammetichus, one of the twelve, 
 And in the 29th 
 year of his reign he beleagued Azo- 
 
 reigned 54 years. 
 
 tus (Ashdod?) a large city of Syria, 
 and took it by siege. 
 
 Necos, the son of Psammetichus, 
 reigned 11 years. He was the first who 
 undertook to cut the canal through to 
 the Red Sea. He also marched against 
 the Syrians and overcame them in an 
 engagement at Magdolus (Migdol?) 
 
 * Herodotus, in the intermediate passage, makes this calculation from the 
 341 generations, allowing three generations to a century. 
 
158 OF THE KINGS OF EGYPT, 
 
 Nexds, συμβαλὼν ἐν May- And after the battle he took Kadytis,* 
 δόλῳ ἐνίκησε' μετὰ δὲ τὴν ἃ large city of Syria. ; 
 μάχην, Κάδυτιν πόλιν τῆς Συ- 
 ρίης ἐοῦσαν μεγάλην εἷλε. 
 Ψάμμις Νεχῷ παῖς ἐξ ἔτεα. Psammis, the son of Neco, 6 years. 
 Anping ὁ Ψάμμιος, πέντε Apries, the son of Psammis, 25 
 
 καὶ εἴκοσι ἔτεα. years. 
 
 ἴλμασις τέσσερα καὶ. τεσ- Amasis, 44 years. 
 σεράχοντα ἔτεα. 
 
 Ψαμμήνιτος 6 ᾿Αμάσιος Psammenitus, the son of Amasis, 
 παῖς ἐξ μῆνας. 6 months. 
 
 CANON OF THE EIGHTEENTH DYNASTY 
 OF MANETHO: 
 
 FROM THEOPHILUS. 
 
 Years. Months. 
 α΄. ΓΑμασις ἔτη κέ καὶ μῆτ- 1. Amasis οἷ 25x bere ee 
 yas a δ΄, 
 β΄. Χεβρῶν .. ιγ΄. 
 γ΄. ᾿Αμενώφις «. κ΄. ζ΄. 
 
 Chebron τὰ ὦ 
 
 Amenophis .. 20 1. °% 
 δ΄. ᾿Αμέσσθ .. κα΄. we Amesse ots. ts ee ee 
 ε΄. Midpns ... ιβ΄. δ'. «Mephres'. :5. ~ 12.2. (9% 
 ς΄, Μηδραμμου- 6. Methrammuthosis 20 .. 10. 
 
 ge & 2 
 
 WOoiG ree We be 
 ζ΄, Tovdndons δ΄. of. 7. Tuthmoses .. SRE Θὰ 
 ἡ. Δαμῴφενοῴφις δ. ἡ. 8, Damphenophis 30 .. 10. 
 SHiGMai) vo. Lael ds ἐὐθυθχαβυ. ἢ Ti SS ἡ ee 
 
 * This may possibly refer to Jerusalem, of which the modern, and I believe 
 the Arabic name, is E] Kods, from Kadesh, Holy. 
 
 
 
AND THE EGYPTIAN ERA. 159 
 
 Years. Months. 
 
 (. Τούτων δὲ ϑυγάτηρ (. γ΄. 10. Theirdaughter 10 .. 3. 
 ιᾳ΄. ᾿Αϑωρὶς Ἐ oe bl. Athoris: -- Ie τ σ᾽ 
 ιβ΄. Χενχέρης 12. Chencheres ΟἿ as. τς 
 ιγ΄. Σέδως Μιαμμοὺ 13. Sethos Miammu 6 
 ιδ΄, ᾿Αρμαῖος . B. 14. Armeeus Re ALP τ Ἐν τ ΤῺ. 
 "εἰς Σέϑως a4 15. Sethos AT ΤΙ 
 is’. ᾿Αμενωφὶς .. ιδ΄. ς΄, 16. Amenophis .. 19 .. 6. 
 ιζ΄. Σέϑως ἡ καὶ Ῥαμέσσης. 17. Sethus and Rhamesses. 
 p- 246. 
 
 ἣς 155. Sey 
 Ἢ 
 
 OF THE EARLY KINGS OF EGYPT AND THE 
 EGYPTIAN ERA. 
 
 FROM JOSEPHUS. 
 
 TIANTES οἱ τῶν Αἰγυπτίων Att the kings of the Egyptians, from 
 βασιλεῖς ἀπὸ Μιναίου τοῦ Μέμ- Minzeus, the founder of Memphis, 
 φιν οἰκοδομήσαντος, ὃς ἔτεσι Who lived many years before Abra- 
 πολλοῖς ἔμπροσϑεν ἐγένετο τοῦ ham our ancestor, to Solomon, ex- 
 πάππου ἡμῶν ᾿Αβράμου μέ- tending through an interval of more 
 χρι Σολομῶνος πλειόνων ἐτῶν than 1800 years, bore the title of 
 τριωκοσίων καὶ χιλίων μεταξὺ Pharaohs.—Jos. Ant. lib. VII. c. 6. 
 διεληλυνότων, Φαραῶνες ἐκλή- 
 
 δ ησαν. 
 
 FROM MALALA. 
 
 ΑἸΓΥΠΤΙΩΝ δὲ ἐβασίλευσε Tue first king of the Egyptians was 
 πρῶτος βασιλεὺς τῆς φυλῆς Pharao, of the tribe of Ham, the son 
 τοῦ Χὰμ, υἱοῦ Νῶε, Φαραὼ, ὁ of Noe: he is called also Naracho,— 
 καὶ Νωραχὼ καλούμενος. J. Malala, 110. II. 
 
 * Μέρχερης Al. Ἴ Θοῖσσος καὶ 'Ραμέσσης ἔτη (΄, Al. 
 
 
 
160 
 
 OF THE EARLY KINGS OF EGYPT 
 
 FROM SUIDAS. 
 
 H@AISTOS ὁ eds, καὶ πῦρ. 
 Ἕρμοῦ βασιλεύσαντος εἰς Αἴ- 
 γυπτον καὶ δανόντος, Ἥφαισ- 
 τος παραλαμβάνει τὴν βα- 
 σιλείαν, ἡμέρας am ὡς γενέτ- 
 θαι ἔτη τέσσαρα μῆνας ζ΄. 
 ἡμέρας η΄. οὐκ ἤδεισαν γὰρ 
 , 3 4 > Ν 
 τότε Αἰγύπτιοι ἐνιαυτοὺς μετ- 
 φω > oN ἈΝ ,ὔ ~ 
 ρῆσαι ἀλλὰ τὴν περίοδον τῆς 
 
 ς / > Weel? 
 ἡμέρας, ἐνιαυτὸν ἐλεγον. 
 
 Heruastus, ἃ God: also Fire. After 
 the death of Hermes, king of Egypt, 
 Hephestus obtained possession of the 
 empire 1680 days, which is 4 years, 
 for the 
 Egyptians in those times were not in 
 the habit of measuring time by the 
 year, but called the period of the day 
 a year.—Suidas v Hephestus. 
 
 7 months, and 8 days; 
 
 FROM DIOGENES LAERTIUS. 
 
 AIPYTITIOL μὲν γὰρ Νείλου 
 γενέσθαι παῖδα Ἥφαιστον" ὅν 
 ἄρξαι φιλοσοφίας, ἧς τοὺς 
 προεστῶτας, ἱερέας εἶναι καὶ 
 προφήτας. ᾿Απὸ δὲ τούτου εἰς 
 ᾿Αλέξανδρον 
 
 yon 5 , 
 ετῶν εἶναι μυριάδας τέσσαρας 
 
 τὸν Μακεδόνα 
 καὶ ἰ ὀκτακισχίλια ὀκτακόσια 
 ἔτη ἑξηκοντατρία. ἐν οἷς ἡλίου 
 ἐκλείψεις γενέσθαι τριακοσίας 
 ἑβδομηκοντατρεῖς, σελήνης δὲ 
 
 5 / 
 ὀκτακοσίας τριακονταδύο. 
 
 ΤῊ Egyptians say that Hephestus 
 was the son of Nilus, and that he in- 
 vented philosophy, of which the fol- 
 lowers were called Priests and Pro- 
 phets. From him to the time of 
 Alexander the Macedonian elapsed 
 48863 years, in which occurred 373 
 solar eclipses and 832 lunar eclipses. 
 
 —Diog. Laert. Proem. p. 2. 
 
AND THE EGYPTIAN ERA. 
 
 161 
 
 FROM DICZARCHUS. 
 
 ΔΙΚΑΙΑΡΧΟΣ δὲ ἐν ὦ μετὰ 
 τὸν ᾿Οσίριδος καὶ Ἴσιδος Ὦρον 
 βασιλέα φησὶ γεγονέναι Σέ- 
 σωστριν᾽ Ἐ ὥστε yiver Sas ἀπὸ 
 μὲν τῆς Σεσώστριδος βατιλείας 
 μέχρι τοῦ Νείλου ἔτη βφ', ἀπὸ 
 τῆς Νείλου βασιλείας μέχρι 
 τῆς α΄ Ὀλυμπιάδος ἔτη vas yt 
 ὡς εἶναι τὰ πάντα ὁμοῦ ἔτη 
 βῶλς΄. Καὶ νόμους δὲ λέγει 
 Δικαίαρχος αὐτὸν τεδείκεναι» 
 μηδένα ἐκλείπειν τὴν πατρώαν 
 τέχνην" τοῦτο γὰρ ᾧετο ἀρ- 
 
 Καὶ 
 ἵππον ὃ 
 ἼΑλλοι 
 
 ἀναφέ- 
 
 ‘ s ff 
 χὴν εἰναι πλεονεξίας. 
 
 ~ A ε ,ὔ 
 πρῶτον δὲ εὑρηκέναι 
 ἐπιβαίνειν ᾿ἄνϑρωπον. 
 A ~ >, 
 de ταῦτα εἰς “Opov 
 
 pougs. 
 
 Diczarcuus, in his first book, says, 
 that after Orus, the son of Osiris and 
 Isis, reigned Sesostris: and that from 
 the reign of Sesostris to that of Nilus 
 elapsed a period of 2500 years;} and 
 from the reign of Nilus to the first 
 Olympiad 436 years ;{ so that alto- 
 gether the number of years amounted 
 to 2936. 
 says, that he established laws that no 
 one should leave the profession of 
 his fathers: for he believed that such 
 a proceeding would be the intro- 
 He was the first 
 who discovered the art of riding upon 
 
 Diczearchus, moreover, 
 
 duction of avarice. 
 
 horseback. Others, however, at- 
 tribute these things to Orus.—Schol. 
 
 in Apoll. Rhod. Arg. Lib. IV. v. 272. 
 
 FROM ARTAPANUS. 
 
 APTATIANOS δέ φησιν ἐν τῇ 
 περὶ ᾿ἸΙουδαίων, ᾿Αβραὰμ. τε- 
 λευτήσαντος καὶ τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐ- 
 τοῦ Μεμψασθενὼθ, ducing δὲ 
 
 Ν ~ ͵ ~ 
 καὶ τοῦ βασιλέως τῶν Αἰγυπ- 
 
 Ἐ Σεσόγχωσις Sc. 
 
 Ακταάρανῦβ, in his work concerning 
 the Jews, says, that after the death of 
 Abraham and his son, as well as 
 Mempsasthenoth, the king of the 
 Egyptians, his son Palmanothes as- 
 
 } Scaliger says, from the reign of Sesonchosis, or Sesostris, to the Olympiads, 
 
 Τ ums’ 446. Se. 
 was 2500. 
 
 § ἵππων Larch. 
 
162 
 
 ΄ 
 τίων, τὴν δυναστείαν παρα- 
 λαξεῖν τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ Παλ- 
 μανώθην. τοῦτον δὲ τοὶς ᾿Ιου- 
 / 
 δαίοις φαύλως προσφέρεσθαι. 
 Καὶ πρῶτον μὲν τὴν Κεσσὰν 
 > - , ἢ 9. 
 οἰκοδομῆσαι, τό, τε ἐπ᾿ αὐτῇ 
 oF. \ 
 ἱερὸν καθιδρύσασθαι, εἰτα τὸν 
 
 > 
 
 ". 
 ἐν Ἡλιουπόλει χκατα- 
 
 \ 
 ναὸν 
 - ἣν -“᾿ 
 σχευάσαι. 'Τοῦτον δὲ γεννῆσαι 
 ,ὕ / a - 
 θυγατέρα Μέῤῥιν, ἣν Xevedpn 
 - ~ Ν 
 τινι κατεγγυῆσαι, τῶν ὑπὲρ 
 Μέμφιν τόπων βασιλεύοντι. 
 πολλοὺς γὰρ τότε τῆς Αἰγύπ- 
 \ 
 του βασιλεύειν. ταύτην δὲ 
 Nn ε 4 ε 
 στεῖραν ὑπάρχουσαν ὑποβα- 
 La ~ 
 λέσθαι τινος τῶν ᾿Ἰουδαίων 
 
 4 - Ν = 
 παιδίον, τοῦτο δὲ Μώῦὔσον ὀνο- 
 
 ~ ta . 
 μάσαι" ὑπὸ δὲ τῶν Ἑλλήνων 
 
 αὐτὸν ἀνδρωθέντα Μουσαῖον 
 
 ans 1 \ 
 προσαγορευθῆναι" γενέσθαι δὲ 
 τὸν Μώΐσον τοῦτον ᾿Ορφέως 
 
 διδάσκαλον. 
 
 ΤΗΣ δὲ ἐν; δε διακοσμή- 
 σεως map ἡμῖν ἐν τοῖς ἱεροῖς 
 γράμμασιν ὀκτακισχιλίων ἔτων 
 
 ἀριδ μὸς γέγραπται. 
 
 OF THE EARLY KINGS OF EGYPT, 
 
 sumed the crown, and he carried him- 
 self with great severity towards the 
 Jews. And he compelled them first 
 to build Kessa and to construct the 
 temple that is therein, and also the 
 temple in Heliopolis. He had a 
 daughter whose name was Merris, 
 who was married to a king named 
 Chenephres,* then reigning in Mem- 
 phis; for there were at that time 
 several kings in Egypt. + And as she 
 was barren, she brought up a child of 
 the Jews, and named it Moyses: but 
 when he arrived at manhood he was 
 called, among the Greeks, Muszeus. 
 
 And this is the Moyses who they ; 
 
 say was the instructor of Orpheus. 
 
 FROM PLATO. 
 
 Tue transactions of this our city of 
 Sais are recorded in our sacred 
 writings during a period of 8000 
 
 years.— Timeus, p. 23. 
 
 *® By Eusebius, Clemens, the Paschal Chronicle, and Cedrenus, the name is 
 variously written Chenophres, Nechephres, and Cheremon. 
 
 + Eusebius, also, in the Armenian Chronicle, expresses his opinion, that 
 many of the dynasties were contemporary, and not successive. 
 
 
 
AND THE EGYPTIAN ERA. 165 
 
 FROM POMPONIUS MELA. 
 
 Ipst vetustissimi (ut preedi- 
 cant) hominum, trecentos et 
 triginta reges ante Amasin, et 
 supra tredecim millium an- 
 norum etates, certis annali- 
 bus referunt: mandatumque 
 literis servant, dum Agyptii 
 sunt, quater cursus suos ver- 
 tisse sidera, ac solem bis jam 
 
 occidisse, unde nunc oritur. 
 
 Tue Egyptians, according to 
 their own accounts, are the most 
 ancient of men, and they reckon 
 in their series of annals 330 
 kings who reigned above 13,000 
 years; and they preserve, in 
 written records, the memory of 
 the event, that, since the com- 
 mencement of the Egyptian race, 
 the stars have completed four 
 revolutions, and the sun has 
 
 twice set where he now rises. 
 
 FROM HERODOTUS. 
 
 AAAA τις ἀρχαῖός ἐστι δεὸς ΤΉΕΒΕ is a very ancient God among 
 
 ΑἸγυπτίοισι Ἡρακλέης" ὡς δὲ the Egyptians whois called Heracles : 
 
 αὐτοὶ λέγουσι, ered ἐστι Ex- and they assert, that from his reign to 
 
 τακισχίλια καὶ uvpiaesAua- that of Amasis, 17,000 years have 
 
 σιν βασιλεύσαντα, ἐπεί τε ex elapsed: they reckoned Heracles 
 
 τῶν ὀχτὼ Θεῶν of δυώδεκα among the Gods when the number 
 
 Seok ἐγένοντο, τῶν Ἡρακλέα was augmented from 8 to 12.—Lib. 
 
 ἕνα νομίζουσι. Wc. 4. 
 
 FROM DIODORUS SICULUS. 
 
 EINAL δὲ ἔτη φασὶν ἀπὸ Ὃσί- Tuery say that from Osiris and Isis 
 pidis καὶ Ἴσιδος ἕως τῆς ᾿Αλε- to the kingdom of Alexander, who 
 
 ξάνδρου βασιλείας τοῦ κτίσαν- founded the city of Alexandria in 
 
 Y 
 
164 
 
 > «Loe 4 \ ae. 
 τὸς ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ τὴν ἐπώνυμον 
 9 -Ὁ f ‘2 ~ 
 αὐτοῦ πολιν, πλείω τῶν μυ- 
 a 
 ρίων. ὡς δ᾽ ἔνιοι γράφουσι, βρα- 
 χὺ λείποντα τῶν δισμυρίων καὶ 
 
 τρισχιλίων. 
 
 OF THE EARLY KINGS OF EGYPT. 
 
 Egypt, there elapsed a period of more 
 than 10,000 years; or as some write, 
 of little less than 23,000.—Dziod. Sie. 
 lib. 1. p. 14. 
 
 FROM DIODORUS SICULUS. 
 
 \ ~ ~ 4 
 OI δὲ ἱερεῖς τῶν Αἰγυπτίων 
 \ / nw 
 τὸν χρόνον ἀπὸ τῆς Ἡλίου Ba- 
 ows / , 
 σιλείας συλλογιζόμενοι, με- 
 χρι τῆς ᾿Αλεξάνδρου διωβά- 
 > ἊΝ Γφῴ Ν 
 σεως εἰς τὴν ᾿Ασίαν, φασὶν 
 ε 4 > ~ 4 ων 
 ὑπάρχειν ἐτῶν μάλιστά πως 
 if Ν 
 δισμυρίων καὶ τρισχιλίων. Μυ- 
 θολογοῦσι δὲ καὶ τῶν θεῶν τοὺς 
 A 
 μὲν ἀρχαιοτάτους βασιλεῦσαι 
 / 
 πλείω TOY χιλίων καὶ διακο- 
 / 2 Ν \ 
 Thay ἐτῶν, τοὺς δὲ μετάγενε- 
 ΄ 9) Ἄν ὦ ~ 
 στέρους οὐκ ἐλάττω τῶν τρια- 
 / 7 f 
 κοσίων. ᾿Απίστου δ᾽ ὄντος τοῦ 
 4 
 πλήθους τῶν ἐτῶν, ἐπιχειροῦσι 
 Ν Ψ,. ul Ἂς 
 τινὲς λέγειν ὅτι τὸ παλαιὸν 
 » “Ὁ \ o¢ 
 οὔπω τῆς περὶ τὸν Ἥλιον κινή- 
 > , t 
 Tews ἐπεγνωσμενης, συνέβαινε 
 A Ν n werd / 
 κατὰ THY τῆς σελήνης περίοδον 
 
 ΕΣ \ > / 
 ἄγεσθαι τὸν ἐνιαυτόν. 
 
 Bur the priests of Egypt, summing 
 up the time from the reign of the 
 Sun to the descent of Alexander upon 
 Asia, calculate it to be about 23,000 
 years. They pretend, also, in their 
 fabulous legends, that the most an- 
 cient of the Gods reigned more than 
 1200 years; and those that came im- 
 mediately after them in succession not 
 less than 300. Some of them attempt 
 to abate the incredibility of such a 
 multitude of years, by asserting, that 
 in former times, when the revolution 
 of the sun was not accurately ascer- 
 tained, the year consisted of one re- 
 volution of the moon.—Lib. I. p. 15. 
 
 FROM JOSEPHUS. 
 
 ᾿Αμένωφιν 
 
 mpordelc, ψευδὲς ὕνομα, καὶ 
 
 γὰρ βασιλέᾳ 
 
 διὰ τοῦτο χρύνον αὐτοῦ τῆς Ba- 
 
 inf. - 
 σιλείας ὁρίσαι μὴ τολμήσας; 
 
 He makes Amenophis king when 
 this event (the second invasion) oc- 
 curred, giving him a false name; and 
 upon this account he presumes not 
 
 ἘΦ 
 
 
 
~ » 
 καί τοι γε ἐπὶ τῶν ἄλλων βα- 
 ~ wa 
 σιλέων ἀκριβῶς τὰ ETN προσ- 
 Ν ~ 4 
 TINEls, τοῦτο προσάπτει τι- 
 ul 
 νὰς μυδολογίας, ἐπιλαϑόμενος 
 \ ¢ , wa 
 σχεδὸν ὅτι πενταχοσίοις ἔτεσι 
 \ \ , ε / 
 καὶ δεκαοκτὼ πρότερον ἱστό- 
 ρήκε yeverNar τὴν τῶν Ποι- 
 Ν , 
 μένων ἔξοδον εἰς ἱἹεροσόλυμα. 
 Ὗ Ν 
 Τώμωσις γὰρ qv βασιλεὺς 
 
 a , 
 ὅτε ἐξήεσαν. 
 
 CHALDEAN KINGS. 
 1. Nmrud Ae 
 2> Q@mbirus .. 
 Se SINITUS, «9 τ. 
 
 
 
 4. Bsarunus Phrthia 
 or the Parthian 
 
 5. Arphazd ... 
 conquered by 
 Bilus the As- 
 
 syrian. 
 
 18 
 
 CHALDHAN AND EGYPTIAN DYNASTIES. 
 
 years. 1. Phanuphis 
 
 165 
 
 to define the length of his reign; 
 though in mentioning all the other 
 kings, he accurately gives the time of 
 each. Here, however, he invents some 
 fabulous relation, not remembering 
 that he had already stated, that the 
 exodus of the shepherds to Jerusa- 
 lem took place 518 years before ; for 
 Tethmosis was king when they went 
 out.—Jos. Contr. Ap. I. 26. 
 
 - CHALDAAN AND EGYPTIAN 
 DYNASTIES :* 
 
 FROM BAR-HEBREUS. 
 
 EGYPTIAN KINGS. 
 
 56. 90 96 0  ΘΑΙΒ: 
 2. Auphiphanus .. .. 46 
 3. Atanuphus Kusia or 
 
 the Cuszean 
 
 4, Pharoun Brsnust .. 35 
 5. Pharoun Karimun .. 4 
 6. Pharoun Aphintus .. 32 
 
 7. Pharoun Aurunkus 33 
 
 * I have given these dynasties according to the Syriac orthography, and 
 placed them beside each other, as they are synchonized in the chronicle. 
 + The Syriac says this king succeeded Auphiphanus, for which the Trans- 
 
 lator substitutes Atanuphus. 
 
166 CHALDEAN AND EGYPTIAN DYNASTIES. 
 
 _ ASSYRIAN KINGS. (sy 5 
 1. Bilus' .. .. 62 years. 8. PharounSmunus .. 20 years. 
 
 2. NinUSi¢ ss ee BR 9. Pharoun Armnis. .. 27 
 10. Pharndus the Theban 43 ; 
 11. Pharoun Phanus 
 3. Smirm .. .. 46 12, Pharoun Aisqus) .. 21 
 13. Pharoun Susunus .. 44 
 4. Zmarus .. 38 14, Pharoun Trqus .. .. 44 
 5. Aris .. .. 30 1. Satis the Shepherd .. 19 
 9. *® 
 ue *x* 
 4, Aphphus theShepherd 14 
 
 Mphrusscjc:.= ele 
 Tumuthus. τς νυ 8 
 Amnphathis* .. .. 43 
 Pharoun Phsunu. + 
 
 * Amnphathis, in the narrative, is also called Pharoun. The chronicle says 
 that his daughter Trmuthisa, called Damris by the Hebrews, the wife of Knaphra, 
 was the person who saved Moses. ͵ 
 
 + Drowned in the Red Sea. 
 
 
 

 
 OF THE 
 
 TPITOS STIXOS. 
 
 Ἥλιος Sede, δεσπότης ov- 
 paved, Ῥαμέστῃ βασιλεῖ de- 
 δώρημαι τὸ κρατος καὶ τὴν 
 κατὰ πάντων ἐξουσίαν. Ὃν 
 ᾿Απόλλων, φιλαλήϑης, δεσ- 
 πότης χρόνων, καὶ Ἥφαιστος 
 ὃ τῶν Jey πατὴρ, προέκρινεν 
 τῆς τὸν Aven. Βασιλεὺς παγ- 
 χαρὴς, Ἡλίου παῖς, καὶ ὑπὸ 
 Ἡλώου φιλούμενος. 
 A®HAIQTHE ΠΡΩΤΟΣ ΣΤΙΧΌΣ. 
 
 ὋὉ ap Ἡλίου πόλεως μέ- 
 yas Sere, ἐνουράνιος, ᾿Απόλ- 
 λων κρατερὸς “Ἥρωνος υἱὸς, ὃν 
 “Ἥλιος ἠγώγησεν ἢ ὃν οἱ deo 
 ἐτίμησαν, ὃ πάσης γῆς βα- 
 σιλεύων, ὃν Ἥλιος προέκρινεν, 
 ὁ ἄλκιμος διὰ τὸν ΓΔρεα βα- 
 Ὃν ᾿ΔΑμμῶν φιλεῖ. 
 Καὶ ὃ παμφεγγὴς cvynpivas 
 
 σιλεύς. 
 
 ’ 
 αἰώνιον βασιλέα. 
 
 SYRIADIC COLUMNS. & 171: 
 VERSE THE THIRD. 
 
 I, the Sun, the God and Lord of 
 Heaven, have bestowed strength and 
 power over all things, on King Rha- 
 mestes: he, whom Horus, the lover of 
 truth, the Lord of the seasons, and 
 Hephestus, the father of the Gods, 
 have chosen on account of his valour, 
 is the all-gracious King, the offspring 
 and beloved of the Sun. 
 
 TOWARDS THE EAST, VERSE THE 
 FIRST. 
 
 The great God from Heliopolis, 
 celestial, Horus the brave, the son of 
 Heron, whom the Sun begot, and 
 whom the gods have honoured, he is 
 the ruler of all the earth; he whom 
 the Sun hath chosen is the king, 
 valiant in battle. Him Ammon loves. 
 And him the all-glittering has chosen 
 his eternal king. 
 
 OF THE SIRIADIC COLUMNS : 
 
 FROM JOSEPHUS. 
 
 ΟΥ̓́ΤΟΙ πάντες ἀγαδοὶ φύντες 
 γὴν τε τὴν αὐτὴν ἀστασίαστοι 
 , 2 A τῇ 
 κατῴκησαν εὐδαιμονήσαντες" | 
 Ν ow " Ν 
 μηδενὸς αὐτοῖς, ἄχρι καὶ τε- 
 
 λευτῆς», δυσκόλου προσπεσόν-- 
 
 * Οτοη---ἠρώγησεν 
 
 Att these (the sons of Seth) being 
 naturally of a good disposition, lived 
 happily in the land without aposta- 
 tising, and free from any evils what- 
 soever: and they studiously turned 
 
 Vulg.—Marshall has ἐγέννησεν. 
 
 Ἵ κατοικήσαντες εὐδαιμόνησαν Vulg. 
 
172° 
 
 Tos" σοφίαν τε τὴν περὶ τὰ 
 . / ‘ ‘i. 7 
 
 οὐράνια καὶ τὴν τούτων δια- 
 / Χ \ 
 
 κόσμησιν ἐπενόησαν. Ὑπὲρ δὲ 
 
 τοῦ μὴ διαφυγεῖν ἢ τοὺς ἀν- 
 
 Ὡρώπους τὰ εὑρημένα, μὴ δὲ 
 τ ~ 
 
 πρὶν εἰς γνῶσιν édely prapy- 
 . / > X 
 
 ναι" προειρηχότος ἀφανισμὸν 
 
 . 
 
 ᾿Αδάμου τῶν ὅλων ἔσεσδαι, 
 Ν \ os πὰ Ν Δ, 
 
 τὸν μὲν κατ᾽ ἰσχὴν πυρὸς, τὸν 
 uj 
 
 ἕτερον δὲ κατὰ βίαν καὶ πλη- 
 Ν 
 
 Si} ὕδατος" στήλας δύο ποι- 
 
 ἡσάμενοι, τὴν μὲν ἐκ πλίνωου, 
 
 Ν 
 
 τὴν δὲ ἑτέραν ἐκ λίϑων, ἀμφο-: 
 / 
 
 τέραις ἀνέγραψαν τὰ εὗρη- 
 ΄ > τ \ ὯΝ Ν 
 
 μένα. W εἰ καὶ συμβῆ τὴν 
 
 πλιναίνην ἀφανισδῆναι ὑπὸ 
 
 τῆς ἐπομβρίας, ἡ λιϑίνη μεί- 
 
 vaca παράσχῃ μαδεῖν τοῖς 
 5 ἘΝ , \ > ,ὔ 
 
 ἀνδιρώποις τὰ ἐγγεγραμμένα, 
 
 δηλοῦσα καὶ πλινδίνην δ᾽ ὑπ᾽ 
 
 αὐτῶν ἀνατεδῆναι. Μένει δ᾽ 
 
 » ~ bad \ ~ \ 
 
 ἄχρι Tov δεῦρο κωτὰ γὴν τὴν 
 
 Σιριάδα. ἢ 
 
 * φυγεῖν Al. 
 
 OF THE SIRIADIC COLUMNS. 
 
 their attention to the knowledge of 
 the heavenly bodies and their con- 
 figurations. And lest their science 
 should at any time be lost among 
 men, and what they had previously 
 acquired should perish (inasmuch 
 as Adam had acquainted them that 
 a universal aphanism, or destruc- 
 tion of all things, would take place 
 alternately by the force of fire and the 
 overwhelming powers of water), they 
 erected two columns, the one of brick 
 and the other of stone, and engraved 
 upon each of them their discoveries ; 
 so that in case the brick pillar should 
 be dissolved by the waters, the stone 
 one might survive to teach men the 
 things engraved upon it, and at the 
 same time inform them that a brick 
 one had formerly been also erected 
 by them. It remains even to the pre- 
 sent day in the land of Siriad.—Jos. 
 ANY ANG. 25 
 
 + Samb.—7Ajso¢ Al. 
 
 * Συριάδα Vulg. Al.—3/oidx Malala, Glycas, Cedr. et Vet. Int.—2yipie 
 Eust. Ant.—Voss. proposes Eirath. 
 

 
 MANETHO. 
 
 OF THE WRITINGS OF MANETHO. 
 
 TIPOKEITAI δὲ λοιπὸν καὶ 
 περὶ τῆς τῶν Αἰγυπτίων δυνα- 
 στείας μικρὰ διαλαβεῖν ἐκ 
 τῶν Μανεθῶ τοῦ Σεβεννύτου; 
 ὃς ἐπὶ Πτολεμαίου τοῦ Φιλα- 
 δέλφου ἀρχιερεὺς τῶν ἐν Al- 
 γύπτῳ εἰδωλείων χρηματίσας 
 ἐκ τῶν ἐν τῇ Σηριαδικὴ γῇ κει- 
 μένων στηλῶν ἱερᾷ φησι δια- 
 λέκτῳ καὶ ἱερογραφικοῖς γράμ.- 
 μασι κεχαρακτηρισμένων ὑπὸ 
 Θῶθ τοῦ πρώτου Ἕρμοῦ, καὶ 
 ἑρμηνευθεισῶν μετὰ τὸν κατα- 
 κλυσμὸν ἐκ τῆς ἱερᾶς διαλέκ- 
 του εἰς τὴν Ἑλληνίδα φωνὴν 
 γράμμασιν ἱερογλυφικοῖς, καὶ 
 ἀποτεθέντων ἐν βίβλοις ὑπὸ 
 τοῦ ᾿Αγαθοδαίμονος υἱοῦ τοῦ 
 δευτέρου Ἕ μοῦ, πατρὸς δὲ τοῦ 
 Τὰτ ἐν τοῖς ἀδύτοις τῶν ἱερῶν 
 Αἰγύπτου, προσεφώνησε τῷ 
 αὐτῷ Φιλαδέλφῳ βασιλεῖ δευ- 
 τέρῳ Πτολεμαίῳ ἐν τῇ βίβλῳ 
 
 Ir remains, therefore, to make certain 
 extracts concerning the dynasties of 
 the Egyptians, from the writings of 
 Manetho the Sebennyte, the high- 
 priest of the idolatrous temples of 
 Egypt in the time of Ptolemzeus Phi- 
 ladelphus. These, according to his 
 own account, he copied from the in- 
 scriptions which were engraved in the 
 sacred dialect and hierographic cha- 
 racters, upon the columns set up in 
 the Seriadic land, by Thoth, the first 
 Hermes; and, after the deluge, trans- 
 lated from the sacred dialect into the 
 Greek tongue, in hieroglyphic cha- 
 racters; and committed to writing in 
 books, and deposited by Agatho- 
 dzemon, the son of the second Her- 
 mes, the father of Tat, in the »ene- 
 He 
 has addressed and explained them to 
 
 tralia of the temples of Egypt. 
 
 Philadelphus, the second king that 
 bore the name of Ptolemzeus, in the 
 
169° 
 
 τῆς Σώθεος γράφων ἐπὶ λέ- 
 ἕεως οὕτως. 
 ENIZSTOAH ΜΑΝΈΘΩ ΤΟΥ ΣΕ- 
 
 BENNYTOY ΠΡῸΣ ΠΤΟΛΕ- 
 MAION TON ΦΙΛΑΔΕΈΛΦΟΝ. 
 
 are ; 
 Βασιλεῖ μεγάλῳ Πτολε- 
 " , ~ 
 μαίῳ Φιλαδέλφῳ σεβαστῷ 
 Mayes ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ ypau- 
 Ν ~ > ” δ 
 ματεὺς τῶν κατ᾽ Αἴγυπτον ἱε- 
 ρῶν ἀδύτων, γένει Σεβεννύτης 
 ὑπάρχων ᾿Ἡλιουπολίτης, τῷ 
 “ 
 δεσπότῃ μου Πτολεμαίῳ χαί- 
 ρειν. 
 -" f , 
 Ἡμᾶς δεῖ Aoyilerdar, μέ- 
 -Ὁ Ν cd 
 γιστε βασιλεῦ, περὶ πάντων 
 z ~ 
 ὧν ἐὰν βούλῃ ἡμᾶς ἐξετάσαι 
 ΄ὔ 5 > ~ Ss 
 πραγμάτων" ἐπιζητοῦντί σοι 
 ‘\ - } ~ / 
 περὶ τῶν μελλόντων τῷ κόσμῳ 
 a 
 γίγνεσσδαι καδϑὼς ἐκέλευσάς 
 ἐν / "»ΔΥ͂ 
 μοι παραφανήσεταί σοι ἃ ἐμα- 
 Sov ἱερὰ βιβλία γραφέντα ὑπὸ 
 Ὁ 4 ΄ 
 τοῦ προπάτορος τρισμεγίστου 
 Ε' - »», , ,ὔ ᾽ 
 Ἑρμοῦ. ἐρρωσό μοι δέσποτά 
 
 μου βασιλεῦ. 
 
 OF THE WRITINGS OF MANETHO. 
 
 book which he has entitled Sothis. 
 They are as follows : 
 
 THE EPISTLE OF MANETHO, THE 
 SEBENNYTE, TO PTOLEMAUS PHI- 
 LADELPHUS. 
 
 To the great and august king Ptole- 
 meus Philadelphus: Manetho, the 
 high priest and scribe of the sacred 
 adyta in Egypt, being by birth a Se- 
 bennyte and a citizen of Heliopolis, 
 to his sovereign Ptolemzeus, humbly 
 greeting : 
 
 It is right for us, most mighty 
 king, to pay due attention to all things 
 which it is your pleasure we should 
 take into consideration. In answer 
 therefore to your inquiries concerning 
 the things which shall come to pass in 
 the world, I shall, according to your 
 commands, lay before you what I 
 have gathered from the sacred books 
 written by Hermes Trismegistus, our 
 forefather. Farewell, my prince and 
 sovereign. — Syncel. Chron. 40.— 
 
 Ἰδοὺ. Chron. 6. 
 
 
 
EGYPTIAN FRAGMENTS: 
 
 THE OBELISKS; 
 
 AND FROM 
 MANETHO, CHZREMON, LYSIMACHUS, 
 
 AND OTHER WRITERS. 
 

 

 
 
 
 
 
 EGYPTIAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 
 
 THE OBELISK OF HELIOPOLIS: 
 
 FROM AMMIANUS MARCELLINUS. 
 
 ᾿Αρχὴν ἀπὸ τοῦ Νοτίου διερ- 
 μηνευμένα ἔχει. 
 
 ΣΤΙΧΟΣ ΠΡΩΤῸΣ ΤΑΔΕ. 
 ἭΛΙΟΣ βασιλεῖ Ῥαμέστῃ. 
 Δεδώρημαί σοι ἀνὰ πᾶσαν 
 οἰκουμένην μετὰ χαρᾶς βασι- 
 λεύειν. “Ov Ἥλιος φιλεῖ, καὶ 
 ᾽Απολλων, Κρατερὸς Φιλαλή- 
 θης υἱὸς “Ἥρωνος, Θεογένετος, 
 Κτίστης τῆς οἰκουμένης, Ὃν 
 “Ἥλιος 
 "Apews βασιλεὺς Ῥαμέστης, 
 
 προέκρινεν» ἄλκιμος 
 °O πᾶσα ὑποτέτακται ἡ Yh 
 μετὰ ἀλκῆς καὶ θάρσους. Βα- 
 σιλεὺς Ῥαμέστης Ἡλίου παὶς 
 αἰωνόβιος. 
 ΣΤΙΧΟΣ ΔΕΥΤΕΡΟΣ. 
 
 ᾿Απόλλων κρατερὸς, 6 ἑσ- 
 tas ἐπ᾿ ἀληθείας δεσπότης 
 διαδήματος, Τὴν Αἴγυπτον δοξ- 
 ἄσας, κεκτημένος, ἀγλωο- 
 ποιήσᾳς Ἡλίου πόλιν, καὶ κτί- 
 
 οἷ Ν > , 
 cus τὴν λοιπὴν οἰκουμένην. 
 
 SOUTH SIDE. 
 
 The interpretation begins upon the 
 
 southern side. 
 VERSE THE FIRST. 
 
 Tue Sun to King Rhamestes. I have 
 bestowed upon you to rule graciously 
 over all the world. He whom the 
 Sun loves is Horus the Brave, the 
 Lover of truth, the Son of Heron, 
 born of God, the restorer of the world: 
 He whom the Sun has chosen, is 
 the King Rhamestes, valiant in battle, 
 To whom all the earth is subject by 
 his might and bravery. Rhamestes 
 the King, the immortal offspring of 
 the Sun. 
 
 VERSE THE SECOND. 
 
 It is Horus the brave, who is in 
 truth appointed the Lord of the Dia- 
 dem; Who renders Egypt glorious, 
 and possesses it; Who sheds a splen- 
 dour over Heliopolis, And regene- 
 rates the rest of the world, And ho- 
 
170 THE OBELISK OF HELIOPOLIS. 
 
 καὶ πολυτιμήσας τοὺς ἐν Ἡλίου 
 mores θεοὺς ἀνιδρυμένους, “Ov 
 “Ἥλιος φιλεῖ, 
 ΤΡΙΤΟΣ ΣΤΙΧΟΣ. 
 
 ᾿Απόλλων κρατερὸς, “Ἡλίου 
 παῖς, παμφεγγὴς: Ὃν Ἥλιος 
 προέκρινεν καὶ ἼΑρης ἄλκιμος 
 ἐδωρήσατο. Οὗ τὰ ἀγαθὰ 
 3 < , ay th 
 ἐν παντὶ διαμένει καιρῷ. Ov 
 ᾿Αμμῶν ἀγαπᾶ, πληρώσας τὸν 
 
 \ ~ / 3 ~ 
 νεὼν τοῦ Φοίνικος ἀγαθῶν. 
 QO of θεοὶ ζωῆς χρόνον ἐδωρή- 
 σαντο ᾿Ἀπόλλων κρατερὸς υἱὸς 
 Ἥρωνος, Βασιλεὺς οἰκουμένης 
 “Ῥαμέστης, Ὃς ἐφύλαξεν Al- 
 γυπτον, τοὺς ἢ ἀλλοεθνεῖς νι- 
 κήσας; “Ov “Ἥλιος φιλεῖ. Ὧ 
 
 “οὦΝκ / - > ΄ 
 πολὺν χρόνον ζωῆς ἐδωρήσαντο 
 θεοὶ, Δεσπότης οἱκουμένης Ῥα- 
 
 μέστης αἰωνόβιος. 
 
 nours the Gods that dwell in Helio- 
 polis: Him the Sun loves. 
 
 VERSE THE THIRD. 
 
 Horus the brave, the offspring of 
 the Sun, all-glorious; Whom the Sun 
 has chosen, and the valiant Ares 
 has endowed, His goodness remains 
 for ever, Whom Ammon loves, that 
 fills with good the temple of the 
 To him the Gods have 
 
 granted life: Horus the brave, the 
 
 Phoenix. 
 
 son of Heron Rhamestes, the King of 
 the world, He has protected Egypt 
 and subdued her neighbours: Him 
 the Sun loves. The Gods have granted 
 him great length of life. He is Rha- 
 mestes, the Lord of the world, the 
 
 immortal. 
 
 ANOTHER SIDE. 
 
 ἍΛΛΟΣ ΣΤΙΧΟΣ AEYTEPOS. 
 
 “Ἥλιος θεὸς μέγας, δεσπό- 
 τῆς οὐρανοῦ, Δεδώρημαί σοι βίον 
 ὠπρόσκορον. ᾿Απόλλων κρα- 
 τερὸς, Κύριος διαδήματος, ὠνεί- 
 καστος, Ὧν ἀνδριάντας ἀνέ- 
 θηκεν ἐν τῇδε τῇ βασιλείῳ δεσ- 
 πότης Διγύπτου Kal ἐκόσμη- 
 σεν Ἡλίου πόλιν, “Ὁμοίως καὶ 
 αὐτὸν Ἥλιον, δεσπότην οὐρα- 
 νοῦ, Συνετελεύτησεν ἔργον 
 ἀγαδὸν Ἡλίου παῖς, βασι- 
 
 / 
 λεὺς αἰωνόβιος. 
 
 VERSE THE SECOND. 
 
 I, the Sun, the great God, the sove- 
 reign of heaven, Have bestowed upon 
 you life without satiety. Horus the 
 brave, Lord of the diadem, incom- 
 parable, The sovereign of Egypt, that 
 has placed the statues of (the gods) 
 in this palace, And has beautified 
 Heliopolis, In like manner as he has 
 honoured the Sun himself, the sove- 
 reign of heaven. The offspring of 
 the Sun, the King immortal, Has per- 
 formed a goodly work. 
 
 * Gron.—rod ἄλλου ἐϑνους Vulg. 
 

 
 MANETHO. 
 
 OF THE 
 
 eax Car 
 ETENETO βασιλεὺς ημῖν, 
 Τίμαος ἢ ὕνομα, ἐπὶ τούτου οὐκ 
 -“- , 
 οἶδ᾽ ὅπως ὃ Θεὸς ἀντέπνευσεν; 
 / ~ Ν 
 καὶ παραδόξως ἐκ τῶν πρὸς 
 > ~\X ~ »" κοι 
 ἀνατολὴν μερῶν, ἄνδρωποι τὸ 
 , Ba 5 ΠῚ 
 γένος ἄσημοι, καταδαρσήσαν- 
 » 5 ἣν ΄ > , 
 τες ἐπὶ τὴν χώραν ἐστράτευ- 
 X « δή > Ν 
 σαν, καὶ ῥᾳδίως ἀμαχητὶ 
 τ. Ν 
 τάντην κατὰ κράτος εἷλον. Kat 
 ‘ ε ΄ ΕῚ ΓΟ 
 τοὺς ἡγεμονέυσαντᾳς ἐν αὐτῇ 
 \ 
 χειρωσάμενοι, τὸ λοιπὸν τάς τε 
 fe ee 3. d, eA 
 πόλεις ὠμῶς ἐνέπρησαν, καὶ τὰ 
 ἱερὰ τῶν SeBy κατέσκαψαν. 
 Ν a , 
 πῶσι δὲ τοῖς ἐπιχωρίοις éxSpo- 
 ΄ὔ 
 τατά πως ἐχρήσαντο, τοὺς 
 Ν - ‘ 
 μὲν σφάζοντες, τῶν δὲ καὶ τὰ 
 ,ὔ ~ 
 τέκνα καὶ γυναῖχας εἰς δου- 
 ,ὔ a ΄ 
 λείαν ἄγοντες. Πέρας δὲ καὶ 
 ,ὔ “ ~ 
 βασιλέα ἕνα ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐποίη- 
 ” > 4 + 
 σῶν, ῳ ὄνομα ἦν Σάλατις. ἢ 
 
 x » 
 καὶ οὗτος ἐν τῇ Μέμφιδι κατε- 
 
 * Τίμαιος Al. 
 
 SHEPHERD KINGS. 
 
 We had formerly a king whose name 
 was Timaus. In his time it came to 
 pass, I know not how, that God 
 was displeased with us: and there 
 came up from the East in a strange 
 manner men of an ignoble race, who 
 had the confidence to invade our 
 country, and easily subdued it by 
 their power without a battle. And 
 when they had our rulers in their 
 hands, they burnt our cities, and 
 demolished the temples of the gods, 
 and inflicted every kind of barbarity 
 upon the inhabitants, slaying some, 
 and reducing the wives and children 
 of others to a state of slavery. At 
 length they made one of themselves 
 king, whose name was Salatis: he 
 lived at Memphis, and rendered both 
 the upper and lower regions of Egypt 
 tributary, and stationed garrisons in 
 
 + ἀνεστράτευσαν Vulg. 
 
 1 Σάλτις Vet. Int. 
 
170 
 
 ,ὔ 4 »" ‘ 4 
 yiveto, τήν τε ἄνω καὶ κάτω 
 χώραν δασμολογῶν, καὶ φρου- 
 
 A > ~ > 4 
 pay ἐν τοῖς ἐπιτηδειοτάτοις 
 
 a / e 4 
 χαταλείπων τόποις μάλιστα 
 
 \ A LN \ > Ἂ > 
 δὲ καὶ τὰ πρὸς ἀνατολὴν ἦσ- 
 
 , , ψ 
 φαλίσατο μέρη, προορώμενος 
 , ~ 
 ᾿Ασσυρίων, τότε ἢ μεῖζον ἰσ- 
 
 , > / > Ss ; 
 χυόντων, ἐσομένην ἐπιδυμίαν 
 τῆς αὐτῆς βασιλείας ἐφόδου. 7 
 
 »\ "Ὁ ~ J 
 εὑρὼν δὲ ἐν νομῷ τῷ Σαΐτῃ t 
 if > ΄ ΄ 
 πόλιν ἐπικαιροτάτην, χειμένην 
 
 ΝΥ eA > ἣν ~ 
 μὲν mpos ἀνατολὴν τοῦ Bav- 
 
 / ~ / 
 βαστίτου ποταμδυ, καλουμένην 
 δ᾽ an ἐν ΡῈ - , 
 
 ἀπὸ τινὸς ἀρχαίας “εολογίας 
 
 Y ", / 
 Αὔαριν, ὃ ταύτην ἔκτιτέν τε, 
 
 Ν - of > ΄ 
 καὶ τοῖς τείχεσιν ὀχυρωτάτην 
 3 / > 7, 9. Ὁ \ 
 ἐποίησεν ἐνοικίσας αὐτῇ καὶ 
 πλῆνος ὁπλιτῶν εἰς εἴχοσι καὶ 
 
 Ἶ ΄ 9 ~ 
 τέσσαρας μυρίαδας ἀνδρῶν 
 
 Ν 4 
 πρὸς φυλακήν. evdade κατὰ 
 Ἂν» " Η \ 
 Φέρειων ἤρχετο, TH μὲν σιτο- 
 μετρῶν χαὶ μισδοφορίαν πα- 
 
 / ΝΥ 
 ρεχόμενος, τὰ δὲ καὶ ἐξοπλι- 
 ͵ , \ , - ΨΜ 
 σίαις || πρὸς φόβον τῶν eater 
 » ~ 
 ἐπιμελῶς γυμνάζων. 
 wv ᾿ yo 
 Αρξας δ᾽ ἐννεακάιδεκα ἔτη 
 
 Ν 7, 
 τὸν βίον ἐτελεύτησαν. Μετὰ 
 
 ~ ‘ u 
 τῦυτον δὲ ἕτερος ἐβασίλευσεν 
 
 Z \ 
 τέσσαρα “ab τετταράκοντα 
 y, , 
 
 ETN, καλούμενος Βηών. pred” 
 a a ᾽ a 
 oy ἄλλος ᾿Απαχνὰς, ἐξ καὶ 
 
 7 » Ν ~ 
 τριάκοντα ETN χαι βήηνᾶς ἑπτά. 
 
 * Hud. Per.—zore Vulg. 
 1 Σεϑροΐτη Syne. 
 || τοὺς ὀπλίτας Vet. Int. 
 
 MANETHO. 
 
 places which were best adapted for 
 But he directed his 
 attention principally to the security 
 of the eastern frontier; for he re- 
 
 that purpose. 
 
 garded with suspicion the increasing 
 power of the Assyrians, who he 
 foresaw would one day undertake an 
 invasion of the kingdom. And ob- 
 serving in the Saite nome, upon the 
 east of the Bubastite channel, a city 
 which from some ancient theological 
 reference was called Avaris; and 
 finding it admirably adapted to his 
 purpose, he rebuilt it, and strongly 
 fortified it with walls, and garrisoned 
 it with a force of two hundred and 
 fifty thousand men completely armed. 
 To this city Salatis repaired in sum- 
 mer time, to collect his tribute, and 
 pay his troops, and to exercise his 
 soldiers in order to strike terror into 
 foreigners. 
 
 And Salatis died after a reign of 
 nineteen years: after him reigned 
 another king, who was called Beon, 
 forty-four years: and he was suc- 
 ceeded by Apachnas who reigned 
 thirty-six years and seven months: 
 after him reigned Apophis sixty-one 
 
 + Hud. Per. Lowth. pro ἔφοδον. 
 § ΓΑβαριν Al. 
 Ἵ Batwy Sync. 
 
 
 

 
 ΝΜ ν a Ν 
 ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ ᾿Απωφις ἕν καὶ 
 ta \ ’ὔ ΄ 
 ἑξήκοντα, καὶ ᾿Ιανίας * πεντή- 
 ~ eo ~ 
 κοντῶ καὶ μῆνα ἕνα. ἐπὶ πᾶσι 
 f ΝΜ ΝΜ 
 δὲ καὶ ἴΑσσις ἦ ἔννεα καὶ τεσ- 
 - οὖ 
 σαράκοντω καὶ μῆνας δύο. Καὶ 
 ἊΝ ων a ~ 7 
 obras μὲν ἕξ ἐν αὐτοῖς ἐγενή- 
 ~ Μ 
 ϑηταν πρῶτοι ἄρχοντες, πολε- 
 - 3X \ ὯΝ ~ 
 μοῦντες aes καὶ πονοῦντες 
 μᾶλλον τῆς Αἰγύπτου ἐξᾶραι 
 τὰ \ 
 τὴν ῥίζαν. Ἐκαλεῖτο δὲ τὸ 
 ~ mw A 
 σύμπαν αὐτῶν vos Ὑχσὼς, 
 ~ / ~ , 
 τοῦτο δέ ἐστι βασιλεῖς ποιμέ- 
 a 
 veg. τὸ γὰρ Ὃχ ὃ nad ἱερὰν 
 ~ “7 4 
 γλῶσσαν βασιλέα σημαΐνει, 
 \ 4A 
 τὸ δὲ Σὼς [ποιμήν ἐστι καὶ 
 / ‘\ Ν ἊΣ ,, 
 ποιμένες κατὰ τὴν κοινὴν διάώ- 
 » Ν oe , 
 Aextoy, καὶ οὕτω cuvtivenevoy 
 , Ψ 
 γίνεται Ὑχσως" τινὲς δὲ λέ- 
 “ ἍΝ 
 γουσιν αὐτοὺς "Αραβας εἶναι. 
 Τούτους δὲ τοὺς προκατωνομασ- 
 , r 4 Ἂν ~ . 
 μένους βασιλέας τοὺς τῶν ποι- 
 ᾽’ , Ἂς Ν > 
 μένων καλουμένων, καὶ τοὺς ἐξ 
 αὐτῶν γενομένους, κρατῆσαι 
 - wv 
 τῆς Αἰγύπτου (φησὶν) ἔτη πρὸς 
 τοῖς πεντακοσίοις ἕνδεκα. 
 Μετὰ ταῦτα δὲ, τῶν ἐκ τὴς 
 “« ~ u 
 Θεβαΐδος καὶ τῆς ἄλλης Ai- 
 , 
 γύπτου βασιλέων γενέσδαι 
 Ν 
 (φησὶν) ἐπὶ τοὺς ποιμένας 
 > tA Ν , L 
 ἐπανάστασιν, καὶ πόλεμον αὖ- 
 ~ ε ~ / 
 τοῖς J συῤῥαγῆναι μέγαν καὶ 
 
 , 
 πολυχρόνιον. ἐπὶ δὲ βασιλέως, 
 
 ἘΞ Ἴαννας Big. Hafn. 
 
 MANETHO. 171 
 
 years, and Ianias fifty years and one 
 month. After all these reigned Assis 
 forty-nine years and two months. 
 the 
 
 amongst them, and during the whole 
 
 These six were first rulers 
 period of their dynasty, they made 
 war upon the Egyptians with the 
 hope of exterminating the whole race. 
 All this nation was styled Hycsos, 
 that is the Shepherd Kings; for the 
 first syllable, Hyc, in the sacred dia- 
 lect, denctes a king, and Sos signifies 
 a shepherd, but this only according 
 to the vulgar tongue’ and of these 
 is compounded the term Hycsos: 
 This 
 people who were thus denominated 
 
 some say they were Arabians. 
 
 Shepherd Kings, and their descend- 
 ants retained possession of Egypt 
 during the period of five hundred and 
 eleven years. 
 
 After these things he relates that 
 the kings of Thebais and of the other 
 provinces of Egypt, made an insur- 
 rection against the Shepherds, and 
 that a long and mighty war was car- 
 ried on between them, till the Shep- 
 herds were overcome by a king whose 
 
 t “Aong Vet. Int.—3éSws or “Acs Sync.— ApyAns or ἤάγχλης Afr. Evs. 
 
 } Ὑκουσσὼς Eus. 
 || Οὐσσὼς Eus. 
 
 ὃ Οὐσσὼς Eus. 
 4“ Eus. omits. 
 
172 
 
 zt 5% 2 / 
 @ Ὄνομα εἶναι ᾿Αλισφραγμού- 
 
 δὰ 
 δίωσις, ἘΞ ἡττωμένους (φησὶ) 
 ἧ - " 
 τοὺς ποιμένας ὑπ᾽ Ἵ αὐτοῦ, ex 
 \ - va 
 
 μὲν τῆς ἄλλης Αἰγύπτου πά- 
 σὴς ἐκπεσεῖν, κατακλεισϑῆναι 
 2 > , > - I 
 
 δ᾽ εἷς τόπον, ἀρουρῶν ἔχοντα 
 
 , 
 
 μυρίων τὴν περίμετρον. Αὔαριν 
 Τοῦτον (φη- 
 
 τ ᾿ 
 oly 6 Μανεδιὼν) ἅπαντα, τεί- 
 
 oy NN 
 ὄνομα τῷ τόπῳ. 
 
 ‘ ~ 
 
 χει TE μεγάλῳ καὶ ἰσχυρῷ πε- 
 
 ns A ͵ e 
 ριβαλεῖν τοὺς ποιμένας, ὅπως 
 
 ca ~ oe wv 
 τήν τε κτῆσιν ἅπασαν ἐχωσιν 
 77 Ν᾿ 
 
 ἐν ὀχυρῷ, t καὶ τὴν λείαν τὴν 
 ἑαυτῶν. 
 \ . 
 
 Τὸν δὲ ᾿Αλισφραγμουδω- 
 σέως υἱὸν Θούμμωσιν ὃ ἐπιχει- 
 ρῆσαι μὲν αὐτοὺς διὰ πολιορ- 
 
 ΄ ἘΠῚ ἣν X\ / > \ 
 κίας ] ἑλεῖν κατὰ κράτος, ὀκτὼ 
 καὶ τεσσαράκοντα μυρίασι 
 προσεδρεύσαντα τοῖς τείχεσιν" 
 ἐπεὶ δὲ τῆς πολιορκίας Ἵ ἀπ- 
 "4 ΄ S, , 
 έγνω, ποιήσασδαι συμβάσεις, 
 7 / 
 ἵνα τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἐκλιπόντες 
 a 
 ὅποι ** βούλονται πάντες a- 
 -“ 7, 
 βλαβεῖς ἀπέλψωσι.- 
 
 “ἜΜ n ε ,ὔ ν» 
 ἐπὶ ταῖς ὁμολογίαις πανοικεσίᾳ 
 
 τοὺς δὲ 
 
 x -“ ΄ > 2 / 
 μετὰ τῶν κτήσεων οὖνχκ ἐλάτ- 
 TAN wy cy, \ 
 τοὺς μυριάδων ὀντᾶς εἴκοσι καὶ 
 lA Spey hand > 
 τεσσάρων amo τῆς Αἰγυπτου 
 
 τὴν ἔρημον εἷς Συρίαν δδοιπορῆ- 
 
 ΜΑΝΈΤΗΟ. 
 
 name was Alisphragmuthosis, and 
 they were by him driven out of the 
 other parts of Egypt, and hemmed 
 up in a place containing about ten 
 thousand acres, which was called 
 Avaris. All this tract (says Manetho) 
 the Shepherds surrounded with a 
 vast and strong wall, that they might 
 retain all their property and their 
 prey within a hold of strength. 
 
 And Thummosis, the son of Alis- 
 phragmuthosis, endeavoured to force 
 them by a siege, and beleaguered the 
 place with a body of four hundred 
 and eighty thousand men; but at 
 the moment when he despaired of 
 reducing them by siege, they agreed 
 to a capitulation, that they would 
 leave Egypt, and should be permit- 
 ted to go out without molestation 
 wheresoever they pleased. And, ac- 
 cording to this stipulation, they de- 
 parted from Egypt with all their 
 families and effects, in number not 
 less than two hundred and forty 
 thousand, and bent their way through 
 
 * Μισφραγμούϑωσις Eus.—Miogoaypdaswoig Sync. 
 
 + ἰξ Eus. 
 
 1 ἐχυρῷ. 
 
 § Θμούϑωσιν Ἐ5.--Τουϑμωσις Sec. ὈὨγΠ.-τοτύϑμωσις Theop. Ant. 
 
 || πολιορκίαν Kus. 
 ** Big. Επ5.---ὅπη Al. 
 
 4] τὴν πολιορκίαν Eus. 
 
 
 
 ἢ 
 

 
 σαι ἢ φοβουμένους δὲ τὴν Ag- 
 συρίων δυναστείαν, τότε γὰρ 
 ἐκείνους τὴς ᾿Ασίας κρατεῖν, 
 ἐν τῇ νῦν Ἰουδαίᾳ t καλου- 
 μένῃ πόλιν οἰκοδομησαμένους 
 τοσαύταις μυριάσιν ἀν) ρώπων 
 ἀρκέσουσαν, Ἱεροσόλυμα ταύ- 
 τὴν ὀνομάσα:. 
 
 (Ἐν dary be tin βίβλῳ 
 τῶν Αἰγυπτιακῶν Μανεδὼν) 
 Τοῦτο (φησὶν) ἔῶνος τοὺς χα- 
 λουμένους ποιμένας, αἰχμαλώ- 
 τοὺς ἐν ταῖς ἱεραῖς αὐτῶν βίβ- 
 λοις γεγράφδαι. 
 
 Μετὰ τὸ ἐξελθεῖν ἐξ Αἰ- 
 γύπτου τὸν λαὸν τῶν ποιμένων 
 εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, ὁ ἐκβαλὼν 
 αὐτοὺς ἐξ Αἰγύπτου βασιλεὺς 
 Τέθμωσις, t ἐβασίλευσεν μετὰ 
 ταῦτα ἔτη ξικοσι πέντε καὶ 
 μῆνας τέσσαρας, καὶ ἐτελεύ- 
 τήσεν, καὶ παρέλαβε τὴν ἀρ- 
 χὴν αὐτοῦ υἱὸς Χέβρων ἔτη δὲε- 
 κατρία. μεθ᾽ ὃν ὃ ᾿Αμένωφις 
 εἴκοσι || nod μῆνας ἑπτά. τοῦ 
 δὲ ὠδελφὴ ᾿Αμεσσὴς Ἵ εἴκο- 
 σιὲν καὶ μῆνας ἐννέα. τῆς 
 δὲ Μήφρης ** δώδεκα καὶ μῆ- 
 vas ἐννέα. τοῦ δὲ Μηφραμού- 
 
 δίωσις tt εἴκοσι πέντε καὶ 
 
 * διοδοιπορῆσαι Bus. 
 
 1 Θέμωσις Vat. Int.—’Apacts Philos—’Apds 
 
 Syne. 
 § Τούτου δὲ Vet. Int. 
 
 MANETHO. 173 
 
 the desert towards Syria. But as 
 they stood in fear of the Assyrians, 
 who had then dominion over Asia, 
 they built a city in that country which 
 is now called Judza, of sufficient size 
 to contain this multitude of men, and 
 
 named it Jerusalem. 
 
 (In another book of the Egyptian 
 histories Manetho says) That this 
 people, who are here called Shep- 
 herds, in their sacred books were 
 also styled Captives. 
 
 After the departure of this nation 
 of Shepherds to Jerusalem, Tethmo- 
 sis, the king of Egypt who drove 
 them out, reigned twenty-five years 
 and four months, and then died: 
 after him his son Chebron took the 
 government into his hands for thir- 
 teen years; after him reigned Ame-~ 
 nophis for twenty years and seven 
 months: then his sister Amesses 
 twenty-one years and nine months: 
 she was succeeded by Mephres, who 
 reigned twelve years andnine months : 
 after him Mephramuthosis twenty- 
 five years and ten months: then 
 Thmosis reigned nine years and 
 
 Ἢ ᾿Ιουδαίων Vulg. 
 Afr.—Aywois Eus. and 
 
 || sixoosty Afr. Eus. 
 
 Ἵ ᾿Αμεσσὶς El.— Auegol; Sync.—'Auécen Theop. 
 
 ** Μήφρις El—Mica¢els Sync. 
 
 ΤΊ Μισφραγμούϑωσις Sync. 
 
174 
 
 μῆνας δέκα. τοῦ δὲ Θμῶσις * 
 + ee! We acd > , ~ oi 
 ἐννέα καὶ μῆνας ὀκτώ. τοῦ de 
 ᾿Αμένωφις ἡ τριάκοντα καὶ 
 - Ύ 
 μῆνας δέκᾳ. τοῦ δὲ ᾽Ὧρος τριώ- 
 a \ -Ὁ , 
 κοντὰ ἐξ καὶ μῆνας πέντε. 
 τοῦ δὲ ϑυγάτηρ ᾿Ακεγχρὴς t 
 δώδεκα καὶ μῆνα ἕνα. τῆς δὲ 
 Ῥάθωτις ὃ αδελφὸς ἐννέα. τοῦ 
 δὲ ᾿Ακεγχήρης δώδεκα καὶ μὴ- 
 vag πέντε. τοῦ δὲ ᾿Ακεγχήρης 
 ἕτερος δώδεκα καὶ μῆνας τρεῖς. 
 - Low +. ,ὔ Ν 
 τοῦ δὲ ᾿Αρμαὶς τέσσαρα nat 
 -“ a - \ », ὰ 
 μῆνα ἕνα. τοῦ δὲ Ῥαμέσσης ἐν 
 καὶ μῆνας τέσσαρας. τοῦ δέ 
 ᾿Αρμέσσης Μιαμμοῦ ἑξήκοντα 
 ἐξ καὶ μῆνας δύο. τοῦ δὲ ᾿Αμέ- 
 » a ,ὔ Ν -“ 
 γωφις δέκα nal ἐννέᾳ καὶ μὴ- 
 νας ἕξ. τοῦ δὲ Σέψωσις, καὶ 
 Ῥαμέσσης; ἱππικὴν καὶ ναυτι- 
 Ν " , 
 κὴν ἔχων δύναμιν. 
 ov 
 Οὗτος τὸν μὲν ἀδελφὸν "Αρ- 
 μαΐϊν ἐπίτροπον τὴς Αἰγύπτου 
 κατέστησεν, καὶ πᾶσαν μὲν 
 αὐτῷ τὴν ἄλλην βασιλικὴν 
 meprerquey ἐξουσίαν, μόνον δὲ 
 ἐνετείλατο διάδημα μὴ φορεῖν, 
 μηδὲ τὴν βασιλίδα μητέρα τε 
 “" ͵ 3 ee 
 τῶν τέκνων ἀδικεῖν, amEexer Oat 
 δὲ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων βασιλικῶν 
 παλλακίδων. αὐτὸς δὲ ἐπὶ 
 Κύπρον καὶ Φοινίκην καὶ πάλιν 
 
 ᾿Ασσυρίους τε καὶ Μήδους ςραᾳ- 
 
 * Τούϑμωσις Theop.—Sync. 
 
 MANETHO. 
 
 eight months ; after whom Ameno- 
 phis thirty years and ten months: then 
 Orus thirty six years and five months: 
 then his daughter Acenchres twelve 
 years and one month : afterwards her 
 brother Rathotis nine; then Acen- 
 cheres twelve years and five months ; 
 another Acencheres twelve years and 
 three months: after him Armais four 
 years and one month: after him 
 reigned Ramesses one year and four 
 months; then Armesses the son-of 
 Miammous sixty-six years and two 
 months: after him Amenophis nine- 
 teen years and six months: and he 
 was succeeded by Sethosis and || Ra- 
 messes, he maintained an army of 
 cavalry and a naval force. 
 
 This king (Sethosis) appointed his 
 brother Armais his viceroy over 
 Egypt: he also invested him with all 
 the other authority of a king, with 
 only these restrictions; that he should 
 not wear the diadem, nor interfere 
 with the queen, the mother of his 
 children, nor abuse the royal concu- 
 bines. Sethosis then made an ex- 
 pedition against Cyprus and Phoeni- 
 cia, and waged war with the Assy- 
 rians and Medes; and he subdued 
 
 + ᾿Αμενώφϑης Al. 
 
 1 ᾿Αχεῤῥὴς et ᾿ΑΛχενχέρσης Sync.—’Ayx αχηρὶς El.— Aysyyépns Big. 
 
 § γνωϑῶς Al. 
 
 || Qy. ὁ καὶ, who is called. 
 
 
 
τεύσας, ἅπαντας; τοὺς μὲν 
 δόρατι, τοὺς δὲ ασμαχητὶ, φύβῳ 
 δὲ τῆς πολλῆς δυνάμεως, ὗπο- 
 χειριόυς ἔλαβε. καὶ μέγα 
 φρονήσας ἐπὶ ταῖς ἐυπραγίαις, 
 ἔτι καὶ “αρσαλεώτερον ἐπο- 
 ρεύετο," τὰς πρὸς ἀνατολὰς 
 πόλεις TE χαὶ χώρας κατα- 
 στρεφόμενος. 
 
 Χρόνου τε ἱκανοῦ γεγονότος, 
 VApuais ὁ καταλειφϑεὶς ἐν Ai- 
 γύπτῳ, πάντα τοὔμπαλιν, 
 οἷς ἀδελφὸς παρήνει μὴ ποιεῖν, 
 ἀδεῶς ἔπραττεν. καὶ γὰρ τὴν 
 βασιλίδα βιαίως ἔσχεν, καὶ 
 ταῖς ἄλλαϊς παλλακίσιν ἀφει- 
 δῶς διετέλει χρώμινος. πειῶδό- 
 μενος δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν φίλων διάδη- 
 μα ἐφόρει, καὶ ἄντῆρε τῷ 
 ἀδελφῷ. 
 
 ὋὉ δὲ τεταγμένος ἐπὶ τῶν 
 ἱερῶν tf τῆς Αἰγύπτου, γράψας 
 βιβλίον ἔπεμψε τῷ Σεϑώσει, 
 δηλῶν ἀντῷ πάντα, καὶ ὅτι 
 ἀντῆρεν ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ “Ap- 
 Pais. παραχρῆμα οὖν ὑπέστρε- 
 ψεν εἰς Πηλούσιον, καὶ ἐχρά- 
 tyre τῆς ἰδίας βασιλείας ἣ 
 δὲ χώρα ἐκλήϑη ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτοῦ 
 ὀνόματος Αἴγυπτος. λέγει γὰρ 
 ὅτι 6 μὲν Σέδϑωσις ὃ ἐκαλεῖτο 
 Αἴγυπτος, "Δρμαὶς δὲ ὁ ἀδελ- 
 φὸς αὐτοῦ Δαναός. 
 
 * 
 ~ 3 
 + 
 
 ἐπιπορεύετο Big. Hafn. 
 Hud. from Vet. Int.—iepéwy Vulg. 
 
 MANETHO. 175 
 
 them all, some by force of arms, and 
 others without a battle, by the mere 
 And being 
 elated with his success, he advanced 
 still more confidently, and overthrew 
 
 the cities, and subdued the countries 
 of the East. 
 
 terror of his power. 
 
 But Armais, who was left in Egypt, 
 took advantage of the opportunity, and 
 fearlessly perpetrated all those acts 
 which his brother had enjoined him 
 not to commit: he violated the queen, 
 and continued an unrestrained inter- 
 course with the royal concubines ; and 
 at the persuasion of his friends he 
 assumed the diadem, and openly op- 
 posed his brother. 
 
 But the ruler over the priests of 
 Egypt by letters sent an account to 
 Sethosis, and informed him of what 
 had happened, and how his brother 
 had set himself up in opposition to 
 his power. Upon this Sethosis im- 
 mediately returned to Pelusium, and 
 recovered his kingdom. The country 
 of Egypt took its name from Setho- 
 sis, who was called also igyptus, as 
 was his brother Armais known by 
 the name of Danaus.—Joseph. contr. 
 App, lib. I. ς. 14, 15. 
 
  τάμπαλιν Hafn. 
 ὃ Σάϑως Big. 
 
MANETHO. 
 
 OF THE ISRAELITES. 
 
 - , 
 
 Τοῦτον (Αμένωφ:ν) ἑπιδυ- 
 ~ -Ὁ , ~ 
 μῆσαι δεῶν γενέσϑαι δεατῆν, 
 “ 3 rt ~ \ > 
 ὥσπερ ρος ἢ εἷς τῶν πρὸ αὐ- 
 
 , . 
 του βεβασιλευκότων᾽ avevey- 
 ~ , 
 nely δὲ τὴν ἐπιϑυμίαν ὁμιωνύμῳ 
 nn \ \ 
 μὲν αὐτῷ ᾿Αμενώφει, πατρὸς δὲ 
 U Ν 
 Marios} ὄντι, elas δὲ δο- 
 ~ / ». 
 κοῦντι μετεσχηκέναι φύσεως; 
 4 / Ἂς / 
 κατά TE σοφίαν καὶ πρόγνωσιν 
 τῶν ἐσομένων. εἰπεῖν οὖν αὐτῷ 
 ~ Ν ε ͵᾿ ο ' 
 τοῦτον τὸν ὁμιώνυμιον, ὅτι δυνή- 
 σεται δεοὺς ἰδεῖν, εἰ κα αρὰν 
 » - Ν -“ de 
 ano Te λεπρῶν καὶ τῶν ἄλλων 
 ~ > , Ν \ 
 μιαρῶν ἀνδρώπων τὴν χῶραν 
 4 
 ἅπασαν ποιήσειεν. 
 
 Ἡσϑέντα δὲ τὸν βασιλέα, 
 πάντας τοὺς τὰ σώματα λελω- 
 βημένους ἐκ της Δ γύπτου συν- 
 
 ~ \ ere 
 ἀγαγεῖν" γενέσδϑαι δὲ τοῦ πλή- 
 ΄ > fe \ , 
 Doug μυριάδας ὀκτώ" καὶ τού- 
 τους εἰς τὰς λιδοτομίας τὰς ἐν 
 ~ \ > ‘ / ~ 
 τῷ πρὸς ἀνατολὴν μέρει τοῦ 
 “ Ν a 
 Νείλου ἐμβαλεῖν αὐτὸν, ὅπως 
 ~ Ya 
 ἐργάζοιντο καὶ τῶν ἄλλων Ai- 
 / 
 γυπτίων οἱ ἐγκεχωρισμένοι. 
 cy , > ΒΟ Ν 
 εἶναι δέ TWAS ἐν αὐτοῖς καὶ 
 / , 
 τῶν λογίων ἱερέων (φησί,) 
 4 
 λέπρᾳ συγχκεχυμένους. τὸν δὲ 
 / x 
 ᾿Αμένωφιν ἐκεῖνον, τὸν σοφὸν 
 
 Ν Ν ΕῚ ε ν 
 καὶ μαντικὸν avdpa, ὑποδεῖσ- 
 
 * Hud, from Vet. Int— op Vulg. 
 
 This king (Amenophis) was de- 
 sirous of beholding the gods, as Orus, 
 one of his predecessors in the king- 
 dom, had seen them. And he com- 
 municated his desire to a priest of the 
 same name with himself, Amenophis, 
 the son of Papis, who seemed to 
 partake of the divine nature, both in 
 his wisdom and knowledge of futu- 
 rity: and Amenophis returned him 
 answer, that it was in his power to 
 behold the gods, if he would cleanse 
 the whole country of the lepers and 
 other unclean persons that abounded 
 in it. 
 
 Well pleased with this information, 
 the king gathered together out of 
 Egypt all that laboured under any 
 defect in body, to the amount of 
 eighty thousand, and sent them to the 
 quarries, which are situated on the 
 east side of the Nile, that they might 
 work in them and be separated from 
 the rest of the Egyptians. And (he 
 says) there were among them some 
 learned priests who were affected 
 with leprosy. And Amenophis the 
 wise man and prophet, fearful lest 
 the vengeance of the gods should fall 
 both on himself and on the king, if 
 
 + Hud.—Madrios Al. 
 
 
 
QA / ‘ ‘ 
 Set πρὸ; αὐτόν te καὶ τὸν Ba- 
 
 σιλέω χόλον τῶν δεῶν, εἰ βιασ- 
 , > / ‘ 
 Sévres ὀφϑήσονται. καὶ προσ- 
 , ah a) Sacre “ 
 Séuevoy™ εἰπεῖν, ὅτι cuppa 
 a Re TES 
 χήσουσί τινες τοῖς μιαροῖς, καὶ 
 ~ νὰ ΄ >> 
 τῆς Διγύπτου κρατήσουσιν ἐπ᾽ 
 wv s Ν ~ 
 ἔτη δεκατρία. μὴ τολμῆσαι 
 A = % a ~ ~ ~ 
 μὲν αὐτὸν εἰπεῖν ταῦτα τῷ 
 ~ ἣν ΕΣ Ἂ 
 βασιλεῖ, γραφὴν δὲ καταλι- 
 , ‘\ 4 ε Αι > 
 πόντα περὶ πάντων ἑαυτὸν ἀνε- 
 ~ "» Ν Μ) ‘ 
 λεῖν. ἐν ἀθυμίᾳ δὲ εἴναι Ty 
 βασιλέα. 
 r », 5 “32 7 
 (Κάπειτα κατὰ Ἀέξιν οὕτω 
 ~ ἌΝ » - 
 γέγραφεν). Τῶν δὲ ταῖς λατο- 
 / \ ~ 
 μίαις ὡς χρόνος ἱκανὸς διῆλνεν 
 “- ,ὔ » Ν «ες 
 ταλαιπωρούντων, ἀξιωδεὶς 6 
 Ν oe \ 46 
 βασιλεὺς, ἵνα πρὸς κατάλυσιν 
 Η͂ « \ , > 7 
 ἀυτοῖς καὶ σκέπην ἀπομερίσῃ 
 Ν / ~ ! 
 τὴν τότε τῶν ποιμένων ἐρημω- 
 "- ἧ “ 
 δεῖσαν πόλιν, ἽἼ Αὔαριν συνε- 
 ΄ ” a. 7 3 
 χώρησεν. ETT δε ἢ πόλις κατὰ 
 ‘ ’ πος 
 τὴν δεολογίαν ἄνωδεν Τυφώ- 
 νιος. 
 XN 
 Οἱ δὲ εἰς ταύτην εἰσελ- 
 So: Ν \ / ~ 
 ὄντες, καὶ τὸν τόπον τοῦτον 
 ων 5 Ἐν « 
 εἰς ἀπύστασιν | ἔχοντες, ἥγε- 
 ,ὔ ~ ‘ , ~ 
 μόνα αὑτῶν λεγόμενόν tive τῶν 
 “Ηλιοπολιτῶν ἱερέων ᾿Οσάρσι- 
 ae \ ΄ 
 φονδ ἐστήσαντο. val τούτῳ 
 ΄, > ~ ε 
 πειθαρχήσοντες ἐν πᾶσιν ὥρκο-- 
 , 2 £ RN « x a 
 μότησαν" ὁ δὲ πρῶτον μὲν αὐὖ- 
 ~ , Μ ΄΄ 
 τοῖς νόμον EVETO, μήτε προσ - 
 
 ~ 5] ‘ 4 ~ / 
 πυνεῖν MJEGUS, ANTE TOY μάλισ- 
 
 * Hud.—poSéuevoey Vule. 
 
 } ἀποκατάστασιν Hafn. 
 
 MANETHO. bad 
 
 it should appear that violence had 
 been offered them, added this also in 
 a prophetic spirit ;—that certain peo- 
 ple would come to the assistance of 
 these unclean persons, and would 
 subdue Egypt, and hold it in posses- 
 sion for thirteen years. These tidings 
 however he dared not to communi- 
 cate to the king, but left in writing 
 an account of what should come to 
 pass, and destroyed himself, at which 
 the king was fearfully distressed. 
 
 (After which he writes thus, word 
 for word:) When those that were 
 sent to work in the quarries had con- 
 tinued for some time in that miser- 
 able state, the king was petitioned to 
 set apart for their habitation and pro- 
 tection the city Avaris, which had 
 been left vacant by the Shepherds ; 
 and he granted them their desire : 
 now this city, according to the theo- 
 logy above, is a Typhonian city. 
 
 But when they had taken posses- 
 sion of the city, and found it well 
 adapted for a revolt, they appointed 
 for themselves a ruler from among 
 the priests of Heliopolis, one. whose 
 name was Osarsiph, and they bound 
 themselves by oath that they would 
 be obedient. Osarsiph then, in the 
 first place enacted this law, that they 
 should neither worship the gods, nor 
 
 + Hud. from MSS. Vet. Int.—Al. omit. 
 § Hud. from Vet. Int.—’Ocdpugey Vulg. 
 
 AA Xa 
 
178 
 
 4 
 τὰ ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ ϑεμιστενομένων 
 -Ὁ , Ἀ 
 ἱερῶν ζώων ἀπέχεσθαι μηδενὸς, 
 πάντα τε δύειν καὶ ἀναλοῦν" 
 
 Ν Ν =X 
 συνάπτετθαι δὲ μηδενὶ πλὴν 
 ~ ,ὔ - δὲ 
 τῶν συνωμοσμένων. Τοιαῦτα δὲ 
 Ὗ a 
 γομοθετήσας, ual πλεῖστα 
 bla ~ 
 ἄλλα, μάλιστα τοῖς Αἰγυπ- 
 ᾽ > ~ ke 5 ΄ 
 τίοις ἐθισμοῖς ὃ ἐναντιούμενα, 
 peed 14 Ἂ Ὁ 
 ἐκέλευσεν πολυχειρίᾳ τὰ τῆς 
 / ἊΝ 
 πόλεις ἐπισκευάζειν τείχη, καὶ 
 Ν ft ε 4 4 
 πρὸς πόλεμον ἑτοίμους γίνεσ- 
 \ / nv 
 Vas τὸν πρὸς ᾿Αμένωφιν ἵ τὸν 
 ΟΝ, / 
 βασιλέα. αὐτὸς δὲ προσλαβό- 
 ΕῚ ε ~ Ν ~ 
 μενος μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ καὶ τῶν 
 5᾽ ε / Ν 
 ἄλλων ἱερέων καὶ συμμεμιασ- 
 ” , 
 ἔπεμψε πρέσβεις πρὸς ἵ 
 
 Ἂν, Ν 
 τοὺς ὑπὸ Τεθμώσεως ἀπελα- 
 
 / 
 μένων, 
 
 / / 
 
 “έντας ὃ ποιμένας, εἰς πόλιν 
 Ν a 
 
 τὴν καλουμένην “Ἱεροσόλυμα 
 Ἂν; 
 
 καὶ τὰ καθ᾽ ἑαυτὸν καὶ τοὺς 
 
 EA 
 
 ἄλλους τοὺς συνατιμασθέντας 
 4 
 
 δηλώσας, ἠξίου συνεπιστρα- 
 / , 
 
 τεύειν ὁμοθυμαδὸν ἐπ᾿ Αἴγυπ- 
 
 ἌΣ 
 
 τον. ᾿Ἐπάξειν || μὲν οὖν αὐτοὺς 
 
 > fs», lad \ > 
 
 ἐπηγγείλατο, πρῶτον μὲν εἰς 
 3, \ uy ΓΟ 
 
 Αὔαριν τὴν προγονικὴν αὐτῶν 
 
 Λ 
 
 πατρίδα, καὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια 
 -" Ε} / 
 
 τοῖς ὄχλοις παρέξειν ἀφθόνως, 
 
 ε ΄ὔ΄ Ν ul 
 
 Urepuaxncerdar δὲ ὅτε δέοι, 
 Ν ε ͵7 
 
 καὶ ῥᾳδίως ὑποχέιριον αὐτοὶς 
 Ν vA 
 
 τὴν χώραν ποίησειν. of δὲ ὑπερ- 
 
 ~ / / 
 χαρεῖς γενόμενοι πάντες προ- 
 
 MANETHO. 
 
 abstain from any of those sacred ani- 
 mals which the Egyptians hold in 
 veneration, but sacrifice and slay them 
 all; and that they should connect 
 themselves with none but such as 
 were of that confederacy. When he 
 had made such laws as these, and 
 many others of a tendency directly 
 in opposition to the customs of the 
 Egyptians, he gave orders that they 
 should employ the multitude of hands 
 in rebuilding the walls about the city, 
 and hold themselves in readiness for 
 war with Amenophis the king. He 
 then took into his counsels some 
 others of the priests and unclean 
 persons: and sent ambassadors to 
 the city called Jerusalem, to those 
 Shepherds who had been expelled by 
 Tethmosis: and he informed them 
 of the position of their affairs, and 
 requested them to come up unani- 
 mously to his assistance in this war 
 against Egypt. He also promised in 
 the first place to reinstate them in 
 their ancient city and country Avaris, 
 and provide a plentiful maintenance 
 for their host, and fight for them as 
 occasion might require ; and assured 
 them that he would easily reduce the 
 country under their dominion. The 
 Shepherds received this message with 
 
 * Hud. from MSS.—eSicpnévors Vulg. 
 
 + Hud. from Vet. [ηἰ.---Μένωφιν Vulg. 
 ὃ Hud. MSS.—émeaSévras Al. 
 
 { Hud. MSS.—AI. omit it. 
 || Lowth proposes ἀπάξειν. 
 
 
 

 
 BS , > vo s 5 > 
 ὕμως εἰς εἴχοσι μυρίαδας ay- 
 ~ ta ἣν > 
 δρῶν συνεξώρμησαν, καὶ pet 
 κ᾿ » 
 οὐ πολὺ ἥχον εἰς Αὔαριν. 
 ᾿Αμένωφις δ᾽ ὁ τῶν Αἰγυπ- 
 τίων βασιλεὺς, ὡς ἐπύδετο τὰ 
 »). 
 κατὰ τὴν ἐκείνων ecpodov, od 
 ‘ 4 Lind > 
 μετρίως συνεχύθη, τῆς παρ 
 ᾿Αμενώφεως τοῦ Πάπιος μνησ- 
 - / 
 Nels προδηλώσεως. καὶ πρότε- 
 ι ~ 
 ρὸν συναγαγὼν πλῆθος Αἰγυπ- 
 Γ Χ tA A 
 τίων, καὶ βουλευσάμενος μετὰ 
 ~ 2! , ε Ἢ , ΄ 
 τῶν ἐν τούτοις ἡγεμόνων, τά 
 τε ἱερὰ ζῶα τὰ πρῶτα μάλισ- 
 2 ~ ε ~ , «“ 
 τα ἐν τοῖς ἱεροῖς τιλώμενα ὡς 
 6 Ν ͵ὔ Ν 
 γ᾽ ἑαυτὸν μετεπέμψατο, καὶ 
 ~ ’ ΄ ~ 
 τοῖς κατὰ μέρος ἱερεῦσιν πα- 
 ,ὔ 
 ρήγγειλεν, ἢ ὡς ἀσφαλέστατα 
 ~ ~ / 
 τῶν δεῶν συγκρύψαι τὰ ξόανα. 
 \ i \ 
 τὸν δὲ υἱὸν Σέθων ἡ τὸν καὶ 
 , - 
 Ῥαμέσσην ἀπὸ Ῥάμψεως τοῦ 
 ὔ 
 πατρὸς ὠνομασμένον πενταέτη 
 » ἐξ, ,ὔ Ψ \ ε ~ 
 ὄντα, ἐξέθετο πρὸς τὸν ἑαυτοῦ 
 A ~ 
 φίλον. αὐτὸς δὲ διαβὰς τοῖς 
 ἄλλοις Αἰγυπτίοις, οὖσιν εἰς 
 ,’ὔ , > ~ 
 τρίακοντα μυρίαδας ἀνδρῶν 
 μαχιμκωτάτων, καὶ τοῖς πολε- 
 , » “ » : 
 plas ἀπαντήσασιν οὗ συνέβα- 
 ‘> - a ~ 
 Rev’ ᾿ἀλλὰ μέλλειν δεομαχεῖν 
 4 ΄ τ 
 νομίσας, παλινδρομήσας rey 
 εἰς Μέμφιν. ἀναλαβών τε τὸν- 
 ΕΣ ae 
 τε “Ati, χαὶ τὰ ἄλλα τὰ 
 a Γ 
 ἐκεῖσε μεταπεμφθέντα ἱερὰ 
 
 = . 
 Coa, εὐθὺς εἰς Αἰθιοπίαν σὺν 
 
 * παρήγγελλεν Big. 
 
 MANETHO. 179 
 
 the greatest joy, and quickly mus- 
 tered to the number of two hundred 
 thousand men, and came up to Avaris. 
 
 Now Amenophis the king of Egypt, 
 when he was informed of their inva- 
 sion, was in great consternation, re- 
 membering the prophecy of Ameno- 
 And he as- 
 
 sembled the armies of the Egyptians, 
 
 phis, the son of Papis. 
 
 and having consulted with the leaders, 
 he commanded the sacred animals to 
 be brought to him, especially those 
 which were held in more particular 
 veneration in the temples, and he 
 forthwith charged the priests to con- 
 ceal the images of their gods with 
 the utmost care. Moreover he placed 
 his son Sethos, who was also called 
 Ramesses from his father Rampses, 
 being then but five years old, under 
 the protection of a faithful adherent ; 
 and marched with the rest of the 
 Egyptians being three hundred thou- 
 sand warriors, against the enemy, who 
 advanced to meet him: but he did 
 not attack them, thinking it would be 
 to wage war against the gods, but 
 returned, and came again to Mem- 
 phis, where he took Apis and the 
 other sacred animals he had sent for, 
 and retreated immediately into Ethio- 
 pia together with all his army, and 
 all the multitude of the Egyptians ; 
 
 } 2 Big. 
 
180 
 
 oe Nn 7. \ ’ 
 ἅπαντι τῷ στόλῳ καὶ πλήθει 
 ~ “4 Ὰ 
 τῶν Αἰγιπτίων ἀνήχθη. χαρίτι 
 γὰρ ἦν ιεὐτῷ ὑποχείριος 6 τῶν 
 ΓΕ τ 
 Δἰδίοπων βασιλεύς" Oey ὑπο- 
 Ν Ν » 
 δεξάμενος, καὶ τοὺς ὄχλους 
 A; 3 ” ε 
 πάντας ὑπολαβὼν οἷς ἔσχεν ἢ 
 4 ~ Ν > ἵν ,, 
 χώρα τῶν πρὸς ἀνϑρωπίνην 
 t 
 τροφὴν ἑπιτηδείων, καὶ πόλεις ἢ 
 Ν A \ Ν ~ 
 καὶ χώμας πρὸς THY τῶν πε- 
 / " "ν ὦ 
 πρωμένων τρισκαίδεκα ἐτῶν 
 λον τῶ > led Ce ae 
 ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς αὐτοῦ Ὑ ἐκπτω- 
 ἜΤ > z , 
 σιν αὐτάρκεις, οὐχ ἧττόν γε 
 \ 
 yal στρατόπεδον Αἰθιοπικὸν 
 \ ͵ὔ ~ 
 πρὸς φυλακὴν ἐπέταξε τοῖς 
 ~/ 
 παρ᾽ ᾿Δμενώφεως τοῦ βασιλέως 
 , 
 ἐπὶ τῶν ὁρίων τῆς Αἰγύπτου. 
 ᾿ 
 Καὶ τὰ μὲν κατὰ τὴν Αἰ- 
 - \ 
 Siomlay τοιαῦτα. οἱ δὲ Σολυ- 
 ~ . / ‘ ~ 
 pita κατελνόντες, σὺν τοῖς 
 ~ “Ἢ > , 2 
 μιαροὶς τῶν Αἰγυπτίων οὕτως 
 / ~ 
 εἰνοσίως t τοῖς dvpdmors προσ- 
 ΄ e Ν ~ 
 ἡνήχθησαν, ὥστε τὴν τῶν 
 / 
 προειρημένων κράτησιν χείρισ- 
 / ~ 
 τὴν ὃ φαίνεσθαι, τοῖς τότε τὰ 
 4 > ΄ , 
 τούτων ἀσεβήματα “εωμένοις. 
 \ δ > / 7» ‘ 
 καὶ γὰρ οὐ μόνον πόλεις καὶ 
 ΄ " ΨΥ ἢ 
 κώμας ἔνεπρησαν, οὐδὲ ἱερο- 
 ὯΔ * 
 σολοῦντες, οὐδὲ λυμαινόμενοι 
 Ul ~ ~ - 
 ξόανα Φεῶν ἠρχοῦντο, ἀλλὰ 
 Ν " ~ ~ 
 καὶ τοῖς αὐτοῖς ὀπτανίοις τῶν 
 4 ~ 
 σεβαστευομένων ἱερῶν ζώων 
 
 χρώμενοι διετέλουν, καὶ ϑότας 
 
 MANETHO. 
 
 for the king of Ethiopia was under 
 obligations to him. He was there- 
 fore kindly received by the king, 
 who took care of all the multitude 
 that was with him, while the country 
 supplied what was necessary for their 
 subsistence. He also allotted to him 
 cities and villages during his exile, 
 which was to continue from its be- 
 ginning during the predestined thir- 
 teen years. Moreover he pitched a 
 camp for an Ethiopian army upon 
 the borders of Egypt, as a protection 
 
 to kmg Amenophis. 
 
 In the mean time, while such was 
 the state of things in Ethiopia, the 
 people of Jerusalem, who had come 
 down with the unclean of the Egyp- 
 tians, treated the inhabitants with 
 such barbarity, that those who wit- 
 nessed their impieties believed that 
 that their joint sway was more exe- 
 crable than that which the Shepherds 
 For 
 they not only set fire to the cities 
 and villages, but committed every 
 kind of sacrilege, and destroyed the 
 images of the gods, and roasted and 
 fed upon those sacred animals that 
 were worshipped; and having com- 
 
 had formerly exercised alone. 
 
 * Hud. supposes some word such as παρασχὼν to have been lost here. 
 
 + MSS. inserts eis τὴν. 
 
 1 Hafn. inserts καὶ, 
 
 § Had. from Lowth and Vet. 10 1.-- χρυσὸν Vulg. 
 
 
 

 
 Ἀ ~ , © ~ Ν 
 καὶ σφαγεῖς τούτων ἱερεῖς καὶ 
 προφήτας ἠνάγκαζον γίνεσθαι, 
 
 Nn ig ΓΕ ΣΧ ͵ 
 καὶ γύμνους ἐξέβαλον᾽ Λέγεται 
 
 » Ὁ Ν + ,ὔ ἈΝ Ν 
 δ᾽ ὅτι τὴν πολιτείαν καὶ τοὺς 
 , Ss ae » 2 
 νόμους αὐτοῖς καταβαλλόμενος 
 ἱερεὺς, τὸ γένος ᾿Ηλιουπολίτης, 
 ΝΜ ~ 
 ὄνομα "Ocapokp, ana τοῦ ἐν 
 Ἡλώου πόλει Seed ᾿Οσέίρεως, ὡς 
 ͵ > ~ ‘ , 
 μετέβη εἰς τοῦτο τὸ γένος, 
 iG my” \ 
 μετετέθη τοὔνομα καὶ προση- 
 
 γορέυθη Matos. 
 
 MANETHO. 181] 
 
 pelled the priests and prophets to 
 kill and sacrifice them, they cast them 
 naked out of the country. It is said 
 also that the priest, who ordained 
 their polity and laws, was by birth 
 of Heliopolis, and his name Osarsiph, 
 from Osiris the god of Heliopolis : 
 but that when he went over to these 
 people his name was changed, and 
 he was called Moyses.—Joseph. contr. 
 
 App. lib. I. ¢. 26. 
 
 OF THE SHEPHERDS AND ISRAELITES. 
 
 4 \ \ 
 (Λέγει δὲ ὁ Μανεθὼν πά- 
 - σ ~ ~ 
 λιν.) Ὅτι μετὰ ταῦτα ἐπῆλ-- 
 Sev ὃ ᾿Αμένωφις ὠτὸ Δἰθιοπίας 
 ‘\ 4 4 Ν 
 μετὰ μεγάλης δυνάμεως, καὶ 
 ~ \ 
 
 ὁ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ Ῥάμψης καὶ αὐ- 
 ᾿ cf , x Ν ΄ 
 τὸς ἔχων δύναμιν καὶ συμβά- 
 λ ε δύ “, / x 
 οντες οἱ δύο τοῖς ποιμέσι καὶ 
 
 ~ ~ yA 
 τοῖς μιαροῖς, ἐνίκησαν αὐτοὺς, 
 ἈΝ ἄς > , 
 καὶ πολλοὺς ἀποκτείναντες 
 »Ἀ7 > 4 MM ~ ey. 
 ἐδίωξαν αὐτοὺς ἄχρι τῶν ὁρίων 
 
 τῆς Συρίας. 
 
 (Manetho again says:) After this 
 Amenophis returned from Ethiopia 
 with a great force, and Rampses also, 
 his son, with other forces, and en- 
 countering the Shepherds and the 
 unclean people, they defeated them 
 and slew multitudes of them, and 
 pursued them to the bounds of Syria. 
 —Joseph. contr, App. lib. I. ce. 27. 
 
EGYPTIAN: FRAGMENTS. 
 
 OF THE EXODUS: 
 
 FROM CHEREMON. 
 
 ~ 4 
 META τοῦτον ἐξετάσαι Bov- 
 4 Ν A 
 λομαι Χαιρήμονα. καὶ yap 
 Ν 
 οὗτος Αἰγυπτιαχὴν φάσχων to- 
 , ΄ Ν 
 τορίαν συγγράφειν; nas προσ- 
 Yj - 
 δεὶς ταυτὸ ὄνομα τοῦ βᾳσι- 
 \ Ψ 
 λέως ὅπερ ὃ Μανεθὼς, ᾿Αμένω- 
 Ν Ν Γ > -Ὁ 
 φιν, καὶ τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ Pa- 
 Ν ed 
 μέσσην, φησὶν, ort, 
 wv 
 “ἐ Kare τοὺς ὕπνους ἡ ΄ἴσις 
 -Ὁ , 
 ἐφάνη τῷ ᾿Αμενώφει, μεμφο- 
 2. » « ἌΡ A . Ὁ 
 μένη αὐτὸν, ὅτι τὸ ἱερὸν αὐτῆς 
 me / 
 ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ κατέσκαπται. 
 \ 
 Φριτιφάντην ἢ δὲ ἱερογραμμα- 
 Téa φᾶναι, ἐὰν τῶν τοὺς μο- 
 / ~ 
 Avo pods ἐχόντων ἀνδρῶν xa- 
 , \ 7 , 
 Νάρῃ τὴν Αἴγυπτον παύσασ- 
 i , 
 Sus τὴς πτοίας ἡ αὐτόν. Ἔπι- 
 “Ori ~ ~ 
 λέξαντα δὲ τῶν ἐπισινῶν μυ- 
 
 ριάδας εἰκοσιπέντε ἐκβαλεῖν. 
 
 * φριτοβάτην, Φριτοβάντην, 
 
 Arter him (Manetho) I wish to 
 examine Cheremon, who professes 
 to have 
 
 Egypt. 
 does Manetho to the king Ameno- 
 
 composed a history of 
 He gives the same name as 
 
 phis and his son Ramesses, and says 
 as follows— 
 
 “Isis appeared to Amenophis in 
 his dreams, rebuking him that her 
 temple should have been overthrown 
 in war. Upon which Phritiphantes 
 the sacred scribe told him, that if he 
 would clear Egypt of all polluted 
 persons he would be delivered from 
 these terrors. He therefore collected 
 two hundred and fifty thousand un- 
 clean persons, and drove them out. 
 Their leaders were two scribes called 
 
 Al. MSS. + πτόας El. 
 
 
 
EGYPTIAN FRAGMENTS. 183 
 
 ~ ᾽ 
 “Hycicbas δ᾽ αὐτῶν γραμμα- 
 -.-Ὁ- % / 
 τέας Matony τε καὶ ᾿Ιώτηπον, 
 ~ / 
 καὶ τοῦτον ἱερογραμματέα. 
 ~ a 2B 
 Αἰγύπτια δ᾽ αὐτοῖς ὀνόματᾳ 
 b 2 ~ \ ~~ , ‘ 
 εἶναι, τῷ μὲν Μωῦσῇ Τισιθὲν, 
 \ 2. ΄ , 
 τῷ δὲ Ἰωσήπῳ Πετεσήφ. Τού- 
 τοὺς δ' εἰς Πελούσιον ἐλθεῖν, 
 καὶ ἐπιτυχεῖν μυριάσι τρια- 
 \ - U 
 κονταύχτω καταλελειμέναις 
 , a , 
 ὑπὸ τοῦ ᾿Αμενώφιος ἃς οὐ Je- 
 Ν wv 
 dew εἰς τὴν Αἴγυπτον dianout- 
 ζειν. 
 τ ,ὔ , 
 Οἷς φιλίαν συνθεμένους ἐπὶ 
 ν » ~ 
 τὴν ΔΑἰγυπτὸν στρατεῦσαι. 
 \ / 
 
 Τὸν δὲ ᾿Αμένωφιν οὐχ ὑπο- 
 4 Ν 4 cow 2 
 pewavta τὴν ἔφοδον αὑτῶν εἰς 
 Αἰθιοπίαν φυγεῖν καταλιπόντα 
 
 Ν - μ᾿ a ὦ 
 τὴν γυναῖκα ἔγκυον. ἣν κρυπ- 
 la a ͵ 
 τομένην ἐν τισι σπηλαίηγις τε- 
 -" ν po 
 κεῖν παὶ δα, ὀνομα Μεσσήνην," 
 a ~ 
 ὃν ἀνδρωθέντα ἐχδιῶξαι τοὺς 
 ἣν if 
 ᾿Ιουδαίους εἰς τὴν Συρίαν, ὅν- 
 Ἂν ἹΓ ‘> \ 
 Tas περὶ εἰκόσι μυριάδας, καὶ 
 A ΄ , ~ 
 τὸν πατέρα ᾿Αμένωφιν ἐκ τῆς 
 
 Αἰδιοπίας καταδέξασϑαι.᾽" 
 
 ΟΕ 
 
 FROM 
 
 ‘ mv 
 Κατὰ τὴν Αἴγυπτον τὸ πα- 
 
 ο Lod ’ 
 λαιὸν, λοικιχῆς περιστασέως 
 
 , ’ 
 γενομένης, ἀνέπεμπον of πολ- 
 
 ee. Ν ῬΔΡ “ ~ 2% 
 AOb THY αἰτιαν τῶν KAKWY ETT 
 
 Moyses and Josephus, the latter of 
 whom was a sacred scribe: but their 
 Egyptian names were, that of Moyses 
 Tisithen, and that of Josephus Pete- 
 seph. They bent their way towards 
 Pelusium where they met with three 
 hundred and eighty thousand men left 
 there by Amenophis, whom he would 
 not suffer to come into Egypt. 
 
 With these they made a treaty and 
 invaded Egypt. But Amenophis 
 waited not to oppose their incursion, 
 but fled into Ethiopia, leaving his 
 wife pregnant: and she concealed 
 herself in a cavern where she brought 
 forth a child and named him Messe- 
 nes, who when he arrived at man- 
 hood drove out the Jews into Syria, 
 being about two hundred thousand, 
 and recalled his father Amenophis 
 from Ethiopia.—Joseph. contr. App. 
 lib.) 1. δ 8, 
 
 THE EXODUS: 
 
 DIODORUS SICULUS. 
 
 There having arisen in former days 
 a pestiferous disease in Egypt, the 
 multitude attributed the cause of the 
 
 evil to the Deity: for a very great 
 
184 
 
 , ΣΝ " \ 
 δαιμόνιον. πολλῶν γὰρ καὶ 
 - / 
 παντοδαπῶν κατοικούντων ξέ- 
 \ as , és 
 νῶν, war διηλλαγμένοις ἐὥεσι 
 / Ν Noe A ἣν x 
 χρωμένων περὶ τὸ ἱερὸν καὶ τὰς 
 ,ὔ 
 ϑυσίας, καταλελύσθαι suve- 
 βαινε παρ αὐτοῖς τὰς πατ- 
 ~ ~ 4 σ > 
 ploug τῶν ϑεῶν τιμάς. “Ὅπερ οἱ 
 τὰ 4 > Ὁ ε Lo 
 τῆς χώρας ἐγγενεῖς ὑπέλαβον, 
 ἐὰν μὴ τοὺς ἀλλοφύλους με- 
 ΕΣ 
 ταστήσωνται, κρίσιν οὐκ ἐσεσ- 
 Sar τῶν κακῶν. Etads οὖν 
 ξενηλατουμένων τῶν ἀλλοεῦ- 
 ~ © Ν > / \ 
 νῶν, Ob μὲν ἐπιφανέστατοι καὶ 
 ra 
 δραστικώτωτοι συστραφέντες 
 , o / 
 ἐξεῤῥίφησαν (ὥς τινές φασιν) 
 εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα, καὶ τιγῶς 
 ΓΞ ,ὕ wv > , 
 ἑτέρους τόπους ἐχοντῶς ἀξιολό-: 
 ε / ἣν. ε ~ 
 yous ἡγεμόνας, wy ἡγοῦντο Δα- 
 ~ lo o 
 ναὺς καὶ Κάδμος τῶν ἄλλων 
 / 
 ἐπιφανέστατοι. 
 Ν ΑΥ / 
 Ὃ δὲ πολὺς λεὼς ἐξέπεσεν 
 » Ν - / > 
 εἰς τὴν νῦν καλουμένην ᾿Ιου- 
 ΄ > sre \ ‘ 
 Satay, οὐ πόῤῥω μὲν κειμένην 
 ~ ~ Ν 
 τῆς Αἰγύπτου, παντελῶς δὲ 
 ” 3 > wae, 
 ἔρημον οὖσαν κατ᾽ ἐκείνους 
 ‘ , > ~ ‘ ~ 
 τοὺς χρύνους. ἠγεῖτο δὲ τῆς 
 > / ε / 
 ἀποικίας ὁ προσαγορευόμενος 
 Μωσῆς, φρονήσει δε πολλῇ καὶ 
 » ͵ 
 ἀνδρείᾳ πλεῖστον διαφέρων. 
 / 
 Οὗτος δὲ καταλαβόμενος τὴν 
 v \ te la 
 χώραν, ἄλλας TE πόλεις ἔκτισε 
 EN OS > ΄ 
 καὶ τὴν νῦν οὖσαν ἐπιφανεστά- 
 
 την» ὀνομαζομένην ἱἹεροσόλυμα. 
 
 EGYPTIAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 concourse of foreigners of every na- 
 tion then dwelt in Egypt, who were 
 addicted to strange rites in their 
 worship and sacrifices; so that in 
 consequence. the due honours of the 
 Whence the 
 native inhabitants of the land infer- 
 
 gods fell into disuse. 
 
 red, that, unless they removed them, 
 there would never be an end of their 
 distresses. They immediately there- 
 fore expelled these foreigners; the 
 most illustrious and able of whom 
 passed over in a body (as some say) 
 into Greece and other places under 
 the conduct of celebrated leaders, of 
 whom the most renowned were Da- 
 naus and Cadmus. 
 
 But a large body of the people 
 went forth into the country which is 
 now called Judza, situated not far 
 distant from Egypt, being altogether 
 The leader of 
 
 this colony was Moses, a man very 
 
 desert in those times. 
 
 remarkable for his great wisdom and 
 valour. When he had taken posses- 
 sion of the land, among other cities, 
 he founded that which is called Jeru- 
 salem which is now the most cele- 
 brated.— Lib. xu. cl. 1. p. 921. 
 
 ͵ 
 
 
 
 N.B. The rest of the fragment gives an account of the Jewish polity, laws, 
 
 δε. 
 served by Photius. 
 
 It was the beginning of Diodorus’ history of the Jewish war, and is pre- 
 
 
 

 
 
 
 EGYPTIAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 OF THE EXODUS OF THE JEWS: 
 
 FROM LYSIMACHUS. 
 
 , 
 Λέγει yap" Ἐπὶ Βοκχόρεως 
 / \ 
 τοῦ Αἰγυπτίων βασ:λέως, τὸν 
 - ~ , »” 
 λαὸν τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων λεπροὺς ὃν- 
 \ ve 
 τας καὶ ψωροὺς, καὶ ἄλλα νο- 
 ΄ ΄ yw > \ 
 σήματά twa ἔχοντας, εἰς τὰ 
 << 2N 4 _ 
 ἱερὰ καταφεύγοντας μεταιτεὶν 
 "»- XN 
 τροφήν. ἸΠαμπόλλων δὲ ἀνϑρώ- 
 / 
 mov νοσηλίᾳ περιπεσόντων, 
 > 7 > ~~ 5 , 
 ἀκαρπίαν ἐν τῇ Αἰγύπτῳ γε- 
 , \ Ν ~ 
 νέσναι. Βόκχοριν δὲ, τὸν τῶν 
 “2 wv 
 Αἰγυπτίων βασιλέα, cis Au- 
 ok / Ν ~ » 
 μώνα Ἐ πέμψαι περὶ τῆς ἀκαρ- 
 , ἂν bis 
 πίας τοὺς μαντευσομένους" τὸν 
 Θεὸν δὲ εἰπεῖν ἡ τὰ ἱερὰ κα- 
 ~ > > > 4 3 4 
 διᾶραι ἀπ᾽ ἀνδρώπων ἀνάγνων 
 - , 
 καὶ δυσσεβῶν, ἐκβαλλόντα 
 ΕΣ ΨΩ. OA οἱ , 
 αὐτοὺς ἐκ τῶν ἱερῶν εἰς τόπους 
 \ Ν 
 ἐρέμους, τοὺς δὲ ψωροὺς καὶ 
 ae 
 λεπροὺς βυδίσαι, ὡς τοῦ ἡλίου 
 ~ Ἂν ~ 
 ἀγανακτοῦντος ἐπὶ τῇ τούτων 
 ~ δ. ΑΕ (ΘΕῚ Ά, ς ΄ Ν 
 ζωῇ καὶ τὰ ἱερὰ ἁγνίσαι, καὶ 
 of Ν σῷ 7 
 οὕτω τὴν γῆν καρποφορήσειν. 
 Χ , 
 
 Τὸν δὲ Βόκχοριν τοὺς χρησμοὺς 
 , ~ 
 λαβόντᾳ τούς τε ἱερεῖς καὶ 
 ἐπιβωμίτας προσκαλεσάμενον, 
 
 ~ > ΕΥ̓ 0. , 
 κελεῦσαι ἐπιλογὴν ποιησαμέ- 
 
 ~ > ΄ ~ 
 yvoug τῶν UAATETOY, τοις 
 
 * “Auuwyos MSS. 
 
 He says, That in the reign of Boc- 
 choris king of Egypt, the Jewish 
 people being infected with leprosy , 
 scurvy, and sundry other diseases, 
 took shelter in the temples where 
 they begged for food; and that in 
 consequence of the vast number of 
 persons who were seized with the 
 complaint there became a scarcity in 
 Egypt. Upon this Bocchoris the 
 king of the Egyptians sent persons 
 to inquire of the Oracle of Ammon, 
 respecting the sterility: and the god 
 directed him to cleanse the temples 
 of all polluted and impious men and 
 cast them out into the desert, but to 
 drown those that were affected with 
 the leprosy and scurvy, inasmuch as 
 their existence was displeasing to the 
 Sun; then to purify the temples; upon 
 which the land would recover its ferti- 
 lity. When Bocchoris had received the 
 oracle, he assembled the priests and 
 attendants of the altars, and com- 
 manded them to gather together all the 
 unclean persons and deliver them over 
 to the soldiers to lead them forth into 
 
 + ’Epe) MSS. 
 BB 
 
186 
 
 στρατιώταις τούτους παραδοῦ- 
 4 aN. 2 \ 
 var κατάξειν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν 
 ov fs ν᾿ \ \ > 
 Epnjaoy" τοὺς δὲ Aempads εἰς μο- 
 λυβδίνους χάρτας ἐνδήσαντας; 
 2 - 
 να χαδῶσιν εἰς τὸ πέλαγος. 
 Βυσισδϑέντων δὲ τῶν λεπρῶν 
 Ἂν ~ 
 καὶ ψωρῶν, τοὺς ἄλλους συνῳ- 
 3; διέ 3 / pd 
 polortévtas εἰς τόπους ἐρήμους 
 ἐχτεδϑήναι ἐπ᾽ ἀπωλείᾳ" Συ- 
 γαχΜέντας δὲ βουλεύσασϑαι 
 Ν “ 
 περὶ αὑτῶν, νυκτὸς δ᾽ ἐπιγε- 
 Ψ -“ Ν , , 
 νομένης, πῦρ καὶ λύχνους καύ- 
 σαντας φυλάττέιν ἑαυτοὺς, 
 ΄ ~ 
 τήν τ᾿ ἐπιοῦσαν νύκτα νησ- 
 , . 
 τεύσαντας ihdonerdar τοὺς 
 \ ~ ~ 
 Seods, περὶ τοῦ σῶσαι αὑτοὺς. 
 Τῇ δ᾽ ἐπιούσῃ ἡμέρᾳ Μωῦσῆν 
 Tia συμβουλεῦσαι 
 
 παραβαλλομένους 
 
 αὐτοῖς, 
 ie «ᾺἝ 
 
 μίαν ὁδὸν 
 ΄ ” ΠῚ 2). 
 
 τέμνειν, ἄχρις ἄν ἢ ἔλϑωσιν εἰς 
 / > . - 
 
 τόπους οἰχουμένους, παρακελεύ- 
 
 Ψ Nn 
 
 σασδαΐ τε αὐτοῖς, μήτε ἀν- 
 4 Ν 
 
 διρώπων τινὶ εὐνοήσειν, μήτε 
 
 a 
 
 ἄριστα συμβουλεύσειν, ἀλλὰ 
 A γ΄. ~ 
 
 τὰ χείρονα" Θεῶν Te ναούς καὶ 
 
 β ‘ z A , 
 ὠμοὺς, οἷς ἄν περιτύχωσιν, 
 > , ΄ 
 
 ἄνωτρέπειν. Συναινεσάντων 
 \ ~ » 
 
 δὲ τῶν ἄλλων, τὰ δοχϑέντα 
 
 - ὃ A Ὁ aay, 
 
 ποιοῦντας διὰ τῆς ἐρήμου πο- 
 Ἂ we 
 
 peverSa, ἱκανῶς δὲ ὀχληθέν- 
 
 ΕῚ ~ > 
 
 τας ἐλδεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκουμένην 
 uA Ν 4 
 
 χώραν, καὶ τούς τε avIpdmovs 
 
 ε Μ \ ~ 
 
 ὑβρίζοντας, καὶ τὰ ἱερὰ συλῶν- 
 
 Tas ual ἐμπρήσαντας, ἐλθεῖν 
 
 EGYPTIAN 
 
 FRAGMENTS. 
 
 the desert ; but to wrap the lepers in 
 sheets of lead and cast them into the 
 After they had drowned those 
 afflicted with the leprosy and scurvy, 
 they collected the rest and left them 
 to perish in the desert. But they 
 tcok counsel among themselves, and 
 when night came on lighted up fires 
 and torches to defend themselves, and 
 fasted all the next night to propitiate 
 the gods to save them. Upon the 
 following day a certain man called 
 Moyjses counselled them to persevere 
 
 sea. 
 
 in following one direct way till they 
 should arrive at habitable places, and 
 enjoined them to hold no friendly 
 communication with men, neither to 
 follow those things which men es- 
 teemed good, but such as were con- 
 sidered evil: and to overthrow the 
 temples and altars of the gods as 
 often as they should happen with 
 them. When they had assented to 
 these proposals, they continued their 
 journey through the desert, acting 
 upon those rules, and after severe 
 hardships they at length arrived in a 
 habitable country, where, having in- 
 flicted every kind of injury upon the 
 inhabitants, plundering and burning 
 the temples, they came at length to 
 the land which is now called Judea, 
 and founded a city and settled there. 
 This city was named Hierosyla from 
 
 * ἄχρι ἂν ὅτι Big. Hafn. 
 
 
 
EGYPTIAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 ’ 
 εἰς τὴν νῦν ᾿Ιουδαίαν προσαγο- 
 , Ν / 
 ρενομένην, κτίσαντας δὲ πόλιν 
 ἊΝ -- ᾿ \ 
 ἐνταῦθα κατοικεῖν. Τὸ δὲ 
 » » ε , ἮΝ ὑπ 
 ἄστυ τοῦτο ἹἹερόσυλα ἀπὸ 
 - > ]͵ , . / 
 τῆς ἐκείνων διαθεσέως ὠνομάσ- 
 Sar “ OSS Ver Sek Sone 
 αἰ Ἵ ὕστερον δὲ αὐτοὺς ἐπι- 
 ΄ , - 
 κρατήσαντας, χρόνῳ διαλλάξαι 
 \ > ,ὔ \ \ N+ 
 τὴν ὀνομασίαν πρὸς τὸ μὴ Ὁ 
 ὀνειδίζεσθαι, καὶ τήν τε πόλιν 
 ἽἼ /. Ἁ > Ἁ hj 
 εροσόλυμα, καὶ αὐτοὺς Ἵερο- 
 
 σολύμους προσαγορεύεσθαι. 
 
 187 
 
 their disposition. But in after times 
 when they acquired strength, to ob- 
 literate the reproach, they changed its 
 name and called the city Hierosoly- 
 ma, and themselves Hierosolymites. 
 
 —Jos. contr. App. 34. 
 
 OF THE EXODUS: 
 
 FROM POLEMO. 
 
 Kai Ἑλλήνων δέ τινες to- 
 ~ \ ‘ 9 \ , 
 τοροῦσι κατὰ τοὺς αὐτοὺς χρό- 
 ϑ 
 νους γενέσθαι Μωσέα. 
 ’ ἣν » ~ Ἃ 
 Πολέμων μὲν ἐν τῇ πρώτῃ 
 τῶν “Ἑλληνικῶν ἰστοριῶν λέγων 
 aw ~ 
 Ἐπὶ τοῦ Απιδὸς τοῦ Φορωνέως, 
 μοῖρα τοῦ Αἰγυπτίων στρατοῦ 
 , ~ 
 ἐξέπεσεν Αἰγύπτου. of ἐν τῇ 
 - ’ 
 Παλαιστίνῃ καλουμένῃ Συρίᾳ» 
 " Joe > ,ὔ " 
 οὐ πόῤῥω ᾿Αραβίας ᾧκησαν, 
 αὐτοὶ δηλονότι οἱ μετὰ Μω- 
 
 ul 
 σεως. 
 
 relate 
 that Moses flourished in those times. 
 
 Some of the Greeks also 
 
 Polemo in the first book of his 
 Grecian histories says, that—‘ In the 
 reign of Apis the son of Phoroneus a 
 part of the Egyptian army deserted 
 from Egypt and took up their habi- 
 tation in that part of Syria which is 
 called Palestine not far from Arabia :” 
 these indeed were they who went out 
 with Moses.—Afric. cited Eus. Pr. 
 
 Ev. lib. 10. 
 
 * Quod. ἱερὰ σεσυλήκασι. Hud.—'IegoodAuna MSS. 
 
 + ὠνόμασται MSS. 
 
 { Vet. Int. Hud.—Gr. omitted μή. 
 
188 EGYPTIAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 OF THE EXODUS: 
 
 FROM PTOLEMUS MENDESIUS. 
 
 Κατέσκαψε δὲ τὴν Αὔα- 
 ριν ΓΆμωσις κατὰ τὸν ᾿Αργεῖον 
 γενόμενος Ivaxor, ὡς ἐν τοῖς 
 χρόνοις ἀνέγραψεν 6 Μενδήσιος 
 
 Πτολεμαῖος. 
 
 Amosis, who lived about the same 
 time with Inachus the Argive over- 
 threw the city Avaris ; as Ptolemzus 
 Mendesius has related in his chroni- 
 cles.—Clemens Strom. cited Eus. Pr. 
 Ev. lib. 10. 
 
 OF THE EXODUS OF THE JEWS: 
 
 FROM ARTABANUS.* 
 
 sy \ 
 
 Tors δὲ χρησαμένους παρὰ 
 
 ~ 3 
 
 τῶν Αἰγυπτίων, πολλὰ μὲν 
 
 ἐχπώματα, οὐκ ὀλίγον δὲ ἱμα- 
 
 " A ~ 
 
 τισμὸν, ἄλλην τὲ παμπληθῆ 
 
 / 4 Ν \ 
 
 γάσων, διαβάντας τοὺς κατὰ 
 
 \ 
 
 τὴν ᾿Δραβίαν ποταμοὺς καὶ 
 
 διαβάντας ἱχανὸν τόπον, ἐπὶ 
 
 τὴν ἔρυθραν τριταίους ἐλδεῖν 
 
 4 
 
 δάλασσαν. 
 
 Καὶ Μεμφιτας μὲν λέγειν 
 
 And they (the Jews) borrowed 
 of the Egyptians many vessels and 
 no small quantity of raiment, and 
 every variety of treasure, and passed 
 over the branches of the river to- 
 wards Arabia, and upon the third 
 day’s march arrived at a convenient 
 station upon the Red Sea. 
 
 And the Memphites say that 
 
 * Artabahus, evidently an Alexandrian Jew, is said to have written about 
 acentury B.C. The fragments of his history which have been preserved follow 
 the Scripture with some few variations and additions. I have inserted the above 
 fragment on account of the Memphite and Heliopolitan traditions of the Exodus 
 referred to in it, Its authenticity, however, is very much to be suspected. 
 
 
 
EGYPTIAN FRAGMENTS, 
 
 » ΝΜ Ν 4 Lime 
 ἔμπειρον ὄντα τὸν Μώυσον τῆς 
 » ΄ 
 χώρας, τὴν ἄμπωτιν τηρήσαν- 
 ~ - , 
 τὰ, διὰ ξηρᾶς τῆς ϑαλάσσης 
 τὸ πλῆθος παραιῶσαι. 
 - Ἁ φ: 
 “Ἡλιουπολίτας δὲ ΛΔέγειν 
 ~ / 
 ἐπικαταδραμεῖν τὸν βασιλέα 
 ᾿ “ 
 μετὰ πολλῆς δυνάμεως ἅμα 
 \ "» A , 
 καὶ τοῖς καθιερωμένοις ζώοις 
 \ , 
 διὰ τὸ τὴν ὕπαρξιν τοὺς ᾿Ιού- 
 , ~ > , ,ὔ 
 δαίους τῶν Αἰγυπτίων χρησαμέ- 
 Λ ~ \ 4 
 νους διακομίζειν. Τῷ de Μώυσῳ 
 , 
 Relay φωνὴν γενέσσαι πατά- 
 - Ὁ ¢ > 
 ξαι τὴν ϑδάλασσαν τῇ ῥάβδῳ. 
 τὸν de Μώυσον ἀκούσαντα, 
 ἐπιθίγειν τῇ ῥάβδω τοῦ ὕδατος, 
 Ν . XN ‘ ~ ~ 
 καὶ οὕτω τὸ μὲν νᾶμα διαστῆ- 
 \ ~ 
 var, τὴν δὲ δύναμιν διὰ ξηρᾶς 
 ~ ͵ 
 δὸοῦ πορευέσθαι. Συνεμβάν- 
 A ~ 
 τῶν δὲ τῶν Αἰγυπτίων καὶ 
 ,ὕ Ν Ὁ 5» »“᾿ » 
 διωκόντων, φησὶ πῦρ αὐτοῖς ἐκ 
 “ὦ τ ἂν Ν 
 τῶν ἔμπροσδεν ἐκλάμψαι, τὴν 
 \ ~ 
 δὲ ϑάλασσαν πάλιν τὴν δδὸν 
 Meme 
 ἐπικλύσαι. τοὺς δὲ Αἰγυπτίους 
 ef ~ \ Nines 
 UMOTE τοὺ πυρὸς καὶ τῆς πλημ- 
 βυριδος πάντας διαφναρῆναι. 
 , \ 
 Teds δὲ Ἰουδαίους διαφυ- 
 , Ἂς 4 7 
 γόντας τὸν κίνδυνον, τρίωκοντα 
 wv ~ ~ 
 ἔτη ἐν TH ἐρημῷ διατρίψαι, 
 Le "-Ὁ-Ὁ 
 βρέχοντος Jed 
 
 ~ oe » 7 / 
 Ἀρίμινον, O(AOLGY ελύμῳ, χιόνι 
 
 > ~ ~ 
 αὑτοῖς τοῦ 
 
 παραπλήσιον τὴν χρόαν. γεγο- 
 
 * Artabanus 7 
 narrative of Artabanus ? 
 
 189 
 
 Moyses being well acquainted with 
 that part of the country waited for 
 the ebbing of the tide, and then made 
 the whole multitude pass through the 
 shallows of the sea. 
 
 But the Heliopolitans say that the 
 king pursued them with great power, 
 and took with him the sacred ani- 
 mals, in order to recover the sub- 
 stance which the Jews had borrowed 
 But that a divine 
 voice instructed Moyses to strike the 
 and that when 
 Moyses heard this he touched the 
 waters with the rod, whereupon the 
 
 of the Egyptians. 
 
 sea with his rod: 
 
 waves stood apart, and the host went 
 through along adry path. He®* says 
 moreover that when the Egyptians 
 came up with them and followed after 
 them, the fire flashed on them from 
 before, and the sea again inundated 
 the path, and that all the Egyptians 
 perished either by the fire or by the 
 
 return of the waters. 
 
 But the Jews escaped the danger 
 and passed thirty years in the desert, 
 where God rained upon them a kind 
 of grain like that called Panic, whose 
 color was like snow. He says also 
 
 that Moyses was ruddy with white 
 
 Qy. Does not Eusebius here resume his extract from the 
 
190 EGYPTIAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 vévas δέ φησι τὸν Μώυσον, 
 ε - x / 
 
 muppann, πολιὸν, κομήτην» 
 
 ἀξιωματικόν. ταῦτα δὲ πράξαι 
 » oo > ΄ 
 
 περὶ ἔτη ὄντα ὀγδοήκοντα 
 
 Ἄς Χϑ' 
 ἐννεᾶ.: 
 
 
 
 hair and of a dignified deportment : 
 and that when he did these things he | 
 was in the eighty-ninth year of his 
 age.—Eus, Pr. Ev. lib. 10. 
 
THE FRAGMENTS 
 
 THE TYRIAN ANNALS: 
 
 FROM 
 
 DIUS AND MENANDER. 
 

 

 
 
 
 
 
 THE TYRIAN ANNALS: 
 
 FROM DIUS.* 
 
 ABIBAAOY τελευτήσαντος; ὁ 
 - i. i 
 υἱὸς αὐτοῦ Eipwuss 7 ἐβασίλευ- 
 ἘΝ ὁ \ \ > \ 
 Gey’ οὗτος τὰ πρὸς ἀνατολᾶς 
 7 - , + / 
 μέρη τῆς πόλεως Ὁ προσέχωσεν. 
 »ἶ ~ - » 4 
 καὶ μεῖζον τὸ ἄστυ πεποίη- 
 κεν, ὃ καὶ τοὺ ᾿Ολυμπίου Διὸς 
 ν Ἂ / 
 τὸ ἱερὸν καθ᾽ ἑαυτὸ ὃν ἐν νήσῳ,} 
 tA Ν᾿ ‘\ / 
 χώσας τὸν μεταξὺ τόπον, συν- 
 ~ ~ 7. Ν ns 
 ἥψε τῇ πόλει, καὶ χρυσοῖς 
 9 ͵΄ Po as 
 ἀναθήμασιν ἐκόσμησεν" ἀνα- 
 / 
 βὰς δὲ εἰς τὸν Λίβανον ὑλοτὸ- 
 μήσε πρὸς τὴν τῶν ναῶν κατα- 
 ΄ τὶ \ ~ c 
 σκευήν. Toy δὲ τυραννοῦντα “Te- 
 ~ ͵ 
 ροσολύμων Σολομῶνα πέμψαι 
 Ἂ 
 φασὶ 
 δ ἃ Ν 3 3) 
 αἰνίγματα, καὶ map αὕτου 
 ~ ταν ς \ 
 λαβεῖν ἀξιοῦν" 4 τὸν δὲ μὴ 
 
 δυνήψεντα διακρῖναι, τῷ λύ- 
 
 \ Ν cf 
 πρὸς τὸν Kipwproy 
 
 * Dion. Syne. 
 
 t Sync. omits τῆς πόλεως. 
 
 || ἐν ἴσῳ Syne. 
 
 OF HIRAM. 
 
 Upon the death of Abibalus his son 
 Hiromus succeeded to the kingdom. 
 He raised the eastern parts of the 
 city, and enlarged the citadel; and 
 joined to it the temple of Jupiter 
 Olympius, which stood before upon 
 an island, by filling up the interme- 
 diate space: and he adorned that 
 temple with donations of gold: and 
 he went up into Libanus to cut tim- 
 ber for the construction of the tem- 
 ples. And it is said that Solomon, 
 who at that time reigned in Jerusa- 
 lem, sent enigmas to Hiromus, and 
 desired others in return, with a pro- 
 posal that whichsoever of the two 
 was unable to solve them, should for- 
 
 feit money to the other. Hiromus 
 
 + Σίραμος Sync. 
 § ἐποίησε Sync. 
 4 παῤ αὐτου τὴν λύσιν λαβεῖν El. 
 
 cc 
 
194 THE 
 
 σαντι χρήματα ἀποτίνειν. ὅμω-- 
 λογήσαντα δὲ τὸν Ἑἵρωμον; καὶ 
 μὴ δυνήθεντα λύσαι τὰ αἰνίγ- 
 ματα, πολλὰ τῶν χρηματῶν 
 εἰς τὸ ἐπιζήμιον ἀναλῶσαι. 
 εἶτα δὲ ᾿Αβδήμονόν * τινα Τύ- 
 ριον ἄνδρα τὰ προτέθεντα λύ- 
 σαι καὶ αὐτὸν ἄλλα προβαλεῖν" 
 ἃ μὴ λύσαντα τὸν Σολομῶνα, 
 πολλὰ τῷ Ἑἱρώμῳ προσαποτί- 
 
 σαι χρήματα. 
 
 TYRIAN ANNALS. 
 
 agreed to the proposal, but was un- 
 able to solve the enigmas, and paid 
 treasures to a large amount as a for- 
 And it is said that 
 one Abdemonus, a Tyrian, solved the 
 
 feit to Solomon. 
 
 enigmas, and proposed others which 
 Solomon was not able to unriddle, for 
 which he repaid the fine to Hiromus. 
 —Joseph. contr, Ap. lib. I. ς. 17.— 
 Syncel. Chron, 182. 
 
 OF THE KINGS AND JUDGES FROM NEBUCHADNEZZAR 
 
 Ἐπὶ Εἰθωβάλου τοῦ βασι- 
 λέως ἐπολιόρκησε Ναβουχρδο- 
 γόσορος τὴν Τύρον ἐπ’ ἔτη δε- 
 κατρία Ἵ μετὰ τοῦτον ἐβασί- 
 λευσε Βαὰλ ἔτη δέκα. μετὰ 
 τοῦτον δικαστὰι κατεστάση- 
 σαν χαὶ ἐδίκασαν" ᾿Εχνίβαλος 
 Βασλάχου μῆνας δύο, Χέλβης 
 ᾿Αβδαίου μῆνας δέκα, "Αββα- 
 pos ἀρχιερὲυς μῆνας τρεῖς, Μύτ- 
 γονος καὶ Γεράστρατος τοῦ ᾿Αβ- 
 δηλόμου δικαστὰι ἔτη el, ὧν 
 μεταξὺ ἐβασίλευτε Βαλάτορος 
 ἐνιαυτὸν ἕνα" τόυτου τελευτή- 
 σαντος, ἀποστείλαντες μετε- 
 
 πέμψαντο Μέρβαλον ἐκ τὴς 
 
 TO CYRUS. 
 
 In the reign of Ithobalus, Nabu- 
 chodonosorus besieged Tyre for thir- 
 teen years. After him reigned Baal 
 After him Judges were 
 appointed who judged the people: 
 Ecnibalus, the son of Baslachus, two 
 Chelbes, the son of Ab- 
 dzeus, ten months : Abbarus, the high- 
 priest, three months: Mytgonus and 
 Gerastratus the son of Abdelemus, 
 six years : 
 
 ten years. 
 
 months : 
 
 after them Balatorus 
 reigned one year as king: and upon 
 his death the Tyrians sent to fetch 
 Merbalus from Babylon: and he 
 reigned four years: and when he 
 died they sent for Hiromus, his bro- 
 
 * ’ABSduovoy Go. 
 + Several editions omit from Ναβουχοδονόσορος. 
 
 
 

 
 Βαβύλωνος, καὶ ἐβασίλευσεν 
 » ,ὔ / 
 ἐτὴ τέσσαρα. τόυτου τελευ- 
 ee , \ 
 τήταντος, μετεπέμψαντο τὸν 
 ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ Eipwuoy, ὃς ἐβα- 
 ," » uv ; ee , 
 σίλευσεν ἔτη εἴκοσιν. ἐπὶ τού- 
 του Κῦρος Περσῶν ἐδυνάστευ- 
 σεν. 
 
 (Οὐκοῦν 6 σύμπας χρόνος ἔτη 
 πεντήκοντα τεσσάρα καὶ τρεῖς ἢ 
 μῆνες πρὸς αὐτοῖς. Ἑβδόμῳ 
 μὲν γὰρ περὶ ἡ τῆς Ναβουχο- 
 δονοσόρου βασιλείας ἤρξατο πο- 
 λιορκεῖν Τύρον᾽ τεσσαρεσχαι- 
 δεκάτῳ δ᾽ ἔτει τῆς Εἱρώμου 
 Κῦρος ὁ Πέρσης τὸ κράτος παρ- 
 ἔλαβεν.) 
 
 DIUS. 195 
 
 ther, who reigned twenty years. In 
 his time Cyrus was king of Persia. 
 
 (The whole time therefore amounts 
 to fifty-four years and three months. 
 For in the seventh year of his reign 
 Nabuchodonosorus began the siege 
 of Tyre: and in the fourteenth year 
 of Hiromus Cyrus the Persian as- 
 sumed the government of that king- 
 dom.)—Joseph. contr. Ap. lib. I. 
 6. 21. 
 
 * ἐξ Hafn. Big. 
 + ἐπὶ Hafn.—J. Cappel. reads ἑβδόμῳ μὲν γὰρ καὶ δεκάτῳ ἔτει, &c. 
 
THE TYRIAN ANNALS: 
 
 FROM MENANDER. 
 
 ΤΕΛΕΥΤΗΣΑΝΤΟῸΣ δὲ ᾽Αβι- 
 βάλου, διεδέξατο τὴν βασι- 
 λείαν ὃ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ Εἵρωμος, ὅς 
 βίωτας ἔτη πεντήκοντα τρία 
 ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη Ἔ τριάκοντα 
 τέσσαρα. οὗτος ἔχωσε τὸν 
 Εὐρύχωρον, tov τε χρυσοῦν 
 κίονα ἐν τοῖς τοῦ Διὸς ἀνέϑη- 
 χεν" ἔτι ἡ τε ὕλην ξύλων ἀπελ-- 
 Nav ἔκοψεν, ἀπὸ τοῦ λεγομένου 
 ὕρους Λιβάνου, κέδρινα ξύλα 
 εἰς τὰς τῶν ἱερῶν στέγας. κα- 
 Sehdv τε τὰ ἀρχαῖα ἱερὰ, 
 χαινοὺς ναοὺς ῳπχοδόμησε, τὸ 
 τε τοῦ Ἡρακλέους, καὶ τὴς 
 ᾿Αστάρτης τέμενος ἀνιέρευσεν, 
 καὶ τὸ μὲν τοῦ Ἡρακλέους 
 πρῶτον ἐποιήσατο ἐν τῷ Περ- 
 
 ΄,ὔ Wee ὁ \ on 
 “τίῳ μηνὶ, εἶτα τὸ τῆς ᾿Αστάρ- 
 
 OF HIRAM. 
 
 Arter the death of Abibalus, Hiro- 
 mus his son succeeded him in his 
 kingdom, and reigned thirty-four 
 years, having lived fifty-three. He 
 laid out that part of the city which is 
 called Eurychoron: and consecrated 
 the golden column which is in the 
 temple of Jupiter. And he went up 
 into the forest on the mountain called 
 Libanus, to fell cedars for the roofs 
 of the temples: and having demo- 
 lished the ancient temples, he rebuilt 
 them, and consecrated the fanes of 
 Hercules and Astarte: he construct- 
 ed that of Hercules first, in the month 
 Peritius ; then that of Astarte, when 
 he had overcome the Tityans who 
 had refused to pay their tribute: and 
 when he had subjected them he re- 
 
 * Hud. from Syne. and Ant.—from πεντήκοντα was before omitted. 
 
 + ἐπὶ Syne.—éirerra Vulg. 
 
 Ἷ πρώτου τε τὴν ἔγερσιν τοῦ Ἡρακλέους ἐποιήσατο Al. 
 
 
 

 
 / ν᾿ ~ 4 
 τῆς; ὁπότε Τιτυοῖς * ἐπεστρά- 
 Ν » I Ν 
 τευσεν, μὴ ἀποδιδουσι τοὺς 
 / a Ne ‘ ε ~ 
 φόρους. οὕς καὶ ὑποτάξας ἑαυτῷ 
 ͵ i \ 
 πάλιν ἀνέστρεψεν. ἐπὶ τού- 
 του δὲ τὶς ἣν ᾿Αβδήμονος παῖς 
 a I ἧς 
 νεώτερος, ὃς t ἐνίκα τὰ προβλή- 
 a / \ 
 vata, ἃ ἐπέτασσε Σολομὼν 
 
 ὁ Ἱεροσολύμων βασιλεύς. 
 
 MENANDER. 197 
 
 turned. In his time was a certain 
 young man named Abdemonus, who 
 used to solve the problems which 
 were propounded to him by Solomon 
 king of Jerusalem.—Joseph. contr. 
 Ap. 110. I. ο. 18.—Joseph. Antigq. 
 
 Jud. lib. VIII. c. 5. 
 
 OF THE SUCCESSORS OF HIRAM. 
 
 Τελευτήσαντος Εἱρώμου διε- 
 δέξατο τὴν βασιλείαν Βαλεά- 
 ῃ a + 
 ζαρος ὃ ὃ υἱὸς; ὃς, βιώσας ἔτη 
 / / > ΄ὔ 
 τεσσαράκοντα τρία, ἐβασί- 
 wv ε v \ “ῳ 
 λευσεν ἔτη ἑπτά. μετὰ τοῦτον 
 3 ~ 
 ᾿Αβδάστρατος || ὁ αὐτοῦ υἱὸς, 
 v Μ , 
 βιώσας ern εἴκοσι ἐννέα, ἐβα- 
 i mv > , ~ ε 
 σίλευσεν ἔτη ἐννέα. τοῦτον οἵ 
 ~ ~ " - er / 
 τῆς τροφοῦ αὐτοῦ υἱοι τέσσα- 
 pes ἐπιβουλεύσαντες ἀπώλε- 
 ν 4 δ 
 σαν, ὧν ὁ πρεσβύτερος ἐβασί- 
 . 3 a 
 hevoey ἔτη δεκαδύο. pred ove 
 ᾽ 
 Ἄσταρτος ὃ Δελαιαστάρτου, 4] 
 a ΄ " ΄ 
 ὃς, βιώσας ἔτη πεντήκοντα 
 , a 
 τέσσαρα, ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη δώ-- 
 δεκα. μετὰ τοῦτον ὁ ἀδελφὸς 
 
 αὐτοῦ ᾿Ασέρυμος, ** βιώσας 
 
 Upon the death of Hiromus, Ba- 
 leazarus his son succeeded to the 
 kingdom ; he lived forty-three years, 
 and reigned seven : after him Abdas- 
 tratus his son reigned nine years, 
 having lived twenty-nine: against him 
 the four sons of his nurse conspired, 
 of these the eldest 
 reigned twelve years: 
 
 and slew him: 
 after them 
 Astartus, the son of Delezastartus, 
 reigned twelve years, having lived 
 fifty-four: after him his brother 
 Aserumus reigned nine years, having 
 lived fifty-four : he was slain by his 
 brother Pheles, who governed the 
 kingdom eight months, having lived 
 fifty years : he was slain by the priest 
 
 * Tiros El,—Lowth proposes Tupiors—Titicezos Vet. Int.— Ινκέοις ᾿Ηὕὔκαίοις 
 
 MSS.—’Hixéos Jos, in Ant. 
 
 + Sync. omits the eleven lines from καϑελών τε. 
 1 Syne. and Jos. in Ant. insert ce}. 
 ὃ Βαλβάζερος ϑγηο.---βααλβάζερος Dind. 
 
 || Αὐδάσταρτος Syn.—'ABdéoragros Din. 
 
 ** ᾿Ασϑαρῦμος Din. 
 
 4 ᾿Ελεαστάρτου Sync, 
 
198 
 
 ἔτη τέσσαρα καὶ πεντήκοντα, 
 ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη ἐννέα. οὗτος 
 ἀπώλετο ὑπὸ τοὺ ἀδελφοῦ Φέ- 
 λητος, * ὃς λαβὼν τὴν βασι- 
 λείαν ἦρξε μῆνας ὀκτὼ, βιώσας 
 ἔτη πεντέκοντα. τοῦτον ἄνει- 
 λεν Εἰδώβαλος ἡ ὁ τῆς ᾿Δσ- 
 ταρτῆς ἱερεὺς, ὃς, βασιλέυσας 
 ἔτη τριάκοντα δύο, ἐβίωσεν 
 ἔτη ἑξήκοντα ὀκτω. τοῦτον διε- 
 δέξατο Βαδέζωρος f υἱὸς, ὃς» 
 βιώσας ἔτη τεσσαράκοντα 
 πέντε, ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη ἕξ. 
 τούτου διάδοχος γέγονε Μάτ- 
 γήνος § ὃ υἱὸς, ὃς, βιώσας ἔτη 
 τριάκοντα δύο, ἐβασίλευσεν 
 ἔτη ἐννέα. τούτου διάδοχος γέ- 
 γόνε Φυγμαλίων, || βιώσας δ᾽ 
 ἔτη πεντήκοντα ἕξ, ἐβασίλευ- 
 σεν ἔτη τεσσαράκοντα ἑπτά. 
 ἐν δὲ τῷ ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἑβδόμῳ ἔτει 
 ἡ ἀδελφὴ αὐτοῦ Ἵ φυγοῦσα, 
 ἐν τῇ Λιβύῃ πόλιν φκοδόμησε 
 Καρχηδόνα. 
 
 (Συνάγεται δὴ πᾶς ὃ χρόνος 
 ἀπὸ τῆς Εἱρώμου βασιλείας 
 ἄχρι Καρχηδόνος κτίσεως, ἔτη 
 ρνέ μῆνες η΄. Ἐπεὶ δὲ δω- 
 δεκάτῳ ἔτει τῆς Εἱρώμου βα- 
 
 σιλείας ἐν ἹἹεροσολύμοις ὠκοδο- 
 
 * φέλλητος Sync. 
 
 THE TYRIAN ANNALS. 
 
 of Astarte, Ithobalus, who reigned 
 thirty-two years, having lived sixty- 
 eight : and he was succeeded by Ba- 
 dezorus his son, who reigned six 
 years, having lived forty-five: his 
 successor was Matgenus his son, who 
 reigned nine years, having lived 
 thirty-two: and he was succeeded by 
 Phygmalion who reigned forty-seven 
 years, having lived fifty-six: in the 
 seventh year of his reign his sister 
 fled from him, and founded the city 
 of Carthage in Libya. 
 
 (Whence it appears that the sum of 
 the whole time from the reign of Hi- 
 romus to the foundation of Carthage 
 is 155 years and 8 months. And since 
 the temple in Jerusalem was built in 
 the twelfth year of the reign of Hiro- 
 
 1 Εἰθόβαλος Sync. 
 
 1 Βαλέζωρος Din.—BéaAZegos Go. 
 § Μέτινος Ὠϊη.--Μήτηνος Β.---λΛετῖνος Go. 
 || Μυγδαλίων Φυσμανοῦν ϑ'γηο.---Πυγμαλίων Go. τη.---Φυσιμανοῦν Go. 
 
 J Sc. inserts Asda. 
 
 ** Hud. from Theoph. Ant.—x’ Vulg. 
 
 
 
μήϑη ὃ vads, γέγονεν οὖν Ἐ 
 ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκοδομιήσεως τοῦ ναοῦ 
 Ε , ΄, Μ 
 
 ἄχρι Καρχηδόνος κτίσεως, ern 
 ε \ ΄ , ; 
 ἑκατὸν τεσσαράκοντα τρία T 
 
 μῆνες ὀκτώ.) 
 
 MENANDER. 199 
 
 mus, therefore from the building of the 
 temple to the foundation of Carthage 
 the time is a hundred and forty-three 
 years and eight months.)—Jos. cont. 
 Ap. lib. I. ¢.. 18.—Syne. 183. 
 
 OF THE INVASION OF SALMANASAR. 
 
 ~ U 
 Kai Ἐλουλαῖος ἢ ὄνομα 
 a 4 σ΄ 
 ἐβασίλευσεν ἔτη τριάκοντα ἕξ. 
 4 
 οὗτος, ἀποστάντων Κιτταίων, ὃ 
 ΟΥ̓͂Ν, , > 
 ανάπλευσας, προσηγάγετο αὖ- 
 τοὺς πάλιν. ἐπὶ τούτους TEU- 
 ψὰς(Σαλμάνασαρ) ὁ τῶν ᾿Ασ- 
 συρίων βασιλεὺς, ἐπῆλνε Φοι- 
 ,ὔ ~ ef σ 
 γίκην πολεμῶν ἅπασαν. ὃς τις 
 9.2 
 εἰρήνην» 
 
 = ΄, 
 πάντων ἀνεχώρησεν ὀπίσω. 
 
 σπεισάμενος μετὰ 
 ἀπέστη τε Τυρίων Σιδὼν καὶ 
 ᾿Ακὴ } καὶ ἡ Πάλαι Τύρος, 
 καὶ πολλὰ, ἄλλαι πόλεις, αἵ 
 τῷ τῶν ᾿Ασσυρίων ἑαυτὰς βα- 
 σιλεὶ παρέδοσαν. διὸ Τυρίων ** 
 οὐχ ὑποταγέντων πάλιν ὃ βα- 
 σιλεὺς ἐπ᾿ αὐτοὺς ὑπέστραψε, 
 Φοινίκων συμπληρωσάντων TT 
 αὐτῷ ναῦς ἑξήκοντα, tt καὶ 
 ἐπικώπους ὀκτακοσίους. αἷς δὲ 
 
 . Ν 
 ἐπιπλεύσαντες οἱ Τύριοι ναυσὶ 
 
 * Hafn. omits. 
 1 ᾿Ελιλαῖος Fr. 
 || Some have ἔΆρκη. 
 
 Eluleus reigned thirty-six years: 
 and he fitted out a fleet against the 
 Cittzeans § who had revolted, and re- 
 duced them to obedience. But Sal- 
 manasar, the king of the Assyrians, 
 sent them assistance, and overran 
 Pheenicia: and when he had made 
 peace with the Phcenicians he return- 
 ed with all his forces: And Sidon, 
 and Ace (Acre), and Paletyrus, and 
 many other cities revolted from the 
 Tyrians, and put themselves under 
 the protection of the king of Assyria. 
 But as the Tyrians still refused to 
 ‘submit, the king made another expe- 
 dition against them: and the Phe- 
 nicians furnished him with sixty ships 
 and eight hundred rowers: and the 
 Tyrians attacked him with twelve 
 ships, and dispersed the hostile fleet, 
 and took prisoners to the amount of 
 
 ἡ ἔτη φλγ' Theoph. Ant.—pyy’ Sync. 
 § Cyprios Sc.—Usher proposes Γιτταίων. 
 4 Periz. thinks it should be Βηρυτὸς. - 
 
 ** Big. Samb. and Vat. insert αὐτῷ. 
 ++ Epiphanius reads it Pheenicibus exhibentibus. 
 
 tt 70. Epiph. 
 
 §§ οἷς Epiph. 
 
200 THE TYRIAN ANNALS. 
 
 δεκαδύο, τῶν ναῶν τῶν ὠντι- 
 πάλων διασπαρεισῶν, λαμβά- 
 > / + > 
 vourw αἰχμαλώτους ἄνδρας εἰς 
 / > 4 Ν 
 πεντακοσίους. ἐπετάϑη δὴ παν- 
 -" Ν ~ 
 τῶν ev Τυρῷ τιμὴ διὰ ταῦτα. 
 ἀναζεύξας δ᾽ ὁ τῶν ᾿Ασσυρίων 
 , 
 βασιλεὺς κατάστησε φύλακας 
 ss Ὁ - Ν ~ [any 
 ἐπὶ TOV ποταμοῦ καὶ τῶν ὑδρω- 
 γωγίων, οἱ διακωλύσουσι Τὺυ- 
 “2 > 4 ‘\ - 
 ρίους ἀρυσάσϑαι. t καὶ τοῦτο 
 δ ΄ , > 
 ἔτεσι πέντε γενόμενον, ἐκαρ- 
 , 4 
 τέρησαν πίνοντες ἐκ φρεάτων 
 
 ὀρυντῶν. 
 
 five hundred men: upon which ac- 
 count the Tyrians were held in great 
 respect.* But the king of Assyria 
 stationed guards upon the river and 
 aqueducts, to prevent the Tyrians from 
 drawing water: and this continued 
 five years, during all which time they 
 were obliged to drink from the wells 
 they dug.—Joseph. Antig. Jud. lib. 
 IX. ς. 14. 
 
 * "ApdecSa: Ναἱ.---ὠἀρύεσϑθαι Fr. 
 1 Aucta hine apud Tyrios rerum omnium pretia. Grot. 
 

 
 πο 
 
 ᾿ς CARTHAGINIAN FRAGMENTS: 
 
 ba 
 FROM 
 
 HANNO AND HIEMPSAL. 
 
᾿ 4 5 
 sd 
 ᾿ ¥ 
 8 ἊΝ 
 ΓΞ 
 wey 
 
 ΔῈ 
 
 ἐ “RAL 
 
 = Ἁ 
 
 
 
THE PERIPLUS OF HANNO. 
 
 ANNONOZ 
 
 KAPXHAONION BASIAEQS 
 TIEPITIAOTS, 
 
 ’ 
 TON ὑπὲρ τὰς Ἡρακλέους 
 στήλας Λιβυκῶν τῆς γῆς με- 
 ρῶν, ὃν καὶ ἀνέδηκεν ἐν τῷ 
 ~ ~ / ~ 
 τοῦ Kpovod* τεμένει, δηλοῦντα 
 τάδε. 
 “ 
 "Ἔδοξεν Καρχηδονίοις, “Av= 
 γωνα πλεῖν ἔξω στηλῶν Ἥρακ- 
 f 
 λείων, καὶ πόλεις κτίζειν Λιβυ- 
 ͵ὔ δὰ 
 φοινίκων. καὶ ἐπλευσεν, πεντη- 
 , «εξ, BA ν 
 κοντόρους ἑξήκοντα ἄγων, καὶ 
 πλῆνος ἀνδρῶν καὶ γυναικῶν, 
 εἰς ἀριδι μὸν μυριάδων τριῶν, καὶ 
 ~ \ Ν ΕΝ 
 σῖτά, καὶ τὴν ἄλλην παρᾳσ- 
 κευήν. 
 Ὡς δ᾽ avayrévres, τὰς 
 4 
 στήλας παρημείψαμεν, καὶ 
 ww -“ »" ~ 
 ἔξω πλοῦν δυοῖν ἡμερῶν ἐπλεύ- 
 
 / / 
 σαμεν, ἐκτίσαμεν πρώτην πό- 
 
 _ THE VOYAGE 
 
 OF HANNO, COMMANDER OF THE 
 CARTHAGINIANS, 
 
 Rounp the parts of Libya which lie 
 beyond: the Pillars of Hercules, 
 which he deposited in the temple of 
 Saturn. | 
 
 It was decreed by the Carthagi- 
 nians that Hanno should undertake 
 a voyage beyond the Pillars of Her- 
 cules, and found Libyphcenician 
 cities. He sailed accordingly with 
 sixty ships of fifty oars each, and a 
 body of men and women to the num- 
 ber of thirty thousand, and provi- 
 sions and other necessaries. 
 
 When we had passed the Pillars 
 on our voyage, and had sailed beyond 
 them for two days, we founded the 
 
 first city, which we named Thymia- 
 
 * Junonis Plin. Solinus, 
 
204 
 
 / 
 Aw, ἥντινα ὠνομάσαμεν Ov- 
 iy > | Bd 
 puarinpior’* πεδίον δ᾽ αὐτῇ 
 2 CLIO + οἵ = 
 μέγα ὑπῆν' κᾷπειτω πρὸς ἐσ- 
 ,ὔ Ν rte 
 πέραν ἀναχϑέντες, ἐπὶ Σολο- 
 ΄ 4 
 evta Λιβυκὲν ἀκρωτήριον, λά- 
 7 wv 
 σιον δένδρεσι συνήλψομεν, Eva 
 - 4 
 Ποσειδῶνος ἱερὸν ἱδρυσάμενοι; 
 οὗ of 
 πάλιν ἐπέβημεν πρὸς ἥλιον 
 Tees c / oe » 
 ἀνίσχοντα ἡμέρας ἥμισυ, ἄχρι 
 a 5» 
 ἐχκομίσϑημεν εἰς λίμνην οὐ 
 ~ - ᾽, 
 πόῤῥω τῆς ϑαλάττης κειμένην, 
 καλάμου μεστὴν πολλοῦ καὶ 
 ~ Ν Ν / 
 μεγάλου. ἐνῆσαν δὲ καὶ ἐλέ- 
 ΕἸ 
 φαντες, καὶ τἄλλα δηρία νε- 
 μόμενα πάμπολλα. 
 ‘A 
 Τήν τε λίμνην παραλλά- 
 ω ε / -Ὁ 
 ἕαντες ὅσον ἡμέρας πλοῦν, Ka- 
 4 / ἈΝ ~ 
 τῳκήσαμεν ἡ πόλεις πρὸς τῇ 
 r / 
 “αλάττῃ καλουμένας, Kapsnoy 
 n~ Ν , Ν 
 τε τεῖχος, καὶ Τύττην, καὶ 
 Ἄχραν; καὶ Μέλιτταν, καὶ 
 Ui al 
 ἤΔραμβιυν. ugueitey δ᾽ ἀναχ- 
 ’΄, A ΔΨ. / 
 δέντες, ἤλσομεν ἐπί μέγαν πο- 
 ταμὸν Λίξον, ἀπὸ τῆς Λιβύης 
 ῥέοντα. παρὼ δ᾽ αὐτὸν, Νομά- 
 7 ΄ 
 δὲς ἄνϑρωποι Λιξίτωι. βοσκή: 
 >” Ay > , 
 par ἔνεμον, παρ᾽ οἷς ἐμείνα- 
 BA Ν / / 
 prev ἄχρι τινὸς» φίλοι γενόμενοι» 
 \ 
 
 Τούτων δὲ vad ὕπερϑεν, Ai- 
 ” a ~ 
 δίοπες gnaw ἄξενοι, γῆν νεμό- 
 μενοι δηριώδη διειλημμένην 
 
 a z ~ 
 oper: μεγάλοις, ἐξ ὧν ῥεῖν φασὶ 
 
 CARTHAGINIAN FRAGMENTS, 
 
 terium. Below it lay an extensive 
 
 plain. Proceeding thence towards 
 the west, we came to Soloeis, a pro- 
 montory of Libya, a place thickly 
 covered with trees, where we erected 
 a temple to Neptune ; and again pro- 
 ceeded for the space of half a day 
 towards the east, until we arrived at 
 a lake lying not far from the sea, and 
 filled with abundance of large reeds. 
 Here elephants, and a great number 
 of other wild beasts, were feeding. 
 
 Having passed the lake about a 
 day’s sail, we founded cities near the 
 sea, called Cariconticos, and Gytte, 
 and Acra, and Melitta, and Aram- 
 bys. Thence we came to the great 
 river Lixus, which flows from Libya. 
 On its banks the Lixite, a shepherd 
 tribe, were feeding flocks, amongst 
 whom we continued some time on 
 Beyond the Lixite 
 dwelt the inhospitable Ethiopians, 
 who pasture a wild country intersect- 
 ed by large mountains, from which 
 they say the river Lixus flows. In 
 the neighbourhood of the mountains 
 
 friendly terms. 
 
 lived the Troglodytz, men of various 
 appearances, whom the Lixite de- 
 
 * Θυμιατηρία 8ι.--- Θυμιατηριὰς Scyl. 
 + Gem. proposes κατῳκίσαμεν. 
 
τὸν Λίξον. περὶ δὲ τὰ ὄρη» κα- 
 τοικεῖν ἀνϑδρώπους ἀλλοιομόρ- 
 φους Τρωγλοδύτας" οὺς ταχυ- 
 τέρους ἵππων ἐν δρόμοις ἔφραζον 
 ai ΔΛιξίται. 
 Λαβόντες δὲ παρ᾽ αὐτῶν ἕρ- 
 ’ ὔ Ν 
 μηνέας παρεπλέομεν τὴν ἐρη- 
 Ν Ν ΄, δύ 
 μὴν πρὸς μεσημβρίαν, δύο 
 ἡμέρας. ἐκεῖδεν δὲ πάλιν πρὸς 
 ἥλιον ἀνίσχοντα, ἡμέρας δρό- 
 μον. ἔνϑα εὕρομεν ἐν μυχῷ τινος 
 χόλπου, νῆσον μιχρὰν, χύκλον 
 ci ΄ ΄, ᾿Ξ a 
 ἔχουσαν σταδίων πέντε᾽ ἤν 
 κατῳχήσαμεν, ἢ Κέρνην ὀνομά- 
 σαντες. ἐτεκμαιρόμεδα δ᾽ αὐ- 
 τὴν ἐκ τοῦ περίπλου, κατ᾽ εὐθὺ 
 χεῖσθαι Καρχηδόνος. ἔφκει 
 γὰρ ὁ πλοῦς, ἔκ τε Καρχηδό- 
 ΠΡ se > “ι΄ δ 
 γος, ἐπὶ στήλας, κᾷάκεῖνεν ἐπί 
 Κέρνην. 
 Τοὐντεῦϑεν εἰς λίμνην ἀφι- 
 , 4 ~ 
 κόμεδα, διά τινος ποταμοῦ με- 
 γάλου διαπλεύσαντες, Χρέτης. 
 - Ἁ 4 ε ’ ~ 
 εἶχεν δὲ νήσους ἡ λίμνη τρεῖς, 
 μείζους τῆς Κέρνης. ad ὧν 
 ἡμερήσιον πλοῦν χατανύσαν- 
 τες, εἰς τὴν μυχὸν τῆς λίμνης 
 Μ΄ eA a »~ , 
 ἤλδομεν. ὑπὲρ ἣν ὕρη μέγιστα 
 ὑπερέτεινεν, μετὰ Ἴ ἀνϑιρώπων 
 ἀγρίων, δέρματα δήρεια ἐνημ- 
 μένων, οἵ πέτροις βάλλοντες, 
 ἀπήραξαν ἡμᾶς, κωλύοντες ἐχ- 
 βῆναι. ἐκεῖδεν πλέοντες, εἰς 
 
 Ψ »Μ, Ν / 
 ἕτερον ἤλδομεν ποταμὸν μέγαν 
 
 * 
 
 κατῳκίσαμεν Gesn, 
 
 HANNO. 205 
 
 scribed as swifter in running than 
 horses. 
 
 Having procured interpreters from 
 them we coasted along a desert coun- 
 try towards the south two days. 
 Thence we proceeded towards the 
 east the course of a day. Here we 
 found in a recess of a certain bay a 
 small island, containing a circle of five 
 stadia, where we settled a colony, and 
 called it Cerne. We judged from our 
 voyage that this place lay in a direct 
 line with Carthage ; for the length of 
 our voyage from Carthage to the 
 Pillars, was equal to that from the 
 Pillars to Cerne. 
 
 We then came to a lake which we 
 reached by sailing up a large river 
 called Chretes. This lake had three 
 islands, larger than Cerne; from 
 which proceeding a day’s sail, we 
 came to the extremity of the lake, 
 that was overhung by large moun- 
 tains, inhabited by savage men, 
 clothed in skins of wild beasts, who 
 drove us away by throwing stones, 
 and hindered us from landing. Sailing 
 thence we came to another river, that 
 was large and broad, and full of cro- 
 
 codiles, and river horses; whence 
 
 + μεστὰ Gesn. 
 
206 CARTHAGINIAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 \ / 
 καὶ πλατὺν, γέμοντα xpoxo- 
 iZ XN ὦ ‘ 
 δείλων καὶ ἵππων ποταμίων. 
 ω ,ὕ 
 avey δὴ πάλιν ἀποτρέψαντες, 
 εἰς Ἱζέρνην ἐπανήλσομεν. 
 Ν ’ὔ 
 Ἔκεῖνεν δὲ ἐπὶ μεσημβρίας 
 ε ͵7 
 ἐπλεύσαμεν δώδεκα ἡμέρας, 
 ~ . / a 
 τὴν γὴν παραλεγόμενοι. ἣν 
 -᾿ ͵ 
 πᾶσαν κατῴκουν Αἰσίοπες, 
 , cow Ni 438 © 
 φεύγοντες ἡμᾶς, καὶ οὐχ, ὑπο- 
 4 
 μένοντες" ἀσύνετα δ᾽ ἐφϑέγ- 
 γοντο, nad τοῖς mew” ἡμῶν Λιξ- 
 ίταις. τῇ δ᾽ οὖν τελευταίᾳ 
 ε / t yy 
 ἡμέρῳ, προσωρμίσϑημεν ὕρεσι 
 / z Ν 
 μεγάλοις δασέσιν. ἦν δὲ τὰ 
 ~ \ Ν 
 τῶν δένδρων ξύλα εὐώδη τὲ καὶ 
 Ν 
 ποικίλα. περιπλεύσαντες δὲ 
 ~ / 4 / 
 ταῦτα ἡμέρας δύο, γινόμενα 
 ἐν δαλάττης χάσματι ὠμε- 
 ΄ ΟΥ̓ BFS ΄ \ ~ 
 τρήτῳ, ἧς ἐπὶ Sarena πρὸς τῇ 
 - ΄ 5 ¢ \ 
 γῇ; πεδίον ἦν, GNey νυκτὲς 
 ~ - , 
 ἀφεωρῶμεν, πῦρ ἀναφερόμενον 
 πανταχόσεν κατ᾽ ἀποστάσεις, 
 Tt . 
 τὸ μὲν πλέον, τὸ δ᾽ ἔλαττον. 
 “γδρευσάμενοι δ᾽ ἐκεῖσεν, ἐ- 
 ~/ > oy] ε / 
 πλέομεν εἰς τοὔμπροσθεν ἡμέ- 
 / A ~_ 2 »"᾿ 
 pas πέντε παρὰ γῆν, ἄχρι Nr- 
 > , / ee 
 Dopey εἰς μέγαν κόλπον; ay 
 , ~ 
 ἔφασαν οἱ ἑρμιηνέες καλεῖσαι, 
 , Ν 
 Ἕσπέρου Κέρας. ἐν δὲ τούτῳ, 
 - oS / Ἀ κι Ὁ 
 νῆσος ἤν μεγάλη, χαὶ ἐν τῇ 
 νήσῳ, λίμνη ϑαλασσώδης, ἐν 
 δὲ ΄ nee ὃ Ere « ΠΥ 
 E ταύτῃ νῆσος ἑτέρα, εἰς ἣν 
 ε ͵ Ν 
 ἀποβάντες, ἡμέρας μὲν, οὐδὲν 
 ~ uy . 
 ἀφεωρῶμεν, ὅτι μὴ ὕλην' νυκτὸς 
 \ * 
 δὲ, πυρά τε πολλὰ καιόμενα, 
 
 ‘ ‘ ν» “ > / is 
 καὶ φωνὴν αὐλῶν ηκυύομεν, 
 
 returning back we came again to 
 Cerne. 
 
 Thence we sailed towards the 
 south twelve days, coasting the shore, 
 the whole of which is inhabited by 
 Ethiopians, who would not wait our 
 Their 
 
 language was not intelligible even to 
 
 approach but fled from us. 
 
 the Lixitee, who were with us. To- 
 wards the last day we approached 
 some large mountains covered with 
 trees, the wood of which was sweet- 
 scented and variegated. Having 
 sailed by these mountains for two 
 days we came to an immense opening 
 of the sea; on each side of which 
 towards the continent, was a plain; 
 from which we saw by night fire 
 arising at intervals in all directions, 
 
 either more or less. 
 
 Having taken in water there, we 
 sailed forwards five days near the 
 land, until we came to a large bay 
 which our interpreters informed us 
 was called the Western Horn. In 
 this was a large island, and in the 
 island a salt-water lake, and in this 
 another island, where, when we had 
 landed, we could discover nothing in 
 the day-time except trees ; but in the 
 night we saw many fires burning, and 
 heard the sound of pipes, cymbals, 
 drums, and confused shouts. We 
 
 aa 
 

 
 / 
 κυμβάλων τε καὶ τυμπάνων 
 Ν a 
 πάταγον, καὶ κραυγὴν μυ- 
 ” 
 φόβος ἔλαβεν 
 
 ͵ 
 ἡμᾶς» καὶ οἱ μάντεις ἐκέλευον 
 
 ρίαν. οὖν 
 ἐκλείπειν τὴν νῆσον. ταχὺ δ᾽ 
 ἐκπλεύσαντες, παρημειβόμεθα 
 χώραν διάπυρον Θυμιαμάτων" 
 Ν > ϑι τὰ | aed /> 
 μεστοὶ δ᾽ ἀπ᾽ αὐτῆς πυρώδεις 
 ἑύακες, ἐνέβαλλον εἰς τὴν δά- 
 λατταν. ἡ γῆ δ᾽ ὑπὸ Μέρμης, 
 iu μι. CU sh > 6 
 ἄβατος ἦν. ταχὺ οὖν κἀκεῖθεν 
 φοβηδέντες 
 , 2 ε Lj / 
 τέτταρας δ᾽ ἡμέρας φερόμενοι, 
 
 ἀπεπλεύσαμεν" 
 
 γυχτὸς τὴν γὴν ἀφεωρῶμεν, 
 ᾿ ᾿ 
 φλογὸς μεστήν. ἐν μέσῳ δ᾽ ἦν 
 ἠλιβατόν τι πῦρ, τῶν ἄλλων 
 ~ , 
 μεῖζον, ἁπτόμενον ὡς ἐδόκει 
 --»ν ο z seth. 2 
 τῶν ἄστρων" οὗτος δ᾽ ἡμέρας, 
 » ~ 
 ὅρος ἐφαίνετο μέγιστον, Θεῶν 
 ΝΜ ΄ F ~ 2 
 ὄχημα καλούμενον. τριταῖοι ὃ 
 ἐχεῖσεν, πυρώδεις ῥύακας πα- 
 , 
 ραπλεύσαντες, ἀφικόμεθα εἰς 
 , 
 κόλπον, Νότου Κέρας λεγόμε- 
 > \ n~ ~ ΄ 3 
 γον. ἐν δὲ τῷ μυχῷ, νήσος ἦν, 
 ε ᾽ -Ὁ 4 4 wv 
 εοικυίω TH πρώτῃ, λίμνην εἐχου- 
 : IS 
 ca" καὶ ἐν ταύτῃ, νῆσος ἦν 
 ε, AS > , 3 
 ἕτερα, μεστὴ ἀνθρώπων ἀγ- 
 φῇ 
 ρίων. πολὺ δὲ πλείους ἦσαν 
 γυναῖκες, δασεῖαι τοῖς σώμια- 
 . ΠῚ , 
 ow ἃς οἱ ἕρμηνέες ἐκάλουν 
 " Yi 
 Γορίλλας" διώκοντες δὲ, ἄνδρας 
 ‘ 
 μὲν, 
 μεν" 
 γον, 
 
 τοῖς 
 
 συλλαβεῖν οὐκ ἠδυνήθη- 
 ἀλλὰ πάντες μὲν ᾿ξέφυ- 
 
 ΄ a \ 
 χρημνοβάται ὄντες, nat 
 
 μετρίοις | ἀμυνόμενοι. 
 
 * Qy. the earth. 
 
 HANNO. 207 
 
 were then afraid, and our diviners or- 
 dered us to abandon the island. Sail- 
 ing quickly away thence, we passed 
 a country burning with fires and per- 
 fumes ; and streams of fire supplied 
 from it fell into the sea. The coun- 
 try* was impassable on account of the 
 heat. We sailed quickly thence, being 
 much terrified ; and passing on for 
 four days, we discovered at night a 
 country full of fire. In the middle 
 was a lofty fire, larger than the rest, 
 which seemed to touch the stars. 
 When day came we discovered it to 
 be a large hill called the Chariot of 
 the Gods. On the third day after our 
 departure thence, having sailed by 
 those streams of fire we arrived at a 
 bay called the Southern Horn; at the 
 bottom of which lay an island like 
 the former, having a lake, and in this 
 lake another island, full of savage 
 people, the greater part of whom 
 were women, whose bodies were 
 hairy, and whom our interpreters 
 called Gorilla. Though we pursued 
 the men we could not seize any of 
 them ; but all fled from us, escaping 
 over the precipices, and defending 
 themselves with stones. Three women 
 were however taken; but they at- 
 tacked their conductors with their 
 teeth and hands, and could not be 
 prevailed upon to accompany us. 
 Having killed them, we flayed them, 
 
 + πέτροις Gesn. 
 
208 CARTHAGINIAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 γυναῖχας δὲ τρεῖς, at δάκνου- and brought their skins with us to 
 σαί tena σπαράττουσᾳι τοὺς Carthage. We did not sail further 
 ἄγοντας οὐκ ἤδϑελον ἕπεσϑαι. on, our provisions failing us. 
 εἰποκτείναντες μέντοι αὐτὰς, 
 
 ἐξεδείραμεν, καὶ τὰς δορὰς 
 
 ἐκομίσαμεν εἰς Καρχηδόνα. οὐ 
 
 γὰρ ἔτι ἐπλεύσαμεν προσωτέρω, 
 
 τῶν σίτων ἡμᾶς ἐπιλιπόντων. 
 
 
 
HIEMPSAL: 
 
 FROM 
 
 SALLUST. 
 
 OF THE AFRICAN SETTLEMENTS. 
 
 Sep qui mortales initio 
 Africam habuerint, qui- 
 que postea accesserint, 
 aut quo modo inter se 
 permixti sint, quaamquam 
 ab ed fama, que pleros- 
 que obtinet, diversum est ; 
 tamen, ut ex libris Puni- 
 cis, qui regis Hiempsalis 
 dicebantur, interpretatum 
 nobis est: utique rem 
 sese habere, cultores ejus 
 terree putant, quam pau- 
 Ceete- 
 rum fides ejus rei penes 
 
 cissimis dicam. 
 
 auctores erit. 
 
 Africam initio habuére 
 Geetuli, et Libyes, asperi, 
 ineultique, quis cibus erat 
 caro et ferina, atque hunni 
 pabulum, uti pecoribus. 
 
 Bur what race of men first had pos- 
 session of Africa, and who afterwards 
 arrived, and in what manner they 
 have become blended with each 
 other; though the following differs 
 from the report which is commonly 
 current, yet I will give it as it was 
 interpreted to me from the Punic 
 books, which are called the books of 
 King Hiempsal, and will explain in 
 as few words as possible the opinion 
 of the inhabitants of the land itself 
 relative to the matter in question. 
 But its authenticity must rest upon 
 the credit of its authors. 
 
 The aboriginal possessors of Africa 
 were the Geetulians and Libyans, a 
 rough unpolished race, whose food 
 was flesh and venison, and the pastur- 
 age of the ground like cattle. They 
 
 EE 
 
210 
 
 Hi neque moribus, neque 
 lege, aut imperio cujus- 
 quam regebantur; vagi, 
 palantes, quas nox coé- 
 gerat, sedes habebant. 
 
 Sed postquam in His- 
 pania Hercules, sicut Afri 
 putant, interiit, exercitus 
 ejus compositus ex gen- 
 tibus variis, amisso duce, 
 sibi 
 quisque imperium peten- 
 tibus, brevi dilabitur. Ex 
 eo numero Medi, Perse, 
 
 ac passim multis 
 
 et Armenii, navibus in 
 Africam transvecti, proxi- 
 mos nostro mari locos oc- 
 
 Sed Persze 
 
 intra) Oceanum = magis : 
 
 cupavere. 
 
 hique alveos navium in- 
 versos pro tuguriis ha- 
 buére : quia neque mate- 
 ria in agris, neque ab His- 
 panis emundi, aut mutandi 
 copia erat. Mare mag- 
 num, et ignara lingua 
 commercia prohibebant. 
 Hi paulatim, per connu- 
 bia, Gaetulos secum mis- 
 cuére ; et quia szepé ten- 
 tantes agros, alia, deinde 
 alia loca petiverant, semet 
 ipsi Numidas appellavére. 
 Ceeterum adhue edificia 
 
 Numidarum — agrestium, 
 
 CARTHAGINIAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 were neither restrained by morals, 
 nor law, nor any man’s government ; 
 wanderers and houseless, taking up 
 their abode wherever they might 
 chance to be, when night came upon 
 them. 
 
 But when Hercules perished in 
 Spain, according to the opinion of 
 the Africans, his army, composed of 
 various nations, upon the loss of its 
 leader, and from the factious attempts 
 of many to assume the command was 
 quickly dispersed. From its ranks 
 the Medes, Persians, and Armenians, 
 having passed over by shipping into 
 Africa, occupied the parts bordering 
 The Persians settled 
 towards the Atlantic Ocean; 
 of the 
 hulls of their vessels ; for they could 
 
 upon our sea. 
 and 
 formed cottages inverted 
 neither obtain the requisite materials 
 in the fields, nor had the means of 
 buying them or trafficing for them 
 with the Spaniards: inasmuch as the 
 magnitude of the sea, and ignorance 
 of each others language, prevented all 
 Within 
 a short time, by marriages, they 
 blended themselves with the Getu- 
 lians, and because they frequently 
 changed their situations, and passed 
 from one place to another, they as- 
 sumed the name of Numidians. And 
 to this day the buildings of the wild 
 Numidians, which they call Mapalia, 
 are of an oblong form, with roofs in- 
 
 intercourse between them. 
 
quze mapalia illi vocant, 
 oblonga, incurvis_lateri- 
 bus tecta, quasi navium 
 carinze sunt. 
 
 Medis. autem, et Ar- 
 meniis access¢re Libyes. 
 Nam hi propitis mare 
 Africum agitabant : (Ge- 
 tuli.sub sole magis, haud 
 procul ab  ardoribus :) 
 hique maturé oppida ha- 
 buére. .. Nam, freto divisi 
 ab Hispania, mutare res 
 inter se instituerant. No- 
 men eorum .paulatim Li- 
 byes corrupére, barbara 
 lingua. Mauros pro Medis 
 appellantes. Sed res Per- 
 sarum brevi adolevit ; ac 
 postea Numidz nomine, 
 propter multitudinem, a 
 parentibus digressi, pos- 
 sedére ea loca, que prox- 
 ima Carthaginem Numi- 
 Deinde, 
 
 utrique alteris freti, fini- 
 
 dia appellatur. 
 
 timos armis, aut metu sub 
 imperium suum coégére ; 
 sibi 
 
 3, A x . . 
 addidére: magis hi, qui 
 
 nomen gloriamque 
 
 ad nostrum mare proces- 
 serant, quia Libyes, quam 
 Geetuli, minus bellicosi: 
 denique Africze pars in- 
 ferior pleraque ab Numi- 
 
 HIEMPSAL. OA 
 
 curvated in ‘the sides like the holds 
 of ships. 
 
 The country occupied by the 
 Medes and Armenians bordered upon 
 that of the Libyans, for they occupied 
 the parts nearer to the African sea, 
 whilst the Geetulians were more to- 
 wards the sun, not far from the torrid 
 zone : and they quickly built cities ; 
 for, separated from Spain only by 
 the straits, they established a mutual 
 commerce. Their name was pre- 
 sently corrupted by the Libyans, who 
 in their barbarous language called 
 them Mauri (Moors) instead of 
 Medes. The affairs of the Persians 
 ina short time became prosperous, 
 and a colony under the name of Nu- 
 midians left their original settlements 
 on account of their numbers, and 
 took possession of that part of the 
 country which is next to Carthage 
 and now called Numidia. Moreover, 
 by mutual assistance, they subjected 
 their neighbours to their dominion 
 either by the force or terror of their 
 arms, acquiring great renown and 
 glory; those more particularly which 
 border upon our seas, inasmuch as 
 the Libyans are less warlike than the 
 Geetulians, till at length chief of the 
 lower part of Africa was possessed 
 
 by the Numidians, and all the con- 
 
212 
 
 dis possessa est: victi 
 omnes in gentem nomen- 
 que imperantium conces- 
 sere. 
 
 Postea Phoenices, alii 
 multitudinis domi minu- 
 ende gratia, pars imperil 
 cupidine solicitata plebe, 
 et allis novarum rerum 
 avidis, Hipponem, Adri- 
 metum, Leptim, aliasque 
 urbes in ora maritima 
 condidére : ezeque brevi 
 multum aucte, pars ori- 
 suis 
 
 ginibus presidio, 
 
 alizeque decori fuére. 
 
 CARTHAGINIAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 quered merged in the name and nation 
 of the conquerors. 
 
 The Pheenicians afterwards sent 
 forth colonies, some in order to dis- 
 pose of the superfluous multitude at 
 home, others from the ambition of 
 extending their empire at the solici- 
 tations of the people and those who 
 were desirous of innovation, and 
 founded the cities of Hippo, Adrime- 
 tus, Leptis, and others upon the sea 
 coast, which in a short time were 
 raised to consequence, partly for 
 defence to their parent states, and 
 partly for their honor.—Bell. Jug. 
 
INDIAN FRAGMENTS: 
 
 FROM 
 
 MEGASTHENES. 
 
 
 
i ἢ i ; x 
 1 ᾿ Ἷ ᾿ 
 γὼ Η 
 ΜΈΝ unt AAS / 
 : a i A ak. 
 
 ἡ MNES, 
 ΠΝ, 
 
 ΡΝ 
 
 i 
 
 
 
MEGASTHENES. 
 
 OF THE INVASIONS OF INDIA. 
 
 ΣΥΝΑΠΟΦΑΙΝΈΤΑΙ δέ πως 
 καὶ Meyaodévys τῷ λογῷ 
 τούτῳ, κελεύων ἀπιστεῖν ταῖς 
 ἀρχαίαις περὶ ᾿Ινδῶν ἷστο- 
 ρίαις. 
 
 Οὔτε γὰρ παρ᾽ ᾿Ινδῶν ἔξω 
 σταλῆναί ποτε στρατιὰν, οὔτ᾽ 
 ἐπελϑεῖν ἔξωθεν καὶ κρατῆ- 
 σαι, πλὴν τῆς WED Ἡραχλέ- 
 
 Ν , \ in ~ 
 ovg καὶ Διονύσου; καὶ τῆς νῦν 
 
 μετὰ Μακεδόνων. Καί τοι 
 
 Σέσωστριν μὲν τὸν Αἰγύπτιον 
 yal Τεάρχωνα τὸν Aidiona 
 ἕως Εὐρώπης προελδεῖν. Να- 
 voxodpoaopey δὲ τὸν παρὰ Χαλ- 
 δαίοις εὐδοκιμήσαντα “Hpax- 
 λέους μᾶλλον, καὶ ἕως Στηλῶν 
 ἐλάσαι" μέχρι μὲν δὴ δεῦρο 
 wai Τεάκρωνα ἀφικέσθαι" 
 ἐκεῖνον δὲ καὶ ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιβηρίας 
 εἰς τὴν Θράκην, καὶ τὸν Πόν- 
 τὸν ἀγαγεῖν τὴν στρατιάν. 
 ᾿Ἰδάνθυρσον δὲ τὸν Σκύθην 
 ἐπιδραμεὶν τῆς ᾿Ασίας μέχρι 
 
 Αἰγύπτου. Τῆς δὲ Ἰνδικῆς 
 
 MecasTHENEs also appears to be of 
 this opinion, informing us that no 
 reliance can be placed upon the an- 
 cient histories of the Indians, 
 
 For, says he, there never was an 
 army sent forth by the Indians, nor 
 did ever a foreign army invade and 
 conquer that country except the ex- 
 peditions of Hercules and Dionysus, 
 and this of the Macedonians. Yet 
 Sesostris the Egyptian, and Tearcon 
 the Ethiopian, extended their con- 
 quests as far as Europe. But Navo- 
 codrosorus, the most renowned 
 the Chaldeans, 
 Hercules, and carried his arms as 
 
 among exceeded 
 far as the Pillars: to which also it is 
 said Tearcon arrived. But Navoco- 
 drosorus led his army from Spain to 
 Thrace and Pontus. Idanthursus, 
 the Scythian, also, overran all Asia 
 as far as Egypt. But none of all 
 these ever invaded India. Semi- 
 
 ramis died before she commenced 
 
216 
 
 μηδένα τούτων ἅψασθαι. Kal 
 Σεμίραμιν δ᾽ ἀποθανεῖν πρὸ 
 τῆς ἐπιχειρήσεως. Πέρσας 
 δὲ μισθοφόρους μὲν ἐκ τῆς Ἶν- 
 δικῆς μεταπέμψασθαι Ὕδρα- 
 was ἐκεῖ δὲ μὴ στρατεῦ- 
 σαι, ἀλλ᾽ ἐγγὺς ἐλϑεῖν μόνον, 
 ἡνίκα Ἰκύρος ἤλαυνεν ἐπὶ Μασ- 
 Καὶ 
 
 παρ A \ , 
 Ἡρακλέους δὲ, καὶ Διονύσου, 
 
 ὔ \ Ἂν 
 σαγέτας. τὰ περὶ 
 ΄ 
 Meyaosévng μὲν μετ᾽ ὀλίγων 
 - Ui 
 πιστὰ ἡγεῖται" τῶν δὲ ἄλλων 
 cf 
 οἱ πλείους, ὧν ἐστὶ καὶ Ἔρα- 
 , Uj 
 τοσϑένης, ἄπιστα χαὶ μυθώδη, 
 A Ἂ \ \ ~ 
 καθάπερ καὶ τὰ παρὰ τοῖς 
 
 Ἕλλησιν. 
 
 OF THE 
 
 Φησὶ δὴ (ὁ Μεγασθένης) 
 
 τὸ τῶν Ἰνδῶν πλῆθος εἰς 
 
 ͵, “ μι \ 
 ἑπτὰ μέρη διῃρῆσθαι" καὶ 
 [ \ \ - 
 τοὺς πρώτους ali μεν τοὺς φιλο- 
 4 X \ 
 σόφους εἶναι χατὰ τιμὴν; 
 re \ IG 
 ἐλαχίστους δὲ κατ᾽ ἀριθμόν 
 ~ ~ > A 
 χρῆσναι δ᾽ αὐτοῖς ἰδίᾳ μὲν 
 chy Ν ΄ a \ 
 ἑκάστῳ τοὺς SvovTacs, ἢ τοὺς 
 I ~ MS 
 ἐναγίζοντας" κοινῇ δὲ τοὺς βα- 
 / - 
 σιλέας κατὰ τὴν μεγάλην λε- 
 7, ΄ 30 Ὰ - 
 γομένην σύνοδον, nad ἣν τοῦ 
 ,, + “ ie “7 
 γέου ETOUG ἅπαντες οἱ φιλοσο- 
 
 ΩΣ - / δὴ 
 φοι τῷ βασιλεῖ συνελθόντες ἐπὶ 
 
 INDIAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 the undertaking. But the Persians 
 sent the Hydracz to collect a tribute 
 from India: but they never entered 
 the country in a hostile manner, 
 but only approached it, when Cyrus 
 led his expedition against the Massa- 
 gete. Megasthenes, however, with 
 some few others, gives credit to the 
 narratives of the exploits of Hercules 
 and Dionysus: but all other histo- 
 rlans, among whom may be reckoned 
 Eratosthenes, set them down as in- 
 credible and fabulous, and of the 
 same stamp with the achievements of 
 the heroes among the Greeks.— 
 Strabo, lib. xv. 686. 
 
 CASTES OF INDIA.* 
 
 Megasthenes says—That the whole 
 population of India is divided into 
 seven castes: among which that of 
 the Philosophers is held in estimation 
 as the first, notwithstanding their 
 number is the smallest. The people 
 when they sacrifice and prepare the 
 feasts of the dead in private, each 
 makes use of the services of one of 
 them: but the kings publicly gather 
 them together in an assembly which is 
 ealled the great synod: at which in 
 the commencement of each new year 
 
 * Arrianus also gives this fragment in his Indian History, but not so fully 
 
 as Strabo. 
 
 + πρῶτον Vulg. 
 
δύρας, ὅτι ἂν ἕκαστος" αὐτῶν 
 συντάξῃ τῶν χρησίμων, ἢ τη- 
 ρήσῃ πρὸς εὐετηρίαν καρπῶν 
 τε καὶ περὶ ζώων, καὶ πολι- 
 τείας, Ἐ προσφέρει τοῦτο εἰς τὸ 
 μέσον" ὃς δ᾽ ἂν τρὶς ἐψευσμέ- 
 νος GAD, νόμος ἐστὶ σιγᾷν διὰ 
 βίου: τὸν δὲ κατορθώσαντα 
 
 - , 
 ἄφορον καὶ ἀτελῆ κρίνουσι. 
 
 , \ i > ‘ 
 Δεύτερον δὲ μέρος εἶναι τὸ 
 τῶν γεωργῶν, ob πλεῖστοι τέ 
 > | / COS 
 εἰσι, καὶ ἐπιεικέστατοι, ob ἐν 
 ἀστρατείᾳ καὶ ἀδείᾳ τοῦ ἐρ- 
 I ν ΄ 
 γάζεσθαι, πόλει μὴ προσίοντες, 
 > ν 4 SS ae ΄ 
 μηδ᾽ ἄλλῃ χρείᾳ, μηδ᾽ ὀχλή- 
 σει κοινῇ" πολλάκις γοῦν ἐν τῷ 
 Ρ , ~ \ 
 αὐτῷ χρόνῳ καὶ τόπῳ, τοῖς μὲν 
 ΄ ,ὔ 7 
 παρατετάχθαι συμβαΐνει, καὶ 
 \ Ν . 
 διακινδυνεύειν πρὸς τυὺς πολε- 
 - “ἃ | ΄ 
 μίους" οἱ δὲ ἀροῦσιν ἢ Ἵ σκάτ- 
 4 
 τουσιν ἀκινδύνως, προμάχους 
 4 Ν τ 
 ἔχοντες ἐκείνου. Ἔστὶ δὲ ἡ 
 χώρα βασιλικὴ πᾶσα" μισ- 
 Sot δ᾽ αὐτὴν ἐπὶ τετάρταις 
 ἐργάζοντα: τῶν καρπῶν. 
 - , \ 
 Τρίτον τὸ τῶν ποιμένων καὶ 
 -" = ’ Δ 
 ϑηρευτῶν, οἷς μόνοις ἔξεστι 
 Μηρεύειν καὶ ϑρεμματοτρεφεῖν, 
 w+ , . ΗΣ 
 avid τε παρέχειν, καὶ μισθοῦ 
 ζεύγη. 
 
 ἐλευδεροῦν ϑηρίων, καὶ τῶν 
 
 X 
 ᾿Αντὶ δὲ τοῦ τὴν γῆν 
 
 * Casaub. proposes τε καὶ ζώων, καὶ περὶ &c. 
 
 MEGASTHENES. 
 
 217 
 
 all the philosophers assemble at the 
 gate (court) of the king ; that what- 
 ever each of them may have collected 
 which may be of service, or may have 
 observed relative to the increase of 
 the fruits and animals and of the 
 state, he may produce it in public. 
 And it is a law, that if any among 
 them be three times convicted of 
 falsehood he shall be doomed to si- 
 lence during life: but the upright 
 they release from tax and tribute. 
 
 The second division is the caste of 
 the Agriculturists who are the most 
 numerous and worthy. They pursue 
 their occupation free from military 
 duties and fear; neither concerning 
 themselves with civil nor public nor 
 any other business; and it often hap- 
 pens that, at the same time and place, 
 the military class is arrayed and en- 
 gaged with an enemy, whilst the agri- 
 cultural, depending upon the other for 
 protection, plough and dig without any 
 kind of danger. And since the land 
 is all held of the king, they cultivate 
 upon hire, paying a rent of one fourth 
 of the produce. 
 
 The third caste is that of the Shep- 
 herds and Hunters, whose sole occu- 
 pation is hunting, grazing, and selling 
 cattle, for which they give a premium 
 and stipend: for clearing the land 
 also of wild beasts and birds which 
 
 + ὀροῦσι καὶ Al, 
 
 ὁ ὭΣ ae 
 
218 
 
 oJ , ~ 
 σπερμολόγων ὄρνέων, μετροῦν- 
 
 \ ~ ͵ ~ 
 ται παρὰ τοῦ βασιλέως σῖτον, 
 ΄ Ν ϑ / 
 πλάνητω καὶ σπηνίτην νεμιθ- 
 
 Μβένοι βίον. ἢ 
 Μετὰ γὰρ τοὺς Snpevtas, 
 / , 
 wal τοὺς ποιμένας, τέταρτόν 
 φησιν εἶναι μέρος τοὺς ἐργα- 
 , Η͂ Τὶ \ 
 ζομένους τὰς τέχνας, καὶ 
 Ν ᾿ hie So Le, Ni 
 τοὺς χαπηλιχούς" καὶ οἷς ἀπὸ 
 os poe ve. 
 τοῦ σώματος ἡ ἐργασία" ὧν 
 ~ ‘ 
 of μὲν chop} τελοῦσι, καὶ 
 λειτουργίας παρέχονται Tan- 
 τάς. Τοῖς δ᾽ ὁπλοποιοῖς καὶ 
 ~ Ν A A 
 ναυπηγοῖς μισθοὶ, καὶ τροφαὶ 
 By / + 
 
 παρὰ βασιλέως ἔκκεινται, 
 Πα- 
 / Ν \ \ a Ὁ 
 ρέχει δὲ τὰ μὲν ὕπλα τοῖς 
 στρατιώταις ὃ στρατοφύλαξ, 
 
 x \ ~ - ~ 
 τὰς δὲ ναῦς μισδιοῦ τοῖς πλέου- 
 
 μόνῳ γὰρ ἐργάζονται. 
 
 σιν ὃ ναύαρχος, καὶ τοῖς ἐμ.- 
 πόροις. 
 
 Πέμπτον ἐστὶ τὸ τῶν πο- 
 λεμιστῶν᾽ οἷς τὸν ἄλλον χρόνον 
 ἐν σχολῇ, καὶ τόποις ὃ βίος 
 ἐστὶν ἐκ τοῦ βασιλικοῦ διαι- 
 τωμένοις, ὥς τε τὰς ἐξόδους, 
 ὅταν ἂν χρεία, ταχέως ποιεῖσ-- 
 Sar, πλὴν τῶν σωμάτων μηδὲν 
 ἄλλο κομίζοντας παρ᾽ ἑαυτῶν. 
 
 Ἕκτοι δ᾽ εἰσὶν οἱ ἔφοροι" 
 τούτοις δ᾽ ἐποπτεύειν δέδοται 
 
 , 
 τὰ πραττόμενα, καὶ ἀναγ- 
 
 INDIAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 destroy the grain, they are entitled to 
 a portion of corn from the king, and 
 lead a wandering life, living in tents.* 
 
 After the Hunters and Shepherds, 
 the fourth race is that of the Arti- 
 zans and Innholders and bodily La- 
 bourers of all kinds: of whom some 
 bring tribute, or instead of it, perform 
 stated service on the public works. 
 But the manufacturers of arms and 
 builders of ships are entitled to pay 
 and sustenance from the king: for 
 they work only for him. The keeper 
 of the military stores gives the arms 
 out to the soldiers, and the governor 
 of the ships lets them out for hire to 
 the sailors and merchants. 
 
 The fifth caste is the Military ; 
 who, when disengaged, spend the rest 
 of their time at ease in stations pro- 
 perly provided by the king ; in order 
 that whenever occasion shall require 
 they may be ready to march forth 
 directly, carrying with them nothing 
 else than their bodies. 
 
 The sixth are the Inspectors whose 
 business it is to pry into all matters 
 that are carried on, and report them 
 
 * The narration of Megasthenes is then interrupted to introduce several 
 particulars relative to the natural history of India. 
 
 + φόρους Al. 
 
 Pe ar oS 
 
γέλλειν λάϑρα τῷ βασιλεῖ" 
 συνεργοὺς ποιουμένοις Ἐ τὰς 
 ε 7 ~ Ἁ > ~ / 
 ἑταίρας, τοῖς μὲν ἐν TH πόλει; 
 \ > ~ /. ~ >* > 
 . τᾶς ἐν τῇ πόλει, Toig Oe ἐν 
 i x re. 
 στρατοπέδῳ τὰς αὐτόθι. κα- 
 4 3 em \ 
 Victavras δ᾽ οἱ ἄριστοι, καὶ 
 , 
 πιστότατοι. 
 
 σ: 
 
 Ἑβδομοι δ᾽ οἱ σύμβουλοι 
 καὶ σύνεδροι τοῦ βασιλέως, ἐξ 
 z ag ~ \ ΄ 
 ὧν τὰ ἀρχεῖα, καὶ δικαστήρια, 
 
 Xe 4 ~ υ- 
 nas ἡ διοίκησις τῶν ὅλων. 
 
 » ~ 
 
 Οὐκ ἔστι δ᾽ οὔτε γαμεῖν 
 
 » 
 ἐξ ἄλλου γένους, οὔτ᾽ ἐπιτή- 
 δευμα οὔτ᾽ ἐργασίαν μετα- 
 
 Μ- 
 λαμβάνειν ἄλλην ἐξ ἄλλης, 
 
 \ 
 aude πλείους petayerpi ler dau 
 τὸν αὐτὸν, πλὴν εἰ τῶν φιλο- 
 
 Vig 20s 
 σόφων ἡ τὶς εἴη" ἐᾶσθαι γὰρ 
 ~ >> ΄ 
 τοῦτον Ov ἀρετήν. 
 Τῶν δὲ ἀρχόντων οἱ μέν 
 
 2 > / .« > 
 εἰσιν ἀγορανόμοι, οἱ ὃ 
 
 : 
 ἀστυ- 
 i c > 2X ~ 
 
 νόμοι οἱ δ᾽ ἐπὶ τῶν στρατιω- 
 ~ z Ν 
 
 τῶν. Ὧν οἱ μὲν ποταμοὺς 
 ἐξ LY, WEE ~ 
 ἐξεργάζονται; καὶ ἀναμετροῦσι 
 τὴν γὴν ὡς ἐν Αἰγύπτῳ, καὶ 
 τὰς κλειστὰς διώρυγας, ἀφ᾽ 
 Ks > x > ,ὔ , 
 ὧν εἰς τὰς ὀχετείας ταμιεύε- 
 
 X\ > ~ ; 
 Tas τὸ ὕδωρ ἐπισκοποῦσιν 
 
 * τοιουμένους Vulg, 
 
 MEGASTHENES. 
 
 219 
 
 privately to the king, for which pur- 
 pose in the towns they employ women 
 upon the town, and the camp-follow- 
 ers in the camp. They are chosen 
 from the most upright and honour- 
 able men. 
 
 The seventh class are the Counsel- 
 lors and Assessors of the king, by 
 whom the government and laws and 
 administration are conducted. 
 
 It is unlawful either to contract 
 marriages from another caste, or to 
 change one profession or occupation 
 for another, or for one man to under- 
 take more than one, unless the per- 
 son so doing shall be one of the Phi- 
 losophers, which is permitted on ac- 
 count of their dignity. 
 
 Of the Governors some preside 
 over the rural affairs, others over 
 the civil, others again over the 
 military. To the first class is en- 
 trusted the inspection of the rivers, 
 and the admeasurements of the fields 
 after the inundations, as in Egypt, 
 and the covered aqueducts by which 
 the water is distributed into channels 
 
 + Arrian gives a different account of it. 
 
 Μοῦνον σφίσιν ἀνεῖται, σο- 
 φΦιστὴν ἐκ παντὸς γενέος γενέσθαι" 
 ὅτι οὐ μάλϑακα τοῖσι σοφιστῇσιν 
 εἰσὶ τὰ πρήγματα, ἀλλὰ πάντων 
 
 ταλαιπωρότατα. 
 
 It is only permitted to them that a man 
 may become a Sophist for any caste, inasmuch 
 as the way of life of the Sophists is not agree- 
 able but of all others the most severe. 
 
220 
 . © 9 
 πᾶσιν ἡ τῶν 
 Οἱ δ᾽ 
 
 δ as 
 αὐτοὶ, καὶ τῶν δηρευτῶν ἐπι- 
 
 ὅπως ἐξίσης Ἐ 
 
 ὑδάτων παρείῃ χρῆσις. 
 
 -Ὁ ny Ὁ Ν 
 μελοῦνται, καὶ τιμῆς καὶ κο- 
 / \ ~ > 
 λασέως εἰσὶ κύριοι τοῖς ἐπα- 
 
 ~ Ν Ν 
 ξίοις" καὶ φορολογοῦσι δὲ, καὶ 
 A / \ Ἃς Ὁ Led 
 τὰς τέχνας τὰς περὶ τὴν γὴν 
 / * , i 
 ἐπιβλέπουσι, ὑλοτόμων, TEXTO- 
 ͵ ᾿ ~ 
 νῶν, χαλκέων, μεταλλευτῶν- 
 \ A / 
 “Οδοποιοῦσι de, καὶ κατὰ δέκα 
 ,ὔ Ἀ 
 στάδια στήλην τιϑέασι, τὰς 
 > \ ΓΑ aN \ ὃ m4 
 ἐκτροπὰς καὶ τὰ διαστήματα 
 δηλούσας. 
 ᾽ / a 
 Οἱ δ᾽ ἀστυνόμοι εἰς ἐξ πεν- 
 ͵ A Ἂν 
 τάδας διήρηνται" nat of μὲν 
 \ A Ὁ ε 
 τὰ δημιουργικὰ σκοποῦσιν, οἱ 
 Ν 
 δὲ ξενοδοχοῦσιν᾽ καὶ γὰρ κατα- 
 A 4 Ν -Ὁ ! 
 γωγὰς νέμουσι, καὶ τοῖς βίοις 
 / 
 παρανολουδοῦσι, παρέδρους 
 , \ / Ἃ 
 δόντες" καὶ προσπέμπουσιν ἢ 
 > 4 ΗΝ AS ΄ -“ 
 αὐτοὺς, ἢ τὰ χρήλατα τῶν 
 > , ͵ὕ Ἂς 
 ἀπο ανόντων νοσούντων τὲ 
 > - Ν > / 
 ἐπιμελοῦνται, καὶ ἀποσανόν-- 
 τας δάπτουσι. Τρίτοι δ᾽ 
 ἜΣΑΝ ὁ \ / Ν 
 εἰσὶν, οἵ τὰς γενέσεις καὶ 
 / 
 Μανάτους ἐξετάζουσι, πότε καὶ 
 ~ ~ / ΄ \ 
 πῶς, THY τε φόρων χάριν, καὶ 
 ec \ -“ ὍΝ 
 ὅπως μὴ ἀφανεῖς εἶεν αἱ κρείτ- 
 Ν ΄ Ν \ 
 Tous, καὶ χείρους yoval, καὶ 
 4 / 
 Savaro. Τέταρτοι of περὶ 
 τὰς καπηλείας, wal μεταβο- 
 σε / , \ 
 Ads’ οἷς μέτρων μέλει, καὶ 
 Ὁ ε 4 .“ aX » 
 τῶν ὡραίων ὅπως ἀπὸ συσσή- 
 
 μου πωλοῖντο. Οὐκ ἔστι + de 
 
 * ἐξ ἴσου Al, 
 
 INDIAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 for the equal supply of all according 
 to their wants. The same have the 
 care of the Hunters with the power 
 of dispensing rewards and punish- 
 ments according to their deserts. 
 They collect also the tribute and in- 
 spect all the arts which are exercised 
 upon the land, as of wrights and car- 
 penters and the workers of brass 
 and other metals. They also con- 
 struct the highways, and at every 
 ten stadia place a mile-stone to point 
 out the turnings and distances. 
 
 The governors of cities are divided 
 into six pentads: some of whom 
 overlook the operative works: and 
 others have charge of all aliens, dis- 
 tributing to them an allowance; and 
 taking cognizance of theirlives, ifthey 
 give them habitations: else they send 
 them away, and take care of the goods 
 of such as happen to die, or are un- 
 well, and bury them when dead. 
 The third class take registers of the 
 births and deaths, and how and when 
 they take place; and this for the 
 sake of the tribute, that no births 
 either of good or evil nor any deaths 
 may be unnoticed. The fourth has 
 the care of the tavern-keepers and 
 exchanges: these have charge also 
 of the measures and qualities of the 
 goods, that they may be sold accord- 
 
 ing to the proper stamps. Nor is 
 
 1 Ovxérs Vulg. 
 
 ee ee ee δ γασυνο 
 
MEGASTHENES. 221 
 
 / 
 πλείω τὸν αὐτὸν μεταβάλλεσ- 
 Sai, πλὴν εἰ διττοὺς ὑποτε- 
 
 ͵ὕ 
 λοίη Ἐ φόρους. Πέμπτοι οἱ 
 ~ ~ ͵ὔ 
 . προεστῶτες τῶν δημιουργουμέ- 
 XN ~ ae A 
 νων, wal πολοῦντες, καὶ ἀγορά- 
 ζοντες ταῦτα ἀπὸ συσσήμου, 
 4 Ν ‘4 ᾿ Ἁ ἃ 
 χωρὶς μὲν τὰ καινὰ, χωρὶς δὲ 
 ~ ~ \ 
 τὰ παλαιά" τῷ μιγνῦντι δὲ 
 7 
 ζημία. Ἕκτοι δὲ καὶ ὕστατοι, 
 οἱ τὰς δεκάτας ἐκλέγοντες τῶν 
 Ν 
 πωλουμένων᾽ Φάνατος δὲ τῷ 
 δ A 
 χλέψαντι τὸ τέλος" Ἰδίᾳ μὲν 
 Κοινῇ δ᾽ 
 
 > ~ -Ὁ- 9.5 Ἁ 
 ἐπιμελοῦνται τῶν τε ἰδίων» καὶ 
 
 ¢ ~ 
 ἕκαστοι ταῦτα. 
 -Ὁ ~~ 3 Ἀ ~ ~ 
 τῶν πολιτικῶν, | καὶ τῆς τῶν 
 δημοσίων ἐπισκευῆς, τιμῶν TE, 
 eS ~ \ , Ν 
 καὶ ἄγθρας, HAL λιμένων, καὶ 
 ἱερῶν. 
 \ / 
 Mera δὲ τοὺς ἀστυνόμους 
 ,΄ 2 Ν tf c Ν 
 τρίτη ἐστὶ συναρχία ἡ περὶ 
 \ \ x e 
 τὰ στρατιωτικὰ, καὶ αὕτη 
 ~ 4 ε ~ 
 ταῖς πεντάσιν ἑξαχῇ διωρισ- 
 ἄν \ \ Η ~ 
 μένη" ὧν τὴν μὲν μετὰ τοῦ 
 ͵ tA ᾿ς \ 
 yavapyov τάττουσι, τὴν δὲ 
 «Ὁ 4, ~ “΄ἉΦῺ- 
 μετὰ τοὺ ἐπὶ τῶν βοϊκῶν ζευ- 
 x Λ 
 τῶν; δι’ ὧν ὄργανα κομίζεται, 
 % Ν > ~ ‘ 4 
 καὶ τροφὴ, αὐτοῖς τε καὶ χτή- 
 Ν X »»-ε sy ΄ 
 VETh, καὶ τὰ ἄλλᾳ τὰ χρήσιμα 
 - ἜΣΣΩ. \ \ 
 τῆς στρατείας" οὗτοι δὲ, καὶ 
 Ν ὃ , + , 
 τοὺς διακόνου ἢ παρέχουσι 
 A / 
 τυμπανιστὰς κωδωνοφόρους, 
 » \ ee / Ν 
 ett δὲ καὶ ἱπποκόμους, καὶ 
 Ν \ 
 μηχανοποιοὺς, καὶ τοὺς τούτων 
 
 ͵ 
 ὑπηρέτας. ἐκπέμπουσί τε πρὸς 
 
 * ἀποτελοίη Vulg. 
 
 any one permitted to barter more, 
 unless he pay a double tribute. The 
 fifth class presides over the manu- 
 factured articles, arranging them and 
 separating the stamped from the com- 
 mon, and the old from the new, and 
 laying a fine upon those who mix 
 them. The sixth and last exact the 
 tithe of all things sold, with the power 
 of inflicting death on all such as 
 cheat. Each therefore has his pri- 
 But it is the public 
 
 business of them all to controul the 
 
 vate duties. 
 
 private as well as civil affairs of the 
 nation, and to inspect the repairs of 
 the public works, and prices, and the 
 markets and the ports and tem- 
 ples. 
 
 After the civil governors there is 
 a third college which presides over 
 military affairs, and this in like man- 
 ner is divided into six pentads, of 
 which the first is consociated with 
 the governor of the fleet ; the second 
 with him who presides over the yokes 
 of oxen by which the instruments 
 are conveyed, and the food for them- 
 selves and the oxen, and all the other 
 baggage of the army: they have with 
 them, moreover, attendants who play 
 upon drums and bells, together with 
 grooms and smiths and their under- 
 workmen : and they send forth their 
 foragers to the sound of bells, recom- 
 
 ἡ πολιτῶν Vulg. 1 ἀκόνους ΑἹ. 
 
222 INDIAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 χορτολόγους» 
 
 - Ν Ἄ Ν 4 
 τιμῇ καὶ κολάσει TO τάχος 
 
 κώδωνας τοὺς 
 
 κατασμευαζόμενοι χαὶ τὴν 
 ἀσφάλειαν. Τρίτοι δέ εἰσι οἱ 
 τῶν πεζῶν ἐπιμελούμενοι. Τέ- 
 ταρτοι δ᾽ οἱ τῶν ἵππων, Πέμπ- 
 Ἕκτοι δ᾽ 
 
 Βασιλικοί τε 
 
 τοι δ᾽ ἁρμάτων. 
 ἐλεφάντων. 
 octane καὶ ἵπποις, καὶ Sy- 
 ρίοις" βασιλικὸν δὲ καὶ ὅπλο- 
 φυλάκιον' παραδίδωσι γὰρ ὃ 
 στρατιώτης τήν τε σκευὴν εἰς 
 τὸ ὁπλοφυλάκιον, καὶ τὸν ἵππον 
 εἰς τὸν ἱππῶνα καὶ τὸ Φηρίον 
 ὁμοίως. Χρῶνται 0 ἀχαλινώ- 
 Tos’ τὰ δ᾽ ἅρματα ἐν ταῖς 
 δδοῖς βοές ἕλκουσιν" οἱ δὲ ἵπποι 
 ἀπὸ φορβῖας ἄγονται τοῦ μὴ 
 παρεμπίπρασσαι τὰ σκέλη, 
 μηδὲ τὸ πρόσυμον αὐτῶν ὑπὸ 
 τοῖς ἅρμασιν ἀμβλύνεσδαι" 
 δύο δ᾽ εἰσὶν ἐπὶ τὸ ἅρματι 
 ἀναβάται Ἐ πρὸς ἡνιόχῳ 6 
 
 δὲ τοῦ ἐλέφαντος ἡνίοχος τέ- 
 ταρτος, τρεῖς δ᾽ οἱ ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ 
 
 τοξεύοντες. 
 
 Εὐτελεῖς δὲ κατὰ τὴν δία:- 
 ταν οἱ ᾿Ινδοὶ πάντες, μῶλλον δ᾽ 
 ἐν ταῖς στρατιαῖς" οὐ δ᾽ ὄχλῳ 
 περιττῷ χαίρουσι' διόπερ εὐ- 
 κοσμοῦσι. 
 
 The relation of Strabo 
 
 pensing their speed with honor or 
 punishment, and attending to their 
 safety. The third 
 charge of the infantry. The fourth 
 of the cavalry. The fifth of the 
 chariots. The sixth of the elephants. 
 Moreover there are royal stables for 
 the horses and beasts; and a royal 
 arsenal, in which the soldier de- 
 
 class have the 
 
 posits his accoutrements when he 
 has done with them, and gives up his 
 horse to the masters of the horse, and 
 the same with respect to his beasts. 
 They ride without bridles: the oxen 
 draw the chariots along the roads; 
 while the horses are led in halters, 
 that their legs may not be injured, 
 nor their spirit impaired by the 
 In addition 
 to the charioteer, each chariot con- 
 
 draught of the chariots. 
 
 tains two riders: but in the equip- 
 ment of an elephant its conductor is 
 the fourth, there being three bowmen 
 also upon it. 
 
 The Indians are frugal in their 
 diet, more particularly in the camp: 
 and as they use no superfluities, 
 they generally attire themselves with 
 elegance. 
 is continued, with an account of 
 
 the laws and customs of the Indians; containing some 
 extracts from Megasthenes jirrelative to the antiquities. 
 
 * παραβάται MS. 
 
MEGASTHENES. 
 
 OF THE PHILOSOPHERS. 
 
 ᾿Ἐγγυτέρω δὲ πίστεώς φη- 
 σιν 6 Μεγασϑένης, ὅτι οἱ πο- 
 καταφέροιν ψῆγμα 
 
 " ~ / 
 χρυσοῦ, καὶ ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ φόρος 
 
 ταμοὶ 
 
 ἀπάγοιτο τῷ βασιλεῖ" τοῦτο 
 , tA 
 γὰρ καὶ ἐν Ἰβηρίᾳ συμβαίνει. 
 ~ ͵ 
 Περὶ δὲ τῶν φιλοσοφων λέ- 
 4 > ν αν, 
 γῶν, τοὺς μὲν ὀρεινοὺς αὐτῶν, 
 φήσιν, ὑμνητὰς εἶναι τοῦ Διο- 
 ~ ΄ a 
 γύσον, δεικνῦντας τεκμήρια 
 , 
 Thy ὠγρίαν ἄμπελον παρὰ μύ- 
 ~ Δ 4 
 vols αὐτοῖς φυομένην, καὶ κιτ-ο 
 τ 
 τὸν, καὶ δάφνην, καὶ μυῤῥίνην, 
 nar πύξον, καὶ ἄλλα τῶν ἀει- 
 Yahav, ὧν μηδὲν εἶναι πέραν 
 τοῦ Ἑὐφράτον πλὴν ἐν παρα- 
 δείτοις σπάνια καὶ μετὰ πολ- 
 λῆς 
 
 Διονυσιαχὸν δὲ, καὶ τὸ σινδο- 
 > 
 
 ἐπιμελείας σωζόμενα. 
 γοφορεῖν, καὶ τὸ μιτροῦσδαι 
 καὶ μυροῦσϑαι καὶ βάπτεσθαι 
 ἄνδϑινα, καὶ τοὺς βασιλέας 
 κωδωνοφορεῖσδιαι, καὶ τυμπα- 
 νίζεσδαι κατὰ τὰς διεξόδους. ἢ 
 Τοὺς δὲ πεδιασίους τὸν “Hpa- 
 
 κλέ ~ 
 AED τιμᾷν. 
 
 That is much more worthy of cre- 
 dit which Megasthenes reports, that 
 the rivers roll down crystals of gold; 
 and that a tribute is collected from 
 thence for the king: for this also takes 
 place in Iberia. 
 
 And speaking of the Philosophers, 
 he says, that those who inhabit the 
 mountains. are votaries of Dionysus 
 and point out traces of him among 
 them, inasmuch as with them alone 
 the vine grows naturally wild as well 
 as the ivy, and laurel, and myrtle, 
 and the box, and other species of the 
 evergreens; of which beyond the 
 Euphrates there are none except 
 such as are kept as rarities in gar- 
 dens and preserved with great care. 
 The following are also customs of 
 Dionysic origin, to wear linen tunics 
 and turbans, and to use oils and 
 perfumes ; and to precede their kings 
 with bells and drums when he goes 
 forth upon a journey. The inhabi- 
 tants of the plain however are ad- 
 dicted to the worship of Hercules.— 
 Str. xv. 711. 
 
 *® 2%680us MSS. 
 
224 INDIAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 OF THE PHILOSOPHICAL SECTS. 
 
 "Adadgy δὲ διαίρεσιν ποιεῖται 
 περὶ τῶν Φιλοσόφων, δύο γένη 
 φάσκων, ὧν τοὺς μὲν Βραχμᾶ- 
 
 νας καλεῖ; τοὺς δὲ Γερμᾶνας. 
 
 \ τὶ - 
 Τοὺς μὲν οὖν Βραχμᾶνας εὐ- 
 - ~ A Nie 
 δοκιμεῖν, μᾶλλον yap καὶ ὁμο- 
 - ~ 5 “ , ryan 5 
 λογεῖν ἐν τοῖς δόγμιωσιν" ἤδη ὃ 
 , LY 
 εὐδὺς, “ab κυομένους ἔχειν 
 > . A / Mv ὃ . 
 ἐπιμελητὰς λογίους ὠνῦρας 
 ἃ / / \ > ͵ 
 οὺς προσιόντας, λόγον μὲν ἐπᾷ - 
 -Ὁ ᾿ Ν / 
 Sew δοκεῖν καὶ τὴν μητέρα; 
 NAN , > > (Sas 
 καὶ τὸν κυόμενον εἰς εὐτεκνίαν 
 a. \ 
 τὸ δ᾽ ἀλησὲς; σωφρονικάς τινας 
 / ἣν ε ΄ 
 παραινέσεις, καὶ ὑποσήκας 
 διδόναι" tas δ᾽ ἥδιστα ἀκροω- 
 , nae Aes, z 
 μένας, μᾶλλον εὐτέκνους εἶναι 
 νομίζεσδαι. 
 Μετὰ δὲ τὴν γένεσιν ἄλ-- 
 - / 
 λους καὶ ἄλλους διαδέχεσψαι 
 Ἂν > 7. BIN -Ὁ f 
 τὴν ἐπιμέλειαν, ἀεὶ τῆς μεί- 
 5 / 
 Covog ἡλικίας χαριεστέρων 
 τυγχανούσης διδασχάλων. Δι- 
 \ / 
 ατρίβειν δὲ τοὺς Φιλοσόφους ἐν 
 2]. Ν Ὁ , \ 
 ἄλσει πρὸ τῆς πόλεως, ὑπὸ πε- 
 te / ~ - 
 ριβόλῳ συμμέτρῳ, λιτῶς ζῶν- 
 > ΄ Ν "- 
 τας ἐν στιβάσι, nal δοραῖς, 
 ἐμψύχων καὶ 
 
 / 
 ἀφροδισίων, ὠκροωμένους λόγων 
 
 ἀπεχομένους 
 
 > 4 
 σπουδαίων, μεταδιδόντας ua) 
 
 - , 
 τοῖς ἐδέλουσι. τὸν δ᾽ ὠκροώ-- 
 
 : ya 
 μενον οὔτε λαλῆσαι epic, 
 
 He makes also another division of 
 the Philosophers, saying that there 
 are two races of them, one of which 
 he calls the Brahmanes and the Ger- 
 manes. 
 
 Of these the Brahmanes are the 
 more excellent, inasmuch as_ their 
 discipline is preferable : for as soon as 
 they are conceived they are committed 
 to the charge of men skilled in magic 
 arts, who approach under the pretence 
 of singing incantations for the well- 
 doing both of the mother and the child; 
 though in reality to give certain wise 
 directions and admonitions: and the 
 mothers, that willingly pay attention 
 to them, are supposed to be more for- 
 tunate in the birth. 
 
 After birth they pass from the care 
 of one master to that of another, as 
 their increasing age requires the 
 more superior. The Philosophers 
 pass their time in a grove of mo- 
 derate circumference, which lies in 
 
 front of the city, living frugally and © 
 
 lying upon couches of leaves and 
 skins: they abstain also from animal 
 food and intercourse with females, 
 intent upon serious discourses, and 
 communicating them to such as wish: 
 but it is considered improper for the 
 auditor either to speak or to exhibit 
 
 
 

 
 . X 
 οὔτε χρέμψασϑαι, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ 
 mricas ἢ ἐκβάλλεσϑαι τῆς 
 
 rd Ἁ ε ’ > ,’ὔ 
 συνουσίας τὴν ἡμέραν ἐκείνην 
 
 v 
 ὡς ἀκολασταίνοντα. τη δ᾽ 
 ἑπτὰ καὶ τριάκοντα, οὕτως 
 , > ΄ > Ν 
 ζήσαντα ἀναχωρεὶν εἰς τὴν 
 
 ~ ~ “ Ν 
 ἑαυτοῦ κτῆσιν ἕκαστον, καὶ 
 ζῇν ἀδεῶς καὶ ἀνειμένως μᾶλ- 
 λον, σινδονοφοροῦντα, καὶ χρυ- 
 σοφοροῦντα μετρίως ἐν ταῖς 
 
 Ν Ν ~ —- % , 
 χερσὶ καὶ τοῖς Wot, προσφερὸ- 
 
 ΄ Le of \ 
 μενον σάρκας, μὴ τῶν πρὸς 
 Ν 4 ~ 4 
 τὴν χρείαν συνεργῶν ζώων, 
 δριμέων καὶ ἀρτυτῶν ἀπεχό- 
 βένον- 
 
 τας εἰς πολυτεκνίαν᾽ ἐκ πολλῶν 
 
 Γαμεῖν δ᾽ ὅτι πλείσ- 
 
 γὰρ καὶ τὰ σπουδαῖα πλείω 
 γίνεσαι" ἀναδουλοῦσί τε τὴν 
 > ᾽ ΕἸ ΑΛ Ἂν , 
 ἐκ τέκνων, qv μὴ ἔχουσι δού- 
 ἐγγυτάτω 
 > ΄, ~ s 
 οὖσαν πλείω δεῖν παρασκευά- 
 ζεσδαι. 
 Ταῖς δὲ γυναιξὶ ταῖς γα- 
 μεταῖς μὴ συμφιλοσοφεῖν 
 ἃς - Ὁ > Ν 
 “ποὺς Βραχμᾶνας" εἰ μὲν μοχ- 
 
 Nepal γίνοιντο, ἵνα μή τι τῶν 
 
 λους, ὑπηρεσίαν, 
 
 οὐ δεμιτῶν ἐκφέροιεν εἰς τοὺς 
 Ν 
 βεβήλους" εἰ δὲ σπουδαῖοι, μὴ 
 καταλείποιεν αὐτούς. Οὐδένα 
 a; κα ~ \ , 
 γὰρ ἡδονῆς καὶ πόνου κατα- 
 φρονοῦντα, ὡς δ᾽ αὕτως ζωῆς 
 καὶ ϑανάτου, ἐδέλειν ὑφ᾽ ἐτέ- 
 i . ~ i \ 
 pe εἶναι" τοιοῦτον δ᾽ εἶναι τὸν 
 
 ~ Ν ΄ “ 
 σπουδαῖον, καὶ τήν σπουδαίαν. 
 
 MEGASTHENES. 225 
 
 any other sign of impatience ; for, in 
 case he should, he is cast out of the 
 assembly for that day as one inconti- 
 nent. After passing thirty-seven years 
 in this manner they betake themselves 
 to their own possessions where they 
 live more freely and unrestrained, 
 they then assume the linen tunic, and 
 wear gold in moderation upon their 
 hands and in their ears: they eat 
 also flesh except that of animals which 
 are serviceable to mankind, but they 
 nevertheless abstain from acids and 
 condiments. They use polygamy for 
 the sake of large families; for they 
 think that from many wives a larger 
 progeny will proceed: if they have 
 no servants their place is supplied by 
 the service of their own children, for 
 the more nearly any person is related 
 to another, the more is he bound to 
 attend to his wants. 
 
 The Brahmanes do not suffer their 
 wives to attend their philosophical dis- 
 courses, lest if they should be impru- 
 dent they might divulge any of their 
 secret doctrines to the uninitiated : 
 and if they be of a serious turn of 
 mind, lest they should desert them : 
 for no one who despises pleasure and 
 pain even to the contempt of life and 
 death, as a person of such sentiments 
 as they profess ought to be, would 
 voluntarily submit to be under the 
 
 * μηκέτι Al. 
 GG 
 
226 
 
 ~ % / 
 
 Πλείστους δ᾽ αὐτοῖς εἰναι λὸ- 
 Λ 
 
 yous περὶ Μ“ανάτου" νομίζειν 
 
 \ \ ἣν 
 
 μὲν γὰρ δὴ 
 
 / ς a ᾽ Ν ͵ὔ 
 βίον, ὡς ἂν ἀκμὴν κυομιένων 
 
 τὸν μὲν evade 
 
 ε ΄ 
 εἶναι" τὸν δὲ ϑάνατον γένεσιν 
 Ud Ν \ 
 εἰς τὸν ὄντως βίον, καὶ Tov 
 n , . 
 εὐδαίμονα τοῖς φιλοσοφήσασι 
 ~ / Ὁ 
 διὸ τῇ ἀσκήσει πλείστῃ χρήσ- 
 Sas πρὸς τὸ ἑτοιμοάνατον * 
 A 
 ἀγαδὸν δὲ ἢ κακὸν μηδὲν 
 ε ~ , 
 εἶναι τῶν συμβαινόντων ἀν- 
 Ψ . > \ a‘ - > 
 Spdmors’ οὐ γὰρ ay τοῖς αὖ- 
 ~ 7 Ν 
 τοῖς τοὺς μὲν ἄχϑεσδαι, τοὺς 
 2 
 δὲ χαίρειν, ἐνυπνιώδεις ὑπολή-- 
 wv e \ Ν 8. δὴ 
 Weig ἔχοντας" καὶ τοὺς αὐτοὺς 
 ~ ΓΕ \ \ » ᾿ 
 τοῖς αὐτοῖς τοτὲ μὲν ἄχσεσ- 
 δ΄ EP αὖ χαί 
 αἱ) τοτὲ δ᾽ αὖ χαίρειν μετα- 
 ,ὔ 
 βαλλομένους. 
 Τὰ δὲ περὶ φύσιν, τὰ μὲν 
 / 
 εὐήσειαν ἐμφαίνειν φησίν. ἐν 
 » τ ΕΝ , 
 ἔργοις γὰρ αὑτοὺς κρείττους, 
 a rm \ 
 ἢ λόγοις εἶναι διὰ μύδων Ta 
 Περὶ 
 - ~ dm 
 πολλῶν δὲ τοῖς Ἕλλησιν ὅμο- 
 
 A 
 πολλὰ πιστουμένους. 
 
 ~~. ἢ ᾿ Ν ε , 
 δοξεῖν" ὅτι γὰρ γενητὸς ὃ κόσ- 
 Ν ,ὔ 
 μος, καὶ φϑαρτὸς λέγειν κεὶ- 
 4 \ ὟΝ Vee 
 κείνους, καὶ OTL σφαιροειδής 
 oe ~ > N \ ~ 
 6, τε διοικῶν αὐτὸν, καὶ ποιῶν 
 a 
 Jess, δ ὅλου διαπεφοίτηκεν 
 Γ 
 in. . 8, ν ἈΝ ~ \ 
 αὐτοῦ" ἀρχαὶ δὲ τῶν μὲν συμ- 
 “ - \ 
 πάντων ἕτεραι, τῆς δὲ χκοσμο- 
 \ \ »Ὕ 
 moitas τὸ ὕδωρ᾽ πρὸς δὲ τοῖς 
 / 
 τέταρσι στοιχείοις, πέμπτη 
 
 ¥. 
 τίς ἐστι φύσις; ἐξ ἧς ὁ οὐρανὸς, 
 
 INDIAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 domination of another. They have 
 various opinions upon the nature of 
 death : for they regard the present 
 life merely as the conception. of per- 
 sons presently to be born, and death 
 as the birth into a life of reality and 
 happiness to those who rightly philo- 
 sophise : upon this account they are 
 studiously careful in preparing for 
 death. They hold that there is 
 neither good nor evil in the accidents 
 which take place among men: nor 
 would men if they rightly regarded 
 them as mere visionary delusions 
 either grieve or rejoice at them: they 
 therefore neither distress themselves 
 nor exhibit any signs of joy at their 
 occurrence. . 
 Their speculations upon nature, he 
 says, are in some respects childish: 
 that they are better philosophers in 
 their deeds than in their words; in- 
 asmuch as they believe many things 
 contained in their mythologies. How- 
 ever they hold several of the same 
 doctrines which are current among 
 the Greeks; such as that the world 
 is generated and destructible and of 
 a spherical figure ; .and that the God 
 who administers and forms it, per~ 
 vades it throughout its whole extent : 
 that the principles of all things are 
 different, water for instance is the 
 first principle of the fabrication of 
 
 * πρὸς τὸν ἕτοιμον ϑάνατον MSS. 
 
 ia 
 
 δ» WM ἡ; γι; 
 

 
 2 
 ἐν μέσῳ 
 
 καὶ τὰ ἄστρα" yn ὃ 
 ἵδρυται τοῦ παντός" καὶ περὶ 
 ψυχῆς 
 ἄλλα 
 
 ,ὔ A A 
 σπέῤματος δὲ, καὶ 
 - LZ AQ 
 (ὅμοια λέγεται, καὶ 
 
 re , δὲ aa 
 πλείω" παραπλέχουσι ὃε καὶ 
 μύδους, ὥσπερ καὶ Πλάτων 
 
 ta "Ὁ 
 περί τε ἀφδϑαρσίας ψυχῆς, 
 καὶ τῶν nad ddov κρίσεων, 
 Περὶ 
 
 Ἁ -" ~ 
 μὲν τῶν Βραχμάνων ταῦτα 
 
 \ ΕΖ - 
 καὶ ᾿ἄλλα τοιαῦτα. 
 
 λέγει, 
 
 Τοὺς δὲ Γερμᾶνας, τοὺς 
 μὲν ἐντιμωτάτους Ὑλοβίους 
 φησὶν ὀνομάζεσδαι, ζῶντας ἐν 
 ταῖς ὕλαις, ἀπὸ φύλλων καὶ 
 
 καρπῶν ἀγρίων, ἐσδῆτος δὲ 
 
 φλοίων δενδρίων, ἀφροδισίων 
 χωρὶς» καὶ οἴνου. Τοῖς δὲ 
 
 " ~ / 
 βασιλεῦσι συνεῖναι δι’ ἀγγέ- 
 4 ~ 
 λων πυνδανομένοις περὶ τῶν 
 J 
 αἰτίων, καὶ δι’ ἐκείνων Sepa- 
 , Ν 4 x 
 πεύουσιγν χαὶ λιτανεύουσι τὸ 
 διεῖον. © 
 Μετά δὲ τοὺς Ὑλοβίους, 
 δευτερεύειν κατὰ τιμὴν τοὺς 
 | Ν Ν ἃ ye tate 
 ατριχοὺς, καὶ ὡς περὶ τὸν ἄν- 
 , 
 φιλοσόφους 
 4 ‘ > v4 Ν cs 
 μὲν, μὴ ἀγραύλους δὲ, δρύζῃ 
 
 καὶ ἀλφίτοις τρεφομένους ἃ 
 
 ὥρωπον, λιτοὺς 
 
 , ~ 
 παρέχειν αὐτοῖς πάντα τὸν 
 
 / Ν 
 αἰτηϑέντα, καὶ ὑποδεξάμενον 
 
 ξενίᾳ" δύνασϑαι δὲ καὶ πολυ- 
 
 MEGASTHENES. 227 
 
 the world; that after the four ele- 
 ments there is a certain fifth nature, 
 of which the heaven and stars are 
 composed : that the earth is situated 
 in the centre of the whole: they add 
 much of a like nature concerning 
 They 
 have also conceived many fanciful 
 
 generation and the soul. 
 
 speculations after the manner of 
 Plato, in which they maintain the 
 immortality of the soul and the judg- 
 ments of Hades, and doctrines of a 
 Such is his ac- 
 count of the Brahmanes. 
 
 similar description. 
 
 Of the Germanes he says they are 
 considered the most honorable who 
 are called Hylobii, and live in the 
 woods upon leaves and wild fruits, 
 clothing themselves with the bark of 
 trees, and abstaining from venery 
 and wine. They hold communica- 
 tion by messengers with the kings 
 who inquire of them concerning the 
 causes of things, and by their means 
 the kings serve and worship the 
 Deity. 
 
 After the Hylobii the second in 
 estimation are the Physicians, philo- 
 sophers, who are conversant with 
 men, simple in their habits, but 
 not exposing themselves to a life 
 abroad, living upon rice and grain, 
 which every one to whom they apply 
 freely gives them and receives them 
 into his house: they are able by the 
 
228 INDIAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 ~ \ € , 
 
 γόνους ποιεῖν, καὶ ἀῤῥενογόνους, 
 / \ 
 
 καὶ SIndvyovovs διὰ φαρμακευ- 
 
 se \ Was , \ 
 
 tans τὴν δὲ ἰατρείαν διὰ 
 
 “ ae x 
 σιτείων τὸ πλέον, οὐ διὰ φαρ- 
 μάκων ἐπιτελεῖσσαι. Τῶν 
 A 
 
 φωρμάκων δὲ μάλιστα εὔδοκι- 
 
 Ὁ \ > ΤΡ, ‘ A 
 
 μεῖν τὰ ἐπίχριστα, καὶ τὰ 
 
 U A 
 
 natamAdocuata’ τἄλλα δὲ 
 
 4 
 
 καχουργίας πολὺ μετέχειν. 
 
 " \ XA "4 
 
 ᾿Ασκεῖν δὲ καὶ τούτους κακχεί- 
 
 7 ‘A > / 
 
 νους καρτερίαν, τήν τε ἐν πό- 
 
 Ν Ἂν > n~ ε 
 νοις, “ab τὴν ἐν ταῖς ὑπομο- 
 “ 
 yaig™® ὥστ᾽ ἐφ᾽ ἑνὸς σχήμα- 
 / 
 
 τὸς ἀκίνητον διατελέσαι τὴν 
 , 
 
 Αλλους δ᾽ 
 
 τ Ν \ Ν 
 εἶναι τοὺς μὲν μαντικοὺς καὶ 
 
 ἡμέραν ὕλην. 
 
 > ts δ Ν Ν -Ὁ- \ ‘ 
 ἐπῳδοὺς, καὶ τῶν περὶ τοὺς 
 ,ὔ ᾿ Ν 
 κατοιχομένους λόγων, καὶ νο- 
 4 > “ > ~ 
 μίμων ἐμπείρους, ἐπαιτοῦντας 
 Ἂν 
 καὶ κατὰ κώμας, καὶ πόλεις" 
 ἊΣ A ὕ A 
 τοὺς δὲ χαριεστέρους μὲν τού- 
 τς 
 των καὶ ἀστειοτέρου. Οὐδ᾽ 
 ΕἸ Ν δὲ > ὔ ~ 
 αὐτοὺς δὲ ἀπεχομένους τῶν 
 i 
 nay gdovt ϑρυλλουμένων, 
 - ~ 
 ὅσα δοκεῖ πρὸς εὐσέβειαν καὶ 
 Συμφιλοσοφεῖν δ᾽ 
 
 ay \ ~ > 
 EVIOLG KA γυναικᾶς, amex O- 
 
 ἀφροδι- 
 
 , 
 ὁσιότητα. 
 
 , \ \ 
 μένας καὶ αυτὰς 
 
 , 
 σιῶὼνς 
 
 * ἐπιμοναῖς Al. 
 
 use of medicines to render women 
 fruitful and productive either of 
 males or females: but they perform 
 cures rather by attention to diet than 
 the use of medicines. Of medicines 
 they approve more commonly of un- 
 guents and plasters, for all others 
 they consider not free from delete- 
 rious effects. These and some others 
 of this sect so exercise their patience 
 in labours and trials, as to have at- 
 tained the capability of standing in 
 one position unmoved for a whole 
 day. There are others also who 
 pretend to divination and inchant- 
 ments, and are skilful in the concerns 
 of the inhabitants and of their laws: 
 they lead a mendicant life among the 
 villages and towns; but the better 
 They do 
 not reject such of the mythological 
 
 class settle in the cities. 
 
 stories concerning Hades as appear 
 to them favourable to virtue and 
 piety. Women are suffered to phi- 
 losophise with some of these sects, 
 though they are required to abstain 
 
 from venery.—Strabo, lib. v. 712. 
 
 + gon ΑΙ. 
 
MEGASTHENES. 
 
 229 
 
 OF THE INDIAN SUICIDES. 
 
 Μεγασδϑένης δ᾽ ἐν μὲν τοῖς 
 Φιλοσόφοις οὐκ εἶναι δόγμα 
 φησὶν ἑαυτοὺς ἐξάγειν" τοὺς 
 δὲ ποιοῦντας τοῦτο νεανικοὺς 
 κρίνεσναι, τοὺς μὲν σκληροὺς 
 τῇ φύσει φερομένους ἐπὶ πλη- 
 γὴν ἢ κρημνὸν, τοὺς δ᾽ ὠπό- 
 γους ἐπὶ βυδὲν, τοὺς δὲ πολυ- 
 πόνους ὠπαγχομένους, τοὺς δὲ 
 πυρώδεις εἰς πῦρ ὠδουμιένους 
 οἷος ἦν καὶ 6 Κάλανος ὠκχό- 
 λαστὸος ἄνωρωπος, καὶ ταῖς 
 ᾿Αλεξάνδρου τραπέζαις δεδου- 
 λωμένος. 
 
 Megasthenes in his account of the 
 Philosophers says, There is no pre- 
 scribed rule for putting an end to 
 themselves; but that those who do 
 it are esteemed rash. The hardy by 
 nature cast themselves upon the 
 sword or from a precipiece, those 
 who are incapable of labour into the 
 sea, those who are patient of hard- 
 ships are strangled, while those of a 
 fiery temperament are thrust into the 
 fire: which last indeed was the fate 
 of Calanus an intemperate man, and 
 addicted to the pleasures of the table, 
 at the court of Alexander.—/Str. lib. 
 xv. p. 718. 
 
 OF THE PHILOSOPHERS: 
 
 FROM CLITARCHUS. 
 
 Ὁ δὲ Κλείταρχος φησὶ, Φι- 
 λοσόφοις Ἐ δὲ τοῖς Βραχμᾶσιν 
 ἀντιδιαιροῦνται Πράμνας ἐρισ- 
 τικούς τινας “al ἐλεγχτικούς" 
 τοὺς δὲ Βραχμᾶνας φυσιολο- 
 
 γίαν καὶ ὠστρονομίαν ἀσκεῖν, 
 
 Accorp1né to the relation of Clitar- 
 chus, they place in opposition to the 
 Brahmanes, the Pramnz a conten- 
 tious and argumentative set of men 
 who deride the Brahmanes as arro- 
 gant and ridiculous on account of 
 
 * φιλοσόφους Al. 
 
230 INDIAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 γελωμένους ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνων ὡς ἀλα- 
 ζόνας Ἐ καὶ ἀοήτους. Τούτων δὲ 
 τοὺς μὲν ὀρεινοὺς καλεῖσαι, 
 τοὺς δὲ γύμνητας, τοὺς δὲ πο- 
 
 λιτικοὺς καὶ προσχωρίους. 
 
 their studies in physiology and as- 
 tronomy. They are divided into the 
 Mountaineer, the Naked, the Citizen, 
 and Rural sects. 
 
 OF THE INDIAN ASTRONOMY : 
 
 FROM THE PASCHAL CHRONICLE. 
 
 ἜΝ τοῖς χρόνοις τῆς πυργο- 
 ποιΐας, ἐκ τοῦ γένους τοῦ ᾿Αρ- 
 pakad, ἀνήρ τις ᾿Ινδὸς ἀνε- 
 φάνη σοφὸς, ἀστρονόμος, ὀνό- 
 ματι ᾿Ανδουβάριος, ὃς καὶ συν- 
 ἐγράψατο πρῶτος ᾿Ινδοῖς ᾽Ασ- 
 
 ‘A 
 τρονομίανς 
 
 Αβοῦτ the time of the construction 
 of the Tower, a certain Indian of the 
 race of Arphaxad made his appear- 
 ance, a wise man, and an astrono- 
 mer, whose name was Andubarius ; 
 and it was he that first instructed 
 the Indians in the science of Astro- 
 nomy.—p. 36. 
 
 ἀλαζήνους Vulg. 
 
ATLANTIC AND PANCHAZAN 
 FRAGMENTS: 
 
 FROM 
 
 MARCELLUS AND EUEMERUS. 
 
. 
 
 [| Pee rt 
 ae Ce 
 
 VARS HOUAS οἱ 
 
 
 
a 
 
 
 
 OF THE ATLANTIC ISLAND: 
 
 FROM MARCELLUS. 
 
 Ν 
 OTI μὲν ἐγένετο τοιαύτη τις 
 ~ A nn 
 νῆσος nal τηλικαύτη, δηλοῦτί 
 τινες τῶν ἱστοροῦντων τὰ περὶ 
 - wy ᾿ > 
 τῆς ἔξω δαλάττης. Elvan 
 ἈΝ πὰ x + , 
 γὰρ καὶ ἐν τοῖς αὐτῶν χρόνοις 
 \ ε \ 4 > » “2 -Ὁ- 
 μεν επταὶ »νήσους εν EXELVH) τῷ 
 J ~ 
 πελάγει Περσεφόνης ἱερὰς, τρεῖς 
 \ MM, Ν 
 δὲ ἄλλας ἀπλέτους, τὴν μὲν 
 - ~ \ ~ 
 Πλουτῶνος, τὴν δὲ ᾿Αμμῶνος, 
 4 Ui 
 μέσην δὲ τούτων ἄλλην Ποσει- 
 ~ . ΄ \ , 
 δῶνος, χιλίων σταδίων τὸ μέγε- 
 0g. Kal τοὺς οἰκοῦντας ἐν αὐτῇ 
 e ς ς ἢ 
 4 ~ , uA 
 μνήμην τῶν προγόνων διασώζειν 
 ~ ν᾽ 
 περὶ Ths ᾿Ατλάντιδος ὄντως γε- 
 , n 4 
 νομένης ἐκεῖ νήσου παμμεγα- 
 5, , a »Ν «φ΄ῇἢβ 
 εστάτης; ἤν ἐπὶ πολλᾶς πε- 
 ριόδους δυνάστευσᾳι πάσῶν 
 τῶν ἐν ᾿Ατλαντικῷ πελάγει 
 - ᾿ “ 
 νήσων. Ταῦτα μὲν οὖν ὃ 
 
 Μάρκελλος ἐν τοῖς Αἰδιοπικοῖς 
 
 γέγραφεν. 
 
 Twat such and so great an island 
 formerly existed is recorded by some 
 of the historians who have treated 
 of the concerns of the outward sea. 
 For they say that in their times there 
 were seven islands situated in that 
 sea which were sacred to Persephone, 
 and three others of an immense mag- 
 nitude one of which was consecrated 
 to Pluto, another to Ammon, and 
 that which was situated between 
 them to Poseidon; the size of this 
 last was no less than a thousand sta- 
 dia. The inhabitants of this island 
 preserved a tradition handed down 
 from their ancestors concerning the 
 existence of the Atlantic island of a 
 prodigious magnitude, which had 
 really existed in those seas; and 
 which, during a long period of time, 
 governed all the islands in the At- 
 lantic ocean. Such is the relation of 
 Marcellus in his Ethiopian history.— 
 Proc. in Tim. 
 iH 
 
PANCHZAN FRAGMENTS: 
 
 FROM EUEMERUS. 
 
 - ," 
 ETHMEPOS μὲν οὖν, φίλος 
 γεγονὼς Κασσάνδρου βατι- 
 λέως, καὶ διὰ τοῦτον ἠναγκασ- 
 μένος τελεῖν βασιλικάς τινας 
 χρείας καὶ μεγάλας ἀποδη- 
 ’ὔ Ν > ον" 
 μίας, φησὶν, ἐχκτοπισώηναι 
 A Ν ΄, 5 \ 
 χατὰ THY μεσημβρίαν εἰς τὸν 
 Ὠκεανόν. ἐκπλεύσαντα καὶ 
 αὐτὸν ἐκ τῆς Εὐδαίμονος ᾿Αρα- 
 Bias, ποιήσασαι τὸν πλοῦν 
 ~ ε 4 
 BP ᾿Ωχεανοῦ πλείους ἡμέρας, 
 ἣν -Ὁ ΄ 
 καὶ προσενεχῆναι νήσοις πε- 
 - < 2 , , 
 λαγίαις" Ἐ ὧν μίαν ὑπερέχειν ἦ 
 
 τὴν ὀνομιωζομένην Πάγχαιαν" 
 
 z ~ 
 ἐν ἡ τεδεᾶσϑαι τοὺς ἐνοικοῦν- 
 7 ΄ 
 τας Παγχαίους εὐσεβείᾳ δια- 
 / Ν \ ‘\ 
 φέροντας καὶ τοὺς Φεοὺς τι- 
 μῶντας μεγαλοπρεπεστάταις 
 ἢ 
 καὶ 
 
 ᾽, > 57 
 “υσίαις» αναφημασιν 
 
 ἀξιολόγοις ἀργυροῖς τε καὶ 
 ~ πε \ \ ~ 
 χρυσοῖς. Eivas de τὴν νῆσον 
 
 Peps | ~ Me eZ 
 bepay Neay, καὶι ετερᾶ πλείιὼῶ 
 
 * ὑπάρχειν. 
 
 Evemervus (the historian) was a 
 favourite of Cassander the king, and 
 being upon that account constrained 
 by his master to undertake some 
 useful as well as. extensive voyage 
 of discovery he says, That he tra- 
 velled southwards to the Ocean, and 
 having sailed from Arabia Felix stood 
 out to sea several days, and continued 
 his course among the islands of 
 that sea; one of which far exceeded 
 the rest in magnitude, and this was 
 called Panchea. He observes that 
 the inhabited it 
 were singular for their piety, honor- 
 
 Panchezans who 
 
 ing the Gods with magnificent sacri- 
 fices and superb offerings of silver 
 and gold. He says moreover that the 
 istand was consecrated to the Gods, 
 and mentions several other remark- 
 able circumstances relative to its an- 
 tiquity and the richness of the arts 
 
 } πλαγίαις St.—Qy. transversely among the islands. 
 

 
 
 
 ἣν 
 ϑαυμαζόμενα κατά τε τὴν 
 ἀρχαιότητα καὶ τὴν τῆς κα- 
 τασκευῆς πολυτεχνίαν. περὶ 
 Ψ' By \ , > » ΟΥ̓ 
 ὧν τὰ κατὰ μέρος ἐν ταῖς πρὸ 
 ταύτης βίβλοις ἀναγεγράφα- 
 
 τ - 
 
 μεν. Elvas δ᾽ ἐν αὐτῇ κατά 
 
 τινα λόφον ὑψηλὸν κα ὑπερ- 
 
 , βολὴν ἱερὸν Διὸς Τριφυλαίου, 
 
 καθιδρυμένον ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ καδ᾿ 
 
 ὃν καιρὸ ἐβασίλευσε τῆς 
 
 > / ε ΄ wv Ἢ 
 
 οἰκουμένης ἁπάσης, ἔτι κατὰ 
 
 we ~ 
 
 ἀνθρώπους wy. "Ey τούτῳ τῷ 
 
 con ΄ wt Ὁ > 
 
 ἱερῷ στήλην εἰναι χρυσὴν, ev 
 2 ~ ΄ ΄ 
 
 ἡ τοῖς Παγχαίοις γράμμασιν 
 
 , 4 
 ὑπάρχειν γεγραμμένας τάς τε 
 - / 
 
 Οὐρανοῦ καὶ Κρόνου καὶ Διὸς 
 πράξεις κεφαλαιωδῶς. 
 
 Μετὰ ταῦτα φησὶ πρῶτον 
 
 ΄: 
 Οὐρανὸν βασιλέα γεγονέναι, 
 > ~ » δ μὰν 
 ἐπιειχῇ τινα ἄνδρα καὶ εὐεργε- 
 ~ ~ + 
 
 τήν, χαὶ τῆς TOY ἄστρων κινή- 
 
 ἃ ~ 
 
 σεως ἐπιστήμονα" ὃν καὶ πρῶ- 
 
 τὸν δυσίαις τιμῆσαι τοὺς οὐ- 
 
 X\ 
 paviovg Seats" διὸ καὶ Οὐρανὸν 
 γίους δ᾽ 
 
 7 ~ ,ὔ ων Ν 
 αὐτῷ γενέσθαι ἀπὸ γυναικὸς 
 
 προσαγορευθῆναι. 
 
 , ~ \ ᾿ 
 Ἕστίας, Πᾶνα καὶ Κρονον 
 , 
 
 δυγατέρας δὲ, Ῥέαν καὶ Δή- 
 
 , \ "Ὁ 
 μήτραν. Κρόνον δὲ βασιλεῦ- 
 
 > > Ν ἣν ΄ 
 
 σαι μετ᾽ Οὐρανὸν, καὶ γήματα 
 “Pedy γεννῆσαι Δία καὶ Ἥραν 
 Τὸν δέ Δία 
 
 διαδεξάμενον τὴν βασιλείαν 
 
 καὶ Ποσειδῶνα. 
 
 τοῦ Κρόνου, γῆμαι Ἥραν καὶ 
 Δήμητραν καὶ Θέμιν" ἐξ ὧν 
 
 παῖδας ποιήσασθαι, ἸΚούρητας 
 
 EUEMERUS, 235 
 
 displayed in its institutions and ser- 
 vices: some of which we have in part 
 detailed in the books preceding this, 
 He relates also that upon the brow 
 of a certain very high mountain in it 
 there was a temple of the Triphylzan 
 Zeus, founded by him at the time he 
 ruled over all the habitable world 
 whilst he was yet resident amongst 
 men, In this temple stood a golden 
 column on which was inscribed in the 
 Panchean characters a regular his- 
 tory of the actions of Ouranus and 
 Cronus and Zeus. 
 
 In a subsequent part of his work 
 he relates that the first king was 
 Ouranus, a man renowned for jus- 
 tice and benevolence, and well con- 
 versant with the motions of the stars : 
 and that he was the first who honor- 
 ed the Heavenly Gods with sacrifices 
 upon which account he was called 
 Ouranus (Heaven). He had two sons 
 by his wife Hestia who were called 
 Pan and Cronus ; and daughters Rhea 
 and Demetra. And Cronus reigned 
 after Ouranus; and he married Rhea, 
 and had by her Zeus, and Hera, and 
 Poseidon. And when Zeus succeed- 
 ed to the kingdom of Cronus he 
 married Hera, and Demetra, and 
 Themis, by whom he had children ; 
 
 by the first the Curetes ; Persephone 
 
236 
 
 μὲν ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης, Περσε-- 
 
 / \ - , 
 φόύόνην δὲ ἐκ τῆς δευτέρας, 
 ~ \ Ν ~ 4 
 ᾿Αθηνᾶν δὲ ἀπὸ τῆς τρίτης. 
 / \ -. ὦ 
 Ἔλθόντα δὲ εἰς Βαβυλῶνα, 
 ἐπιξενωθῆναι Βήλφῳ᾽ καὶ μετὰ 
 ῳὩ 2 Ν 4 - 
 ταῦτα εἰς τὴν Πάγχαιαν νῆσον 
 
 \ > ~ / 
 πρὸς ᾿Ωχεανῷ κειμένην Tapa- 
 , 9 ὦ ~ ow 
 ψενόμενον, Οὐρανοῦ τοῦ ἰδίου 
 προπάτορος βωμὸν ἱδρύσασθαι. 
 Κακεῖθεν διὰ Συρίας ἐλθεῖν 
 Ν Ἂ , if 4 
 πρὸς τὸν tore δυνάστην Kao- 
 Ν 
 civ’ ἐξ οὗ val τὸ Κάσσιον 
 , \ 
 ὅρος. “EAOayta δὲ εἰς Κιλικίαν 
 πολέμῳ νιχήσαι Κίλιχα το- 
 Y \ 
 πάρχην, καὶ ἄλλα δὲ πλεῖστα 
 vf t 
 ἔθνη ἐπελθόντα, map ἅπασι 
 τιμκησθῆναι, καὶ New ἄνα- 
 
 γορευθῆναι. 
 
 PANCHEAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 by the second; and Athena by the 
 third. He went to Babylon where 
 he was hospitably received by Belus ; 
 and afterwards passed over to the 
 island of Panchzea which lies in the 
 Ocean, where he erected an altar to 
 Ouranus his forefather. From thence — 
 he went into Syria to Cassius who 
 was then the ruler of that country, 
 from whom Mount Cassius receives 
 its name. Passing thence into Cilicia 
 
 he conquered Cilix the governor of 
 
 those parts; and having travelled 
 through many other nations he was 
 honored by all and universally ae 
 knowledged as a God.—Diod. Sic. 
 Ecl. 681. cited by Euseb. Prep. 
 Evan. 11. | 
 
 
 
 
 
THE 
 
 CHALDAAN ORACLES OF 
 
 ZOROASTER. 
 
ajay: Oe 
 
 4h ee ha τι 
 
 
 
THE CHALDAAN ORACLES OF 
 
 ZOROASTER. 
 
 CAUSE 
 GOD, FATHER, MIND, FIRE MONAD, DUAD, TRIAD.* 
 
 Lt ὋὉ δὲ Sede ἐστι κεφαλὴν ἔχων ἱέρακος" οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ πρῶτος, 
 ἄφθαρτος, ἀΐδιος, ὠγένητος, ὠμερὴς, ἀνομοιότατος, ἡνίοχος παντὸς 
 καλοῦ, ἀδωροδόκητος, ἀγαθῶν ὠἀγαθώτατος, φρονίμων φρονιμώ- 
 τατος. ἔστι δὲ χαὶ πατὴρ εὐνομίας καὶ δικαιοσύνης» αὐτοδίδακτος, 
 φυσικὸς, καὶ τέλειος, καὶ σοφὸς, καὶ ἱεροῦ φυσικοῦ μόνος εὑρετής. 
 
 But God is he that has the head of a hawk. He is the first, 
 
 indestructible, eternal, unbegotten, indivisible, dissimilar; the 
 
 dispenser of all good; incorruptible; the best of the good, the 
 wisest of the wise: he is the father of equity and justice, self- 
 taught, physical, and perfect, and wise, and the only inventor of 
 
 the sacred philosophy.—Euseb. Prep. Evan. lib. 1. c. 10. 
 
 * Mr. Taylor in his collection of the oracles (Class. Journ. No, 22.) has 
 arranged them under the following heads. I. The oracles which he conjectures 
 may be ascribed to Zoroaster himself. This division includes the collection of 
 Psellus, and in this collection are marked Z. as in the 8th. II. Oracles 
 delivered by Theurgists under the reign of Marcus Antoninus. These relate to 
 the Intelligible and Intellectual orders: and are here distinguished by a T as in 
 the 4th. III. Oracles delivered either by the Theurgists or by Zoroaster, here 
 marked Z or T. asin the 2nd. The rest he has placed together as uncertain or 
 imperfect in their meaning ; to which he has subjoined a few from the Treatise 
 of Lydus de Mensibus. We are also indebted to Mr. Taylor for the references to 
 the authors from whom the collection was originally made, and for the addition 
 of several oracles hitherto unnoticed : the latter are distinguished by the letters 
 ‘Tay. after the reference, as in the 2nd oracle. 
 
 + Eusebius attributes this to the Persian Zoroaster. I have added it to 
 the collection. rcs 
 
24.0 THE CHALDEAN ORACLES 
 
 .* OF ye Θεουργοὶ Sev εἶναί φασιν, καὶ ὕμνουσι πρεσβύτερον 
 καὶ νεώτερον. καὶ κυκλοέλικτον τὸν ϑεὴν καὶ αἰώνιον" καὶ νοοῦντα 
 τὸν σύμπαντα τῶν ἐν τῷ χόσμῳ κινουμένων ἁπάντων ἄριθμον 
 καὶ πρὸς τούτοις ὠπέραντον ic τὴν δύναμιν καὶ ἐλικοειδῆ φασι 
 μετὰ τούτων. 
 Theurgists assert that hej} is a God, and celebrate him as 
 both older and younger, as a circulating and eternal God, as un- 
 derstanding the whole number of all things moved in the world, 
 and moreover infinite through his power and of a spiral form. 
 Z or T. Proc. in Tim. 244.—Tay. 
 
 Il. Θεὸν ἐγκόσμιον, αἰώνιον, ὠπέραντον. 
 Νέον; καὶ πρεσβύτην, ἑλικοειδῆ. 
 
 The mundane god, eternal, boundless, 
 
 Young and old, of a spiral form. 
 
 Iv. Τῆς γὰρ ἀνεκλείπτου ζώης καὶ τῆς ἀτρυτοῦ δυνωαμέως, καὶ 
 nx [eA A \ / > 4 c 53. ἃ Ἂν 
 τῆς HLOUVOVy κατῶ TO λόγιον; ενεργειᾶς o Atwy (αἰτία). 
 For Eternity, { according to the oracle, is the cause of never- 
 failing life, of unwearied power, and unsluggish energy. 
 ΠΡ. Tay. 
 
 Vv. Σιγώμενος καλεῖται ὑπὸ τῶν Θεῶν, οὗτος ὁ ἄχλιτος Θεὸς, καὶ 
 ~ ~ ~ / Ν \ ~ , aN -" ~ 
 TH γῳ συνῷδειν λέγεται μαι “ATH νοὺυν μόνον UTG τῶν ψυχῶν 
 γνωρίζεσθαι. 
 Hence this stable God is called by the gods silent, and is said 
 
 to consent with mind, and to be known by souls through mind 
 
 alone. T. Proc. in Theol, 321.—Tay. 
 
 , , Ν 
 vi. Οἱ Χαλδαῖοι τὸν Sedov (Διόνυσον) ᾿Ιάω λέγουσιν, (ἀντὶ τοῦ, 
 
 φῶς ρνοητὸν) τῇ Φοινίκων γλώσσῃ, καὶ Σαβαὼθ δὲ πολλαχοῦ 
 
 * Lobeck seems to be of opinion that neither this nor the one next follow- 
 
 ing have any claim to be inserted. 
 + χρόνος Time Tay.—Qy. Κρόνος. The latter Platonists continually sub- 
 
 stitute Χρόνος for Κρόνος. 
 + The Gnostics used the word Zon itself for their different celestial orders. 
 
 See also Sanchoniatho, p. 4. 
 
OF ZOROASTER. 241 
 
 λέγεται, οἷον ὁ ὑπὲρ τοὺς ἑπτὰ πόλους, τουτέστιν 6 δη- 
 Μιουργὸς. 
 The Chaldeans call the God (Dionysus or Bacchus) Iao ἴῃ 
 the Phoenician tongue (instead of the intelligible light), and he is 
 often called Sabaoth, signifying that he is above the seven poles, 
 that is the Demiurgus. Lyd. de Mens. 83.—Tay. 
 
 Vil. Πάντα γὰρ συνέχων τῇ ἑαυτοῦ pin τῆς ὑπαρξέως ἀκρότητι, 
 ἢ Ἁ , ak ~ ” ε 4 
 χατὰ TO λόγιον, αὑτὸς πᾶς ἔξω ὑπάρχει. 
 Containing all things in the one summit of his own hyparxis, 
 he himself subsists wholly beyond. 
 ἼΣ: Proc. in Theol. 212.—Tay. 
 
 VII. Τὰ πάντα μετροῦν καὶ ἀφόύριζον, ὡς τὰ λόγιά φησι. 
 Measuring and bounding: all things. 
 
 ft Proc. in Pl. Th. 386,—Tay. 
 
 IX. Ov γὰρ ὠπὸ πατρικῆς ὠρχῆς ἀτελές τι τροχάζει. 
 For nothing imperfect circulates from a paternal principle. 
 
 Z. Psell. 38.—Plet. 
 
 Ke Πατὴρ οὐ φόβον ἐνθρώσκει, πείθω δ᾽ ἐπιχέει. 
 The father hurled not forth fear but infused persuasion. 
 
 Z. Plet. 
 
 XI... . Ἑαυτὸν ὁ πατὴρ ἥρπασεν 
 Οὐδ᾽ ἐν ἐῇ δυνάμει νοερᾷ κλείσας ἴδιον πῦρ. 
 . . . . The Father has hastily withdrawn himself; 
 But has not shut up his own fire in his intellectual power. 
 Z. ἐν Psell. 30.—Plet. 33. 
 
 Ὁ x‘ ae | ~ - ἌΡΑ, / > ~ - 
 ΧΙ]. Τοιοῦτος γὰρ ὁ EXEL γους πρὸ ἐνεργίας ἐνεργων, OTs 
 
 Μηδὲ προῆλτϑεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἔμενεν ἐν τῷ πατρικῷ βυδῷ," 
 * BaSé Fr. Pat. 
 
 It 
 
242 THE CHALDEAN ORA€LES 
 
 Kal ἐν τῷ ἀδύτῳ, κατὰ τὴν Seobpéupova σιγήν. 
 Such is the Mind which is there energizing before energy. 
 That it has not gone forth but abode in the paternal depth, 
 And in the adytum according to divinely-nourished silence. 
 ae Proc. in Tim, 167. 
 
 XU. Εἰσὶ πάντα πυρὸς ἑνὸς ἐκγεγαῶτα. 
 Πάντω γὰρ ἐξετέλεσε πατὴρ; καὶ νῷ παρέδωκε 
 Δευτέρῳ, ὃν πρῶτον κληΐζεται ἔὔνεω ἦ ἀνδρῶν. 
 All things are the progeny of one fire. 
 The Father perfected all things, and delivered them over 
 To the second Mind, whom all nations of men call the first. 
 
 Z. Psell, 24.—=Plet. 30; 
 XIV. Καὶ τοῦ νοῦ, ὃς τὸν ἐμπύριον κόσμον ἄγει. 
 And of the Mind which conducts the empyrean world. 
 
 ee Dam. de Prin. 
 XV. “A νοῦς λέγει, τῷ νοεῖν On ποῦ λέγει. 
 What the Mind says, it says by understanding. 
 
 Z. Psell. 35. 
 XVI. Ἡ μὲν γὰρ δύναμις σὺν ἐκείνοις, νοῦς δ᾽ ἀπ᾽ ἐκείνου. 
 Power is with them, but Mind is from him. 
 
 4 Proc. in Plat. Th. 365. 
 
 XVI. Νοῦς πατρὸς ἀραιοῖς ἐποχούμενος ἰϑυντῆρσιν 
 ᾿Αχνάμπτου ἀστράπτουσιν ἀμειλίκτου πυρὸς ὀλκοὶς. 
 The Mind of the Father riding on attenuated rulers 
 Which glitter with the furrows of inflexible and implacable Fire. 
 T. Proc. in Crat.—Tay. 
 
 XVII. 1 we ee Μετὰ δὲ πατρικὰς διανοίας 
 
 + Pletho has πᾶν γένος : he omits the first line, which Taylor also gives by 
 itself in another place. 
 
OF ZOROASTER. 243 
 
 Ψυχὴ ἐγὼ vain, θερμὴ ψνυχοῦσα τὰ πάντα, 
 weeees Κατέδετο γὰρ 
 Νοῦν μὲν ἐνὶ ψυχῇ, ψυχὴν δ᾽ ἐνὶ σώματι ἀργῷ, 
 Ἡμῶν ἐγκατέδϑηκε πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε δεῶν τε. 
 ...... After the paternal conception 
 I the Soul reside, a heat animating all things. 
 ~...-+. For he placed 
 Mind in Soul and Soul in dull Body, 
 The Father of Gods and Men so placed them in ours. 
 Z. or T. Proc. in Tim. 124. 
 
 XIX. Συνυφίσταται γὰρ τὰ φυσικὰ ἔργα τῷ νοερῷ φέγγει 
 Τοῦ πατρὸς Ψυχὴ γὰρ χοσμήσασα τὸν μέγαν 
 Οὐρανὸν, καὶ κοσμοῦσα μετὰ τοῦ πατρὸς. 
 Κέρατα ἢ δὲ καὶ αὐτῆς ἐστήρικται ἄνω. 
 
 Natural works coexist with the intellectual light 
 
 Of the Father. For it is the Soul, which adorned the great 
 heaven 
 
 And which adorns it after the Father. 
 
 But her horns are established on high. 
 
 ἊΝ or Ἐν Proc. in Tim. 106. 
 
 XX. Ὅτι ψυχὴ πῦρ δυνάμει πατρὸς οὖσα φαεινὸν, 
 ᾿ΑΜΝανάτος τε μένει, καὶ ζωῆς δεσπότις ἐστὶ" 
 Καὶ ἴσχει κόσμου πολλὰ πληρώματα κόλπων. 
 The Soul, being a bright fire, by the power of the father, 
 Remains immortal, and is mistress of life, 
 And fills up many of the recesses of the world. 
 ν ΣΟΙ 58. lek bie 
 
 ΧΧΙ- Μιγνυμένων δ᾽ ὀχετῶν, πυρὸς ἀφϑίτου ἔργα τελοῦσα. 
 The channels being intermixed, she performs the works of in- 
 
 corruptible fire. 
 Z. or T. Proc, in Pl. Polit. 399. 
 
 * Lob. proposes κρᾶτα. 
 
2.4.4. THE CHALDEAN ORACLES 
 
 XXII. Οὐ yap εἰς ὕλην, πῦρ ἐπέκεινα τὸ πρῶτον 
 ᾿Εὴν δύναμιν κατακλείει ἔργοις, ἀλλὰ νόῳ. 
 Nod γὰρ vos ἐστὶν 6 κόσμου τεχνίτης πυριόυ. 
 For the Fire which is first beyond did not shut up his power 
 In matter by works but by mind: 
 For the framer of the fiery world is the Mind of Mind. 
 Abe Proc. in Theol. 833.—in Tim, 157. 
 
 XXIM. “Og ἐκ νόου exdope πρῶτος 
 [Ἔσσαμενος πυρὶ πῦρ, cudecuwy™ appa nepaon 
 Πηγαίους κρατήρας, ἑοῦ πυρὸς avdog ἐπίσχων. 
 Who first sprung from Mind 
 Clothing fire with fire, binding them together that he might mingle 
 The fountainous craters, while he preserved the flower of his 
 own fire. 
 
 Ae Proc. in Parm. 
 
 XXIV.  “EvSev συρόμενος πρηστὴρ ἀμυδροῖο πυρὸς avatos, 
 Κύσμων ἐν) ρώσκων κοιλώμασι. Πάντα γὰρ ἕνϑεν 
 "ApyeTas εἰς τὸ κάτω τείνειν ἀκτίνας ἀγητάς. 
 Thence a fiery whirlwind drawing the flower of glowing fire, 
 Flashing into the cavities of the worlds ; for all things from thence 
 Begin to extend downwards their admirable rays. 
 T. Proc. in Theol. Plat. 171. 172. 
 
 Xxv.f Ἡ μονὰς ἐκεῖ πρώτως; Grav πατρικὴ μονὰς ἐστί. 
 The Monad is there first where the paternal Monad subsists, 
 a Proc, in Euc, 27. 
 
 * συνδεσμιον Tay. 
 
 4 Οἷον of Πυϑαγόρειοι, διὰ μο- What the Pythagoreans signify by Monad, 
 νάδος, καὶ δυάδος, καὶ τριάδος, ἢ  Duad, and Triad—or Plato by Bound, Infi- 
 ὁ Πλάτων διὰ τοῦ περάτος, καὶ nite, or Mixed; or we in the former part of 
 τοῦ ἀπείρου, καὶ τοῦ μικτὸν, ἢ this work, by The One, The Many, and The 
 πρότερόν ye ἡμεῖ; διὰ τοῦ ἑνὸς καὶ United; that the oracles of the Gods intend 
 τῶν πολλῶν καὶ τοῦ ἠνωμένου, by Hyparxis, Power, and Energy.—Dam. de 
 τοῦτο of χρήσμοι τῶν ϑεῶν διᾶ Prin.—Tay. 
 τῆς ὑπαςξέως καὶ δυναμέως καὶ 
 
 καὶ ἐνεργείας. 
 
OF ZOROASTER. 245 
 XXVI. Ταναὴ ἐστὶ μονὰς», . «« «οὖς ἣ δύο γεννᾷ. 
 The Monad is extended which generates two. 
 iM Proe. in Euc. 27. 
 
 XXVII. δΔιυὰς yap παρὰ τῷδε καϑήται, (καὶ νοεραῖς ἀστράπτει τομαὶς) Ἐ 
 Καὶ τὸ κυβερνᾷν τὰ πάντα, καὶ τάττειν ἕκαστον (οὐ ταχϑέν.) 
 For the Duad sits by this, and glitters with intellectual sections, 
 To govern all things, and to order each. 
 a: Proc. in Plat. 376. 
 
 - 7 - Y 
 XXVIII. Εἰς τρίᾳ γὰρ νοῦς ἔιπε πατρὸς τέμνεσδιαι ἅπαντα, 
 4 ἊΝ io ,ὔ \ Vp ,ὔ ῳ. Ὁ 2 
 Οὗ τὸ ϑέλειν κατένευσε, καὶ ἤδη πάντα ἐτέτμητο. 
 
 The Mind of the Father said that all things should be cut into 
 
 three: 
 His will assented, and immediately all things were cut. 
 4 we Proc. in Parm. 
 XXIX. Els τρία γὰρ cine νοῦς πατρὸς ἀϊδίου, 
 
 Νῷ πάντα κυβερνῶν. 
 The Mind of the eternal Father said into three, 
 Governing all things by Mind. 
 T. Proc. in Tim. 
 
 Xxx. Τῆς δὲ γὰρ ἐκ τριάδος πᾶν πνεῦμα πατὴρ ἐκέρασε. 
 The Father mingled every Spirit from this Triad. 
 Lyd. de Men. 20.—Tay. 
 
 XXXI. Τῆς δὲ γὰρ ἐκ τριάδος κόλποισιν ἐπάρχεδ᾽ ἅπαντα. 
 All things are governed in the bosoms of this triad. 
 Lyd. de Men. 20.—Tay, 
 
 * The oracle stands in the text as given by Fr. Patricius, Standley and 
 Taylor. Lobeck shows that the passages in parenthesis do not properly belong 
 to it. οὐ raySé should also be οὗ ταχϑέν as connected with the succeeding sen- 
 tence in Proclus. 
 
246 THE CHALDEAN ORACLES 
 
 XXXL. Πάντα γὰρ ἐν τρισὶ τοῖς δὲ κυβερνᾶταί τε καί ἐστι. 
 All things are governed and subsist in these three. 
 1B Proc. in I, Alcib. 
 
 XXXIIL. ᾿Αρχαῖς γὰρ τρισὶ ταῖς δὲ λάβοις δουλένειν ἅπαντα. 
 For you may conceive that all things serve these three principles. 
 a Dam. de Prin. 
 
 XXXIV. Ἔχ ἢ τῶνδὲ ῥέει τριάδος d€uas πρὸ τῆς οὔσης; 
 Οὐ πρώτης, ἀλλ᾽ οὗ τὰ μετρεῖται. 
 From these flows the body of the Triad, being pre-existent, 
 Not the first, but that by which things are measured. 
 Z. or Ts Anon. 
 
 xxxy. Καὶ ἐφάνησαν ἐν αὐτῇ ἣ τ᾽ ἀρετὴ, καὶ ἡ σοφία. 
 Καὶ ἡ πολύφρων ἀτρέκεια. 
 And there appeared in it virtue, and wisdom, 
 And multiscient truth. 
 Z. or T. Anon. 
 
 XXXVI. Παντὶ γάρ ἐν κόσμῳ λάμπει τριὰς, ἧς μονὰς ἄρχει. 
 For in the whole world shineth a Triad, over which a Monad rules. 
 Ἵν Dam. in Parm. 
 
 XXXVII. 46.6 oi ἹἽερὸς πρῶτος δρόμος, ἐν δ᾽ apa μέσῳ 
 Ἤέριος, τρίτος ἄλλος, ὃς ἐν πυρὶ τὴν χόνω ϑάλπει. 
 The first is the sacred course ...., but in the middle 
 Air, the third the other which cherisheth the earth in fire. 
 They (ye be Anon. 
 
 XXXVI. ᾿Αρδὴν ἐμψυχοῦσα φάος, πῦρ, ainepa, κόσμους. 
 Abundantly animating light, fire, ether, worlds. 
 Z. or T. Semp. in Phys. 143. 
 
 * Tay.—Ty Fr. Pat. 
 + Jones proposes ἠελίου. Hippocrates uses the same expression of δρόμος 
 ἡλίου. 
 
OF ZOROASTER. 247 
 
 IDEAS * 
 
 INTELLIGIBLES, INTELLECTUALS, IYNGES, SYNOCHES, TELE- 
 
 XXXIX. 
 
 TARCHA, FOUNTAINS, PRINCIPLES, HECATE 
 AND DAMONS. 
 
 Νοῦς πατρὸς ἐῤῥοίζησε, νόησας ἀκμάδι βουλῇ 
 Παμμόρφους ἰδέας. πηγῆς δ᾽ ἀπὸ μιᾶς ἀποπτᾶσαι 
 ᾿Ἐξέϑορον. πατρόθεν γὰρ ἔην βουλή τε τελός τε 
 (AP ὧν συνάπτεται τῷ πατρὶ; ἄλλην κατ᾽ ἄλλην 
 Ζωὴν, ἀπὸ μεριζομένων ὀχετῶν.) + 
 
 ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἐμερίσθησαν, νοερῷ πυρὶ μοιρηδεῖσαι 
 
 Εἰς ἄλλας νοεράς" κόσμῳ γὰρ ἄναξ πολυμόρφῳ 
 Προύϑηκεν νοερὸν τύπον ἄφδιτον, οὗ κατὰ κόσμον 
 ὝἼχνος ἐπειγόμενος μορφῆς nad ἃ Ἱ κόσμος ἐφάνϑη, 
 Παντοίαις Ἰδέωις κεχαρισμιένος, ὧν μία πηγὴ» 
 
 Ἔξ ἧς ῥοιζοῦνται μεμερισμέναι ἄλλαι, ἄπλητοι, 
 Ῥηγνύμεναι κόσμου περὶ σώμασιν; ak περὶ κόλπους 
 Σμερδαλέους, σμήνεσσιν ἐοικυΐας; φορέονται» 
 Τραποῦσι περ τ᾽ ἀμφὶ παρασχέδον ἄλλυδις ἄλλη, 
 Ἔννοιαι νοερωὶ πηγῆς πατρικῆς amd, πολὺ 
 Δραττόμεναι πυρὸς ἄνϑος ἀποιμνήτου χρόνους GUN 
 ᾿Αρχεγόνους ἰδέας πρώτη πατρὸς ἔβλυσε τᾶς δὲ 
 
 Αὐτοτελὴς πηγή. 
 
 The Mind of the Father made a jarring noise, understanding by 
 
 unwearied counsel 
 
 * The whole of the following division is a system grafted upon the Platonic 
 doctrine of Ideas. It is composed of six different orders, called Triads, or each 
 consisting of three Triads, which have different names in the respective theolo- 
 gies of the Modern Platonists, and of those who assumed the title of Chaldzeans. 
 Both regarded the first Cause as the One and the Good; from whom proceeded 
 in succession the three first orders which were all Ineffable and Superessential. 
 
 + Taylor omits these two lines, which Fr. Pat. and Stan insert. 
 
 Τ μετα Tay. 
 
248 THE CHALDAHAN ORACLES 
 
 Omniform ideas: which flying out from one fountain 
 
 They sprung forth: for from the Father was the will and the 
 end ; 
 
 (By which they are connected with the Father 
 
 According to alternate life from several vehicles,) 
 
 But they were divided, being by intellectual fire distributed 
 
 Into other Intellectuals : For the king previously placed before 
 the multiform world 
 
 An intellectual, incorruptible pattern, the print of whose form 
 
 Is promoted through the world, according ‘to which things the 
 world appeared 
 
 Beautified with all-various Ideas ; of which there is one fountain, 
 
 From this the others rush forth distributed, 
 
 And separated about the bodies of the world, and are borne 
 
 Through its vast recesses like swarms 
 
 Turning themselves on all sides in every direction, 
 
 They are Intellectual conceptions from the paternal fountain, 
 
 Partaking abundantly the flower of Fire in the point of restless 
 time, 
 
 But the primary self-perfect fountain of the Father 
 
 Poured forth these primogenial ideas. ἡ 
 Zor: Proc. in Parm. 
 
 XL. Πολλαὶ μὲν δὴ αἵδε ἐπεμβαίνουσι φαεινοῖς 
 Κόσμοις ἐνδιῥώσχουσαι" nal ἐν αἷς ἀκρότητες ἔασι 
 “Τρεῖς, : 
 These being many ascend flashingly into the shining worlds 
 
 And in them are contained three summits. 
 ἯΝ Dam. in Parm. 
 
 ΠΤ ἐν κεν. Φρουρδι τῶν ἔργων εἰσὶ τοῦ πατρὸς 
 Kat τοῦ ἑνὸς νοῦ τοῦ νοητοῦ. 
 They are the guardians of the works of the Father 
 
 And of the one Mind, the Intelligible. 
 T. Proc. in Th. Plat. 205. 
 
OF ZOROASTER. 249 
 
 XLIL* Πάντα γάρ ἐστι ὅμου ἐν κόσμῳ τῷγε νοητῷ. 
 All things subsist together in the Intelligible world. 
 Ὑ ΑΞ Dam. de Prin.—Tay. 
 
 XLII. Τὸν δὲ νοεῖ πᾶς νοῦς δεὸν, οὐ γὰρ ἄνευ νόος ἐστὶ νοητοῦ, 
 Καὶ τὸ νοητὸν οὐ νοῦ χωρὶς ὑπάρχει. 
 But all Intellect understands the deity, for Intellect is not without 
 the Intelligible, 
 And the Intelligible does not subsist apart from Intellect.. 
 or... Dam. 
 
 XLIV. Ov γὰρ ἄνευ νόος ἐστὶ νοητοῦ" οὐ χωρὶς ὑπάρχει. 
 For Intellect is not without the Intelligible : it does not subsist 
 apart from it. 
 Z. or T. Proc. Th. Plat. 172. 
 
 XLY. Νῷ μὲν κατέχει τὰ νοητὰ, ψυχὴν δ᾽ ἐπάγει κόσμοις. 
 By Intellect he contains the Intelligibles, but introduces the Soul 
 into the worlds. 
 
 XLVI. Νᾷῷ μὲν κατέχει τὰ νοητὰ, αἴσθησιν δ᾽ ἐπάγει κόσμοις. 
 By Intellect he contains the Intelligibles, but introduces Sense into 
 the worlds, Ts Proc. in Crat. 
 
 XLVI. Σύμβολα γὰρ πατρικὸς νόος ἔσπειρε κατὰ κόσμον, 
 Ὃς τὰ νοητὰ νοεῖ, καὶ ἄφραστα καλληΐται. 
 For the paternal Intellect, which understands Intelligibles, 
 And adorns things ineffable, has sowed symbols through the world. 
 i, Proc. in Crat. 
 
 ΤΠ. ᾿Αρχὴ πάσης τμήσεως ἥδε ἡ τάξις. 
 This order is the beginning of all section. 
 ane Dam, de Prin. 
 
 * I. The first Order is the Intelligible Triad of the Platonists, but Psellus 
 says it was venerated among the Chaldeans as a certain Paternal Profundity, 
 containing three triads, each consisting of Father, Power and Intellect. 
 
 K K 
 
250 THE CHALDEAN ORACLES 
 
 XLIX. ‘H νοητὴ πάσης τμήσεως ἄρχει. Ἐ 
 The Intelligible is the principle of all section. 
 
 Es Dam.*de Prin. 
 Ὧν Τροφὴ δὲ τῷ νοοῦντι τὸ νοητόν. 
 The Intelligible is food to that which understands. 
 
 Σ Dam. de Prin. 
 nite Τὰ λόγια περὶ τῶν ταξέων πρὸ τοῦ Οὐρανοῦ ὡς ἄφϑεγκτον 
 
 ἐνεδείξατο, καὶ προσέϑηκε 
 Lif ἔχει μυστά. 
 The oracles concerning the orders exhibits it prior to Heaven as 
 ineffable, and add— 
 It has mystic silence. OS Proc. in Crat.—Tay. 
 
 111. Θόας τὰς νοητὰς αἰτίας τὸ λόγιον κάλει, καὶ προϊιούσας ἀπὸ 
 τοῦ πατρὸς See ἐπ᾿ αὐτόν. 
 The oracle calls the Intelligible causes Swift, and asserts that 
 proceeding from the Father, they run to him. 
 is Proc. in Crat.—Tay. 
 
 LI. f Τὰ μὲν ἐστὶ νοερὰ καὶ νοητὰ, ὅσα νοοῦντα νοεῖται. 
 Those natures are both Intellectual and Intelligible, which, them- 
 selves possessing intellection, are the objects of intelligence to 
 
 others. Tey Proc, Th. Plat. 179. 
 
 LIv. Νοούμεναι Wyyes matpovey νοέουσι καὶ αὐταὶ" 
 
 Βουλαῖς ἀφϑέγκτοισι κινούμεναι ὥστε νοῆσαι. 
 The intelligible Lynges themselves understand from the Father ; 
 By ineffable counsels being moved so as to understand. 
 
 η. Psell, 41.—Plet. 31. 
 
 
 
 * oye: Fr. Patr. 
 
 + Il. The second order of the Platonists was the Intelligible and at the same 
 lime Intellectual Triad. Among the Chaldzans it consisted of the Iynges, 
 Syonches and Teletarche. 
 
OF ZOROASTER. 251 
 
 LV. Ὅτι ἐργάτις, ὅτι exdoris ἐστὶ πυρὸς ζωηφόρου. 
 Ὅτι καὶ τὸ ζωογόνον πληροῖ τῆς Ἑκάτης κόλπον. 
 Καὶ ἐπιῤῥεῖ τοῖς Συνοχεῦσιν ἀλχὴν ζήδωρον πυρὸς 
 Μέγα δυναμένοιο. 
 Because it is the operator, because it is the giver of life-bearing 
 fire. 
 Because it fills the life-producing bosom of Hecate. 
 And it instils into the Synoches the enlivening strength of Fire 
 
 Endued with mighty power. 
 Μ“" Proc. in Tim. 128. 
 
 LVI. Φρουρεῖν αὖ πρηστήρσιν ἑοῖς auparyrag ἔδωκεν. 
 ᾿Ἐγχεράσας ἀλκῆς ἴδιον μένος ἐν Συνοχεῦσιν. 
 He gave to his own whirlwinds to guard the summits, 
 
 Mingling the proper force of his own strength in the Synoches. 
 F. Dam. de Prin. 
 
 LVII. ᾿Αλλὰ καὶ ὑλαίοις ὅσα δουλεύει Συνοχεῦσι. 
 
 But likewise as many as serve the material Synoches. 
 
 Ἐ: 
 
 LVI. Οἱ Τελετάρχαι συνείληπται τοῖς Συνοχεῦσι- 
 
 The Teletarchs ate comprehended in the Synoches. 
 ἣν Dam. de Prin. 
 
 LIX. “Pein τοι νοερῶν μακάρων πηγή τε poy τε, 
 Πάντων γὰρ πρώτη δυνάμεις κύλποισιν ἀφραστοῖς 
 Δεξαμένη, γενεὴν ἐπὶ πᾶν προχέει τροχάουσαν. 
 Rhea the fountain and river of the blessed Intellectuals 
 Having first received the powers of all things in her ineffable 
 
 bosom 
 
 Pours forth perpetual generation upon every thing. 
 i Proc. in Crat.— Tay. 
 
 + IIL. The Intellectual Triad of later Platonists corresponds with the 
 Fountains or Fontal Fathers of the Chaldzans. 
 
252 THE CHALDEAN ORACLES 
 
 LX. "Eots γὰρ πέρας τοῦ πατρικοῦ Pbod*, καὶ πηγὴ τῶν νοερῶν. 
 For it is the bound of the paternal depth, and the fountain of the 
 
 Intellectuals. 
 ἽΝ: Dam. de Prin. 
 
 LXI. we τ. Ἔστι γὰρ ἀλκῆς 
 ᾿Αμφιφαοῦς δύναμις, νοεραῖς στράπτουσα τομιαῖσι. 
 .,» ὁ ὦ ΒΟΥ he 15:8 power 
 Of circumlucid strength, glittering with Intellectual sections. 
 
 be Dam. 
 
 LXII. Νοεραῖς ἀστράπτϑι τομαῖς, ἔρωτος δ᾽ ἐνεπλήσε τὰ πάντα. 
 He glitters with Intellectual sections, but has filled all things 
 with love. 
 
 ὯΝ Dam. 
 
 LX. Τοῖς δὲ πυρὸς νοεροῦ νρεροῖς τορηστῆρσιν ἅπαντα 
 Eixabe δουλέυνοντα, πατρὸς πειθηνίδι βουλῇ. 
 To the Intellectual whirlwinds of Intellectual fire all things 
 Are subservient, through the persuasive counsel of the Father. 
 ie Proc. in Parm. 
 
 LXIV. 'O πῶς ἔχει κόσμος νοεροὺς ἀνοχῆας ὠκαμπεῖς. 
 Oh how the world has inflexible Intellectual rulers. 
 
 LXV. Μέσον τῶν πατέρων Ἕκάτης T κέντρον φυορεῖται- 
 The centre of Hecate corresponds with that of the fathers. 
 qe 
 
 LXVI. "EE αὐτοῦ γὰρ πάντες t ἐκθρώσκουσι ὠμείλικτοι τε κεραυνοὶ; 
 t ~ 
 Καὶ πρηστηροδόχοι χόλποι παμφεγγέος ἀλκῆς 
 -ε ΄ = ΟἹ \ Rie 
 Πατρογενοῦς Ἑκάτης" καὶ ὑπεζωκὸς πυρὸς ἄνθος 
 / -Ὁ ͵ὔ 
 "Hoe κραταιὸν πνεῦμα πόλων πυρίων ἐπέκεινα. 
 
 From him leap forth all implacable thunders, 
 
 * Bagod. ΕἾ, P. 1 ἑκάστης. Ir, P. } Tay. omits ἐξ and πάντες. 
 
OF ZOROASTER. 253 
 
 And the whirlwind receiving bosoms of the all-splendid strength 
 Of the Father-begotten Hecate; and he who begirds the flower 
 of fire 
 And the strong spirit of the poles, all fiery beyond. 
 - Proc. in Crat. 
 
 LXV. Πηγαῖον ἄλλον, ὃς τὸν ἐμπύριον κόσμον ἄγει. 
 Another fontal, which leads the empyreal world. 
 Zor LT: Proc. in Tim. 
 
 LXV. Kal πηγὴ πηγῶν, καὶ πέρας πηγῶν ἁπασῶν. ' 
 The fountain of fountains, and the boundary of all fountains. 
 ἮΣ Dam. de Prin. 
 
 LXIX. Ὑπὸ δύο νόων ἡ ζωογόνος πηγὴ περιέχεται ψυχῶν. 
 Under two minds the life-generating fountain of souls is com- 
 prehended. 
 A ys Dam. de Prin. 
 
 LXX. “Yrronertat αὐταῖς ἀρχικὸς dirdy™. 
 Beneath them lies the principal of the immaterials. 
 Z. or T. Dam. in Parm. 
 
 LXXI. Πατρογενὲς φάος, πολὺ γάρ μόνος, ἐκ πατρὸς ἀλκῆς 
 Δρεψάμενος νόου ἄνθος, ἔχει τῷ νοεῖν πατρικὸν νοῦν 
 
 ἘἘνδιδόνωαι πάσαις πηγαῖς τε καὶ ἀρχαῖς, 
 
 * The last of the Intellectual Triad was the Demiurgus, from whom pro- 
 ceeded the Effable and Essential orders including all sorts of Demons. They 
 are according to the respective systems— 
 
 OF THE PLATONISTS. OF THE CHALDEANS. 
 IV. The Supermundane. IV. The Principles. 
 VY. The Liberated. V. The Azonic. 
 VI. The Mundane. VI. The Zonic. 
 
 The Demiurgus was the fabricator of the world, and held the same relative posi- 
 tion to the three succeeding essential orders as did the first cause to the three 
 preceding or superessential orders. 
 
 t+ Qy. 7o.—I have so translated it. 
 
THE CHALDEAN ORACLES 
 
 2 
 on 
 cs 
 
 Kal τὸ νοεῖν, ἀεί te μένειν ἀόκνῳ στροφάλιγγι. 
 
 Father-begotten light, for he alone having gathered from the 
 strength of the Father 
 
 The flower of mind has the power of understanding, the paternal 
 mind ; 
 
 To instil into all fountains and principles the power 
 
 Of understanding, and of always remaining in a ceaseless revo- 
 lution. 
 
 il Proc. in Tim. 242. 
 
 LXXI. . . . . . . Πάσας πηγάς te καὶ dpyas 
 Δινεῖν des τε μένειν ἀόκνῳ στροφάλιγγι. 
 All fountains and principles whirl round, 
 And always remain in a ceaseless revolution. 
 Z. or T. Proc. in Parm. 
 
 LXXIM. "Apyais, ai πατρὸς ἔργα νοήσασαι νοητὰ 
 Αἰσθητοῖς ἔργοις, καὶ σώμασιν ἀμφεκάλυψεν. 
 Διαπόρθμιοι ἑστῶτες φάναι τῷ πατρὶ καὶ τῇ ὕλη. 
 Καὶ ta ἐμφανῆ, μιμήματα τῶν ἀφανῶν ἐργαζόμενοι. 
 Καί τ᾽ ἀφανῆ εἰς τὴν ἐμφανῆ κοσμοποιΐαν ἐγγραφοντες. 
 The Principles, which have understood the Intelligible works of 
 the Father 
 He has clothed in sensible works and bodies, 
 Being the intermediate links standing to communicate between 
 the Father and Matter, 
 Rendering apparent the images of unapparent natures, 
 And inscribing the unapparent in the apparent frame of the 
 world. 
 Z.ior 0. Dam. de Prin. 
 
 LXXIV. Ὅτι Ταρτάρου καὶ Γῆς τῆς συζυγούσης τῷ Οὐρανῷ 6 Τυφὼν, 
 "Exidva, 6 Πύϑων, οἷον Χαλδαϊκή τις τρίας ἔφορος τῆς ἀτακ- 
 τοῦς πάσης δημιουργίας. 
 Typhon, Echidna, and Python, being the progeny of Tartarus 
 and Earth, which is conjoined with Heaven, form as it were a 
 
OF ZOROASTER. 255 
 
 certain Chaldaic triad, which is the inspector of the whole dis- 
 ordered fabrication. 
 —E. Olymp in Phed.— Tay. 
 
 LXXV. ᾿Απὸ τῶν ἀερίων ἀρχόντων συνυφίστανται οἱ ἄλογοι 
 δαιμόνες, διὸ καὶ τὸ λόγιόν φητιν. 
 Ἠερίων ἐλάτηρα κυνῶν χϑονίων τε καὶ ὑγρῶν. 
 Irrational demons derive their subsistence from the aérial rulers, 
 wherefore the oracle says, 
 
 Being the charioteer of the aérial, terrestrial, and aquatic dogs. 
 τς Olymp. in Phed.—Tay. 
 
 LXXVI. Τὸ ἐνυδρὸν, ἐπὶ μὲν τῶν Selwv, τὴν ὠχωριστὸν ἐπιστασίαν 
 ἐνδείκνυται τοῦ ὕδατος. διὸ καὶ τὸ λόγιον ὑδροβατήρας κάλει 
 τοὺς Deeds τούτους. 
 The aquatic, when applied to divine natures, signifies ἃ govern- 
 ment inseparable from water, and hence the oracle calls the 
 aquatic gods water walkers. 
 Ἢ: Proc. in Tim. 270.—Tay. 
 
 Lxxvil. Sunt etiam dawmones aquei quos Nereides vocat 
 Orpheus, in sublimioribus exhalationibus aque, 
 quales sunt in hoc aere nubiloso, quorum corpora 
 videntur quandoque acutioribus oculis, presertim in 
 Perside et Africa ut existimat Zoroaster. 
 
 There are certain aquatic demons whom Orpheus called Ne- 
 
 reides in the more elevated exhalations of water such as appear 
 
 in this cloudy air, whose bodies are sometimes seen, as Zoroaster 
 thinks, by more acute eyes, especially in Persia and Africa. 
 dig Fie. de Im. Am. 123.—Tay. 
 
[29] 
 οι 
 a 
 
 THE CHALDEAN ORACLES 
 
 PARTICULAR SOULS. 
 
 SOUL, LIFE, MAN. 
 
 LXXVII. Ταῦτα πατὴρ ἐννόησε, βροτὸς δ᾽ of ἐψύχωτο. 
 These things the Father conceived, and the mortal was animated 
 for him. ἼΣ Proc. in Tim. 336. 
 
 LXXIX. Κατέθετο yap νοῦν ἐν ψυχῇ, ἐν σώματι δὲ 
 
 Ὑμέας ἐγκατέθηκε πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε δεῶν τε. 
 For the Father of gods and men placed the mind in soul, 
 But in body he placed you. 
 
 ὌΝ π α- Σύμξβολα γὰρ πατρικὸς νόος ἔσπειρε ταῖς ψυχαῖς. 
 The paternal mind has sowed symbols in the souls. 
 Z. Psell. 26—Plet. 6. 
 
 LXXXI. Ψυχαῖον omSjpa δυσὶ κράσαι ὁμονοίαις 
 NG καὶ πνεύματι δείῳ, ἐφ᾽ οἷς τρίτον ὡγνὸν ἔρωτα, 
 Συνδετικὸν πάντων ἐπιβήτορα σεμνὸν ἔϑϑηκεν. 
 Having mingled the vital spark from two according substances, 
 Mind and Divine Spirit, as a third to these he added 
 Holy Love, the venerable charioteer uniting all things. 
 Lyd. de Men. 3.—Tay. 
 
 LXXXU. Τὴν ψυχὴν ἀναπλήσας ἔρωτι βαθεῖ. 
 Filling the soul with profound love. 
 7. ὍΥ Avs Proc. in Pl, Theol. 4. 
 
 LXXXIIL. Ψυχὴ ἢ μερόπων θεὸν ἄγξει πῶς εἰς ἑαυτήν. 
 Οὐδὲν Sunray ἔχουσα ὅλη Veobey μεμέθευσται. 
 “Αρμονίαν αὐχεῖ γάρ, ὑφ᾽ 7 πέλε σῶμα βρότειον. 
 The Soul of men will in a manner clasp God to herself. 
 Having nothing mortal she is wholly inebriated from God, 
 For she glories in the harmony under which the mortal body 
 exists. Z. Psell. 17,—Plet. 10. 
 
2 
 oe 
 ~ 
 
 OF ZOROASTER. 
 
 LXXXIV. Αἱ μὲν ἐῤῥωμενέστεραι ψυχαὶ δι’ ἑαυτῶν δεῶνται τὸ dAnrec, 
 καί εἰσιν εὐρετικώτερωι ““ σωζόμεναι Os αὑτῆς ἄλκης᾽ ὡς 
 Ν ‘ 
 φησι τὸ λόγιον. 
 The more powerful souls perceive truth through themselves, and 
 are of a more inventive nature. ‘Such souls are saved through 
 their own strength,” according to the oracle. 
 
 «Ne Proc. in I, Ale.—Tay. 
 
 LXXXV. Td λόγιόν φησι τὰς ψυχὰς ἀναγόμιενας τὸν παιᾶνα ἄδειν. 
 The oracle says, ascending souls sing a pean. 
 Z. or T. Olym. in Phed.—Tay. 
 
 LXXXVI. Ἦ μάλα δὴ κεῖναί ye μακάρταται ἔξοχα πασέων 
 Ψυχάων ποτὶ γαῖαν ἀπ᾽ οὐράνοθεν προχέονται. 
 Κεῖναι δ᾽ ὄλξιαί τε καὶ οὐ para νήματ᾽ ἔχουσαι, 
 Ὅσσαι ἀπ᾽ αἰγλήεντος, ἀναξ, σέθεν, ἠδὲ καὶ αὐτοῦ 
 "Ex Διὸς ἐξεγένοντο, Midou* κρατερῆς ὑπ᾽ ἀνάγκης. 
 Of all souls those certainly are superlatively blessed 
 Which are poured forth from heaven to earth ; 
 And they are happy, and have ineffable stamina, 
 As many as proceed from thy splendid self, O king, 
 Or from Jove himself, under the strong necessity of Mithus. 
 4..or 1. Synes de Insom. 153. 
 LXXXVII. Bi ὅτι σῶμα λιπόντων ψυχαὶ καθαρώταται. 
 The souls of those who quit the body violently are most pure. 
 Z. Psel, 87. 
 
 LXXXVIII. Ψυχῆς ἐξωστῆρες ἀνάπνοοι, εὔλυτοι εἰσί. 
 The ungirders of the soul, which give her breathing, are easy to 
 
 be loosed. 
 
 Z. Psel. 32.—Plet. 8. 
 
 
 
 LXXXIX. Kay yap τήνδε ψυχὴν tons ἀποκαταστάσαν, 
 ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἄλλην ἐνίησι πατὴρ, ἐναρίθμιον εἶναι. 
 For tho’ you see this soul manumitted 
 The Father sends another, that the number may be complete. 
 Z. or T. 
 * μίτου Fr. Pat. 
 
258 THE CHALDMAN ORACLES 
 
 XC. - oe + 0 « Νοήσασαι τὰ ἔργα τοῦ πατρὸς 
 Μοίρης εἱμαρμένης τὸ πτερὸν φεύγουσιν ἀναιδὲς" 
 Ἔν δὲ δεῷ κεῖνται πυρσοὺς ἕλκουσαι ὠκμιαίους, 
 Ἔκ πατρόθεν κατιόντες ἀφ᾽ ὧν ψυχὴ κατιόντων 
 Ἐμπυρίων δρέπεται καρτσῶν, ψυχότροφον ἄνθος. 
 . . . « . Understanding the works of the Father 
 They avoid the shameless wing of fate ; 
 They are placed in God, drawing strong torches, 
 Descending from the Father, from which, as they descend, the 
 soul 
 
 Gathers of the empyreal fruits the soul-nourishing flower. 
 
 LABS es Proc in Tim. 321. 
 KO, To ye tor πνεῦμα τοῦτο τὸ ψυχικὸν, 6 καὶ πνευματικὴν 
 
 ψυχὴν προσηγόρευσαν οἱ εὐδαίμονες, καὶ θεὸς καὶ δαίμων 
 Ν Ἂ Wy 4 Ν \ / > 'f 
 παντοδαπὸς, καὶ εἴδωλον γίνεται, καὶ Tas ποίνας ἐν τούτῳ 
 ,ὔ 4 Led st κ᾿ > "2 \ . - ~ 
 τίνει ψυχή. Χρῆσμοί τε yap ὀμοφώνουσι περὶ αὐτοῦ, ταῖς 
 3) ,ὔ Ν Sn ane ‘ -Ὁ “ ΄ 
 ὄναρ φαντασίαις τὴν ἐκεῖ διεξαγωγὴν τῆς ψυχῆς προσεικά- 
 ζοντες. Ξ 
 This animastic spirit, which blessed men have called the pneu- 
 matic soul, becomes a god, an all-various damon, and an image, 
 and the scul in this suffers her punishments. The oracles, too, 
 accord with this account: for they assimilate the employment of 
 the soul in Hades to the delusive visions of a dream. 
 
 ZiOr ein Synes. de Insom. p. 159.—Tay. 
 
 KCI. Αλλην κατ᾽ ἄλλην ζωὴν, amd μεριζωμένων ὀχετῶν. 
 ἴλνωθεν διήκοντος ἐπὶ τὸ κατ᾽ ἄντικρυ 
 Asa τοῦ κέντρου τῆς γῆς, καὶ Ἐ πέμπτον μέσον, ἄλλον 
 Πυριόχον, ἔνθα κάτεισι μέχρι ὑλαίων ὀχετῶν 
 Ζωηφόρον πῦρ. 
 One life with another, from the distributed channels. 
 Passing from above through the opposite part 
 Through the centre of the earth; and the fifth the middle, 
 
 * Taylor gives only these two last lines from Proc. in Tim. 172. 
 
OF ZOROASTER. 259 
 
 Another fiery channel, where the life-beaming fire descends 
 
 As far as the material channels. 
 
 wor LC. 
 
 XCII. ἄΖωῆς τὸ ὑγρὸν σύμβολον" διὸ καὶ τότε μὲν λιβάδα καλοῦσιν 
 αὐτὴν τῆς ὁλῆς ζωογονίας, τότε δὲ πηγήν τινα, καὶ Πλάτων 
 καὶ πρὸ Πλάτωνος οἱ δεοί, 
 Moisture is a symbol of life; hence Plato, and the gods before 
 Plato, call it (the soul); at one time the liquid of the whole of 
 vivification, and at another time a certain fountain of it. 
 Z. Proc. in Tim. 318.—Tay. 
 
 XCIv. *0 τολμηρᾶς ἐκ Ἐ φύσεως, ἄνθρωπε, τέχνασμα. 
 O man, of a daring nature, thou subtile production. 
 
 Z. Ἰταλὸς Plets. 91. 
 XCV. Σὸν yap ὠγγεῖον Tipes χθονὸς οἰκήσουσι. 
 For thy vessel the beasts of the earth shall inhabit. 
 
 yA Psel. 36.—Plet. 7: 
 
 xevi. Cum anima currat semper, certo temporis spatio 
 transit omnia, quibus peractis, cogitur recurrere 
 paulatim per omnia denuo, atque eandem in mundo 
 telam generationis retexere, ut placuit Zoroastri, 
 qui iisdem aliquando causis omnino redeuntibus, 
 eosdem similiter effectud reverti putat. 
 Since the soul perpetually runs and passes through all things 
 in a certain space of time, which being performed, it is presently 
 compelled to run back again through all things and unfold the 
 same web of generation in the world, according to Zoroaster, who 
 thinks that as often as the same causes return, the same effects 
 
 will in like manner be returned. 
 
 Va Ficin de Im. An, 129.—Tay. 
 
 xcvu. Voluit Zoroaster zthereum anime indumentum in 
 
 nobis assidue volvi. 
 
 * τολμηρότατης Psel.—Fr. Patr. 
 
260 THE CHALDEAN ORACLES 
 
 According to Zoroaster, in us the ethereal vestment of the soul 
 perpetually revolves. 
 
 Tee Fiecin de Im. An. 131.—Tay. 
 
 xcevill. Qui autem a Deo traditi sermones fontem per se 
 laudant omnis anime empyreas, id est empyrealis, 
 ztherealis, materialis: et hune sejungunt ex tota 
 Zoogonothea, a qua et totum fatum suspendentes 
 duas faciunt σειρὰς, id est ordines, hance quidem ani- 
 malem, hance autem ut diximus μοιραῖαν, id est sortia- 
 lem, fatalem. Et animam ex altera trahentes, quan- 
 doque autem fato servire, quando irrationalis facta, 
 dominum permutaverit. pro providentia fatum. 
 The oracles delivered by the gods celebrate the essential foun- 
 tain of every soul, the empyrean, the etherial, and the material. 
 This fountain they separate from the whole vivific goddess*; 
 from whom also suspending the whole of fate, they make two 
 series, the one animastic, or belonging to the soul, and the other 
 belonging to Fate. They assert that the soul is derived from the 
 animastic series, but that sometimes it becomes subservient to 
 Fate, when passing into an irrational condition of being, it becomes 
 subject to fate instead of Providence. 
 
 Z. ox VL: Proc. de Prov. ap. Fabr. VIII. 486.— Tay. 
 
 
 
 MATTER. 
 MATTER, THE WORLD, AND NATURE. 
 
 ΧΟΙΧ. Μήτρα συνέχουσα τὰ πάντα. 
 The matrix containing all things. 
 
 ΤΙ 
 
 Gs “Ολοφυὴς μερισμός καὶ ἀμέριστος. 
 Wholly division, and indivisible. 
 
 * Rhea. Tay. 
 
OF ZOROASTER. 261 
 
 cl. "EvOey ἀρδὴν ϑρώσκει γένεσις πολυποικίλου ὕλης. 
 Thence abundantly springs forth the generation of multifarious 
 matter. 
 T. Proc. in Tim. 118. 
 
 cll. Οἱ δὲ τὰ ἄτομα, καὶ αἰσθητὰ δημιουργοῦσι, 
 Καὶ σωματοειδῆ, καὶ κατατεταγμένα εἰς ὕλην. 
 These frame indivisibles and sensibles, 
 
 And corporiforms and things destined to matter. 
 ἘΣ: Dam. de Prin. 
 
 cll. Νύμφαι πηγαῖαι, καὶ ἐνύδρια πνεύματα πάντα, 
 Καὶ χθόνιοι κόλποι τε καὶ ἠέριοι καὶ ὕπαυγοι; 
 Μηναῖοι πάσης ἐπιβήτορες ἠδ᾽ ἐπίβηται 
 Ὕλης οὐρανίας τε καὶ ἀστερίας, καὶ ἀβύσσων. 
 The fontal nymphs, and all the aquatic spirits, 
 And the terrestrial, aerial, and glittering recesses, 
 Are the lunar riders and rulers of all matter, 
 Of the celestial, the starry, and that which lies in the abysses. 
 Lyd. p. 32.— Tay. 
 
 οἷν. Τὸ καχὸν ἀμενηνότερον τοῦ μὴ ὄντος ἐστὶν, κατὰ τὸ λόγιον. 
 Evil, according to the oracle, is more frail than nonentity. 
 Z. or T. Proc. de Prov.—Tay. 
 
 cy. "Ene: warncoueda, διὰ πάντος τοῦ χόσμου τὴν ὕλην διήκειν, 
 “ Ν «< , 
 ὥσπερ καὶ οἱ Seok φασιν. 
 We learn that matter pervades the whole- world, as the gods 
 also assert. 
 Z. or T. Proc. Tim. 142. 
 
 ΟΥΙ. ᾿Ασωμάτα μὲν ἐστὶ τὰ Sela πάντα. 
 , > ~ “ 
 Σώματα δ᾽ ἐν αὐτοῖς ὑμῶν ἕνεκεν ἐνδέδεται. 
 Ν ~ ~ 
 Μὴ dwapévas* κατασχεῖν ἀσωμάτους τῶν σωμάτων, 
 
 \ he 
 Διὰ τὴν σωματικὴν εἰς ἣν ἐνεχεντρίσθητε, φύσιν. 
 
 * Avuyauévous Fr. Patr. 
 
262 THE CHALDEAN ORACLES 
 
 All divine natures are incorporeal, 
 
 But bodies are bound in them for your sakes. 
 
 Bodies not being able to contain incorporeals 
 
 By reason of the corporeal nature, in which you are concentrated. 
 
 Ζ. οὐ Τ. Proc. in Pl. Polit. 359. 
 
 cvil. "Epya νοήσας γὰρ πατρικὸς νόος αὐτογένεθλος, 
 Πᾶσιν ἐνέσπειρε δεσμὸν πυριξριθὴ ἔρωτος; 
 Ὄφρα τὰ πάντα μένῃ, χρόνον εἰς ἀπέραντον ἐρῶντα. 
 Μένῃ πάσῃ ἢ τὰ πατρὸς νοερῶς ὑφασμένα φέγγει; 
 Ὡς ἐν ἔρωτι μένῃ κόσμου στοιχεῖα δέοντα yt. 
 For the paternal self-begotten mind understanding his works 
 Sowed in all the fiery bond of love, 
 That all things might continue loving for an infinite time. 
 That the connected series of things might intellectually remain 
 im all the light of the Father, 
 That the elements of the world might continue their course in love. 
 ἜΣ _ Proc. in Tim. 155. 
 
 CVIN. Ὁ ποιητὴς ὃς αὐτουργὼῶν τεχτήνατο τὸν κόσμον. 
 Καὶ τὶς πυρὸς ὕγκος ἔην ἕτερος τὰ δὲ πάντα 
 Αὐτουργῶν, ἵνα σῶμα τὸ κοσμικὸν ἐκτολυπευθῇ. 
 Κόσμος ἵν᾽ ἔκδηλος, καὶ μὴ φαίνηται ὑμενώδης. 
 The Maker who, self-operating, framed the world, 
 And there was another mass of fire: all these things 
 He produced self-operating, that the body of the world might 
 be conglobed, 
 That the world might be manifest, and not appear membranous. 
 Z. or T. Proc. in Tim. 154. 
 
 CIX. ᾿Αφομοιοὶ γὰρ ἑαυτὸν, ἐκεῖνος ἐπιγόμενος 
 Τὸν τύπον περιξαλλέσθαι τῶν εἰδώλων. 
 
 For he assimilates himself, professing 
 
 To cast around him the form of the images. 
 
 * T, — Mare πᾶσι Fr. Patr. ¢ μένοντα Fr. Patr. 
 
OF ZOROASTER. 263 
 
 cx. Nod γὰρ μίμημα πέλει" τὸ δὲ τεχθὲν ἔχει τί σώματος. 
 For it is an imitation of Mind, but that which is fabricated has 
 something of body. 
 
 ΠΕ Τ. Proc. in Tim. 87. 
 
 ΟΧΙ. "Αλλά δ᾽ Ἐ οὔνομα σεμνὸν ἀκοιμήτῳ στροφάλιγγι 
 Κόσμοις ἐνθρώσκων, κραιπνὴν Ὁ διὰ πατρὸς ἐνιπήν. 
 But projecting into the worlds, through the rapid menace of the 
 Father, 
 The venerable name with a sleepless revolution. 
 ΕἾ: Proc. in Crat. 
 
 cXIl. ᾿Απλῶς δ᾽ ody of τῶν στοιχείων abidépes ἐκεῖ. 
 The ethers of the elements therefore are there. 
 Zi or T. Olymp. in Phed.—Tay. 
 
 CX. Τοὺς τύπους τῶν χαρακτήρων, καὶ τῶν ἄλλων Velov φασμάτων 
 ἐν τῷ αἰδέρι paiverdas, τὰ λόγια λέγουσιν. 
 The oracles assert, that the impression of characters, and of 
 other divine visions, appear in the ether. 
 Z. or. T. Simp. in Phys. 144.—Tay. 
 
 cxiv. Ἐν τούτῳ γὰρ τὰ ἀτύπωτα τυποῦσθαι. 
 In this the things without figure are figured. 
 mor. Simp. in Phys. 148. 
 
 CXV. Τ᾽ ἄῤῥητα, καὶ τὰ ῥητὰ συνθήματα τοῦ κόσμου. 
 
 The ineffable and effable impressions of the world. 
 
 CXVI. Kal ὁ μισοφανὴς κόσμος, καὶ τὰ σκολιὰ ῥεῖθρα 
 
 ὙΦ᾽ ὧν πολλοὶ κατασύρονται nA 
 And the light-hating world, and the winding currents 
 Under which many are drawn down. 
 
 Z. or T. Proc. in Tim. 339. 
 
 * sor Tay. + κρεπνὴν Fr. Ρ. 
 
 { κατασείροντα: Fr. Patr. 
 
264 THE CHALDEAN ORACLES 
 
 CXVII. Τὸν ὅλον κόσμον ἐκ πυρὸς, καὶ ὕδατος, καὶ γῆς, 
 Καὶ παντοτρόφου αἴθρης ποιεῖ. 
 He makes the whole world of fire, and water, and earth, 
 And all-nourishing ether. 
 tes oye De 
 
 ΟΧΥ͂ΠΙ. Γῆν δ᾽ ἐν μέσῳ τιθεὶς, ὕδωρ δ᾽ ἐν γαῖας κόλποις, 
 "Hepa δ᾽ ἄνωθεν τούτων. 
 Placing earth in the middle, but water in the cavities of the earth, 
 And air above these. 
 Z. or T. 
 
 CXIX. Πῆξε δὲ καὶ πολὺν ὕμιλον ἀστέρων ἀπλανῶν. 
 Μὴ τάσει ἐπιπόνῳ πονηρᾷ 
 Πήξῃ δὲ πλάνην od ἐχούσῃ φέρεσθαι. 
 Τὸ πῦρ πρὸς τὸ πῦρ ἀναγκάσας. 
 He fixed a great multitude of inerratic stars, 
 Not by a laborious and evil tension, 
 But with a stability void of wandering, 
 Forcing the fire to the fire. 
 Ζ: ore Ihe Proc. in Tim, 280. 
 
 CXX. Ἑπτὰ γὰρ ἐξώγκωσε πατὴρ στερεώμωτα κόσμων" 
 Τὸν οὐρανὸν κυρτῷ σχήματι περικλεῖσας. 
 For the Father congregated the seven firmaments of the world, 
 Circumscribing the heaven with a convex figure. 
 7. ΟἹ Le Dam. in Parm. 
 
 CXXI. Zdwy nab πλανωμένων ὑφέστηκεν ἑπτάδα. 
 He constituted a septenary of erratic animals. 
 7, ΟΣ ἘΣ 
 
 ΟΧΧΙΙ. Τὸ ἀτάκτον αὐτῶν εὐτάκτοις ἀνακρέμασας ζώναις. 
 Suspending their disorder in well-disposed zones. 
 Vhatoye Ihe 
 
OF ZOROASTER. 265 
 
 ΟΧΧΠΙ, “EE αὐτοὺς ὑπέστησεν, ἕξδομον ἠελιόν 
 Μεσεμξολήσας πῦρ. 
 He made them six in number, and for the seventh 
 
 He cast into the midst the fire of the sun. 
 ΣΤ. Proc. in Tim. 280. 
 
 CXXIV. Kétpoy ἀφ᾽ οὗ πάσα; ἢ μεχρὶς ἂν τυχὸν ἴσαι ἔασι. 
 The centre from which all (lines) which way so ever are equal. 
 Z. or T. Proce. in Euc. 43. 
 
 CXKV. Καὶ ταχὺς ἠέλιος περὶ κέντρον, ὅπως ἐθὰς, ἔλθη. 
 And that the swift sun may come as usual about the centre. 
 me or I. Proc. in Plat. Th. 317. 
 
 CXXVI. Κέντρῳ ἐπισπέρχων ἑαυτὸν φωτὸς κελαδόντος. 
 Eagerly urging itself towards the centre of resounding light. 
 ie Proc. in Tim, 236. 
 
 CXXVI. ᾿Ἠέλιον τε μέγαν, καὶ λαμπρὰν σελήνην. 
 And the great sun and the bright moon. 
 
 CXXVII. Χαίται γὰρ ἐς ὀξὺ πεφυκότι φωτὶ βλέπονται. 
 For his hairs appear like rays of light ending in a sharp point. 
 ΗΝ Proc. in Pl. Pol. 387. 
 
 CXXIX. Ἡλιάκων τε κύκλων, καὶ μηναίων καναχισμιῶν. 
 ΚΚολιπῶν τε ἠερίων. 
 ΑἸἰθρὴς μέλος ἢ ἡελίου τε, καὶ μήνης ὀχετῶν, ἤ τε ἠέρος. 
 And of the solar circles, and of the lunar clashings, 
 And of the aerial recesses, 
 The melody of the ether, and of the sun, and of the passages of 
 the moon, and of the air. 
 Z. or T. Proc. in Tim. 257. 
 
 ~ ὔ - 
 CXXX. Of ye μυστικώτατοι τῶν λόγων, καὶ τὴν ὁλότητα αὐτοῦ τὴν 
 
 * Tay. substitutes καὶ πρὸς 6. t mepos Tay. 
 MM 
 
266 THE CHALDEAN ORACLES 
 
 ἐν τοῖς ὑπερχκοσμιοῖς παραδεδώκασιν. exer γὰρ ὁ ἡλιαχὸς χόσ- 
 μος καὶ τὸ ὅλον φῶς, ὡς αἵ τε Χαλδαίων φήμιαι λέγουσι. 
 The most mystic of discourses inform us, that the wholeness of 
 him (the sun) is in the supermundane orders: for there a solar 
 world and a total light subsist, as the oracles of the Chaldeans 
 affirm. 
 Z. or T. Proc, in Tim. 264.—Tay. 
 
 CXXXI. ‘O ἀληδέστερος ἥλιος συμμέτρει τῷ χρόνῳ τὰ πάντα, χρόνου 
 χρόνος ὧν ἀτέχνως, κατὰ τὴν περὶ αὐτοῦ τῶν δεῶν ὀμφήν. 
 The more true sun measures all things by time, being truly ἃ 
 time of time, according to the oracle of the gods concerning it. 
 Z. or T. Proc. in Tim. 249.—Tay. 
 
 CXXXII. Ὁ δίσκος ἐπὶ τῆς ἀνάστρου φέρεται, πολὺ τῆς ἀπλανοῦς 
 ὑψηλότερας. καὶ οὕτω δὲ τῶν μὲν πλανωμένων οὐκ ἔξει τὸ 
 μέσον, τριῶν δὲ τῶν κόσμων κατὰ τὰς τελεστικὰς ὑποσέσεις. 
 
 The disk (of the sun) is carried in the starless much above the 
 
 inerratic sphere : and hence he is not in the middle of the planets 
 
 but of the three worlds, according to the telestic hypotheses. 
 Bor TU: Jul. Orat. V. 334,—Tay. 
 
 CXXXIII. Πῦρ πυρὸς ἐξοχέτευμα, 
 Καὶ πυρὸς ταμίας. 
 
 (The sun is a)* fire, the channel of fire, and the dispenser of fire. 
 
 7. or L. Proc. in Tim. 14). 
 > 
 CXXXIV. }"Evba ἹΚρόνος. 
 Ἠέλιος πάρεδρος ἐπισχοπέων πόλον ὥγνον. Ped 
 Hence Cronus. : # 
 
 The sun assessor beholding the pure pole. 
 
 CXXXV. Αἴθεριός τε δρόμος καὶ μήνης ἄπλετος ὁρμὴ» 
 
 ἬἨἨέριοί τε ῥοαὶ. 
 
 * Tay. inserts. + Taylor omits this and the two following. 
 
OF ZOROASTER. 267 
 
 The ethereal course and the vast motion of the moon 
 And the aerial fluxes. 
 Zz or T. Proc. in Tim. 257. 
 
 CXXXVI. Αἰθὴρ, ἥλιε, πνεῦμα σελήνης, ἀέρος ἄγοι. 
 Oh ether, sun, spirit of the moon, leaders of the air. 
 sor 1. Proc. in Tim. 257. 
 
 cxxxvul. Καὶ πλατὺς ἀὴρ» μηναῖός τε δρόμος» καὶ πολὺς ἠελίοιο. 
 And the wide air, and the lunar course, and the pole of the sun. 
 “ἢ ΟΣ. Proc. in Tim. 257. 
 
 CXXXVIN. Τίκτει γὰρ ἡ Sex ἠέλιόν τε μέγαν καὶ λαμπρὰν σελήνην. 
 For the goddess brings forth the great sun and the bright moon. 
 
 CXXXIX. Συλλέγει αὐτὸ, Aaulavovea αἰθρῆς μέλος Ἐ, 
 ᾽ , 4 xa 2/ Z 
 Ἠελίου τε, σελήνης τε, καὶ ὅσα ἤέρι συνέχονται. 
 
 She collects it, receiving the melody of the ether, 
 
 And of the sun, and of the moon, and of whatsoever things are 
 contained in the air. 
 
 CXL. ἤΑλρχει δ᾽ αὖ φύσις ἀκαμάτη κόσμων τε καὶ ἔργων" 
 Οὐρανὸς ὄφρα Séer δρόμον ἀΐδιον κατασύρων. 
 
 Καὶ ὅπως ἄν αἱ ἄλλαι περίοδοι πληρῶνται ἡλίου, σελήνης, ὥρων, 
 
 γυχτὸς, ἡμέρας. 
 Unwearied nature rules over the worlds and works, 
 That heaven drawing downward might run an eternal course, 
 And that the other periods of the sun, moon, seasons, night, and 
 
 day, might be accomplished. 
 Z. or. Th Proc. in Tim. 4. & 323.—Tay. 
 
 CXLI. Νώτοις δ᾽ ἀμφὶ θεᾶς φύσις ἄπλετος ἠώρηται. 
 
 Immense nature is exalted about the shoulders of the goddess. 
 ie Proc. in Tim. 4. 
 
 * uspos Tay. 
 
268 THE CHALDMAN ORACLES 
 
 CXLII. Τῶν Βαβυλωνίων οἱ δοκιμώτατοι, καὶ ᾿Οστάνης, καὶ Ζω- 
 
 ροάστρης, ἀγέλας κυριῶς καλοῦσι τὰς ἀστρικὰς σφαίρας. 
 
 Ἤτοι παρ᾽ ὅσον τελείως ἄγονται περὶ τὸ κέντρον μόναι παρὰ 
 
 \ " ΔῈ τ A eal aN ~ , ~ \ ΄, 
 
 τὼ σωματιχὰ μεγέθη" ἢ ἀπὸ τοῦ σύνδεσμοι πῶς καὶ συνά- 
 
 yoyas χρηματίζειν δογματίζετθαι nap αὐτῶν τῶν φυσικῶν 
 
 λόγων, ὥς ἀγέους κατὰ τὰ αὐτὰ καλοῦσιν ἐν τοῖς ἱεροῖς 
 
 λόγοις" κατὰ παρέμπτωσιν δὲ τοῦ γάμμα, ἀγγέλους. Διὸ 
 
 καὶ τοὺς καθ᾽ ἑκαστὴν τούτων ἀγέλων ἐξάρχοντας ἄστερας, 
 
 Ν / ε 7 > I Ν > hs 
 καὶ δαίμονας. ὁμοίους ἀγγέλους, καὶ ἀρχαγγέλους προσα- 
 , «“ a ὧν ε ‘ x > / 
 
 γορεύεσθαι; οἵπερ, εἰσὶν ἑπτὰ τὸν ἀριθμόν. 
 The most celebrated of the Babylonians, together with Ostanes 
 and Zoroaster, very properly call the starry spheres herds; 
 whether because these alone among corporeal magnitudes, are 
 perfectly carried about a centre, or in conformity to the oracles, 
 because they are considered by them as in a certain respect the 
 bonds and collectors of physical reasons, which they likewise 
 call in their sacred discourses herds, and by the insertion of a 
 gamma, angels. Wherefore the stars which preside over each of 
 these herds are considered demons similar to the angels, and are 
 called archangels: and they are seven in number. 
 
 Z. Anon. in Theologumenis Arithmeticis.— Tay. 
 
 cxtu. Congruitates materialium formarum ad rationes 
 anime mundi, Zoroaster divinas illices appellavit. 
 Zoroaster calls the congruities of material forms to the reasons of 
 the soul of the world, divine allurements. 
 Z. Fic. de vit cael. comp. 519.—Tay. 
 
 MAGICAL AND PHILOSOPHICAL PRECEPTS. 
 
 CXLIV. Μὴ τὰ πελώρια μέτρα yalns ὑπὸ σὴν φρένα βάλλου 
 Οὐ γὰρ ἀληθείης φυτὸν ἐνὶ χθονὶ. 
 Μῆτε μέτρει μέτρα ἡλιόυ κανόνας συναθροίσας 
 ᾿Αἰδίῳ βουλῇ φέρεται πατρὸς οὐχ, ἕνεκεν σοῦ. 
 
 Μήνης ῥοῖζον ἔασον ἀεὶ τρέχει ἔργῳ ἀνάγκης. 
 
OF ZOROASTER. 269 
 
 ᾿Αστέριον προπόρευμα, σέθεν χάριν οὐκ ἐλοχεύθη. 
 Αἴθριος ὀρνίθων ταρσὸς πλατὺς οὐ ποτ᾽ ὠληθὴς» 
 Οὐ ϑυσίων σπλάγχνων τε, tonal τάδ᾽ ἀθύρματα πάντα, 
 ᾿Ἐμπορικῆς ἀπάτης στηρίγματα" φεῦγε σὺ ταῦτα 
 Μέλλων εὐσεξίης ἱερὸν παράδεισον ἀνοίγειν. 
 “EO ἀρετὴ, σοφία τε, καὶ εὐνόμια συνάγονται. 
 
 Direct not thy mind to the vast measures of the earth ; 
 
 For the plant of truth is not upon ground. 
 
 Nor measure the measures of the sun, collecting rules, 
 
 For he is carried by the eternal will of the father, not for your 
 sake. 
 
 Dismiss the impetuous course of the moon; for she runs always 
 by the work of necessity. 
 
 The progression of the stars was not generated for your sake. 
 
 The wide aerial flight of birds is not true, 
 
 Nor the dissections of the entrails of victims: they are all mere 
 toys, 
 
 The basis of mercenary fraud: flee from these 
 
 If you would open the sacred paradise of piety 
 
 Where virtue, wisdom, and equity, are assembled. 
 Z. Psel, 4. 
 
 CXLV. Mire κάτω νεύσεις εἰς τὸν μελαναυγέα κύσμον, 
 Ὧ βυθὸς αἰὲν ἄπιστος ὑπέστρωταί τε καὶ “Αδης 
 ᾿Αμφικνεφὴς ῥυπόων, εἰδωλοχαρὴς, ὠνόητος, 
 Κρημνώδης, σκολιὸς, πωρὸν βάθος, αἰὲν ἐλίσσων, 
 "Ach νυμφεύων ἀφανὲς δέμας, ἄργον ἄπνευμον. 
 Stoop not down to the darkly-splendid world ; 
 Tn which continually lies a faithless depth, and Hades 
 Cloudy, squalid, delighting in images unintelligible, 
 Precipitous, winding, a blind profundity always rolling, 
 Always espousing an opacous, idle, breathless body. 
 Z. or T. Synes de Insom. 140, 
 
 CXLVI. Μήτε κάτω νεύσεις, κρημνὸς κατὰ γῆς ὑπόκειται. 
 Ἕπταπόρου σύρων κατὰ βαθμίδος" ἣν ὑπὸ δεινῆς 
 
 ᾿Ανάγκης Spaves ἐστί. 
 
270 THE CHALDEAN ORACLES 
 
 Stoop not down, for a precipice lies below the earth, 
 Drawing under a descent of seven steps, beneath which 
 Is the throne of dire necessity. 
 
 -Z. Psel. 6.—FPlet. 2. 
 
 
 
 CXLVIL. Μῆτεΐ τὺ 7 τῆς ὕλης oxdbaroy κρημνῷ καταλείψεις 
 Ἐστὶ καὶ { εἰδώλῳ μέρις εἰς τόπον ἀμφιφαόντα. 
 Leave not the dross of matter on a precipice, 
 For there is a portion for the image in a place ever splendid. 
 
 Z. Psel, 1. 2.—Plet, 14.—Syn. 140. 
 
 CXLVIU. My φύσεως καλέσῃς αὐτόπτρον ἄγαλμα. 
 Invoke not the self-conspicuous image of nature. 
 Ζ. Psel. 15.—Plet. 23. 
 
 CXLIX. Μὴ φύσιν ἐμδλέψεις, εἱμαρμένον οὔνομια τῆσδε. 
 Look not upon nature, for her name is fatal. 
 7 he Proc. in Plat. Th. 143. 
 
 cL. Οὐ γὰρ χρὴ κείνους σε βλέπειν πρὶν τῶμαᾳ τελεσθῇ" 
 
 Ὅτε τὰς ψυχὰς δέλγοντες ἀεὶ τῶν τελετῶν ἀπάγουσι. 
 It becomes you not to behold them before your body is initiated, 
 Since by always alluring, they seduce the souls of the initiated. 
 
 
 
 wor 1. Proc. in I. Alcib. 
 CLI. My ἐξάξης, ἵνα μὴ ἐξιοῦσα ἐχή The 
 Bring her || not forth, lest in departing she retain something. 
 Z. Psel. 3.—Plet. 15. 
 cLu. Μὴ πνεῦμα pmorvyng μῆτε βαθύνῃς τὸ ἐπίπεδον. 
 Defile not the spirit, nor deepen ἃ superficies. 
 Vie Psel. 19.—-Plet. 13. 
 
 * Synes. unites the two, and subjoins ἔχει γάρ τινα ev αὐτῷ μεριδα. For it has 
 a portion in it. 
 + Οὐ τῷ Syn. Ἧ ᾿Αλλὰ καὶ Syn. § φύσεως Fr. Pat. 
 || The soul.—Tay. 
 
OF ZOROASTER. 271 
 
 CLIT. My od aikave τὴν ciuapueryy. 
 
 Enlarge not thy destiny. 
 Z. Psel. 37.—Plet. 4. 
 
 “CLIV. Οὐδὲ ὑπερβάϑμιον πόδα ῥίπτων, κατὰ τὸ λόγιον εἰς τὴν δεοσεβείαν. 
 Not hurling, according to the oracle, a transcendent foot towards 
 
 piety. 
 Z. or T. Dam. in vit. Isidori ap. Suid.— Tay. 
 
 CLY. Ὀνόματα βάρξαρα μηποτ᾽ ἀλλάξης, 
 Fee x ae 2 eve , 
 Εἰσὶ γὰρ ὀνόματα παρ ἑκάστοις δεύσδοτα 
 Δύναμιν ἐν τελεταὶς ἄῤῥητον ἔχοντα. 
 Never change barbarous names, 
 For there are names in every nation given from God, 
 Having unspeakable efficacy in the mysteries. 
 Z. or T. Psel. 7.—Niceph. 
 
 ctyv1. Nec exeas cum transeat lictor. 
 Go not out when the lictor passes by. 
 Z. Pic. Conel.—Tay. 
 
 CLV. Ἐλπὶς τρεφέτω σε πυρίοχος ἀγγελικῷ ἐνὶ χώρῳ. 
 Let fiery hope nourish you in the angelic region. 
 Z. or T. Olym. in Phed.—Proc. in Alcib. 
 
 cLym. ‘H πυριθαλπὴς ἔννοια τπρωτίστην ἔχει τάξιν. 
 Τῷ πυρὶ γὰρ βροτὸς ἐμπελάσας θέοθεν pans ἔξει. 
 Δηθύνοντι γὰρ βροτῷ κραιπνοὶ κάκαρες τελέθουσι. 
 The fire-glowing conception has the first rank, 
 For the mortal who appreaches the fire shall have light from God, 
 For to the persevering mortal, the blessed immortals are swift. 
 Z. or T. Proc. in Tim. 65. 
 
 CLIX. Παρακελεύονται of δεοὶ 
 Νοεῖν μορφὴν patos προτέϑεισαν. 
 
272 THE CHALDEAN ORACLES 
 
 The Gods exhort us 
 To understand the preceding form of light. 
 “. or T. Proc. in Crat.—Tay. 
 
 Clk. Χρὴ σε σπεύδειν apo τὸ φάος καὶ πατρὸς αὐγὰς, 
 
 Ἔνθεν ἐπέμφθη σοι ψυχὴ, πολὺν ἑσσαμένη νοῦν. 
 It becomes you to hasten to the light and the rays of the Father, 
 From whence was sent to you a soul endued with much mind. 
 
 Z. Psel;.33.—Plez. Ὁ: 
 
 CLXI. Ζήτησον παραδείσον. 
 
 Seek paradise. 
 Z. Psel. 20.—Plet. 12. 
 
 CLXI. Μάνθανε τὸ νοητὸν, ἐπεὶ νόου ἔξω ὑπάρχει. 
 Learn the Intelligible, for it subsists beyond the mind. 
 Z. Psel. 41.—Plet. 27. 
 
 CLXIM. “Eats γὰρ τὶ νοητὸν, ὁ χρὴ σὲ νοεῖν νόου ἄνθει. 
 There is a certain Intelligible which it becomes you to understand 
 with the flower of Mind. 
 Z. Psel. 31.—Plet. 28. 
 
 CLXIV. ᾿Αλλ᾽ οὐκ εἰσδέχεται κείνης τὸ ϑέλειν πατρικὸς vets, 
 Μέχρις ἂν ἐξέλθῃ λήθης, καὶ ῥήμα λαλήσῃ 
 Μνήμην ἐνθεμένη Ἔ πατρικοῦ συνθήματος ὡγνοῦ. 
 But the paternal mind receives not her} will 
 Until she has gone out of oblivion, and pronounce the word, 
 
 Assuming the memory of the pure paternal symbol. 
 Z. Psel. 39.—Plet. 5. 
 
 CLXV. Τοῖς δὲ διδακτὸν ἔδωκε φάους γνώρισμα habecbas* 
 
 Ν δὲ ε 4 he ST 7 CR αν 
 Τοὺς ε νπνωοντᾶς ENS ενεκάβπισεν ἄλπμῆς. 
 
 * εἰσϑεμένη Fr. Pat. t+ The soul.—Tay. 
 

 
 OF ZOROASTER. 273 
 
 To these he gave the ability of receiving the knowledge of light; 
 Those that were asleep he made fruitful from his own strength. 
 panor-T'. Syn. de Insom. 135. 
 
 CLXVI. *Od δὴ χρῇ σφοδρότητι νοεῖν τὸ νοητὸν ἐκεῖνο. 
 ᾿Αλλὰ νόου ταναοῦ ταναῇ φλογὶ πάντα μετρούσῃ, 
 Πλὴν τὸ νοητὸν ἐκεῖνο. Χρὴ Ἵ δὴ τοῦτο νοῆσαι" 
 Ἢ γὰρ ἐπεγκλίνῃς σον νοῦν, κᾳκεῖνο νοήσεις 
 Οὐκ ἀτενῶς. t ᾿Αλλ ὡγνὸν ἐπίστροφον Supa φέροντει; 
 Dis ψυχῆς τεῖναι κενὲον νόον εἰς τὸ νοητὸν» 
 “Ogpa μάθης τὸ νοητὸν" 
 "Enel ἔξω νόου ὑπάρχει. 
 It is not proper to understand that Intelligible with vehemence, 
 But with the extended flame of an extended mind measuring all 
 things 
 Except that Intelligible. But it is requisite to understand this : 
 For if you incline your mind you will understand it 
 Not earnestly, but it becomes you to bring with you a pure and 
 inquiring eye, 
 To extend the void mind of your soul to the Intelligible, 
 That you may learn the Intelligible, 
 Because it subsists beyond mind. 
 ar. ᾿ Dam. 
 
 CLXVII, Ὡς τὶ νοῶν, οὐ κεῖνον νοήσεις. 
 You will not understand it, as when understanding some par- 
 ticular thing. 
 ἡ I Dam. 
 CLXVIM. ΟἹ τὸν ὑπερκόσμον πατρικὸν βυθὸν ἴστε νοοῦντες. 
 You, who understand, know the supermundane paternal depth. 
 Z. or T. Dam. 
 
 * Patr. joins this with the preceding. + χρεὼ Fr. Patr. 
 { ἀκτενῶς Fr. Patr. 
 NN 
 
274: THE CHALDEAN ORACLES 
 
 CLXIX. Οὐ γὰρ ἔστιν ἐφικτὰ τὰ Seta βρότοις τοῖς σῶμα νοοῦσιν, 
 
 Καὶ ὅσοι γύμνητες ἀνὼ σπεύδουσι πρὸς ὕψος. 
 Things divine are not attainable by mortals who understand body, 
 But only as many as are lightly armed arrive at the summit. 
 
 Lor ive Proc. in Crat.—Tay. 
 
 €LXX. Ἕσσαμένου πάντευχον ἀλκὴν φωτὸς κελάδοντος. 
 ᾿Αλχῇ τριγλίχῳ νόον ψυχὴν δ᾽ ὁπλίσαντα 
 Παντοίαδος ἢ σύνθημα βάλλειν φρενὶ" μηδ᾽ ἐπιφοιτᾷν 
 Ἐμπυρίοις σποράδην ὀχετοῖς, ἀλλὰ στιξαρηδόν. 
 Having put on the complete-armed vigour of resounding light. 
 With triple strength fortifying the soul and the mind, 
 He must put into the mind the symbol of variety, and not walk 
 Dispersedly on the empyreal channels, but collectively. 
 
 CLXXI. Kal yap δὲ πάντευχος, ἐνόπλιος, εἶκε ϑέῃφι, 
 For being furnished with every kind of armour, and armed, he is 
 similar to the goddess. 
 
 T. Proc. in Pl, Th. 324,—Tay. 
 
 CLXXU. Δίζεο od ψυχῇς ὀχετὸν, ὅθεν, ἢ τινὶ τάξει 
 Σώματι θητεύσας, Ἵ ἐπὶ τάξιν ἀφ᾽ ἧς ἐῤῥὺς 
 Αὔθις ἀναστήσεις, ἱερῷ λόγῳ ἔργον ἑνώσας. 
 
 Explore the river of the soul, whence, or in what order, 
 
 Having become a servant to body, you may again rise 
 
 To the order from which you descended, joining works to sacred 
 reason. 
 
 Wis Psel. 5.—Plet. 1. 
 
 CLXXI. Πάντοθεν ἀπλάστῳ ψυχὴ πυρὸς ἡνία τεῖνον. 
 Every way to the unfashioned soul extend the reins of fire. 
 Z. Psel. 11.—Plet. 24. 
 
 * παντοῖον Tay. t τιϑύσας Fr. Patr. 
 
cr 
 
 OF ZOROASTER. 27 
 
 CLXXIV. Ἡγείσϑω ψυχῆς βάθος ἄμβροτον, ὕμματα δ᾽ ἄρδην 
 Πάντα ἐκπέτασον ἄνω. 
 
 Let the immortal depth of your soul lead you, 
 
 But earnestly extend your eyes upwards. 
 
 Z. Pset- 1 \.—— Fler. 90. 
 
 
 
 CLXXV. Χρῆ δὲ yaAlvworas ψυχὴν βρότον ὄντα νοητὸν, 
 "Opa μὴ ἐγκύρσῃ χϑονὶ δυσμόρῳ ἀλλὰ σαώϑηῃ. 
 Man, being an intelligible mortal, must bridle his soul, 
 That she may not incur terrestrial infelicity but be saved. 
 Lyd. de Men. 2.—Tay. 
 
 CLXXVI. cece seeeeeee Ἐχτείνας πύρινον νοῦν 
 Ἔργον ἐπ᾽ edoebing, ῥευστὸν καὶ σῶμα σαώσεις. 
 If you extend the fiery mind to the work of piety, 
 You will preserve the fluxible body. 
 Z. Psel. 22.—Plet. 16. 
 
 CLXXVII. ‘H τελεστικὴ ζωὴ διὰ τοῦ θείου πυρὸς ἀφανίζει τὰς ἐκ τῆς 
 γενέσεως ἅπασας κηλίδας, ὡς τὸ λόγιον διδάσκει, καὶ πᾶσαν 
 τὴν ἀλλότριον, ἢν ἐφειλκύσατο τῆς ψυχῆς τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ 
 ἀλογιστὸν φύσιν. 
 The telestic life, through a divine fire, removes all the stains, to- 
 gether with every foreign and irrational nature, which the spirit 
 of the soul attracted from generation, as we are taught by the 
 oracle to believe. 
 Z. or T. Procl. in Tim. 831.—Tay. 
 
 CLXXVIL. Τὰ τῶν Θεῶν λόγιά φασι, ὅτι διὰ τὴς ἀγιστείας ody, ἡ ψυχὴ 
 μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὰ σώματα βοηθείας πολλῆς καὶ σωτηρίας 
 ἀξιοῦνται. Σώζεται γάρ (φησι) καὶ τὸ πικρᾶς ὕλης περί- 
 βλημα βρότειον. οἱ Θεοὶ ὑπεράγνοις παρακελευόμενοι τῶν 
 Θεουργῶν κατεπαγγέλλονται. 
 
 The oracles of the Gods declare, that, through purifying cere- 
 
 monies, not the soul only, but bodies themselves become worthy 
 
 of receiving much assistance and health: “ for (say they) the 
 
276 THE CHALDEAN ORACLES 
 
 mortal vestment of bitter matter will, by this means, be pre- 
 served.” And this, the Gods, in an exhortatory manner, announce 
 to the most holy of Theurgists. 
 
 Z. or T. Jul. Orat. V. p. 334.—Tay. 
 
 CLXXIX. Φευχτέον, κατὰ τὸ λόγιον, 
 Td πλῆδος τῶν ὠνδρώπων τῶν ὠγέληδον ἰόντων. 
 We should flee, according to the oracle, 
 The multitude of men going in a herd. 
 Z. or T. Proc. in 1. Ale.—Tay. 
 
 CLXxx. Qui se cognoscit, in se omnia cognoscit. 
 Who knows himself knows all things in himself. 
 Z. 1 Pic. p. 211.—Tay. 
 
 cuxxx1. Responsa sepe victoriam dant nostris electionibus, 
 et non soli ordini mundalium periodorum: puta 
 quando et dicunt : ‘* Te ipsum videns, verere.” Et 
 iterum: ‘‘ Extra corpus esse te ipsum crede, et 
 es.” Et quid oportet dicere, “ Ubi et egritudines 
 voluntarias pullulare nobis aiunt ex tali vita nostra 
 nascentes.” 
 The oracles often give victory to our own choice, and not to the 
 order alone of the mundane periods. As, for instance, when 
 they say, ‘‘ On beholding yourself, fear.” And, again, “ Believe 
 yourself to be above body, and you are.” And, still further, 
 when they assert “That our voluntary sorrows germinate in us 
 as the growth of the particular life we lead.” 
 
 Z. or T. Proc. de Prov. p. 483.— Tay. 
 
 CLXXXIIl. ᾿Αλλὰ ταῦτα ἐν ἀβάτοις oynots διανοίας ἀνελίττω. 
 
 These things I revolve in the recluse temples of my mind. 
 
 ~ 4 7. > / 
 
 CLXXXIIL. Ὡς γοῦν φησὶ καὶ τὸ λόγιον, οὐδενὸς ἕνεκεν ἄλλου ὠποστρέ- 
 ‘ ΕΣ Ν , > ΄, > \ ε eo 
 
 φεται θεὺς ἄνδρα, καὶ νέας ἐπιπέμπει ἀτραποὺς ὡς ὅταν 
 
 \ * an ‘ / ~ 4 
 ἀτάκτως καὶ πλημμελῶς ἐπὶ τὰ θειύτωτα τῶν θεωρημάτων, 
 
ἐθ 
 ~ 
 ~ 
 
 OF ZOROASTER. 
 
 ἢ τῶν ἔργων, val τὸ λεγόμενον, ἀμνήτοις στόμασιν, ἢ 
 ἀνίπτοις ποσὶ ποιησόμεθα τὴν ἄνοδον. Τῶν γὰρ οὕτω με- 
 τιόντων, ἀτέλεις μέν εἰσι διαβάσεις, χεναὶ δὲ αἱ ὁρμαὶ, 
 τυφλαὶ δὲ αἱ ὠτραποί. 
 As the oracle, therefore, says, “God is never so much turned 
 away from man, and never so much sends him new paths, as 
 when he makes ascent to the most divine of speculations, or 
 works, in a confused or disordered manner, and, as it adds, with 
 unhallowed lips, or unwashed feet. For of those who are thus 
 negligent, the progressions are imperfect, the impulses are vain, 
 and the paths are dark.” 
 mon i Procl. in Parm.—Tay. 
 
 Φ 
 
 CLXXXIV. Οὐδ᾽ ὅτ, πᾶς ἀγαϑὸς Dede εἰδότες ἀταλάεργοι 
 
 Νήψατε. 
 Not knowing that every god is good, you are fruitlessly vigilant. 
 , 4. onT. Proc. in Pl. Pol. 355.—Tay. 
 
 CLXXXV. Οὐ γὰρ ὑφ᾽ εἰμάρτην Ἐ ὠγέλην πίπτουσι Θεουργοί. 
 Theurgists fall not sc as to be ranked among the herd that are 
 in subjection to fate. 
 
 Lyd. de Men.— Tay. 
 
 CLXXXVI, Θεῖος 6 τῆς ἐννεάδος ἀριθμὸς ἐκ τριῶν τριάδων πληρούμενος, καὶ 
 
 τὰς ἀχρότητας τῆς θεολογίας κατὰ τὴν Χαλδαϊκὴν φιλοσο- 
 
 φίαν (ὥς φησιν ὁ Πορφύριος) ὠποσώζων. 
 “That the number nine is divine, receiving its completion from 
 three triads, and preserving the summits of theology according to 
 the Chaldaic philosophy, as Porphyry informs us.” 
 
 Lyd. p. 121.—Tay. 
 
 CLXXXVII. Λαιῆσ᾽ ἐν λάγοσιν Ἑκάτης ἀρετῆς πέλε πηγή" 
 ΝΜ ΄“. ᾽’, Ἀ 4 > —™ 
 Evdoy ὅλη μίμνουσᾳ; τὸ πάρθενον οὐ προϊεῖσα. 
 In the left sides of Hecate is a fountain of virtue, 
 Which remains entire within, not sending forth its virginity. 
 Z. Psel. 15.—Plet. 9. 
 
 * Tay. proposes εἰμαρμένην. 
 
278 THE CHALDHAN ORACLES 
 
 CLXXXVII. Αὐτοὺς Ἐ δὲ χϑὼν κατοδύρεται ἡ ἐς τέκνα μέχρις, 
 And the earth bewails them even to their children. 
 Ti Psel, 2\.—Plet. 3. 
 
 CLXXXIX. Αἱ ποίναι μερόπων ἄγκτειραι. 
 The furies are the constrainers of men. 
 Z. Psel. 25.—Plet. 19. 
 
 ὍΣΟ, Ἵνα μὴ βαπτισδείσα χϑονὸς οἴστροις, καὶ ταῖς τῆς φύσεως 
 ἀνάγκαις (ὡς φησί τις τῶν SeBv) ὠπόληται- 
 
 Lest being baptized in the furies of the earth, and in the ne- 
 
 cessities of nature (as some one of the gods says) it should 
 
 perish. 
 Zi Ὲ ; Proc m Theol. 297.—Tay. 
 cxcl. ἯἩ φύσις πέιθει εἶναι τοὺς δαίμονας ὡγνοὺς 
 
 Καὶ ra κακῆς ὕλης βλαστήματα χρηστὰ, καὶ ἐσθλά, 
 Nature persuades us that there are pure demons, 
 Even the blossoms of evil matter are useful and good. 
 Z. Psel. 16.—Plet. 18. 
 
 CXCII. Adhuc tres dies sacrificatibis, et non ultra. 
 
 As yet three days ye shall sacrifice, and no longer. 
 Z. Pic, Concl.—Tay. 
 
 ΧΟ. Αὐτὸς δ᾽ ἐν πρώτοις ἱερεὺς πυρὸς ἔργα κυβερνῶν, 
 Κύματι ραίνεσϑω παγερῷ Bapunyeost ἅλμης. 
 In the first place, the priest, who governs the works of fire, 
 Must sprinkle with the cold water of the loud-sounding sea. 
 rors Proc. in Crat.—Tay. 
 
 CXCIV. "Evepyer περὶ τὸν “Ἑκατικὸν στρόφαλον. 
 
 Energize about the Hecatic Strophalus. 
 Z. Psel. 9.—Nicep. 
 
 * ’As) τούσδε Psel—A A τοὺς δὲ Tay. 
 } κατωρύεται Psel. Τὰγ.---κατώρικται Fr. Patr. 
 + βαρύκχετος Al.—Bapunyérov Schef_—Bapunyeros Tay. 
 
OF ZOROASTER. 279 
 
 cxcv. Ἡνίκα δ᾽ ἐρχόμενον πρόσγειον δαίμον᾽ ἀδρήσῃς», 
 Ove λίϑον Μνίζουριν ἐπαυδῶν. 
 When you shall see a terrestrial demon approaching 
 Exclaim, and sacrifice the stone Mnizurin. 
 Z. Psel. 40. 
 
 CXCVI. Πολλάκις ἦν λέξῃς μοὶ ἀθρήσῃς πάντ᾽ ἀχλύοντα, 
 Οὐδὲ γὰρ οὐρανίος κυρτὸς τοτὲ φαίνεται ὄγκος. 
 ᾿Αστέρες οὐ λάμπουσι, τὸ μήνης φῶς κεκάλυπται; 
 Χθὼν οὐχ ἕστηκεν, φλέγεταί Γ τε πάντα κεραυνοῖς. 
 If you often invoke me you shall see all things darkening, 
 For neither does the convex bulk of heaven then appear, 
 Nor do the stars shine, the light of the moon is hidden, 
 The earth stands not still, but all things appear in thunders. 
 Z. Psel, 10.—Plet. 22. 
 
 CXCVIT. § vecveccedeanes EX 0 ἄρα κόλπον 
 Γαίης ϑρώσκουσι χθόνιοι κύνες, οὐ ποτ᾽ ἀληθὲς 
 Squat βρότῳ ἀνδρὶ δεικνῦντες. 
 os eecenseeeees From the cavities 
 Of the earth leap forth terrestrial dogs, 
 Shewing no true sign to mortal man. 
 Z. Psel. 23.—Plet. 17. 
 
 CXCVIII. - Πῦρ ἴκελον σκίρτηδον ὃ ἐπ᾽ ἠέρος onda || τιταῖνον, 
 Ἢ καὶ πῦρ ὠτύπωτον, ὅθεν φωνὴν προθέουσαν, 
 Ἢ φῶς πλούσιον, ἘἜ ἀμφιφανὲς tt ῥοιζαῖον, ἐλιχθὲν" 
 ᾿Αλλὰ καὶ ἵππον ἰδεῖν φωτὸς πλέον ἀστράπτοντα, 
 
 * Lob.—aSpiceis πάντα λέοντα Tay. Fr. Ῥαίτ.---πάντη λεκτόν Plet. 
 + βλέπεται Fr. Patr. Tay. 
 
 1 σῶμα Fr. Patr. 
 
 ὃ σκιρτητῇ Lob. 
 
 || a Lob. 
 
 4 Lob proposes φωναὶ προϑέουσιν. 
 
 ** Gesn. and Tay. have πλήσιον. 
 
 tt Ταγ.---ἀμφιχύδην Lob—dugi γύην ae Vulg, 
 
280 THE CHALDEAN ORACLES. 
 
 Ἢ καὶ παῖδα θοοῖς Ἔ νώτοις ἐποχούμενον ἵππου, 
 ἜἜμπυρον ἢ χρυσῷ πεπυχασμένον, ἢ παλίγυμνον, 
 Ἢ καὶ τοξεύοντα, καὶ ἑστηῶτ᾽ ἐπὶ νώτοις. 
 A similar fire flashingly extending itself into the waves of the air, 
 Or even unfigured fire, whence an antecedent voice, 
 Or light rich, glittering, resounding, revolved. 
 But when you see a horse glittering with light, 
 Or a boy, carried on the swift back of a horse, 
 Fiery, or clothed in gold, or naked, 
 Or shooting with a bow, or standing upon horseback— 
 Zi OL Proc. in Pl. Polit. 380. 
 
 CXCIX. Ἡνίκα βλέψῃς μορφῆς ἄτερ εὐΐερον πῦρ, 
 Λαμπόμενον σχιρτηδὸν ὅλου κατὰ βενθέᾳ κόσμου, 
 Κλῦθ, πυρὸς φωνήν. 
 When you behold a sacred fire without form 
 Shining flashingly through the depths of the whole world 
 Hear the voice of fire. 
 Z. Psel. 14.—Plet. 25. 
 
 * χερὶς Fr. Patr. 
 
FRAGMENTS 
 
 . 
 OF THE 
 
 HERMETIC, ORPHIC, PYTHAGOREAN, 
 AND OTHER 
 
 COSMOGONIES AND THEOGONIES. 
 
me : 
 went ὴ ra. sya 
 
 
 
HERMETIC FRAGMENTS. 
 
 FROM THE ANCIENT HERMETIC BOOKS. 
 
 ~ 3) 
 ΠΡΟ τῶν ὄντως ὄντων καὶ τῶν 
 συ. ~ ἮΝ ~ 
 ὅλων ἀρχῶν, ἐστι Θεὸς εἷς, πρῶ- 
 Ν ~ Y ~ Ν 
 τος χαὶ τοῦ πρώτον Θεοῦ καὶ 
 ~/ » ἡ > / 
 βασιλέως, ἀκίνητος ἐν μονὸ- 
 -Ὁ n~ / ’ 
 τητι τῆς ἑαυτοῦ ἑνότητος μένων. 
 A ~ / 
 οὔτε γὰρ νοητὸν αὐτῷ ἐπιπλέ- 
 » . 
 
 KET As, οὔτε ἄλλό TH παρά- 
 δειγμα δὲ ἵδρυται τοῦ αὐτο- 
 , 
 πάτορος, αὐτογόνου, καὶ μονο- 
 ,ὔ ~ Ὡ᾿Ὡ» > 
 πάτορος Θεοῦ, τοῦ ὄντος aya- 
 θοῦ. Μεῖζον γάρ τι καὶ πρῶ- 
 τὸν, xab πηγὴ τῶν wayTwy, 
 Ν Ν ~ , 
 καὶ πυθμὴν τῶν νοουμένων 
 
 ~ ἡ 3 \ 
 πρώτων εἰδῶν Ὀντων᾽ ἀπὸ δὲ 
 ~ er 4 e > , 
 τοῦ ἑνὸς τούτου, ὁ αὐτάρχης 
 , 
 Θεὸς ἑαυτὸν ἐξέλαμψε, διὸ 
 Ν > 4 \ ΕἸ / 
 καὶ αὐτοπάτωρ καὶ αὐτάρχης. 
 ᾿Αρχὴ γὰρ οὗτος καὶ Θεὸς 
 Θεῶν᾽ μονὰς ἐκ τοῦ ἑνὸς, τρο- 
 , Ν > Ν Ὁ δι . 
 ούσιος καὶ ἀρχὴ τῆς οὐσίας 
 ἐν me ne AS δι» Ν 
 am αὐτοῦ γὰρ ἡ οὐσιότης καὶ 
 
 ἡ οὐσία" διὸ nal νοητάρχης 
 
 Beroreall things that essentially exist, 
 and before the total principles, there 
 is one God, prior to the first God and 
 King, remaining immoveable in the 
 solitude of his unity; for neither is 
 the Intelligible immixed with him, 
 He is estab- 
 lished, the exemplar of the God who 
 is the father of himself, self-begotten, 
 the only father, and who is truly 
 
 nor any other thing. 
 
 good. For he is something greater, 
 and the first; the fountain ofall things, 
 and the root ofall primary Intelligible 
 But out of this one, 
 the self-ruling God made _ himself 
 shine forth; wherefore he is the fa- 
 
 existing forms. 
 
 ther of himself, and self-ruling: for | 
 he is the first principle and God of 
 Gods. 
 
 one; before essence, yet the first 
 
 He is the monad from the 
 
 principle of essence, for from him is 
 entity and essence; on which account 
 
284 
 
 4 - Ν 
 προσαγορεύετᾳι. Autos μὲν 
 οὖν εἰσὶν ἀρχαὶ πρεσδύταται 
 
 4 ἃ ε ~ δ ~ 
 πάντων, ἃς “Epung πρὸ τῶν 
 αἰθερίων καὶ ἐμπυρίων Θεῶν 
 προστάττει καὶ τῶν ἐπου- 
 ρανίων. 
 
 Kar’ ἄλλην δὲ τάξιν προς- 
 τάττει Yew τὸν Ἠμὴφ, ἢ τῶν 
 > ὔ “ ε / . ὦ, 
 ἐπουρανίων Seay ἡγούμενον" ὃν 
 φησιν νοῦν εἶναι αὐτὸν ἑαυτὸν 
 
 ~ Ν A ΤᾺ 9 
 γοοῦντα, καὶ τὰς νοήσεις εἰς 
 ἑαυτὸν ἐπιστρέφοντα. "Τούτου 
 δὲ xa BA Nu 4 
 € TO ἐν ἄμερες, nal ὁ φησι 
 
 ~ ΄ 4 . 
 πρῶτον μάγευμα προτάττει 
 a 4 f 
 ὃν καὶ Bluray ἐπονομάζει" ἐν ᾧ' 
 ὃ) \ ᾿" , > - A 4 
 ἢ τὸ πρῶτόν ἐστι νοῦν, καὶ τὸ 
 πρῶτον γοητὸν, ὅ δὴ καὶ διὰ 
 σιγῆς μόνης Φεραπεύεται. ᾿Ἐπὶ 
 
 Ἀ 
 
 δὲ τούτοις τῶν ἐμφανῶν δη- 
 
 { » ΄ 
 
 μιουργΐας ἄλλοι προεστήκασιν 
 ε , ε x x 
 ἡγεμόνες. ὃ γὰρ δημιουργικὸς 
 νοῦς, καὶ τῆς ἀληδείας προσ- 
 τάτης, καὶ σοφίας, ἐρχόμενα 
 μὲν ἐπὶ γένεσιν, καὶ τὴν ἐφα- 
 - ~ / , 
 
 νῇ τῶν κεχρυμμένων λόγων δύ- 
 γαμιν εἰς φῶς ἄγων, ᾿ἸΑμῶν κα- 
 τὰ τὴν τῶν Αἰγυπτίων γλῶσ- 
 σαν λέγεται. 
 
 ὠψευδῶς ἕκαστα; καὶ τεχνι- 
 
 ~ ‘A 
 συντελῶν δὲ 
 
 κῶς μετ᾽ ἀληϑείας b3a* Ἕλ- 
 ληνες δὲ, εἰς Ἥφαιστον με- 
 ταλαμβάνουσι τὸν Φϑὰ, τῷ 
 
 ~ , ! εἰ 
 τεχνικῷ μόνον προσβάλλοντες 
 
 HERMETIC FRAGMENTS, 
 
 he is celebrated as the chief of the 
 Intelligibles. These are the most an- 
 cient principles of all things, which 
 Hermes places first in order, before 
 the ethereal and empyrean gods and 
 the celestial. 
 
 But, according to another division, 
 he (Hermes) places the god Emeph* 
 as the ruler of the celestial gods: and 
 says that he is Intellect understanding 
 himself, and converting other intel- 
 ligences to himself. And before this 
 he places the indivisible One, which 
 he calls the first effigies, and de- 
 nominates him Eicton; in whom, in- 
 deed, is the first Intellect and the first 
 Intelligible : and this One is venerated 
 insilence. Besides these, other rulers 
 are imagined to exist, which govern 
 the fabrication of things apparent: for 
 the demiurgic Intellect, which pro- 
 perly presides over truth and wis- 
 dom, when it proceeds to generation 
 and leads forth into light the inap- 
 parent power of the secret reasons, 
 is called Amon, according to the 
 Egyptian tongue: and when it per- 
 fects all things not deceptively, but 
 artificially according to truth, Phtha; 
 but the Greeks change the word 
 Phtha into Hephestus, looking only 
 to the artificial: regarded as the pro- 
 ducer of good things, it is called 
 
 * Generally supposed to be a mistake for Κνὲῷ, Cneph. 
 

 
 
 
 HERMETIC FRAGMENTS. 
 
 ~ ἊΝ 
 ἀγαϑῶν δὲ ποιητικὸς av’ Οσιρις 
 ᾿ Ὰ ᾽ν. 
 χέχληται" καὶ ἄλλας δι᾿ GA- 
 , a / 
 λας δυνάμεις τε nal ἐνεργείας 
 " ν ἣν; ον 
 ἐπωνυμίας ἔχει. "Ἔστι δὴ οὖν 
 / > 
 καὶ ἄλλη τις ἡγεμονία παρ 
 ae ὦ ~ ἣν ἡ νὰ «. 
 αὐτοῖς τῶν περὶ γένεσιν ὅλων 
 στοιχείων, καὶ τῶν ἐν αὐτοῖς 
 , A 
 δυνάμεων, τεττάρων μὲν ἀρ- 
 ~ \ 
 σενικῶν, τεττάρων δὲ Sydv- 
 ~ - > ‘ ε ΄ 
 χῶν, ἥντινα ἀπονέμουσιν Ἡλίῳ. 
 Μ, ~ σ. ~ 
 Kal ἄλλη τῆς φύσεως ὕλης τῆς 
 A ΄ > Ὁ “ 
 περὶ γένεσιν ἀρχῆς» ἥντινα Σε- 
 , 
 λήνῃ διδόασι. Κατὰ μέρη τε 
 διαλαμβάνοντες τὸν οὐρανὸν εἰς 
 δύ ΄ a » δώ 
 vo μοίρας, ἢ τετταρας, ἢ δώ- 
 a a \ 4 "ἃ 
 δεκα, ἢ ἐξ καὶ τριάκοντα, ἢ 
 διπλασίας τούτων, προτάτ- 
 » Ω 
 Tous: πλείονας, ἢ ἐλάττονας, 
 - \ aN «= 4 > 
 πᾶσι δὲ αὐτὸν ὑπερέχοντα av- 
 -" e ͵ Ἀ [2 
 τῶν, ἕνα προτιδέασι. καὶ οὕ- 
 ΝΜ y ~ 
 Tag ἄνωδεν ἄχρι τῶν τελευ- 
 , ε Sond > : 
 ταιῶν ἢ περι TOY ἄρχων Αὐ- 
 ΄, , FEN 
 γυπτίοις πραγματεία, a ἑνὸς 
 ΝΜ \ / 3 - 
 ἄρχεται, καὶ πρόεισιν εἰς πλῆ- 
 Mog τῶν πολλῶν avis ὑφ᾽ ἑνὸς 
 / 
 διακυβερνωμένων, καὶ παντα- 
 ~ ~ >» '§ δ » 
 χοῦ τοῦ ἀορίστου φύσεως ἐπι- 
 , 
 κρατουμένης ὑπό τιχος ὧὡρισ- 
 re ,ὔ - 
 μένου μέτρου, καὶ τῆς ἀνωτάτω 
 ΄ 4 4 VEY σ 
 ἐγιαίας πάντων αἰτίας. “Ὑλην 
 Ἁ 4 Ν ~ 
 δὲ παρήγαγεν ὁ Θεὰς ἀπὸ τῆς 
 οὐσιότητος ὑποσχισείσης ὑλό- 
 a ‘ 
 τητος, ἣν παραλαβὼν ὃ Ay- 
 \ \ 3 \ 
 μιουργὸς ζωτικὴν οὖσαν, τὰς 
 ἁπλᾶς καὶ ἀπαδεῖς σφαίρας 
 
 ἀπ᾽ αὐτῆς ἐδημιούργησε. τὸ δὲ 
 
 285 
 
 Osiris, and according to its other 
 powers and attributes it has different 
 appellations. There is also, accord- 
 ing to them, another certain principle 
 presiding over all the elements ina state 
 of generation, and over the powers 
 inherent in them, four of which are 
 male, and four female; and this prin- 
 ciple they attribute to the Sun. There 
 is yet another principle of all nature 
 regarded as the ruler over generation, 
 and this they assign to the Moon. 
 They divide the: heavens also into 
 two parts, or into four, or twelve, or 
 thirty-six, or the doubles of these ; 
 they attribute to them leaders more 
 or less in number; and over them 
 they place one whom they consider 
 superior to them all. Hence, from 
 the highest to the last, the doctrine 
 of the Egyptians concerning the prin- 
 ciples, inculcates the origin of all 
 things from One, with different gra- 
 dations to the Many; which (the 
 Many) are again held to be under 
 the supreme government of the One: 
 and the nature of the Boundless is 
 considered entirely subservient to the 
 nature of the Bounded and the su- 
 preme Unity the cause of all things. 
 And God produced Matter from the 
 materiality of the separated essence, 
 which being of a vivific nature, the 
 Demiurgus took it, and fabricated 
 from it the harmonious and imper- 
 turbable spheres: but the dregs of 
 
286 HERMETIC FRAGMENTS. 
 
 + nn 
 ἐσχατον αὐτῆς; εἰς τὰ γεννητὰ 
 καὶ pdapta σώματά διεκόσ- 
 
 μῆσε. 
 
 it he employed in the fabrication of 
 generated and perishable bodies.— 
 
 Jambl. sect. vill. c. 2. 3. 
 
 FROM THE MODERN HERMETIC BOOKS. 
 
 x Ν 
 Δόξα πάντων 6 Θεὸς, καὶ 
 Ν 4, "Ὁ" Ἂς 
 δεῖον, καὶ φύσις Sela. ᾿Αρχὴ 
 ~ of Ν ε 
 τῶν ὄντων ὃ Θεὸς, καὶ ὁ Νοῦς, 
 Ν \ 
 καὶ ἡ φύσις, “at ὕλη, καὶ 
 > / ἣν > 4 Ν 
 ἐνεργεία, καὶ ἀνάγκη, nas 
 i Ls 
 τέλος, καὶ avavewors. Ἢν 
 \ , »»᾿ ee} , 
 γὰρ σκότος ἄπειρον ἐν ἀβύσσῳ, 
 No XN ~ - AN 
 καὶ ὕδωρ, καὶ πνεῦμα λεπτὸν 
 9 
 γοερὸν δυνώμει» ὄντα ἐν Χάει. 
 , ~ of 
 ᾿Ανείϑη δὴ φῶς ἅγιον, καὶ 
 ΄ ει.» Ch διε - > 
 ἐπάγη tp ἅμμῳ ἐξ ὑγρᾶς οὐ- 
 σίας στοιχεῖα. 
 
 The glory of all things is God, and 
 Deity, and divine Nature. The prin- 
 ciple of all things existing is God, 
 and the Intellect, and Nature, and 
 Matter, and Energy, and Fate, and 
 Conclusion, and Renovation. For 
 there were boundless Darkness in 
 the abyss, and water, and a subtile 
 spirit, intellectual in power, existing 
 But the holy Light broke 
 forth, and the elements were pro- 
 duced from among the sand of a 
 watery essence.—Serm. Sac. lib. iil. 
 
 in Chaos. 
 
 FROM HORAPOLLO. 
 
 - \ > n ε , 
 Δοκεῖ yap αὑτοῖς ὁ κόσμος 
 
 ΄ ν ~ > 
 συνεστάναι ἐκ TE τοῦ ἀρσε- 
 Ν 
 "Ent δὲ 
 
 τῆς ᾿Αϑηνᾶς τὸν κάνψϑαρον, 
 
 νικοῦ καὶ Θηλυκοῦ. 
 
 ἐπὶ δὲ Ἡφαίστου τὸν γῦπα 
 
 γράφουσι. 
 Θεῶν παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς ἀρσενο)ήλεις 
 P P U7] 
 
 Οὗτοι γὰρ μόνοι 
 γὰρ Μμ' 
 
 ὑπάρχουσιν. 
 
 The world appears to them (the 
 Egyptians) to consist of a masculine 
 and feminine nature. And they en- 
 grave a scarabeeus for Athena, and a 
 vulture for Hephestus. For these 
 alone of all the Gods they consider as 
 both male and female in their nature. 
 
 “Feat Se 
 
 —— ὦ» 
 
HERMETIC FRAGMENTS. 
 
 287 
 
 FROM CHAREMON, 
 
 ΄ Ν ‘ Ν ε 
 Χαιρήμων μὲν yap καὶ οἱ 
 \ ~ 
 ἄλλοι, οὐδ᾽ ἄλλο τι πρὸ τῶν 
 , 4 ~ 
 δρωμιἕνων κόσμων ἡγοῦνται, ἐν 
 ἀρχῇ λόγων τιδέμενοι τοὺς 
 Ε 
 Αἰγυπτίων. οὐδ᾽ ἄλλους Leads 
 ~ ~ , 
 πλὴν TOY πλανητῶν λεγομένων, 
 ~ Ν 
 καὶ τῶν συμπληρούντων τὸν 
 Ν \¢ ᾽’ 
 ζωδιακὸν, καὶ ὅσοι τούτοις πα- 
 4 2 
 ρανατέλλουσι. Τάς te εἷς 
 Ἀ Ν x \ ‘ 
 τοὺς δεκανοὺς τιμὰς, καὶ τοὺς 
 ,ὔ Ν ε ὔ 
 λεγομένους κραταιοὺς ἡγέμονας. 
 z gy αὶ > - 3s 
 ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα ey τοῖς ἀλμε- 
 ~ , 
 νιχιακοὶς φέρεται, καὶ Yepa- 
 πεῖαι παδῶν, καὶ ἀνατολαὶ, 
 Ἀ 
 καὶ δύσεις, καὶ μελλόντων ση- 
 μειώσεις. “Edpa γὰρ τοὺς τὸν 
 «΄. , 
 ἥλιον δημιουργὸν φαμένους, καὶ 
 x Ν δ᾿, τ ἢ \ Ν 
 τὰ περὶ τὸν Οσιριν καὶ τὴν 
 ΕΣ ‘ 4 Ν ε 
 low καὶ πάντας τοὺς ἱερατι- 
 + a 
 κοὺς μύδους, ἢ εἰς τοὺς ἀστέρας 
 καὶ τὰς τούτων φάνσεις καὶ 
 κρύψεις" καὶ ἐπιτολὰς ἑλιτ- 
 (Renae ~ 
 τομένους" ἢ εἷς τὰς τῆς σελή- 
 ὑξή Ν , .ο ἃ 
 νης αὐξήσεις καὶ μειώσεις" ἢ 
 εἰς τὴν τοῦ ἡλίου πορείαν ἢ τό 
 γε νυκτερινὸν ἡμισφαιρίον, ἢ τὸ 
 ε ἊΣ, Ἢ Sie 
 ἡμερινὸν, ἢ τόν γε ποταμὸν 
 \ oe 3 
 καὶ ὅλως πάντα εἰς τὰ φυσικὰ, 
 \ 
 καὶ οὐδὲν εἰς ἀσωμάτους καὶ 
 ΄ ew ε , 
 ζώσας οὐσίας ἑρμηνεύοντας. 
 τ 
 Ὧν οἱ πλείους καὶ τὸ ἐφ᾽ ἡμὶν 
 
 > ~ ~ > , >” 
 ἐκ τῆς τῶν ἀστέρων ἀνῆψαν 
 
 Cheremon and others believe that 
 nothing existed prior to the sensible 
 worlds, and they place among the 
 foremost of such opinions the senti- 
 ments of the Egyptians, who hold 
 that there are no other gods than 
 those which are called the planets, 
 and the constellations of the Zodiac, 
 and such as these. They say, also, 
 that the honours paid to the ten great 
 gods and those which are called 
 heroes, whose names appear in the 
 almanacks, are nothing else than 
 charms for the cure of evils, and ob- 
 servations of the risings and settings 
 of the stars, and prognostications of 
 future events. For it seems that they 
 esteem the Sun to be the demiurgus, 
 and hold that the legends about Osiris 
 and Isis, and all other their mytho- 
 logical fables, have reference either 
 to the stars, their appearances and 
 occultations, and the periods of their 
 risings, or to the increase and de- 
 crease of the moon, or to the cycles of 
 the sun, or the diurnal and nocturnal 
 hemispheres, or to the river: in short, 
 that every thing of the kind relates 
 merely to physical operations, and 
 has no connexion or reference what- 
 ever to incorporeal and living es- 
 sences properly so called. Most of 
 
288 HERMETIC FRAGMENTS. 
 
 ΄ > II ὦ 
 κινήσεως, οὐκ O10 ὅπως deo 
 n~ Saf. ϑε ΩΨ, a ε 
 μοῖς ἀλύτοις ἀνάγκῃ; ἣν εἰ- 
 ͵ 
 μαρμένην λέγουσι, πάντα κα- 
 δή, ‘\ ΄ id 
 ταδήσαντες, Ka πάντα τού- 
 τοις ἀνάψαντες τοῖς Φεοὶς. 
 οὕτω λυτῆρας τῆς εἱμωρμένης 
 la 4 « ~ Ν Po 
 μόνους, ἔντε ἱεροῖς καὶ ξοάνοις, 
 
 καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις Φερωπεύουσι. 
 
 them, also, suppose that some in- 
 dissoluble connexion exists between 
 our concerns and the motions of the 
 stars, by a kind of necessity which 
 they call Destiny, whereby all sub-_ 
 lunary things are connected with 
 these gods, and depend upon them. 
 Hence they serve and honour thent 
 with temples and statues and the like, 
 as the only beings capable of in- 
 fluencing Destiny— us. Pr. Evan. 
 ili. ¢. 4. 
 
ORPHIC FRAGMENTS. 
 
 
 
 FROM ORPHEUS.* 
 
 Z \ ~ , Ξ aker 9 ᾿ 
 εὺς πρῶτος γένετο" Ζεὺς ὕστατος ἀρχικέρτευνος, 
 
 \ Sa , \ 
 Ζεὺς κεφαλὴ" Ζεὺς μέσσα, Διὸς δ᾽ ἐκ πάντα τέτυχται. 
 
 Ν » , - Ν βιοιίος, οἷν ..35 = 
 Ζεὺς ἄρσην γένετο᾽ Ζεὺς apritos Γ ἔπλετο νύμφη 
 Zed Sane. Ἔ f wz OnnawAD ἔα ΤΕ πῆ, υ 
 
 εὺς TUN μὴν, 1 γαίης τε καὶ οὐρανοῦ ἀστερόεντος 
 ( \ ar X Sea sat 7 \ ae ees SAN AUS We 
 
 εὺς πνοιὴ πάντων" ὃ Ζεὺς ἀχαμάτου πυρὸς ὁρμὴ 
 
 , Ape = > = 
 
 Ζεὺς πόντου ῥίζα" Ζεὺς ἥλιος nde σελήνη") 
 
 ᾿ Yee \ , = 
 Ζεὺς βασιλεὺς" Ζεὺς αὐτὸς] ἁπάντων apyiyévedanc. 
 °E ° ͵ dé ὃ ΓΑ ca > δ ε iA 
 
 ν χράτος, εἷς δαίμων γένετο, μέγας ἀρχὸς ἁπάντων. 
 A ἣν Ἂν =z 
 “Ev δὲ δέμας βασίλειον, ἐν ᾧ τάδε πάντα κυχλεῖται, 
 
 ~ \ ‘ ~ , δ & 
 Πῦρ, καὶ ὕδωρ, καὶ γαῖα, καὶ αἰδὴρ, νύξ τε καὶ ἦμαρ, 
 
 ν - ~ , V0 - ΄ 
 Καὶ Μήητις πρῶτος γενέτωρ, καὶ Ερως πολυτερπής. 
 \ Ν ~ 
 
 Πάντα γὰρ ἐν μεγάλῳ Ζηνὸς τάδε σώματι κεῖται. Y 
 
 - ΄ ‘ ~ , 
 Τοῦ δήτοι κεφαλὴν μὲν ἰδεῖν καὶ χαλὰ πρόσωπα. 
 
 \ ᾽ s a , ” 
 
 Οὐρανὸς αἰγλήεις, ov xptvoeus ἀμφὶς ἔδϑειραι, 
 
 Αστρων μιαρμιαρέων περικαλλέες ἠερέδονται. 
 
 * Eusebius and Proclus omit the fifth and sixth verses between the paren- 
 theses. Aristotle places the fourth before the third. 
 
 + ἄμβροτος; Aristot. Stob. 
 
 t λιμὴν Stob. 
 
 § Herm. proposes ἀνεμών. 
 
 || ἀρχὸς Aristot. 
 
 Proc. has also Ζηνὸς δ᾽ ἐνὶ γαστέρι σὐῤῥα πεφύκει. 
 
290 ORPHIC FRAGMENTS. 
 
 Ταύρεα δ᾽ ἀμφοτέρωνδε δύο χρύσεια κέρατα. 
 ᾿Αντολίη τε δύσις τε Θεῶν ὁδοὶ οὐρανιώνων. 
 "Ὄμματα δ᾽ ἠέλιός τε, καὶ ἀντίοωσα ἢ σελήνη, 
 Νοῦς δέ γε ἀψευδὴς, βασιλήϊος ἄφϑιτος aidyp. 
 
 Zeus is the first. Zeus the thunderer, is the last. 
 
 Zeus is the head. Zeus is the middle, and by Zeus all things 
 were fabricated. 
 
 Zeus is male, Immortal Zeus is female. 
 
 Zeus is the foundation of the earth and of the starry heaven. 
 
 Zeus is the breath of all things. Zeus is the rushing of inde- 
 fatigable fire. 
 
 Zeus is the root of the sea: He is the sun and moon. 
 
 Zeus is the king ; He is the author of universal life ; 
 
 One Power, one Demon, the mighty prince of all things : 
 
 One kingly frame, in which this universe revolves, 
 
 Fire and water, earth and ether, night and day, 
 
 And Metis (Counsel) the primeval father, and all-delightful 
 Eros (Love). 
 
 All these things are united in the vast body of Zeus. 
 
 Would you behold his head and his fair face, 
 
 It is the resplendent heaven, round which his golden locks 
 
 Of glittering stars are beautifully exalted in the air. 
 
 On each side are the two golden taurine horns, 
 
 The risings and settings, the tracks of the celestial gods ; 
 
 His eyes the sun and the opposing moon ; 
 
 His unfallacious Mind the royal incorruptible Ether. 
 Eus. Pr, Ev. II.—Proc. Tim.—Aristot. de Mund. 
 
 ΕἸ . > = 
 Heringa proposes ἀνταυγοῦσα. 
 
OKPHIC FRAGMENTS. 991 
 
 FROM ORPHEUS. 
 
 Πρῶτα μὲν ἀρχαίου Χάεος μελανήφατον ὕμνον, 
 Ὡς ἐπάμειψε φύσεις, ὥς τ᾽ οὐρανὸς ἐς πέρας nave’ 
 Γῆς τ᾽ εὐρυστέρνου γένεσιν, πυϑμένα τε δαλάσσης" 
 Πρεσβύτατόν τε καὶ αὐτοτελῆ πολύμητιν "Ἔρωτα, 
 Ὅσσα τ᾽ ἔφυσεν ἅπαντα; διέκρινε δ᾽ ἄλλον ἀπ᾽ ἄλλου. 
 Καὶ Κρόνον αἰνολέτην, ὥς τ᾽ ἐς Δία τερπικέραυνον 
 Ἤλυϑεν ὠϑδανάτων μακάρων βασιλήϊος ἀρχή. 
 First I sung the obscurity of ancient Chaos, 
 How the Elements were ordered, and the Heaven reduced to 
 bound; 
 And _ the generation of the wide-bosomed Earth, and the depth 
 of the Sea, 
 And Eros (Love) the most ancient, self-perfecting, and of mani- 
 fold design ; 
 How he generated all things, and parted them from one another. 
 And I have sung of Cronus so miserably undone, and how the 
 kingdom 
 Of the blessed Immortals descended to the thunder-loving Zeus. 
 Arg. 419. 
 
 FROM ORPHEUS. 
 
 ᾿Αρχαίου μὲν πρῶτα Χάους ὠμέγαρτον ἢ ἀνάγχην 
 Καὶ Κρόνον, ὃς ἐλόχευσεν ἀπειρεσίοισιν ὑφ᾽ ὁλκοῖς ἡ 
 Aidépa, καὶ διφυῆ περιωπέα, κυδρὸν Ἔρωτα 
 Νυκτὸς ἀειγνήτης πάτερα κλυτὸν ὃν ῥα Φάνητα 
 “Ὁπλότεροι κὠλέουσι t βροτοὶ, πρῶτος γὰρ ἐφάνη" 
 Βριμοῦς τ᾽ εὐδυνάτοιο γονὰς, ἤδ᾽ ἔργᾳ ἀΐδηλα 
 
 , A - 
 Γηγενέων, οἱ λυγρὸν ἐπ᾿ Οὐρανοῦ ἐστάξαντο 
 
 * ἀτέχμαρτον Al, t ἀπειρισίοις ὑπὸ κόλποις Al. 
 3 κλήζουσι ΑΙ. 
 
“9.5 ORPHIC FRAGMENTS. 
 
 Σπέρμα γονῆς τὸ πρόσϑεν, Bey γένος ἐξεγένοντο 
 Θνητῶν, οἱ κατὰ γαῖαν ὠπείριτον αἰὲν ἔασι. 
 
 First (I have sung) the vast necessity of ancient Chaos, 
 
 And Cronus, who in the boundless tracts brought forth 
 
 The Ether, and the splendid and glorious Eros of a two-fold 
 nature, 
 
 The illustrious father of night, existing from eternity, 
 
 Whom men call Phanes, for he first appeared. 
 
 I have sung the birth of powerful Brimo (Hecate), and the un- 
 hallowed deeds 
 
 Of the earth-born (giants), who showered down from heaven 
 
 Their blood, the lamentable seed of generation, from whence 
 sprung 
 
 The race of mortals, who inhabit the boundless earth for ever. 
 
 Arg. v.12. 
 
 FROM HESIOD. 
 
 Ἤτοι μὲν πρώτιστα Χάος γένετ᾽, αὐτὰρ ἔπειτα 
 Tai? εὐρύστερνος, πάντων ἕδος ὠσφαλὲς αἰεὶ, 
 (Αϑανάτων of ἔχουσι κάρη νιφόεντος ᾿Ολύμπου) 
 Τάρταρα τ᾽ ἠερόεντα μυχῷ χιδονὸς εὐρυοδείης, 
 Ἢ δ᾽ "Epos, bs κάλλιστος ἐν ἀδϑανάτοισι Vector, 
 Λυσιμελὴς πάντων τε Ψεῶν. πάντων τ᾽ dys pomay 
 Δάμναται ἐν στήσεσσι νόον καὶ ἐπίφρονα βουλήν. 
 Ἔχ Χάεος δ᾽ ᾿Ἐρεβός τε, μέλαινά τε Νὺξ ἐγένοντο. 
 Νυκτὸς δ᾽ αὖτ᾽ Αἰϑήρ τε καὶ Ἡ μέρη ἐξεγένοντο, 
 Οὗς τέκε κυσσαμένη, Ἐρέβει φιλότητι μιγεῖσα 
 Γαῖα δέ τοι πρῶτον μὲν ἐγείνωτο ἶσον ἑαυτὴ 
 Οὐρανὸν ἀστεροενν, ἵνα μιν περὶ πάντα χαλύπτοι. 
 Chaos was generated first, and then 
 The wide-bosomed Earth, the ever stable seat of all 
 The Immortals that inhabit the snowy peaks of Olympus, 
 And the dark aerial Tartarus in the depths of the permeable 
 Earth, 
 
 — oe 
 
ORPHIC FRAGMENTS. 293 
 
 And Eros, the fairest of the immortal Gods, 
 That relaxes the strength of all, both gods and men, 
 And subjugates the mind and the sage will in their breasts. 
 _ From Chaos were generated Erebus and black Night, 
 And from Night again were generated Ether and Day, 
 Whom she brought forth, having conceived from the embrace of 
 Erebus. 
 And Earth first produced the starry Heaven equal to herself, 
 That it might inclose all things around herself. 
 Theog. v. 116. 
 
 FROM ARISTOPHANES. 
 
 Χάος ἦν καὶ Νὺξ Ἔρεβός τε μέλας πρῶτον καὶ Τάρταρος ἔυρυς" 
 Γῆ δ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ᾿Αὴρ οὐδ᾽ Οὐρανὸς ἦν" ᾿Ερέβους δ᾽ ἐν ὠπείροσι κολποις 
 
 Τίκτει πρώτιστον ἢ 
 
 ὑπηνέμιον Νὺξ ἡ μελανόπτερος ou, 
 Ἐξ οὗ περιτελλομένᾳις ὥραις ἔβλαστεν Ἔρως ὃ ποδεινὺς, 
 Στίλβων νῶτον πτερύγοιν χρυσαῖν εἰκὼς ἀνεμώκετι δίναις. 
 Οὗτος δὲ Χάει πτερόεντι μιγεὶς ἡ νυχίῳ κατὰ Τάρταρον εὐρὺν 
 Ἐνεόττευσεν γένος ἡμέτερον, καὶ πρῶτον ἀνήγαγεν ect φῶς. 
 Πρότερον δ᾽ οὐκ ἦν γένος ἀδανάτων, πρὶν [Ἔρως ξυνέμιξεν ὃ ἅπαντα" 
 Ἐυμμιγνυμένων δ᾽ ἑτέρων ἑτέροις γένετ᾽ Οὐρανὸς, "Queards τε, 
 Καὶ Γῆ, πάντων τε Sey μακάρων γένος ἄφδιτον. 
 First was Chaos and Night, and black Erebus and vast Tartarus; 
 And there was neither Earth, nor Air, nor Heaven: but in the 
 boundless bosoms of Erebus, P 
 Night, with her black wings, first produced an aerial egg, 
 From which, at the completed time, sprang forth the lovely Eros, 
 Glittering with golden wings upon his back, like the swift whirl- 
 winds. 
 
 But embracing the dark-winged Chaos in the vast Tartarus, 
 
 * πρῶτον Athenzus. t μιχϑεὶς Suid. 
 
 t «is Suid. ὃ συνέμιξεν Suid. Brunck. 
 
294 ORPHEC FRAGWENTS. 
 
 He begot our race (the birds), * and first brought us to light. 
 
 together ; 
 But when the elements were mixed one with amother, Heavem 
 was produced, and Ocean, 
 Aristop. Aves. 693.—Sund. v. Chaas. 
 
 FEOM ORPHEUS. 
 
 Chaos and 2 vast yawning chasm on every side. 
 Tay. 
 
 Maia Sedu inary, NOE Super, πᾶς τάδε Goats 
 Πῶς χρή κ᾽ ἀβαυάτων ἀυχὴν πρατεράφρινα Ξέσξαε: 
 ΑἸξέρε πάντα πέριξ ἀφάτῳ λεῖβε, τᾷ δ᾽ St μέσσῳ 
 Οὐρανᾷ ἢ 
 
 “ Maia, supreme of Gods, Immortal Night, tell me this, 
 Immortals 7” 
 
 * Surround all things with imeffable Ether, and place them 
 
 In the mid Heaven.” 
 
 
 
 Proc. Tim. 63. 
 
 ORPHIC HYMN TO PROTOGONUS. 
 
 Tyeroywe καλές, taper, μέγαν, αἰδερόπλαγετιν, 
 ᾿Ὠργονῆ, χροσέαεσιν ἀγαλλόμενον πτερύγεσσιν, 
 Ταυρωπὶν, ὃ γένεσιν mandy Srv τ᾿ ἀνδρώπων, 
 
 * This cosmogony is delivered by the Birds in the comedy so called, and in 
 this Ime they claim the priority of birth before the gods as well as men. 
 
 + Lob. suggests ΑΞ π,. { Simplicius has O3pa%, 
 
 § Ταυροβέαν AL 
 
 
 
 i ee’! oe ἃ 
 
 Lond 
 δ κα"... «δ. ἡ, 
 
ἢν 
 
 ORPHIC FRAGMENTS. 295 
 
 Gis τὺ πολύμνηστον, πολυύργιον ᾿Ἤρικεπαῖον" * 
 ἼΑξῥητον, κρύφιον ροιζήτορα, παμφαὲς ἔρνος. 
 Ὄσσων ἵ ὃς σχυτύεσσαν ἀπημαύρωσας ὁμίχλην 
 Πάντη δινηϑεὶς πτερύγων διπαῖς κατὰ κύσμον, 
 ᾿Λαμερὸν ἄγων φαὺς ἀγνεν, ap οὗ σε Φάνητα κιχλήσκω 
 "HR Πρίηπον ἄνακτα, καὶ ᾿Ανταύγην t ἑλίκωπον 
 ᾿Αλλὰ μάκαρ πωιύμητι, πολύσπορε, βαῖνε γεγηθὼς 
 Ἔςς τελετὴν ἁγίαν πολυποίκωλον ὄδργιοφανταις. 
 I invoke Protogonus, of a double nature, great, wandering through 
 the ether, 
 Egg-born, rejoicing in thy golden wings, 
 Having the countenance of a bull, the procreator of the blessed 
 gods and mortal men, 
 The renowned Light, the far-celebrated Ericepzeus, 
 Ineffable, occult, impetuous, all-glittering strength ; 
 Who scatterest the twilight clouds of darkness from the eyes, 
 And roamest throughout the world upon the flight of thy wings, 
 Who bringest forth the pure and brilliant light, wherefore I in- 
 voke thee as Phanes, 
 As Priapus the king, and as dazzling fountain of splendour. 
 Come, then, blessed being, full of wisdom and generation, come 
 in joy 
 To thy sacred, ever-varying mystery. Be present with the 
 Priests of thy Orgies. 
 
 FROM ORPHEUS. 
 
 Πρωτόγονέν γε μὲν οὔτις ἐπέδρακεν opraruoicw 
 E2 μὴ Νὺξ ἱερὴ μούνη" οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι ἅπαντες 
 Θαύμαζον καϑορῶντες ἐν aiden φέγγος ἄελπτον" 
 
 Tei ἀπέστραπτεν χροὺς ἀϑανάτοιο Φάνητος. 
 
 Ὃς τε πολύμνηστον, πολυόργιον εὕρηκε Παιάν. Vulg. 
 ἡ Ὅσσων Al. 1 ἄνταυγ; Al. 
 
296 ORPHIC FRAGMENTS. 
 
 No one has seen Protogonus with his eyes 
 
 Except the sacred Night alone: all others 
 
 Wondered when they beheld in the Ether the unexpected Light 
 
 Such as the skin of the immortal Phanes shot forth. 
 
 Hermias in Pheed. 141. 
 
 ‘FROM ORPHEUS. * 
 
 / , ,ὕ 2 
 "Bot: δὲ ἄπερ ἐξέϑετο Ὃρ- 
 = 5 s 
 φεὺς tavta. Ὅτι ἐξ ἀρχῆς 
 ? ~ / 4 \ 
 ἀνεδείχϑη τῷ χρόνῳ To Aisnp, 
 , fie 
 ands τοῦ Θεοῦ δημιουργησείς 
 καὶ ἐντεῦδεν χῴκεῖδεν τοῦ 
 z ἊΝ 
 Aivépos ἦν Χάος, καὶ Νὺξ 
 ζοφερὰ ἢ πάντας ὃ κατεῖχε 
 καὶ ἐκάλυπτε τὰ ὑπὸ τὸν Αἰ- 
 / 3 4 Ἂ ΄ 
 Θέρα᾽ σημαίνων τὴν νύκτα προ-- 
 ͵ Ai ak) \ > ~ Cane 
 revew||* εἰρηκὼς ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ 
 ‘ 
 ἐχϑέσει, ἀκατάληπτόν τινα, 
 \ ! « sf iy \ 
 καὶ πάντων ὑπέρτατον εἶναι, καὶ 
 ͵7 ov AY Ν 
 προγενέστερον δὲ καὶ δημιουργὸν 
 , , 
 ἁπάντων, καὶ τοῦ Αἰϑέρος αὐ- 
 nn XN ~ WN Ν Ψ, 
 τοὺ καὶ τῆς Νυχτὸς, καὶ πά- 
 
 σης τῆς ὑπὸ τὸν Αἰδερα οὔσης 
 
 What Orpheus has asserted upon 
 the subject is as follows: ‘‘ From the 
 beginning the Ether was manifested in 
 time,” evidently having been fabricated 
 by God: ‘and on every side of the 
 Ether was the Chaos; and gloomy 
 Night enveloped and obscured all 
 things which were under the Ether.” 
 by attributing to Night a priority, he 
 intimates the explanation to be, that 
 there existed an incomprehensible 
 nature, and a being supreme above 
 all others, and pre-existing, the demi- 
 urgus of all things, as well of the 
 Ether itself (and of the night) as of 
 
 all the creation which existed and was 
 
 * T have given this fragment from Malala, in whose text it appears to be less 
 corrupted. It was originally preserved by Timotheus, who has evidently en- 
 deavoured to explain it upon Christian principles. His parenthetical explanations 
 
 have been considered as part of the Orphic text, and been the cause of its obscurity. 
 Without tampering with the text, I have endeavoured to restore it in the transla- 
 tion to its original purity. It is, doubtless, the same passage from the theogony 
 of Orpheus, commented upon by Damascius. See infra. 
 
 + κόσμω Ced.—Suid. omits it. 
 
 1 φοβερὰ Suid. 
 
 ὃ Qy. πάντα---πάντα δὲ ἐκόλυπτε Ced. 
 
 || προτερεύειν Ced. Suid—zpwrevery is proposed in Ox. Ed. 
 
 4 Omitted by Ced. 
 
 Ὁ πιο 
 
ORPHIC FRAGMENTS. 
 
 . ͵ ΄ Ke 
 καὶ χαλυπτομένης “TITEWS 
 
 ~ Ss , 
 τὴν δὲ Γῆν εἶπεν ὑπὸ τοῦ σχό- 
 s ” 
 τοὺς ἀόρατον οὖσαν" eppace 
 ~ ~ Ν 
 δὲ, ὅτι τὸ Φῶς, ῥῆξαν τὸν Al- 
 , ~ ; 
 Mepa, ἐφώτισε τὴν Γῆν, 7 
 ᾿ ~ Ν ΄, ΠΥ ΝΑΟῚ \ 
 καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν κτίσιν" εἰπὼν, 
 = iY ~ ν o~ 
 ἐκεῖνο εἶναι τὸ Φῶς τὸ ῥῆξαν 
 ul οἷ ΄ 
 τὸν Aivepa, τὸν προειρημένον; 
 ἘΦ} Ξ ͵ . ΝᾺ 
 τὸ ὑπέρτατον πάντων" οὗ ὄνομα 
 > 
 ὃ αὐτὸς ᾿Ορφεὺς ὠκούσας ἐκ 
 ~ 4 
 τῆς μαντείας ἐξεῖπε μή τινα ἢ 
 φᾶναι, τὰ ἑρικεπεώ, (Μῆτιν, 
 3 ~ “ 
 Φάνητα, Ἤρικεπαῖον,) ὅπερ ἑρ- 
 μηνεύεται τῇ κοινῇ γλώσσῃ, 
 ἈΝ ~ z 
 Βουλὴ, Φῶς, Ζωοδοτήρ. El- 
 
 \ > Lap} > ~ > al \ 
 TOY ἐν TH AVTOV EXNVETEL τὰς 
 
 wii ~ , ~ > U 
 αὐτὰς τρεῖς Μείας τῶν ὀνομιά-, 
 
 ͵ ,ὔ > D7, 
 Toy δυνάμεις, μίαν εἰναι δύνα- 
 ‘ ,ὔ ~ / 
 μιν καὶ χράτοςδ τοῦ μόνου 
 ~ a aD N cha 2 
 Θεοῦ, ὃν οὐδεὶς ὁρᾷ, ἥστινος 
 , » Ν v4 ~ 
 δυνάμεως οὐδεὶς δύναται γνῶναι 
 Ἂ a 2 ~ 
 ebay ||, 4 φύσιν. Ἐξ αὐτῆς 
 Nee oe , " ΄ 
 δὲ τῆς δυνάμεως τὰ πάντα γε- 
 ~ ‘ , 
 yevqo tas, καὶ ἀρχὰς ἀσω- 
 
 ΄ of. 
 μάτους, καὶ ἥλιον καὶ σελήνην, 
 
 997 
 
 More- 
 
 over he says, “The Earth was in- 
 
 concealed under the Ether. 
 
 visible on account of the darkness : 
 but the Light broke through the 
 Ether, and illuminated the Earth and 
 all the material of the creation :” sig- 
 nifying by this Light, which burst 
 forth through the Ether, the before- 
 mentioned being who was supreme 
 above all things: “and its name,” 
 which Orpheus learnt from the oracle, 
 “5 Metis, Phanes, Ericepzeus,” which 
 in the common Greek language may 
 be translated will (or counsel), light, 
 life-giver ; signifying, when explained, 
 that these three powers of the three 
 names are the one power and strength 
 of the only God, whom no one ever 
 beheld, and of whose power no one 
 can have an idea or comprehend the 
 nature. “ By this power all things 
 were produced, as well incorporeal 
 principles as the sun and moon, and 
 their influences, and all the stars, and 
 the earth and the sea, and all things 
 
 * Ced. substitutes for this sentence xa) αὐτοῦ τοῦ AiSégos καὶ πάντων τῶν ὑπ’ 
 αὐτὸν τὸν AiSéoa.—Suidas omits it altogether. 
 
 + Ced. omits τὴν γῆν. 
 
 1 Μῆτις (ὅπερ ἑρμηνεύεται βουλὴ) Φῶς, Ζωοδοτήρ. Ced.—Suidas has nothing 
 more than Ὅπερ ὠνόμασε Βουλὴν Φῶς Ζωήν.---ἰῃ the Oxford edition of Malala it is 
 translated, “ Orpheus ex oraculo edoctus edixit, Neminem effari: Ericepeo. quod 
 
 vulgari idiomate signat nobis Consilium, Lumen, Vite datorem.” 
 
 The correction 
 
 in the parenthesis, proposed by Bentley, is evidently the true reading. 
 
 § Καὶ ἕν κράτος τούτων Θεόν. Ced.—Kal ἔν κράτος τοῦ Δημιουογοῦ πάντων Θεοῦ, 
 
 Suid. 
 
 || ἰδέαν, Ced.—Suidas omits this and the following sentences, and substitutes 
 
 wee ee Θεοῦ τοῦ πάντα ἐκ τοῦ μὴ ὄντος παραγαγόντος εἷς τὸ εἶναι, ὅρατά τε καὶ 
 
 ἀόρατα. 
 
 Qe 
 
298 ORPHIC FRAGMENTS. 
 
 ἐξουσίας, καὶ ἄστρα πάντα that are visible and invisible in them. 
 καὶ γὴν nat θάλασσαν, τὰ And man,” says he, “ was formed 
 δρώμενα ἐν αὐτοῖς πάντα καὶ by this God out of the earth, and en- 
 τὰ ἀόρατα. Τὸ δὲ τὸν ἄν- dued with a reasonable soul,” in like 
 Spono™* εἶπεν ix’ αὐτοῦ τοῦ manner as Moses has revealed.— 
 Θεοῦ trhacdévra ἐκ γῆς καὶ J. Malala, p. 89.—Ced.—Suidas v. 
 Ψυχὴν ὑπ᾽ αὕτοὺ λαβώνταῚ Orpheus. 
 
 λογικήν" καπὼς Μωσῆς ὃ πάν- 
 
 σοφος ἐξέδετο ταῦτᾳ. 
 
 FROM ORPHEUS.t 
 
 Μῆτιν σπέρμα φέροντα Tedy κλυτὸν, wre Φάνητα 
 Πρωτόγονον μάκαρες κάλεον κατὰ μακρὸν “Ολυμπον. 
 Metis bearing the seed of the Gods, whom the blessed 
 Inhabitants of Olympus call Phanes Protogonus. 
 In Crat. 
 
 Καὶ Μῆτις πρῶτος γενέτωρ καὶ "Ἔρως πολυτερπής. 
 And Metis, the first father, and all-delightful Eros. 
 In Tim. IT, 102. 
 
 ᾿Αβρὸς Ἔρως καὶ Maris ἀτάσθαλος. 
 Soft Eros and inauspicious Metis. 
 10. 181. 
 
 Μῆτις σπέρμα φέροντα Μεῶν, κλυτὸν ᾿Ηρικεπαῖον. 
 Metis bearing the generation of the Gods, illustrious Ericepzeus. 
 
 10. 
 
 * τῶν ἀνθρώπων γένος. Ced. Suid. There are some other variations of less 
 
 consequence. 
 + For λαβόντα. 
 { These four fragments are preserved by Proclus. 
 
ORPHIC FRAGMENTS. 299 
 
 FROM ORPHEUS. 
 
 Τοιαῦτα ᾿Ορφεὺς ἐνδείκ- 
 
 Ν ~ ΄ 5 
 γυται, περὶ τοῦ Φάνητος Veo~ 
 ~ ~ ~ ᾽ 
 λογῶν᾽ πρῶτος γοῦν 6 Seas παρ 
 αὐτῷ ζώων κεφαλὰς φέρει πολ- 
 λὰς καὶ ἴας, ταυρίους, ὀφίας Ἐ 
 ~ , ‘\ / 
 χαροποῦ τε λέοντος, καὶ πρό- 
 ~ ~ ϑω 
 εἰσὶν ἀπὸ τοῦ πρωτογενοῦς ὠοῦ, 
 2 Ls ~ \ ~? 
 ἐν @ σπερματιχῶς τὸ ζῶόν 
 
 > 
 ἐστι. 
 
 FROM THE 
 
 Ὁ ϑεολόγος κριοῦ καὶ ταύ- 
 
 XN , Ἂν A 
 pov καὶ λέοντος καὶ δράκοντος 
 αὐτῷ περιτιθεὶς κεφαλάς. Καὶ 
 ἐν αὐτῷ πρώτῳ τὸ θῆλυ καὶ 
 
 ἄῤῥεν. 
 
 Orpheus has the following theo- 
 logical speculation in allusion to 
 Phanes. Therefore the first God 
 bears with himself the heads of ani- 
 mals, many and single, of a bull, of a 
 serpent, and of a fierce lion, and 
 they sprung from the primeval egg in 
 which the animal is seminally con- 
 tained. 
 
 Proc. in Tim. 
 
 ANCIENT THEOLOGISTS. 
 
 The theologist places around him 
 the heads of a ram, a bull, a lion, and 
 a dragon, and assigns him first both 
 the male and female sex. 
 
 Θῆλυς καὶ γενέτωρ κρατερὸς θεὸς Ἠρικαπαῖος. 
 
 Female and Father is the mighty god Ericapzeus. 
 
 ". ὦ \ ‘ ε ,ὔ 
 Αὐτῷ δὲ καὶ αἱ πτέρυγες 
 
 πρῶτον. 
 
 To him also the wings are first 
 given. 
 Proc. in Tim. 
 
 * Lobeck supposes that the following was the original: Κριοῦ καὶ ταύρου 7’, 
 
 ὄφιος, χαροποῦ τε λέοντος. 
 
S00 ORPHIC FRAGMENTS. 
 
 FROM THE ANCIENT THEOLOGISTS.* 
 
 ΠΕΣ 
 Ἐκεῖνοι γὰρ Νύκτα μὲν καὶ 
 
 iJ , - 
 Οὐρανὸν φασι βασιλεύειν καὶ 
 λ , Ν , ~ 
 πρὸ τούτων τὸν μέγιστον αὐτῶν 
 
 πατέρα. 
 
 They, the theologists, assert that 
 Night and Heaven (Ouranus) reigned, 
 and before these their most mighty 
 father. 
 
 cae Sah Cas A ΄, 
 Τοῖον Ὑ ἑλὼν διένειμε θεοὶς θνητοῖσι τε κόσμον 
 
 Οὗ πρῶτος βασίλευσε περίκλυτος ᾿Ηρικεπαῖος. 
 Who distributed the world to Gods and Mortals, 
 Over which he first reigned, the illustrious Ericepzeus, 
 
 Μεθ᾿ ὃν ἡ Νὺξ, 
 
 After whom reigned Night, 
 
 ~ 4 
 Lunt pov ἔχουσ᾽ ἐν χερσὶν ἀριπρεπὲς t ᾿Ηρικεπαίου, 
 
 ‘Having in her hands the excellent sceptre of Ericepzeus, 
 
 Μεθ᾿ ἣν ὃ Οὐραυ)ς, 
 
 After whom Heaven (Ouranus), 
 
 Ὃς πρῶτος βασίλευσε θεῶν μετὰ μητέρα Νύκτα. 
 
 Who first reigned over the Gods after his mother Night. 
 
 FROM THE ANCIENT THEOLOGISTS. 
 
 Postremo potentiam So- 
 lis ad omnium potestatem 
 summitatemque _ referri, 
 indicant theologi: qui in 
 sacris hoc brevissima pre- 
 catione demonstrant, di- 
 centes. 
 
 Ἥλιε mavroxparop, κόσμου 
 πνεῦμα; κόσμου δύναμις, κόσ- 
 
 μου φῶς. 
 
 In short, that to the power of the 
 Sun is to be referred the control and 
 supremacy of all things, is indicated by 
 the theologists, who make it evident 
 in the mysteries by the following 
 short invocation. 
 
 Oh, all-ruling Sun, Spirit of the 
 world, Power of the world, Light of 
 the world.—Macrob. Sat. lib. i. ο. 23. 
 
 * This extract from a MS. of Syrianus is given by Lobeck, Aglaophamus I. 
 577, and a translation of it with the Orphic lines from a MS. of Gale, was first 
 given by Mr. Taylor, Class. Jour. XVII. 163. 
 
 + Gal.—Toy 763’ Lob. 
 
 Τ Omitted by Gale. 
 
PYTHAGOREAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 FROM TIM/EUS LOCRUS. 
 
 \ 28, 5(' . 
 Τίμαιος ὃ Λοχρὸς τάδε ἔφα 
 ,΄ ΕΞ; 3 ~ Le 
 δύο αἰτίας εἶμεν TOY συμπάν 
 - , 
 των" Νόον μὲν, τῶν κατὰ λόγον 
 >* ~ 
 γιγνομένων" ᾿Ανάγκαν δὲ, τῶν 
 , » , ~ 
 βίᾳ καττὰς δυνάμεις τῶν σω- 
 4 /, Ν Ν Ν ~ 
 μάτων. τουτέων δὲ, τὸν μὲν, τᾶς 
 ~ > U 
 τἀγαθῶ = φύσιος εἶμεν, Θεὸν 
 > 7 > / ~~ 
 τε ὀνυμαίνεσθαι, ἀρχάν τε τῶν 
 . ? , \ 
 ἀρίστων" τὰ δ᾽ ἑπόμενά TE καὶ 
 4 
 συναίτια; εἰς ᾿Ανάγκαν ἀνάγε- 
 ἊΣ / 
 σθαι. τὰ δὲ ξύμπαντα, ᾿Ιδέαν, 
 ψ͵ τς ee ὯΝ 
 Tray Αἰσθητόν τε; οἷον ἔκγονον 
 , \ x \ = 
 τουτέων. χαὶ τὸ μὲν» εἶμεν 
 > , i YS - \ 
 ἀγένατόν τε καὶ ἀκίνατον, καὶ 
 , \ ~ 7 ὦ 2. 
 μένον TE, καὶ τᾶς TAT φύ- 
 / \ 
 7106, νοατόν τε καὶ παράδειγμα 
 ~ , / 
 τῶν γεννωμένων, ὁκόσα ἐν με- 
 ταβολᾷ ἐντί. τοιοῦτον γάρ τι 
 , i 
 τὰν ᾿Ιδέαν λέγεσθαί τε καὶ 
 ~ ¢, 
 νοεῖσθαι. τὰν δ᾽ Ὕλαν, ἐχμα- 
 
 ~ \ , 
 γείον καὶ ματερῶ, τιθάναν TE 
 
 Thus says Timeus the Locrian.— 
 The causes of all things are two; In- 
 tellect, of those which are produced ac- 
 cording to Reason; and Necessity, of 
 those which necessarily exist according 
 to the powers of bodies. Ofthese the 
 first is of the nature of good, and is 
 called God, the principle of such 
 things as are most excellent. Those 
 which are consequent, and concauses 
 rather than causes, may be referred 
 to Necessity, and they consist of Idea 
 or Form, and Matter, to which may 
 be added the Sensible (world), which 
 is as it were the offspring of these two. 
 The first of these is an essence un- 
 generated, immoveable, and stable, 
 of the nature of Same, and the in- 
 telligible exemplar of things gene- 
 rated which are in a state of per- 
 petual change: and this is called Idea 
 
 ἘΞ τἀγαϑῶν Al. 
 
302 PYTHAGOREAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 \ » a ~ ΄ 
 και γεννατικῶν εἰμεν τας τρι- 
 Bees, . / A Ἂν 
 τας ουσιᾶας δεξαμέναν yp τα 
 ε ΄ὔ Ae \ Se 
 ομοιωματα εἰς EAUTAV, καὶ OLOY 
 ῃ 
 » , > - Ἂν ΄ 
 ἀναμαξαμέναν, ἀποτελεῖν πάν- 
 
 δε by ΄ ΄, 
 τὰ γεννάματα. ταύταν 
 
 τα 
 “Δ Ν μὲ 
 
 δὲ τὰν Ὕλαν ἀΐδιον μὲν Eppa, 
 Yi oY 
 
 οὐ μὰν ἀκίνατον" ἄμορφον ἦ δὲ 
 
 > ε A > Yes ψ' 
 χαθ᾽ αὑτὰν καὶ ἀσχημάτιστον, 
 ἢ 
 
 δεχομέναν Se πᾶσαν μορφάν. 
 
 τὰν δὲ περὶ τὰ σώματα; με- 
 x τ Ν - θ , 
 
 ριστὰν εἶμεν, καὶ τᾶς θατέρω 
 ’ , δὲ \ 
 
 φύσιος. ποταγορεύοντι Oe τῶν 
 ,ὕ Ν ’ 
 
 Ὕλαν, τόπον καὶ χώραν. Δύο 
 > (Me bi 2 
 
 ὧν αἵδε ἀρχαὶ ἐναντίαι εντί. ὧν 
 ἘΣ , oo Sain Le 
 
 τὸ μὲν Εἶδος λόγον ἔχει ἀῤῥενός 
 σ᾽ ΄ / 
 
 τεκαὶ πατρός" ὧδ᾽ “Tra, θήλεός 
 
 Ν ΄ , δὲ - 
 
 τε καὶ ματέρος. τρίτα δὲ εἰμεν; 
 
 of / \ 
 
 τὰ ἐκ τούτων ἔκγονα. Τρία δὲ 
 Λ iG aN 
 
 ὄντα; τρισὶ γνωρίζεσθαι" τὰν 
 
 , 3 
 pe [ear νόῳ κατ΄ ἐπιστάμαν" 
 
 “ 
 
 ὦ, Δ 
 
 τὰν δ᾽ Ὕλαν, λογισμῷ νόθῳ, τῷ 
 ᾽ ὔ ~ 
 
 μήπω κατ᾽ εὐθυωρίαν νοεῖσθαι, 
 
 > 
 
 ἀλλὰ κατ᾽ ἀναλογίαν. τὰ δ᾽ 
 
 > ΄ 3 θή. Ν 
 
 ἀπογεννάματα; αἰσθήσει καὶ 
 
 δόξᾳ. Πρὶν ὧν ὠρωνὸν γενέσθαι; 
 7 ᾽ , of, 
 
 λόγῳ ἤστην Idea τε καὶ "Tra, 
 \ \ ~ 
 
 καὶ 6 Θεὸς δωμιουργὸς τῶ βελ- 
 
 \ \ Ν 
 
 τίονος. ἐπεὶ δὲ τὸ πρεσβύτερον 
 
 sae Spey ars , . 
 
 κάῤῥον ἐστὶ τῶ νεωτέρω, καὶ 
 
 , \ ~ 
 τὸ τεταγμένον πρὸ TO ἀτάκτω, 
 Ἂ ~ 
 ἀγαθὸς ὧν 6 Θεὸς, δρῶν τε τὰν 
 ͵ ͵ 
 “Tray δεχομέναν τὰν Ἴδεαν καὶ 
 / \ 
 ἀλλοιουμένων, παντοίως μὲν, 
 
 ἀτάκτως δὲ, ἐδεῖτ᾽ ἐς τάξιν 
 
 τάδε ΑἹ. 
 
 or Form, and is to be comprehended 
 only by Mind. But Matter is the 
 receptacle of Form, the mother and 
 female principle of the generation of 
 the third essence, for, by receiving 
 the likenesses upon itself, and being 
 stamped with Form, it perfects all 
 things, partaking of the nature of 
 And this Matter, he 
 says, is eternal, moveable, and of its 
 
 generation. 
 
 own proper nature, without form or 
 figure, yet susceptible of receiving 
 every form: it is divisible also about 
 bodies, and is of the nature of Differ- 
 ent. They also call Matter, Place and 
 Situation. These two, therefore, are 
 contrary principles: Idea or Form is 
 of the nature of Male and Father ; 
 but Matter of the nature of Female 
 and Mother : and things which are of 
 the third nature are the offspring of 
 
 the two. Since then there are three na- 
 
 _ tures, they are comprehended in three 
 
 different ways; Idea, which is the 
 object of science, by Intellect; Matter, 
 which is not properly an object of 
 comprehension, but only of analogy, 
 by a spurious kind of reasoning; but 
 things compounded of the two are 
 the objects of sensation, and opinion 
 or appearance. Therefore, before the 
 heaven was made, there existed in 
 reality Idea, and Matter, and God 
 the demiurgus of the better nature; 
 
 + ἀμόρφωτον Al. 
 
 eae «.. 
 

 
 PYTHAGOREAN FRAGMENTS. 8038 
 
 A ," S59 a ay 
 αὐτὰν ἄγεν, καὶ ἐξ ἀορίστων 
 ~~ ν ͵ 
 μεταβολᾶν, εἴς ὡρισμεναν κα- 
 
 ~ ws c / ἈΝ 
 ταστάσαι. bY ομόλογοι ται 
 / ~ 
 διακρίσεις τῶν σωμάτων yiy- 
 VOTO, καὶ μὴ κατ᾽ αὐτόματον 
 \ , ae - 
 τροπὰς δέχοιντο. ἐποίησεν ὧν 
 ‘ 
 τόνδε τὸν κόσμον ἐξ ἁπάσας 
 ~ an. ἢ 
 τᾶς Ὕλας, ὅρον αὐτὸν κατασ- 
 ~ ~ WF 
 κευώξας τᾶς τῶ ὄντος φύσιος 
 ΕΝ ~ 
 διὰ τὸ πάντα τἄλλα ἐν αὑτῷ 
 Ἂ oe ~ ͵ 
 περιέχεν, ἕνα, μονογενῆ, TEA- 
 » , ee 
 εἰον, ἐμψυχόν te καὶ λογικόν 
 , 
 (χρέσσονα γὰρ τάδε ἀψύχω 
 \ , ͵ 
 καὶ ἀλόγω ἐστόν) καὶ σφαι- 
 \ ho , \ 
 poeides σῶμα" τελειότερον γὰρ 
 ~ of ΄ 3 ~ 
 τῶν ἄλλων σχημάτων ἦν τοῦτο. 
 / 7 4 
 δηλεόμενος ὧν ἄριστον yeaa 
 ~ ~ > / \ 
 ποιεῖν, τοῦτον ἐποίει Θεὸν γεν- 
 \ » ͵ 
 γατὸν, οὔποχα φθαρησόμιενον 
 ΕΝ 7 " ~ 
 ὑπ᾽ ἄλλω αἰτίω, ἔξω τῶ αὐτὸν 
 4 ~ wv 
 συντετογμένω Θεῶ, εἰ ποκῶ 
 
 δήλετο αὐτὸν διαλύεν. 
 
 and since the nature of Elder (Con- 
 tinuance) is more worthy than that of 
 Younger (Novelty,) and Order than 
 of Disorder; God in his goodness 
 seeing that Matter was continually 
 receiving Form and changing in an 
 omnifarious and disordered manner, 
 undertook to reduce it to order and 
 put a stop to its indefinite changes, 
 by circumscribing it with determinate 
 figure: that there might be corre- 
 sponding distinctions of bodies, and 
 that it might not be subject to con- 
 tinual variations of its own accord. 
 Therefore he fabricated this world 
 out of all the matter, and constituted 
 it the boundary of essential nature, 
 comprising all things within itself, 
 one, only-begotten, perfect, with a 
 Soul and Intellect (for an animal so 
 constituted is superior to one de- 
 void of Soul and Intellect): he gave 
 it also a spherical body, for such of all 
 other forms is the most perfect. Since, 
 therefore, it was God’s pleasure to 
 render this his production most per- 
 fect, he constituted it a God, gene- 
 rated indeed, but indestructible by 
 any other cause than by the God who 
 made it, in case it should be his 
 pleasure to dissolve it. 
 
304 
 
 \ Ἁ Ν \ ἃς > / 
 Dis γὰρ δὴ κατὰ τὸν ἐκείνου 
 λόγον οὐχ, ἱκανῶς ὠποδεδεῖχθαί 
 σοι περὶ τῆς τοῦ πρώτου φύ- 
 ͵ ΄ ᾽ 
 σεως φραστέον δή σοι δι 
 ~ ” ε ᾿ς Ἃ 
 αἰνιγμῶν" ἵν᾿ ἄν τι ἡ δελτος ἢ 
 / x ~ > ~ 16 
 πόντου ἢ γῆς ἐν πτυχαῖς παθῃ;, 
 € ἃ \ \ nt z \ 
 ὃ ἀναγνοὺς μὴ γνῷ. ὧδε γὰρ 
 »" A Ν x ΄ Ul 
 yer περὶ τὸν πάντων βασιλεα 
 ree) Τὺ \ Δ. ὦ ef 
 πᾶντ ἐστὶ, καὶ ἐκείνου ἕνεκα 
 , ΗΠ Ava. » « , 
 πάᾶντα᾽ καὶ ἐκεῖνο αἴτιον ἁπαν- 
 των τῶν καλῶν. δεύτερον δὲ, 
 x 
 
 Ν Ἂν 4 \ / 
 περὶ τὰ δεύτερα," καὶ τρίτον 
 
 CRS: 
 
 Ν λ ΄, 2 
 περὶ τὰ τρίτα. ἡ οὖν ἀνθρω- 
 
 7a ‘\ Ἂν " Ne Se 
 πίνη ψυχὴ περὶ αὐτὰ ὀρέγεται 
 ΩΝ ~ a ἣν ͵ 
 
 μαθεῖν ποῖ" ἄττα ἐστὶ, βλέ- 
 
 Toga εἰς τὰ αὑτῆς συγγενῆ, 
 
 e pa aay, = 
 
 ὧν οὖδεν ἱκανῶς ἔχει. Tov δὴ 
 ΄ , ΔΝ ᾿Ξ, 
 
 βασιλέως πέρι καὶ ὧν εἶπον, 
 
 ‘ ~ Ν Ἂ A 
 οὐδὲν ἐστι τοιοῦτο. τὸ δὴ μετὰ 
 
 τοῦτο ἡ ψυχὴ φησίν. 
 
 , eG 
 Τὸν τῶν πάντων Θεὸν nye- 
 
 if ~ " Ν ~ 
 Ya τῶν TE OYTWY KA τῶν 
 [4a 
 
 PYTITAGOREAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 FROM PLATO. 
 
 You say that, in my former dis- 
 course, I have not sufficiently ex- 
 plained to you the nature of the 
 First. I purposely spoke enigma- 
 tically, that in case the tablet should 
 have happened with any accident, 
 either by land or sea, a person, with- 
 out some previous knowledge of the 
 subject, might not be able to under- 
 stand its contents. This, then is the 
 About the king of all 
 things, all things are, and all things - 
 are on account of Him, and He is 
 the cause of all good things. But the 
 second is about things of the second 
 kind, and the third about things of 
 the third kind. Therefore the human 
 
 soul, from its earnest desire to know 
 
 explanation. 
 
 what these things may be, examines 
 those within itself which are akin to 
 them, none of which it possesses in 
 sufficient perfection. Such (imper- 
 fection) however is not the case with 
 regard to the King and those natures 
 of which I spoke.—Plat. Ep. II. p. 
 312, 
 
 FROM PLATO. 
 
 Conjuring the God of all things, 
 the ruler of those which are, and are 
 
 * Serranus translates “ secundum ad secunda, Sc.”—Bekker has “ circa se- 
 cundum secunda, &c.;” but he preserves the accentuation of the text. 
 »» 
 
PYTHAGOREAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 “7 ~ ε , \ 
 μελλόντων, TOY TE ἡγεμόνὸς HUE 
 oF 4 , > ΄ 
 αἰτίου πάτερ κυριῦν εἰζοίάνυν- 
 
 τας. 
 
 90 
 
 about to be, and the sovereign father 
 
 
 
 of the ruler and cause 
 VI, p. 323. 
 
 FROM AMELIUS. 
 
 u ᾿ς 4 ~ 
 ᾿Αμέλιος δὲ tpittéy™ ποιεῖ 
 
 Ν ~ ~ 
 τὸν Δημιουργὸν, καὶ νοῦς τρεῖς» 
 ὩΣ ~ 4 ” . 
 βασιλέας τρεῖς, τὸν ὄντα, τὸν 
 
 uv \ cn > / 
 ἐχόντα, τὸν ὁρῶντα. Οιαφε- 
 L 
 
 » 7 ε 
 
 \ cz 
 psuor δὲ οὗτοι, διότι ὃ 
 
 ~ ~ ” > \, ee 
 πρῶτος νοῦς, ὄντως ἐστὶν ὅ ἐσ- 
 X ΕἸ ‘ 
 τιν. “O δὲ δεύτερος, ἔστι μὲν, 
 > ae 9. “ὦ \ uv Ν ν 
 τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ νοητὸν, ἔχει δὲ τὸ 
 Ni 5 ἢ \ ΄ ΄ 
 
 πρὸ αὕτου, και μετέχει πάντως 
 
 ΓΕ. ‘ ὃ oes ee 
 EXKELYOU, καὶ CLATOUTS “ευτερός. 
 
 εἾ x ,Ἶ͵ Μ \ ‘a 
 Ὁ δὲ τρίτος, ἔστι μὲν τὸ ἐν 
 
 ws ‘ - , ~ 
 αὐτῷ καὶ οὗτος νοητὸν. πᾶς 
 
 A ~~ ~ vw ~ ~ 
 Yap νοῦς, τῷ συξυγοῦντι yonTS, 
 
 , 
 
 6 αὐτός ἐστιν. ἔχει δὲ τὸ ἐν 
 
 τῷ δευτέ, pp, καὶ ὁρῷ τὸ πρῶ- 
 “ A Ἦ 2 € 9» , 
 τον. ὁσῳ γὰρ πλείω ἡ ἀπόστα- 
 
 , 
 σις, τοσοῦτο τὸ ἔχον auvdpi- 
 τερον. Τούτους οὖν τοὺς τρεῖς 
 
 , νΝ ὃ Wisi ὧν , 
 yous “al δημιουργοὺς ὑποτί- 
 
 Ν A ~ 
 δέεται, καὶ τοὺς παρὰ τῷ 
 
 : ; 
 Πλάτωνι τρεὶς βασιλέας, καὶ 
 
 Amelius makes the Demiurgus 
 triple, and the three Intellects the 
 three Kings—Him that eaists, Him 
 that possesses, Him that beholds. 
 And these are different; 
 the First Intellect exists essentially 
 Put the Second 
 
 exists as the Intelligible in him, but 
 
 therefore 
 as that which exists. 
 
 possesses that which is before him, 
 of that, 
 But the 
 Third exists as the Intelligible in the 
 
 and partakes altogether 
 fo) 
 
 wherefore it is the Second. 
 
 Second as did the Second in the First, 
 for every Intellect is the same with 
 its conjoined intelligible, and it pos- 
 sesses that which is in the Second, 
 and beholds or regards that which is 
 the First: 
 the remove, by so much the less 
 that 
 
 for by how much greater 
 
 intimate 15 which possesses. 
 
 These three Intellects, therefore, he 
 > 3 
 
 * This word is generally misquoted as τρέτον, for which I can find no authority. 
 The context of the discourse evidently requires τριττὸν, having before treated of 
 
 the διττὸν double Demiurgus of Plotinus. 
 tain the opinion of Amelius; the rest is the commentary of Proclus. 
 
 ._ The first four, and last five lines, con- 
 Amelius was 
 
 himself a Platonist, and the eldest disciple of Plotinus, though he wrote before the 
 system of the modern Plaronists had acquired the celebrity given it by his 
 
 master. 
 
 RR 
 
306 PYTHAGOREAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 τοὺς παρ᾿ ᾿Ορφεῖ τρεῖς, Pdvyta supposes to be the Demiurgi, the 
 καὶ Οὐρανὸν καὶ ἹΚρόνον. καὶ same with the three kings of Plato, 
 ὁ μάλιστα map αὐτῷ by- and with the three whom Orpheus 
 μιουργὸς, 6 Φάνης ἐστίν. celebrates under the names of Phanes, 
 Ouranus, and Cronus, though, accord- 
 ing to him, the Demiurgus is more 
 
 particularly Phanes.—Proc. in Tim. 
 TT 98: 
 
 FROM ONOMACRITUS. 
 
 ᾿Ὀνομάκριτος ἐν τοῖς ᾽Ορ- Onomacritus, in the Orphies, says, 
 φικοῖς πῦρ καὶ ὕδωρ καὶ γῆν that Fire, and Water, and Earth, were 
 τὴν πάντων ἀρκὴν εἶναι €de- the first principles of all things— 
 
 
 
 γεν. Seatus. Hyp. 111. 4. 136.—Phys. IX. 
 5. 6. 620. 
 FROM ION. 
 
 * Anny δέ μοι τοῦ λόγου; This, says Ion, is the beginning of 
 
 πάντα τρία καὶ πλέον ἔλατ- my discourse. All things are three, 
 
 σον τοῦδε ἐλάσσων τούτων and nothing more or less; and the 
 
 τριῶν ἑνὸς ἑκάστου ἀρετὴ τριάς, . virtue of each one of these three is a 
 
 σύνεσις καὶ χράτος καὶ τύχη. triad consisting of Intellect, Power, 
 and Chance. 
 
 * The emendations to this passage are very numerous. I have translated it 
 according to Lobeck, as follows: ᾿Αρχὴ ἢδε μοι τοῦ λόγου πάντα τρία καὶ πλέον 
 οὐδὲν οὐδὲ ἔλασσον" τούτων τῶν τριῶν, ἑνὸς, ὅς, 
 
PYTHAGOREAN FRAGMENTS. 307 
 
 FROM PHILOPONUS. 
 
 Πῦρ μὲν καὶ γὴν ὁ Παρμενί- Parmenides holds Fire and Earth 
 δης ὑπέδετο᾽ ταὐτὰ δὲ μετὰ as primary principles: but Ion of 
 τοῦ ἀέρος Ἴων ὃ Χῖος ὁ tpayw- Chios, the tragedian, placed them 
 δοποιϊῆς. after Air.—Philoponus. 
 
 FROM PLUTARCHUS. 
 
 Ἢ ὑγρὰ φύσις ἀρχὴ καὶ The moist nature, being the first 
 γένεσις οὖσα πάντων ἐξ ἀρ- principle and origin of all things from 
 χῆς τὰ πρῶτα τρία σώματα the beginning made the three first 
 γῆν ἀέρα καὶ πῦρ ἐποίησεν. bodies, Earth, Air, and Fire.—Plut. 
 
 de 15. 
 
 FROM OCELLUS. 
 
 Ὅροι εἰσὶ τρεῖς, Γένεσις, There are three boundaries, Gene- 
 
 ᾿Ακμή, Τελευτὴ. ration, Summit, Termination.—I. 4. 
 
 
 
 FROM OCELLUS. 
 
 “H τριὰς πρώτη συνέστησεν, The first triad consists of Be- 
 ᾿Αρχὴν Μεσότητα καὶ Tedev- ginning, Middle, and End.—Lyd. de 
 τήν. Mens, p. 20. 
 
ΓΤ 1 Ὁ 
 VO as 
 
 PHAGOREAN FRAGMENTS. 
 
 FROM PLATO. 
 
 id / ε / 
 Λεγουσί τινες ὡς πάντα 
 
 ΠῚ Ν ‘ , i 
 ἐστὶ τὰ πράγματα γιγνόμενα 
 
 ἊΝ , Ν , 
 καὶ γεγομενα καὶ γενησόμενα, 
 
 A \ , \ ss ,ὔ 
 τὰ μὲν φύσει, τὰ ὃε TEXT, 
 
 ACO , 
 τὰ δὲ τύχῃ. 
 
 Some say that all things consist of 
 those which are in the course of gene- 
 ration, those generated, and those 
 about to be generated; the first by 
 nature, the second by art, and the 
 third by chance.— Plat. de Leg. X. 
 
 FROM ARISTOTELES. 
 
 Te τρία πάντ. -.. καῦά- 
 / 
 περ γάρ φασιν οἷ Πυδϑαγόρειοι 
 s »-» Ν ~ 
 τὸ πᾶν καὶ τὰ πάντα τοῖς 
 4 ed e - ‘ Ἀν 
 τρισὶν ὥρισται" τελευτὴ γὰρ 
 ~ / Ἀν. Ν Ν > 
 χαὶ μέσον καὶ ἀρχὴ τὸν apin- 
 Ν ~ i tne ae 
 μὲν ἔχει τοῦ παντός" ταῦτα 
 
 δὲ τὸν τῆς τριάδος. 
 
 All things are three: for as the 
 Pythagoreans say, the Universe and 
 all things are bounded by three: for 
 the End, the Middle, and the Be- 
 ginning, include the enumeration of 
 every thing, and they fulfil the num- 
 ber of the triad.—Aristot. de Ceelo. I. 
 
 FROM ARISTOTELES. 
 
 3 / Ἂς ~ 
 Ayana ye καὶ σπτυδαῖοι 
 ig A ~ es X 4 
 γίγνονται διὰ τριῶν" τὰ τρία 
 \ ~ 2. 
 δὲ ταῦτά ἐστι φύσις, εἶδος, 
 
 λόγος. 
 
 The good and contemplative be- 
 come so through three things; and 
 these three are Nature, Habit, and 
 Reason.—Aristot. Polit. VII. 
 
 FROM DAMASCIUS. 
 
 iy \ , “7 
 
 Τρία οὖν TH πάντα, ἀλλ 
 
 τ σο͵ Ν 
 οὐχ Ἕν, Ὕπαρξις Δύναμις καὶ 
 
 »Ἐνέργεια. 
 
 All things, therefore, are three, 
 but not one; Hyparxis, Power, and 
 Energy.—Damas. Quest. c. 39. 
 
 "πὰ νυ νυ. πσ Ύ ΎΎΌΎΌΟ 
 
COSMOGONY OF THE TYRRHENIANS. 
 
 © > * > 9 - 
 Ἱστοριαν be παρ᾽ αὐτοῖς 
 
 5 aN yw - ΕΣ 
 ἀνὴρ εἐμπειρος συνεγράψετο. 
 ww a} Ἁ ~ 
 Ἐφη γὰρ τὸν δημιουργὸν τῶν 
 
 πάντων Θεὸν δώδεκα χιλιάδας 
 
 ἐνιαυτῶν τοῖς πᾶτιν αὐτοῦ 
 Ξ ΡΟ , 
 φιλοτιμήσασσαι κτίσμασι, 
 
 Ν ) ὃ “ - Ω’ 
 καὶ ταύτας διατεῖναι τοῖς ι 
 = ‘ ” 5 eis, eas) 
 Λεγόμενοις οἰκοις καὶ TH μὲν 
 , ~ 
 a χιλιάδι ποιῆσαι τὸν οὐρα- 
 \ x Ν ~. ~ > ‘ 
 YOV, χαὶ τὴν Vy TH δευτερῷ 
 ~ / ~ 
 ποιῆσαι τὸ στερέωμα τοῦτο 
 XN / 4 
 τὸ φαινόμενον, καλέσας ai- 
 ΕΣ 
 
 τὸν ᾿ οὐρανόν' τῇ τρίτῃ δά- 
 
 \ 
 λασσαν, καὶ τὰ ὕδατα τὰ ἐν 
 
 ~ ~ ΄ é ~ ͵ \ 
 τῇ Yn πάντα τῇ 0, τοὺς 
 φωστῆρας τοὺς μεγάλους, ἥλιον 
 Ν ne a Ν \ » / 
 καὶ σελήνην καὶ τοὺς ἀστέ- 
 pas τὴ ε΄, πᾶσαν ψυχὴν πε- 
 τεινῶν, καὶ ἑρπετῶν, καὶ τε- 
 τράποδα Ὑ, ἐν τῷ ἀέρι, καὶ 
 ~ ~ Ν ~ e ~ 
 ἐν τῇ γῆ, καὶ τοῖς ὕδασι" τῇ 
 ΄ δὴ ἌΡ 
 ς΄, τὸν ἄνδρωπον. Φαίνεται: 
 3 \ Ν a 5 
 οὖν Tag μὲν πρώτας ef χιλιά- 
 ΒΞ 
 δας πρὸ τῆς τοῦ ἀν᾿ρώπου 
 διαπλάσεως παραληλυϊέναι" 
 ‘ \ L wt | 
 τὰς δὲ homes ἐξ χιλιάδας δια- 
 ,ὔ ἈΝ / ~ . 4 
 μένειν τὸ γένος TOY avd pdrrav. 
 \ ᾿ “ 
 ὡς εἶναι τὸν πάντα χρόνον τῆς 
 συντελείας μέχρι χιλιάδας t 
 
 δώδεκα. 
 
 * Kuster proposes αὐτο. 
 
 A certain person among them, well 
 versed in these matters, wrote a his- 
 
 tory, in which he says : That God, the 
 
 ~demiurgus of all things, for the sake 
 
 of giving dignity to his productions, 
 was pleased to employ twelve thou- 
 sand years in their creation; and ex- 
 tended these years over twelve di- 
 In the first 
 thousand years he created the heaven 
 
 visions, called houses. 
 
 and the earth; in the second he made 
 this apparent firmament above us, and 
 called it heaven; in the third, the 
 sea and all the waters in the earth; 
 in the fourth, tle great lights, the sun 
 and the moon, together with the stars; 
 in the fifth, every soul of birds, and 
 reptiles, and quadrupeds, in the air, 
 and in the earth, and in the waters; 
 in the sixth, man. It appears, there- 
 fore, that the first six thousand years 
 were consumed before the formation 
 of man; and during the other six 
 thousand years the human race will 
 continue, so that the full time shall be 
 completed even to twelve thousand 
 years.— Suid. v. Tyrrhenia. 
 
 + Kuster proposes τετραπόδων, which I have adopted in the translation. 
 
 } Kuster proposes χιλιάδων. 
 
THE THEOGONIES. 
 
 
 
 FROM DAMASCIUS. 
 
 Ἔν μὲν τοίνυν ™ ταῖς φε- 
 , 4 6. οι 7 
 ρομέναις ταύταις ῥαψωδίαις 
 
 is ; 
 ᾿Ορφικαῖς εἰ Νεολογία δή τις 
 > ε Ν Ν \ a \ 
 ἐστιν, ἡ περὶ τὸ νοητὸν, ἣν καὶ 
 ΟΝ , 
 ok φιλόσοφοι διερμηνεύουσιν 
 RS MaA ES FAD Say πὸ Sine ΤΟΣ 5 
 ἀντὶ μὲν τῆς μιᾶς TOY ὅλων ἀρ- 
 ~ / / , 
 χῆς τὸν Χρόνον τιϑέντες, ἀντὶ 
 ~ ~ / \ 
 δὲ τοῖν δυοῖν AlSépa καὶ Χάος, 
 A ~ " ~ 
 ἀντὶ δὲ τοῦ ὄντος ἁπλῶς τὸ 
 “, / ἈΝ 
 Boy ἀπολογιζόμενοι καὶ τριάδα 
 ΄ / ~ . > 
 ταύτην πρώτην ποιοῦντες" εἰς 
 / ~ Wy 
 δὲ τὴν δευτέραν τελεῖν ἤτοι τὸ 
 , Ν Ν , ᾽ν Ν 
 κυούμενον καὶ τὸ κύον Woy τὸν 
 Δ Ὁ 
 θεὸν, ἢ τὸν apyntat χιτῶνα, 
 / ἢ 
 ἢ τὴν νεφέλην, ὅτι ἐκ τούτων 
 γα TAS 
 enrpwooner ὃ Φάνης" ἄλλοτε 
 ᾿ oA Ν - / 
 yap ἄλλα περὶ τοῦ μέσου 
 
 ~ \ 
 φιλοσοφοῦσιν. Τοῦτο μὲν οὖν 
 
 * Lob. omits μὲν τοίνυν. 
 
 Φ 
 
 In the rhapsodies which pass under 
 the name ‘of Orphic, the theology, 
 if any, is that concerning the Intel- 
 ligible; and the philosophers thus in- 
 terpretit. They place Chronus (Time) 
 for the one principle of all things, 
 and for the two Ether and Chaos: 
 and they regard the egg as repre- 
 senting Being simply, and this they 
 look upon as the first triad}. But 
 to complete the second triad they 
 imagine as the god a conceiving and 
 conceived egg, or a white garment, 
 or a cloud, because Phanes springs 
 forth from these. But concerning 
 this middle (subsistence) different 
 philosophers have different opinions. 
 Whatever it may be they look upon 
 
 + The intelligible triad of the later Platonists was divided in three sub- 
 sistences, each of which was also called a triad, and composed of subsistences 
 
 bearing analogy to the whole. 
 t Bentley proposes ῥαγέντα. 
 
FROM DAMASCIUS. 
 
 ~ A & \ © 
 ὅποῖον ay ἢ, ὡς τὸν νοῦν, ἢ ὡς 
 \ Μ, 
 δὲ πατέρα καὶ δύναμιν, ἄλλα 
 Μ ὦ >> 
 τινὰ προσεπινόοῦντες cudey 
 Ν 
 τῷ ᾿Ορφεὶ προσήκοντα. Τὴν 
 ~ \ 
 Se τρίτην τὸν Μῆτιν τὸν Ἦρι- 
 io ee 8 © 4 ‘ 
 καπαῖον7 ὡς δύνωμιν, τὸν 
 Φάνητα ὡς πατέρα. 
 ,ὔ 
 Μήποτε δὲ καὶ τὴν μέσην 
 ΄ ,ὔ A ‘\ , 
 τριάδα Sere κατὰ τὸν τρί- 
 ΝΜ 
 μορῴον Sedv, ἔτι κυόμενον ἐν 
 ~ on, . Η δα Ν ᾽ 
 τῷ OD καὶ γὰρ καὶ τὸ μέσον 
 ,ὔ 
 ἀεὶ φαντάζει" συναμφότερον 
 ~ 4 g Ν - 
 τῶν ἄκρων, ὥσπερ καὶ τοῦτο 
 oe 7 3\ Ν v4 
 ἅμα καὶ woy καὶ τρίμορῷφος 
 \ Ν 
 6 δεὸςς Καὶ δρᾷς ὅτι τὸ μὲν 
 27 > \ « / ε % 
 ὠὸν ἐστιν τὸ ἡνωμένον, ὁ δὲ 
 7 ~ 
 τρίμορφος καὶ πολύμορφος τῷ 
 » Ἁ \ , ~ 
 ὄντι Seog τὸ διακεκριμένον τοῦ 
 ἜΘ ΤΥ, Η \ 
 νοητοῦ" τὸ δὲ μέσον κατὰ μὲν 
 \ 2X ” c id ‘ 
 τὸ ὠὸν ἔτι ἡνωμένον, ὃ κατὰ 
 Ν τ oe / 
 δὲ τὸν Sedv ἤδη || διακεκριμένον, 
 Ν δ Ψ'. 
 τὸ δὲ ὅλον εἰπεῖν διακρινόμενον. 
 \ ε 
 τοιαύτη μὲν ἢ συνήδϑης Ὃρ- 
 \ Δ 
 φιχὴ Φεολογία. 
 
 Ἧ δὲ κατὰ τὸν Ἱερώνυμον 
 
 * Lob. omits ὡς τὸν νοῦν. 
 
 311 
 it as Mind; but for Father and 
 Power some of them imagine other 
 things which have no connexion with 
 
 And in the third triad 
 they substitute for it Metis, whilst 
 
 Orpheus. 
 
 they place Ericapzeus as Power, and 
 Phanes as Father. ἢ 
 
 But the middle triad is never to be 
 placed according to the triformed god 
 (Phanes) as absolutely conceived in 
 the egg: for the middle subsistence 
 always shadows out each of the ex- 
 tremes, as should this, which must 
 partake at once both of the egg and 
 of the triformed god. And you may 
 perceive that the egg is the united 
 (subsistence) or principle of union ; 
 and the triformed god, who is multi- 
 form about being, is the separated 
 principle of the Intelligible; but the 
 middle subsistence, being united as 
 far as it relates to the egg, and al- 
 ready separated as far as it relates to 
 the god, may be considered as exist- 
 ing altogether as in the act of sepa- 
 ration: such is the common Orphic 
 theology. 
 
 But the theology delivered by Hie- 
 
 t+ Ἠρικεπαῖον. Lob. 
 
 1 Wolf. and Lob. omit ὡς τὸν νοῦν. Taylor places it after Μῆτιν, and translates 
 this very obscure passage thus: “But conceiving him over and above this as 
 
 father and power, contributes nothing to Orpheus. 
 Metis as intellect, Ericapeeus as power, and Phanes as father.” 
 
 full stop after προσήκοντα. 
 of the passage. 
 
 Bat they call the third triad 
 I have inserted a 
 
 Lob. does the same, though he gives no translation 
 
 § Tay. inserts τὸ τρίτον, which he supposes to be omitted. It appears to me 
 
 to destroy the argument. 
 || εἴδει W. and Hamb. 
 
oe THE THEOGONIES 
 
 , 
 φερομένη zach “Ἑλλάνικον, εἴπερ 
 Ν Ny Je Teed 5 . 
 μὴ καὶ ὁ αὖτος ἐστιν, οὕτως 
 » ¢ : - - 
 ἔχει. “Loup ἦν φησιν ἐξ ἀρχῆς, 
 Jeena ΣΕΌΑΙΡ ink 2 ok, Bera 
 καὶ Ὕλη ἢ ἐξ ἧς ἐπάγη ἡ Γῆ, 
 / 
 δύο ταύτας ἀρχὰς ὑποτιδέ- 
 σ᾽ Ν ~ 
 μενος πρῶτον, Ὕδωρ καὶ Γῆν, 
 / \ ε id 
 ταύτην μὲν ὡς φύσε: σκε- 
 Ν > ~ SA © 4 
 δαστὴν, ἐκεῖνο δὲ ὡς ταύτης 
 , \ Nee 
 κπολλητιχκὸν TE καὶ συνεκτικὸν 
 τὴν ἢ δὲ μίαν πρὸ τῶν δυοῖν 
 »)οε > / (Ee. Αι \ 
 ἄῤῥητον ἀφίησιν, αὐτὸ yap τὸ 
 A ᾿ὔ Ν i Yeni > 
 μηδὲ φάναι περὶ αὐτῆς ἐν- 
 ͵ δι. το Ν » Joe 
 δείκνυται αὐτῆς τὴν ἀπόῤῥητον 
 ,ὔ e Ν \ ΄, > \ 
 φύσιν" τὴν δὲ τρίτην ἀρχὴν 
 ἣν; \ > 7 sad \ 
 μετὰ τὰς δύο γεννησῆναι μὲν 
 ec, / A 
 ἐκ τούτων, “Yoaras φημι καὶ 
 ΑΙ 
 Τῆς, δράκοντα δὲ εἶναι χκεφα- 
 ᾽ 
 ‘ wy ΄ 
 λᾶς εχηντῶώ, προσπεφυκυίας 
 , ΝΣ 5 , 
 ταύρου καὶ Λέοντος, ἐν μέσῳ 
 \ ~ a ” \ 
 δὲ Veod πρόσωπον, ἔχειν ὃ δὲ 
 ir ey ~ Ff / > 
 καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν WAY TTEPA, ὦνο- 
 \ / ΄ 
 μάσϑαι δὲ Χρόνον] ἀγήρατον 
 Ne ~ \ 9 Die 
 καὶ Ἡρακλῆα τὸν αὐτόν" συ- 
 n \ ~ Ν 9 
 velvas δὲ αὐτῷ τὴν ᾿Ανάγχην, 
 ΄ > \ res δ 
 φύσιν οὖσαν τὴν αὐτὴν καὶ 
 ᾿Αδράστειαν ἀσώματον διωρ- 
 / ke > ‘ ~ / 
 γυιωμένην “7 ἐν παντὶ τῷ χόσ- 
 »" 4 » ~ > 
 μῳ TOY περάτων αὑτοῦ ἐφαπτο-- 
 
 , a , τ sf 
 μένην' ταύτην οἶκαι λέγεσϑαι 
 
 * Lob. inserts (ἰλύς) in a parenthesis. 
 
 ronymus and Heilanieus is as fol- 
 lows :—He says that Water was from 
 the beginning, and Matter, from 
 which. the Earth was produced, so 
 that he supposes that the two first 
 principles were Water and Earth ; 
 the latter of which is of a nature 
 liable to separation, but the former 
 a substance serving to congluti- 
 
 -nate and connect it: but he passes 
 
 over as ineffable the one principle 
 prier to these two, for its recondite 
 nature is evinced, in that there is no 
 manifestation appertaining to it. The 
 third principle after these two, which 
 is generated from them, that is from 
 the Water and Earth, is a Dragon 
 having the heads of a Bull and Lion 
 naturally produced, and in the middle, 
 between these, is the countenance of 
 the God: he has, moreover, wings 
 upon his shoulders, and is denomi- 
 nated incorruptible Chronus (Time) 
 and Hercules. Fate also, which is 
 the same as Nature, is connected 
 with him, and Adrastia, which is in- 
 corporeally co-extensive with the uni- 
 verse, and connects its boundaries in 
 harmony. I am of opinion that this 
 
 Creuzer proposes to substitute it. 
 
 t ἐπάγει Hamb.—Wolf. proposes ὑπάγει. 
 
 + Lob. omits from ταύτην. 
 § ἔχει Hamb. 
 
 || χϑόνον W. and Hamb. 
 4] ἀγήρωτον Mon. 
 
 ** διορεγωμενὴν Tay. 
 
 ΞΞ ῸΣ σὰ τὰ ΣΝ δ» ΣΝ 
 
FROM DAMASCIUS, 
 
 ‘ 7 » ‘ \ x 
 τὴν τρίτην ἀρχὴν, κατὰ τὴν 
 oan et ὦ Lies 5 
 οὐσίαν ἑστῶσαν, πλὴν ὅτι ἀρ- 
 σενόδηλυν αὐτὴν ὑπεστήσατο. 
 
 Oe ~ , 
 πρὸς ἔγδειξιν τῆς πάντων γεν- 
 ~ ’ὔ 
 νετιχῆς αἰτίας. 
 Καὶ ὑπολαμβάνω τὴν ἐν 
 ταῖς ῥαψωδίαις δεολογίαν ἀ- 
 ~ Ν ’ 4 > \ 
 φεῖσαν τὰς δύο πρώτας ἀρχὰς 
 μετὰ τῆς μιᾶς πρὸ τῶν δυοῖν 
 τῆς σιγῆς ἢ παραδοδείσης ἀπὸ 
 Led ’ ᾿ ‘ ta ~ 
 τῆς τρίτης μετὰ τὰς δύο ταῦ- 
 > 4 ‘\ > Ν 
 τῆς ἐνστήσασσηᾳι τὴν ἀρχὴν, 
 Ξ , ἘΝ ἢ ΓΑ ΕΣ 
 ὡς πρώτης ῥητόν τι ἐχούσης 
 ὮΝ , Ν > Ὁ 4 
 καὶ σύμμετρον πρὸς ays ρώπων 
 ἀκοάς. Οὗτος γὰρ ἣν ὁ πο- 
 , δεν, ἢ, , » 7 
 λυτίμητος ἐν ἐκείνῃ Χρόνος ἀγή- 
 pares καὶ ΑἸἰδέρος καὶ Χάους 
 ΡΝ , 
 πατήρ᾽ ἀμέλει καὶ κατὰ ταύ- 
 , =z 
 τὴν ὁ Χρόνος οὗτος ὁ δράκων yer- 
 ~ ΄ ΕΝ) 
 VATA, τριπλήγονην T Aivepa, 
 A ἣ ἣν ΄ὔ ΝΜ 
 φησὶ νοερὴν καὶ Χάος ἄπειρον, 
 ” 
 καὶ τρίτον ἐπὶ τούτοις "Ἔρεβος 
 ὀμιχλῶδες" τὴν δευτέραν ταύ- 
 τὴν τρίαδα ἀνάλογον τῇ πρώτῃ 
 , Ν 3 
 παραδίδωσι δυναμικὴν οὖσαν 
 ε as £ si, \ \ 
 ὡς ἐκείνην πατρικήν" διὸ καὶ 
 X ΄ δι΄ δ, , 
 τὸ τρίτον αὐτῆς ᾿Ερεβός ἐστιν 
 > _—~ ἣν Ν , 
 ὀμιχλῶδες, καὶ τὸ πατρικύν TE 
 ‘ »᾿ ~ 
 val ἄκρον Αἰδὴρ οὐχ ἀπλῶς 
 ἀλλὰ νιερῶς t τὸ δὲ μέσον 
 I 2" - 
 αὐτόδϑεν Χάος ἄπειρον, ἀλλὰ 
 ἈΝ > yd ΄ ΡΟ < 
 μὴν ἐν τούτοις, ὡς λέγει, 6 
 , x ΄ ~ , 
 Χρόνος ὠὸν ἐγέννησεν, τοῦ Xoa~ 
 
 - ΄, 
 γοὺῦ ποιουσαᾳ γεννημα χαὶ αὕτη 
 
 * τῆς τῇ σιγῇ Mon. 
 
 t τριπλῆν γονὴν Mon. m. Ἢ 
 
 315 
 
 third principle is regarded as subsist- 
 ing according to essence, inasmuch 
 as it is supposed to exist in the nature 
 of male and female, as a type of the 
 generating principle of all things. 
 And in the rhapsodies I conceive 
 that the (Orphic) theology, passing 
 over the two first principles, toge- 
 ther with the one preceding those two 
 which is deliyered in silence, estab- 
 lishes the third, which is properly 
 posterior to the other two, as the first 
 principle, inasmuch as it is the first 
 which has something effable in its 
 nature, and commensurate with hu- 
 man conversation. For the venerable 
 and incorruptible Chronus (Time) 
 was held in the former hypothesis to 
 be the father of Ether and Chaos: 
 but in this he is passed over, and a 
 Serpent substituted : and the threefold 
 Ether is called intellectual, and Chaos 
 boundless, and the dark cloudy Ere- 
 bus is added to them asa third. He 
 delivers, therefore, this second triad 
 as analogous to the first, this being 
 potential as was that paternal. Where- 
 fore the third subsistence of this triad 
 is dark Erebus, and its paternal prin- 
 ciple and summit Ether, subsisting 
 not simply but intellectually, and the 
 middle derived from it is boundless 
 Chaos. But with these it is said 
 
 Chronus generated the egg, for this 
 
 νοτεςός Mon. 
 
 5S 
 
814 THE THEOGONIES, 
 
 c ἐδ Ν > , 
 ἢ παράδοσις καὶ ἐν τούτοις 
 , . δυάδι Ν , 
 τικτόμενον, ὅτι Kal aro τού- 
 ε / , Ν 
 τῶν ἢ τρίτη πρόεισι νοητὴ 
 ΄ὔ ΓΤ ἢ oo > \ 
 τριάς. Tis οὖν αὕτη ἐστι; τὸ 
 ὠὸν, ἡ δυὰς τῶν ἐν αὐτῷ φύ- 
 Ware \ s / iS 
 σεων ἄῤῥενος καὶ δηλείας καὶ 
 ~ > ͵7 ,ὔ ͵7 
 τῶν ἐν μέσῳ παντοίων σπερμά- 
 ~ Ν ,΄ Ἂν 
 τῶν τὸ πλῆσος" καὶ τρίτον ἐπὶ 
 , 
 τούτοις σεὸν ἀσώματον, πτε- 
 ay ~ 2 ‘ 
 puyas ἐπὶ τῶν ὠμῶν ἐχοντὰα 
 - a > \ ~ ‘ 
 χρυσᾶς, ὃς ἐν μὲν ταῖς λαγὸσι 
 ,͵ 3: , 
 προσπεφυχυίας εἶχε ταύρων 
 - Ἂν Ν - 
 κεφαλὰς, ἐπὶ δὲ τῆς κεφαλῆς 
 δράκοντα πελώριον παντοδα- 
 - - Υ͂ / 
 παὶς μορφαῖς ϑηρίων ἰνδαλλό- 
 ~ A τ 
 μενον. Τοῦτον μὲν οὖν ὡς 
 ’, ͵ 
 νοῦν τῆς τρίαδος ὑποληπτέον, 
 Ν , / 
 τὰ δὲ μέσα γένη τά τε TOA- 
 Ν Ν 
 λὰ καὶ τὰ δύο τὴν δύναμιν, 
 Ye δὲ δι aN > Αἵ AY 
 αὐτὸ δὲ τὸ way ἀρχὴν πατρικὴν 
 Ν 4 / 9 ἊΝ 
 τῆς τριτῆς τρίαδος, ταύτης OE 
 ~ ᾿» 4 Ν f 
 τῆς τρίτης τριάδος τὸν τρίτον 
 ΝΜ ε 
 δεὸν, καὶ 04 ἡ σεολογία Πρω- 
 , > ~ Ν / --» 
 τόγονον ἀνυμνεῖ καὶ Δία καλεῖ 
 4 4 ἌΓΥ ΒΝ 
 πάντων διατάκτορα καὶ ὅλου 
 ~ / Ν \ ~ 
 τοῦ κόσμου, διὸ καὶ Πᾶνα κα- 
 ~ . \ 
 AeioNas. Τοσαῦτα καὶ αὕτη 
 Ss S ἈΠῸ, 
 περὶ τῶν νοητῶν ἀρχῶν ἡ γε- 
 
 / 
 veaoyla παρίστησιν. 
 
 Ἡ δὲ παρὰ τῷ Περιπα- 
 τητικῷ Εὐδήμῳ ἀναγεγραμ- 
 , a er) , 5 
 μένη, ὡς τοῦ Oppews οὖσα 
 
 5 ΄ὔ - \ Nn Bbee ἃ 
 εὐλογία πᾶν τὸ νοητῶν ETIW— 
 
 relation makes it a procession of 
 Chronus, and born of these, in- 
 asmuch as from these ‘proceeds the 
 third Intelligible triad. What, then, 
 is this triad? The egg, the duad of 
 the natures of male and female con- 
 tained in it, and the multitude of the 
 all-various seeds in the middle of it ; 
 and the third subsistence in addition 
 to these is the incorporeal god, with 
 golden wings upon his shoulders, who 
 has the heads of bulls springing forth 
 from his internal parts, and upon his 
 head an enormous serpent, invested 
 with the varied forms of beasts. This, 
 therefore, is to be taken as the Mind 
 of the triad: but the middle proces- 
 sions, which are both the Many and 
 the Two, must be regarded as Power, 
 but the egg as the paternal principle 
 of this third triad. But the third god 
 of this third triad, the theology now 
 under discussion celebrates as Pro- 
 togonus (First-born), and calls him 
 Dis, as the disposer of all things, and 
 the whole world: upon that account 
 he is also denominated Pan. Such 
 are the hypotheses which this gene- 
 alogy lays down concerning the Intel- 
 ligible principles. 
 
 But the cosmogony which is deli- 
 vered by the Peripatetic Eudemus’as 
 being the theology of Orpheus, passes 
 the whole Intelligible order in silence, 
 
 * εὐδέλως Wolf. Hamb.—yuw Mon. 
 
FROM DAMASCIUS. 
 
 Moe 
 πησεν, ὡς παντάπασιν ἀῤῥη- 
 1% ΓΟ) ᾿ , 
 τόν Ἐ τε καὶ ἄγνωστον τρὸ- 
 i / / Ν 
 mot κατὰ διέξοδόν τε καὶ 
 Ν Rigen ΝΙΝ ων το 
 ἀπαγγελίαν" ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς νυκ- 
 x > 4 Ἃς > Ὁ 5.» 
 τὸς ἐποιήσατο τὴν ἄρχην, ap 
 ks Ν 7 \ \ 
 ἧς καὶ ὁ Ὅμηρος, εἰ καὶ μὴ 
 cue] πεποίηται τὴν γενεῶ- 
 . , «“ - > " > 
 λογίαν, Ἱστησιν᾽ οὐ γὰρ ὧπο- 
 ’ 
 δεκτέον t Εὐδήμου λέγοντος ὃ 
 ὅτι ἀπὸ Oueand καὶ Τησύος 
 \ 
 ἄρχεται" φαίνεται γὰρ εἰδὼς 
 Ψ Ne 4 ΄ [ 
 καὶ τὴν Νύχτω μεγίστην οὕτω 
 Ἀ , 
 ϑεὸν, ὡς καὶ τὸν Δία σεβέσ- 
 
 8αι|} αὐτήν. 
 
 315 
 
 as altogether ineffable and unknown, 
 and incapable of discussion or expla- 
 nation. He commences from Night, 
 which Homer also constitutes his 
 first principle, if we would render his 
 genealogy consistent. Therefore we 
 must not put confidence in the asser- 
 tion of Eudemus, that Homer makes 
 it commence from Oceanus and Te- 
 thys ; for it is manifest that he re- 
 gards Night as the greatest divinity, 
 which is implied in the following line, 
 where he says that she is reverenced 
 
 by Jove himself— 
 
 “Ἄζετο γὰρ μὴ Νυχτὶ Som ἀποϑύμιᾳ ῥέζοι. J] 
 He feared lest he should excite the displeasure of swift Night. 
 
 AAW Ὅμηρος μὲν καὶ αὐτὸς 
 ἀρχέσϑγω ἀπὸ Νυκτός. 
 Ἡσίοδος δέ μοι δοκεῖ πρῶτον 
 γενέσϑαι τὸ Χάος ἱστορῶν τὴν 
 ἀκατάληπτον τοῦ νοητοῦ καὶ 
 ἡνωμένην παντελῶς φύσιν κεχ- 
 ληκέναι Χάος, τὴν δὲ τὴν ἘΞ 
 cA > »" ΄ “ 
 πρώτην exeiver παράγειν ὡς 
 Twa ἀρχὴν τῆς ὅλης γενεᾶς 
 τῶν δεῶν" εἰ μὴ ἄρα Χάος 
 oaks: , on nig 
 μὲν τὴν δευτέραν τῶν δυοῖν ἀρ- 
 χῶν, thy** δὲ καὶ Τάρταρον 
 
 ἈΝ νΝ " ,ὕ 
 καὶ Epwra τὸ τριπλοῦν νοητὸν, 
 
 * ἄῤῥηκτον Hamb. 
 + ἀποδεκτέαν Hamb. 
 
 4 1. xiv. 261. 
 
 ὃ λέγοντες Mon. 
 
 Homer, therefore, must be supposed 
 to commence from Night. 
 
 But Hesiod, when he affirms that 
 Chaos was the first produced, appears 
 to me to regard Chaos as the incom- 
 prehensible and perfectly united na- 
 ture of the Intelligible. From thence 
 he deduces Earth ** as the first prin- 
 ciple of all the generation of the gods, 
 unless, perhaps, he may regard Chaos 
 as the second subsistence of the two 
 principles : in which case Earth and 
 Tartarus, and Eros (Love), compose 
 
 + τρόπον or τρόπων Hamb. 
 || cedecSas Mon. 
 
 The printed copies of Homer have ἔρδοι. 
 
 ** The emendation of γῆν for τὴν is proposed by Mr. Taylor, and though I 
 find no authority in the different texts for it, it is evidently requisite not only for 
 the sense but to accord with Hesiod’s Theogony. 
 
316 
 
 x Aw aN - Λ 
 τὸν μεν ἔρωτᾳ ἀντι τοῦ τρίτου, 
 ε a > A 
 ὡς κατὰ ἐπιστροφὴν Secopov- 
 , - iS g > 
 μένην. Τοῦτο yap ovtas ὀνο- 
 μάζει καὶ ὃ ᾿Ορφεὺς ἐν ταῖς 
 ε 4 ly el) 
 ῥαψωδίαις" τὴν δὲ Γῆν ἀντὶ τοῦ 
 / ε / >, “" 
 πρώτου, ὡς πρώτην ἐν στερεῷ 
 ‘ > ΄ ΄ 
 τινι καὶ οὐσιώδει καταστή- 
 ματι παγεῖσαν᾽ τὸν δὲ Τάρ- 
 πατῇ δὴ inl 57 ε ἡ 3ς 
 ταρον ἀντὶ τοῦ μέσου, ὡς 407” 
 πὼς εἰς διάκρισιν παρωκεχινη- 
 
 μένου. 
 
 ie \ Ν 
 ᾿Αχουσίλαος δὲ Χάος μὲν 
 ὑποτισεσσαί μοι δοκεῖ τὴν 
 , > \ ε ΄ yy 
 πρώτην ἀρχὴν, ὡς πάντη ay- 
 Ν 
 γωστον, τὰς δὲ δύο μετὰ τὴν 
 Wy \ se 
 μίαν, Ἔρεβος μὲν τὴν ἄῤῥενα, 
 XN δι QZ 
 τὴν δὲ ϑήλειαν Νύκτα, Tav- 
 \ > NAS, 4 > / 
 THY μὲν ἀντὶ ἀπειρίᾳς, ἐκείνην 
 δον PANE, ΠΣ \ , 
 δὲ ἀντὶ πέρατος" ἐκ δὲ τούτων 
 Nu / / 
 φησὶ ἡ μιχϑέντων Aivépa γε-- 
 », 3» - 
 γέσῶαι ναὶ Epata καὶ Μῆτιν; 
 Ὗ au 
 τὰς τρεῖς ταύτας νοητὰς ὕποσ- 
 ΄ Ν Ν 7 ») 
 τάσεις, τὴν μὲν ἄκρων Αἰδέρα 
 ~ Ν Ν Up 
 ποιῶν, τὴν δὲ μέσην "Ἔρωτα 
 \ Ν Ν , 
 κατ τὴν φυσικὴν μεσότητα 
 ~ Wo ὯΝ \ th 
 τοῦ "Ἔρωτος, τὴν δὲ τρίτην 
 + 
 ne 
 ᾿ τ 
 πολυτίμητον νοῦν. 
 
 Ya 
 
 Mati, nav} αὐτὸν ἤδη τὸν 
 Παράγει 
 Se 3. ᾿ς ΄, > ~ Sy 
 € ἐπὶ τούτοις ex τῶν αὐτῶν 
 
 ν “.. ~ ~ 
 καὶ ἄλλων SeBy πολὺν ὃ apid- 
 ΝΥ \ Ν “Δ ε 
 μὸν κατὰ τὴν Εὐδήμου ἱστο- 
 
 piay.|| 
 
 * <i δὴ Wolf. Hamb. 
 Ἷ καὶ Wolf. 
 
 “ὃ πολλὰ (4. ε. πολλὴν) Mon. 
 
 THE THEOGONIES, 
 
 the three-fold Intelligible, Eros being 
 put for the third subsistence, consi- 
 dered according to its convertive 
 nature. Orpheus also in his rhap- 
 sodies has adopted a very similar 
 disposition, for he places the Earth 
 for the first, being the first that was 
 conglomerated into a compact and 
 essential substance, while he places 
 Tartarus as the middle, as having 
 already, in a manner, a tendency to- 
 wards disunion. 
 
 But Acusilaus appears to me to 
 regard Chaos as the first principle and 
 altogether unknown, and after this 
 one to place the duad, Erebus as the 
 male and Night as the female, the 
 latter being substituted for infinity, 
 and the former for bound; and from 
 a connexion between these were ge- 
 nerated Ether and Eros (Love), and 
 Metis (Counsel), these three being the 
 Intelligible hypostases, of which he 
 places Ether as the summit, Eros as 
 the middle in compliance with the 
 natural intervention of love, and 
 Metis as the third, inasmuch as it 
 is already highly-venerable Intellect. 
 And from these, according to the 
 relation of Eudemus, he deduces the 
 vast multitude of the other gods. 
 
 + φημι Wolf. Hamb. 
 || ἱστορία Mon. 
 
 
 
FROM DAMASCILUS. 
 
 , 4 
 Τὸν δὲ ᾿Επιμενίδην δύο πρώ- 
 ᾿ , 
 τας ἀρχὰς ὑποϑέσδαι ᾿Δέρα 
 ~ e ~ 
 καὶ Νύχτα, δῆλον ὅτι σιγῇ 
 ta Ν , ν᾿ ~ 
 τιμήσαντα τὴν μίαν πρὸ τῶν 
 ~ z ~ 
 δυοῖν, ἐξ ὧν γεννηδῆναι Τάρ- 
 Ϊ \ , > \ 
 ταρον οἶμαι τὴν τρίτην ἀρχὴν, 
 4 ~ ~ 
 ὥς τινα psetny® ἐκ τῶν δυοῖν 
 ~ κ᾿ » 
 συγκραδεῖσαν᾽ ἐξ ὧν δύο τινὰς 
 XxX ‘ y fod 
 τὴν νοητὴν μεσότητα οὕτω κα- 
 ΄, 3. 
 λέσαντα, διό τι ἐπ᾽ ἄμφω διω- 
 , , ” Ἀ \ / 
 τείνει TO τε ἄκρον καὶ τὸ πέρας, 
 ὧν μιχϑέντων ἀλλήλοις ὠὸν 
 Ἄ, - > ~ Ν᾽ 
 γενέσνναι τοῦτο ἐκεῖνο τὸ νοη- 
 \ ~ ~ ~ 
 τὸν ζῶον ὡς ἀληδῶς, ἐξ οὔ 
 ve . 
 πάλιν ἄλλην γενεὰν προελ- 
 
 δεῖν. 
 
 Φερεκύδης δὲ 6 Σύριος ζῶντα 
 
 Ἂν 3 ‘ 
 μὲν εἶναι ἀεὶ καὶ Χϑόνον Ὑ καὶ 
 χϑονίαν τὰς τρεῖς πρώτας ἀρ- 
 
 x Ἂς / / ἈΝ ~ 
 KAS, τὴν μίαν φημί πρὸ τῶν 
 δυοῖν, καὶ τὰς δύο μετὰ τὴν 
 
 Ξ Ν , ~ 
 μίαν" τὸν δὲ Χρόνον ποιῆσαι 
 > - / ε ~ ~ Ὁ 
 ἐκ τοῦ γόνου ἑαυτοῦ Πῦρ καὶ 
 ~ σ, Ἂ 
 
 Πνεῦμα χαὶ Ὕδωρ, τὴν τριπ- 
 Ray οἶμαι φύσιν τοῦ νοητοῦ, 
 2 δ 4 , ~ 
 ἐξ ὧν ἐν πέντε μυχοῖς διῃρη- 
 
 ͵ a« ~ 
 μένων πολλὴν γενεὰν συστῆναι 
 5 ~ ‘ / + 
 
 εῶν τὴν πεντέμψυχον Ὁ χα- 
 - , . AS \ wv 2 
 λουμένην, ταὐτὸν δὲ ἴσως εἰ- 
 
 ~ Ν , Ν 
 πεῖν, τὴν πεντέχοσμον. Περὶ 
 
 * xa) μικτὸν Mon. 
 
 517 
 
 Epimenides affirms that the two first 
 principles are Air and Night : whence 
 it is evident that he reverences in 
 silence the one principle which is 
 prior to the two: from which, I con- 
 ceive, he holds that Tartarus is gene- 
 rated regarding it as a nature in a 
 manner compounded of the two; for 
 some, indeed, regard the principle 
 which is derived from these two as a 
 kind of Intelligible intermediate sub- 
 sistence or mediety, properly so 
 called, inasmuch as it extends itself 
 to both extremities, the summit and 
 the boundary ; for by their connexion 
 with one another, an egg is generated 
 which is properly the very Intelli- 
 gible animal from which again pro- 
 ceeds another progeny. 
 
 But Pherecydes Syrius considers 
 the three first principles to be an 
 Ever-vital subsistence, Chronusy, and 
 an Earthly subsistence; placing, as I 
 conceive, the One prior to the Two, 
 and the Two posterior to the One: 
 and that Chronus generated from 
 himself Fire, and Spirit, and Water, 
 representing, I presume, the three- 
 fold nature of the Intelligible: from 
 which, when they became distributed 
 into five recesses, were constituted a 
 numerous race of gods, called the 
 five-times animated order, equivalent 
 
 + Χρόνον Mon. and Tay. which the following passage evidently requires. 
 
 Ἷ πεντέμνχον Mon. παντέψυχον in τη. 
 
318 
 
 XN / of 
 
 δὲ τούτων ἄλλος ἴσως φανεῖται 
 , - Ν is \ 
 
 καιρός. Τοιαῦται prey οὖν καὶ 
 - ~ / 
 
 τοσαῦται τανῦν παρειλήφνω- 
 ε -Ὁ 
 
 cay ἡμῖν αἱ διὰ μύϑων Ἕλ- 
 ~ / bad \ 
 
 ληνικῶν ὑπονέσεις, πολλῶν καὶ 
 
 ay ~ 
 ἄλλων οὐσῶν. 
 
 Τῶν δε Bapbapwy ἐοίκασι 
 J ~ 
 Βαξυλώνιοι μέν τὴν μίαν τῶν 
 a > Ν ~ ,ὔ 4 
 ὅλων ἀρχὴν σιγῇ παριέναι δύο 
 \ ~ a \ 
 δὲ ποιξιν ἢ Ταυδὲ καὶ “Ana- 
 \ \ Ui 
 σὼν,Ἷ τὸν μὲν ᾿Απασὼν ἄνδρα 
 -" Ἂν 
 τῆς ἢ Ταυδὲ ποιοῦντες, ταὺυ- 
 \ / Ss lad > 4 
 τὴν δὲ μητέρα “εῶν ὀνομά- 
 ζοντες, ἐξ ὧν μονογενῆ παῖδα 
 ψεννησῆναι τὸν Motiv, αὐτὸν 
 Ἔ \ \ , > ~ 
 οἶμαι τὸν νοητὸν κόσμον ἐκ TOY 
 n ν Ὁ , > 
 δυοῖν apy ay παραγόμιενον. ὃ Ἔκ 
 ~ ~ 7) = 
 δὲ τῶν αὐτῶν ἄλλην γενεὰν 
 . ~ / 
 mpocareiy Δαχὴν καὶ Δαχόν. 
 Εἶτα αὖ τρίτην ἐκ. τῶν αὐτῶν] 
 Ν a. 
 Kiocapy καὶ ᾿Ασσωρὸν, ἐξ ὧν 
 -Ὡ Wee 
 γενέσϑαι τρεῖς, ᾿Ανὸν καὶ Ἴλ- 
 λινον nak ᾿Αόν᾽ τοῦ δὲ ᾿Δοῦ 
 Ω \ 
 καὶ Δαύκης υἱὸν yeveodas τὸν 
 ΄ Δ ἫΝ Ὁ Ἂν, 
 Βήλον, ὃν δημιουργὸν εἰναί φα- 
 σιν. 
 -“ U 
 Μάγοι δὲ καὶ πᾶν τὸ ἄρειον 
 , ε Ν ~ / ε 
 γένος, ὡς καὶ τοῦτο γράφει ὃ 
 " \ \ 
 Εὔδημος, of μὲν τόπον, of δὲ 
 , - τὰ 
 Χρόνον καλοῦσι τὸ νοητὸν ἅπαν 
 Nia Tes 2 
 καὶ τὸ ἡνωμένον" ἐξ ob δια- 
 
 κριϑῆναι ἢ Tew dyantiv καὶ 
 
 * εἰπεῖν Mon. 
 
 § προαγόμενον Hamb,. 
 
 THE THEOGONIES, 
 
 to what he might call a five-fold world. 
 But another opportunity may perhaps 
 occur for the discussion of this part 
 of the subject. Such and of a simi- 
 lar description are the hypotheses 
 which are received by us relative to 
 the Greek mythological fables, which 
 are numerous and very various. 
 
 But the Babylonians, like the rest 
 of the Barbarians, pass over in silence 
 the One principle of the Universe, 
 and they constitute Two, Tauthe and 
 Apason; making Apason the hus- 
 band of Tauthe, and denominating 
 her the mother of the gods. And 
 from these proceeds an only-begotten 
 son, Moymis, which I conceive is no 
 other than the Intelligible world pro- 
 ceeding from the two principles. 
 From them, also, another progeny is 
 derived, Dache and Dachus; and, 
 again, a third, Kissare and Assorus, 
 from which last three others pro- 
 ceed Anus, and Illinus, and Aus. 
 And of Aus and Dauce is born a son 
 called Belus, who, they say, is the 
 fabricator of the world, the Demi- 
 urgus. 
 
 But of the Magi and all the Arion 
 race, according to the relation of 
 Eudemus, some denominate the In- 
 telligible Universe and the United, 
 Place, while others call it Time 
 (Chronus): from whom separately 
 
 + ἀπασὼών Mon. ἀπασῶν Ἡ. 1 ἄνδραν τῆς Mon. 
 
 || μισσαρὴ Mon. 
 
FROM DAMASCIUS. 819 
 
 x -" ‘ ν᾿ 
 
 δαίμονα κακὸν ἢ φῶς καὶ σκο- 
 , 
 
 τὸς πρὸ τούτων ὡς ἐνιους λε- 
 
 γειν. 
 
 μετὰ τὴν ἀδιάκριτον φύσιν 
 
 Wa \ 4: -ὰ 
 Οὗτοι δὲ οὖν καὶ αὐτοὶ 
 
 διακρινομένην ποιοῦσι τήν διτ- 
 τήν συστοιχὴν τῶν χρειττόνων" 
 τῆς μὲν ἡγεῖσδαι τὸν ᾽Ὧρο- 
 μάσδη, τῆς δὲ τὸν ᾿Αρειμάνιον. 
 
 Σιδώνιοι δὲ κατὰ τὸν αὐτὸν 
 , Ν ΄ / 
 συγγραφέα πρὸ πάντων Χρόνον 
 / \ 
 ὑποτίϑενται vat Tose καὶ 
 ᾿μίχλην᾽ Πόϑου δὲ καὶ Ὃμί- 
 λ' é ὡς δυοῖν ἀρχῶν 
 χλης μιγέντων ὡς Xx, 
 
 / ΝΜ 
 ᾿Αέρᾳ γενέσϑαι καὶ Αὔραν, 
 Vinh \ " ~ ~ 
 Ἀέρα μὲν ἄκρατον τοῦ νοητοῦ 
 παραδηλοῦντες, Αὔραν δὲ τὸ 
 > "» ~ 4 ~ ~ 
 ἐξ αὐτοῦ κινούμενον τοῦ νοητοῦ 
 
 \ 
 ζωτικὸν προτύπωμω. Πάλιν ὃ 
 ἐκ τούτων ἀμφοῖν “Oro γεννη- 
 
 * 
 
 ~ \ ~ Ἢ 
 Savas κατὰ Ἔ τὸν νοῦν οἶμαι 
 
 \ , 
 τὸν νοητὸν. 
 
 Ὡς δὲ ἔξωϑεν Εὐδήμου τὴν 
 Φοινίκων εὑρίσκομεν κατὰ Μῶ- 
 yout μυδολογίαν, AlSyp ἦν τό 
 πρῶτον καὶ ᾿Αὴρ αἱ δύο αὗται 
 ἀρχαὶ, ἐξ ὧν γεννᾶται Οὐλω- 
 μὲς, 6 νοητὸς Beds, αὐτὸ οἶμαι 
 τὸ ἄκρον τοῦ νοητοῦ" ἐξ οὗ ἑαυ-- 
 τῷ συνελθόντος γεννηθῆναί φησι 
 
 \ ~ με 
 “Χουσωρὸν, ἀνοιγέα πρῶτον, εἶτα 
 
 * μετὰ Mon. 
 
 proceed a Good Divinity and an Evil 
 Demon; or, as some assert, prior to 
 these, Light and Darkness. Both 
 the one, therefore, and the other, 
 after an undivided nature, hold the 
 twofold co-ordination of the superior 
 natures as separated and distinct, 
 over one of which they place Oro- 
 masdes as the ruler, and over the 
 other Arimanius. 
 
 The Sidonians, according to the 
 same writer, before all things place 
 Chronus, and Pothus, and Omichles, 
 (Time, Love, and Cloudy Darkness). 
 And by a connexion between Pothus 
 and Omichles, as the Two principles 
 are generated Aer and Aura (Air 
 and a Gentle Breeze), substituting 
 Air for the summit of the Intelligible, 
 and the Breeze arising from it for the 
 vivifying prototype of the Intelligible. 
 And from these two again is gene- 
 rated Otus (the Night Raven), re- 
 presenting, as I conceive, the In- 
 telligible Mind. 
 
 But independent of the collections 
 of Eudemus we find the mythology 
 of the Phoenicians thus delivered ac- 
 cordimy to Mochus. First was Ether 
 and Air, which are the Two first 
 principles; from these was produced 
 Ulomus, the Intelligible God, and, as 
 I conceive, the summit of the Intel- 
 ligible: from whom, by a connexion 
 
 + μῦχον Mon. 
 
320 
 
 a7, - \ = \ \ 
 ωὐν᾽ τοῦτον μὲν οἶμαι τὸν νοητὸν 
 ~ ve \ \ » ΄ 
 νοῦν λέγοντες, τὸν δὲ ὠνοιγέα 
 ἈΝ Ν 
 Χουσωρὸν, τὴν νοητὴν δύναμιν 
 ᾽ τη 
 « / / Ἂς 
 ἅτε πρώτην διακχρίνασαν τὴν 
 > 4 , 5 Ν 7 
 ἀδιάκριτον φύσιν, εἰ μὴ ἄρα 
 \ x 4 > ‘ Ν \ 
 μετὰ τὰς δύο ἀρχὰς τὸ μὲν 
 a” > Ν lA « Lr \ Ν 
 ἄκρον ἐστὶν ἄνεμος ὃ εἷς, τὸ δὲ 
 / , 
 μέσον οἱ δύο ἄνεμοι Λίψ τε καὶ 
 , αἱ ~ 
 Νότος" ποιοῦσι γάρ πὼς καὶ 
 “ A ~ ~ 
 τούτους ἢ πρὸ τοῦ Οὐλωμοῦ" + ὃ 
 \ 
 δὲ Οὐλωμὸς αὐτὸς ὃ νοητὸς 
 ες -᾿ ‘ 
 etn ἢ νοῦς, ὁ δὲ ἀνοιγεὺς Χου- 
 \ ε A \ \ 
 σωρὸςδ 4 μετὰ τὸ νοητὸν || 
 »Ὦ,ἢ \ \ 
 πρώτη τάξις, τὸ δὲ ὠὸν 6 οὐ- 
 / / \ ~ 
 paves. λέγεται yap ἐξ αὐτοῦ 
 / 2 wi / > 
 ραγέντος εἰς δύο γενέσθαι οὐ- 
 \ ΝΣ Ὁ ~ > 
 ρανὸς “at γὴ Ἵ τῶν διχοτο- 
 
 μημάτων ἑκάτερον. 
 
 , , 
 Αἰγυπτίων ἘἘ δὲ ὁ μὲν Ἐὔ- 
 9. Χ 3 \ Ὁ ~ 
 δημος οὐδὲν aupibes ἱστορξι, 
 \ ~ 
 οἱ δὲ Αἰγύπτιοι καθ᾽ ἡμᾶς φ:- 
 / / 
 λόσοφοι γεγονότες ἐξήνεγκαν 
 "Ὁ Ν 3.2 
 αὐτῶν τὴν ἀλήθειαν χεκρυμ.- 
 / ΕΝ a) 2 i: 
 μένην εὑρόντες ἐν Aiyumtiois 
 ΄ , 3 
 δή τισι λόγοις" ὡς εἴη κατ᾽ ad- 
 Ν ε \ , “ hf. 
 τοὺς ἡ μὲν μία τῶν ὅλων Τ7 
 > Ν / ” ε 
 ἀρχὴ Σκότος ἄγνωστον ὑὕμνου- 
 / \ ~ Ν > 
 μένη καὶ τοῦτο τρὶς ὠἐναφω- 
 γούμενον οὕτως" tas δὲ δύο 
 
 ἀρχὰς Ὕδωρ καὶ Ψάμμον, ὡς 
 
 * τρύτοις Mon. 
 § χουσωροῦ Hamb. 
 ** Αἰγυπτίους Mon. 
 
 || τὸν νοητὸν Hamb. 
 
 THE THEOGONIES, 
 
 with himself, was produced Chusorus, 
 the first expanding principle, and then 
 the Egg: by the latter I imagine 
 they mean the Intelligible Mind ; but 
 by Chousorus, the Intelligible Power, 
 being the first nature which separates 
 an unseparated subsistence, unless, 
 perhaps, after the two principles the 
 summit may be the one Wind; but 
 the middle, the two winds Lips and 
 Notus (south-west and south), for 
 sometimes they place these prior to 
 In which case Oulomus 
 himself would be the Intelligible 
 Mind, and the expanding Chousorus 
 the first order after the Intelligible, 
 
 Oulomus. 
 
 and the Egg Heaven : for it is said, 
 that by the rupture of it into two 
 parts heaven and earth were produced 
 each from one of its two severed 
 parts. 
 
 Of the Egyptian doctrines Eu- 
 demus gives us no accurate infor- 
 mation. But the Egyptian philoso- 
 phers, who are resident among us, 
 have explained their occult truth, 
 having obtained it from certain Egyp- 
 tian discourses. According to them, 
 
 then it appears to be this. The One 
 principle of the Universe is celebrated 
 as Unknown Darkness, and _ this 
 
 three-times pronounced as such: and 
 the Two principles are Water and 
 
 t+ οὐλωμένου H. t ef Mon. 
 q Wolf proposes οὐρανὸν καὶ γῆν. 
 11 ἄλλων. Mon. 
 
“Hpdionos* ὡς δὲ ὃ πρεσβύτε- 
 ᾽ 4, 
 ρος αὐτὸς ᾿Ασκληπιάδης, Ψάμ.- 
 oe, z Ν ᾽ 
 μον καὶ “dap, ἐξ ὧν καὶ μεθ 
 a ~ \ ~ 
 ἃς γεννηθῆναι τὸν πρῶτον Ka- 
 μηφίν" Ἐ εἶτα τὸν δεύτερον ἀπὸ 
 ΄ - XN , 
 τούτου, εἰτα καὶ ἀπὸ τούτου 
 Ν 4 a ~ Ν 
 τὸν τρίτον, as συμπληροῦν τὸν 
 Ὁ. 
 ὅλον νοητὸν διάκοσμον. Οὕτω 
 πὸ Ψ» A 
 μὲν ᾿Ασχληπιάδης. “O δὲ ved- 
 ε 7.» Ἀ ‘A 
 τερος Ἡράϊσκος τὸν τρίτον 
 ὀνομασθέντα ἹΚαμηφὶν ἀπὸ τοῦ 
 πατρὸς καὶ τοῦ πάππου τὸν 
 ἥλιον εἶναί φησιν αὐτὸν δή- 
 Ἂς ~ ἊΝ , > . A 
 που τὸν νοῦν τὸν νοητὸν. ᾿Αλλὰ 
 ‘\ \ Ν 4 » / 
 
 THY μὲν περὶ τούτων ἀκρίβειαν 
 ἐξ ἐκείνων ληπτέον. Ἰστέον δὲ 
 ὟΝ ΠΥ ἢ Von τ , 
 Kab ἐχείνο περί τῶν Αἰγυπτίων, 
 eo , > . ~ 
 ὅτι διαιρετικοί εἰσι πολλαχοῦ 
 
 ~ A ἢ 
 τῶν κατὰ ἕνωσιν ὑφεστώτων, 
 > ‘ ἈΝ Ν \ / 
 ἐπεὶ καὶ τὸ νοητὸν διηρήχασιν 
 εἰς πολλῶν σεῶν ἰδιότητας, ὡς 
 at ~ ~ 
 ἔξεστι μαδεῖν τοῖς ἐκείνων 
 συγγράμμασιν ἐντυχοῦσι τοῖς 
 ,ὔ - eA 
 βουλομένοις, λέγω δὲ τῇ “Hpat- 
 σχου ἀνωγραφῇ τοῦ Αἰγυπ- 
 , > ὦ. ᾿ Ὁ \ \ 
 τίου καὶ ὅλον Λόγου πρὸς τὸν 
 [Lae / xX / 
 Πρόκλον γραφείσῃ τὸν φιλό- 
 ὔ 
 σοῴφον, καὶ τῇ ἀρξαμένῃ γρά- 
 , 
 φεσδαι συμφωνίᾳ ὑπὸ ᾿Ασ- 
 κληπιάδου τῶν ΑἸγυπτίων πρὸς 
 
 τοὺς ἄλλους Θεολόγους. 
 
 FROM DAMASCIUS. 
 
 321 
 
 Sand, according to Heraiscus; but 
 according to Asclepiades, who is the 
 more ancient of the two, Sand and 
 Water, from whom, and next in suc- 
 cession after them, is generated the 
 first Kamephis, and from this a second, 
 and from this again a third, which, 
 they affirm, completes the whole In- 
 telligible distribution. Such is the 
 system of Asclepiades. But the 
 more modern Heraiscus says that 
 the third, who is named Kamephis 
 from his father and grandfather, is 
 the Sun, equivalent in this case to the 
 Intelligible Mind. 
 curacy upon the subject can only be 
 
 But greater ac- 
 
 obtained from these authors them- 
 selves. It must be observed, how- 
 ever, with regard to the Egyptians, 
 that they are often wont to distribute 
 subsistences according to union, as 
 when they divide the Intelligible into 
 the individualities of a multitude of 
 gods, as may be learnt from their own 
 writings by those who will examine 
 them: I refer particularly to the 
 commentary of Heraiscus upon the 
 Egyptian doctrine addressed to Pro- 
 clus the philosopher alone, and to 
 the concordance of the Egyptian 
 writers, begun by Asclepiades and 
 addressed to the other Theologists. 
 
 haug Mon. 
 
CHRONOLOGICAL 
 
 AND 
 
 ASTRONOMICAL FRAGMENTS. 
 
 OF THE GREAT YEAR: 
 
 FROM BEROSSUS. 
 
 Berossus qui Belum interpre- 
 tatus est, ait cursu ista siderum 
 fieri: et adeo quidem id affir- 
 mat, ut conflagrationi atque di- 
 luvio tempus assignet: arsura 
 enim terrena contendit, quando 
 omnia sidera, que nunc diver- 
 sos agunt cursus, in Cancrum 
 convenerint, sic sub eodem po- 
 sita vestigio, ut recta linea exire 
 per orbes omnium possit: inon- 
 dationem futuram, cum eadem 
 siderum turba in Capricornum 
 convenerit. Illic solstitium, hic 
 bruma conficitur. 
 
 Berossus, who thus interprets 
 the Babylonian tradition, says 
 that these events take place 
 according to the course of the 
 stars; and affirms it so posi- 
 tively, as to assign the time for 
 the Conflagration and the De- 
 luge. He maintains that all 
 terrestrial things will be con- 
 sumed when the planets, which 
 now are traversing their differ- 
 ent courses, shall all coincide in 
 the sign of Cancer, and be so 
 placed that a straight line could 
 pass directly through all their 
 orbs. But the inundation will 
 take place when the same con- 
 junction of the planets shall oc- 
 cur in Capricorn. In the first is 
 the summer, in the last the win- 
 ter of the year.—Seneca Nat. 
 Quest. 111. 29. 
 
ASTRONOMICAL FRAGMENTS. 523 
 
 OF THE GREAT YEAR: 
 
 FROM CENSORINUS. 
 
 Ap Agyptiorum vero magnum 
 annum luna non pertinet, quem 
 Greeci Κυνικὸν Latine Canicula- 
 rem vocamus. Propterea quod 
 initium illius summitur, cum pri- 
 mo die ejus mensis, quem vocant 
 Agyptii @d3 Canicule sidus 
 exoritur: nam eorum annus Ci- 
 vilis solus habet dies ecclxv sine 
 ullo intercalari, itaque quadri- 
 ennium eo fit, ut anno m.ccclxi 
 ad idem revolvatur principium. 
 Hic annus etiam Heliacos a 
 quibusdam dicitur: et ab aliis 
 ὃ ἐνιαυτὸς est. Praeterea annus, 
 quem Aristoteles maximum po- 
 tus quam magnum appellat, 
 quem solis et lune vagarumque 
 quinque stellarum orbes con- 
 ficiunt. Cum ad idem signum 
 ubi quondam simul fuerunt, una 
 referuntur. Cujus anni hyems 
 summa est Cataclysmos, quam 
 nostri Diluvionem vocant. Aés- 
 tas autem Ecpyrosis quod est 
 mundi incendium. Nam in 
 his alternis temporibus mundus 
 tum exignesere, tum exaques- 
 cere videtur, hune Aristarchus 
 putavit esse annorum verten- 
 
 tium duum millium cecelxxxiiij. 
 
 In the great year of the Egyp- 
 tians, which the Greeks call the 
 Cynic, and we in Latin the 
 Canicular; ‘the Moon is not 
 taken into consideration : inas- 
 much as its commencement is 
 fixed when Canicula rises upon 
 the first day of that month 
 which the Egyptians call Thoth. 
 For their civil year has only 
 365 days, without any inter- 
 calary day; whence the qua- 
 drennium so adjusts itself, that 
 in the 1461st year the revo- 
 lution is completed. This year 
 is by some called the Helia- 
 cal, by others the Eniautus, or 
 The Year. But the year which 
 Aristotle calls the greatest, ra- 
 ther than the great, is that in 
 which the sun, moon and all 
 the 
 
 courses, and return to the same 
 
 planets complete their 
 sign from which they originally 
 started together. The Winter of 
 this year is the Cataclysm, which 
 we call the Deluge: but its 
 Summer is the Eepyrosis, that is 
 the Conflagration of the world. 
 For at these alternate seasons 
 
 the world is burned and de- 
 
324 
 
 Aretes Dyrrhachinus quinque 
 millium dlij. Herodotus et 
 Linus x. millium dece. dierum 
 ΧΙ]. dececelxxxiij. Orpheus 
 Cassandrus tricies 
 Alii 
 
 vero infinitum esse, nec in se 
 
 centum Xx. 
 
 sexies centum millium. 
 
 unquam reverti existimaverunt. 
 
 CHRONOLOGICAL AND 
 
 luged. Aristarchus supposes 
 this periodical revolution to 
 consist of 2484 years; Aretes 
 of Dyrrhachium of 5552; He- 
 rodotus and Linus of 10,800; 
 “ον ον. Of 18,984; Orpheus 
 of 120,000; Cassandrus of 
 136,000. Others suppose it to 
 be infinite in duration, and that 
 the celestial bodies never again 
 coincide in their original posi- 
 tions. —-Censorinus de Natali 
 Die. 
 
 OF THE CHRONOLOGICAL ERAS: 
 
 FROM CENSORINUS. 
 
 Nunc vero id intervallum tem- 
 poris tractabo, quod Historicon 
 Varro appellat, hic enim tria 
 discrimina temporum esse tra- 
 dit. Primum ab hominum prin- 
 cipio ad Cataclysmum priorem, 
 secundum ad Olympiadem pri- 
 mam; quod quia in eo multa 
 fabulosa referuntur Mythicon 
 nominatur. Tertiam a prima 
 Olympiade ad nos quod dicitur 
 Historicon, quia res eo geste 
 veris historiis continentur. 
 
 I wit now treat of that interval 
 of time which Varro calls His- 
 
 ‘toric ; for he divides the times 
 
 into three parts. The first from 
 the beginning of mankind to 
 the former Cataclysm. The se- 
 cond, which extends to the first 
 Olympiad, is denominated My- 
 thic, because in it the fabulous 
 achievements are said to have 
 The third, which 
 extends from the first Olym- 
 piad to ourselves, is called His- 
 
 happened. 
 
 toric, because the actions which 
 have been performed in it are 
 related in authentic history. 
 

 
 ASTRONOMICAL FRAGMENTS. 
 
 Primum tempus sive habuit 
 initium, seu semper fuit; certe 
 quot annorum fuit, non potest 
 comprehendi. Secundum non 
 plane quidem scitur, sed tamen 
 ad mille circiter et de annos 
 esse creditur a priore scilicet 
 Cataclysmo quem dicunt Ogy- 
 gis ad Inachi regnum annis cir- 
 citer ecce hine ad Olympiadem 
 primam paulo plus ccce quos 
 solos quamvis Mythici tem- 
 poris postremos tamen quia a 
 memoria scriptorum proximos 
 quidam certius diffinire voluere, 
 et quod Sosibius scripsit esse 
 ecclxxxxv, Eratosthenes autem 
 septem et ccec, Timzeus ceccxvij, 
 Orethres clxiiij. Et preeterea 
 multi diverse, quorum etiam ip- 
 sa dissentio incertum esse de- 
 clarat. 
 
 De tertio autem tempore fuit 
 aliqua inter auctores dissensio 
 in sex septemve tantum modo 
 Sed hoe quod- 
 cunque caliginis Varro discus- 
 
 annis versata. 
 
 sit, et pro cetera sua sagacitate 
 nunc diversarum civitatum con- 
 ferens tempora, nunc defectus 
 eorumque intervalla retro dinu- 
 
 325 
 
 The first period either had 
 some beginning, or had endured 
 from eternity ; however that 
 may be, it is impossible to make 
 out what was the number of its 
 Neither is the second 
 period accurately determined, 
 
 years. 
 
 yet it is believed to contain 
 about 1600 years; but from 
 the former Cataclysm, which 
 they call that of Ogyges to the 
 reign of Inachus, about 400 
 years, from thence to the first 
 Olympiad, something more than 
 400; of which alone, inasmuch 
 as they are the last years of 
 the Mythic period, and next 
 within memory, certain writers 
 have attempted more accurate- 
 ly to determine the number. 
 Thus Sosibius writes that they 
 were 395; Eratosthenes, 407 ; 
 Timeus, 417; Orethres, 164. 
 Many others also have different 
 opinions, the very discrepancy 
 of which shews the uncertainty 
 in which it is involved. 
 Concerning the third interval, 
 there was also some disagree- 
 ment among different writers, 
 though it is confined within a 
 period of only six or seven 
 years. Varro has, however, ex- 
 amined the obscurity in which 
 it is involved, and comparing 
 with his usual sagacity the 
 
326 
 
 merans eruit verum, lucemque 
 ostendit; per quam numerus 
 certus non annorum modo, sed 
 et dierum perspici possit. 
 
 Secundum quam rationem ni 
 fallor hic annus, cujus velut in- 
 dex et titulus quidam est Ul- 
 pli et Pontiani consulatus, ab 
 Olympiade prima mM. est et 
 xij. ex diebus duntaxat esti- 
 vis, quibus Agon Olympiacus 
 celebretur, a Roma autem con- 
 dita dececlxxxxi. et quidem ex 
 
 Palilibus, unde urbis anni nu-- 
 
 merantur. Eorum vero anno- 
 rum quibus Julianis nomen est 
 eclxxxiij. sed ex die Kal. Jan. 
 unde Julius Cesar annis a se 
 At 
 
 eorum qui vocantur anni Au- 
 
 constitu fecit principium. 
 
 gustani cclxv perinde Kal. Jan. 
 et ante diem xvj Kal. Februari 
 Ju. Czesar, divi filius imperator 
 Augustus, sententia Numatil 
 
 Planci a senatu ceterisque ci- 
 
 vibus appellatus est, se septi- 
 mum et M. Vipsano Agrippa 
 Consulibus. 
 
 CHRONOLOGICAL AND 
 
 chronicles and annals of differ- 
 ent states, calculating the in- 
 tervals wanted, or to be added 
 by reckoning them backwards, 
 has at length arrived at the 
 truth, and brought it to light. 
 So that not only a determinate 
 number of years, but even of 
 days can be set forth. 
 According to which calcula- 
 tions, unless 1 am greatly de- 
 ceived, the present year, whose 
 name and title is that of the 
 consulships of Ulpius and Pon- 
 tianus, is from the first Olym- 
 the 1014th, reckoning 
 from the summer, at which 
 time of the year the Olympic 
 
 piad 
 
 games are celebrated; but from 
 the foundation of Rome it is the 
 991st; but this is from the Pa- 
 lilia (21st April), from which 
 the years, ab urbe condita, are 
 reckoned. But of those years, 
 which are called the Julian 
 years, it is the 283d, reckoning 
 from the Kalends of January, 
 from which day of the year Ju- 
 lius Czesar ordered the begin- 
 ning of the year to be reckon- 
 ed. But of those years which 
 are called the Augustan it is 
 the 265th, reckoning also from 
 the Kalends of January of that 
 year, in which, upon the 16th 
 of the Kalends of February 
 

 
 ASTRONOMICAL FRAGMENTS. 
 
 Sed Egyptii qui biennio ante 
 in potestatem ditionemque Po- 
 puli Romani venerunt, habent 
 Augustorum annorum cclxviii. 
 nam ut a nostris ita ab Mgyptiis 
 quidam anni in litteras relati 
 sunt, ut quos Nabonnagarii no- 
 minant, qui a primo imperii ejus 
 anno consurgant, quorum hic 
 deccelxxxvi est. 
 
 Item Philippi qui ab excessu 
 Alexandri magni numerantur, 
 et ad hucusque perducti annos 
 dixii consumant. Sed horum 
 initia semper a die primo men- 
 ‘sis ejus summuntur, cui apud 
 Egyptios nomen est Thoth, 
 quoque hic anno fuit ante diem 
 vij Kal. Julii cum ab hine annos 
 centum U]pio et Brutio presente 
 Rome conss. iidem dies fue- 
 runt ante diem xii Kal. August. 
 quo tempore solet Canicula in 
 Egypto facere exortum. Quare 
 scire etiam licet anni illius mag- 
 
 327 
 
 (15th), the son of Divus Julius 
 Cesar was saluted Emperor 
 and Augustus, on the motion of 
 Numatius Plancus, by the se- 
 nate and the rest of the citizens 
 in the consulship of himself for 
 the seventh time, and M. Vip- 
 sanus Agrippa. 
 
 But the Egyptians, who two 
 years before had been reduced 
 under the dominion of the Ro- 
 man people, reckon 268 Au- 
 gustan years: for by the Egyp- 
 tians, in like manner as by 
 ourselves, certain years are re- 
 corded, and they call their era 
 the Era of Nabonnagarius, and 
 their years are calculated from 
 the first year of his reign, of 
 which years the present is the 
 986th, 
 
 The Philippic years also are 
 used among them, and are cal- 
 culated from the death of Alex- 
 ander the Great, and from 
 thence to the present time 562 
 years have elapsed. But the 
 beginning of these years are 
 always reckoned from the first 
 day of that month, which is 
 called by the Egyptians Thoth, 
 which happened this year upon 
 the 7th of the Kalends of July, 
 (25th of June); for a hundred 
 years ago from the present year 
 of the consulship of Ulpius and 
 
328 
 
 ni qui ut supra dictum est so- 
 laris et canicularis et trieteris 
 vocatur, nunc agi vertentem 
 annum centessimum. 
 
 Initia autem istorum anno- 
 rum propterea notavi, ne quis 
 nesciat voluntates que non mi- 
 nus diversze sint quam opiniones 
 Philosophorum. Idcirco aliis a 
 novo sole, id est a brumali, ab 
 zstivo solstitio plerisque ab 
 zequinoctio verno partim ab au- 
 tumnali zequinoctio, quibusdam 
 ab ortu Vergiliarum, nonnullis 
 ab earum occasu, multis a Canis 
 exortu incipere annus naturalis 
 videtur. 
 
 CHRONOLOGICAL AND 
 
 Brutius, the same fell upon the 
 12th of the Kalends of August 
 (21st July), on which day Ca- 
 nicula regularly rises in Egypt. 
 Whence we know that of this 
 great year which was before 
 mentioned under the name of 
 the Solar Canicular or Trieteris, 
 by which it is commonly called, 
 the present current year, must 
 be the 100th. 
 
 I have been careful in point- 
 ing out the commencement of all 
 these years lest any one should 
 not be aware of the customs in 
 this respect, which are not less 
 various than the opinions of the 
 Philosophers. Itis commenced 
 by some with the new Sun, that 
 is at the winter solstice, by 
 many at the summer solstice ; 
 others again reckon from the 
 vernal or from the autumnal 
 equinox. Some also begin the 
 year from the rising or setting 
 of Vergilia (Pleides), but many 
 from the rising of the Dogstar. 
 
 OF THE NERUS: 
 
 FROM JOSEPHUS. 
 
 EMEITA καὶ δι’ ἀρετὴν καὶ 
 ‘ > , τ 3 , 
 τὴν εὐχρηστίαν, ὧν ἐπενόουν, 
 
 ἀστρολογίᾳς καὶ γεομετρίας, 
 
 WHEREFORE on account of their vir- 
 tue, as well as for the perfection of 
 the arts of astronomy and geometry, 
 

 
 ASTRONOMICAL FRAGMENTS. 
 
 , ~ ~ 
 πλέον Cay. τὸν Θεὸν αὐτοῖς πα- 
 ~ oe > > > 
 ρασχεῖν. ἅπερ οὐκ ny ἀσφα- 
 ~ ~ ~ / 
 ABs αὐτοῖς προειπεῖν, μὴ ζή- 
 
 ε ," 2 4 eodX 
 σασιν ἑξακοσίους ἐνιαυτούς" διὰ 
 , \ ε / > Ὁ 
 
 τοσούτον γὰρ ὁ μέγας ἐνιαντὸς 
 
 πληροῦται. 
 
 829 
 
 which they invented, God permitted 
 them (the Patriarchs) a longer life: 
 inasmuch as they would have been 
 incapable of predicting any thing with 
 certainty, unless they lived six hun- 
 dred years: for such is the period of 
 the completion of the great year.— 
 Jos. Ant. lib I. ς. 3. 
 
 OF THE SARUS: 
 
 FROM SUIDAS. 
 
 ΣΑΡΟΙ. μέτρον καὶ apidpds 
 - ͵ 
 
 παρὰ Χαλδαίοις, of γὰρρκ' σα- 
 
 pol, ποιοῦσιν ἐνιαυτοὺς Box’, 
 
 ε / ͵ > \ 
 
 οἱ γίνονται τη ἐνιαυτοὶ καὶ 
 
 μῆνας ἕξ. 
 
 Sarvs: a measure and number among 
 the Chaldeans: for 120 Sari, make 
 2222 years. Each Sarus is there- 
 fore equal to 18 years and 6 months. 
 —Suid. v. Sarus. 
 
 OF THE RISING OF THE DOGSTAR: 
 
 FROM THEON ALEXANDRINUS. 
 
 ΠΕΡῚ τῆς τοῦ κυνὸς ἐπιτολῆς 
 ὑπόδειγμα. ἢ 
 
 Ἐπὶ τοῦ ρ΄ ἔτους Διοκλητια- 
 νοῦ περὶ τῆς τοῦ χυνὸς ἐπιτολῆς 
 ὑποδείγματος ἕνεκεν λαμβάνο- 
 μεν τὰ ἀπὸ Μενοφρέως ἕως τῆς 
 
 λήξεως Αὐγούστου ὁμοῦ τὰ ἐπι- 
 
 Formuta to find the rising of the 
 Dogstar. 
 
 For example, if we would find the 
 rising of the Dogstar in the 100th 
 year of Diocletianus, we take the 
 years of Menophres to the end of 
 
 the era of Augustus. These years 
 
 * The treatise containing the demonstration of this rule, I believe is lost. 
 
 UU 
 
330 
 
 , wv Vep%, 3 
 συναγόμενα ETN AXE "οἷς ἐπι- 
 προστιδοῦμεν τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρ- 
 
 ~ ~ U / 
 xing Διοκλητιανοῦ etn p γί- 
 wv / 
 γνοντῶι ὁμοῦ ern arpe. Τούτων 
 ον » iY 
 λαμβάνομεν τὸ ὃ μέρος, ὃ 
 ἐστι wus’. Τούτοις προστι- 
 , ε ‘ , 4 
 Vévres ἡμέρας πέντε, γίνονται 
 ͵ 
 υλα΄. "And τούτων ἀφελόντες 
 \ / I 3 
 τὰς τότε τετραετηρίδας οὔσας 
 ρβ΄, λοιπὸν καταλείπονται ἡμέ- 
 ραι ταῦ" ταύτας ἀπόλυσον 
 ἀπὸ Θὼνδ α', διδόντες ἑκάστῳ 
 ͵ 
 μηνὶ ἡμέρας λ΄, ὡς εὑρίκεσδεαι 
 τὴν ἐπιτολὴν ἐπὶ τοὺς Τ Διο- 
 -Ὁ ᾿ 
 κλητιανοῦ ᾿Επιφὶ xv’. Ὁμοίως 
 
 ΄ aN ie 4 u 
 ποίει ἐπὶ ὁτουδήποτε χρόνου. 
 
 CHRONOLOGICAL FRAGMENTS. 
 
 summed up are 1605; to which if we 
 add the 100 years from the beginning 
 of the reign of Diocletianus,* we have 
 1705. Let us take the fourth part of 
 these, that is 426, and taking them 
 as days, 7 add to them 5 more, and 
 they become 431. From these deduct 
 the quadrienniums, which are 102, 
 and there will remain 329 days. Dis- 
 tribute these into months of 30 days 
 each, from Thoth, the first day of the 
 year, and it will thus be found that 
 the rising of the Dogstar in the 100th 
 year of Diocletianus, falls upon the 
 29th of Epiphi. Use the same rule 
 for any other time.-—MS. Ex cod. 
 reg. Gall. gr. No. 2390, fol. 154. 
 
 * The era of Diocletianus was a new era, which succeeded that of Augustus. 
 + The fourth part or number of leap years gives, of course, the number of 
 
 intercalated days, 426. 
 1 Qy. τοῦ ρ΄. 
 
AN 
 
 INQUIRY 
 INTO THE 
 METHOD, OBJECTS, AND RESULT 
 or 
 ANCIENT AND MODERN PHILOSOPHY, 
 AND INTO 
 
 THE TRINITY OF THE GENTILES. 
 
io ® oy ΒΝ 
 «πῶ Drea 
 ἐὰ ‘hy See 
 
 MUR OF 
 
 we 
 
 "ὧι ᾿ <0) Sn 
 MTA Ok AG MO 
 7 ‘2 
 
 
 
PHILOSOPHICAL INQUIRY. 
 
 In the Introductory Dissertation I have ventured to offer some 
 speculations upon the Trinity and Theology of the Gentiles, 
 which differ widely from the opinions of almost all who have 
 written upon the subject; I would therefore lay before the reader 
 such grounds for the opinion as have induced me to adopt it. 
 But I find it impossible to do so without instituting a short com- 
 parative inquiry into the method, objects and result of the an- 
 cient and modern systems of Philosophy; and I trust it will not 
 be deemed misplaced, for I conceive that in the neglected writings 
 of the ancients there lies concealed a mine of metaphysical know- 
 ledge of such practical utility as would amply repay the trouble 
 of opening it again. 
 
 If we were to ask, what was conceived to be the great engine 
 of invention and discovery among the ancients, it is highly pro- 
 bable we should be answered that it was Syllogism; and if we 
 were to ask the same question relative to modern science, we 
 should be unhesitatingly assured that it was Induction; and pos- 
 sibly at the same time we might be told, that the method of the 
 ancients was something worse than useless. Yet, when we come 
 to consider, that in all ages human nature has been the same, and 
 that such admirable productions have been the result of human 
 effort both in ancient and modern times, we shall find reason to 
 suspect that the methods of discovery, or the tools really used in 
 all ages, have been much alike, though their names may have been 
 
334 PHILOSOPHICAL 
 
 misapplied, or they may have been used without having had any 
 distinct appellations assigned them. 
 
 By the Inductive method we are supposed to go about to 
 collect, by experience and observation, all the facts and circum- 
 stances within our reach, relative to the subject in hand. We 
 must examine them in every light, compare their similarities, and 
 mark their differences ; we must reject whatever does not properly 
 relate to the subject, and conclude upon the affirmatives that are 
 left. By these means, from the individuals we rise to some 
 general proposition, and we rest assured in its truth as proved 
 experimentally. 
 
 To take a common instance: A child that has been burnt by 
 a flame naturally expects the same result from the same cause ; 
 indeed he is said to feel sure of it from experience: and in the 
 expectation of the same result from similar causes, he is said to 
 reason by a species of Induction, though not founded on an en- 
 larged experience. But by trying experiments upon all objects 
 which have the appearance of flame, he would learn to distinguish 
 such as are hurtful from such as are otherwise, and excluding 
 those that are harmless, he arrives at the conclusion, that all such 
 objects of a particular kind are hurtful. 
 
 Now, in this statement of the process, it appears to me that 
 two very different instruments are used ; the first of which seems 
 to be Analogy, ἀναλογία, a reasoning upwards from the known to 
 the unknown, the great instrument of Invention and Generaliza- 
 tion, which provides, as it were, subjects for the exercise of In- 
 duction; which Induction, ἐπαγωγὴ, seems to be rather the col- 
 lection and examination of experiments, and the drawing a con- 
 clusion therefrom; and as this conclusion cannot be extended 
 beyond what is warranted by the experiments, the Induction is 
 an Instrument of Proof and Limitation. A person that has been 
 burnt by a flame is positively certain that he will be burnt again 
 if he try it; he argues only from same to same, and is sure of it 
 by experience; and it is upon this innate natural expectation that 
 all physical science is founded. By analogy he argues that all 
 flames will burn him, he argues from like to like, he generalizes 
 
INQUIRY. $35 
 
 and draws an inference; and I conceive it is by this analogical 
 reasoning that all science is advanced. The inference which he 
 thus draws a priori, is merely an hypothesis, ὑπόδεσις, a supposi- 
 tion, probable indeed, but far from satisfactory. But when he 
 brings it to the proof by induction, and collects experiments, he 
 either confutes, proves, or limits this hypothesis to something 
 not quite so general. 
 
 This analogical reasoning, when it is extended only from in- 
 dividual to individual of the same species, is commonly called 
 experience, and not analogy; and from the perfect uniformity of 
 nature, perhaps not improperly: thus, we say, we know by ez- 
 perience that all stones gravitate to the earth. But when we ex- 
 tend it from species to species of the same genus, it is analogy 
 properly so called. If from the gravitation all stones we reason 
 to that of apples, we reason by analogy, from like to like; we 
 obtain a probable conclusion, not satisfactory till experiment be 
 directed to the point, and it be proved. Having thus included 
 apples as well as stones, we may proceed from one species to 
 _ another by the same process of analogy and proof, till all bodies 
 upon the surface of the earth be included under the general law 
 of gravitation, whence we may rise to more general propositions. 
 And I am inclined to think that such has been the common pro- 
 cess of discovery in all ages of the world. 
 
 When Sir I. Newton, from the fall of an apple, was led to 
 the consideration of the moon’s gravity, he is said to have made 
 the discovery by Induction; which is true as far as the proof of 
 it went. But it is manifest, that at first he merely formed a pro- 
 bable hypothesis by Analogy, and then laboriously brought it to 
 the test of observation; and it is highly probable that the hy- 
 pothesis he formed was, that the moon gravitated to the earth 
 with a constant force, instead of a force varying inversely as the 
 square of the distance; which most likely was the result of an- 
 other hypothesis, after he had proceeded so far as to ascertain 
 that she did really gravitate, but not according to the law pre- 
 sumed. 
 
 When Harvey observed the valves in the veins he is com- 
 
336 PHILOSOPHICAL 
 
 monly said to have made the discovery of the circulation of the 
 blood, by reasoning from Final causes, or by asking of nature for 
 what purpose such valves could be intended: but perhaps he 
 might have asked the question for ever, unless the analogy be- 
 tween the valve and that of a pump had suggested a plausible 
 hypothesis, which he proved by repeated experiments directed to 
 the point. 
 
 Analogy, so much slighted and overlooked, and to which such 
 an inferior part in the advancement of science has been assigned, 
 and that too with so much suspicious caution, appears to be the 
 great instrument of generalization and invention by which hy- 
 potheses are supplied, which are most commonly the subjects for 
 the exercise of Induction. By Induction, as usually understood, 
 we make it a rule to exclude all hypotheses: first of all, we col- 
 lect the experiments, and having obtained these, we are next to 
 examine them and compare them; we reject the irrelative and 
 negative, and conclude upon the affirmatives that are left. By this 
 means, says Lord Bacon, we question nature, and conclude upon 
 her answers: yet I would venture to suggest, that, ninety-nine 
 times out of a hundred, the Analogy or comparison precedes 
 the collection of the experiments; some resemblance is observed, 
 some hypothesis is started, which is the subject that is brought to 
 the test of Induction. By this the hypothesis is either proved, or 
 confuted, or more commonly limited to something less general. 
 I would not be understood to assert that the common inductive 
 method is barren, for, no doubt, discoveries are sometimes so 
 made; but thousands and thousands of inventions are brought 
 into play, the result merely of analogy and a few experiments, or 
 a single experimentum crucis. By the common method proposed 
 we take too wide a range, we embrace the whole subject at once, 
 and require the completion of its natural history, but by the 
 proper use of Analogy as a guide, we step cautiously but from 
 one species to the next. 
 
 Induction has two instruments of operation; Experiment for 
 all things within our reach, and Observation for those beyond us. 
 And of these Observation is less efficient than Experiment, for it 
 
INQUIRY. 337 
 
 is comprehended in it. By Induction mithout Analogy we first 
 ask innumerable irrelative and impertinent questions of nature, 
 and then make use of Observation upon the experiments in hand: 
 but by Induction with Analogy we try Experiments for a specific 
 purpose, and obtain specific answers to the point. 
 
 Having thus obtained a general Jaw or fact for an entire 
 genus, we may proceed in the same manner from this genus to 
 the next, till the whole order be included under the same or 
 some more general law: thus at length we may arrive at certain 
 most general laws, beyond which it may not be within our power 
 to proceed. And the progress of science in the ascending scale 
 consists in rising from Individuals to Generals and Universals. 
 
 Having obtained these general laws or universals, from them 
 we may extend discovery in what may be termed the descending 
 scale: and here Syllogism, in its common acceptation, has its 
 use. Thus, in the science of mixed Mathematics, having obtained 
 certain general laws, physical facts, &c., these, with the common 
 principles of pure mathematics, serve as data from which mathe- 
 matical discovery may be extended downwards. Every mathe- 
 ‘matical demonstration by Synthesis is no other than a chain of 
 Syllogism. And as an instrument of invention Syllogism may in 
 this case supply corollaries; as in the former, Induction might yield 
 discoveries without the help of analogy. Yet a very slight con- 
 sideration will show, that here also Analogy is the great engine of 
 invention by which hypotheses or suppositions are supplied ; 
 and that in the descending scale Syllogistic Demonstration, as 
 Induction in the ascending, is the grand instrument for confuting, 
 proving, or limiting those hypotheses. 
 
 But among the ancients Syllogism is said to be the great en- 
 gine of discovery: and though I have not had sufficient oppor- 
 tunities of investigating the truth of the supposition, it has often 
 struck me, that by the Syllogistic method the ancients meant 
 neither more nor less than this combination of Analogy and Proof; 
 and that the method of reasoning from Individuals to Universals, 
 was supposed to be conducted by Syllogism no less than from 
 
 Universals downwards. Aristotle expressly informs us that we 
 “x 
 
338 PHILOSOPHICAL 
 
 can learn nothing but by Induction or Demonstration; by De- 
 monstration from universals to particulars, i. e. in the descending 
 scale; by Induction from particulars to universals, or in the 
 ascending scale. Hence, says he, a person who is defective in any 
 of his senses cannot use Induction, and therefore cannot theorize 
 to Universals, or by abstraction obtain general propositions, hence, 
 also, his progress in the scale of Demonstration must be equally ἢ 
 defective with his data. Now if the Syllogistic method was held 
 to be the only method of discovery among the ancients, and this 
 method was a process of reasoning from known to unknown, I 
 conceive that, in this respect, the terms must have a more com- 
 prehensive signification than is generally allowed.* Though I 
 can find nothing to warrant the supposition, that they accurately 
 divided their Syllogistic method into Analogy and Induction in 
 the ascending scale, and into Analogy and Demonstration in the 
 descending scale; yet I think they imagined, as has generally 
 been the case in modern times, that by their method they went 
 precisely to the point, and no further; instead of going something 
 beyond it by too extensive a generalization, as we are led by 
 Analogy, and then retracting to the point determined by the 
 Proof. 
 
 The great abuse of Analogy is resting in its hypotheses with- 
 out bringing them to the test, and building systems upon such 
 hypotheses ; and it is a fault of modern, as well as of ancient phi- 
 losophers. But when we consider the Eleatic or Dialectic method 
 of examining any proposed hypothesis or idea, explained by Plato 
 in the beginning of the Parmenides, we shall find the rules of 
 examination as strict, and perhaps more comprehensive, than any 
 method that has been suggested in modern times.} 
 
 * Some papers, entitled Vindiciz Antique, in the Classical Journal, throw 
 some light upon this subject, though I cannot concur with the author of them in 
 his opinions of the perfection of ancient science, much less in his abuse of modern 
 philosophers. 
 
 + The method is this—Either, I., The subject is, as it is supposed; or 11.» 
 it is not. On the first supposition that ἐξ 7s so, we must examine what happens— 
 lst. To it with respect to itself; 2d. To it with respect to all other things: 
 3rd. To all other things with respect to it: 4th. To all other things with re- 
 
INQUIRY. $39 
 
 Another more fatal abuse of Analogy is arguing from indi- 
 viduals to genera, or from genus to genus, when these genera are 
 too remote ; whichis skipping to generalities instead of cautiously 
 proceeding from species to species. But the most dangerous of | 
 all is arguing from Matter to Mind, between which there is no 
 natural similarity. Thus, the common supposition of the Mind de- 
 termined by motives, as a balance swayed by weights is false; for 
 so far from arguing from like to like, from species to species, we 
 argue not even from genus to genus in the most remote degree, 
 but from one thing to its contrary; false, also, in as much as the 
 motive is a final cause, and the weight an antecedent. This ob- 
 jection, however, to the use of Analogy may be pushed too far : 
 but of the proper use of such reasoning we have an example in 
 one of the finest metaphysical works in the English language, 
 Butler’s Analogy. 
 
 I would observe, also, the great laxity in the significations of 
 the word Theory. It is sometimes used for a general law or 
 principle obtained by Induction, and as something almost sy- 
 nonymous with hypothesis. In this view it might be looked upon 
 as a proved hypothesis; in its other and more general significa- 
 tion it implies the chain of reasoning from general laws and prin- 
 ciples, and sometimes the result of such a chain. Its real sig- 
 nification seems to be the Survey itself.* In the descending 
 scale the result of the survey is termed a Theorem, ϑεώρημα : and 
 in the ascending scale the general law obtained, the result of the 
 survey, might perhaps likewise be termed a Theorem: whilst 
 
 spect to themselves. Four similar cases will result when we examine what does 
 not happen ; and four more, when we examine what does, and at the same time 
 does not happen. Upon the supposition that it is so, we must investigate its re- 
 lations in all their bearings ; and we must pursue the same method of investiga- 
 tion upon the second supposition, that i¢ is not so. And if it were done according 
 to certain categories, a more thorough investigation could not possibly be devised : 
 and the method is equally applicable to Experimental philosophy as to Intellec- 
 tual science. For a method of obtaining ideas for examination, see a description 
 of Socrates among some hopeful pupils in one of the comedies of Aristophanes. 
 * See an excellent paper upon the subject in Blackwood’s Magazine, 
 
 August, 1830. 
 
540 - PHILOSOPHICAL 
 
 the Theory, Seapia, the Survey itself, may be taken for the whole 
 chain, which, as it proceeds, every now and then, as it were, de-. 
 posits these theorems. From one or more general laws or data 
 we deduce certain results or theorems, such as the different ex- 
 pressions for the range, velocity &c. of a shot, in the theory of 
 Projectiles: and each of these expressions would be practically, 
 as well as theoretically true, but for the innumerable other cir- 
 cumstances to be taken into consideration. It is therefore only 
 an approximation to practical truth. From a certain other 
 set of general laws we deduce a theory of Resistances, and by a 
 combination of these two Theories we approximate still nearer to 
 practical truth. And by adding theory to theory relative to the 
 powder, form, texture, elasticity, &c. of the shot, climate, &c. &c. 
 and other circumstances, we might still nearer approximate.* And 
 
 all these Theories taken together might be termed the Theory of 
 Gunnery. 
 
 An Hypothetical system differs from a Theory as does an 
 Hypothesis from a General law or Fact, and is dependant upon 
 
 Hypotheses instead of Facts; and its productions are of the same 
 description. 
 
 * It is utterly impossible, upon the surface of this earth, by Theory, to ar- 
 rive at practical results, even in the most simple of all practical sciences, Me- 
 chanics ; particularly, as it sometimes happens, when the results of each Theory, 
 instead of being Theorems, are themselves merely approximations. Of this the 
 ancients were perfectly aware, for both in ascending and descending, they ex- 
 cluded the individuals, as objects of sense and not of science. Much less is 
 it possible in Politics, or any other moral or intellectual science; where not 
 only so few general laws, universals, or data, are ascertained, but the springs 
 of action are so manifold and various, independently of the free-will and per - 
 versity of the individuals, that human intellect can scarcely hope to form even 
 a likely approximation to the truth. The speculative philosopher, as is 
 justly observed by Stewart, possesses a fund of knowledge, invaluable in all 
 untried cases, which will guide him a certain way in approximation to the 
 truth. But if he suppose that such theorefical principles are applicable to prac- 
 tice, of course he fails in every instance, and produces nothing but confusion and 
 mischief; of which the state of this kingdom, at this moment, is a most lament- 
 able proof: and the probable result of persevering in such a course cannot be 
 contemplated without the utmost alarm, the more anxiously, as many of the 
 systems still acted on are not true theories, but are built upon false principles and 
 are merely hypothetical systems. 
 
INQUIRY. 841 
 
 Thus far I have spoken of the Method of proceeding, and I 
 have used the terms Laws, Facts, Universals, and the like, in 
 their common acceptation. But these terms are so confounded 
 with each other and with Causes and Effects, that we scarcely 
 know what we are in search of; and some of the ablest views of 
 Bacon’s Novum Organum have become almost as much lost to 
 the world, as have some of the very finest speculations of the 
 ancients. I would therefore say a few words upon the Objects 
 or Aim of science. 
 
 Causation is a subject upon which there is a strange mis- 
 understanding between the ancients and moderns. By the word 
 Cause the ancients appear to have understood that without the 
 co-operation of which no sensible phenomenon could be pro- 
 duced :* and they divided Causes into the Efficient, the Formal, 
 the Material, and the Final. And this division was excellent, 
 and in perfect keeping with a system which held a Soul of the 
 world as the prime mover of Efficient causes. The Final cause 
 or ultimate object and end of every action, I shall dismiss without 
 further consideration, as less properly a cause than a motive, 
 and equally admitted in all systems in which nothing is referred 
 to chance, and as unconnected with the Physical subject I have 
 now in hand. 
 
 This division of causes has been supposed to be superseded 
 among the moderns; and, since the time of Hume, by the word 
 Cause they seem sometimes to understand the Bond of connexion 
 between one event and its preceding; and in this view it is as- 
 serted that no causes of things have ever been discovered; and 
 that science lies not in the discovery of causes, but only in the 
 discovery of the facts and general laws of nature; and the same 
 
 * See the 67th epistle of Seneca, wherein he explains the common and 
 Platonic division of causes, and unjustly arraigns both, because he conceives 
 Space, Time, and Motion, ought to be included. Motion, however, is included 
 in the Efficient Cause, and Space and Time are but the measures of that motion, 
 and the Law of the Motion, when strictly limited and defined, involves conside- 
 ration of the measure only, and of nothing else. 
 
342 PHILOSOPHICAL 
 
 assertion is likewise made, because no one can pretend to have 
 discovered the first of secondary causes. In another view the 
 Cause is looked upon as implying nothing more than an ante- 
 cedent phenomenon, and that these phenomena, under the names 
 of Cause and Effect, are continued in an endless chain of suc- 
 cessive connexions. For example, when we hear a clock strike, 
 if we attend to the chains of successive causes—to go no farther 
 back—they may be traced in the stroke of the hammer, which 
 causes the vibration of the bell, which causes the undulatory 
 movement among the particles of the air, which causes a vibratory 
 motion on the organs of hearing and on the brain; a certain sensa- 
 tion follows, and the soul perceives that the clock has struck. 
 Now, for the production of this ultimate effect, we may observe 
 not only one, but three distinct chains of what the ancients would 
 call Causes. Ist. The chain of the material substances whose 
 matter is In contact with one another, and without which matter 
 the phenomenon could not have been produced, viz. the matter 
 of the hammer, of the bell, of the air, of the auditorial nerve, 
 of the sensorium,* and these are the successive Material causes. 
 Again, each of these portions of matter is indued with certain 
 qualities, without which also the effect could not have been pro- 
 duced; and these depend upon what the ancients would call the 
 form, and they consist of the form, texture, elasticity, vibratory 
 and other qualities of the bell, of the air, nerve, &c. These are the 
 Formal causes. To these must be superadded the particular 
 accidents by which they are affected, viz., the fall of the ham- 
 mer, the vibration of the bell, and the others, by which motion is 
 successively communicated: and of this chain of causes each 
 accident is nothing else than motion, modified by the body 
 through which it passes, and may be regarded as a proximate 
 Efficient cause. In this phenomenon, therefore, we may trace 
 the Material, Formal, and Efficient Causes of the ancients; all 
 which are necessary for the production of the effect: and we may 
 
 * T use the term as Newton uses it, and not as Leibnitz in his dispute with 
 Clarke. 
 
INQUIRY. 345 
 
 perceive that the ancient and modern doctrines upon the subject 
 of Causation may not be inconsistent with one another: but we 
 must carefully distinguish whether the Cause be defined as the 
 Accident itself, or the Instrument affected with the accident— 
 the Vibration of the bell, or the Bell in the act of vibrating. 
 Such is a general view of this phenomenon: but we may ob- 
 serve still something more, relating to that Bond of connexion which 
 has been so great a stumbling-block among the moderns. When 
 we come more narrowly to inspect this triplicated chain of 
 Causes, between each link there is a joint, if I may so call it: 
 for instance, the aggregate motion of the hammer is, in the bell, 
 conyerted into atomic motion. Now this cannot be performed 
 simultaneously, though the manner or Jaw according to which it 
 is performed, escapes the observation of our senses. This is the 
 Latens Processus, or the latent process which Bacon is so anxious 
 to have investigated ; and it is often noticed among the ancients, 
 particularly by Plato in the Parmenides and Pheedo. The Latens 
 Schematismus of Bacon, the latent form or structure, refers to the 
 latent properties of the bodies, or other unknown circumstances, 
 through which motion is communicated. And as grosser bodies 
 are said to be incapable of contact, a kind of Latens Schematis- 
 mus at every joint in the chain, becomes also an object of inquiry. 
 The inquiry into the Efficient cause, the Matter, the latent pro- 
 cess, and the latent structure, constitutes Physics, according to the 
 notions of Bacon; which differs but little from the ancient doc- 
 trine. But, if we combine the two, we shall have Physical science 
 to consist in investigating the Nature and the Continuity of the 
 Material, Formal, and Efficient causes, together with the Laws 
 according to which the chain of efficient causes is propagated, 
 and this, not only in the Links but in the Joints.* If it were done 
 
 * To this might be objected, that the common example of the ancient causes, 
 viz. of a founder casting a statue, does not quadrate with what I have advanced ; 
 for in the example, the Efficient cause a quo is the Founder, the Material ex quo 
 is the brass, the Formal in quo is theshape. A more attentive consideration, how- 
 ever, will show that it is only a particular case of the more general that I have 
 taken. The Platonists added to the above the Ideal or Exemplary cause, 
 
344 PHILOSOPHICAL 
 
 through the successive links only, we should in a manner have 
 perfected the grand outline of science, through the more delicate 
 parts, the latent processes, and forms, and substances, at the 
 Joints, which constitute the bonds of connexion, should forever 
 be concealed. Yet they need not be despaired of. 
 
 If it should be asked why it is thus to be preswmed a priori, 
 that this triplicated chain of causes is continued throughout na- 
 ture, the only answer to it is this,—that in every branch of science 
 which has been investigated, and is thoroughly understood, such 
 is the case; and as we can only reason but from what we know, 
 we reason by analogy, from this known to the unknown, and 
 draw a strong presumption in its favour. It may be false, and it 
 cannot be proved otherwise till all science is perfected; but the 
 burden of finding and demonstrating an exception lies with its 
 opponents, who might thus confute or limit it. 
 
 In modern experimental Philosophy it is often laid down as a 
 maxim, that the laws of nature are the only proper objects of 
 human inquiry: and all investigation of causes is stifled by the 
 dogma which maintains, that human nature is incapable of in- 
 vestigating their nature—a strange fallacy, which seems to be an 
 ignoratio elenchi. The laws of nature, or general facts, as they 
 are called—under which obscure expressions are often included 
 the qualities of bodies as well as their matter and the accidents 
 by which they are affected—may be sufficient for the mathema- 
 tician, as they afford the data from which his propositions may 
 depend. He canrise no higher than his data; nor is it within the 
 compass of his science to prove any simple physical proposition.* 
 In the brilliant discoveries of Sir Isaac Newton certain general 
 laws and qualities of matter gathered by induction, together with 
 the common principles of mathematics, form the data from which 
 the propositions of the Principia depend. And the discoveries 
 
 secundum quod, according to which it is fashioned, which commonly related to 
 the metaphysical, and not to the physical forms. It might also be objected, that 
 the Vacuum, Gravity &c. are at variance. I speak of them presently. 
 
 * We often meet with such attempts: all the mathematical proofs of the 
 parallelogram of forces, for instance, are vicious, and merely augments in a circle. 
 
᾿ 
 
 INQUIRY. 345 
 
 deduced by mathematical operations may be pushed on by his 
 successors to a greater degree of accuracy and approximation to 
 the truth than they have been already, yet are they merely de- 
 ductions and links in the descending chain and calculations of 
 effects. But among the data themselves is where we must look 
 for any great advancement of science. 
 
 In those branches of science which have attained to any de- 
 gree of perfection, such as Mechanics, Acoustics and some others, 
 we are not content with the mere fact, but we attend to the suc 
 cessive links in the chain of accident, tracing the motion whence it 
 is derived, and to what it is communicated; and investigating also 
 the law according to which it is propagated : and we trace also the 
 chain of being, in the existence and contact of its matter, and in 
 its qualities and form, as in the example of the Bell. But, not- 
 withstanding the mighty strides which modern science has taken 
 in the Operative division of Philosophy, it is manifest what little 
 real progress has been made in the Speculative division in the 
 ascending scale ; though every step therein opens almost a new 
 
 era of discovery. 
 
 I will now turn to the Result. That Matter or Substance, 
 by which Qualities are supported, exists, is one of the prime 
 articles of belief among mankind, though its existence can only 
 be inferred from the qualities which it upholds. And it is in this 
 branch, by the chemical resolution of compound substances into 
 more simple substances, that science has of late years made its 
 greatest advancement. 
 
 Chief of the Qualities of Matter were resolved by the ancients 
 into its Form: and by the union of Form with Matter the Sen- 
 sible world was supposed to be produced. As I endeavour to 
 bring forward those parts only of the ancient philosophy which 
 may be turned to account, I omit mention of their ingenious 
 metaphysical speculations upon the nature of Form and Matter, 
 Bound and the Boundless, and shall merely observe that the 
 system would naturally tend to resolve all the qualities of Matter 
 
 ΤΥ 
 
346 PHILOSOPHICAL 
 
 into the primary ones of its Extension, Form, and the absolute 
 Hardness or Impenetrability of its component parts, substance, or 
 atoms.* 
 
 Besides the obvious formal qualities of matter, there are cer- 
 tain other qualities, which may be termed supposititious, assumed 
 or occult,} inasmuch as the words Elasticity, Colour, Inertia, 
 Gravity, and many others, are words conventionally assumed to 
 express some unknown causes of effects which have been traced 
 no higher, but which still remain desiderata to which the attention 
 of science should be directed ; for they may perhaps be resolved 
 into some immediate formal cause, or into several intermediate 
 links in the chain of accidental causes, latent processes &c. Sir 
 Isaac Newton thus attempted to resolve the elasticity of Light, 
 as far as it concerned Reflection, into a latent process, the at- 
 tractions of a fluid upon the surfaces of bodies. 
 
 * Of the ancients, the Epicureans alone are supposed to have held the exist- 
 ence of atoms: if I mistake not, the Pythagoreans did likewise, though not 
 such a wilful democracy of Atoms as that of Epicurus; nor am I aware that any 
 of the ancients held the infinite divisibility of matter. Neither of these opinions, 
 perhaps, can be brought to the test of proof, we can rest only in analogy; but I 
 think the accuracy of the results and calculations upon the Atomic Theory, 
 plainly induce us to prefer the atomic opinion, upon the same grounds that our 
 faith in the law of Gravitation is strengthened, by the accuracy with which the 
 Planetary movements coincide with their calculated courses, i.e. it rests upon ob- 
 servation. The conclusion also, drawn by analogy in favour of atoms, from a 
 substance, always dividing and compounding at the same angle, is far superior to 
 an argument drawn from the infinite divisibility of a mathematical line ; inasmuch 
 as it is a fair analogy between two physical propositions : the latter is only a ma- 
 thematical illustration of a physical proposition; they are not at all of the same 
 kind; the subject under consideration is purely material, the illustration purely 
 ideal. The same may be said of Euler’s ingenious argument, “ All matter is endued 
 with extension. It therefore possesses all the qualities of extension: one of 
 which is infinite divisibility.” For it does not follow that because all matter is 
 endued with extension in the concrete, that it has all the properties of extension 
 in the abstract ; only that it might have had, if it had pleased God to make it so. 
 
 + The occult qualities of Aristotle are not the nonsense usually fathered 
 upon him; but I prefer the word supposititious, z.e. hypothetical, not only to 
 avoid offence, but in better keeping with what I have written upon theory and 
 hypothesis. 
 
INQUIRY. : 347 
 
 Again, in the phenomenon of Colour, the Metaphysical dis- 
 tinction drawn between the Sensation and Perception by the Mind, 
 and the Quality of the body, which was the cause of that per- 
 ception, between the redness with which the senses are affected, 
 and the supposititious quality of the body, which so operates upon 
 light as to produce that sensation and perception, cleared away 
 several strange incumbrances. But the grand discovery, that 
 redness or any other colour may be communicated to several 
 bodies by the mere alteration of their superficial texture, has 
 gone far to resolve the colouring quality into the texture or form 
 of the superficies, and to merge the supposititious and conventional 
 quality into a formal cause, one of the primary qualities of matter. 
 From the perception of colours we may trace the chain of antece- 
 dent causes of Matter and Form through the optic nerve, through 
 the eye, to the light, to the coloured body, and again to the light. 
 And we may trace also the descending chain of accidents or mo- 
 tion from the general unmodified motions of the light, as first 
 admitted into a chamber, before it strikes upon the body, its 
 alteration at the body, every point of which becomes a centre 
 from which a sphere of motion is propagated, of such a nature, 
 as, when passed through the’eye and optic nerve, to produce the 
 perception of colour. 
 
 In England, till within the last few years, the Newtonian hy- 
 pothesis of Light has had a very general ascendancy; but at pre- 
 sent that of Huygens bids fair entirely to supplant it. From the 
 similarity which obtains in nature between one fluid and another, 
 I would venture to suggest, that these two hypotheses may not 
 be altogether and fundamentally opposed, but are capable of being 
 reconciled, at least in part; and that light has not only a pro- 
 gressive, but a vibratory motion also: that to its progressive 
 motion are to be attributed the phenomena of brightness, il- 
 lumination, shadow and some instances of reflection: and that 
 upon its vibrations depend the phenomena of colour, sight and 
 the like; and that the vibratory motion requisite for the pro- 
 duction of Vision, is caused by the progressive, reflected, and 
 impeded motion of the sunbeams, by a change from the aggre- 
 
348 PHILOSOPHICAL 
 
 gate progressive motion of the rays into the atomic vibrations of 
 the fluid. Such an hypothesis is afforded by the analogies of air 
 and water, in their progressive motions of wind and streams, and 
 in their vibratory motions of sound and waves. It is a fair hy- 
 pothesis, which, if it be confuted when brought to the test of ex- 
 periment by Induction, may afford some results upon which 
 something more plausible may be offered. 
 
 The most remarkable of the supposititious qualities of Matter 
 are Inertia, Gravity, and Attraction. The conceptions of Sir 
 Isaac Newton upon the subject of Gravity and Attraction are 
 perfectly clear and defined. He uses the words—not for the 
 effect itself, as Dr. Clarke in his controversy with Leibnitz affirms 
 —not for any inherent quality with which matter may be endued 
 —nor for any accidental motion with which it may be affected : 
 but he uses them merely conventionally for the antecedent cause 
 of the effect of gravitation: whether the cause be a formal cause, 
 or whether it be motion or force communicated through an ante- 
 cedent chain of being, or whatever it may be hereafter ascer- 
 tained, By the universal effect of gravitation or the tendency 
 itself, proved by Induction from Experiment and Observation 
 upon bodies within our reach, and extended by Analogy confirmed 
 by Observation to the celestial bodies and those which are beyond 
 us, it is evident that such a cause exists: and the knowledge of 
 its existence, and of the law according to which it acts, are suf- 
 ficient for all the purposes to which in mathematics it can be 
 applied, 
 
 Sir Isaae Newton laid down as one of the rules of philoso- 
 phizing, that no other causes ought to be introduced than such as "Ὁ 
 are true, and necessary to account for the phenomena. And he 
 followed his predecessors in maintaining the Inertia of Matter 
 as exerted in the first law of motion, as an inherent, though it may 
 be supposititious quality. But to account for the undiminished 
 motions of the planets he was compelled to assert a Vacuum, or 
 at least a quasi vacuum. Yet he hesitated to maintain Gravity 
 as an innate quality of matter, as it would be inconsistent with his 
 own ideas of causation, as expressed in his own rule. He there- 
 
INQUIRY. 349 
 
 fore left directions to succeeding philosophers to seek its cause ; 
 and pointed out as a fit subject for speculation an hypothetical 
 subtile ether, with which the supposed vacuum might be filled, 
 as capable of supplying the deficient links in the chain of causa- 
 tion. Many of his professed followers, sufficiently alive to 
 the physical inconsistency, hesitated not to assert the absolute 
 vacuum, and gravitation as an inherent quality of matter ; not ad- 
 verting to the insuperable metaphysical difficulty thus introduced, 
 that they eventually maintained two distinct and independent 
 chains of causation, continually crossing each other and assuming 
 each other’s offices: by one of which motion was communicated, 
 through matter in contact, by impulse and vibration, in endless 
 succession ; and by the other through vacuum by means of occult 
 qualities commonly so called ; by either of which the same effects 
 might be produced. Euler and most foreign philosophers, more 
 sensible of the real difficulty of the case, rejected without a 
 seruple such a version of Sir I. Newton’s opinions, upon the ex- 
 press grounds, that two secondary causes of motion, one from 
 Inertia the other from Attraction, were utterly incongruous and 
 inadmissible: and such has generally been the opinion of all 
 Metaphysicians. Stewart, equally sensible of the same insuper- 
 able difficulty, strangely proposes to resolve all such phenomena 
 into attractions and repulsions, upon the principles of Boscovich. 
 But I shall merely observe, that the experiments from which it is 
 deduced, that the grosser bodies never come into contact, prove 
 it only, because they prove, that there is some substance inter- 
 vening. 
 
 If we turn our attention to the Chain of Accidents, we shall 
 find that it consists of Motion, which implies Force, communi- 
 cated through different portions of the material world. And 
 here I would mark a distinction in the word Force or Power. 
 Where motion is actually produced, the Force by which it is pro- 
 duced is nothing else than the Momentum, or quantity of motion 
 communicated from one body to another in a connected suc- 
 cession. But there is often a Force exerted where no motion is 
 actually produced, the Force being counteracted in its effect. It 
 
350 PHILOSOPHICAL 
 
 produces, however, a continual Stress and Endeavour, and is the 
 Cause of a continued series of such Stresses, Endeavours and 
 Tendencies among bodies in contact, and it is only requisite that 
 some impediment be removed, that motion may take effect. 
 
 All motion and tendencies may perhaps be ultimately traced 
 to the forces of Animals, Gravity, Inertia, and the Etherial 
 powers of nature. 
 
 The natural or common motion and pressure of Water is 
 evidently resolvable into the forces of Air, Gravity and other 
 causes. The natural or common motions and powers of the Air 
 may be again resolved into those of Gravity, Elasticity and Heat. 
 Galvanism, Electricity and certain Chemical phenomena, might 
 perhaps, if science were properly directed to the investigation, 
 with little difficulty be resolved into a chain of varied accident or 
 motion of one and the same etherial fluid, of which fire is but 
 another form: inasmuch as chief part of the results appear to 
 be but the conversion of aggregate into some species of atomic 
 motion, and the reconversion of this atomic motion into aggre- 
 gate. The phenomena of Magnetism might perhaps be similarly 
 resolved. Now in these phenomena the great dispute among 
 philosophers does not so much concern the chain of accident and 
 motion, as the chain of beimg through which the accidents are 
 propagated ; whether the motion be communicated through the 
 grosser particles of matter, or through some subtile fluid which 
 pervades all nature, or through several different fluids endowed 
 with different properties, such as the Galvanic, Electric, Mag- 
 netic and other fluids. From the sameness of many of their 
 effects, and from the consideration that they all appear equally 
 extended throughout the universe, if we should presume that 
 they were but one and the same fluid, we should start an 
 hypothesis indeed, but an hypothesis particularly worthy of at- 
 tention, for unless such be the case we shall have in nature 
 several fluids co-extended through the universe, all of which can 
 perform each other’s offices, that is to say, several different causes 
 more than are necessary for the solution of the phenomena. 
 
 Gravity, in the present state of science, is an anomaly in 
 
INQUIRY. 351 
 
 nature, to which no parallel exists; for we are acquainted only 
 with its laws, without a trace of the antecedent proximate links 
 in the chains of Being, and Motion or Force. I have before 
 observed, that a Vacuum is purely an hypothesis; and it is an 
 hypothesis, resting not upon experiment or proof, nor even upon 
 any analogy in nature, but it is a deduction by a chain of argument 
 from the ascertained fact of the undiminished motions of the 
 planets, from the supposititious quality of the inertia of matter, 
 and from the unwarranted assumption, that perpetual motion can 
 only be sustained in vacuo; an assumption, chiefly taken from 
 a few experiments, in what may, without much difficulty, be 
 shewn to be the absolute plenum of an air-pump. But it is 
 far from evident that a man could move any one of his limbs if 
 it were placed in perfect vacuo ; whilst thousands of experiments 
 prove, that even a perpetual motion* might be preserved by 
 Fire, Steam, Air, Electricity and other powers of nature, but 
 for the wear and tear of the machinery, the lack of fuel and 
 other extrinsic circumstances: and this, in many instances, in 
 spite of friction; but in all, an absolute plenum of one or more 
 fluids is necessary for the production of the effect. 
 
 Of the Force of Animals, it may well be questioned whence 
 it is derived, whether it be originally communicated by the Soul 
 of the animal itself to the material world through its connexion 
 with the body, or whether the soul has power only to influence 
 and divert the motion and force with which that body may be 
 surrounded. 
 
 Of the Etherial powers of nature, I must observe, that 
 wherever a Fire is lighted, a wonderful kind of motion com- 
 mences among the elements, very different from what can be 
 supposed to have been communicated by the agent that pro- 
 
 * When I say perpetual motion, of course, I do not allude to the frivolous 
 attempts often made to produce it by mechanical combinations acted upon by 
 gravity. Ifthere were no friction of the machine or air, Gravity and Inertia would 
 always produce a perpetual motion in pendulums, or machinery whose centre of 
 Gravity is at rest; but it could produce nothing more. If, therefore, friction is to 
 be superadded, it must produce something less. 
 
9592 PHILOSOPHICAL 
 
 duced the spark, or could have resided within the spark itself. 
 Light issues on all sides from the fire, and an incessant draft of 
 Air sets into it; and there ensues a motion continually accumu 
 lating and increasing, and communicated to the objects around 
 it; and instead of losing motion by such communication, the 
 longer it continues the more violent, intense and extended it 
 becomes, producing such a variety of movements by the descent 
 of walls and timbers, by the overthrow of houses, trees and all 
 obstacles within its reach, as to bid defiance to all ordinary rules 
 of action and re-action, cause and effect: ‘and no man knoweth 
 whence it cometh, or whither it goeth.” 
 
 To the ancients who held the World to be their God, Matter 
 its body, and the Etherial powers of the heavens its soul, little 
 difficulty could occur in resolving the motions and forces of the 
 elements and gravity, as well as all individual animal force into 
 the powers of this present universal Deity. By such a solution, 
 it is true that the ancients completed and perfected their bastard 
 system of Physics; and reduced all causes to one simple tripli- 
 cated chain: and the Efficient, the Formal and the Material 
 might be successively traced from the highest intellectual opera- 
 tion to the lowest sensible phenomenon. 
 
 To us, however, who hold the Spiritual world perfectly dis- 
 tinct from the Material, it must be the grand object of Philo- 
 sophy to trace the chain of causes from matter to matter, to the 
 first of secondary causes. When a clock has struck, the vibra- 
 tions are conveyed along the auditorial nerves to the Sensorium; 
 and according to other systems besides those of the Materialists, 
 motion is communicated to the Soul itself. Yet analogy, I may 
 say experience upon all natural bodies, would rather lead us to 
 presume that the motion, after a momentary concentration in the 
 sensorium, is again communicated through the brain and skull 
 to the surrounding air, and that no part of it can be lost to the 
 material world by being communicated to the immaterial. 
 
 The cause of Grayitation, whatever that may be, causes a 
 strain and tendency in every body which it does not actually put 
 
INQUIRY. 353 
 
 in motion. By this a stress is exerted upon water in a vessel; by 
 which the like stress or pressure is exerted against the sides of 
 the vessel: and if one of its sides be removed, motion instantly 
 ensues. Now it is evident that this strain or stress, as well as 
 the motion, must be referred to the same cause. And if future 
 discovery should ever show that the antecedent link in the chain 
 of being through which this strain is propagated, is an etherial 
 fluid of the heavens, we should immediately conclude, that, ex- 
 cept where motion was actually produced, there was a continual 
 strain. 
 
 In the legitimate use of analogy we are entitled to start such 
 an hypothesis: and it is the business of Philosophy to bring it 
 to the test of Experiment or Observation by Induction; by which 
 it may be confuted, proved, or limited to something less general. 
 But if on such an hypothesis we should argue that the unaccount- 
 able effects of fire, in its wonderful motions before observed, are 
 to be resolved into the same force or strain impressed upon the 
 heavens—if, supposing no motion is communicated from the 
 material to the immaterial world, as far as we and other animals 
 are concerned, we should argue to the reverse, that no motion is 
 communicated from the immaterial or the souls of animals to the 
 material,* but that living creatures are only endowed with the 
 faculty of diverting and appropriating the force with which they 
 are surrounded—if we should argue that, in short, all motion 
 among material bodies may be ultimately traced to the etherial 
 powers of nature, so adjusted as to constitute the mainspring of 
 the machine of the universe ; that they are a fluid whose material 
 substance pervades every thing and all space, and perfects the 
 chain of being, endowed with no other qualities than those of 
 form, but impressed with a continued force which is not an in- 
 herent quality, though it can be traced no higher; from which 
 all other force and motion amongst things are borrowed, and to 
 
 * Query. Might not the term Analogy be applied to arguments proceed- 
 ing upon the relations of contiguity and contrast, as well as upon the relation 
 of resemblance ? 
 
 ZZ 
 
354 PHILOSOPHICAL 
 
 which they are again returned; and into whose operations may 
 be resolved not only the chain of accidents, but all the supposi- 
 titious qualities of matter—or if, with the school of Hutchinson,* 
 we should resolve this force itself, this strain upon the heavens, 
 into the expansion caused by the motions of the Solar triad of 
 Fire, Light, and Spirit, three conditions of one etherial fluid; I 
 say, we should be tacking one supposition to another; we should 
 be weaving but an hypothetic system; we should be using analogy 
 not in its legitimate province, but, as Lord Bacon calls it, for the 
 purpose of anticipating nature; and we should be running into 
 the common error of the ancients, of proceeding from one step to 
 another without stopping to prove our progress. 
 
 That all force is dependant upon the powers of the heavens 
 is no new hypothesis, but as old as Heathenism itself, for the 
 Heathens resolved all forces, both of nature and animals, into the 
 powers of the etherial Soul of the universe: and the hypothesis 
 properly modified, may be even of still higher antiquity. 
 
 Nothing, perhaps, is more uniformly insisted on among the 
 Heathen, than that their Trinity was a triad subordinate to a 
 Monad ; which monad was clearly one of those two independent 
 principles, which were conceived to have existed before the forma- 
 tion of the world, and was the Etherial Intellectual principle of 
 the Universe; which was in a manner superseded by the Triad. 
 The Triad is likewise maintained to be Phanes or Eros, the Sun, 
 the Soul and Ruler of the world. 
 
 To ascertain the persons of this triad, then, I shall merely 
 place the most ancient speculations upon the subject under one 
 another; but at the same time I would observe, that it is one of 
 those questions which, for want of sufficient evidence, is incapable 
 of being brought to the test of absolute demonstration. 
 
 * The discovery of the component gasses of the Air has overturned this system 
 in its original extent, yet I conceive that the substitution of the word Caloric for 
 Air might suggest a modification worthy of attention: but there are a great many 
 steps which must be proved before this part of the subject can be even approached 
 legitimately. 
 
INQUIRY. 355 
 
 From the different Orphic fragments we find that the Orphic 
 Trinity consisted of 
 
 Metis, Phanes, or Eros, Ericapzeus. 
 which are interpreted 
 
 Will, or Light, or Life, or 
 
 Counsel, Love, Lifegiver. 
 From Acusilaus, 
 
 Metis, Eros, Ether. 
 From Hesiod, according to Damascius, 
 
 Earth, Eros, Tartarus. 
 From Pherecydes Syrius, 
 
 Fire, Water, Spirit, or Air, 
 From the Sidonians, 
 
 Cronus, Love, Cloudy darkness. 
 From the Pheenicians, 
 
 Ulomus, Chusorus, The Egg. 
 From the Chaldzan and Persian Oracles of Zoroaster, 
 
 Fire, Sun, Ether. 
 
 Fire, Light, Ether. 
 From the later Platonists, 
 
 Power, Intellect, Father. 
 
 Power, Intellect, Soul or Spirit. 
 
 By the ancient Theologists, according to Macrobius, the Sun was 
 invoked in the Mysteries, as : 
 
 Power of Light of Spirit of 
 
 the world, the world, the world. 
 To which may perhaps be added, from Sanchoniatho, the three 
 sons of Genus. 
 
 Fire, Light, Flame. 
 
 By omitting the Earth, Water, and other materials, which, in 
 the formation of the world, are elsewhere disposed of, and passing 
 over the refinements of the Pythagoreans, who sometimes even 
 deviated so far as to place the τἀγαδόν, the final cause, as the 
 Monad, and the three concauses as the Triad, I think we may find 
 in the above enumeration sufficient ground for maintaining the 
 
356 PHILOSOPHICAL 
 
 opinion, that the persons of the Trinity of the Gentiles, viewed 
 under a Physical aspect, were regarded as the Fire, the Light, and 
 the Spirit or Air of the Etherial fluid Substance of the heavens: 
 which in a Metaphysical aspect were held to be no other than the 
 Power or Will, the Intellect or Reason, and the Spirit or Affections 
 of the Soul of the World; accordingly as the prior Monad was 
 contemplated in its Etherial or Intellectual subsistence. 
 
 Metaphysicians have at length approximated to a truth, 
 which, in the Metaphysics of Christianity, is laid down with as 
 much perspicuity and decision, as is the Immortality of the Soul, 
 or as any other of those points which have been so continually 
 agitated among philosophers, modern as well as ancient. The 
 distinction between the Intellect, and the Emotions or Affections, 
 to which, simple as it may appear, such laborious approaches 
 have been made through the mazy paths of Metaphysics, is 
 clearly drawn ; and the respective seats of them are assigned, it 
 may be figuratively, but most naturally, to the Head and Heart. 
 
 The old division of the Mental Powers into those of the Will 
 and the Understanding, has long been superseded by the division 
 of the school of Reid into the Intellectual and Active Powers. 
 But under the name of the Active Powers, the Will and some 
 part of the Emotions have been also confounded by that school. 
 Later writers, who have drawn the distinction between the In- 
 tellect and the Emotions, appear generally to regard the Will as 
 a subordinate appendage to the Emotions, connected perhaps 
 with the material structure of the Animal. 
 
 There is an ambiguity in the word Will or Volition, which 
 may be divided into the Wish, and into the Power to act. The 
 Soul thinks, wishes, acts ; and the Power to act appears to me 
 -to be a mental Power, as distinct from the Wish or any of the 
 Emotions, as it is independent of any material structure or 
 combination. We may conceive a disembodied spirit with the 
 Intellectual Powers, the Train of Thought only, without the 
 Emotions; and again such a spirit, with the Intellect and Emo- 
 tions, without the Power of action; and such a being might be 
 susceptible of every sentiment terminating in contemplation, such 
 
INQUIRY. 857 
 
 as all intellectual Tastes, Memory, Regret, and a variety of 
 others. Stewart, in his speculations upon persons dreaming, 
 supposes the Intellectual Powers with the Train of Thought in 
 exercise, while the Active powers are suspended. But, of the 
 Faculties and Powers which he confounds under that name, it is 
 manifest that the Emotions are not suspended: and though the 
 Power over the material frame is very generally unexercised 
 during sleep, it is a very singular phenomenon, that when the 
 Wish to do any particular action is notified, the Soul presently 
 takes it for granted that the deed required is actually done, and 
 the train of thought is influenced and diverted by some internal 
 power, though the wish is not really gratified. And there is 
 nothing more common in nature than to have the wish without 
 the power to act, or the power without the wish. 
 
 I speak only of the immortal and immaterial soul: but if we 
 look more closely into the matter we may observe, in the involun- 
 tary motions of the body, in its animal appetites, sensations, and 
 desires, and perhaps in its perceptions, something of a material or 
 corporeal spirit or frame of life, acting independently, though 
 subject to the immortal soul, and whose operations appear to be 
 carried on solely by the powers of nature. And it is this which 
 appears to be so continually Jeading men astray into Materialism. 
 And herein Plato’s disposition is curious. He places the Intel- 
 lect in the Head; a Soul endued with some of the passions, such 
 as fortitude, is supposed to reside in the Chest, about the Heart : 
 while another soul, of which the appetites, desires, and grosser 
 passions are its faculties, about the Stomach and Spleen. The 
 more refined Emotions he confounds with the Intellect; which I 
 believe is likewise the case with Kant. 
 
 The numerous passages in the Scriptures in which the Persons 
 of the Christian Trinity are shadowed forth by the same natural 
 and mental powers which I suppose to constitute the original 
 triad of the Gentiles, are too numerous to require to be speci- 
 fically referred to.—The Father is continually typified as a Fire 
 accepting the sacrifices, consuming and punishing the guilty, as 
 the Lord of all power and might, to whom all prayers are com- 
 
358 PHILOSOPHICAL INQUIRY. 
 
 monly addressed ;—the Son as Light, as a Mediator and a Teacher, 
 enlightening the understanding, addressing himself more par- 
 ticularly to the Intellect, pointing out the distinctions between 
 good and evil;—the Spirit, as Spirit or Air, a mighty rushing 
 wind, operating upon the Affections, Feelings, or Emotions. We 
 are commanded by the Christian faith to look to the Son for 
 knowledge, to obey his instructions, and to accept the conditions 
 of Salvation he has offered—to the Spirit, for grace to influence 
 us in all our feelings, wishes and intentions—and to the Father, 
 our prayers are to be directed for the power to act. 
 
 I would not presume to lay stress upon any of the hypotheses 
 I may have advanced or adduced in this inquiry. Man is apt to 
 indulge his fancy in building systems which he conceives may set 
 forth the wisdom or magnify the power of his Creator; but when 
 he brings them to the test, and finds the truth itself, he finds it 
 infinitely more sublime than the happiest flight of his imagina- 
 tion. Yet as we must necessarily take all our ideas, as well as 
 our language, from the sensible world—as we are taught that it 
 it is a glass, in which things spiritual are purposely, but darkly, 
 shadowed forth—and as we are assured that man is formed in 
 the express image of his Maker; I deem that we outstep not the 
 bounds of true philosophy, when we humbly trace, in the glorious 
 works of the Almighty, a confirmation of his word. 
 
INDEX 
 
 OF THE 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS AND OF THE AUTHORS AND EDITIONS 
 CITED OR REFERRED TO. 
 
 See Introduction, p. lvii. 
 
 A.—Syncelli Codex Parisianus (1711.) 
 Abydenus. See p. xiii. 
 Acusilaus, A. D.i. 
 
 Acusilaus, B. C. viii. 
 
 Emilius Sura. 
 
 Africanus, A. D. ii. 
 
 Al—Ailii. Others. 
 
 Alcibiades. 
 
 Alexander Polyhistor, B. C. ii. 
 Amelius, A. D. iii. 
 
 Ammonius Saccas, A. D. iii. ob. 232. 
 Anon.—Anonymous. 
 Anticlides. 
 Antiochenus—Theophilus. 
 Antoninus, ob. A. D. 161. 
 Apion, A. D. i. 
 
 Apollodorus, B.C. ii. 
 Apollonius Molo, or Melo, B.C. i. 
 Apollonius Rhodius, B. C. ii. 
 Aretes. 
 Argonautica—Orpheus 
 Aristarchus. 
 
 Aristophanes, B. Ὁ. v. 
 Aristoteles, B. C. iv. 
 
 Arius, A. D. iv. 
 Armenian.—Trans. Eusebius. 
 Arrianus, B. C. ii. 
 
 Artapanus. 
 
 Asclepiades. 
 
 Athenzus, A. D. ii. 
 Athenagoras, A. D. ii. 
 Aucher, Ed. Arm. Eus. 1818. 
 Autolychum— Theophilus ad. 
 
 B.—Syncelli Codex Paris. (1764.) 
 
 Bacon, Adv. of wearning and Novum 
 Organum. 
 
 Bar-hebreus Syriac Chron. Ed. Brun 
 and Kirsch. 1789. 
 
 Bas.—Basil, Ed. 
 
 Bekker, Ed. Plato. 
 
 Berossus, B.C. iy. See p.x. 
 
 Bentley, Epist. ad Mill. at the end of 
 the Oxf. ed. of Malala. 
 
 Big.—Lectiones Emerici Bigotii. 
 
 Blackwood’s Magazine, Aug. 1830. 
 
 Bochart. Phaleg. 
 
 Bougainville, Maps and Papers in 
 Acad. des Inscrip. Vol. xxvi. 
 
 Bruce’s Travels. 
 
 Brunk, Ed. Aristophanes. 
 
 Bryant’s Mythology. 
 
 Calvisius Chron. 1617. 
 
 Capell. 
 
 Casaubon, Ed. Strabo. 
 
 Cassandrus. 
 
 Castor, Rhodius, Β. Ὁ. i. 
 
 Cedrenus, A. D. xi. 
 
 Censorinus, A. Ὁ. iii. 
 dict, 1487. 
 
 Chzremon, A. D. i. 
 
 Choronensis, Moses. 
 
 Chron.—Chronicle. 
 
 Chrysostomus, A. D. iv. 
 
 Cicero, Β. 6. 1. 
 
 Clarke, S., Papers between him and 
 Leibnitz. 
 
 Classical Journal. 
 
 Clemens, Alex. A. Ὁ. ii. 
 
 Clitarchus, B. C. iv. 
 
 Col.—Ed. Eusebius, Cologne, 1688, by 
 Vigerius. 
 
 Crat.—Cratylus of Plato. 
 
 Creuzer. 
 
 Critodemus. 
 
 Cumberland’s Sanchoniatho. 
 
 Bonon. Bene- 
 
 Damascenus, Nicolaus. 
 Damascius, A. D. vi. 
 
360 
 
 Περὶ ἄρκων, De Principiis. Kopp, 
 1826. 
 
 In Parmenidem. 
 Tn Vitam Isidori. 
 
 D’Anville’s Atlas. 
 
 Dicearchus, B.C. iv. 
 
 Dindorf, Ed. Syncellus. 
 
 Diodorus Siculus, B.C. i. Ed. Hanover, 
 1604. 
 
 Diogenes Laertius, A. D. ii. Ed. Steph. 
 1593. 
 
 Dius. 
 
 Dodwell’s Dissertation on Hanno’s Peri- 
 plus. 
 
 Ed.—Edition. 
 El.—MS. Josephus, from Library of 
 More, Bishop of Ely. 
 Enoch, Spurious Antediluvian books of, 
 Epicurus, B.C. v. 
 Epigenes. 
 Epimenides, B.C. viii. 
 Epiphanius, A. D. iv. 
 Eratosthenes, B.C. ii. 
 Eu. Ar.—Armenian Ed. Eusebius. 
 Eudemus. 
 Euemerus, B.C, iii. 
 Euler. 
 Eupolemus. 
 Eusebius, ob. A. D. 338. 
 Chronicle Armenian Aucher, 1818. 
 Chronicle Scaliger, 1658. 
 Przparatio Evangelica, R. Ste- 
 phanus, 1544.—Vigerius, 1628. 
 —Cologne Ed. of Vigerius, 
 1688. 
 Ezekiel, Tragedy of. 
 
 Faber’s Pagan Idolatry, 1816. 
 Fabricius Bibliotheca Greca. 
 Falconer, Ed. Hanno’s Periplus. 
 Ficinus, ob. A. D. 1499. 
 
 De immortalitate animi. 
 
 De vita czlesti comparand. 
 Fr.—Codex Josephi, Lib. K. of France. 
 Fr. Patricius Nova Philosophia, 1591. 
 Gale. 
 
 Jamblichus. 
 
 Opuscula Mythologica, 1588. 
 Galleus, Ed. Sibylline Oracles. 
 Gesner, Conr. Ed. Hanno’s Periplus. 
 Goar, Ed. Syncellus. 
 
 Gronovius, Ed. Plinius. 
 
 Grotius. 
 
 Hafn.—Codex Hafniensis (Copenha- 
 gen) of Josephus. 
 
 Hamb. MS. Hamburgensis of Da- 
 mascius. 
 
 INDEX, 
 
 Hanno’s Periplus. See Int. p. xxvii. 
 Ed. Falconer, 1797. 
 
 Hecatzus Milesius, B.C. vii. 
 
 Hellanicus, B.C. v. 
 
 Heraiscus. 
 
 Heringa. 
 
 Herman. 
 
 Hermes, Genesis of.—Ancient Egyptian 
 Records. 
 
 Hermetic Books, Ancient from Jambli- 
 chus, Modern from Fr. Patricius. 
 
 Hermias, A. D. vi. 
 
 Herodotus, B. C. v. Ed. Oxon. 1817. 
 
 Hesiodus, B. C. ix. 
 
 Hiempsal. 
 
 Hieronymus. 
 
 Hieronymus, A. D. iv. Vers. Euseb. 
 Chron. Ed. Scaliger, 1658. 
 
 Homerus, B.C. x. 
 
 Horapollo, A. D. iv. 
 
 Hudson, Ed. Josephus, 1720. 
 
 Hume. 
 
 Hutchinson. 
 
 Jablonski Pantheon gyptiacum. 
 Jackson’s Chronology. 
 
 Jamblichus, ob. A. D. 333, Ed. Gale. 
 Jones of Nayland, Essay, 1762. 
 Josephus, A. Ὁ. i. Ed. Hudson, 1720. 
 Isidorus, A. Ὁ. vi. 
 
 Julianus Chaldeus, A. D. ii. 
 
 Julianus Theurgus, A. D. ii. 
 
 Julianus Imperator, A. D. iv. 
 
 Kant. 
 
 Kirsch, Ed. Syriae Chronicle. 
 Kopp, Ed. Damascius. 
 Kuster, Ed. Suidas. 
 
 Lat.—Latin translation. 
 Leibnitz. 
 
 Linus. 
 
 Lobeck Aglaophamus, 1829. 
 Lowth, Bishop. 
 
 Lydus, De Mensibus MS. 
 Lysimachus. 
 
 M.—Margin. 
 
 Macrobius, A. D. iv. Ed. Bipont, 1788. 
 Malala, A. D. vii. Ed. Oxon. 1691. 
 Manetho, B.C. iii. 
 Marg.—Margin. 
 
 Marcellus. 
 
 Marcellinus Ammianus, A. D. iv. 
 Marsham’s Chronology. 
 Megasthenes, B. C. iv. 
 
 Menander Ephesius. 
 
 Mochus. 
 
 Molo Apollonius. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 Monacensis (Munich) MS. of Damas- 
 cius. 
 
 Montacutus, Rd. 
 
 Moses Choronensis. 
 
 MS.—Manuscript. 
 
 Newton, Principia. 
 Nicephorus, A. D. xiv. 
 Nicolaus Damascenus, B. C. i. 
 
 Ocellus Lucanus, B. C. v. 
 Olympiodorus. 
 In Phedon. MS. 
 Olympius, A. D. vi. 
 Om.—Omits. 
 Onomacritus. 
 Orellius, Ed. Sanchoniatho, 1826. 
 Orethres. 
 Orpheus. 
 Oxon.—Oxford Editions. 
 
 Parmenides of Plato. 
 
 Paschal Chronicle, A. D. iv. 
 Paterculus, Velleius, A. D. i. 
 
 Patricius, Fr.—Nova Philosophia, 1591. 
 Perizonius. 
 
 Pherecydes Syrius, B.C. vii. 
 
 Philo Byblius. 
 
 Philo Judzeus, ob. A. D. 42. 
 Philoponus, A. Ὁ. vii. 
 
 Philostratus. 
 
 Photius, A. D. ix. Bibliotheca. 
 Picus of Mirandula. 
 Conclusiones. See his works. 
 Plato, B.C. iv. 
 Pletho. 
 
 Plinius, A. Ὁ. i.; Gron. 1669. 
 Plotinus, ob. A. D. 270. 
 Plutarchus, A. D. ii. 
 Polemo, B. C. iii. 
 Pomponius Mela, A.D. i. 
 Porphyrius, ob. A. D. 303. 
 Porter’s, Sir R. K., Travels. 
 Priscianus, A. D. vi. 
 Proclus, ob. A. D. 485. 
 
 In Alcibiadem. 
 
 Cratylum. 
 
 Euclidem. 
 
 Parmenidem. 
 
 Politica. 
 
 Timeum. 
 
 Theologiam Platonis. 
 Ptolemzus Geographus, A. D. ii. 
 Ptolemzus Mendesius, A. Ὁ. i. 
 Pythagoras, B. 6, vi. 
 
 Qy.—Query. 
 Reid. 
 
 361 
 
 Richter, De Berosso. 
 
 Sallustius, B. C. i. 
 
 Salmasius, ob. A.D. 1653. Note. 
 
 Sambuci Exemplar, Imperial library 
 v. Hud. Jos. 
 
 Sanchoniatho. See p. viii. 
 
 Scaliger, Ed. Eusebius Chron., &c. 
 
 Scylax, B.C. vi. Periplus. 
 
 Seneca, ob. A. D. 65, Ed. Morell. 
 
 Serranus, Ed. Plato. 
 
 Sextus, Hyp. 
 
 Sibylline Oracles, Ed. Gallus. 
 
 Simplicius, A. D. vi. 
 
 Solinus, A. Ὁ. i. 
 
 Stanley’s Lives of the Philosophers. 
 
 Stephanus, R. Ed. Euseh. 
 
 Stephanus, H. 
 
 Stobeeus, A. Ὁ. iv. 
 
 Strabo, ob. A. D. 25, Ed. Amsterdam, 
 1707. 
 
 Suidas, A. D. x. Ed. Kuster. 
 
 Symmachus, A.D. iv. 
 
 Syncellus, Georgius, A.D. viii. Ed. 
 Dindorf, 1829. 
 
 Synesius, A. D. vy. De insomniis, 
 
 Syrianus. 
 
 Tacitus, A. D. ii. 
 
 Taylor, Ed. Oracles of Zoroaster, v. 
 Class. Journ. No. 32. 
 
 Tatianus, A.D. ii, 
 
 Thallus. 
 
 Theon, Alexandrinus, A. D. iii. 
 M.S. Codex Paris. (2390.) 
 
 Theophilus Antiochenus, A. Ὁ. ii, Ed. 
 Oxon. 
 
 Timzus Locrus, B.C. vi. 
 
 Timezus. Plato’s. 
 
 Timotheus. 
 
 Valpy, Ed. Stephani Thesaurus. 
 Varro. 
 
 Vat.—Vatican MSS. &c. 
 
 Velleius Paterculus, A. D. i. 
 
 Vet. Int.—Vetus Interpretatio. 
 Vigerius, Ed. Eusebius Prep. Ey. 
 Vossius, Gerrard, J. De historicis, 1677. 
 Vossius, Isaac. 
 
 Usher, Abp. Chronol. 
 
 Vulg.—Vulgo. 
 
 Walknaer. 
 Wolfius. 
 
 Zendavesta. 
 Zoroaster. 
 
ERRATA. 
 
 P. v. 1. 20, for hypothesis read hypotheses. 
 1. 23, for hypothesis read hypotheses. 
 vi. 1. 17, for hypothesis read hypotheses. 
 vii. 1. 2, for hypothesis read hypotheses. 
 xix. note *, for 170 read 165. 
 xxvii. 1. 19, for Nebuchadnesser read Nebuchadnezzar. 
 xxxii. 1. 14, for 1641 read 1461. 
 , 1.15, for 1640 read 1460. 
 xxxv. 1. 3, for loveliness read loneliness. 
 21, line 18, for that read and says that. 
 40, 1. 15, for Appion read Apion, 
 64, 1. 1, for Celo-Syria read Ceelo-Syria. 
 108,1. 8, for Among read After. 
 149,1. 10, dele have. 
 172, note §, for Sec Dyn read See Dynasties. 
 204, note +, for Gem read Gesn. 
 239, note *, 1. 4, for 8th read 9th. 
 240, note t, for p. 4 read p. 5. 
 244, note +, line 3, for or Mixed read and the Mixed. 
 250, note +, for Syonches read Synoches. 
 268,1. 13, for whether read either. 
 295, 1. 20, for as dazzling read as the dazzling. 
 324, 1, 2 & 4, Heraclitus occurs in some copies instead of 
 Herodotus. 
 344, 1. last, for augments read arguments. 
 346, note *, l. 7, for induce read induces. 
 327, for presente read Presente. 
 328, 1. 1, for Brutius read Brutius Praesens. 
 —-, 1. 26, for Vergilia read Vergilie. 
 
 
 
 At p. 84 add the following line : 
 
 ἐστιν Ἡρακλέιδης ἔτη om’. is called Heraclides. He reigned 18 years, 
 
 PRINTED BY T. G. WHITE AND CO, 
 
 Crane Court, Fleet Street, 
 
 LONDON. 
 

 
290170, 9% 
 
 ἢ 
 A4-78-85 Ἴ21ῃῃ6 Ἂς 
 

 
Theol 
 
 LN 
 
 1 1012 01307 5090 
 
 
 

 
 ~ = ᾿ 
 τι 5» ῳ a. 
 
 ΟΞ eS ees a 
 
me 
 rete